SM 6505ci 7505ci ENG Rev40
Uploaded by
mauro_ferrero_SM 6505ci 7505ci ENG Rev40
Uploaded by
mauro_ferrero_
Service
Manual
&RORU Copy
FL
FL
5HY
Date: 2-1-201
2N2SM06
Service
Manual
&RORU Copy
FL
FL
5HY
Date: 2-1-201
2N2SM06
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE
OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your
local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE
DE TYPE INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES
INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les
fonctionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides
et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Notation of products in the manual
For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed at A4 and
black and white modes.
TASKalfa 6551ci: 65 ppm model
TASKalfa 7551ci: 75 ppm model
Revision history
Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks
1 September 17, Contents,1-1-2,1-1-3,1-1-8,1-2-3,1-2-25,1-2-36, -
2013 1-2-481-2-73 to 1-2-75,1-2-104,1-3-10,1-3-17,
1-3-18,1-3-21,1-3-30,1-3-94,1-3-106,1-3-124,
1-3-130,1-3-168,1-3-195 to 1-3-197,1-3-207,
1-3-208,1-3-211,1-3-212,1-3-220,1-3-222,1-3-228,
1-3-230,1-3-233,1-4-25,1-4-128,1-4-129,1-4-134,
1-4-146,1-4-165,1-4-166,1-4-168,1-4-175,1-4-215,
1-4-217,1-4-220,1-4-223,1-4-225,1-4-228,1-4-230,
1-4-232,1-4-235,1-4-237,1-4-239,1-4-241,1-4-243,
1-4-246,1-4-247,1-4-249,1-4-251,1-4-253,1-5-5,
1-5-20,1-5-47,1-5-64,1-5-79,1-5-80,1-5-88,1-5-90,
1-5-93,1-5-128,1-6-2,2-1-5,2-1-6,2-1-23,2-2-4,2-2-6,
2-2-7,2-2-11,2-2-12,2-3-11 to 2-3-13,2-3-15, 2-3-17,
2-3-27,2-3-30,2-3-35,2-3-38,2-3-41 to 2-3-44,2-3-47,
2-3-56,2-3-67,2-3-68,2-3-106,2-3-108,2-3-114,
2-3-115,2-4-1 to 2-4-11,2-4-13,2-4-23,2-4-33,2-4-34,
2-4-36 to 2-4-38
2 September 27, 1-2-75,1-3-30,1-3-190,1-3-191,1-4-4,1-4-24,1-4-25, -
2013 1-4-206,1-4-207,1-5-20,2-1-33,2-1-34,2-2-16,
2-3-113,2-4-38
3 October 31, 2013 Contents,1-1-2,1-1-3,1-1-5,1-1-13,1-1-14,1-2-5, -
1-2-12,1-2-95,1-2-96,1-2-114 to 1-2-122,1-3-231,
1-4-104,1-4-192,1-4-197,1-5-60,1-5-79,2-4-1,
2-4-5 to 2-4-12,2-4-14,2-4-15,2-4-17,2-4-19,2-4-23
to 2-4-37
4 January 17, 2014 Contents,1-2-32,1-2-105,1-3-7,1-3-32,1-3-111, -
1-3-112,1-3-134,1-3-174 to 1-3-182,1-3-186 to
1-3-194,1-3-212 to 1-3-214,1-3-216,1-4-59,1-4-210
to 1-4-214,1-4-310,1-5-64
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
This page is intentionally left blank.
2N3/2N2-3
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names ........................................................................................................................ 1-1-11
(1) Machine .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-11
(2) Option ............................................................................................................................. 1-1-13
(3) Operation panel .............................................................................................................. 1-1-15
1-1-3 Machine cross section ......................................................................................................... 1-1-16
(1) Machine .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-16
(2) Document processor ...................................................................................................... 1-1-17
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment......................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation..................................................................................................... 1-2-3
(1) Installation procedure ....................................................................................................... 1-2-3
(2) Setting initial copy modes............................................................................................... 1-2-35
1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option)........................................................................................ 1-2-36
1-2-4 Installing the key card MK-2 (option for Japan only)............................................................ 1-2-48
1-2-5 Installing the KMAS (option for Japan only) ........................................................................ 1-2-58
1-2-6 Installing the coin vender (option for japan only) ................................................................. 1-2-67
1-2-7 Installing the cassette heater (option).................................................................................. 1-2-73
1-2-8 Installing the gigabit ethernet board (option) ....................................................................... 1-2-82
1-2-9 Installing the Wire-less interface kit (option) ........................................................................ 1-2-84
1-2-10 Installing the IC card reader holder (option) ........................................................................ 1-2-86
1-2-11 Installing the keyboard holder (option) ................................................................................ 1-2-95
1-2-12 Installing the Printed Document Guard Kit (option) ........................................................... 1-2-105
1-2-13 Installing the handset (option for Japan only) .................................................................... 1-2-108
1-2-14 Optional Applications ......................................................................................................... 1-2-114
(1) Data Security Kit...........................................................................................................1-2-115
(2) Internet FAX Kit ............................................................................................................1-2-116
(3) Card Authentication Kit................................................................................................. 1-2-120
(4) ThinPrint Option............................................................................................................1-2-121
(5) Emulation Upgrade Kit.................................................................................................. 1-2-122
1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................ 1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ......................................................................................... 1-3-1
(2) Maintenance modes item list ............................................................................................ 1-3-2
(3) Contents of the maintenance mode items ...................................................................... 1-3-12
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection ........................................................................................................ 1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication .................................................................................................. 1-4-1
(2) Paper misfeed detection condition ................................................................................... 1-4-3
1-4-2 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 1-4-26
(1) First check items............................................................................................................. 1-4-26
(2) Items and corrective actions relating to the device that will cause paper jam ................ 1-4-30
(3) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 1
Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling
at the primary feeding (to regist roller)............................................................................ 1-4-39
2N3/2N2-4
(4) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 2
Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling
at the primary feeding (to regist roller)............................................................................ 1-4-41
(5) Paper jam during manual feeding
Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling
at the primary feeding (to regist roller)............................................................................ 1-4-43
(6) Paper jam at the duplex re-feeding part
Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling
at the primary feeding (to regist roller)............................................................................ 1-4-46
(7) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the Secondary transfer part ................... 1-4-47
(8) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the fuser and eject part .......................... 1-4-48
(9) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the duplex part ....................................... 1-4-50
(10) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the BR (bridge) part ............................... 1-4-52
(11) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF paper entry,
feedshift and subtray left eject part................................................................................. 1-4-54
(12) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF process part ............................... 1-4-56
(13) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF eject tray part ............................. 1-4-57
(14) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the CF conveying part............................ 1-4-58
1-4-3 Self-diagnostic function ....................................................................................................... 1-4-59
(1) Self-diagnostic function .................................................................................................. 1-4-59
(2) Self diagnostic codes...................................................................................................... 1-4-60
(3) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ....................................................................................... 1-4-210
1-4-4 Image formation problems ................................................................................................. 1-4-215
1-4-5 Poor image (due to DP and scanner reading) ................................................................... 1-4-217
(1) No image appears (entirely white)................................................................................ 1-4-218
(2) No image appears (entirely black)................................................................................ 1-4-220
(3) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................... 1-4-222
(4) The background is colored. .......................................................................................... 1-4-225
(5) White streaks are printed vertically............................................................................... 1-4-228
(6) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally. ................................................................ 1-4-230
(7) Streaks are printed horizontally. ................................................................................... 1-4-233
(8) One side of the print image is darker or brighter than the other. .................................. 1-4-235
(9) Black or color dots appear on the image. ..................................................................... 1-4-238
(10) Image is blurred............................................................................................................ 1-4-240
(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................ 1-4-242
(12) Part of image is missing. .............................................................................................. 1-4-244
(13) Image is out of focus. ................................................................................................... 1-4-247
(14) Image center does not align with the original center. ................................................... 1-4-249
(15) Shifted colors................................................................................................................ 1-4-250
(16) Moire............................................................................................................................. 1-4-253
(17) Skewed image .............................................................................................................. 1-4-254
(18) Abnormal image ........................................................................................................... 1-4-256
1-4-6 Poor image (Image rendering problems: Mono-color printer engine) ................................ 1-4-258
(1) No image appears (entirely white)................................................................................ 1-4-259
(2) No image appears (entirely black)................................................................................ 1-4-261
(3) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................... 1-4-262
(4) The background is colored. .......................................................................................... 1-4-264
(5) White streaks are printed vertically............................................................................... 1-4-266
(6) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally. ................................................................ 1-4-267
(7) Black, white or color streaks appear horizontally. ........................................................ 1-4-268
(8) Uneven density longitudinally. ...................................................................................... 1-4-269
(9) Uneven density horizontally.......................................................................................... 1-4-270
(10) Black or color dots appear on the image. ..................................................................... 1-4-270
(11) Offset occurs. ............................................................................................................... 1-4-271
2N3/2N2
(12) Part of Image is missing. .............................................................................................. 1-4-272
(13) Image is out of focus. ................................................................................................... 1-4-272
(14) Poor grayscale reproducibility. ..................................................................................... 1-4-273
(15) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects.
Colored spots in the printed objects. ............................................................................ 1-4-273
1-4-7 Poor image (Caused by transferring toner, paper conveying, or fusing:
Four-color printer engine) .................................................................................................. 1-4-274
(1) No image appears (entirely white)................................................................................ 1-4-276
(2) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................... 1-4-277
(3) The background is colored. .......................................................................................... 1-4-278
(4) White streaks are printed vertically............................................................................... 1-4-278
(5) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally. ................................................................ 1-4-279
(6) Black, white or color streaks appear horizontally. ........................................................ 1-4-280
(7) Uneven transferring toner............................................................................................. 1-4-281
(8) Black or color dots appear on the image. ..................................................................... 1-4-282
(9) Image is blurred (Shifted transferring). ........................................................................ 1-4-283
(10) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................ 1-4-284
(11) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ................ 1-4-284
(12) Paper is wrinkled. .........................................................................................................1-4-285
(13) Offset occurs. ............................................................................................................... 1-4-286
(14) Image is partly missing (Outlines objects and white dots)........................................... 1-4-287
(15) Fusing is loose.............................................................................................................. 1-4-288
(16) Image is out of focus. ................................................................................................... 1-4-289
(17) Image center does not align with the original center. ................................................... 1-4-289
(18) Dirty paper edges with toner......................................................................................... 1-4-290
(19) Inferior color reproducibility. ......................................................................................... 1-4-291
(20) Shifted colors................................................................................................................ 1-4-292
(21) Dirty reverse side of paper. .......................................................................................... 1-4-292
1-4-8 Electric problems ............................................................................................................... 1-4-293
1-4-9 Mechanical problems......................................................................................................... 1-4-305
1-4-10 Send error code ................................................................................................................. 1-4-307
(1) Scan to SMB error codes ............................................................................................. 1-4-307
(2) Scan to FTP error codes .............................................................................................. 1-4-308
(3) Scan to E-mail error codes ........................................................................................... 1-4-309
1-4-11 Error codes ........................................................................................................................ 1-4-311
(1) Error code..................................................................................................................... 1-4-311
(2) Table of general classification ...................................................................................... 1-4-312
(2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B ................................................... 1-4-314
(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit ............................................... 1-4-314
(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error............................................. 1-4-314
(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error .................................................. 1-4-314
(2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission......................................................... 1-4-315
(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception .............................................................. 1-4-316
(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission ...................................................... 1-4-317
(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception............................................................ 1-4-317
1-4-12 Printing System Troubleshooting....................................................................................... 1-4-318
(1) List of Error Code ......................................................................................................... 1-4-318
(2) Remarks on Relay PWB replacement .......................................................................... 1-4-321
1-5 Assembly and disassembly
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly........................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Precautions....................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
(2) Drum................................................................................................................................. 1-5-1
2N3/2N2
(3) Toner ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-1
(4) How to tell a genuine Kyocera toner container................................................................. 1-5-2
1-5-2 Outer covers .......................................................................................................................... 1-5-3
(1) Detaching and refitting the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover ............................ 1-5-3
(2) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying cover and PF paper conveying cover......... 1-5-4
(3) Detaching and refitting the right lower rear cover............................................................. 1-5-5
(4) Detaching and refitting the right lower front cover ............................................................ 1-5-6
(5) Detaching and refitting the right cover and DU cover assembly....................................... 1-5-7
(6) Detaching and refitting the right front cover...................................................................... 1-5-8
(7) Detaching and refitting the ISU right cover and right upper cover.................................... 1-5-8
(8) Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB cover and IH electric wire cover...................... 1-5-9
(9) Detaching and refitting the left upper cover.................................................................... 1-5-10
(10) Detaching and refitting the ISU front cover, ISU right cover and ISU rear cover............ 1-5-11
(11) Detaching and refitting the PF rear cover....................................................................... 1-5-12
(12) Detaching and refitting the DP front cover and DP front left cover................................. 1-5-12
(13) Detaching and refitting the DP front cover and DP front left cover................................. 1-5-13
1-5-3 Paper feed section............................................................................................................... 1-5-14
(1) Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit and PF primary paper feed unit ..... 1-5-14
(2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley, separation pulley....... 1-5-20
(3) Detaching and refitting the PF forwarding pulley (right),
PF paper feed pulley (right) and PF separation pulley (right)......................................... 1-5-23
(4) Detaching and refitting the PF forwarding pulley (left),
PF paper feed pulley (left) and PF separation pulley (left). ............................................ 1-5-25
(5) Detaching and refitting the MP tray paper feed unit ....................................................... 1-5-28
(6) Detaching and refitting the MP forwarding pulley,
MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley ............................................................ 1-5-31
1-5-4 Optical section ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-36
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ..................................................................... 1-5-36
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires ...................................................................... 1-5-39
(3) Detaching and refitting the ISU....................................................................................... 1-5-43
(4) Detaching and refitting the LSU...................................................................................... 1-5-48
(5) Color registration adjustment.......................................................................................... 1-5-54
(6) LSU squareness adjustment .......................................................................................... 1-5-57
1-5-5 Image formation section ...................................................................................................... 1-5-60
(1) Detaching and refitting the inner unit.............................................................................. 1-5-60
(2) Detaching and refitting the developer unit and drum unit ............................................... 1-5-63
(3) Detaching and refitting the charger roller unit................................................................. 1-5-66
1-5-6 Transfer section ................................................................................................................... 1-5-67
(1) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit ........................................................... 1-5-67
(2) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt unit................................................................... 1-5-69
(3) Detaching and refitting the cleaning pre brush ............................................................... 1-5-71
(4) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller ....................................................................... 1-5-73
1-5-7 Fuser section ....................................................................................................................... 1-5-75
(1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit.............................................................................. 1-5-75
(2) Detaching and refitting fuser IH unit ............................................................................... 1-5-77
1-5-8 Feedshift/ switchback sections ............................................................................................ 1-5-79
(1) Detaching and refitting job separator............................................................................. 1-5-79
(2) Detaching and refitting eject unit .................................................................................... 1-5-80
1-5-9 PWBs................................................................................................................................... 1-5-82
(1) Detaching and refitting the main PWB............................................................................ 1-5-82
(2) Remarks on main PWB replacement ............................................................................. 1-5-88
(3) Detaching and refitting the engine PWB......................................................................... 1-5-91
(4) Remarks on engine PWB replacement .......................................................................... 1-5-93
(5) Error symptom at an erroneous insertion of the engine PWB FFC ................................ 1-5-94
2N3/2N2-1
(6) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB.............................................................. 1-5-95
(7) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 1 ............................................................. 1-5-97
(8) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 2 ............................................................. 1-5-98
(9) Detaching and refitting the operation PWB .................................................................... 1-5-99
(10) Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB..................................................................... 1-5-103
(11) Detaching and refitting the PF main PWB and PF power source PWB........................ 1-5-108
1-5-10 Drive section ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-111
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum drive unit K and drum drive unit M, C, Y................... 1-5-111
(2) Detaching and refitting the main drive unit ................................................................... 1-5-116
(3) Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit, transfer drive unit and feed drive unit....... 1-5-117
(4) Detaching and refitting the PF drive unit ...................................................................... 1-5-124
(5) Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2................................................................ 1-5-126
(6) Detaching and refitting the PF lift motor 1 and 2 .......................................................... 1-5-127
1-5-11 DP...................................................................................................................................... 1-5-128
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley ................. 1-5-128
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley ......................................................... 1-5-132
(3) Detaching and refitting the CIS..................................................................................... 1-5-133
(4) Adjusting the angle of leading edge ............................................................................. 1-5-136
(5) Adjusting the angle of trailing edge .............................................................................. 1-5-138
(6) Adjusting the hinge ....................................................................................................... 1-5-141
1-5-12 Others ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-142
(1) Detaching the eject filters ............................................................................................. 1-5-142
(2) Detaching and refitting the left filter .............................................................................. 1-5-143
(3) Detaching and refitting the fan filter and PU dust filters ............................................... 1-5-144
(4) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt filters .............................................................. 1-5-145
(5) Detaching and refitting the developer filter ................................................................... 1-5-146
(6) Detaching and refitting the toner disposal box ............................................................. 1-5-147
(7) Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit ..................................................................... 1-5-149
(8) Direction of installing the principal fan motors .............................................................. 1-5-151
(9) Skewed paper feeding check/adjustment..................................................................... 1-5-153
1-6 Upgrading the firmware
1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware ......................................................................................................... 1-6-1
2-1 Mechanical Construction
2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section ............................................................................................... 2-1-1
(1) Cassette paper feed section............................................................................................. 2-1-1
(2) Large capacity feeder ....................................................................................................... 2-1-3
(3) MP tray paper feed section............................................................................................... 2-1-7
(4) Paper conveying section .................................................................................................. 2-1-9
2-1-2 Drum section ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-11
2-1-3 Developer section ................................................................................................................ 2-1-13
2-1-4 Optical section ..................................................................................................................... 2-1-15
(1) Image scanner section ................................................................................................... 2-1-15
(2) Laser scanner section .................................................................................................... 2-1-17
2-1-5 Transfer/Separation section ................................................................................................ 2-1-19
(1) Intermediate transfer unit section ................................................................................... 2-1-19
(2) Secondary transfer roller section.................................................................................... 2-1-21
2-1-6 Fuser section ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-23
2-1-7 Feedshift/switchback sections ............................................................................................. 2-1-25
2-1-8 Bridge section ...................................................................................................................... 2-1-27
2-1-9 Job separator section .......................................................................................................... 2-1-29
2-1-10 Duplex conveying section .................................................................................................... 2-1-31
2N3/2N2-4
2-1-11 Document processor ........................................................................................................... 2-1-33
(1) Original feed section....................................................................................................... 2-1-33
(2) Original conveying section.............................................................................................. 2-1-35
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(1) PWBs................................................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(2) Switches and sensors....................................................................................................... 2-2-6
(3) Motors............................................................................................................................... 2-2-9
(4) Fan motors ..................................................................................................................... 2-2-11
(5) Others............................................................................................................................. 2-2-13
(6) PWBs (document processor).......................................................................................... 2-2-15
(7) Switches and sensors (document processor)................................................................. 2-2-16
(8) Motors (document processor)......................................................................................... 2-2-17
2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 Main PWB.............................................................................................................................. 2-3-1
2-3-2 Engine PWB ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-10
2-3-3 Power source PWB ............................................................................................................. 2-3-37
2-3-4 IH PWB ................................................................................................................................ 2-3-41
(1) 120V model .................................................................................................................... 2-3-41
(2) 220-240V model ............................................................................................................. 2-3-43
2-3-5 ISC PWB ............................................................................................................................. 2-3-45
2-3-6 Operation PWB 1................................................................................................................. 2-3-50
2-3-7 Front PWB ........................................................................................................................... 2-3-56
2-3-8 Feed PWB 1 ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-67
2-3-9 Feed PWB 2 ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-77
2-3-10 Relay PWB .......................................................................................................................... 2-3-83
2-3-11 Motor control PWB .............................................................................................................. 2-3-89
2-3-12 LSU relay PWB.................................................................................................................... 2-3-94
2-3-13 PF main PWB .................................................................................................................... 2-3-104
2-3-14 DP main PWB.................................................................................................................... 2-3-109
2-3-15 BR PWB ............................................................................................................................ 2-3-114
2-4 Appendixes
2-4-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................ 2-4-1
(1) List of maintenance parts ................................................................................................. 2-4-1
(2) Maintenance kits............................................................................................................... 2-4-3
(3) Periodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................... 2-4-5
(4) Image adjustment after replacing the maintenance kit ................................................... 2-4-11
(5) Inner Cleaning ................................................................................................................ 2-4-11
(6) Repetitive defects gauge ................................................................................................ 2-4-16
(7) Firmware environment commands ................................................................................. 2-4-17
(8) Timing chart.................................................................................................................... 2-4-23
(9) Chart of image adjustment procedures .......................................................................... 2-4-33
(10) Wiring diagram ............................................................................................................... 2-4-35
INSTALLATION GUIDE
SIDE DECK
SIDE MULTI TRAY
4000-SHEETS FINISHER
CENTER-FOLDING UNIT
2N3/2N2
MAILBOX
PUNCH UNIT
FAX SYSTEM
BANNER GUIDE
PRINTING SYSTEM
2N3/2N2
This page is intentionally left blank.
2N3/2N2
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications
Common functions
Specifications
Item
65 ppm 75 ppm
Type Console
Printing method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, tandem drum system
Cassette 60 to 256 g/m2
Paper weight
MP tray 60 to 300 g/m2
Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour),
Cassette 1, 2 Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom
(Duplex: Same as simplex)
Paper type Cassette 3, 4 Same as cassette 1,2
Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
MP tray Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, Coated, Envelope, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Ledger, Legal, Letter, LetterR,
StatementR, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 216 × 340mm,
Cassette 1, 2 Size Entry (Metric: X; 182 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Y; 140 to 304 mm (in 1 mm increments), Inch: X; 7.17 to 18.00"
(in 0.01" increments), Y; 5.51 to 12.00" (in 0.01" increments))
Cassette 3, 4 A4, B5, Letter
Paper size
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, ISO B5, B5R, A5R, B6R, A6R, Return postcard,
Postcards, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Envelope #10
(Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
MP tray
(Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Youkei 2, Youkei 4, Ledger,
Legal, Letter, LetterR, Executive, StatementR, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Folio,
216 × 340mm, 8K, 16K, 16KR, Custom (98 ×148 mm to 304.8 × 1,220 mm)
Warm-up Power on 60 s or less
time Low Power 30 s or less
(22 °C/71.6
°F, 60% RH) Sleep 60 s or less
550 sheets (64 g/m2)
Cassette 1, 2
500 sheets (80 g/m2)
1750 sheets (64 g/m2)
Cassette 3, 4
Paper 1500 sheets (80 g/m2)
capacity
A4/Letter or less
165 sheets (64 g/m2) 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
MP tray
More than A4/Letter
55 sheets (64 g/m2) 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
1-1-1
2N3/2N2-3
Specifications
Item
65 ppm 75 ppm
Lower left 275 sheets (64 g/m2)
tray 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Output tray Upper left 110 sheets (64 g/m2)
capacity tray 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
70 sheets (64 g/m2)
Right tray
70 sheets (80 g/m2)
Light source LED
Scanning system Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor
Photoconductor a-Si (drum diameter 40 mm)
Image write system Semiconductor laser
Charging system Charger roller
Touch down developing system
Developing system Developer: 2-component
Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container and toner hopper
Primary: Transfer belt
Transfer system
Secondary: Transfer roller
Separation system Small diameter separation, Separation electrode
Drum: Counter blade, Cleaning roller
Cleaning system
Transfer belt: Fur brush
Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Belt fusing
Fusing system Heat source: IH (belt), Halogen heater (press roller)
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostat
CPU Freescale QorIQ P1022 (Dual Core) 1067MHz
Memory 4 GB
Hard Disk 320 GB or more (standard)
USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
Standard Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
USBPort: 4 (Hi-Speed USB)
Interface Fax: 2
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Option A maximum of two interface options can be installed.
Only one network interface can be installed.
When a network interface is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
Temperature 10 to 32.5 °C/50 to 90.5 °F
Operating Humidity 15 to 80% RH
environment Altitude 2,500 m/12,140 ft or less
Brightness 1,500 lux or less
Dimensions Machine 1039 × 801 × 1347 mm
(W × D × H) only 40 57/64 × 31 17/32 × 53 1/64”
1-1-2
2N3/2N2-3
Specifications
Item
65 ppm 75 ppm
1039 × 801 mm (using MP tray)
Space required (W × D)
40 57/64 × 31 17/32” (using MP tray)
Weight 190 kg / 418.9 lb (with toner container)
120 V Specification Model:
120 V AC 60 Hz 8.0 A + 12.0 A (IH)
Power source
230 V Specification Model:
220 to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz 10.0 A
Side deck, Side multi tray, Side paper feeder, Side large capacity feeder,
4000-sheet finisher, Center-folding unit, Mailbox, Punch unit, Key counter,
Fax kit, Expansion memory for Fax, Internet fax kit, Data security kit,
Options
Printed document guard kit, Emulation option kit, Gigabit ethernet board,
Printing system, Wire-less interface kit, IC card reader holder, Keyboard
holder, Copy tray and Banner Tray
1-1-3
2N3/2N2
Copy functions
Specifications
Item
65 ppm 75 ppm
A4 : 65 ppm A4 : 75 ppm
Letter : 65 ppm Letter : 75 ppm
A4R : 45 ppm A4R : 52 ppm
LetterR : 45 ppm LetterR : 52 ppm
A3 : 32 ppm A3 : 37 ppm
B/W Ledger : 32 ppm Ledger : 37 ppm
B4 : 39 ppm B4 : 45 ppm
Legal : 39 ppm Legal : 45 ppm
B5 : 65 ppm B5 : 75 ppm
B5R : 45 ppm B5R : 52 ppm
Copying A5R : 32 ppm A5R : 37 ppm
speed A4 : 65 ppm A4 : 70 ppm
Letter : 65 ppm Letter : 70 ppm
A4R : 45 ppm A4R : 49 ppm
LetterR : 45 ppm LetterR : 49 ppm
A3 : 32 ppm A3 : 35 ppm
Color Ledger : 32 ppm Ledger : 35 ppm
B4 : 39 ppm B4 : 42 ppm
Legal : 39 ppm Legal : 42 ppm
B5 : 65 ppm B5 : 70 ppm
B5 : 45 ppm B5R : 49 ppm
B5 : 32 ppm A5R : 35 ppm
First copy B/W 5.4 s or less 4.8 s or less
time
6.2 s or less 5.9 s or less
(A4, feed from Color
cassette)
Manual mode : 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Zoom level
Auto mode : Preset zoom
Continuous copying 1 to 9999 sheets
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi
Originals Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size:Leger/ A3)
Original feed system Fixed
1-1-4
2N3/2N2-3
Printer functions
Specifications
Item
65 ppm 75 ppm
A4 : 65 ppm A4 : 75 ppm
Letter : 65 ppm Letter : 75 ppm
B/W
A3 : 32 ppm A3 : 37 ppm
Ledger : 32 ppm Ledger : 37 ppm
Printing speed
A4 : 65 ppm A4 : 70 ppm
Letter : 65 ppm Letter : 70 ppm
Color
A3 : 32 ppm A3 : 35 ppm
Ledger : 32 ppm Ledger : 35 ppm
First print time* B/W 5.3 s or less 4.9 s or less
(A4, feed from
Color 6.3 s or less 6.1 s or less
cassette)
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Operating system Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2012, Macintosh OS
10.x
USB interface connector: 1 (USB Hi-speed)
Network interface: 1 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
Interface
Option interface (option): 1
* : Gigabit ethernet board, Wireless interface board
Page description language PRESCRIBE
Emulation PCL6 (PCL5c, PCL-XL), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), XPS
* : Excluding time for system stabilization immediately after turning on the main power.
Scanner functions
Item Specifications
600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 ×100 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi
Resolution
(Resolution in FAX mode included)
File format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, PDF (high compression, encrypted, PDF/A),
Scanning speed B/W : 120 images/min
(A4 landscape, Simplex Color: 120 images/min
300 dpi,
Image quality: B/W : 200 images/min
Text/Photo orig- Duplex Color: 200 images/min
inal)*1
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Network protocol TCP/IP
Transmission system SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN scan*2, WIA scan*3, WSD
*1 When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Available operating system: Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Windows Server 2012
1-1-5
2N3/2N2
*3 Available operating system: Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012
Document processor
Item Specifications
Original feed method Automatic feed
Supported original types Sheet originals
Maximum: A3/ Ledger
Original sizes Minimum: A5R/ StatementR
Sizes smaller than B6-R are 50 to 105 g/m2 (one-side/duplex)
Simplex: 35 to 220 g/m2
Original weights
Duplex: 50 to 220 g/m2
270 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) or less
Loading capacity When originals have different width, Mixed original sizes (auto selection) 30
sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3) (Option)
Item Specifications
Feed & reverse roller method
Paper Supply Method (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 3 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 3 cas-
settes)
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter,
Paper Size
Letter-R, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm
Paper 60 to 256 g/m2
Supported weight
Paper Media Plain, Recycled, Thick, Coated*
types
Dimensions 23 35/64 × 28 11/32 × 21 7/64”
(W × D × H) 598 × 720 × 536 mm
Weight Approx. 114.6 lbs. / Approx. 52 kg
*: Only Cassette 5 can be used.
1-1-6
2N3/2N2
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) (Option)
Item Specifications
Feed & reverse roller method (No. Sheets: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) × 1 cas-
Paper Supply Method sette, 1,500 sheets (80 g/m2) × 2 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550 sheets (64 g/
m2) × 1 cassette, 1,750 sheets (64 g/m2) × 2 cassettes)
Cassette A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter,
5 Letter-R, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm
Paper Size
Cassette A4, B5, Letter
6, 7
Paper 60 to 256 g/m2
Supported weight
Paper Media Plain, Recycled, Thick, Coated*
types
Dimensions 23 35/64 × 28 11/32 × 21 7/64”
(W × D × H) 598 × 720 × 536 mm
Weight Approx. 112.4 lbs / Approx. 51 kg
*: Only the cassette 5 is available.
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option)
Item Specifications
Feed & reverse roller method
Paper Supply Method
(No. Sheets: 3,000, 80 g/m2/No. Sheets: 3,500 64 g/m2)
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter
Paper 60 to 300 g/m2
Supported weight
Paper Media Plain, Recycled, Thick
types
Dimensions 12 41/64 × 24 13/32 × 19 27/32”
(W × D × H) 321 × 620 × 504 mm
Weight Approx. 55.1 lbs. / Approx. 25 kg
1-1-7
2N3/2N2-1
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Item Specifications
Type Floor model
Number of trays Three tray
Paper weight 45 to 300 g/m2
A3, B4, B5R,Ledger, Legal, 12 × 18", 8K, 13 × 19", A3 Wide (310
× 433mm), Ledger Wide (310 × 440mm), Foolscape, Oficio II, 216
Main Try × 340 mm, Custom (Cassette: 140 × 182 mm to 305 × 458 mm):
(Try A) 1500 sheets
When not stapling A4, A4R, B5, Letter, LetterR,16K,16KR,Folio, ExecutiveR, Index
Tab Dividers: 4000 sheets *
A5R, B6R,Statement R: 500 sheets
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5(ISO), B5R, A5R, A6R, Folio, Ledger,
Legal, 12×18", Letter, 13×19", LetterR, StatementR, 8K, 16K,
16KR, ExecutiveR, Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, Cardstock, Oufuku
Tray capacity Sub Try left
hagaki, A3 Wide (310 × 433mm), Ledger Wide (310 × 440mm),
(Try B)
Foolscape, Envelope C4, Index Tab Dividers, Custom (Cassette:
140 × 182 mm to 305 × 458 mm, MP tray: 98 × 148 mm to 297 ×
432 mm):200 sheets
A4, B5, B5 (ISO), B5R, B6, A5, A5R, A6, A6R, Letter, Statement
R, 16K,Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Sub Try right Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
(Try C) Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Youkei 2,
Youkei 4, Index Tab Dividers:100 sheets
Bnner: (98 × 470.1 mm to 297 × 1220 mm)
A3, B4, B5R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 30 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
12 × 18", 216 × 340 mm, Folio, 30 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
8K,16KR 2 cover sheet only
(106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
Maximum Number A4, A4R, B5, Letter, Letter R, 16K 70 sheets (52 to 74 g/m2)
Stapling 65 sheets (75 to 90 g/m2)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only
(106 g/m2 to 256 g/m2)
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead,
Media types
Color (Colour), Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom
Power source Electrically connected to the machine
607.2 ×668.5 ×1061.3 mm
Dimensions (W × D × H)
23 29/32 × 26 5/16 × 41 25/32”
Weight Approx. 40 kg / Approx. 88.2 lb or less
* : When center-folding unit installed,3000 sheets.
1-1-8
2N3/2N2
Punch unit (option)
Item Specifications
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Folio, Legal, Letter, Letter R, 12
Paper size When not stapling
× 18", Statement R, 12 × 18", 8K, 16K,16K-R
Paper weight 45 to 300 g/m2
Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Rough, Letter-
Media types
head, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Thick, Coated, High Quality,
(1000, /4000-sheets finisher)
Custom
Mail box (option)
Item Specifications
Number of trays 7 trays
A3, B4, Ledger, Legal: 50 sheets
A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Letter, Letter R, 216 × 340 mm, Execu-
Paper size (80 g/m2)
tive, ExecutiveR, Folio, Foolscap, 8K,16K, 16K-R, Statement R,
Oficio II: 100 sheets
510 x 400 x 470 mm
Dimensions (W × D × H)
20 1/16” x 15 3/4” x 18 1/2”
Weight Approx. 10 kg or less/22 lbs
Center-folding unit (option)
Item Specifications
Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4R, Ledger, Legal, Letter R, Oficio II, 8K
Sizes Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4R, Ledger, Legal, Letter R, Oficio II, 8K
Tri-Fold A4R, Letter R
5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
Bi-Fold 3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
1 sheet (121 to 256 g/m2)
Number of 16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
sheets Saddle Stitch 13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
1 cover sheet only (106 to 256 g/m2 )
5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
Tri-Fold
3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
Bi-Fold 6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.
Maximum
number for 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
storage Saddle Stitch 6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
(80 g/m2) 11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.
1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more
Tri-Fold
2 to 5 sheets per set: 5 sets or more.
1-1-9
2N3/2N2
Item Specifications
Plain, Recycled, Thick, Coated, Bond, Prepunched, Preprinted,
Bi-Fold
Color (Colour), High Quality, Letterhead, Custom
Plain, Recycled, Thick, Coated, Bond, Prepunched, Preprinted,
Media types Saddle Stitch
Color (Colour), High Quality, Letterhead, Custom
Plain, Recycled, Coated, Bond, Prepunched, Preprinted, Color
Tri-Fold
(Colour), High Quality, Letterhead, Custom
Banner Tray (Option)
Item Specifications
Max. number of sheets 10 sheets (Multi Purpose tray)
Paper length 210 (8.26") to 304.8 (12") mm
Paper weight Max. 1220 (48 1/64") mm
Paper 136 to 163 g/m2
weight
Paper Type
Media Heavy 2
types
Dimensions 9 27/32 × 14 23/32 × 5 63/64”
(W × D × H) 250 × 374 × 152 mm
Weight Approx. 0.78 lbs. / Approx. 0.352 kg
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1-10
2N3/2N2
1-1-2 Parts names
(1) Machine
21
1
3 2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
18 19 20 16
17
15 13 14 11
Figure 1-1-1
1. Document processor 12. Front upper cover
2. Operation panel 13. Waste toner box
3. Original size indicator plate 14. Release button
4. Platen (Contact glass) 15. Handles
5. Slit glass 16. Left lower tray
6. Clip holder 17. Left upper tray
7. Toner container (yellow) 18. Network interface connector
8. Toner container (cyan) 19. USB port
9. Toner container (magenta) 20. USB interface connector
10. Toner container (black) 21. Option interface
11. Toner container release lever
1-1-11
2N3/2N2
26 27 28 30 31
32
33
34
35
36
28 29 37
38
22
25 24 23 43 40 42 41 39 44
Figure 1-1-2
22. Cassette 1 34. Duplex cover
23. Cassette 2 35. Duplex cover lever
24. Cassette 3 36. MP paper width guides
25. Cassette 4 37. MP support Tray
26. Paper length guide 38. MP (Multi-Purpose) tray
27. Guide lock lever 39. Paper conveying cover
28. Paper width guides 40. Paper conveying cover lever
29. Paper width adjusting tab 41. PF paper conveying cover
30. USB port 42. PF paper conveying cover lever
31. Right tray 43. Handle
32. Paper conveying unit 44. Main power switch
33. Paper conveying unit lever
1-1-12
2N3/2N2-3
(2) Option
10
9 6
2
3-a
3-b
5
7
4-b 4-a
Figure 1-1-3
1. Machine 5. Side deck
2. Side multi tray Cassette 5
Cassette 5 6. 4000-sheet finisher
3. Side paper feeder 7. Center-folding unit
a: Cassette 6 8. Mailbox
b: Cassette 7 9. Punch unit
4. Side large capacity feeder 10. Banner Tray
a: Cassette 6
b: Cassette 7
1-1-13
2N3/2N2-3
11 14
13
12
19
16
18
15 17
Figure 1-1-4
11. Printing system 18. Wire-less interface kit Software option
12. Printed document guard kit 19. Key counter 1. Data Security Kit
13. Keyboard holder 2. Internet FAX Kit
14. IC card reader holder 3. Card Authentication Kit
15. Expansion memory for Fax 4. ThinPrint Option
16. Fax kit 5. Emulation Upgrade Kit
17. Gigabit ethernet board
1-1-14
2N3/2N2
(3) Operation panel
25 26 27
1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Figure 1-1-5
1. Status/Job cancel key 11. Main power indicator 21. Stop key
2. System menu key 12. Help key 22. Interrupt key
3. Counter key 13. Accessibility display key 23. Authentication/Logout key
4. Copy key 14. Send key 24. Energy saver key
5. Home key 15. FAX key 25. Processing indicator
6. Auto color key 16. Full color key 26. Memory indicator
7. Quick no. search key 17. Black and White key 27. Attention indicator
8. Clear key 18. Numeric keys
9. Reset key 19. Enter key
10. Power key 20. Start key
1-1-15
2N3/2N2
1-1-3 Machine cross section
(1) Machine
21 19 5
22
15 18
14 10 13 9 12 8 11 7 20
16
17
Paper path
Figure 1-1-6
1. Paper feed section 8. Drum unit M 17. Secondary transfer/Separation
(cassette 1, 2) 9. Drum unit C sections
2. Paper feed section 10. Drum unit Y 18. Fuser section
(cassette 3, 4) 11. Developer unit K 19. Feed shift/Switchback sections
3. MP tray paper feed section 12. Developer unit M 20. Duplex section
4. Paper conveying section 13. Developer unit C 21. Bridge section
5. Optical section 14. Developer unit Y 22. Job separator section
6. Laser scanner unit 15. Toner container section
7. Drum unit K 16. Primary transfer section
1-1-16
2N3/2N2
(2) Document processor
2 1
3
Original path
Figure 1-1-7
1. Original feed section
2. Original conveying section
3. Original eject section
1-1-17
2N3/2N2
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-1-18
2N3/2N2
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment
1. Temperature: 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
(But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).)
2. Humidity: 15 to 80% RH
(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
*: Use coated paper at a temperature of 80.6 °F (27°C) or less and a humidity of 60% or less.
*: Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine at
a temperature:around 60.8 to 80.6 °F or less (16 to 27 °C), humidity: around 36 to 65%. In addition,
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
The machine automatically detects and displays the following message when the environmental temper-
ature is too high or too low.
Message: “Warning for high temperature. Adjust the room temperature.” or “Warning for low tempera-
ture. Adjust the room temperature.”
To use the machine under optimum conditions, adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room if
the message is displayed.
3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 8.0 A + 12.0 A 220 - 240 V AC, 10.0 A
4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz ± 2%/60 Hz ± 2%
5. Installation location
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sun-
light or other strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity; an
abrupt change in the environmental temperature; and cool or hot, direct air.
Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such
as mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic sol-
vents.
Select a well-ventilated location.
*: If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material
may be damaged.
*: During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If,
however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an
extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant.
To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly venti-
lated.
1-2-1
2N3/2N2
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
Machine front : 100 cm/39 3/8"
Machine rear : 10 cm/ 3 15/16"
Machine right : 35 cm/13 3/4"
Machine left : 30 cm/11 13/16"
Machine top : 40 cm/15 3/4"
10cm/3 15/16"
Top 40cm/15 3/4"
30cm/11 13/16" 35cm/13 3/4"
100cm/39 3/8"
Figure 1-2-1
1-2-2
2N3/2N2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation
(1) Installation procedure
Start
Unpacking Replacing operation panel sheet
Taking out the machine Installing other optional devices
Removing the tapes and spacers Installing the stoppers
Installing the operation arm Installing the cassette heater (option)
Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame Connect the power cord
Release of lift plate stopper (cassette 1 and 2) Setup for adjusting images
Loading paper (cassette 1 and 2) Setting the maintenance item U952
Release of lift plate stopper (cassette 3 and 4) Adjusting the image
Loading paper (cassette 3 and 4) Setting the delivery date
(maintenance item U278)
Installing the toner container
Output an own-status report
(maintenance item U000)
Unlocking the developer waste exit
Clearing the all copy counts and
Installing the toner disposal box machine life counts (one time only)
Exit maintenance mode
Completion of the machine installation.
1-2-3
2N3/2N2
Moving the machine
When moving the machine, pull out the carrying handle, and move with the carrying handle and three hand-
holds.
Handhold
Handhold
Handhold Carrying handle
(Handhold
at the right front)
Figure 1-2-2
*: Use the handhold at the right front only <Allowable angle of the right The handhold at the right front side
for lifting the machine. front handhold positions> must be lifted only upward at an
angle of 30 degrees back and forth.
Use the handhold on the right side only
for carrying the machine by lifting it up. Do not use the handhold to incline
(Do not incline the machine for more than or move the machine sideways.
30 degrees.)
Allowable range
(±30degree front and backwards)
*: Do not use the handhold at the right front
to pull the machine around.
Do not use the right-side handhold to
move the machine horizontally on the
floor. (To prevent deformation due to hori-
zontal stress)
Position of the handhold seen
from the right side of the machine
Figure 1-2-3
1-2-4
2N3/2N2-3
Unpacking
23 24 27 28 18,19,20
30 21,22 2
25
29 29
1
26 29 29
26
16
17 29 29
12 29 29
15
8 9
6
11
10
14 10
5
7
13
11
3
Figure 1-2-4
1. Machine 12. Machine cover 23. Toner disposal box case
2. Outer case 13. Front pad 24. Air-padded bag
3. Inner case 14. Bottom spacer 25. Toner disposal box
4. Skid 15. Operation arm 26. Plastic bag
5. Slopes 16. Top spacer 27. M3 x 8 S tight screws
6. Bottom left pad 17. Document tray 28. M3 x 8 P tight screw
7. Bottom right pad 18. Plastic bag 29. Hinge joints
8. Top left pad 19. Paper size plates 30. M3 x 8 screws
9. Top right pad 20. Paper media plates (120V model only)
10. Left stays 21. Operation panel sheets
11. Right stays 22. Operation guide etc.
Place the machine on a level surface.
1-2-5
2N3/2N2
Operation arm
19
17 17
13 14
6
16
16
11 4 18
12 5
10
15
9
8
7 20
21
7
Figure 1-2-5
1. Arm outer case 8. Operation mount cover A 15. Stopper case
2. Arm bottom spacer 9. Operation mount cover B 16. Plastic bags
3. Arm main pad 10. Arm hinge cover A 17. Stoppers
4. Plastic sheet 11. Arm hinge cover B 18. Plastic bag
5. Operation arm assembly 12. Plastic bag 19. M4 x 20 screws (black)
6. Arm top spacer 13. M4 x 8 screws 20. Power cord
7. Plastic bags 14. M4 x 8 screws (black) 21. Power cord (120 V only)
1-2-6
2N3/2N2
Taking out the machine
*: When taking out the machine, a space for
machine rear requires approximately 2 m.
1. Remove the hinge joints, and then
remove the outer case, the inner case,
the top left/right pads, the left/right
stays, the front pad, the upper spacer,
the operation arm and the bottom
spacer.
2. Cut four tapes of the skid each corner.
3. Cut each tape which locks the slopes
and the bottom left/right pads.
Tape
Tape
Figure 1-2-6
4. Rotate slopes as shown in the figure
and make them for machine sliding. Slope
Slope
Figure 1-2-7
1-2-7
2N3/2N2
5. Check that there is no level difference in
slopes (circle section of figure 1-2-7).
6. Open the machine cover.
7. Lift the machine each left and right one
side, and then remove the bottom left
and right pads and machine cover.
Bottom right pad
Slope
Bottom left pad
Slope
Figure 1-2-8
8. Move the machine alongside slopes to
slide to the floor.
Slope
Slope
Figure 1-2-9
1-2-8
2N3/2N2
Removing the tapes and spacers
1. Remove five tapes and then remove the Tape
sheet. Top sheet
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Figure 1-2-10
2. Remove five tapes. Tape
Tape Tape
Tape
Tape
Figure 1-2-11
1-2-9
2N3/2N2
Original width guide
3. Open the original width guides and then
remove the spacer. Original width guide
Spacer
Figure 1-2-12
4. Remove fourteen tapes, silica gel and
Tape
sheet.
Tape Silica gel
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Sheet
Tape Tape
Tape
Figure 1-2-13
1-2-10
2N3/2N2
5. Remove six tapes and then remove
three protect sheets.
Protect sheet
Tapes
Tapes
Protect sheet
Figure 1-2-14
6. Open the DP. Tape
7. Remove four tapes and then remove
the sheet. Tape
8. Remove the tape and then remove A2 Sheet
papers.
9. Close the DP.
Tape
Tape
A2 paper Tape
Figure 1-2-15
1-2-11
2N3/2N2-3
10. Open the front upper cover.
Spacer
11. Remove four tapes and then remove
two spacers
12. Close the front upper cover. Spacer
Tape
Tape
Tapes
Front upper
cover
Figure 1-2-16
120V model only
13. Pull cassette 1 out.
14. Remove the tape and then remove the
plate lock leaflet. Tape
15. Remove the tape and then remove the Plate lock leaflet
plate lock screws. Tape
A(M
3x8
) 1
NOT English
M3x
guid 8 ICE
after scre
* Use thee plate ws Fix
four cust setti (A) are ing
ng
REM Fran M3x ome error inclu the
Les
pour vis ARQ
çais 8 screr appr s. ded pap
form
M3x8 évite M3x8UE ws oves Use in a er
*Utili at (A) r Fix (A) the the plas gui 1
sez de pourles erreu(A) per papeM3x tic de
quatpapie fixer
sont atio each r 8 screbag. pla
AVIS Españo re r. les rs de
inclu n des drawsize. ws Use tes
Los vis ses (A) the
para torniO l M3x8 plaq place dans pla er. to fix scre in
los
ente torniimpe llos ues ment
que cas
*Use apru llos dir M3x8 Fija (A) de un the ws (A) set
pour guid de la sach s de guid to tes
4 torni ebe M3x8que ció age plaquet en
se (A) n de
chaq
gui e plateprev
llos el tama(A) prodse inclu ue (1) e plast
M3x8 para uzca tiroir. une de guidaique. dag s (1)ent
ño yen las fois e du Proc
(A) del fijar n error en pla que ge. Utilis 1. Adjuedur
por pape las una Utilis ez
cada l. placaes de bolsa cas le clien
ez les vis
pap 2. Fix lock st thee 302N
band s de coloc de de t a les vis ier Fix the them posi 4568 2013
eja. las ación plást las appr (A) dan the guid . tions 10-0 .2
guía
s (1)de la
ico.U guí ouvé Proc s les scre e 2
se as le 1. Ajusédur ws plate of guid
despplaca los de papie tez e
ma into s (1) e plate
ués de torni pap 2. Fixez gas the and
de la guíallos Fixez r, les ins hole the s (1)
que (A) el les puis posit s indic base
el cli-.Use
en la vis plaqu verro ions acco
los dans es uillez des ated by rding
Proc
1. Ajusedim
dep les de guida-les. plaqu by using to the
ósi trous es
the the
2. Fijey bloqu te iento tos ge de arrow four pape
las indiq (1) guida
tornil las éelas posic ués et la s in M3X r size
lo en placa . par base ge the 8 and
iones (1) figur scre
los s de les à en
orific las de flèch l'aide fonct e abovws
las
es des
(A).
ios guía placa ion e.
que s sur quat du
se (1) y s de la figur re form
indic la las vis
e ci-de at
an base guía M3X de
con con s (1) ssus 8 (A).
las los
flech 4 torni segú .
as n el
de llos tama
la imagM3x8 ño
del
en (A). pape
de Fije
arrib el l
a.
Plate lock
screws
Figure 1-2-17
Installing the operation arm
1. Open the DP, and remove the operation Operation mount
cover C
mount cover C.
Figure 1-2-18
1-2-12
2N3/2N2
2. Insert two hooks and the install the
operation arm to the machine.
Hooks
*: Install the unit observing the caution not
to damage the wires.
Operation arm
Figure 1-2-19
3. Align the two positioning keys with each Positioning Upper side
other, fix the operation arm using four
M4x8 screws a top and two M4x8
screws from the right side. Screw
Screw
Positioning Screws
Operation arm
Right side
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-2-20
1-2-13
2N3/2N2
4. Connect four connectors of the opera- Connector
tion arm to connectors of the machine.
5. Pass the wire through the wire saddle
and then fasten the wire. Connector
Connector
Connector
Wire saddle
Figure 1-2-21
6. Fit the operation mount cover A and B
using two M4 x 8 screws (black).
Operation mount
cover B
Operation mount
cover A
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-2-22
1-2-14
2N3/2N2
7. Fit the arm hinge cover A and B using
the M4 x 8 screws (black).
Arm hinge
cover B
Arm hinge
cover A
Screw
Figure 1-2-23
8. Fit the operation mount cover C using
the M4 x 8 screws (black).
Screw
Operation mount
cover C
Figure 1-2-24
1-2-15
2N3/2N2
Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame
1. Open the DP.
2. Remove the tape and then remove the
ISU lock leaflet.
3. Remove the scanner lock cover.
4. Mount the scanner lock cover in the
reverse manner to restore in the original
location.
5. Close the DP.
*: Unless unlocking is performed, C3100 is
caused.
Scanner lock cover
[Locked] [Released]
DP
Tape
ISU lock leaflet
Figure 1-2-25
1-2-16
2N3/2N2
Release of lift plate stopper (cassette 1 and 2)
1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out.
2. Remove the lift plate stopper from each
cassette and attach it to the storage
location.
*: When moving the machine, attach the lift
plate in original position.
Lift plate
stopper
Cassette
Figure 1-2-26
Loading paper (cassette 1 and 2)
1. Squeeze the ends of the bottom of the Paper length guide
paper length guide and move the guide
to fit the length of the paper.
Figure 1-2-27
1-2-17
2N3/2N2
2. Press the guide lock lever to release
the lock.
3. Grasp the paper width adjusting tab and
move the paper width guides to fit the
paper.
Guide lock lever
Paper width Paper width guides
adjusting tab
Figure 1-2-28
4. Align the paper flush against the right Paper
side of the cassette.
*: Before loading the paper, be sure that it is
not curled or folded.
*: Ensure that the loaded paper does not
exceed the level indicated.
*: Make sure that the paper length guide
and the paper width guides are correctly
abut with the paper. Be sure to remove
spaces between the guides and the
paper.
Figure 1-2-29
1-2-18
2N3/2N2
5. Press the guide lock lever to lock.
Guide lock lever
Figure 1-2-30
6. Insert the paper size plate and the Paper media plate
paper media plate.
7. Gently push the cassette back in. Paper size plate
Figure 1-2-31
1-2-19
2N3/2N2
Release of lift plate stopper (cassette 3 and 4)
1. Pull cassette 3 and 4 out.
2. Remove the lift plate stopper from each
cassette and attach it to the storage
location.
*: When moving the machine, attach the lift
Lift plate
plate in original position.
stopper
Cassette
Figure 1-2-32
Loading paper (cassette 3 and 4)
1. Rotate the lock lever of the paper size
Lock lever
guide A and remove the lever. Pull the
paper size guide A up and out.
Cassette
Paper size guide A
Figure 1-2-33
1-2-20
2N3/2N2
2. Insert the paper size guide A into the Lock lever
slot (bottom of cassette) for the paper
size to be used.
3. Make sure that the top of the paper size
guide A matches the paper size to be
used, attach the lock lever, and rotate
the lever to lock it.
*: Gently try moving the paper size guide A
to verify that it is fixed.
Paper size guide A
Figure 1-2-34
4. With the bottom of the cassette pressed Paper size guide B
all the way down, press the hook on the
side of the paper size guide B to
release it and pull out the paper size
guide B. Hook
Hook
Figure 1-2-35
1-2-21
2N3/2N2
5. Adjust the paper size guide B to the
paper size. [A4]
A4
Insert the paper size guide B into the slot
marked A4 (on the bottom of the cassette),
and lock the hook.
Gently try moving the paper size guide B to
verify that it is fixed.
Paper size guide B
B5
[B5]
Open the paper size guide B as shown,
insert into the slot marked B5 (on the bot-
tom of the cassette), and lock the hook to
the upper part.
Gently try moving the paper size guide B to
verify that it is fixed.
Paper size
guide B
Letter
[Letter]
The paper size guide B is not attached.
Paper size
guide B
Figure 1-2-36
1-2-22
2N3/2N2
6. Align the paper flush against the right Paper
side of the cassette.
*: Before loading the paper, be sure that it is
not curled or folded.
*: Ensure that the loaded paper does not
exceed the level indicated.
Figure 1-2-37
7. Insert the paper size plate and the Paper media plate
paper media plate.
8. Gently push the cassette back in. Paper size plate
Figure 1-2-38
1-2-23
2N3/2N2
Installing the toner containers
1. Open the front upper cover.
2. Hold the toner container vertically and
hit the upper part about 5 times. Invert
the toner container so that the other end
is up, and hit in the same way.
3. Shake the toner container in a wide ver-
tical curve like motion about 5 times.
Toner container
Toner container
Figure 1-2-39
4. Install the toner container.
5. Turn down the toner container release
lever to lock the toner container.
6. Close the front upper cover. Toner container
;
%
/
-
Toner container Front upper
release lever cover
Figure 1-2-40
1-2-24
2N3/2N2-1
Unlocking the developer waste exit
Caution
To ease setup, the device was shipped
with the developer unit already replenished Tape
with developer. Therefore, to prevent
developer from spilling during shipping, a
developer shutter is equipped with the Tape
developer unit.
To disengage the shutter, use the following Wate toner
procedure: Note that if the shutter is not box cover
completely disengaged and retained in
place, the developer in the developer unit
may clog at the outlet causing a damage to
the developer unit. Set up leaflet
1. Remove two tapes and then remove the
set up leaflet.
*: The setup leaflet must be affixed in posi-
tion before dispatching the machine.
2. Open the waste toner box cover.
Figure 1-2-41
3. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
4. Remove the two screws and then open
the front middle cover.
Screw
Front middle
cover
Screw
Figure 1-2-42
1-2-25
2N3/2N2
5. Raise the seal and rotate the fixing
levers at four locations fully counter-
clockwise until they stop. Push the lever
Seal
until it stops and rotate it all the way
clockwise.
*: Check that the fixing lever arm is in its
vertical position.
Arm
Fixing lever
Figure 1-2-43
6. Remove a screw and slide the lever left
wards.
7. Fix the lever using the screw previously
removed at the lower screw hole and
unlock the developer waste exit.
*: When the device is shipped again or
removed, use the reverse procedure to
lock in the developer waste exit. Failure
to observe this caution could result in
deteriorated print quality and/or C call
(C7460).
Lever Lever
8. Close the front middle cover and fix the
cover using the two screws.
9. Open the front upper cover.
10. Lock the front middle cover by sliding
the lock lever to the right.
11. Close the front upper cover.
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-2-44
1-2-26
2N3/2N2
Installing the toner disposal box
1. Remove the tape.
2. Remove the cable cover.
Cable cover
Tape
Toner disposal box
Figure 1-2-45
3. Fit the toner disposal box using three
M3 x 8 S tight screws.
Toner disposal
box Screws
Screw Screw
Toner disposal
Screw box
Screw
Figure 1-2-46
1-2-27
2N3/2N2
4. Connect the connector.
5. Fit the cable cover using M3 x 8 P tight
screw.
*: If power is turned on without the toner
waste box installed, the C Call is caused.
FAN1 unconnected: C7470
FAN2 unconnected: C7480 Connectors
Cable cover
Screw
Toner disposal box
Figure 1-2-47
Replacing operation panel sheet
1. Insert a flat-head screwdriver and slide
the operation panel covers A and B to
remove them.
Operation panel
cover B
Operation panel
cover A
Figure 1-2-48
1-2-28
2N3/2N2
2. Remove the clear panel.
Clear panel
Figure 1-2-49
3. Remove the operation panel sheet.
4. Replace the operation panel sheet of
the corresponding language.
5. Refit the clear panel.
6. Refit the operation panel covers A and
B.
Operation panel
sheet
Figure 1-2-50
Installing other optional devices
1. Install the optional devices (document
finisher, side feeder and/or fax kit etc.)
as necessary.
1-2-29
2N3/2N2
Installing the stoppers
The above is not required when an optional
document finisher or the side feeder has
been installed. Screws
Stopper
1. Fix the stoppers with two screws at the
bottom right of the device.
Use the upper screw holes.
Screw
Screw Screw
Stopper
Screw Stopper
Figure 1-2-51
Caution
*: Turn the adjusters on each corner until
they reach the floor and then secure the
machine.
Adjusters
Figure 1-2-52
Installing the cassette heater (option)
1. Install the optional cassette heater as
necessary (see page 1-2-73).
1-2-30
2N3/2N2
Connect the power cord
1. Connect the power cord to the power
cord connector on rear lower of the
machine.
2. Connect the power plug to the wall out-
let.
Power cords
120 V specifications
Power cord
220 - 240 V specifications
Figure 1-2-53
Setup for adjusting images
1. Turn the main power switch on.
2. Check the messages on the operation panel
After completion of warming up, in case to display “Warning for high temperature. Adjust the room tem-
perature.” on the operation panel, follow the step 3. (Performing Drum Refresh)
In case to display “Warning for low temperature. Adjust the room temperature.” on the operation panel,
install the machine in the other location this message won’t be shown.
Installing the machine in a low temperature environment could cause image quality problems.
In case to have no display, follow the step 4 (Performing LSU cleaning).
*: Perform the high altitude settings when a leakage is developed on images in a high altitude installation,
such as in Mexico City (see page 1-3-101).
U140 - AC Calib - High Altitude - Calibration
1-2-31
2N3/2N2-4
3. drum refresh (see the operation guide)
Press the System menu key.
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Drum Refresh].
Press [Execute] to perform drum refresh. When completed, press [OK].
4. Performing LSU cleaning (see the operation guide)
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Laser Scanner Cleaning].
Press [Execute] to perform LSU cleaning. When completed, press [OK].
Setting the maintenance item U952
1. Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys.
2. Enter 952 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
3. Select [Execute].
4. Select [SETUP].
5. Press the start key.
*: Running the simulation allows execution histories to be logged.
Exit maintenance mode
1. Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key. The machine exits the maintenance mode.
Completion of the machine installation
*: If you change the address book or other system information, you should back up the data using mainte-
nance mode U917 (see page 1-3-227).
*: The maintenance mode U952 [SETUP] includes the following:
If U952 is not used, follow the procedure below.
Adjusting the image
1. Performing calibration
U464 Setting the ID correction operation - performing calibration
*: See the operation guide
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Calibration].
Press [Execute] to perform Color calibration. When completed, press [OK].
1-2-32
2N3/2N2
2. Performing color registration
U469 Color registration
(see page 1-3-206)
*: See the operation guide
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then
[Next] of [Color Registration].
Perform adjustments automatically or manu-
ally.
Auto correction
Press [Next] in [Auto]. Press [Start]. A chart
is printed.
Set the output chart for adjustment as the
original.
Press [Start] to perform Color registration. When completed, press [OK].
Manual correction
Press [Next] in [Manual]. Press [Print] of [Chart]. A chart is printed.
Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match.
Press [Next] of [Registration] and [Change].
Enter the registration values for each chart.
Press [Start] to perform Color registration. When completed, press [OK].
3. Adjusting the halftone automatically
U410 (see page 1-3-173)
Load the cassette with multiple sheets of A4 or Letter paper.
Enter 410 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
Press [Normal Mode] and then press the start key. A test patterns 1, 2 and 3 are outputted.
Place the output test pattern 1 as the original.
Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 1 and set them.
Press the start key. Adjustment is made.
Place the output test pattern 2 as the original.
Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 2 and set them.
Press the start key. Adjustment is made.
Place the output test pattern 3 as the original.
Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 2 and set them.
Press the start key. Adjustment is made.
[Finish] is displayed in [Phase] when normally completed.
Press the stop key twice to exit.
4. Make test copies
If image quality is unsatisfactory after test copying, execute Color Calibration, then retry U410-Adjusting
the halftone automatically.
*: If paper is fed skewed, perform the adjustment of skewed paper in the cassette.
Setting the delivery date (maintenance item U278)
1. Enter 278 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
2. Select [Today].
3. Press the start key. The delivery date is set.
4. Press the stop key to exit.
1-2-33
2N3/2N2
Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000)
1. Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
2. Select [Maintenance] and press the start key. A status report is output.
3. Press the stop key to exit.
Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only)
*: Clear the counter using the maintenance mode U927, if necessary.
1. Enter 927 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key. All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared.
1-2-34
2N3/2N2
(2) Setting initial copy modes
Factory settings are as follows:
Maintenance
Contents Factory setting
item No.
U253 Switching between double and single counts DBL(A3/Ledger)
U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Eject
U276 Setting the copy count mode Mode0
U284 Setting 2 color copy mode Off
U285 Setting service status page On
U323 Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning On
U325 Setting the paper interval Off/1
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication On/8
U327 Setting the cassette heater control Off
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Off
1-2-35
2N3/2N2-1
1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option)
Key counter installation requires the following parts:
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Key counter 1 3025418011
Key counter set 1 302A369709
Key counter wire* 1 302K946AJ0
Tray mount set 1 302LF94291
*: Not used in 120V model.
Supplied parts of key counter set (302A369709):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Key counter socket assembly 1 3029236241
Key counter cover retainer 1 302GR03010
Key counter retainer 1 302GR03020
Key counter cover 1 3066060011
Key counter mount 1 3066060041
Edging 2* 7YZM210006++H01
Band 1* M21AH010
M3 x 8 tap-tight P screw 1* 5MBTPB3008PW++R
M4 x 10 tap-tight P screw 2* 5MBTPB4010PW++R
M4 x 10 tap-tight S screw 2* 5MBTPB4010TW++R
M3 x 6 bronze flat-head screw 2 7BB003306H
M4 x 20 tap-tight S screw 2* 7BB100420H
M3 nut 1 7BC1003055++H01
M3 x 8 bronze binding screw 1* B1B03080
M4 x 30 tap-tight S screw 1* B1B54300
M4 x 6 chrome TP screw 5 B4A04060
M4 x 10 chrome TP screw 2* B4A04100
*: Not used in this model.
Supplied parts of tray mount set (302LF94291):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Tray cover 1 302LC04600
Tray mount 1 -
Tray film 2 -
M4 x 20 tap-tight S screw 4 7BB100420H
M4 x 8 tap-tight S screw 2 7BB700408H
1-2-36
2N3/2N2
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation M4 x 6 screw Key counter
panel to off. Make sure that the power retainer
indicator and the memory indicator are M4 x 6 screw
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power M3 nut
Key counter
cable from the wall outlet. M4 x 6 mount
2. Fit the key counter socket assembly to screw
the key counter retainer using two
screws and nut.
3. Fit the key counter mount to the key
counter cover using two screws.
4. Fit the key counter retainer to the key M4 x 6 screw
counter mount using two screws.
Key counter
M3 x 6 flat-head socket assembly
screws Key counter cover
Figure 1-2-54
*: For the 120V model, proceed to step 24.
Pass the connector of the key counter
wire through the aperture in the operation
mount cover B.
And then proceed to step 28.
5. Remove nine screws and then remove Rear upper
the rear upper cover. cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-2-55
1-2-37
2N3/2N2
6. Remove the controller cover.
7. Remove the screw and then remove the
controller lid.
Screw
Controller lid
Controller
cover
Figure 1-2-56
1-2-38
2N3/2N2
8. Release seven wire saddles on the con-
Wire holder
troller box. Wire
9. Remove three wire holders. saddles Wire saddles
Controller box
Wire
saddle
Wire
saddles
Wire holders
Figure 1-2-57
1-2-39
2N3/2N2
10. Remove the connector from the DP
relay PWB,
11. Remove the following connectors that
connected to the main PWB from the
outside of the control box.
YC25
YC11
YC30
YC42
YC43 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC21 (WH)
YC22 (WH)
YC26 (BK)
YC6
YC12 YC25 YC6 YC12
YC11
*: Before removing the connector type YC30
FFC YC43, unlock the lock by pressing
the lock levers at both ends.
YC42 YC43 YC21
YC26
YC22
Figure 1-2-58
1-2-40
2N3/2N2
12. Remove five screws.
13. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
controller box.
Controller box
Hook
Screw
Hook
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-2-59
14. Open the DP.
Screw
Remove the screw and then remove the
operation mount cover C.
Operation mount
cover C
Figure 1-2-60
1-2-41
2N3/2N2
15. Remove the screw and then remove the
arm hinge cover A and B.
Screw
Arm hinge
cover B
Arm hinge
cover A
Figure 1-2-61
16. Remove the screw and then remove the Screw
operation mount cover A.
Operation mount
cover A
Figure 1-2-62
1-2-42
2N3/2N2
17. Cut out the aperture plate on the opera-
tion mount cover B using nippers.
Aperture
Operation mount
cover B
Figure 1-2-63
18. Connect the connector of the key coun-
ter wire to the connector YC24 on the
engine PWB.
Engine PWB
Key counter wire
YC24
Engine PWB
Figure 1-2-64
1-2-43
2N3/2N2
19. Remove two wire holders.
20. Route the key counter wire through the
wire guide and fix it at the wire holders.
Key counter wire
Wire guide
Wire holders
Figure 1-2-65
21. Route the key counter wire through the
three wire saddles and fix it at the wire
holder.
Wire
saddle
Wire
saddles
Key counter wire
Figure 1-2-66
1-2-44
2N3/2N2
22. Pass the connector of the key counter
Key counter wire
wire through the aperture in the opera-
tion mount cover B and refit the opera-
tion mount cover A.
23. Refit the arm hinge cover A, B and
operation mount cover C. Aperture
24. Refit the controller box.
25. Refit the rear upper cover.
Operation mount cover A
Figure 1-2-67
26. Peel the protective pad and then affix
two tray films over the tray mount. Tray films
Tray mount
Figure 1-2-68
1-2-45
2N3/2N2
27. Fit the tray mount to the operation arm M4 x 20 M4 x 20
using two M4 x 20 tap-tight S screws. tap-tight S tap-tight S
screw screw
Tray mount
Figure 1-2-69
28. Cut out the aperture plate on the tray
cover using nippers. Tray cover
29. Fit the tray cover to the tray mount
Aperture
using two M4 x 8 screws.
M4 x 8 screw
M4 x 8 screw
Tray cover
Figure 1-2-70
1-2-46
2N3/2N2
30. Fit the key counter cover retainer to the
tray cover using two M4 x 20 tap-tight S M4 x 20 M4 x 20
tap-tight S tap-tight S
screws. screw screw
Key counter
cover retainer
Figure 1-2-71
31. Connect the key counter signal cable to Key counter cover M4 x 6 screw
the key counter wire.
32. Fit the key counter cover to the
machine using the M4 x 6 screw.
33. Insert the key counter into the key Key counter
counter socket assembly. signal cable
34. Turn the main power switch on and
enter the maintenance mode. Key counter
35. Run maintenance item U204 and select wire
[Key-Counter] (see page 1-3-124).
36. Exit the maintenance mode.
37. Check that the message requesting the
key counter to be inserted is displayed
on the touch panel when the key coun-
ter is pulled out.
38. Check that the counter counts up as
copies are made.
Figure 1-2-72
1-2-47
2N3/2N2-1
1-2-4 Installing the key card MK-2 (option for Japan only)
Key card installation requires the following parts:
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Key card MK-2 1 8J272002 (option)
MK-2 mount 1
Supplied with MK-2
M4 x 16 screw 2
Tray mount set 1 302LF94291
Supplied parts of tray mount set (302LF94291):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Tray cover 1 302LC04600
Tray mount 1 -
Tray film 2 -
M4 x 20 tap-tight S screw 4 7BB100420H
M4 x 8 tap-tight S screw 2 7BB700408H
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power
cable from the wall outlet. Rear upper
2. Remove nine screws and then remove cover
the rear upper cover.
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-2-73
1-2-48
2N3/2N2
3. Remove the controller cover.
4. Remove the screw and then remove the
controller lid.
Screw
Controller lid
Controller
cover
Figure 1-2-74
1-2-49
2N3/2N2
5. Release seven wire saddles on the con-
Wire holder
troller box. Wire
6. Remove three wire holders. saddles Wire saddles
Controller box
Wire
saddle
Wire
saddles
Wire holders
Figure 1-2-75
1-2-50
2N3/2N2
7. Remove the connector from the DP
relay PWB,
8. Remove the following connectors that
connected to the main PWB from the
outside of the control box.
YC25
YC11
YC30
YC42
YC43 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC21 (WH)
YC22 (WH)
YC26 (BK)
YC6
YC12
YC25 YC6 YC12
*: Before removing the connector type YC11
FFC YC43, unlock the lock by pressing YC30
the lock levers at both ends.
YC42 YC43 YC21
YC26
YC22
Figure 1-2-76
1-2-51
2N3/2N2
9. Remove five screws.
10. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
controller box.
Controller box
Hook
Screw
Hook
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-2-77
11. Open the DP.
Screw
Remove the screw and then remove the
operation mount cover C.
Operation mount
cover C
Figure 1-2-78
1-2-52
2N3/2N2
12. Cut out the aperture plate on the opera-
tion mount cover C using nippers.
Aperture
Operation mount
cover C
Figure 1-2-79
13. Pass the MK-2 signal cable through the
aperture in the operation mount cover
C.
Aperture
MK-2 signal cable
Figure 1-2-80
1-2-53
2N3/2N2
14. Connect the connector of the MK-2 sig-
nal cable to the connector YC25 on the
engine PWB. Ground terminal
15. Remove the screw from the machine.
16. Fix the MK-2 signal cable to the ground
terminal with the screw that was Screw
removed.
Ground terminal
Engine PWB
Screw
MK-2 signal cable
YC25
Engine PWB
Figure 1-2-81
1-2-54
2N3/2N2
17. Remove two wire holders.
18. Route the MK-2 signal cable through
the wire guide and fix it at two wire hold-
ers.
19. Refit the operation mount cover C.
20. Refit the controller box.
21. Refit the rear upper cover.
MK-2 signal cable
Wire guide
Wire holders
Figure 1-2-82
22. Peel the protective pad and then affix Tray films
two tray films over the tray mount.
Tray mount
Figure 1-2-83
1-2-55
2N3/2N2
23. Fit the tray mount to the operation arm M4 x 20 M4 x 20
using two M4 x 20 tap-tight S screws. tap-tight S tap-tight S
screw screw
Tray mount
Figure 1-2-84
24. Fit the tray cover to the tray mount M4 x 8 screw
using two M4 x 8 screws.
M4 x 8 screw
Tray cover
Figure 1-2-85
1-2-56
2N3/2N2
25. Remove the four screws securing the
MK-2 cover; attach the MK-2 mount to
the MK-2, and secure using the four
screws. MK-2
Screws
Screws
MK-2
Screws
MK-2 mount
Screws
Figure 1-2-86
26. Fit the MK-2 to the tray cover using two M4 x 20
M4 x 20 tap-tight S screws. tap-tight S
screw
M4 x 20
27. Turn the main power switch on and tap-tight S
enter the maintenance mode. MK-2 screw
28. Run maintenance item U204 and select
[Key-Card] (see page 1-3-124).
29. Exit the maintenance mode.
Figure 1-2-87
1-2-57
2N3/2N2
1-2-5 Installing the KMAS (option for Japan only)
KMAS installation requires the following parts:
Using the PHS module
Parts Quantity Part.No.
PHS module 1 HM000080 (option)
PHS signal cable 1 023CK200 (option)
KMAS interface PWB 1 023CK000 (option)
M3 x 16 bronze binding screw 2 B3323160
Ferrite core 1 2A027770
Clamp 1 M2105910
KMAS wire set 1 302K994610
Supplied parts of KMAS wire set (302K994610):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
KMAS wire 1 302K946AG0
Spacer A 1 7YZM510009++H01
Spacer B 3 7YZM510011++H01
Using a modem
Parts Quantity Part.No.
RS-232C signal cable 1 303CK60011
RS-232C relay cable 1 303CK60041
KMAS interface PWB 1 023CK000 (option)
1-2-58
2N3/2N2
Procedure
To fix KMAS, perform the following procedure:
Start
Setting the DIP switch
Fitting the KMAS interface PWB
Using the PHS module Using a modem
Fitting the PHS signal cable Fitting the RS-232C signal cable
and PHS module
Initializing the KMAS
End
1-2-59
2N3/2N2
Setting the DIP switch
1. Configure DIP switches 1 to 4 on the KMAS interface PWB
KMAS interface board as follows:
ON
1 2 3 4
DIP switch
Figure 1-2-88
DIP SW No. Description Remarks
1 PHS module/modem switching
ON: Use modem
OFF: Use PHS module
2 Modem outgoing switching This is required when modem is used.
ON: Pulse
OFF: Tone
3 Communication speed switching with the Set to OFF.
device
ON: 9600bps
OFF: 19200bps
4 Communication log when automatically When ON, the message is “Call a service
notifying service calls representative.”
Switching messages When OFF, the message will vary depend-
ON: Message is fixed ing on communication status. To setup the
OFF: Normal message is used system with automatic accounting only, ON
may be set.
1-2-60
2N3/2N2
Fitting the KMAS interface PWB
2. Remove nine screws and then remove
the rear upper cover.
Rear upper
cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-2-89
3. Attach one spacer A and three spacers
Controller box
B to the side of the controller box.
Spacer B
Spacer A
Spacer B
Spacer B
Figure 1-2-90
1-2-61
2N3/2N2
4. Insert the KMAS interface PWB to three Spacer B
spacers B.
Spacer B
Spacer B
KMAS interface PWB
Figure 1-2-91
1-2-62
2N3/2N2
5. Connect the connector of the KMAS
wire to the connector YC1 on the KMAS
YC1
PWB.
6. Connect the connector of the KMAS
wire to controller fan motor, YC7 on the
main PWB.
KMAS wire
KMAS interface PWB
Main PWB
YC7
KMAS wire
Controller fan motor
Figure 1-2-92
1-2-63
2N3/2N2
7. Pass the KMAS wire through the edging
of the controller box and wire saddle
and then fasten the KMAS wire. Edging
KMAS wire
Wire saddle
Figure 1-2-93
Fitting the PHS signal cable and PHS mod-
ule Rear upper cover
8. Remove two screws and then remove
the lid from the rear upper cover.
9. Pass the PHS signal cable through the
aperture in the rear upper cover.
10. Secure the PHS signal cable to rear
Lid
upper cover with two screws.
Screw
Screw
PHS signal cable Screw
Screw
Figure 1-2-94
1-2-64
2N3/2N2
11. Connect the connector of the PHS sig-
nal cable to the connector YC2 on the
KMAS interface PWB. KMAS
12. Refit the rear upper cover. interface PWB
YC2
PHS signal
cable
Figure 1-2-95
13. Fit the PHS module to rear upper cover
using two M3 x 16 screws.
Rear upper cover
PHS module
M3 x 16 screws
Figure 1-2-96
1-2-65
2N3/2N2
14. Wrap the PHS signal cable around the
ferrite core a turn.
15. Connect the connector of the PHS sig-
nal cable to PHS module.
16. Fit the clamp to PHS signal cable.
17. After using alcohol to clean the rear PHS module
upper cover, adhere the clamp to rear
upper cover.
Ferrite core
PHS signal cable
Clamp
PHS signal cable
Figure 1-2-97
Fitting the RS-232C signal cable
1. By referring to the instructions given to
fix the PHS signal wire, insert the con-
nector at the end of the RS-232C relay
cable to the YC3 connector on the
KMAS interface PWB.
If the wire length is short, use a RS-
232C extension cable.
2. Connect the RS-232C signal cable to
the modem.
Initializing the KMAS
1. Turn the main power switch on and
enter the maintenance mode.
2. Run maintenance item U202 and Per-
form [Init/Set TEL No.] (see page 1-3-
122).
3. Exit the maintenance mode.
1-2-66
2N3/2N2
1-2-6 Installing the coin vender (option for japan only)
Coin vender installation requires the following parts:
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Coin vender 1 1905H99JP0 (option)
Vender wire 1
Vender base 1
Supplied with
M4 x 6 screw 4
coin vender
Ferrite core 1
Clamp 1
Vender signal cable 1 302K946AE0
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power M4 x 6 screws
cable from the wall outlet.
2. Fit the vender base to coin vender
using four M4 x 6 screws.
Coin vender
Vender base
M4 x 6 screws
Figure 1-2-98
1-2-67
2N3/2N2
3. Remove nine screws and then remove
the rear upper cover.
Rear upper
cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-2-99
4. Cover the area under the toner disposal
box to prevent contamination due to the
scattered toner.
5. Remove the screw and then remove the
cable cover.
6. Remove connector.
Connectors
Cable
cover
Screw
Toner disposal box
Sheet
Figure 1-2-100
1-2-68
2N3/2N2
7. Remove three screws and then remove
the toner disposal box.
Toner
disposal box
Screws
Screw Screw
Screw Toner
disposal box
Screw
Figure 1-2-101
8. Remove nine screws.
9. Release two hanging parts and then
remove the rear lower cover.
Screw
Screw
Screws
Rear lower cover
Screws
Figure 1-2-102
1-2-69
2N3/2N2
10. Remove two screws and then remove
the lid.
Screws
Lid
Figure 1-2-103
11. Connect the connector of the vender Engine PWB YC23 Wire guide
signal cable to the connector YC23 on
the engine PWB.
12. Pass the vender signal cable through
the wire guide and ten wire saddles and
then fasten the cable.
Wire
saddles
Vender signal cable
Wire saddles
Wire
saddle
Wire saddle
Wire saddles
Figure 1-2-104
1-2-70
2N3/2N2
13. Pass the vender wire through the aper-
ture in the IF mount.
14. Secure the vender wire with two screws Ground
removed in step 10. terminal
15. Secure the ground terminal of the
vender wire to rear frame with the
screw.
16. Connect the connector of the vender
wire to connector of the vender signal Screw
cable.
Vender
signal cable
Ground terminal
Screw
IF mount
Screws
Vender wire
Figure 1-2-105
17. Refit the rear lower cover, toner dis-
posal box and rear upper cover.
18. Connect the signal cable of coin vender
to connector of the vender wire. Vender wire
Signal cable
of coin vender
Figure 1-2-106
1-2-71
2N3/2N2
19. Fit the ferrite core to signal cable of coin
vender.
20. Fit the clamp to signal cable of coin Coin vender
vender.
21. Remove a screw from the coin vender Clamp
and fix the coin vender with a clamp.
Screw
Ferrite core
Signal cable
of coin vender
Signal cable of
coin vender
Figure 1-2-107
22. Affix the price size decal at the right Price size seal
side of the coin vender operation panel.
Figure 1-2-108
23. Turn the main power switch on and
enter the maintenance mode.
24. Run maintenance mode U206 and acti-
vate 'Coin vender is installed.’ Continue
configuring the coin vender required
(see page 1-3-125).
25. Exit the maintenance mode.
1-2-72
2N3/2N2-1
1-2-7 Installing the cassette heater (option)
Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:
120 V specifications
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Cassette heater set 1 302K994931
(for cassette 1 and 2)
Cassette heater set 1 303NF94130
(for cassette 3 and 4)
Supplied parts of cassette heater set (302K994931):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Cassette heater 120V 1 302H794620
Wire saddle 3 7YZM610001++H01
Connector cover 1 303NF04140
Caution label 1 302KP34220
M3 x 8 tap-tight S screw 2 7BB700308H
M4 x 8 tap-tight S screw 1 7BB700408H
Supplied parts of cassette heater set (303NF94130):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Cassette heater 120V 1 302H794620
Wire saddle 3 7YZM610001++H01
Connector cover 1 303NF04140
M3 x 8 tap-tight S screw 2 7BB700308H
M4 x 8 tap-tight S screw 1 7BB700408H
Caution label 1 302KP34220
1-2-73
2N3/2N2-1
220 - 240 V specifications
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Cassette heater set 240V 1 302K994941
(for cassette 1 and 2)
Cassette heater set 240V 1 303NF94140
(for cassette 3 and 4)
Supplied parts of cassette heater set (302K994941):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Cassette heater 240V 1 302H794610
Wire saddle 3 7YZM610001++H01
Connector cover 1 303NF04140
Caution label 1 302KP34220
M3 x 8 tap-tight S screw 2 7BB700308H
M4 x 8 tap-tight S screw 1 7BB700408H
Supplied parts of cassette heater set (303NF94140):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Cassette heater 240V 1 302H794610
Wire saddle 3 7YZM610001++H01
Connector cover 1 303NF04140
M3 x 8 tap-tight S screw 2 7BB700308H
M4 x 8 tap-tight S screw 1 7BB700408H
Caution label 1 302KP34220
1-2-74
2N3/2N2-2
Procedure
Installing for cassette 1 and 2 Cassette
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power
cable from the wall outlet.
2. Pull the cassette 1 forward.
3. Pull up the cassette.
Figure 1-2-109
4. Remove the cassette 2 in the same
manner as above.
Figure 1-2-110
1-2-75
2N3/2N2
5. Fit three wire saddles on the bottom
frame of the machine.
6. Fit the cassette heater using two M3 x 8
screws.
Wire
Screw saddles
Screw
Cassette heater
Figure 1-2-111
1-2-76
2N3/2N2
7. Pass the wire of the cassette heater
through three wire saddles and then
fasten the wire.
*: Route the wire so that it do not disturb
opening and closing the cassettes.
8. Connect the connector of the cassette
heater to the connector in the rear Connector
frame of the machine.
Cassette heater
Wire
saddles
OK NG
Figure 1-2-112
9. Insert two hooks of the connector cover
to the holes of base of the machine
each.
Cassette heater
10. Install the connector cover by using a
M4 x 8 screw.
Connector cover
Screw
Hook Hook
Figure 1-2-113
1-2-77
2N3/2N2
11. Adhere the caution label after wiping
the bottom frame of this side of cassette
heater with alcohol.
12. Replace the cassette 1 and 2.
Caution label
Figure 1-2-114
*: Perform the maintenance mode U327 to configure the cassette heater control settings after a cassette
heater was installed.
1-2-78
2N3/2N2
Installing for cassette 3 and 4
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are Cassette 3
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power
cable from the wall outlet.
2. Pull the cassette 3 forward.
3. Remove the four screws and then
remove the cassette 3.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-2-115
4. Pull the cassette 4 forward.
5. Remove the four screws and then
Cassette 4
remove the cassette 4.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-2-116
1-2-79
2N3/2N2
6. Fit three wire saddles on the bottom
frame of the machine.
7. Fit the cassette heater using two M3 x 8
screws.
Wire
saddles
Screw Screw
Cassette heater
Figure 1-2-117
8. Pass the wire of the cassette heater
through three wire saddles and then
fasten the wire. Connector
9. Connect the connector of the cassette
heater to the connector in the rear
frame of the machine.
Wire
saddles
Wire
saddle
Cassette heater
Figure 1-2-118
1-2-80
2N3/2N2
10. Insert two hooks of the connector cover
to the holes of base of the machine
each.
11. Install the connector cover by using a
M4 x 8 screw.
Connector cover
Screw
Hook
Hook
Figure 1-2-119
12. Adhere the caution label after wiping
the bottom frame of this side of cassette
heater with alcohol.
Caution label
Figure 1-2-120
*: Perform the maintenance mode U327 to configure the cassette heater control settings after a cassette
heater was installed.
1-2-81
2N3/2N2
1-2-8 Installing the gigabit ethernet board (option)
Gigabit ethernet board installation requires the following parts:
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Gigabit ethernet board 1 1505JV0UN0 (option)
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power PT
cable from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the controller cover. PT
1
Controller cover
Figure 1-2-121
3. Remove two pins and then remove the
slot cover of the OPT2.
Slot cover
T2
OP
Pin
OPT2 OP
T1
Pin
Figure 1-2-122
1-2-82
2N3/2N2
4. Insert the gigabit ethernet board along
the groove in OPT2 and secure the
board with two pins that have been
removed in step 3. Gigabit
*: Do not directly touch the gigabit ethernet ethernet board
board terminal.
Hold the top and bottom of the gigabit
ethernet board, or the projection of the Pin
1
PT
board to insert the gigabit ethernet board.
Pin
Groove
Figure 1-2-123
5. Plug the network cable into the connec-
tor.
6. Refit the controller cover.
*: Load the CD-ROM in the PC and run
“Quick Network Setup” to set the IP Network cable
address.
1
PT
Figure 1-2-124
1-2-83
2N3/2N2
1-2-9 Installing the Wire-less interface kit (option)
Wire-less interface kit installation requires the following parts:
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Wire-less interface kit 1 1505J50UN0 (option)
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are
off before turning off the main power PT
switch. And then unplug the power
cable from the wall outlet.
1
PT
2. Remove the controller cover.
Controller cover
Figure 1-2-125
3. Remove two pins and then remove the
slot cover of the OPT2.
Slot cover
T2
OP
Pin
OPT2 OP
T1
Pin
Figure 1-2-126
1-2-84
2N3/2N2
4. Insert the wire-less interface kit along
the groove in OPT2 and secure the
board with two pins that have been
Wire-less
removed in step 2. interface kit
*: Do not directly touch the wire-less inter-
face kit terminal.
Hold the top and bottom of the wire-less
interface kit, or the projection of the board 1
Pin
PT
to insert the wire-less interface kit.
*: Load the CD-ROM in the PC and run
“Quick Network Setup” to set the IP
address.
Pin
Groove
Figure 1-2-127
1-2-85
2N3/2N2
1-2-10 Installing the IC card reader holder (option)
IC card reader holder installation requires the following parts:
Parts Quantity Part.No.
IC card reader holder (E) 1 1709AD0UN1 (option)
Supplied parts of IC card reader holder (1709AD0UN0):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
IC card reader holder 1 -
Label 1 -
Bundling band 1 -
Hook and loop fasteners 2 -
Spacer 2 -
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power
cable from the wall outlet.
2. Remove a screw and then remove the 1
right table cover.
*: While holding the cover at its far end, 2
slide it rightwards to remove.
Right table cover Screw
Figure 1-2-128
1-2-86
2N3/2N2
3. Affix a label on the right table cover Label
aligning it with the positioning mark.
*: Fix it by matching with a smoke of a dif- Right table cover Positioning mark
ferent color.
Figure 1-2-129
IC card reader
4. The mounting procedure differs
depending type of IC card readers.
Type A:
Thicker and in the same size as its holder
Type A
Continue to step 5.
Type B:
Thicker but smaller than its holder
Continue to step 7.
Type C:
Thinner and in the same size as its holder
Continue to step 10.
Type B
Type C
Figure 1-2-130
1-2-87
2N3/2N2
5. Affix two hook and loop fasteners to the
IC card reader and IC card reader IC card reader holder
holder. Hook and
loop fasteners
Hook and
loop fasteners
IC card reader
(Type A)
6. Mount the IC card reader to the IC card
IC card reader holder
reader holder.
Proceed to step 9.
IC card reader
(Type A)
Figure 1-2-131
1-2-88
2N3/2N2
7. Affix two hook and loop fasteners to the
IC card reader and IC card reader IC card reader holder
holder. Hook and
*: Affix a hook and loop fastener onto the IC loop fasteners
card reader so that it is mounted on the
holder with both being flush with the right
side edges.
Hook and
loop fasteners
IC card reader
(Type B)
8. Mount the IC card reader to the IC card
reader holder. IC card reader holder
IC card reader
(Type B)
Figure 1-2-132
1-2-89
2N3/2N2
9. Route the USB cable from the IC card IC card reader holder
reader through the IC card reader
holder ribs, wind around its back and
route through another rib.
*: Make sure the cable will have a slack of
more than 20 cm.
Proceed to step 14.
USB cable
Ribs
more than 20 cm
Figure 1-2-133
1-2-90
2N3/2N2
10. Affix two hook and loop fasteners to the
IC card reader. IC card reader holder
11. Affix a hook and loop fastener at the
reverse side of the spacer where an Spacer
adhesive tape has been affixed.
Affix two spacers to the IC card reader.
Hook and
loop fasteners Spacer
Hook and
loop fasteners
IC card reader
(Type C)
12. Mount the IC card reader to the IC card
reader holder.
IC card reader holder
IC card reader
(Type C)
Figure 1-2-134
1-2-91
2N3/2N2
13. Route the USB cable from the IC card USB cable
reader through the ribs at the bottom of IC card reader holder
the IC card reader holder, wind around
its back a couple of turns, and route
through the rib on the left hand side.
Rib (left)
USB cable
Rib (bottom)
Figure 1-2-135
1-2-92
2N3/2N2
14. Reverse the right table cover and snap IC card reader holder
the IC card reader holder into the 5
latches to mount.
Right table cover
Holes
Holes
Figure 1-2-136
15. Connect the USB cable with the USB
connector on the machine.
USB connector
USB cable
Figure 1-2-137
1-2-93
2N3/2N2
16. Fix the right table cover by using the
screw which was removed in step 2.
*: Use care not to pinch the wire.
Right table cover
Screw
Figure 1-2-138
Enabling IC Card Authentication
Precautions
To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Please access the designated website of your
dealer or service representative, and register “Machine No.” indicated on your machine and “Product ID” indi-
cated on the License Certificate supplied with the product to issue the License Key.
1. Turn the main power switch on.
2. Press the System Menu key and then press [System].
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears.
Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with admin-
istrator privileges.
3. Press [Next] of Optional Function.
4. Select CARD AUTHENTICATION KIT(B) and press [Activate].
5. The License Key entry screen is displayed.
Enter the License Key using the numeric keys and press [Official].
6. Confirm the product name CARD AUTHENTICATION KIT(B) and press [Yes].
7. To use a SSFC card, run maintenance mode U222 and set SSFC.
*: When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver ON, IC cards can not be recognized by
the Card reader, since it does not wake from sleep mode. To enable the IC Card Reader in Sleep Mode,
refer to the Operation Guide to change the Sleep level to OFF in the Sleep Rules at the Date/ Timer/
Energy Saver section of the System Menu.
*: This setting is not necessary when the optional network interface kit is installed.
1-2-94
2N3/2N2-3
1-2-11 Installing the keyboard holder (option)
Keyboard holder installation requires the following parts:
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Keyboard holder (C) 1 1709AF0UN2 (option)
Supplied parts of keyboard holder (C) (1709AF0UN2):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Keyboard mounting bracket 1 -
Keyboard base 1 -
Hook and loop fasteners A 2 -
Hook and loop fasteners B 2 -
Right keyboard lock 1 -
Left keyboard lock 1 -
Band 1 -
M4 x 8 tap-tight P screw 2 -
M4 x 25 screw 2
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power
cable from the wall outlet.
2. Remove a screw and then remove the
right table cover. 1
*: While holding the cover at its far end,
slide it rightwards to remove. 3 2
3. Secure the M4×25 screw.
M4×25 screw
Right table cover Screw
Figure 1-2-139
1-2-95
2N3/2N2-3
4. Remove a screw and then remove the
left table cover.
*: While holding the cover at its far end,
3
slide it leftwards to remove.
5. Secure the M4×25 screw. 1
6. Refit the right table cover and left table
cover.
M4×25 screw
Screw
Left table cover
2
Figure 1-2-140
7. Remove the USB cover.
*: Hold the protrusion by pliers to remove.
USB cover
Figure 1-2-141
1-2-96
2N3/2N2
8. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, lever
open the right and left lids to remove.
Groove Groove
left lid Right lid
Figure 1-2-142
9. Un mount the keyboard base from the Keyboard mounting bracket
keyboard mounting bracket.
Keyboard base
Figure 1-2-143
1-2-97
2N3/2N2
10. Align the keyboard mounting bracket
with the main unit at its positioning Keyboard mounting
boss, secure it using two M4×8 screws. bracket
M4×8 screws
Positioning boss
Figure 1-2-144
11. Remove two screws and then remove Screw
the keyboard cover from the keyboard
keyboard cover
base.
Screw
keyboard base
Figure 1-2-145
1-2-98
2N3/2N2
12. Lift the protrusions of the film off of the Film Hole
hold. Protrusion part
Unhook at two holes and remove the
film from the keyboard base. Hole
Hook
Hook
keyboard base
Figure 1-2-146
13. Connect the USB cable with the USB Keyboard
connector on the machine.
*: Open the document processor and place
the keyboard on the platen.
USB cable
USB connector
Figure 1-2-147
1-2-99
2N3/2N2
14. Attach the keyboard base to a keyboard Keyboard mounting
mounting bracket. bracket
*: Insert the keyboard askew so that the
roller on the keyboard base is positioned Roller
between the guide of the keyboard
mounting bracket and the roller.
Roller
keyboard base
Figure 1-2-148
15. Insert the left and right keyboard locks
onto the rails on the keyboard mounting Keyboard mounting
bracket
bracket until it clicks in and fix.
*: Insert until a click is heard.
Left keyboard
locks
Right keyboard locks
Left keyboard Right keyboard locks
locks
Figure 1-2-149
1-2-100
2N3/2N2
16. Draw out the keyboard base.
17. With the USB cable strained slightly
loose, fix a band to the wire and fix the Keyboard base
band to the hole on the keyboard.
Band
Hole USB cable
Figure 1-2-150
18. Bundle the remaining portion of the
USB wire and recess under the key- USB cable
board base.
Keyboard base
Figure 1-2-151
1-2-101
2N3/2N2
19. Replace the film which was removed in Hole Protrusion B
step 7 to the keyboard base.
1) Insert the protrusions A (3) in the
Film
chase of the keyboard base.
2) Mate the holes (2) with the hooks of
the keyboard base.
3) Press the protrusion B (1) down to
mate with the hole of the keyboard
Protrusion A
base.
Hole
Protrusion A
keyboard base
Film
Figure 1-2-152
1-2-102
2N3/2N2
20. Attach the keyboard cover to a key- Screw Keyboard cover
board base with two screws that have
Screw
been removed in step 6.
*: Route the keyboard USB wire through the
opening in the keyboard cover.
Keyboard base
USB cable
Opening
Figure 1-2-153
Keyboard Hook and loop fasteners
21. Affix two pieces of hook and loop fas-
teners on the upper keyboard cover.
22. Affix two pieces of hook and loop fas-
teners at the reverse side of the key-
board.
Hook and loop fasteners
Keyboard cover
Figure 1-2-154
1-2-103
2N3/2N2
23. Align the keyboard with the hook and Keyboard
loop fasteners and fix on the keyboard
base.
Keyboard base
Figure 1-2-155
24. If the USB cable from keyboard runs off
of the keyboard, dress it into the key-
board base.
25. Pull the keyboard in and out to confirm USB cable
that the USB cable won’t go off of the
connector.
Keyboard base
Figure 1-2-156
1-2-104
2N3/2N2-4
1-2-12 Installing the Printed Document Guard Kit (option)
Printed Document Guard Kit installation requires the following parts:
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Printed Document Guard Kit (B) 1 1503P40UN0
Supplied parts of Printed Document Guard Kit:
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Copy guard PWB 1 -
FFC (short) 2 -
FFC (long)* 2 -
Mount plate B*1 1 -
Screws M3 x 6*2 2 -
*1: Not used in this model.
*2: One piece is used in this model.
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power
cable from the wall outlet. Rear upper
cover
2. Remove nine screws and then remove
the rear upper cover.
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-2-157
1-2-105
2N3/2N2
3. Insert the short FFC into the copy guard
FFC
PWB.
YC2 (serigraphed on MAIN) FFC
YC1 (serigraphed on DP)
Copy Guard PWB
YC2(MAIN)
YC1(DP)
Figure 1-2-158
4. Insert the copy guard PWB to the side Main PWB
of the main PWB and fix with a S Tite
screw M4 x 8.
*: Mark the FFC cable by folding.
S Tite screws
M4 x 8
Copy guard PWB
Copy guard PWB
Figure 1-2-159
1-2-106
2N3/2N2
5. Connect the main PWB and the DP Main PWB YC34
relay PWB with the FFC.
Main PWB YC34
DP relay PWB YC35
FFC
DP relay PWB YC35
FFC
Figure 1-2-160
6. Replace the upper rear cover.
7. Confirm the settings.
1) Turn the main power switch on.
2) Press the system menu key, then, System/Network.
3) The user authentication dialog is shown if user authentication is not enabled.
Enter the login user name and the login password, then, press Login.
Use an administrator privilege for login.
4) Confirm that the Confidential Guard is set to On.
1-2-107
2N3/2N2
1-2-13 Installing the handset (option for Japan only)
Handset installation requires the following parts:
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Handset 1 1909AG9JP0 (option)
Supplied parts of handset (1909AG9JP0):
Parts Quantity Part.No.
Handset 1 -
Handset base 1 -
Handset mount 1 -
Protection cover 1 -
Pin 2 -
Telephone wire 1 -
Modular cable 1 -
M4 nut 2 3CY06030
1-2-108
2N3/2N2
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power
cable from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the controller cover.
3. Remove the screw and then remove the
controller lid. Screw
Controller
lid
Controller
cover
Figure 1-2-161
4. Remove three screws.
5. Unhook six hooks and then remove the
left upper cover.
Screws
Left upper
cover
Figure 1-2-162
1-2-109
2N3/2N2
6. Mount two M4 nuts at the back of the
ISU rear cover.
ISU rear cover
7. Fit the handset mount to the ISU rear
cover using two pins.
Use the lower screw holes.
Handset mount
B
M4 nuts
Pins
Pins
Figure 1-2-163
8. Refit the left upper cover. Pin
9. Refit the toner filter.
10. Refit the controller lid. Pin
11. Confirm that the pin on the handset
mount is positioned at mark A.
If not, remove two nuts and two pins
Handset mount
and remount at mark A.
A
A
Nut
Nut
Figure 1-2-164
1-2-110
2N3/2N2
12. Insert the pins at the insert parts on the
back of the handset base, and slide it
towards you.
B
Handset base
Pin
Pin
A
B
A
Figure 1-2-165
1-2-111
2N3/2N2
13. Fit the protection cover to the handset
mount.
Protection
A
cover
B
Handset
mount
Figure 1-2-166
14. Connect the telephone wire to the
handset and the handset base. Handset
Handset base
A
Telephone wire
Figure 1-2-167
1-2-112
2N3/2N2
15. Connect the modular cable to the hand-
set base and the machine.
Modular cable
B
Handset base
1
PT
Modular
cable
Figure 1-2-168
1-2-113
2N3/2N2-3
1-2-14 Optional Applications
Overview of the Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
Applications INstall page
Data Security Kit page 1-2-115
Internet FAX Kit page 1-2-116
Card Authentication Kit* page 1-2-120
ThinPrint Option (UG-33)* page 1-2-121
Emulation Upgrade Kit (UG-34) page 1-2-122
*: This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)
Operation Guide
Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and indicates default settings and
other information.
FAX Operation Guide
Explains how to use the fax function.
Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide
Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.
Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide
Explains how to introduce and use the Data Security kit (E), and how to initialize the system.
Command Center RX User Guide
Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to check and change settings.
Printer Driver User Guide
Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.
1-2-114
2N3/2N2-3
(1) Data Security Kit
The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be
retrieved.
The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no
data cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
Precautions before Installation
Installing the Data Security Kit will delete all data stored in the hard disk by the customer. Before installation,
confirm with the customer if the data can be deleted.
To install the optional function, you need the License Key.
Issue of License Key requires the "Machine No" indicated on your machine, and "product ID."
Be sure to login the machine with the administrator privilege.
Installation Procedure
1. Press the System menu key and then press [System/Network]. If user login administration is disabled, the
user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For
this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
2. Press [Next] of Optional Function.
3. The optional function screen is displayed. Select DATA SECURITY KIT(E) and press [Activate].
4. The license key entry screen is displayed. Enter the license key using the numeric keys and press [Offi-
cial].
5. The confirmation screen appears. Confirm the product name DATA SECURITY KIT(E) and press [Yes].
Follow the onscreen instructions to turn the Main Power Switch off.
6. Turn the Main Power Switch on. The encryption code entry screen is displayed. Ask the customer to
change the encryption code. Using the default value of the encryption code (00000000) will not affect the
data security reliability. If the customer desires to change the code, lead the customer to follow the steps
below.
Press [Encryption].
Press [Backspace] to delete 00000000. Enter the encryption code (8-digit alphanumeric characters) and then
press [OK].
Remind the customer not to forget the encryption code entered.
7. Press [OK]. Hard disk formatting begins.
8. When formatting finishes, follow the onscreen instructions to turn the Main Power Switch off and on again.
9. After the opening screen is displayed, con-
firm that a hard disk icon ( ) is shown in
the lower right corner of the screen.
Figure 1-2-169
*: For details, refer to the Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide.
1-2-115
2N3/2N2-3
(2) Internet FAX Kit
Activating the Internet FAX Kit sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line.
It can only be added when the FAX Kit is installed.
*: To install the optional function, you need the License Key.
Issue of License Key requires the "Machine No" indicated on your machine, and "product ID."
Installation Procedure
1. Press the System menu key and then press [System/Network]. If user login administration is disabled, the
user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For
this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
2. Press [Next] of Optional Function.
3. The optional function screen is displayed. Select “INTERNET FAXKIT(A)” and press [Activate].
4. The license key entry screen is displayed. Enter the license key using the numeric keys and press [Offi-
cial].
5. The confirmation screen appears. Confirm the product name “INTERNET FAXKIT(A)” and press [Yes].
Follow the onscreen instructions to turn the Main Power Switch off.
i-FAX Settings
To send and receive Internet faxes, you must first specify the SMTP server and POP3 server settings.
Specify these settings using Command Center RX on a computer that is connected to this machine via a net-
work.
Refer to the machine’s Operation Guide for information on the network settings.
Accessing Command Center RX
1. Launch your Web browser.
2. In the address or location bar, enter the
machine’s IP address or the host name.
Examples: 192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)
MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
Figure 1-2-170
*: When connecting to Command Center RX, a message may appear that reads "There is a problem with
the security certificate of this website". To prevent this message from appearing, in "Protocol Settings",
set "HTTP" to [On], or install the device certificate of this machine into your Web browser. For details,
refer to the machine’s Operation Guide.
3. Enter the user name and password of the administrator, and click Login.
*: Setting Administrator User Name, and Password restricts general users' access to pages other than the
Start page. For security purposes, setting the Administrator password is highly recommended. The
default Administrator password is factory-set as ‘Admin’.
4. Click ‘Function Settings’ from the navigation bar on the left to view and set values for that particular
category.
5. Click ‘FAX / i-FAX’.
The Transmit Settings dialog box will appear.
*: For details, refer to the Command Center RX User Guide.
1-2-116
2N3/2N2-3
i-FAX Default Settings
Use this page to enable the internet faxing.
The settings available on the page are shown below.
Item Description
Common Transmis Local FAX Name Enter the local fax name.
Settings sion TTI Selects On or Off whether to send the TTI (Transmit Terminal
Identifier) information to the other party.
TTI Position Selects the position of the TTI to be printed on the
transmitted documents.
Dept. Name Usage Set to On to use the account name as the local FAX
name.
The account name appears in place of the local FAX
name.
Retry Times Specify the number of redials from 0 to 14 times.
Recep- Media Type Sets the media type for printing the received documents.
tion Use MP Tray Selects whether or not to include the MP (multi purpose)
tray for auto media selection when printing received
documents. When turned [On], the MP tray will be
included as an option for auto media selection, and when
turned [Off], only the cassettes will be selected.
Reduced RX Size Specifies the printing configuration for printing a
document, which is larger than the selected paper size.
When [Same Size Override] is selected, the document
will be printed on multiple sheets of paper without
reducing the text. When [Reduction Override] is selected,
the document will be printed on one sheet whenever pos-
sible.
Receive Date/Time Selects [On] or [Off] whether to print the reception
information such as the received date, the received time,
the transmitting party's information and the number of
transmitted pages on the top of the received documents.
Duplex Printing Specifies whether or not to use the Duplex mode.
2in1 Printing Enables or disables 2 in1 reception.
FAX Settings Configure settings for FAX. For details, refer to the
Command Center RX User Guide.
i-FAX TX/RX i-FAX Protocol*1 Display whether an i-FAX connection is available or not.
Settings Configure i-FAX in [i-FAX (SMTP & POP3)] on the
Protocol Settings page.
SMTP SMTP Server Name*2 Enter the SMTP server name or SMTP server IP
address. You can enter up to 64 characters. If you enter
the server name, you must specify the IP address of the
DNS server. You can enter the DNS server IP address in
the TCP/IP settings screen. Refer to the machine’s Oper-
ation Guide for details.
1-2-117
2N3/2N2-3
Item Description
i-FAX SMTP SMTP Port Number Set the port number used by SMTP. Normally, 25 is used.
Settings
SMTP Server Timeout Enter the timeout period in seconds.
Authentication Protocol Specify whether SMTP authentication will be used or
whether [POP before SMTP] will be used. This SMTP
authentication is compatible with Microsoft Exchange
2000.
SMTP POP before If you selected [POP before SMTP] in the authentication
SMTP Timeout setting, specify the timeout period in seconds.
Connection Test Tests to confirm that the settings on this page are correct.
When the [Test] button is pressed, this machine tries to
connect to the SMTP server.
Domain Restriction Activate or deactivate to restrict domains. Press the
[Domain List] button to configure. Enter a domain name
that is permitted or rejected. You can also specify the
Email addresses.
POP3 Check Interval Displays the interval, in minutes, for connecting to the
POP3 server to check for incoming e-mails at specific
interval. Specify the interval in the range from 3 minutes
to 60 minutes. The default is 15 minutes.
Run once now Click [Receive] to immediately connect to the POP3
server and check for incoming E-mail.
Domain Restriction Activate or deactivate to restrict domains. Press the
[Domain List] button to configure. Enter a domain name
that is permitted or rejected. You can also specify the
Email addresses.
POP3 User Settings ―
E-mail Address *1 Enter the i-FAX address (E-mail address). You can enter
up to 64 characters.
POP3 Server If you enter the server name, you must specify the IP
Name*1 address of the DNS server. You can enter the DNS server
IP address in the TCP/IP settings screen. Refer to the
machine’s Operation Guide for details.
POP3 Port Sets the port number used by POP3. Normally, 110 is
Number used.
POP3 Server Enter the timeout period in seconds.
Timeout
Login User Enter the login name for the user account. You can enter
Name*1 up to 64 characters.
Login Password*1 Enter the password for the user account. You can enter
up to 64 characters.
Use APOP Specify whether to use APOP authentication. To use
APOP authentication, select [On] in this setting.
1-2-118
2N3/2N2-3
Item Description
i-FAX POP3 Test Runs a test to determine whether the settings specified in
Settings this page are correct.
E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size for E-mails that can be received
in kilobytes. You can set up to 32,767 kilobytes. If 0 is
entered, the setting does not limit the maximum size.
Cover Page Specify whether the E-mail messages are also printed.
Select [On] to print faxes with a cover page attached. If
the E-mail message includes text, the text is printed on
the cover page.
Transmis Transmission Type Allows to choose a method of sending from [Specify for
sion Each Destination], [Via server - On], and [Via server - Off
(Direct SMTP)].
Direct SMTP Sender Displays the sender address used for E-mails sent by
Address*1 Direct SMTP from this machine.
Direct SMTP Port Enter the port number used by Direct SMTP. Normally, 25
Number is used.
Direct SMTP Timeout Sets the timeout time in seconds during which this device
retries to connect to the SMTP server.
Recep- Direct SMTP Port Enter the port number used by Direct SMTP. Normally, 25
tion Number is used.
Direct SMTP Timeout Sets the timeout time in seconds during which this device
retries to connect to the SMTP server.
E-mail E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in
Send Kilobytes. When the value is 0, the limitation for E-mail
Settings size is disabled.
Sender Address*2 Displays the sender address used for E-mails sent from
this machine. Set in [E-mail Address] in POP3 User
Settings.
Signature Displays the signature to be inserted in the end of the
Email body. Set on the [E-mail Settings] page.
Function Default The default settings can be changed in [Common/Job
Default Settings] page.
*: After completing the settings, click [Submit] to save the settings.
*1: When Direct SMTP is used, this must always be set.
*2: When Internet FAX is used, this must always be set.
*: For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
1-2-119
2N3/2N2-3
(3) Card Authentication Kit
This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential
or personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern
on the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine
detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank and prohibiting transmis-
sion.
*: To install the optional function, you need the License Key.
Issue of License Key requires the "Machine No" indicated on your machine, and "product ID."
Installation Procedure
1. Press the System menu key and then press [System/Network]. If user login administration is disabled, the
user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For
this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
2. Press [Next] of Optional Function.
3. The optional function screen is displayed. Select “CARD AUTHENTICATIONKIT(B)” and press [Activate].
4. The license key entry screen is displayed. Enter the license key using the numeric keys and press [Offi-
cial].
5. The confirmation screen appears. Confirm the product name “CARD AUTHENTICATIONKIT(B)” and
press [Yes]. Follow the onscreen instructions to turn the Main Power Switch off.
*: To use a SSFC card, run maintenance mode U222 and set SSFC.
Setting User Login
1. Make the settings of Local Authentication in User Login/Job Accounting or User Login on the machine.
*: For User Login setting, refer to Management in the Operation Guide of the machine.
When you enable User Login on the machine, you need to make the setting of user account for the
printer driver in order to print by the computer. For details, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide, Device
Settings, and Administrator Settings.
Registering/deleting the ID card information
The procedures below are to register or delete the card information of a pre-registered user.
For new registration or change of user information on Local User List, refer to Management in the Operation
Guide of the machine.
To register the ID card information
To login using the ID card, you need to register the ID card information in the user information.
Follow the steps below.
1. Press the System Menu key.
*: If Local Authentication has been set in User Login, the ID Card Login screen appears. Refer to Login on
the next page or the procedure of Keyboard Login, and login using the ID card registered with adminis-
trator privileges or using the login user name.
2. Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
*: If User Login is disabled, the ID Card Login screen appears. Refer to Login on the next page or the pro-
cedure of Keyboard Login, and login using the ID card registered with administrator privileges or using
the login user name.
3. In User Login Setting, press [Next] → [Local User List], and then [Register/Edit].
4. Select the user for whom you wish to register the ID card information, and press [Detail].
5. Press [Change] in [ID Card information].
6. Hold the ID card to be registered over the card reader.
Completed. appears and the screen returns to the Detail menu.
7. In the Detail menu, press [Register]. The confirmation screen appears.
8. Press [Yes]. The ID card information is now registered.
1-2-120
2N3/2N2-3
To register on the computer
The ID Register utility for registering/deleting ID card information on the computer is provided.
You can download the ID Register utility from the vendor’s website.
(4) ThinPrint Option
This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
*: To install the optional function, you need the License Key.
Issue of License Key requires the "Machine No" indicated on your machine, and "product ID."
Installation Procedure
1. Press the System menu key and then press [System/Network]. If user login administration is disabled, the
user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For
this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
2. Press [Next] of Optional Function.
3. The optional function screen is displayed. Select “UG-33” and press [Activate].
4. The license key entry screen is displayed. Enter the license key using the numeric keys and press [Offi-
cial].
5. The confirmation screen appears. Confirm the product name “UG-33” and press [Yes]. Follow the
onscreen instructions to turn the Main Power Switch off.
1-2-121
2N3/2N2-3
(5) Emulation Upgrade Kit
Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option
enables IBM Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.
To install the optional function, you need the License Key.
Issue of License Key requires the "Machine No" indicated on your machine, and "product ID."
Installation Procedure
1. Press the System menu key and then press [System/Network]. If user login administration is disabled, the
user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For
this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
2. Press [Next] of Optional Function.
3. The optional function screen is displayed. Select “UG-34” and press [Activate].
4. The license key entry screen is displayed. Enter the license key using the numeric keys and press [Offi-
cial].
5. The confirmation screen appears. Confirm the product name “UG-34” and press [Yes]. Follow the
onscreen instructions to turn the Main Power Switch off.
1-2-122
2N3/2N2
1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the
machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Start
Enter “10871087” using
Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item
number using the cursor up/down keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes Repeat the same
maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the cursor
up/down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
1-3-1
2N3/2N2
(2) Maintenance modes item list
Item Initial setting
Section Content of maintenance item
No. 65ppm 75ppm
General U000 Output Maintenance Report -
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode -
U002 Setting the factory default data -
U003 Setting the service telephone number -
U004 Setting the machine number -
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID -
U018 Check Firmware Checksum -
U019 Firmware Version -
Initializa- U021 Memory initializing -
tion
U024 HDD formatting -
U025 Firmware Update (Security) -
U026 Pulling Backup Data -
Drive, U030 Checking the operation of the motors -
paper
U031 Checking switches and sensors for -
feed and paper conveying
paper
convey- U032 Checking the operation of the clutches -
ing sys- U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids -
tem
U034 Adjusting the print start timing
LSU Out Top 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
LSU Out Left 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
LSU Out Top B/W - 0/0/0/0/0/0
LSU Out Top 3/4 0/0/0/0/0/0
U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper 330/210
U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors -
U039 Adjusting the magnification 0
U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper
Paper Loop Amount -5/-1/-8/-1/ -5/-2/-10/-2/
-9/-1/-5/-1/ -11/-2/-5/-2/
-8/-1/-9/-1 -10/-2/-11/-2
Paper Loop Amount B/W -5/-13/-14/
-5/-13/-14
Paper Loop Amount 3/4 -5/-6/-6/ -5/-6/-6/
-6/-6/-6 -6/-6/-6
U052 Setting the fuser motor control
Set Loop Sensor -
Loop Sensor Control Off/On/Off/Off
Set Loop Sensor Valid On
1-3-2
2N3/2N2
Item Initial setting
Section Content of maintenance item
No. 65ppm 75ppm
Drive, U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor
paper speed
feed and Motor1 8/0/0/0 7/0/0/0
paper
convey- Motor2 0/0/0/16/0 0/0/0/15/0
ing sys- Motor3 0/-28/0/0/0/ 0/-26/0/0/0/
tem 59/0/64/-25/-25/0/0/0/ 54/0/59/-22/-22/0/0/0/
0 0
Motor4 - 15/17
Motor5 - 0/0/12/0
Motor6 - 0/-22/0/0/0/
46/0/50/-19/-19
Motor1 Half 16/0/0/0 14/0/0/0
Motor2 Half 0/0/0/32/0 0/0/0/30/0
Motor3 Half 0/-56/0/0/0/ 0/-51/0/0/0/
118/0/128/ 108/0/118/
-49/-49 -44/-44
Motor1 3/4 10/0/0/0 9/0/0/0
Motor2 3/4 0/0/0/20/0 0/0/0/20/0
Motor3 3/4 0/-34/0/0/0/ 0/-34/0/0/0/
72/0/78/-29/-29 72/0/78/-29/-29
U059 Setting fan mode
Fan Mode Mode1
Cooling Mode 0
Optical U061 Checking the operation of the exposure -
lamp
U063 Adjusting the shading position 0
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification 0/0
U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge reg- 0/0
istration
U067 Adjusting the scanner center line 0/0
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for origi- 0/0
nals from the DP
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification 0/0/0
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0/0/0/0
U072 Adjusting the DP center line 0/0
U073 Checking the scanner operation -
U074 DP input response adjustment 1
1-3-3
2N3/2N2
Item Initial setting
Section Content of maintenance item
No. 65ppm 75ppm
Optical U087 Setting DP reading position modification 125/125/125
operation
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern -
U091 Setting the white line correction 112/112/112/75/0
U099 Adjusting original size detection 50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50
High U100 Adjusting main high voltage
voltage -
Adj AC Bias
Set AC Auto Adj On
Set DC Bias -
Adj DC Bias 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/- 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Set Low Temp 1
Set Charger Freq 8745/8745/ 9161/8016/
9084/10690 10690/10690
Chk Current -
U101 Setting the voltage for the primary trans-
fer
Normal Full 145 151
Normal Half 117 120
Normal 3/4 135 135
Normal B/W - 161
Add Color Normal (CMYK) 2/2/5
Add Color Heavy4/5 (CMYK)
Add Color 2nd Normal (CMYK) -7/-7/-5/-10 -8/-8/-6/-11
Add Color 2nd Heavy4/5 (CMYK)
Surround Correct Off
U106 Setting the voltage for the secondary -
transfer
Light/Normal 1st 183/154/144 195/160/150
Light/Normal 2nd 220/177/142 225/192/149
Normal2/3 1st 169/143/135
Light/Normal 1st 3/4(Gloss) 191/166/133
Light/Normal 2nd 3/4(Gloss) 174/148/139 195/160/150
Light/Normal 1st B/W 163/140/120 183/148/130
Light/Normal 2nd B/W 183/156/147 195/162/154
Normal2/3 1st 220/178/144 225/194/151
1-3-4
2N3/2N2
Item Initial setting
Section Content of maintenance item
No. 65ppm 75ppm
High U106 Normal2/3 2nd 169/144/138
voltage 191/168/136
Normal2/3 1st 3/4(Gloss)
Normal2/3 2nd 3/4(Gloss) 174/149/141 195/162/154
Normal2/3 1st B/W 163/140/120 183/148/130
Normal2/3 2nd B/W 170/145/140
Light/Normal 2nd B/W 193/170/140
Heavy1 1st 3/4 141/128/124 145/128/124
Heavy1 2nd 3/4 158/141/124 160/143/124
Heavy2/3 1st Half 158/141/124 160/143/124
Heavy2/3 2nd Half 158/141/124 160/143/124
Heavy4/5 1st Half 156/149/141 162/154/146
Heavy4/5 2nd Half 1/1/1/1/ 1/1/1/1/
161/144/158 168/148/158
OHP 183/154/144 195/160/150
Bias 220/177/142 225/192/149
U107 Setting the transfer cleaning voltage
Belt(A) 224/191/212/- 231/194/212/243
Belt(B) 250/217/238/- 250/220/238/250
U108 Setting separation shift bias
Output 40/40/40/40/0/0
Output 3/4 40/40/40/40
Output B/W ― 40/40/40/40
Timing 0/0/0
U110 Checking the drum count -
U111 Checking the drum drive time -
U117 Checking the drum number -
U118 Displaying the drum history -
U119 Setting the drum -
U122 Checking the transfer belt unit number -
U123 Displaying the transfer belt unit history -
U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count -
U128 Setting transfer high-voltage timing 0/0/0
1-3-5
2N3/2N2
Item Initial setting
Section Content of maintenance item
No. 65ppm 75ppm
Developer U130 Initial setting for the developer -
U131 Adjusting the toner sensor control voltage
Manual 150/150/150/150
Mode Auto
U132 Replenishing toner forcibly
U135 Checking toner motor operation -
U136 Setting toner near end detection 3/3
U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity -
outside the machine
U140 Displaying developer bias
Sleeve DC 70/70/70/70/- 70/70/70/70/70
Sleeve AC 168/168/168/ 168/168/168/168/
168/- 168
Mag DC 155/155/155/ 155/155/155/155/
155/- 155
Mag AC 224/224/224/ 224/224/224/200/
200/- 200
Sleeve Freq 5345/-/ 5345/5345/
5345/5345 5345/5345
Sleeve Duty 43/- 43/43
Mag Duty 68/- 68/68
AC Calib
Magnification 10/10/10/10
High Altitude Mode1
Image Preference
Copy 0
U147 Setting for toner applying operation
Mode Mode1
Upper Limit 2.0
Minimum 10
Interval Number 500/100/50
U148 Setting drum refresh mode
Normal 2
Dew Condensation 0
U155 Checking sensors for toner -
1-3-6
2N3/2N2-4
Item Initial setting
Section Content of maintenance item
No. 65ppm 75ppm
Developer U156 Setting the toner replenishment level
Supply 512/512/512/ 512/512/512/
512/- 512/512
Empty 100/100/100/ 100/100/100/
100/- 100/100
U157 Checking the developer drive time -
U158 Checking the developer count -
Fuser U161 Setting the fuser control temperature
Warm Up 170/150/100/175/170/ 175/150/100/180/
130/40/100 175/130/40/100
Print 170/0 175/0
Grain Mode Mode0
Ready Time Adjust 5
U163 Resetting the fuser problem data -
U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count -
U169 Checking/setting the fuser power source -
U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature -
Operation U200 Turning all LEDs on -
panel and
U201 Initializing the touch panel -
support
equip- U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring sys- -
ment tem
U203 Checking DP operation -
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a Off/Coin Vender
key card or key counter
U206 Setting the presence or absence of a
coin vender
On/Off Config Off
No Coin Action Off
Price 10/10/10/10/100/50/30/50/
100/50/30/50/100/50/30/50
Normal/AD 10/10/10/10/100/50/30/50/
100/50/30/50/100/50/30/50
Print 10/10/10/10/100/50/30/50
Apl 10/10/10/10
Boot Mode Copy Service
Apl Charge Mode Off
U207 Checking the operation panel keys -
U208 Setting the paper size for the side deck Letter (Inch)/A4 (Metric)
1-3-7
2N3/2N2
Item Initial setting
Section Content of maintenance item
No. 65ppm 75ppm
Operation U209 Set RTC (Real Time Clock) Date -
panel and
U221 Setting the USB host lock function Off
support
equip- U222 Setting the IC card type Other
ment U223 Operation panel lock Unlock
U224 Panel sheet extension -
U234 Setting punch destination Inch (Inch)/Europe Metric (Metric)
U237 Setting finisher stack quantity 0/0
U240 Checking the operation of the finisher -
U241 Checking the operation of the switches -
of the finisher
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors -
U244 Checking the DP switches -
U245 Checking messages -
U246 Setting the finisher
Finisher 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Booklet 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
U247 Setting the paper feed device -
U249 Finisher operation test -
Mode U250 Checking/clearing the maintenance 600000/600000/300000/300000/300000/0/
setting cycle 150000/150000/150000/150000/150000/
150000/150000
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
counter
U252 Setting the destination ―
U253 Switching between double and single Single counts
counts
U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Eject
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code ―
U271 Setting the page count 2/3
U276 Setting the copy count mode Mode1
U278 Setting the delivery date ―
U284 Setting 2 color copy mode Mono Color
U285 Setting service status page On
U323 Setting abnormal temperature and On
humidity warning
U325 Setting the paper interval Off/1
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication On/8
U327 Setting the cassette heater control Off
1-3-8
2N3/2N2
Item Initial setting
Section Content of maintenance item
No. 65ppm 75ppm
Mode U332 Setting the size conversion factor
setting 1.0
Rate
Mode 0
Level 1 1.0
Level 2 2.5
U340 Setting the applied mode 190/1
Adj Memory 0
Adj Max Job Copy:10 / Printer:50
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for ―
printing function
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy Off
mode
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due 0
indication
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode
Image U402 Adjusting margins of image printing 4.0/3.0/3.0/3.9
process- 2.0/2.0/2.0/2.0
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an origi-
ing
nal on the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an origi- 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0/
nal from the DP 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration 0
for memory image printing
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Table1
U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically ―
U412 Adjusting the uneven density ―
U415 Adjusting the print position automatically ―
U425 Setting the target ―
U429 Setting the offset for the color balance 0/0/0/0
U460 Adjusting the conveying sensor
Conveying Sensor 0/0
On/Off Config Off
U464 Setting the ID correction operation
Permission On
Time Interval 480
Mode Normal
On/Sleep Out On
AP/NE On
Leaving Time 480
1-3-9
2N3/2N2-1
Item Initial setting
Section Content of maintenance item
No. 65ppm 75ppm
Image U464 Driving Time 300
process- 3600
Timing
ing
Target Value 890/910/910/800/400/400/380/430
Print Rate (B/W) 50
Calib ―
Solid Image Off
U465 Data reference for ID correction ―
U467 Setting the color registration adjustment
Color Regist On
Timing 10
U468 Checking the color registration data ―
U469 Adjusting the color registration ―
U470 Setting the JPEG compression ratio
Copy 90/90/90/90
Send 30/40/51/70/90/30/40/51/70/90
30/40/51/70/90/30/40/51/70/90
15/25/90/15/25/90/
15/25/90/15/25/90
System 90/90
U474 Checking LSU cleaning operation
Cnt 1000
Timing Print End
U485 Setting the image processing mode 1/0
U486 Setting color/black and white operation Mode2
mode
Others U520 Set TDRS -
U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed -
locations
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts -
U904 Checking/clearing the call for service -
counts
U905 Checking counts by optional devices -
U906 Resetting partial operation control -
U908 Checking the total counter value -
U910 Clearing the print coverage data -
U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes -
U917 Setting backup data reading/writing -
U920 Checking the copy counts -
1-3-10
2N3/2N2
Item Initial setting
Section Content of maintenance item
No. 65ppm 75ppm
Others U927 Clearing the all copy counts and -
machine life counts (one time only)
U928 Checking machine life counts -
U930 Checking/clearing the charger roller -
count
U933 Set Maintenance Mode Execute Log -
U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP 0/0/0
U952 Maintenance mode workflow -
U964 Checking of log -
U969 Checking of toner area code -
U977 Data capture mode -
U978 Clear Optional Function -
U984 Checking the developer unit number -
U985 Displaying the developer unit history -
U989 HDD Scan disk -
U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp -
to light
U991 Checking the scanner operation count -
1-3-11
2N3/2N2
(3) Contents of the maintenance mode items
Item No. Description
U000 Output Maintenance Report
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call
occurrences. Outputs the event log or service status page. Also sends output data to the USB
memory.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the mainte-
nance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be output using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Output list
Maintenance List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
User Status Outputs the user status page
Service Status Outputs the service status page
Event Outputs the event log
Network Status Outputs the network status page
All Outputs the all reports
3. Press the start key. A list is output.
4. Press the start key. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/Letter paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed
location.
The output status is displayed.
Display Description
--- List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
Active Outputs the user status page
OK Outputs the service status page
Error Outputs the event log
1-3-12
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U000 Method: Send to the USB memory
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has
gone off, switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
5. Press the start key.
6. Select the item to be send.
7. Select [Text] or [HTML].
Display Output list
Print Outputs the report
USB (Text) Sends output data to the USB memory (text type)
USB (HTML) Sends output data to the USB memory (HTML type)
8. Press the start key.
Output will be sent to the USB memory.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-13
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U000 Event log
Event Log
MFP (2) 2013/01/31 08:40
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Firmware version 2N2_2000.000.000 2013.01.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(8) Paper Jam Log (12) Counter Log
# Count. Event Descriprions Date and Time
16 9999999 0501.01.08.01.01 2013/01/23 11:56
(f) J0000: 0 J0527: 1 (g) C0030: 0
J0100: 1 J0533: 1 C0070: 1
15 8888888 4002.01.08.01.01 2013/01/23 11:54
J0101: 11 J0534: 1 C0080: 2
14 7777777 0501.01.08.01.01 2013/01/23 11:52
J0102: 2 J0535: 1 C0100: 3
13 6666666 4002.01.08.01.01 2013/01/23 11:46
2013/01/23 11:36 J0103: 1 J0536: 1 C0120: 4
12 5555555 0501.01.08.01.01
2013/01/23 11:26 J0104: 1 J0537: 1 C0150: 5
11 4444444 4002.01.08.01.01
2013/01/23 10:56 J0105: 1 J0545: 1 C0160: 6
10 3333333 0501.01.08.01.01
2013/01/21 11:56 J0107: 1 J0555: 1 C0170: 7
9 2222222 4002.01.08.01.01
2013/01/21 10:56 J0108: 1 J1301: 1 C0180: 8
8 1111111 0501.01.08.01.01
2013/01/21 11:52 J0110: 1 J1302: 1 C0350: 9
7 999999 4002.01.08.01.01
2013/01/20 11:36 J0112: 1 C0620: 10
6 888888 0501.01.08.01.01
2013/01/20 10:26 J0113: 9 C0630: 11
5
4 0501.01.08.01.01
777777
666666
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01 2013/01/13 14:16 J0114: 1 C0640: 12
(b) (c) (d) 2013/01/13 11:56 J0115: 1 C0650: 13
3 555555 (a) 4002.01.08.01.01 (e)
2013/01/11 16:26 J0131: 1 C0660: 14
2 444444 0501.01.08.01.01
2013/01/10 11:56 J0132: 1 C0670: 15
1 1 4002.01.08.01.01
J0200: 1 C0800: 16
J0210: 1 C0830: 17
(9) Service Call Log J0211: 1 C0840: 18
# Count. Service Code Date and Time J0212: 1 C0870: 19
8 1111111 01.6000 2013/01/23 11:52 J0213: 1 C0920: 20
7 999999 01.2100 2013/01/23 11:46 J0214: 1 C0980: 21
6 888888 01.4000 2013/01/23 11:36
J0215: 1 C1000: 22
5 777777 01.6000 2013/01/23 11:26
J0300: 1 C1010: 23
4 666666 01.2100 2013/01/23 10:56
2013/01/21 11:56
J0501: 1 (h) T00: 10
3 555555 01.4000 J0502: 1 T01: 20
2 444444 01.6000 2013/01/21 10:56
J0506: 1 T02: 30
1 1 01.2100 2013/01/21 11:52
J0507: 1 T03: 40
J0508: 1 T04: 50
(10) Maintenance Log J0509: 1 T05: 999
# Count. Item. Date and Time J0511: 1
J0512: 1
Log Data Nothing... J0516: 1
J0517: 1
J0518: 1
(11) Unknown toner Log
J0519: 1
# Count. Item. Date and Time
J0523: 1
5 1111111 01.00 2013/01/20 10:26
J0524: 1
4 999999 01.00 2013/01/13 14:16
J0525: 1
3 888888 01.00 2013/01/13 11:56
J0526: 1
2 777777 01.00 2013/01/11 16:26
1 666666 01.00 2013/01/10 11:56
(7) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Figure 1-3-1
Detail of event log
No. Items Description
(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine soft version
(4) Engine boot version
1-3-14
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U000 Detail of event log
No. Items Description
(5) Controller BROM version
(6) Operation panel mask version
(7) Machine serial number
(8) Paper Jam # Count. Event Descriptions
Log The total page count Log code (hexadeci-
Remembers 1 to 16 of
occurrence. If the occur- at the time of the mal, 5 categories)
rence of the previous paper jam.
paper jam is less than (a) Cause of a paper
16, all of the paper jams jam
are logged. When the (b) Paper source
occurrence excesseds (c) Paper size
16, the oldest occur- (d) Paper type
rence is removed. (e) Paper eject
(a) Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
For details on the case of paper jam, refer to Paper Misfeed Detection.
(P.1-4-3)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
05: Cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck)
06: Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
07: Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
08 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)
00: (Not specified) 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 (12 x 8)
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 13: Custom size A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 1E: C4 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1F: Postcard B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 20: Reply-paid post- 33: Folio
89: B5E card 34: Western type 2
0A: A3 21: Oficio II 35: Western type 4
1-3-15
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U000
No. Items Description
(8) Paper Jam (d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
cont. Log 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
01: Plain
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(e) Detail of paper eject location (Hexadecimal)
01: Face down (FD)
02: Face up (FU)/
4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FU)
03: 4000-sheet finisher main tray (FD)
05: Job separator tray
06: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FU)
07: 4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FD)
09: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FD)
0A: Center-folding unit tray
0B: Mailbox tray 1 (FD)
0C: Mailbox tray 1 (FU)
15: Mailbox tray 2 (FD)
16: Mailbox tray 2 (FU)
1F: Mailbox tray 3 (FD)
20: Mailbox tray 3 (FU)
29: Mailbox tray 4 (FD)
2A: Mailbox tray 4 (FU)
33: Mailbox tray 5 (FD)
34: Mailbox tray 5 (FU)
3D: Mailbox tray 6 (FD)
3E: Mailbox tray 6 (FU)
47: Mailbox tray 7 (FD)
48: Mailbox tray 7 (FU)
04/0D/0E: Reserved
Date and Time
Date and time of the occurrence of paper jam.
1-3-16
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U000
No. Items Description
(9) Service Call # Count. Service Code
Log The total page Self diagnostic error code
Remembers 1 to 8
of occurrence of self count at the time of (See page 1-4-60)
diagnostics error. If the self diagnostics
the occurrence of error. 0X:YYYY
the previous diag- Where 0X is:
nostics error is less 01: Service Call/ System
than 8, all of the error has occurred
diagnostics errors 02: after Service Call has
are logged. occurred, power is turned
on and off, and disconnec-
tion has been executed
YYYY is a self-diagnostics
error code
Example: 01.6000
Date and Time
Date and time of occurrence of self-diag-
nostic error.
(10) Maintenance # Count. Item
Log
Remembers 1 to 8 The total page Code of maintenance
of occurrence of count at the time of replacing item
replacement. If the the replacement of (1 byte, 2 categories)
occurrence of the the toner container.
previous replace- First byte (Replacing item)
ment of toner con- 01: Toner container
tainer is less than 8, * :The toner Second byte
all of the occur- replacement log is (Type of replacing item)
rences of replace- triggered by toner 00: Black
ment are logged. empty. 01: Cyan
This record may 02: Magenta
contain such a ref- 03: Yellow
erence as the toner
container is First byte (Replacing item)
inserted twice or a 02: Maintenance kit
used toner con- Second byte
tainer is inserted. (Type of replacing item)
01: MK-8715A
02: MK-8715B
03: MK-8715C
Date and Time
Date and time of replacement of the main-
tenance items.
1-3-17
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U000
No. Items Description
(11) Unknown Toner # Count. Item
Log The total page count Unknown toner log
Remembers 1 to 5
of occurrence of at the time of the code
unknown toner toner empty error (1 byte, 2 categories)
detection. If the with using an
occurrence of the unknown toner con- First byte
previous unknown tainer. 01: Toner container
toner detection is (Fixed)
less than 5, all of Second byte
the unknown toner 00: Black
detection are 01: Cyan
logged. 02: Magenta
03: Yellow
Date and Time
Date and time of occurrence of toner con-
tainer replacement request display.
(12) Counter Log (f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic (h) Maintenance item
error replacing
Comprised of
Indicates the log Indicates the log Indicates the log coun-
three log coun- counter of paper counter of self diag- ter depending on the
ters including jams depending on nostics errors maintenance item for
paper jams, self
location. depending on maintenance.
diagnostics cause.
errors, and Refer to Paper Jam T: Toner container
replacement of Log. Example: 00: Black
the toner con-
C6000: 4 01: Cyan
tainer. All instances includ- 02: Magenta
ing those are not Self diagnostics 03: Yellow
occurred are dis- error 6000 has hap- M: Maintenance kit
played. pened four times. 00: MK-8715A
01: MK-8715B
02: MK-8715C
Example:
T00: 1
The toner container has
been replaced once.
* :The toner replace-
ment log is triggered by
toner empty.
This record may con-
tain such a reference
as the toner container
is inserted twice or a
used toner container is
inserted.
1-3-18
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U000 Service status page (1)
Service Status Page
MFP (2) 2012/10/27 12:00
(3) (4) (5)
(1) Firmware version 2N2_2000.000.000 2012.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Controller Information (30) FAX Information Slot1/Slot2
(31) Rings (Normal) 3
Memory status
(32) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(7) Total Size 3.5 GB
(33) Rings (TAD) 3
(34) Option DIMM Size 16 MB
Time
(8) Local Time Zone +01:00 Amsterdam
(9) Date and Time 27/10/2010 12:00 (35) FRPO Status
(10) Time Server 10.183.53.13 User Top Margin A1+A2/100 0.00
User Left Margin A3+A4/100 0.00
Installed Options .
(11) Document Processor Installed .
(12) Paper feeder Cassette (500 x 2) .
(13) Side Feeder Cassette (3000) .
(14) Finisher 4000-Finisher .
(15) Job Separator Installed .
(16) Document Guaed (A) Installed .
(17) Card Authentication Kit (B) Installed .
(18) Internet FAX Kit (A) Installed .
Security Kit (E) Installed .
(19) Data Security Kit (E) Software Type I .
(95) UG-33 Installed .
(20) UG-34 Installed .
(21) USB Keyboard Connected .
(22) USB Keyboard Type US-English .
(96) Scan extention kit(A) Installed .
Print Coverage .
(23) Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) .
(24) Total .
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 .
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 .
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33 .
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(25) Copy e-MPS error control Y6 0
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33 RP Code
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44 (36) 1234 5678 9012
(26) Printer (37) 5678 9012 3456
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 (38) 9012 3456 7890
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 (39) 3456 7890 1234
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(27) FAX
(28) K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
Period (27/10/2010 - 03/11/2010 08:40)
(29) Last Page K/C/M/Y(%) 1.00 / 2.22 / 3.33 / 4.44
1 (6) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Figure 1-3-2
1-3-19
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U000 Service status page (2)
Service Status Page
MFP 2012/10/27 12:00
Firmware version 2N4_2000.000.000 2012.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Engine Information Send Information
(40) NVRAM Version _1F31225_1F31225 (44) Date and Time 10/10/27
(41) Scanner Version 2N2_1200.001.089 (45) Address
(42) FAX Slot1
FAX BOOT Version 5JT_5000.001.001
FAX APL Version 5JT_5100.001.001
FAX IPL Version 5JT_5200.001.001
(43) MAC Address 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D
1/2 (46) (47)
(48) 100/100
(49) 0/0/0/0
(50) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64)
(65) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(66) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
00000000000000000000000000000000/0000000000000000000000000000000000000000/000000/ (67) (68) (69)
(70) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(71) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(72) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(73) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(74) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(75) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(76) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(77) XXXXXXXX
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (78) (79)
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (80) (81)
(82) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00
0/3/ (83) (84)
0/12.3/56.7/ (85) (86) (87)
1/1/1/0/1/0 2010/12/15 12:34:56 (88)
1/5/ (89)(90)
1/1/ (91)(92)
1/ (93)
ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ (94)
2 [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Figure 1-3-3
1-3-20
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U000 Detail of service status page
No. Description Supplement
(1) Firmware version -
(2) System date -
(3) Engine soft version -
(4) Engine boot version -
(5) Operation panel mask version -
(6) Machine serial number -
(7) Total memory size -
(8) Local time zone -
(9) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour:minute
(10) NTP server name -
(11) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not installed
document processor
(12) Presence or absence of the Paper feeder/Large capacity feeder/Not Installed
paper feeder
(13) Presence or absence of the side Side deck/Side multi tray/Side paper feeder/
feeder Side large capacity feeder/Not Installed
(14) Presence or absence of the 4000-sheet finisher/
finisher Not Installed
(15) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
job separator
(16) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
printed document guard kit
(17) Presence or absence of the IC Installed/Not Installed/Trial
card authentication kit
(18) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
internet fax kit
(19) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
data security kit
(20) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
UG-34
(21) Presence or absence of the Connected/Not connected
USB keyboard
(22) USB keyboard setting display US-English/US-English with Euro/German/French
(23) Page of relation to the A4/Letter * :Print Coverage provides a close-matching refer-
ence of toner consumption and will not match with
the actual toner consumption.
(24) Average coverage for total Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(25) Average coverage for copy Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
1-3-21
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U000
No. Description Supplement
(26) Average coverage for printer Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(27) Average coverage for fax Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(28) Cleared date and output date -
(29) Coverage on the final output -
page
(30) Fax kit information This item is printed only when the fax kit is
installed.
(31) Number of rings 0 to 15
(32) Number of rings before auto- 0 to 15
matic switching
(33) Number of rings before connect- 0 to 15
ing to answering machine
(34) Optional DIMM size -
(35) FRPO setting -
(36) RP code Code the engine software version and the date of
update.
(37) RP code Code the main software version and the date of
update.
(38) RP code Code the engine software version and the date of
the previous update.
(39) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the
previous update.
(40) NV RAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
(a) Consistency of the present software version
and the database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version
and the ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME database ver-
sion
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and
(e) are identical with (c) and (f).
(41) Scanner firmware version -
1-3-22
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U000
No. Description Supplement
(42) Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the fax kit is
installed.
(43) Mac address -
(44) The last sent date and time -
(45) Transmission address -
(46) Destination information -
(47) Area information -
(48) Margin settings Top margin/Left margin
(49) L settings L Top margin integer part/
L Top margin decimal part/
L Left margin integer part/
L Left margin decimal part/
(50) Life counter (The first line) Machine life/MP tray/Cassette 1/Cassette 2/
Cassette 3/Cassette 4/Cassette 5/Cassette 6/
Cassette 7/Duplex
Life counter (The second line) Drum unit K/Drum unit C/Drum unit M/Drum unit Y/
Transfer belt unit/Developer unit K/
Developer unit C/Developer unit M/
Developer unit Y/Maintenance kit A/
Maintenance kit B/Maintenance kit C
(51) Panel lock information 0: Off
1: Partial lock 2: Full lock
(52) USB information U00: Not installed/U01: Full speed/U02: Hi speed
(53) Paper handling information 0: Paper source unit select/1: Paper source unit
(54) Color printing double count 0: All single counts
mode 1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)
(55) Black and white printing double 0: All single counts
count mode 1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)
(56) Billing counting timing -
(57) Temperature (machine inside) -
(58) Temperature (machine outside) -
(59) Relative humidity -
(machine outside)
(60) Humidity (machine inside) -
(61) Fixed assets number -
(62) Job end judgment time-out time -
1-3-23
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U000
No. Description Supplement
(63) Job end detection mode -
(64) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off
1: On
(65) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
* : For details on settings, 1: Normal 1 1: Middle
refer to “Prescribe Com- 2: Normal 2 2: Low
mands Reference Man- 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
ual. 4: Heavy 1 Duplex settings
5: Heavy 2 0: Disable
6: Heavy 3 1: Enable
7: Extra Heavy
(66) Calibration information Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(67) Calibration information -
(68) Calibration information -
(69) Calibration information -
(70) Calibration information -
(71) Calibration information -
(72) Calibration information -
(73) Calibration information -
(74) Calibration information -
(75) Calibration information -
(76) RFID information -
(77) RFID reader/writer version infor- -
mation
(78) Color table version for printer -
(79) Color table 2 version for printer -
(80) Color table version for copy -
(81) Color table 2 version for copy -
(82) Maintenance information -
(83) Altitude 0: Standard
1: High altitude 1
2: High altitude 2
(84) Charger roller correction 1 to 5
(85) Configuring toner coverage 0: Full-color count display
counters 1: Color coverage count display
(86) Low coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(87) Middle coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
1-3-24
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U000
No. Description Supplement
(88) Data Sanitization information -
(89) Toner low setting 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
(90) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(91) Limiting shifting for one-page 0: Invalid (No shift limit)
document 1: Valid (Shift limit)
(92) Setting confirmation display for 0: Not shown
banner printing 1: Shown on every page
(93) Full-page print mode 0: Normal mode (Factory setting)
1: Full-page mode
(94) Drum serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(95) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
UG-33
(96) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
Scan extension kit (A)
Code conversion
A B C D E F G H I J
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
Description
Exits the maintenance mode and return to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
1. Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
1-3-25
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U002 Setting the factory default data
Description
Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings.
Purpose
To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport.
* : The parameter settings within the system menu will also be reset to the factory-set values.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Mode1(All)].
3. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner return to the home position.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error.
When errors occurred, turn main power switch off then on, and execute initialization using
maintenance item U002.
* : Reset the following setting by using the system menu.
[FAX] - Transmission - Local FAX Name Entry
Error codes
Codes Description
0001 Entity error
0002 Controller error
0003 OS error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
U003 Setting the service telephone number
Description
Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected.
Purpose
To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
The keys to enter the number are displayed on the touch panel.
2. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits).
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-26
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U004 Setting the machine number
Description
Sets or displays the machine number.
Purpose
Performed to assign or confirm the machine ID when the EEPROM on the main PWB has been
replaced.
Method
1. Press the start key.
If the machine serial number of engine PWB matches with that of main PWB
Display Description
Machine No. Displays the machine serial number
If the machine serial number of engine PWB does not match with that of main PWB
Display Description
Machine No.(Main) Displays the machine serial number of main
Machine No.(Eng) Displays the machine serial number of engine
Setting
Carry out if the machine serial number does not match.
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Writing of serial No. starts.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-27
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID
Description
Sets the maintenance mode ID.
Purpose
Modify maintenance mode ID for more security.
Method
1. Press the start key.
Display Description
New ID Enter a new 8-digit ID
New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit ID (to confirm)
Initialize Initialize the ID
Setting
1. Select [New ID].
2. Enter a new 8-digit ID on ten keys (0 – 9, *, #). * and # are mandatory to contain.
3. Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
4. Enter a new 8-digit ID on ten keys (0 – 9, *, #).
5. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Method: [Initialize]
1. Select [Initialize].
2. Press the start key. ID is initialized.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U018 Check Firmware Checksum
Description
Investigate that the firmware has not been modified.
Purpose
Investigate that the firmware has not been modified by re-calculate the checksum.
Method
1. Press the start key.
Display Description
EXpected Displays the expected checksum.
Result Displays the calculated checksum.
Execute Perform the self-investigation.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key.
Displays the checksum in [Expected] after execution.
1-3-28
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U018
If the verified result was incorrect, the following are displayed.
Display Description
f001 An expected-value file does not exist.
f002 Reading the expected-value file failed.
f003 Illegal data in the expected-value file (not 64-byte data)
s001t Failure to read the checksum
NG The expected value and the checksum do not match.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U019 Firmware Version
Description
Displays the part number of the firmware version to each PWB.
Purpose
To check the part number or to decide, if the newest version of firmware is installed.
Method
1. Press the start key. The firmware version are displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description
Main Main firmware
MMI Main operation firmware
Panel Main Operation firmware
Panel Boot Operation booting
Browser Browser firmware
Engine Engine firmware
Engine Boot Engine booting
Scanner Scanner firmware
Scanner Boot Scanner booting
RFID RFID firmware
IH CPU IH CPU firmware
IH CPU Boot IH CPU booting
Motor CPU Motor CPU firmware
Motor CPU Boot Motor CPU booting
Dictionary Dictionary software
Option Language Optional language software
OCR OCR software
1-3-29
2N3/2N2-2
Item No. Description
U019
Display Description
Color Table1(Copy)* Color table 1 (copy) software
Color Table2(Copy)* Color table 2 (copy) software
Color Table1(Prn)* Color table 1 (printer) software
Color Table2(Prn)* Color table 2 (printer) software
DP Document processor firmware
DP Boot Document processor booting
PF1 Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder firmware
PF1 Boot Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder booting
Side PF Side multi tray /Side deck firmware
Side PF Boot Side multi tray /Side deck booting
SMT SSW Side multi tray multi feed sensor
PF2 Side paper feeder / Side large capacity feeder firmware
PF2 Boot Side paper feeder / Side large capacity feeder booting
DF 4000-sheet finisher firmware
DF Boot 4000-sheet finisher booting
PH Punch unit firmware
PH Boot Punch unit booting
MT Mailbox firmware
MT Boot Mailbox booting
BF Center-folding unit firmware
BF Boot Center-folding unit booting
Fax APL1 Fax APL 1
Fax Boot1 Fax booting 1
Fax IPL1 Fax IPL 1
Fax APL2 Fax APL 2 (dual Fax)
Fax Boot2 Fax booting 2 (dual Fax)
Fax IPL2 Fax IPL 2 (dual Fax)
Application Name 01-16 Application software
*: Selected by U485.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-30
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U021 Memory initializing
Description
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, ser-
vice call history and mode setting. Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification
selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination.
Purpose
To return the machine settings to their factory default.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key.
* : All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initialized
based on the destination setting.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error.
When errors occurred, turn main power switch off then on, and execute initialization using
maintenance item U021.
Error codes
Codes Description
0001 Entity error
0002 Controller error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
1-3-31
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U024 HDD formatting
Description
Initializes the hard disk.
Purpose
To initialize the hard disk when replacing the hard disk after shipping.
Caution
In addition, the following settings are also initialized by initializing the hard disk.
System menu (user login administration, job accounting, address book, one-touch keys and doc-
ument box etc.), shortcuts and panel programs
When fully formatted, the following pre-installed software are removed.
Option language, OCR dictionary software, HyPAS Application (FMU etc.), Color Table.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Format Execution of HDD format
Composition* Change of HDD configuration
Method: [Format]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Full Full format
Data Data format (the application software are retained)
2. Press [Execute].
3. Press the start key to initialize the hard disk.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Method: [Composition]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Single 1-HDD mode
Multi 2-HDD mode
2. Press the start key.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : Software removed must be manually re-installed.
Option language, OCR dictionary software: Install using a USB flash device.
Install HyPAS applications (such as FMU) on the application dialog.
Color Table: Execute U485.
* : If an OCT software does not exist, a warning dialog is displayed and OCR is deactivated.
1-3-32
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U025 Firmware Update (Security)
Description
Used to execute FW-Update from the USB flash device while Very High is selected in the Secu-
rity Level settings under the System Menu.
Purpose
Firmware upgrading is initiated by a service person to conduct U025 while a USB flash device is
inserted.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [Execute].
3. Press the start key.
4. Firmware upgrading will begin when power is toggled off and on after the message to urge
power toggling is displayed.
5. After the firmware upgrade is completed normally, “FW-UPDATE Completed” will be dis-
played with the firmware version.
* : This is not executable when a USB has not been installed.
U026 Pulling Backup Data
Description
Perform restoring of the backup data..
Purpose
Restores the setting values that was backed up in the flash memory from the HDD.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [Execute].
3. Press the start key.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : NG will be displayed when an error was resulted at completion.
* : Saved data:
U278 Setting the delivery date
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
U952 Maintenance mode workflow
1-3-33
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U030 Checking the operation of the motors
Description
Drives each motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the motor to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Feed Paper feed motor (PFM) is turned on
DLP(K) Developer motor K (DEVM-K) is turned on
DLP(C) Developer motor C (DEVM-C) is turned on
DLP(M) Developer motor M (DEVM-M) is turned on
DLP(Y) Developer motor Y (DEVM-Y) is turned on
Fuser Fuser motor (FUM) is turned on
SB(CW) Eject motor (EM) is turned on clockwise
SB(CCW) Eject motor (EM) is turned on counterclockwise
CMY Release Color release motor (CRM) is turned on
Job Separator JS eject motor (JSEM) is turned on
Regist Registration motor (RM) is turned on
Decal BR decurler motor (BRDM) is turned on
Decal Guide BR guide motor (BRGM) is turned on
Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) is turned on
Bridge2 BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) is turned on
Belt Meand Transfer motor (TRM) is turned on
Press Release Transfer release motor (TRRM) is turned on
IH Core IH core motor (IHCM) is turned on
Fuser Release Fuser release motor (FURM) is turned on
DU1 Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) is turned on
DU2 Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) is turned on
Mid Roller Middle motor (RM) is turned on
Vibration Toner vibration motor (TVM) is turned on
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-34
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U031 Checking switches and sensors for paper conveying
Description
Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch or sensor on the paper path.
Purpose
To check if the switches and sensors for paper conveying operate correctly.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in
reverse.
Display Description
MPT Jam MP feed sensor (MPFS)
Cassette1 Feed Feed sensor 1 (FS1)
Cassette2 Feed Feed sensor 2 (FS2)
Feed2(Feed B) Paper conveying sensor (PCS)
Regist Registration sensor (RS)
Belt Jam Loop sensor (LPS)
Exit Feed Switchback sensor (SBS)
DU1 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1)
DU2 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2)
Bridge1 Feed BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1)
Bridge2 Feed BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2)
Bridge Exit BR eject sensor (BRES)
Exit Paper Eject full sensor (EFS)
Fuser Feed Fuser eject sensor (FUES)
Feed1(Mid) Middle sensor (MS)
Exit Job Separator JS eject sensor (JSES)
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-35
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U032 Checking the operation of the clutches
Description
Turn each clutch on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each clutch.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the clutch to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Feed1 Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) is turned on
Feed2 Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) is turned on
Feed Paper conveying clutch (PCCL) is turned on
Assist1 Assist clutch 1 (ASCL1) is turned on
Assist2 * Assist clutch 2 (ASCL2) is turned on
Motor Motor is turned on
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-36
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids
Description
Turn each solenoid on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each solenoid.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the solenoid to be operated.z
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Branch Left BR Feedshift solenoid (BRFSSOL) is turned on
Branch Exit Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) is turned on
Job Separator JS feedshift solenoid (JSFSSOL) is turned on
ID Clean Cleaning solenoid (CLSOL) is turned on
Motor Motor is turned on
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-37
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U034 Adjusting the print start timing
Description
Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and
original.
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and
original.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description
LSU Out Top Leading edge registration adjustment
LSU Out Left Center line adjustment
LSU Out Top B/W* Leading edge registration adjustment in black/white mode
LSU Out Top 3/4 Leading edge registration adjustment at 3/4 times of line speed
Mode Sets the conveying timing verification mode.
Reset Resets the conveying timing verification data.
On Timing Verify the conveying timing (sensor on).
Off Timing Verify the conveying timing (sensor recovery).
*: 75 ppm model only.
1-3-38
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U034 Adjustment: Leading edge registration adjustment
1. Press the system menu key.
2. Press the start key to output a test pattern.
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Select the item to be adjusted.
[LSU Out Top]
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
MPT(L) Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
MPT Half(L) Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette(L) Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Half(L)
Duplex(L) Duplex mode (second) -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Duplex Duplex mode (second) -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Half(L)
MPT(S) Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
MPT Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Half(S)
Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Half(S)
Duplex(S) Duplex mode (second) -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Duplex Duplex mode (second) -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Half(S)
(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.
[LSU Out Top B/W] [LSU Out Top 3/4]
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
MPT(L) Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette(L) Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Duplex(L) Duplex mode (second) -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
MPT(S) Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Duplex(S) Duplex mode (second) -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.
1-3-39
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U034 5. Change the setting value using the cursor +/- or numeric keys.
For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Correct image Output Output
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-4
6. Press the start key. The value is set.
Remark
When changing the setting value of [Large] each item is modified, equal to amount of the value
which is changed adds also the value of [Small] each item and is pulled.
Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following
adjustments in maintenance mode for optimizing reading positions.
U066 U071
U034
(P.1-3-59) (P.1-3-64)
Table DP
Adjustment: Center line adjustment
1. Press the system menu key.
2. Press the start key to output a test pattern.
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Select the item to be adjusted.
[LSU Out Left]
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
MPT Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette1 Paper feed from cassette 1 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette2 Paper feed from cassette 2 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette3 Paper feed from optional cassette 3 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette4 Paper feed from optional cassette 4 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette5 Paper feed from optional cassette 5 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette6 Paper feed from optional cassette 6 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette7 Paper feed from optional cassette 7 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Duplex Duplex mode (second) -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
1-3-40
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U034 5. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value.
Center line of printing
(within ± 2.0 mm)
Correct image Output Output
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-5
6. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following
adjustments in maintenance mode for optimizing reading positions.
U067 U072
U034 (P.1-3-60) (P.1-3-66)
Table DP
Setting: [Mode]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Sets the conveying timing verification mode on.
Off Sets the conveying timing verification mode off.
2. Press the start key.
Setting: [Reset]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the start key.
Setting: [On Timing/ Off Timing]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Value (Plain) Confirms the measured values of Plain.
Value (Thick) Confirms the measured values of Thick.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-41
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper
Description
Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper.
Purpose
To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left/right side of copy paper by setting the
actual printing area for folio paper.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Length Length 330 to 356 mm 330
Width Width 200 to 220 mm 210
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-42
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors
Description
Drives each fan motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each fan motor.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the fan motor to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description Group
Fuser Cooling Fuser rear fan motor (FURFM) is turned on B
DLP Rear Exhaust motor 1and 2 (EXFM1, 2)* is turned on A
LSU Cooling LSU fan motor (LSUFM) is turned on B
Belt Cooling Belt fan motor 1and 2 (BLFM1, 2*) is turned on A
Exit Cooling Eject front fan motor (EFFM) is turned on B
Toner Toner fan motor 1and 2 (TFM1, 2)* is turned on A
Low Volt Power source fan motor (PSFM) is turned on A
Exit Rear Cooling Eject rear fan motor (EFRM) is turned on B
IH PWB IH fan motor (IHFM) is turned on A
DU
IH Coil Fuser front fan motor (FUFFM) is turned on A
DLP Front Developer fan motor 1and 2 (DEVFM1, 2) is turned on A
GroupA Fan motors of group A are turned on
GroupB Fan motors of group B are turned on
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-43
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U039 Adjusting the magnification
Description
Adjusts the magnification of the printing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect.
Caution
Adjust the magnification in the following order.
U065 U070
U039 (P.1-3-57) (P.1-3-62)
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Press the start key to output a test pattern.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Sub Scan Magnification in the auxiliary -1 to 1 0 0.1%
scanning direction
Adjustment: [Sub Scan]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Increasing the value makes the image longer, while decreasing the value makes the image
shorter.
350 ± 1.4 mm
Figure 1-3-6
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-3-44
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper
Description
Adjusts the deflection in the paper at the registration roller.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the
copy paper is Z-folded.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description
Paper Loop Amount Deflection adjustment
Paper Loop Amount B/W* Deflection adjustment in black and white mode
Paper Loop Amount 3/4 Deflection adjustment at 3/4 times of line speed
*: 75 ppm model only.
Adjustment
1. Press the system menu key.
2. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Select the item to be adjusted.
[Paper Loop Amount]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 45ppm 55ppm
MPT(L) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 -5 -5
MPT Half(L) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 -1 -2
Cassette(L) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 -8 -10
Cassette Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 -1 -2
Half(L)
Duplex(L) Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 -9 -11
Duplex Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 -1 -2
Half(L)
MPT(S) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 -5 -5
MPT Half(S) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 -1 -2
Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 -8 -10
Cassette Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 -1 -2
Half(S)
Duplex(S) Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 -9 -11
Duplex Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 -1 -2
Half(S)
Change in value per step: 1.0 mm
(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.
1-3-45
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U051 [Paper Loop Amount B/W]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
MPT(L) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 - -5
Cassette(L) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 - -13
Duplex(L) Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 - -14
MPT(S) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 - -5
Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 - -13
Duplex(S) Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 - -14
Change in value per step: 1.0 mm
(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.
[Paper Loop Amount 3/4]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
MPT(L) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 -5 -5
Cassette(L) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 -6 -6
Duplex(L) Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 -6 -6
MPT(S) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 -6 -6
Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 -6 -6
Duplex(S) Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 -6 -6
Change in value per step: 1.0 mm
(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.
5. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value.
The greater the value, the larger the deflection; the smaller the value, the smaller the deflec-
tion.
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-7
6. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-3-46
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U052 Setting the fuser motor control
Description
Enters the sensor data values described on the supplied sheet provided when the loop sensor is
replaced and Perform correction processing for the fuser motor.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the loop sensor or paper conveying unit.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Set Loop Sensor Enter the data value for loop sensor
Loop Sensor Control Set the loop sensor detection control
Set Loop Sensor Valid Sets the presence or absence of the loop sensor
Chk Loop Sensor Display the data value for loop sensor
Method: [Set Loop Sensor]
1. Select [Scanning Board1]. How to read the sensor data value
2. Enter the sensor data of DATA1 on the sheet supplied with (e.g.) 1
the loop sensor by using the [+] and [–] keys. 2
3
3. Select [Scanning Board2]. 4
4. Enter the sensor data of DATA2 on the sheet supplied with 5
6
the loop sensor by using the [+] and [–] keys. 7
5. Press the start key. The value is set. 8
* : When replacing the conveying unit, enter the data speci- 9
0
fied on the maintenance report.
3 6 4
Setting: [Loop Sensor Control]
1. Select the item.
2. Select On or Off.
Display Description Initial setting
No.1 Sensor detection On/Off setting at 125 to 250 mm from Off
the top of paper
No.2 Sensor detection On/Off setting at 250 to 290 mm from On
the top of paper
No.3 Sensor detection On/Off setting at 300 to 330 mm from Off
the top of paper
No.4 Sensor detection On/Off setting at 350 to 370 mm from Off
the top of paper
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Set Loop Sensor Valid]
1. Select On or Off.
Initial setting: On
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-3-47
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed
Description
Perform fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
Basically, the setting need not be changed. Modify settings by interlock setting only if faulty
images occur.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted
Display Description
Motor1 Adjustment of drum motor K speeds
Motor2 Adjustment of developer motor K, developer motor MCY, transfer motor,
registration motor and transfer cleaning motor speeds
Motor3 Adjustment of eject motor, fuser motor, BR conveying motor 1/2, paper
feed motor, JS eject motor, middle motor and duplex motor 1/2 speeds
Motor4 Drum motor K speed adjustment in black/white mode
Motor5* Adjustment of developer motor K, transfer motor, registration motor and
transfer cleaning motor speeds in black/white mode
Motor6* Adjustment of eject motor, fuser motor, BR conveying motor 1/2, paper
feed motor, JS eject motor, middle motor and duplex motor 1/2 speeds
in black/white mode
Motor1 Half Adjustment of drum motor K speeds in half speed
Motor2 Half Adjustment of developer motor K, developer motor MCY, transfer motor,
registration motor and transfer cleaning motor speeds in half speed
Motor3 Half Adjustment of eject motor, fuser motor, BR conveying motor 1/2, paper
feed motor, JS eject motor, middle motor and duplex motor 1/2 speeds
in half speed
Motor1 3/4 Adjustment of drum motor K speeds at 3/4 times of line speed
Motor2 3/4 Adjustment of developer motor K, developer motor MCY, transfer motor,
registration motor and transfer cleaning motor speeds at 3/4 times of
line speed
Motor3 3/4 Adjustment of eject motor, fuser motor, BR conveying motor 1/2, paper
feed motor, JS eject motor, middle motor and duplex motor 1/2 speeds
at 3/4 times of line speed
*: 75 ppm model only.
1-3-48
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U053 Setting: [Motor1]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Drum(C) Drum motor C (DRM-C) -5000 to 5000 8 7
Drum(M) Drum motor M (DRM-M) -5000 to 5000 0 0
Drum(Y) Drum motor Y (DRM-Y) -5000 to 5000 0 0
Drum(K) Drum motor K (DRM-K) -5000 to 5000 0 0
Setting: [Motor2]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Dev(K) Developer motor K -5000 to 5000 0 0
(DEVM-K)
Dev(CMY) Developer motor M/C/Y -5000 to 5000 0 0
(DEVM-M/C/Y)
Trans Belt Transfer motor (TRM) -5000 to 5000 0 0
Regist Registration motor (RM) -5000 to 5000 16 15
Belt Clean Transfer cleaning motor -5000 to 5000 0 0
(TRCM)
1-3-49
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U053 Setting: [Motor3]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
SB Eject motor (EM) -5000 to 5000 0 0
Fixing Fuser motor (FUM) -5000 to 5000 -28 -26
Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 -5000 to 5000 0 0
(BRCM1)
Bridge2 BR conveying motor 2 -5000 to 5000 0 0
(BRCM2)
Feed Paper feed motor (PFM) -5000 to 5000 0 0
Job Sepa- JS eject motor (JSEM) -5000 to 5000 59 54
rator
Mid Roller* Middle motor (MM) -5000 to 5000 0 0
DU1 Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) -5000 to 5000 64 59
DU2 Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) -5000 to 5000 -25 -22
Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 -5000 to 5000 -25 -22
DF High (BRCM1)
Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 -5000 to 5000 0 0
DF Low (BRCM1)
Bridge2 BR conveying motor 2 -5000 to 5000 0 0
DF High (BRCM2)
Bridge2 BR conveying motor 2 -5000 to 5000 0 0
DF Low (BRCM2)
Setting: [Motor4]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Drum B/ Drum motor K (DRM-K) in -5000 to 5000 - 15
W(K)* black/white mode
Drum Drum motor K (DRM-K) in -5000 to 5000 - 17
Mono(K) monochrome mode
*: 75 ppm model only.
1-3-50
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U053 Setting: [Motor5]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Dev B/W(K) Developer motor K (DEVM-K) in black/ -5000 to 5000 0
white mode
Trans Belt B/W Transfer motor (TRM) in black/white -5000 to 5000 0
mode
Regist B/W Registration motor (RM) in black/white -5000 to 5000 12
mode
Belt Clean B/W Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) in -5000 to 5000 0
black/white mode
Setting: [Motor6]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
SB B/W Eject motor (EM) in black/white mode -5000 to 5000 0
Fixing B/W Fuser motor (FUM) in black/white -5000 to 5000 -22
mode
Decal B/W Decal motor (BRDM) in black/white -5000 to 5000 0
mode
Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) in -5000 to 5000 0
B/W black/white mode
Bridge2 BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) in -5000 to 5000 0
B/W black/white mode
Feed B/W Paper feed motor (PFM) in black/white -5000 to 5000 46
mode
Job Separator B/ JS eject motor (JSEM) in black/white -5000 to 5000 0
W mode
Mid Roller B/W Middle motor (MM) in black/white mode -5000 to 5000 50
DU1 B/W Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) in black/white -5000 to 5000 -19
mode
DU2 B/W Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) in black/white -5000 to 5000 -19
mode
1-3-51
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U053 Setting: [Motor1 Half]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range
Drum(C) Drum motor C (DRM-C) -5000 to 5000 16 14
in half speed
Drum(M) Drum motor M (DRM-M) -5000 to 5000 0 0
in half speed
Drum(Y) Drum motor Y (DRM-Y) in -5000 to 5000 0 0
half speed
Drum(K) Drum motor K (DRM-K) in -5000 to 5000 0 0
half speed
Setting: [Motor2 Half]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Dev(K) Developer motor K -5000 to 5000 0 0
(DEVM-K) in half speed
Dev(CMY) Developer motor M/C/Y -5000 to 5000 0 0
(DEVM-M/C/Y) in half
speed
Trans Belt Transfer motor (TRM) in -5000 to 5000 0 0
half speed
Regist Registration motor (RM) -5000 to 5000 32 30
in half speed
Belt Clean Transfer cleaning motor -5000 to 5000 0 0
(TRCM) in half speed
Setting: [Motor3 Half]
Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
SB Eject motor (EM) in half -5000 to 5000 0 0
speed
Fixing Fuser motor (FUM) in half -5000 to 5000 -56 -51
speed
Decal Decal motor (BRDM) in -5000 to 5000 0 0
half speed
Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 -5000 to 5000 0 0
(BRCM1) in half speed
1-3-52
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U053
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Bridge2 BR conveying motor 2 -5000 to 5000 0 0
(BRCM2) in half speed
Feed Paper feed motor (PFM) -5000 to 5000 118 108
in half speed
Job Sepa- JS eject motor (JSEM) in -5000 to 5000 0 0
rator half speed
Mid Roller Middle motor (MM) in half -5000 to 5000 128 118
speed
DU1 Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) -5000 to 5000 -49 -44
in half speed
DU2 Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) -5000 to 5000 -49 -44
in half speed
Setting: [Motor1 3/4]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description range
65ppm 75ppm
Drum(K) Drum motor K (DRM-K) -5000 to 5000 10 9
at 3/4 times of line speed
Drum(K) Drum motor K (DRM-K) -5000 to 5000 0 0
at 3/4 times of line speed
Drum(K) Drum motor K (DRM-K) -5000 to 5000 0 0
at 3/4 times of line speed
Drum(K) Drum motor K (DRM-K) -5000 to 5000 0 0
at 3/4 times of line speed
Setting: [Motor2 3/4]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Dev(K) Developer motor K (DEVM-K) at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 0
times of line speed
Dev(CMY) Developer motor MCY (DEVM-MCY) at -5000 to 5000 0
3/4 times of line speed
Trans Belt Transfer motor (TRM) at 3/4 times of -5000 to 5000 0
line speed
1-3-53
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U053
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Regist Registration motor (RM) at 3/4 times of -5000 to 5000 20
line speed
Belt Clean Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 0
times of line speed
Setting: [Motor3 3/4]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
SB Eject motor (EM) at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 0 0
times of line speed
Fixing Fuser motor (FUM) at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 -34 -34
times of line speed
Decal Decal motor (BRDM) in -5000 to 5000 0 0
half speed
Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 -5000 to 5000 0 0
(BRCM1) at 3/4 times of
line speed
Bridge2 BR conveying motor 2 -5000 to 5000 0 0
(BRCM2) at 3/4 times of
line speed
Feed Paper feed motor (PFM) -5000 to 5000 72 72
at 3/4 times of line speed
Job Sepa- JS eject motor (JSEM) at -5000 to 5000 0 0
rator 3/4 times of line speed
Mid Roller Middle motor (MM) at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 78 78
times of line speed
DU1 Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) -5000 to 5000 -29 -29
at 3/4 times of line speed
DU2 Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) -5000 to 5000 -29 -29
at 3/4 times of line speed
Completion
Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-3-54
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U059 Setting fan mode
Description
Specifies mode for developer fan motors.
Purpose
Handling the lowering density [to suppress thermal stresses owing to the heated toner]
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the mode.
Display Description
Fan Mode Sets threshold temperature at which developer fan motors oper-
ate.
Cooling Mode Sets temperature at which the developer fan motors are switched
for controlling.
Setting: [Fan Mode]
1. Select the mode.
Display Description
Mode1 Setting temperature: Normal
Mode2 Setting temperature: Temperature threshold is raised from mode1
(WUP, temperature at READY: mode1 temperature -7(°C), Tempera-
ture at PRINT: mode1 temperature -3(°C).)
Mode3 Setting temperature: Temperature threshold is raised from mode2
(WUP, temperature at READY: mode1 temperature -22(°C), Temper-
ature at PRINT: mode1 temperature -8(°C).)
Auto Starting with Mode 2 at power up or recovery from sleep mode, and
switches to Mode 3 when the thermistor detects a developer temper-
ature BK is equal to or higher than 38°C. The device never reverts
from mode 2 from mode 3 while power is on.
Initial setting: Mode1
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Cooling Mode]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Cooling Mode Amount of shift from the initial standard -3 to 3 (°C) 0
temperature
A larger value advances the operating timing, and a smaller value slows it.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-3-55
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp
Description
Lights the exposure lamp.
Purpose
To check whether the exposure lamp are turned on.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
CCD The exposure lamp lights
CIS The CIS lights
3. Press the start key. The lamp lights.
4. To turn the lamp off, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U063 Adjusting the shading position
Description
Changes the shading position of the scanner.
Purpose
Used when the white line continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is
cleaned.
This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading posi-
tion should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Position Shading position 0 to 18 0 0.158 mm
* : Increasing the value moves the shading position toward the machine left, and decreasing
it moves the position toward the machine right.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-56
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification
Description
Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect.
Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect.
Caution
The magnification adjustment along the main scanning direction could cause black streaks
depending on the content of the original document.
Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.
U039 U065 U065
main scanning auxiliary scanning
(P.1-3-44) direction direction
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Main Scan Scanner magnification in the -75 to 75 0 0.02%
main scanning direction
Sub Scan Scanner magnification in the -125 to 125 0 0.02%
auxiliary scanning direction
Adjustment: [Main Scan]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image.
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-8
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-57
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U065 Adjustment: [Sub Scan]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value makes the image longer, while decreasing the value makes the image
shorter.
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-9
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-58
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration
Description
Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and
original.
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Front Scanner leading edge registra- -30 to 30 0 0.158 mm
tion
Rotate Scanner leading edge registra- -30 to 30 0 0.158 mm
tion (rotate copying)
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image
backward.
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-10
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration, proceed with the follow-
ing maintenance modes.
U039 U034 U065
(P.1-3-44) (P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-57) U066
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-59
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U067 Adjusting the scanner center line
Description
Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and
original.
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Front Scanner center line -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
Rotate Scanner center line (rotate -40 to 40 0 0.085 mm
copying)
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, decrease the value. For copy example 2, increase the value.
Increasing the value moves the image leftward and decreasing it moves the image rightward.
Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-11
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line, proceed with the following mainte-
nance modes.
U034 U065
U067
(P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-57)
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-60
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP
Description
Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Perform the test copy at the four scanning
positions after adjusting.
Purpose
Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is
used. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Setting
1. Press the start key.l
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
DP Read Starting position adjustment for -38 to 38 0 0.158 mm
scanning originals
Black Line Scanning position for the test 0 to 3 0 -
copy originals
2. Select [DP Read].
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to
the left when the setting value is decreased.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Select [Black Line].
6. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
8. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the DP and press the system menu key.
9. Press the start key. Test copy is executed.
10. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check
that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-61
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning speed.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the
DP is used.
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction when the CIS
is used.
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Sub Scan(F) Magnification in the auxiliary -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction of CCD
(first side)
Main Magnification in the main scan- -100 to 100 0 0.02%
Scan(CIS) ning direction of CIS
Sub Magnification in the auxiliary -125 to 125 0 0.02%
Scan(CIS) scanning direction of CIS
Adjustment: [Sub Scan]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value makes the image longer, while decreasing the value makes the image
shorter.
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-12
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-62
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U070 Adjustment: [Main Scan]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image.
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-13
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the magnification, perform the following maintenance
modes.
U039
(P.1-3-44) U070
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-63
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the origi-
nal and the copy image when the DP is used.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Front Head Leading edge registration of -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm
CCD (first side)
Front Tail Trailing edge registration of -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm
CCD (first side)
CIS Head Leading edge registration of -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm
CIS
CIS Tail Trailing edge registration of CIS -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm
1-3-64
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U071 Adjustment: Leading edge registration
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image
backward.
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-14
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration, proceed with the follow-
ing maintenance modes.
U039 U034
U071
(P.1-3-44) (P.1-3-38)
Adjustment: Trailing edge registration
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-15
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the first side is adjusted, check the second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-65
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U072 Adjusting the DP center line
Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy
image when the DP is used.
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Front DP center line (first side) -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
CIS CIS center line -39 to 39 0 0.085 mm
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value moves the image rightward and decreasing it moves the image leftward.
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-16
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line, proceed with the following mainte-
nance modes.
U034 U065 U067
(P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-57) (P.1-3-60) U072
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-66
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U073 Checking the scanner operation
Description
Simulates the scanner operation under the arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check the scanner operation. This is also done to check the accumulation of dust on the slit
glass.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be operated.
Display Description
Scanner Motor Scanner operation
Home Position Home position operation
Dust Check Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on
DP Reading DP scanning position operation
Setting: [Scanner Motor]
1. Select [Scanner Motor].
2. Select the item.
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys.
Display Operating conditions Setting range Initial setting
Zoom Magnification 25 to 400% 100
Size Original size See below. 10200
Lamp On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on) 1
Original sizes for each setting in SIZE
Setting Paper size Setting Paper size
5000 A4 5000 A5R
4300 B5 7800 Folio
5100 11" x 8 1/2" 10200 11" x 17"
10000 A3 9000 11" x 15"
8600 B4 8400 8 1/2" x 14"
7100 A4R 6600 8 1/2" x 11"
6100 B5R 5100 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
4. Press the start key. The setting is set.
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
7. To stop operation, press the stop key.
1-3-67
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U073 Method: [Home Position]
1. Select [Home Position].
2. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position.
Method: [Dust Check]
1. Select [Dust Check].
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop key.
Method: [DP Reading]
1. Select [DP Reading].
2. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position.
Completion
Press the stop key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
U074 DP input response adjustment
Description
Sets the density correction for scanning originals from the DP.
Purpose
Modify the setting only if a spotted background appears when a bluish original or a document
with a background that is slightly colored is scanned from the DP.
Perform adjustment if the page scanned using the table and the page scanned using DP do not
match.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Coefficient Compensating original document scan- 0 to 3 1
ning density
Settings 0: No correction / 1: Slight correction / 2: Medium correction / 3: Strong correction
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-68
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation
Description
The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing
edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust
is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
Using image correction to reduce black streaks.
Purpose
When using DP, to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to
original reading position.
Caution
The coordinates of position where documents are scanned are modified when [System Menu]
[Adjustment/Maintenance] [Correcting Black Line] is set to [Off].
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
CCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected.
Black Line Initialization of original reading position.
Setting: [CCD]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
R Lowest density of the R regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
G Lowest density of the G regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
* : Decreasing the setting makes the objects with less density recognized as dusts, less
dusts becomes detectable.
Increasing the value allows more dusts to be detected and the cleaning prompts to be dis-
played more often.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Method: [Black Line]
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The setting is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-69
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern
Description
Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine.
Purpose
To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing, using MIP-PG pattern
output (with-out scanning).
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output and press the start key.
Display Description Purpose
256Gradation 256-gradation PG To check the gradation reproducibility
Color Belt Four color belts PG To check the developer state and the
engine section ID
Gray(C) Cyan PG To check the drum quality
Gray(M) Magenta PG To check the drum quality
Gray(Y) Yellow PG To check the drum quality
Gray(K) Black PG To check the drum quality
White Blank paper PG To check the drum quality
Gradation Gray 5-graduation gray PG To check for vertical lines on the laser
scanner unit
Sample Set Four color belts PG, Pattern output for LLU assurance
Cyan PG, Magenta PG, application
Yellow PG and Black PG
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-70
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U091 Setting the white line correction
Description
Sets the error detection threshold value for white line correction and displays the count result of
abnormal pixels.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the CIS, DP main PWB or CIS roller.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Calculation(R) Abnormal pixel count result for color R
Calculation(G) Abnormal pixel count result for color G
Calculation(B) Abnormal pixel count result for color B
Threshold(R) Abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color R
Threshold(G) Abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color G
Threshold(B) Abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color B
Threshold Abnormal pixel threshold value setting
(Abnormal)
Mode Switching between white line correction mode ON/OFF
Execute Holding of white reference data
Method: white line correction
1. Press [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Holding of white reference data is started.
3. The count result of abnormal pixels is displayed.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Place a gray original on the DP with the gray side down. Load paper in the cassette.
The paper should be the same size as the original.
6. Press the start key.
Two test pattern sheets will be printed.(1 st sheet: Approx. 60 mm black band, 2nd sheet:
Blank or approx. 60 mm gray band)
7. If vertical black lines appear on the blank (or gray band) page and vertical white lines appear
on the black band in the same position, clean the CIS roller and the CIS glass and then
repeat white line correction.
If vertical black lines or vertical white lines appear on both sheets, white line correction has
been completed normally. However, the cause of the vertical lines lies in the engine, and thus
the engine must be checked.
8. Press the system menu key.
Mode is set to 1.
1-3-71
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U091 How to view test copies
blank sheet black band Causes Corrective measures
No lines No lines - Complete
Black lines White lines Dirty CIS roller or CIS Clean CIS roller or CIS glass
glass and then perform U091 again
Black lines No lines Engine side U091 ends, check engine
No lines White lines Engine side U091 ends, check engine
Setting: Threshold value setting
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Threshold (R) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection 0 to 1023 112/
threshold value for color R
Threshold (G) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection 0 to 1023 112/
threshold value for color G
Threshold (B) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection 0 to 1023 112/
threshold value for color B
Threshold Abnormal pixel threshold value setting 0 to 8191 75
(Abnormal)
Mode Switching between white line correction 0: OFF/ 0
mode ON/OFF 1: ON/
2: Test mode
* : Normally the Threshold (Com) value should not be changed from 112, the initial setting.
If white lines appear even though the CIS roller and glass are not dirty, raise the set value.
If fine lines in some originals disappear, lower the set value.
Set within the range 50 to 200. (If set outside this range, the image may be affected.)
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-72
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U099 Adjusting original size detection
Description
Checks the operation of the original size detection and sets the sensing threshold value.
Purpose
Modify the threshold of detection if documents are frequently mal-detected in size after scanning
a wholly dark document or a document enclosed with dark objects on edges.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Data1 Displays the width of an Original Area colored original document
B/W Level1 Setting original size detection threshold value
Data2 Displays the width of an Original Area colored original document (when
DP is installed)
Method: [Data1/Data2]
1. Place the original and close the original cover or DP
2. The light source illuminates and the CCD sensor determines the width of the document. The
original size sensor determines the document is vertical or horizontal. (The document is
detected two times when the DP is installed.)
Display Description
Original Area R Detected original width size for color R
Original Area G Detected original width size for color G
Original Area B Detected original width size for color B
Original Area Detected original width size
Size SW L Displays the original size sensor (OSS) ON/OFF
(Sensor OFF/ ON: 0/ 1)
1-3-73
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U099 Setting: [B/W Level1]
1. Select an item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting*
Original R1 Original threshold value for color R (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original R2 Original threshold value for color R (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original R3 Original threshold value for color R (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
Original G1 Original threshold value for color G (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original G2 Original threshold value for color G (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original G3 Original threshold value for color G (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
Original B1 Original threshold value for color B (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original B2 Original threshold value for color B (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original B3 Original threshold value for color B (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
*:DP is not installed/DP is installed
Reducing the value increases the sensitivity of the sensor allowing a document with more
density to be detected, however, the document mat could be detected as an original docu-
ment.
If the values vary excessively, mal-detection could occur depending on how a document is
placed.
Original mat Original
Fig. Original width size range
R/G/B
1 1 A4R to A3 8.5" to 11"
1 2 3 2 2 B6R to A4R 5.5" to 8.5"
297 mm 3 3 to B6R to 5.5"
Figure 1-3-17
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-74
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U100 Adjusting main high voltage
Description
Controls the charger roller voltage to optimize the surface potential.
Purpose
To change the setting value to adjust the image if an image failure (background blur, etc.) occurs.
Method
1. Press the start key.
1. Select an item and press the start key.
Display Description
Adj AC Bias Main charger AC bias for each color
Set AC Auto Adj Setting the AC bias auto adjustment
Set DC Bias Main charger DC bias for each color
Adj DC Bias Additional surface potential
Set Low Temp Pre-charge time at power supply ON
Set Charger Freq Setting the main charger frequency
Chk Current Rush current display
Setting: [Adj AC Bias]
1. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Increasing the setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.
The values set vary depending on environments.
Display Description Setting range
AC Bias(C) Main charger AC bias for cyan 0 to 255
AC Bias(M) Main charger AC bias for magenta 0 to 255
AC Bias(Y) Main charger AC bias for yellow 0 to 255
AC Bias(K) Main charger AC bias for black 0 to 255
AC Bias B/W(K) Main charger AC bias for black in black/white 0 to 255
mode
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Set AC Auto Adj]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Turn auto adjustment ON
Off Turn auto adjustment OFF
Initial setting: On
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
1-3-75
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U100 Displaying: [Set DC Bias]
1. The current setting is displayed.
Display Description
DC1 Bias(C) Main charger DC bias for cyan (full speed)
DC1 Bias Half(C) Main charger DC bias for cyan (half speed)
DC1 Bias(M) Main charger DC bias for magenta (full speed)
DC1 Bias Half(M) Main charger DC bias for magenta (half speed)
DC1 Bias(Y) Main charger DC bias for yellow (full speed)
DC1 Bias Half(Y) Main charger DC bias for yellow (half speed)
DC1 Bias(K) Main charger DC bias for black (full speed)
DC1 Bias Half(K) Main charger DC bias for black (half speed)
DC1 Bias B/W(K) Main charger DC bias for black in black/white mode
Setting: [Adj DC Bias]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
* : Increasing the setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.l
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
DC2 Bias(C) Main charger DC bias for cyan (full speed) 128 to 127 0
DC2 Bias Half(C) Main charger DC bias for cyan (half speed) 128 to 127 0
DC2 Bias(M) Main charger DC bias for magenta 128 to 127 0
(full speed)
DC2 Bias Half(M) Main charger DC bias for magenta 128 to 127 0
(half speed)
DC2 Bias(Y) Main charger DC bias for yellow (full speed) 128 to 127 0
DC2 Bias Half(Y) Main charger DC bias for yellow (half speed) 128 to 127 0
DC2 Bias(K) Main charger DC bias for black (full speed) 128 to 127 0
DC2 Bias Half(K) Main charger DC bias for black (half speed) 128 to 127 0
DC2 Bias Main charger DC bias for black
B/W(K) in black/white mode
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Set Low Temp]
1. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.l
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Set Low Temp Pre-charge time at power supply ON 0 to 6 1
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-76
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U100 Setting: [Set Charger Freq]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.ll
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Generally Main charger frequency 7500 to 8745 9161
11280
B/W Main charger frequency in 7500 to 8745 8016
black/white mode 11280
Half Main charger frequency in 7500 to 9084 10690
half speed 11280
3/4 Main charger frequency at 7500 to 10690 10690
3/4 times of line speed 11280
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Displaying: [Chk Current]
1. The current setting is displayed.
Display Description
C Cyan rush current
M Magenta rush current
Y Yellow rush current
K Black rush current
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-77
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U101 Setting the voltage for the primary transfer
Description
Sets the control voltage for the primary transfer.
Purpose
To change the setting when any density problems, such as too dark or light, occur.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Normal Setting the primary transfer positive voltage
Add Color Setting the addition value (The addition value at the surface is
referenced as standard)
Add Color 2nd Setting the addition value for the second side
Surround Correct Environmental correction ON/OFF setting
Setting: [Normal]
1. Select the item to be set.
1. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.ll
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Full Primary transfer positive volt- 0 to 255 145 151
age for yellow (full speed)
Half Primary transfer positive volt- 0 to 255 117 120
age for yellow (half speed)
3/4 Primary transfer positive volt- 0 to 255 135 135
age for yellow at 3/4 times of
line speed
B/W* Primary transfer positive volt- 0 to 255 - 161
age for yellow in black/white
mode
*: 75 ppm model only.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Add Color]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Normal Setting the addition value (Full speed)
Heavy 4/5 Setting the addition value (Heavy 4/5)
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
1-3-78
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U101 [Normal]l
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
C Addition value (cyan) -127 to 127 2
M Addition value (magenta) -127 to 127 2
K Addition value (black) -127 to 127 5
[Heavy 4/5]l
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
C Addition value (cyan) -127 to 127 -3
M Addition value (magenta) -127 to 127 -3
Y Addition value (yellow) -127 to 127 -2
K Addition value (black) -127 to 127 -14
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Add Color 2nd]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Normal Setting the addition value (Full speed)
Heavy 4/5 Setting the addition value (Heavy 4/5)
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.l
[Normal]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
C Addition value for the second -127 to -7 -8
side (cyan) 127
M Addition value for the second -127 to -7 -8
side (magenta) 127
Y Addition value for the second -127 to -5 -6
side (yellow) 127
K Addition value for the second -127 to -10 -11
side (black) 127
1-3-79
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U101 [Heavy 4/5]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
C Addition value for the second -127 to -7 -8
side (cyan) 127
M Addition value for the second -127 to -7 -8
side (magenta) 127
Y Addition value for the second -127 to -5 -6
side (yellow) 127
K Addition value for the second -127 to -10 -11
side (black) 127
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Surround Correct]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Environmental correction is not performed
Off Environmental correction is performed
Initial setting: Off
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-80
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U106 Setting the voltage for the secondary transfer
Description
Sets the control voltage for the secondary transfer depending on each paper type.
Purpose
To change the setting when any density problems, such as too dark or light, occur.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Light/Normal1 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness
52 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 and 65 g/m2 to 75 g/m2
Normal2/3 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness
76 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
Heavy1 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness
106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2
Heavy2/3 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness
136 g/m2 to 220 g/m2
Heavy4/5 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness
221 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
OHP Control voltage for the transfer bias for transparencies
Bias Transfer bias value
Setting: [Light/Normal1]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
1st Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (full speed)
2nd Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (full speed)
1st 3/4(Gloss) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of
line speed
2nd 3/4(Gloss) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side at 3/4 times
of line speed
1st B/W* Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side in black/white
mode
2nd B/W* Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side in black/white
mode
*: 55 ppm model only.
2. Select the paper width to be set.
3. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
1-3-81
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U106 [1st]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 183 195
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 154 160
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 144 150
[2nd]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 220 225
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 177 192
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 142 149
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 169 169
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 143 143
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 135 135
[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 191 191
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 166 166
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 133 133
[1st B/W]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 174 195
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 148 160
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 139 150
[2nd B/W]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 163 183
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 140 148
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 120 130
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-82
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U106 Setting: [Normal2/3]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
1st Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (full speed)
2nd Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (full speed)
1st 3/4(Gloss) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of
line speed
2nd 3/4(Gloss) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side at 3/4 times
of line speed
1st B/W* Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side in black/white
mode
2nd B/W Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side in black/white
mode
2. Select the paper width to be set.
3. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
[1st]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 183 195
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 156 162
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 147 154
[2nd]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 220 225
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 178 194
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 144 151
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 169 169
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 144 144
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 138 138
1-3-83
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U106 [2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 191 191
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 168 168
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 136 136
[1st B/W]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 174 195
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 149 162
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 141 154
[2nd B/W]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 163 183
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 140 148
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 120 130
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Heavy1]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
1st 3/4 Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of
line speed
2nd 3/4 Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side at 3/4 times
of line speed
2. Select the paper width to be set.
3. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.l
[1st 3/4]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 170 170
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 145 145
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 140 140
1-3-84
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U106 [2nd 3/4]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 193 193
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 170 170
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 140 140
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Heavy2/3]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
1st Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (half speed)
2nd Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (half speed)
2. Select the paper width to be set.
3. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.l
[1st Half]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 141 145
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 128 128
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 124 124
[2nd Half]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 158 160
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 141 143
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 124 124
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Heavy4/5]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
1st Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (half speed)
2nd Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (half speed)
2. Select the paper width to be set.
3. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.l
1-3-85
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U106 [1st Half]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 141 145
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 128 128
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 124 124
[2nd Half]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 158 160
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 141 143
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 124 124
Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [OHP]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 156 162
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 149 154
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 141 146
Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-86
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U106 Setting: [Bias]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Reverse Transfer reverse bias 0 to 255 1 1
(full speed)
Reverse Transfer reverse bias 0 to 255 1 1
Half (half speed)
Reverse Transfer reverse bias at 3/4 0 to 255 1 1
3/4 times of line speed
Reverse Transfer reverse bias in 0 to 255 1 1
B/W black/white mode
Cleaning Cleaning control value 0 to 255 161 168
(full speed)
Cleaning Cleaning control value 0 to 255 144 148
Half (half speed)
Cleaning Cleaning control value at 3/4 0 to 255 158 158
3/4 times of line speed
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-87
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U107 Setting the transfer cleaning voltage
Description
Sets the cleaning control voltage for transfer belt unit.
Purpose
Change settings if an offset has occurred due to the failure of cleaning the transfer belt.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Belt(A) Transfer belt cleaning voltage (printing)
Belt(B) Transfer belt cleaning voltage (paper interval)
3. Select the item to be set.
4. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.l
[Belt(A)]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Full Full speed 0 to 255 224 231
Half Half speed 0 to 255 191 194
3/4 3/4 times of line speed 0 to 255 212 212
B/W* Black/white mode 0 to 255 - 243
[Belt(B)]
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Full Full speed 0 to 255 250 250
Half Half speed 0 to 255 217 220
3/4 3/4 times of line speed 0 to 255 238 238
B/W* Black/white mode 0 to 255 - 250
*: 75 ppm model only.
5. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-88
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U108 Setting separation shift bias
Description
Adjusts output of separation shift bias and ON/OFF timing.
Purpose
To set when the separated malfunction of the paper occurs.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Output Adjusting the separation shift bias output
Output 3/4 Adjusting the separation shift bias output
Output B/W* Adjusting the separation shift bias output in black/white mode
Timing Adjusting the ON/OFF timing with paper position
*: 75 ppm model only.
Setting: [Output]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric key.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Light 1st Separation shift bias for the first side on 0 to 255 40
paper with thickness 52 to 64 g/m2
Light 2nd Separation shift bias for the second side 0 to 255 40
on paper with thickness 52 to 64 g/m2
Normal 1st Separation shift bias for the first side on 0 to 255 40
paper with thickness 65 to 75 g/m2
Normal 2nd Separation shift bias for the second side 0 to 255 40
on paper with thickness 65 to 75 g/m2
Add Normal Addition value for leading edge on paper -127 to 127 0
Lead with thickness 76 to 105 g/m2
Heavy/OHP Separation shift bias for transparencies 0 to 255 0
or paper with thickness 106 to 300 g/m2
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-89
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U108 Setting: [Output 3/4 / Output B/W]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric key.
Initial
Setting setting
Display Description
range Output Output
3/4 B/W*
Light 1st Separation shift bias for the first side on 0 to 255 40 40
paper with thickness 52 to 64 g/m2
Light 2nd Separation shift bias for the second side 0 to 255 40 40
on paper with thickness 52 to 64 g/m2
Normal 1st Separation shift bias for the first side on 0 to 255 40 40
paper with thickness 65 to 75 g/m2
Normal 2nd Separation shift bias for the second side 0 to 255 40 40
on paper with thickness 65 to 75 g/m2
* : 75 ppm model only.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Timing]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric key.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
On Timing Lead Separation shift bias ON timing at lead- -200 to 200 0
ing edge of paper
On Timing Separation shift bias ON timing at center -200 to 200 0
Center of paper
Off Timing Separation shift bias OFF timing -200 to 200 0
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-90
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U110 Checking the drum count
Description
Displays the drum counts for checking.
Purpose
To check the drum status.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current drum counts is displayed.
Display Description
C Drum count value for cyan
M Drum count value for magenta
Y Drum count value for yellow
K Drum count value for black
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U111 Checking the drum drive time
Description
Displays the drum drive time for checking a figure, which is used as a reference when correcting
the high voltage based on time.
Purpose
To check the drum status.
Method
1. Press the start key. The drum drive time is displayed.
Display Description
C Drum drive time for cyan
M Drum drive time for magenta
Y Drum drive time for yellow
K Drum drive time for black
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-91
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U117 Checking the drum number
Description
Displays the drum number.
Purpose
To check the drum number.
Method
1. Press the start key. The drum number is displayed.
Display Description
C Cyan drum number
M Magenta drum number
Y Yellow drum number
K Black drum number
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U118 Displaying the drum history
Description
Displays the past record of machine number and the drum counter.
Purpose
To check the count value of machine number and the drum counter.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the color to check.
Display Description
C Cyan drum past record
M Magenta drum past record
Y Yellow drum past record
K Black drum past record
The history of a machine number and a drum counter for each color is displayed by three
cases.
Display Description
Machine History1 - 3 Historical records of the machine number
Cnt History1 - 3 Historical records of drum counter
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-92
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U119 Setting the drum
Description
Sets drum sensitivity.
Purpose
To set the drum after replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit.
When completed, perform maintenance mode U464, Calibration.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key. Drum setup is commenced.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
U122 Checking the transfer belt unit number
Description
Displays the number of the transfer belt unit for checking.
Purpose
To check the number of the transfer belt.
Method
1. Press the start key.
The current number of the transfer belt is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U123 Displaying the transfer belt unit history
Description
Displays the past record of machine number and the transfer belt unit counter.
Purpose
To check the count value of machine number and the transfer counter.
Method
1. Press the start key.
The history of a machine number and a transfer belt unit counter for each color is displayed
by three cases.
Display Description
Machine History1 - 3 Historical records of the machine number
Cnt History1 - 3 Historical records of transfer belt unit counter
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-93
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count
Description
Displays and clears the counts of the transfer counter.
Purpose
To check the count or drive time after replacement of the transfer belt unit or transfer roller. Also
to clear the counts after replacing transfer roller.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current counts of the transfer counter is displayed.
Display Description
Mid Trans(Cnt) Transfer belt unit count value
2nd Trans(Cnt) Transfer roller count value
Mid Trans(Time) Transfer belt unit drive time
2nd Trans(Time) Transfer roller drive time
Clear All transfer count clear
Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The counter value is cleared.
Clears only the transfer roller. The transfer belt unit is not cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-94
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U128 Setting transfer high-voltage timing
Description
Adjusts the ON/OFF timing of transfer high-voltage output.
Purpose
Basically, the setting need not be changed. If any problem such as faulty images or dirt on the
back surface occurs, change the setting.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set.
3. Change the value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
On Timing Transfer ON timing adjust- -200 to 200 0 0
1st ment value (first side)
On Timing Transfer ON timing adjust- -200 to 200 0 0
2nd ment value (second side)
Off Timing Transfer OFF timing adjust- -200 to 200 0 0
ment value
* : Increasing the value will deteriorate paper separation as it delays transfer-off timing.
* : Decreasing the value will improve paper separation as it advances transfer-off timing (wid-
ening the transfer margins at the trailing edge of paper at ejection).
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-95
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U130 Initial setting for the developer
Description
The toner sensor control bias is adjusted so that the sensor output is set as the target value with
the initial developer.
Purpose
Automatically executed when the developer unit loaded with the initial developer is replaced.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key.
Toner installation is started and the control value of the toner sensor is displayed.
Display Description
C Toner sensor C control voltage
M Toner sensor M control voltage
Y Toner sensor Y control voltage
K Toner sensor K control voltage
Execute Execute
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-96
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U131 Adjusting the toner sensor control voltage
Description
Adjusts the toner sensor control voltage.
Purpose
If control values are not correctly retrievable due to the EEPROM of the developer unit failure,
etc., use manual adjustment and obtain a temporary control value.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set or displayed.
Display Description
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment
Mode Switching the manual adjustment and auto adjustment
Setting: [Manual]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Control(C) Toner sensor C control voltage 0 to 255 150
Control(M) Toner sensor M control voltage 0 to 255 150
Control(Y) Toner sensor Y control voltage 0 to 255 150
Control(K) Toner sensor K control voltage 0 to 255 150
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Displaying: [Auto]
1. The current setting is displayed.
Display Description
Default(C) Reference value for toner sensor C control voltage
Default(M) Reference value for toner sensor M control voltage
Default(Y) Reference value for toner sensor Y control voltage
Default(K) Reference value for toner sensor K control voltage
Control(C) Toner sensor C control voltage after correction
Control(M) Toner sensor M control voltage after correction
Control(Y) Toner sensor Y control voltage after correction
Control(K) Toner sensor K control voltage after correction
1-3-97
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U131 Setting: [Mode]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment
Initial setting: Auto
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U132 Replenishing toner forcibly
Description
Replenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Purpose
Used when the toner empty is detected frequently.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key.
* : Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Display Description
Supply(C) Toner feed start level (cyan)
Supply(M) Toner feed start level (magenta)
Supply(Y) Toner feed start level (yellow)
Supply(K) Toner feed start level (black)
Sensor(C) Toner sensor output value (cyan)
Sensor(M) Toner sensor output value (magenta)
Sensor(Y) Toner sensor output value (yellow)
Sensor(K) Toner sensor output value (black)
Execute Execute
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-98
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U135 Checking toner motor operation
Description
Drives toner motors.
Purpose
To check the operation of toner motors.
Remarks
When driving the toner motors long time or several times, developer section becomes the toner
full and is locked.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Toner].
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Toner Toner motor (TM) is turned on
Hopper Toner hopper motor (THM) is turned on
4. To stop the operation, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
U136 Setting toner near end detection
Description
Sets the level that indicates the number of sheets that can be printed from occurrence of toner
near end to toner empty.
Purpose
To change the setting to advance detection of near end if the interval from toner near end to toner
empty seems too short.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
CMY Setting the level of cyan/magenta/yellow toner 0 to 9 3
K Setting the level of black toner 0 to 9 3
Increasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty longer.
Decreasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty shorter.
If 0 is set, toner near end will not be detected.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-99
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity outside the machine
Description
Displays the detected temperature and humidity outside the machine.
Purpose
To check the temperature and humidity outside the machine.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Ext/Int Internal/External temperature (°C), External humidity (%)
LSU Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit (°C)
Developing Internal temperature around the developer section (°C)
Method: [Ext/Int]
1. The current temperature and humidity are displayed.
Display Description
External Temp External temperature (°C)
External Humidity External humidity (%)
Internal Temp Internal temperature (°C)
Method: [LSU]
1. The current temperature is displayed.
Display Description
C Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit C (°C)
M Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit M (°C)
Y Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit Y (°C)
K Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit K (°C)
Method: [Developing]
1. The current temperature is displayed.
Display Description
C Internal temperature around the developer unit C (°C)
M Internal temperature around the developer unit M (°C)
Y Internal temperature around the developer unit Y (°C)
K Internal temperature around the developer unit K (°C)
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-100
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U140 Displaying developer bias
Description
Displays and changes various developer bias value.
Purpose
To check or changes the developer bias value.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Sleeve DC Developer sleeve roller DC bias
Sleeve AC Developer sleeve roller AC bias
Mag DC Developer magnet roller DC bias
Mag AC Developer magnet roller AC bias
Sleeve Freq Developer sleeve roller frequency
Sleeve Duty Developer sleeve roller duty
Mag Duty Developer magnet roller duty
AC Calib Executing or setting the AC calibration
Image Preference Toner density setting
Setting: [Sleeve DC]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
C Developer sleeve roller DC bias 0 to 255 70 70
for cyan
M Developer sleeve roller DC bias 0 to 255 70 70
for magenta
Y Developer sleeve roller DC bias 0 to 255 70 70
for yellow
K Developer sleeve roller DC bias 0 to 255 70 70
for black
B/W* Developer sleeve roller DC bias 0 to 255 - 70
in black/white mode
*: 75 ppm model only.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-101
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U140 Setting: [Sleeve AC]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
C Developer sleeve roller AC bias 0 to 255 168 168
for cyan
M Developer sleeve roller AC bias 0 to 255 168 168
for magenta
Y Developer sleeve roller AC bias 0 to 255 168 168
for yellow
K Developer sleeve roller AC bias 0 to 255 168 168
for black
B/W* Developer sleeve roller AC bias 0 to 255 - 168
in black/white mode
*: 75 ppm model only.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Mag DC]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
C Developer magnet roller DC bias 0 to 255 155 155
for cyan
M Developer magnet roller DC bias 0 to 255 155 155
for magenta
Y Developer magnet roller DC bias 0 to 255 155 155
for yellow
K Developer magnet roller DC bias 0 to 255 155 155
for black
B/W* Developer magnet roller DC bias 0 to 255 - 155
in black/white mode
*: 75 ppm model only.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-102
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U140 Setting: [Mag AC]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
C Developer magnet roller AC bias 0 to 255 224 224
for cyan
M Developer magnet roller AC bias 0 to 255 224 224
for magenta
Y Developer magnet roller AC bias 0 to 255 176 176
for yellow
K Developer magnet roller AC bias 0 to 255 200 200
for black
B/W* Developer magnet roller AC bias 0 to 255 - 200
in black/white mode
*: 75 ppm model only.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Sleeve Freq]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Normal Developer sleeve roller fre- 0 to 6200 5345 5345
quency
B/W* Developer sleeve roller fre- 0 to 6200 - 5345
quency in black/white mode
Half Developer sleeve roller fre- 0 to 6200 5345 5345
quency (half speed)
3/4* Developer sleeve roller fre- 0 to 6200 5345 5345
quency at 3/4 times of line speed
*: 75 ppm model only.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Sleeve Duty]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Normal Developer sleeve roller duty 0 to 99 43 43
B/W* Developer sleeve roller duty in 0 to 99 - 43
black/white mode
*: 75 ppm model only.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-103
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U140 Setting: [Mag Duty]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Normal Developer magnet roller duty 0 to 99 68 68
B/W* Developer magnet roller duty in 0 to 99 - 68
black/white mode
*: 75 ppm model only.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Method: [AC Calib]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Calibration Executing the AC calibration
Magnification AC calibration target bias value setting
High Altitude Mode setting for AC calibration bias control
Method: [Calibration]
1. Turn the items to implement to on.
2. If the machine is installed at high altitudes, turn all of CMYK to On.
Changing Type to 1 sets all of CMYK to On.
Display Description
C When replacing the developer unit C or drum unit C
M When replacing the developer unit M or drum unit M
Y When replacing the developer unit Y or drum unit Y
K When replacing the developer unit K or drum unit K
Type Setting the mode
Execute Executing the Calibration
3. Select [Execute].
4. Press the start key. AC calibration is executed.
5. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : When an error occurs, an error code is displayed.
1-3-104
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U140 Setting: [Magnification]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
C When replacing the developer unit C or drum unit C -10 to 15 10
M When replacing the developer unit M or drum unit M -10 to 15 10
Y When replacing the developer unit Y or drum unit Y -10 to 15 10
K When replacing the developer unit K or drum unit K -10 to1 5 10
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Method: [High Altitude]
1. Select Mode1 or Mode2.
* : 45 ppm model/55 ppm model
Display Description
Mode1 Execute AC calibration by normal bias control
Mode2 If print density is low in an installation at high altitude, execute
calibration by fixing the bias potential.
Initial setting: Mode1
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Method: [Image Preference]
1. Select the Copy.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Copy Setting toner density at copying -1 to +1 0
* : 1: Low 0: Normal +1: Deep
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-105
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U147 Setting for toner applying operation
Description
Sets the mode for removing charged toner in the developing unit (T7 control: Toner applying
operation). Defines the action that the toner accumulated on the developer blade is sent back in
the developer unit (done by the vibration motor).
Purpose
The setting can be changed to reduce the toner applying quantity. Performed to change the
occurrence of the control of the vibration motor.
If the charged toner stays inside the developing unit, density decreases.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Mode Settings for toner applying operation
Upper Limit Upper limit printing ratio of toner applying quantity with each mode
Minimum Toner layer width when cleaning mode is selected
Interval Number Setting the vibration motor On timing
Setting: [Mode]
1. Select the mode.
Display Description
Mode0 Less consumption of toner than a regular toner applying operation
Mode1 Executes toner applying with the regular amount of toner
Initial setting; Mode1
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Upper Limit]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Value Upper limit printing ratio of toner applying 0 to 2.0 2.0
quantity with each mode (%)
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Minimum]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Value Toner layer width when cleaning mode is 0 to 30 10
selected (mm)
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3.
4.
1-3-106
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U147 Setting: [Interval Number]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Print(Normal) During continuous printing (Normal environ- 10 to 500 500
ment)
Print(H/H) During continuous printing (High humidity 10 to 200 100
environment)
Print End Print completed 10 to 100 50
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U148 Setting drum refresh mode
Description
Selects the mode used in drum refreshing
Purpose
Change settings when drum refreshing is too frequently executed.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the mode.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Normal*1 Automatic drum refreshing setting 0 to 3 2
Dew Conden- Dew condensation drum refreshing 0 to 3 0
sation*2 setting
* 1: 0: Off / 1: Short / 2: Standard / 3: Long
*2 : 0:Mode0/ 1:Mode1/ 2:Mode2/ 3:Mode3
Larger the number, more the times of the refresh.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-107
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U155 Checking sensors for toner
Description
Displays the toner sensor output value.
Purpose
To check the output value for each color when any image problems occur.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be display.
Display Description
Waste Toner Control voltage value of the waste toner sensor
Toner Control voltage value and replenishment level of toner sensor
each color
Method: [Waste Toner]
1. Check the status of sensor. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
Full Waste toner sensor 1 (WTS1)
Near Full Waste toner sensor 2 (WTS2)
Method: [Toner]
1. Check the status of sensor. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
Sensor(C) Toner sensor C output value
Sensor(M) Toner sensor M output value
Sensor(Y) Toner sensor Y output value
Sensor(K) Toner sensor K output value
Supply(C) Toner replenishment level for cyan
Supply(M) Toner replenishment level for magenta
Supply(Y) Toner replenishment level for yellow
Supply(K) Toner replenishment level for black
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-108
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U156 Setting the toner replenishment level
Description
Sets the toner replenishment level for each color.
Purpose
To change settings according to the original image.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Supply Setting the toner replenishment level
Empty Setting the toner empty level
Method: [Supply]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Increasing the setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
C Toner replenishment level for cyan 0 to 900 512
M Toner replenishment level for magenta 0 to 900 512
Y Toner replenishment level for yellow 0 to 900 512
K Toner replenishment level for black 0 to 900 512
B/W* Toner replenishment level in black/white mode 0 to 900 512
*: 75 ppm model only.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Method: [Empty]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Increasing the setting makes ‘toner empty’ appear later and decreasing it makes ‘toner
empty’ appear earlier.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
C Toner empty level for cyan 0 to 1023 100
M Toner empty level for magenta 0 to 1023 100
Y Toner empty level for yellow 0 to 1023 100
K Toner empty level for black 0 to 1023 100
B/W* Toner empty level in black/white mode 0 to 1023 100
*: 75 ppm model only.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-109
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U157 Checking the developer drive time
Description
Displays the developer drive time for checking a figure, which is used as a reference when cor-
recting the toner control.
Purpose
To check the developer drive time after replacing the developer unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The developer drive time is displayed.
Display Description
C Developer drive time for cyan
M Developer drive time for magenta
Y Developer drive time for yellow
K Developer drive time for black
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U158 Checking the developer count
Description
Displays the developer count for checking.
Purpose
To check the developer unit status.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current developer counts is displayed.
Display Description
C Developer count value for cyan
M Developer count value for magenta
Y Developer count value for yellow
K Developer count value for black
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-110
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U161 Setting the fuser control temperature
Description
Changes the fuser control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper,
or solve a fuser problem on thick paper.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Warm Up Control temperature except at printing
Print Control temperature during printing
Grain Mode Control for the impalpable uneveness in glossiness
Ready Time Adjust Setting the Temperature to Activate Aging
Setting: [Warm Up]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Ready Control temperature at dis- 130 to 200 170 175
(Center) playing Ready (Center) (°C)
Ready Control temperature at dis- 100 to 200 150 150
(Edge) playing Ready (Edge) (°C)
Ready Control temperature at dis- 0 to 200 100 100
(Press) playing Ready (Press) (°C)
Drive Stable temperature during 130 to 200 175 180
(Center) driving (Center) (°C)
Wait Stable temperature during 130 to 200 170 175
(Center) halt (Center) (°C)
Low Power Control temperature at low 0 to 200 130 130
(Press) power consumption (°C)
(Press)
Full Speed Full speed shift tempera- 0 to 200 40 40
Shift(Center) ture (Center) (°C)
Pressure Pressurizing beginning 0 to 200 100 100
(Press) temperature (Press) (°C)
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-111
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U161 Setting: [Print]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Full Speed Temperature at maximum 130 to 200 170 175
Print(Center) print speed (Center) (°C)
Duplex Shift Temperature at duplex -20 to 20 0 0
(Center) printing (Center) (°C)
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Grain Mode]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Mode0 Current level. Special control is not performed
Mode1 Improvement mode for the impalpable uneveness in
glossiness
Mode2 More improvement
Initial setting: Mode0
Setting: [Ready Time Adjust]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Value Compensating Values for the Activating Tem- 0 to 5 5
perature for Low-temperature Aging: (α)
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
* : Reducing the alpha value lowers the temperature at which aging is activated following the
quiet mode has been stable.
* : Lowering the alpha value could deteriorate the fuser performance due to aging would not
be activated during quiet mode.
Temperature to Acti- Less than Less than 21°C or more
vate Aging 13+α°C 16+α°C
Time for Low-tempera- 60 sec 30 sec 0 sec
ture Aging
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-112
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U163 Resetting the fuser problem data
Description
Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section.
Purpose
To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [Execute].
3. Press the start key. The fuser problem data is initialized.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count
Description
Displays and clears the fuser count for checking.
Purpose
To check the fuser count or drive time after replacement of the fuser unit. Also to clear the counts
after replacing unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The fuser count is displayed.
Display Description
Cnt Fuser unit count value
Release(Time) Fuser unit drive time (release)
Press(Time) Fuser unit drive time (press)
Clear Clearing the Fuser unit count
Clearing
1. Press [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-113
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U169 Checking/setting the fuser power source
Description
Displays and settings the reference voltage of the fuser IH PWB.
Purpose
To check the reference voltage.
* : When U021 is being executed, set the same voltage with the voltage of the IH control
PWB.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Set Fuser Destination setting for Fuser
Setting: [Set Fuser]
Display Description Setting range
Mode Reference voltage 1 to 4
1: 100 V specifications 2: 200 V specifications 3: 120 V specifications
4: 110 V specifications
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature
Description
Displays the detected fuser temperature.
Purpose
To check the fuser temperature.
Method
1. Press the start key. The fuser temperature is displayed.
Display Description
Heat Roller Edge1 Heat roller edge temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Edge2 Heat roller edge temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Center Heat roller center temperature (°C)
Press Roller Center Press roller center temperature (°C)
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance mode No. is displayed.
1-3-114
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U200 Turning all LEDs on
Description
Turn all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
Purpose
To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key.All the LEDs on the operation panel light.
4. Press the stop key. The LEDs turn off.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-115
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U201 Initializing the touch panel
Description
Adjust touch panel detecting positions.
Purpose
When the panel PWB or the operation panel is replaced or if the detecting positions are not
aligned, perform this simulation to correct and confirm.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the [Initialize] or [Check].
Display Description
Initialize Execute the correction of the touch panel display position.
Check Confirm the display position of touch panel.
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance Mode Active U201
Initialize Touch Panel
Initialize
Check
Figure 1-3-18
Method: [Initialize]
1. Press the start key.
2. Tap the center of the + sign. +
3. Press the center of the [+] key dis-
played next.
* : Press it using a tool with a fine tip.
Press the center of the “+” sign.
* Press it using a tool with a fine tip.
Figure 1-3-19
1-3-116
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U201 ]
Press the center of the “+” sign.
* Press it using a tool with a fine tip.
Figure 1-3-20
4. If two “ ” signs appear, press the
both points at the same time.
* : While pressing down one of " "
sign, press the other " " sign. Set-
Press both circles.
ting values are obtained at the time Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
* Press wiit the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingernails)
when two " " signs are pressed at
the same time.
* : Press with the tip of your fingers
(Not your fingernails).
Figure 1-3-21
5. Press the center of two " " signs dis-
played next at the same time.
Press both circles.
Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
Press wiit the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingernails)
Figure 1-3-22
1-3-117
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U201
6. Press the center of “+” sign displayed,
as step 2
7. Repeat three times.
Press the center of the “+” sign.
* Press it using a tool with a fine tip.
If you cannot proceed to the next step, press the Stop key and try again.
Figure 1-3-23
Press the center of the “+” sign.
+
* Press it using a tool with a fine tip.
If you cannot proceed to the next step,press the Stop key and try again.
Figure 1-3-24
Press the center of the “+” sign.
* Press it using a tool with a fine tip.
If you cannot proceed to the next step, press the Stop key and try again.
Figure 1-3-25
1-3-118
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U201
8. After completing the setting, “Initialize
Completed.” is displayed and entering
Check mode.
Initialize completed.
Figure 1-3-26
Method: [Check
Single Tap Check +
1. Press the start key. Initialize
2. Press the center of three “+” signs and
confirm the display positions.
* : Press it using a tool with a fine tip Single Tap Check.
(touch panel pen etc). Press the center of the “+” sign. +
* Press it using a tool with a fine tip.
If you need to perform initialization again, select “Initialize” and press the Start key.
Figure 1-3-27
3. Make sure that the gap from coordi- +(-1,2)
nates X and Y is 6 or less, respectively. Initialize
Multi Tap
Check
* : If the setting values are not aligned,
select “Initialize” and press the Start + (1,0)
Single Tap Check.
Select “Multi Tap Check” and press the Start key to go to the next step.
key to revert to step 1. If you need to perform initialization again, select “Initialize” and press the Start key.
+(-2,0)
Figure 1-3-28
1-3-119
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U201 Multi Tap check
1. Select “Multi tap check”, and press the Step1 : Not completed
start key. Initialize
Step2 : Not completed
2. Press two “ ” signs at the same time.
(Step1)
* : If the detecting values are not within
Multi Tap Check. Step 1.
the setting values, pressed detecting Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
* Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingernails)
positions are displayed by red
points.
Figure 1-3-29
3. Press two “ ” signs displayed next at Step1 : Completed
the same time. (Step2) Initialize
Step2 : Not completed
4. If the detecting values are within the
setting values, Step1 and Step2
Multi Tap Check. Step 2.
become “Completed”. Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
* Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingernails)
Figure 1-3-30
5. If “Multi tap check completed.” is dis- Step1 : Completed
played, the checking process is com- Step2 : Completed
pleted successfully.
Multi Tap Check completed.
Press the Stop key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Figure 1-3-31
1-3-120
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U201
* : If the detecting values are not within Step1 : Completed
the setting values, pressed detecting Initialize
Step2 : Not completed
positions are displayed by red Multi Tap Check
Step1
points. And “Multi tap check Step 1"
button is displayed. Multi Tap Check. Step 2.
Press both circles again.
Select “Multi Tap Check Step 1” and press the Start key to try again from Multi Tap Check Step 1.
If you need to perform initialization again, select “Initialize” and press the Start key.
Press the Stop key to complete the setting.
* : Select “Initialize” and press the Start
key to revert to “Initialize”.
* : Select “Multi tap check Step 1” and
press the Start key to revert to “Multi
tap check”.
Figure 1-3-32
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-121
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system
Description
Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines,
so no setting is necessary.
Purpose
Performed at installation, periodic maintenance, and/or repair.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Init/Set TEL No. Initialization/Phone Nbr. se
Call Service End Outgoing at the end of service activities
Method: [Init/Set TEL No.]
1. Select the item to be input.
Display Description
TEL No. 1 Sales companies
TEL No. 2 Call center
2. Input the telephone number using the numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. Select [Initialize].
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the start key. Communication with the host initiated.
7. The result of communication will be displayed. (Refer to the result.)
Method: [Call Service End]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Communication with the host initiated.
3. The result of communication will be displayed. (Refer to the result.)
Result table
Display Description
OK Communication properly terminated.
Communication error (Nbr. of calls exceeded)
Communication error (Communication timeout)
NG Communication error (Communication trial timeout)
Communication error (Other)
KMAS unreachable
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-122
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U203 Checking DP operation
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
To check the DP operation.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the speed to be operated.
Display Description
Normal Speed Normal reading (600 dpi)
High Speed High-speed reading
4. Select the item to be operated.
Display Description
CCD ADP With paper, single-sided original of CCD
CIS With paper, double-sided original of CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, single-sided original of CCD
(continuous operation)
CIS (Non-P) Without paper, double-sided original of CIS
(continuous operation)
5. Press the start key. The operation starts.
6. To stop continuous operation, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-123
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Device Sets the presence or absence of the key card or key counter
Message Sets the message when optional equipment is not installed
Setting: [Device]
1. Select the optional counter to be installed.
Display Description
Key-Card The key card is installed
Key-Counter The key counter is installed
Off Not installed
Initial setting: Off
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Setting: [Message]
1. Select the [Key Device] or [Coin Vender].
Display Description
Key Device Select the prioritized display mode of the login dialog as the
key device.
Coin Vender Select the coin vender as the prioritized display of the login
dialog.
* : Initial setting: Coin Vender
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
1-3-124
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U206 Setting the presence or absence of a coin vender
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines.
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a coin vender is installed.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
On/Off Config Sets the presence or absence of the coin vender
No Coin Action Behavior when change runs out during copying
Price Charge per copy by size and color
Boot Mode Setting activation mode
Apl Charge Mode Extended charge unit
Setting: [On/Off Config]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On The coin vender is installed
Off The coin vender is not installed
Initial setting: Off
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Setting: [No Coin Action]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
All Clear All clear is performed
Auto Clear Auto clear is performed
Off Clear is not performed
Initial setting: Off
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
1-3-125
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U206 Setting: [Price]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Normal Charge setting: Normal
AD Charge setting: Commercial
Print Charge setting: Print
Apl Charge setting: Extended
Setting: [Normal / AD]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
B/W Black & White
CMY Single color C, M, Y
RGB Single color R, G, B
Full Color Full color
2. Select the paper size to be set.
3. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Initial
Setting setting
Display Description
range B/W CMY/RGB
Full Color
A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10 100
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10 50
Card Post card 0 to 300 10 30
Other Other 0 to 300 10 50
In 10-yen increments
Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Setting: [Print]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
B/W Black & White
Full Color Full color
2. Select the paper size to be set.
1-3-126
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U206 3. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Initial
Setting setting
Display Description
range B/W CMY/RGB
Full Color
A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10 100
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10 50
Card Post card 0 to 300 10 30
Other Other 0 to 300 10 50
In 10-yen increments
Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
Setting: [Apl]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Apl1 Expanded charging unit 1 0 to 300 10
Apl2 Expanded charging unit 2 0 to 300 10
Apl3 Expanded charging unit 3 0 to 300 10
Apl4 Expanded charging unit 4 0 to 300 10
Apl5 Expanded charging unit 5 0 to 300 10
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Setting: [Boot Mode]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Normal Assign activation to normal mode.
Copy Service Assign activation to copy service display.
Initial setting: Copy Service
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Apl Charge Mode]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
On The extended charge unit is used.
Off The extended charge unit is not used.
Initial setting: Off
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-127
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U207 Checking the operation panel keys
Description
Checks operation of the operation panel keys.
Purpose
To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. [Count0] is displayed and the left most LED on the operation panel lights.
3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top
to the bottom, the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. When all the
keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line
on the immediate right, the top LED in that line will light.
4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10
seconds.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U208 Setting the paper size for the side deck
Description
Sets the size of paper used in side deck.
Purpose
To change the setting when installing the side deck or the size of paper used in the side deck is
changed.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the paper size (A4, B5 or Letter).
Initial setting: Letter (Inch specifications)
A4 (Metric specifications)
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
1-3-128
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U209 Set RTC (Real Time Clock) Date
Description
Assign a date and time to RTC.
Purpose
Used to assign a date and time to RTC when “Time for Maintenance T” is displayed after C0840
is detected.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Display Description
Year Setting the year
Month Setting the month
Day Setting the day
Hour Setting the hour
Minute Setting the minute
Second Setting the second
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
* : Perform U906 to clear “Time for Maintenance T" after making setting.
U221 Setting the USB host lock function
Description
Specifies ON/OFF the USB host lock function. Setting this to ON causes the machine to be
unable to recognize the device connected to the USB host.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Host Lock].
3. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On USB host lock function ON
Off USB host lock function OFF
Initial setting: Off
4. Press the start key. The setting is set.
5. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
1-3-129
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U222 Setting the IC card type
Description
Sets the type of IC card.
Purpose
To change the type of IC card.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Other Sets the type of IC cards to other than SSFC
SSFC Sets the type of IC cards to SSFC
Initial setting: Other
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-130
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U223 Operation panel lock
Description
Sets the operation panel lock function.
Purpose
This is performed to inhibit operating and canceling the system menu on the operation panel
which may be done by others then an administrator.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Unlock Release the lock of the operation from the system menu
Partial Lock 1 The system menu entry and input/output related settings are
locked
Partial Lock 2 The system menu entries, input/output related settings, and
Job-execution-related settings are locked
Partial Lock 3 The system menu entries, input/output related settings, Job-
execution-related settings, and paper related settings are
locked
Lock Lock the operation from the system menu and job cancel
Initial setting: Unlock
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Item Partial Lock
Lock 1
Entering maintenance mode Prohibited Prohibited
Entering system menu Prohibited Prohibited
Transmission/transmission from Prohibited Prohibited
document boxes
Entering addressbook add/edit Prohibited Prohibited
Entering document box add/edit Prohibited Prohibited
Pressing stop key Permitted Prohibited
Pressing status/job cancel Permitted Prohibited
Disconnecting FAX lines Permitted Prohibited
* : The language selection is not displayed if the partial locks 1-2-3-Lock is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-131
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U224 Panel sheet extension
Description
Changes the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine startup and the
image data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.
Setting
1. Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot of the machine.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
5. Press the start key.
6. Select the [Install] or [UnInstall].
Display Description
Install Installs the image data or the message data
UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data
7. Select the item.
Display Description Display area
Opening Img Startup screen Entire start display
Call Img Service call screen Graphic display area
Home Menu Img Home Menu screen Home Menu display area
Call Msg Top Service call message 1 Message display area (top)
Call Msg Detail Service call message 2 Message display area (descriptive area)
8. Press the start key. Installation or uninstallation is started.
9. When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Supplement 1
File information
Description File name Image size (in pixels) File format
Startup screen opening_ext_image.png Length: 480 PNG
Width: 800
Service call callwin_ext_image.png Length: 200 PNG
screen Width: 180
Home Menu menu_background.png Length: 480 PNG
screen Width: 800
Service call callwin_ext_mes_top.txt - TEXT
message 1 (Unicode)
Service call callwin_ext_mes_detail.txt - TEXT
message 2 (Unicode)
1-3-132
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U224 Supplement 2
Displaying start display
The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at power on or recovering from sleeping.
Graphics display on service call display
The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at a service call.
How to change the message
Entering #562 (4 letters) using the numeric keypad during a service call display will let service
call messages 1 and 2.
How to reset the message display
Reverting the maintenance mode will automatically reset the message to the previous.
Caution
The graphics file for start display must be opaque. (To avoid the background from overlapping at
recovering from sleeping.)
The total size of the files installable is approximately 4 MB.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U234 Setting punch destination
Description
Sets the destination of punch unit of 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the destination.
Display Description
Auto Conforms to destination settings.
Japan Metric Metric (Japan) specifications
Inch Inch (North America) specifications
Europe Metric Metric (Europe) specifications
Initial setting: Inch (Inch specifications)/Europe Metric (Metric specifications)
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
1-3-133
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U237 Setting finisher stack quantity
Description
Sets the number of sheets of each stack on the main tray and on the middle tray in 4000-sheet
finisher.
Purpose
To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Main Tray Number of sheets of stack on the main tray
Middle Tray Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode
Setting: [Main Tray]
1. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Display Description
0 When stapling paper less than B4 size, paper full is detected
when 4,000 sheets are output.
When stapling B4 size paper, or larger, paper full is detected
when 1500 sheets are output.
1 When stapling 30 sheets or less, paper full is detected after
150 sets or 1500 sheets are output, whichever is faster..
When stapling 31 sheets or more, paper full is detected after
150 sets or 4,000 sheets are output, whichever is faster.
Initial setting: 0
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Setting: [Middle Tray]
1. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Display Description
0 Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode:
65 sheets
1 Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode:
30 sheets
Initial setting: 0
Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for non-staple copying: 10 sheets
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
1-3-134
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U240 Checking the operation of the finisher
Description
Turn each motor and solenoid of 4000-sheet finisher ON.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the 4000-sheet finisher.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be checked.
Display Description
Motor Checking the motor of the document finisher
Solenoid Checking the solenoid of the document finisher
Mail Box Checking the motor of the mailbox
Booklet Checking the motor of the center-folding unit
Method: [Motor]
1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Feed In(H) DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) is turned on at high speed
Feed In(L) DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) is turned on at low speed
Middle(H) DF middle motor (DFMM) is turned on at high speed
Middle(L) DF middle motor (DFMM) is turned on at low speed
Eject(H) DF eject motor (DFEM) is turned on at high speed
Eject(L) DF eject motor (DFEM) is turned on at low speed
Save(H) DF drum motor (DFDRM) is turned on at high speed
Save(L) DF drum motor (DFDRM) is turned on at low speed
Tray DF tray motor (DFTM) is turned on
Operating sequences:
Ascends after descending to the bottom limit; descends again
in one second after the intermediate sensor is detected to be
off; ascends again after the intermediate sensor is detected to
be on; then halts at the top limit
Staple Move DF slide motor (DFSLM) is turned on
Staple DF staple motor (DFSTM) is turned on
Width Test(A3) DF side registration motor 1, 2 (DFSRM1, 2) is turned on
Width Test(LD) DF side registration motor 1, 2 (DFSRM1, 2) is turned on
Beat DF paddle motor (DFPDM) is turned on
Eject Unlock(HP) DF eject release motor (DFERM) is turned on to home position
Sort Test DF shift motor 1, 2 (DFSFM1, 2) is turned on
Eject Unlock(30) DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 30-sheet stack
1-3-135
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U240
Display Description
Eject Unlock(50) DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 50-sheet stack
Eject Unlock(Fix) DF eject release motor (DFERM) fixed drive position
Eject Unlock(Full) DF eject release motor (DFERM) full-open drive position
Punch Punch motor (PUM) is turned on
Punch Move Punch slide motor (PUSLM) is turned on
Method: [Solenoid]
1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Sub Tray DF feedshift solenoid (DFFSSOL) is turned on
Save Drum DF drum solenoid (DFDRSOL) is turned on
Booklet DF center fold solenoid (DFCFSOL) is turned on
Punch Punch solenoid (PUSOL) is turned on
Three Fold CF feedshift solenoid (CFFSSOL) is turned on
Method: [Mail Box]
1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Conv MB drive motor (MBDM) is turned on at paper conveying
Branch MB drive motor (MBDM) is turned on at feedshift operation
Method: [Booklet]
1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Folding CF main motor (CFMM) is turned on
Blade CF blade motor (CFBM) is turned on
Bundle Up CF adjustment motor 2 (CFADM2) is turned on
Bundle Down CF adjustment motor 1 (CFADM1) is turned on
Staple CF staple motor (CFSTM) is turned on
Width Test(A3) CF side registration motor 1, 2 (CFSRM1, 2) is turned on
Width Test(LD) CF side registration motor 1, 2 (CFSRM1, 2) is turned on
Feed In CF paper entry motor (CFPEM) is turned on
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-136
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher
Description
Displays the status of each switches and sensors of 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To check the operation of each switches and sensors of the 4000-sheet finisher.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be checked.
Display Description
Finisher Checking the switch and sensor of the document finisher
Mail Box Checking the switch and sensor of the mailbox
Booklet Checking the switch and sensor of the center-folding unit
Punch Checking the switch and sensor of the punch unit
Method: [Finisher]
1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in
reverse.
Display Description
Front Cover DF front cover switch (DFFCSW)
MPT DF eject cover switch (DFECSW)
Tray U-Limit DF tray sensor 1 (DFTS1)
Tray HP2 DF tray sensor 2 (DFTS2)
Tray Middle DF tray sensor 3 (DFTS3)
Tray L-Limit DF tray sensor 4 (DFTS4)
Tray L-Limit(BL) DF tray sensor 5 (DFTS5)
Tray Top DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS)
HP DF paper entry sensor (DFPES)
Sub Tray Eject DF sub eject sensor (DFSES)
Middle Tray Eject DF middle eject sensor (DFMES)
Drum DF drum sensor (DFDRS)
Staple HP DF slide sensor (DFSLS)
Middle Tray DF middle tray sensor (DFMTS)
Width Front HP DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1)
Width Tail HP DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2)
Bundle Eject HP DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS)
1-3-137
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U241
Display Description
Match Paddle DF adjustment sensor (DFADS)
Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor (DFPDS)
Shift Front HP DF shift sensor 1 (DFSFS1)
Shift Tail HP DF shift sensor 2 (DFSFS2)
Shift Unlock HP DF shift release sensor (DFSFRS)
Sub Tray Full DF sub tray full sensor (DFSTFS)
Shift Set DF shift set sensor (DFSFSS)
Method: [Mail Box]
1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in
reverse.
Display Description
Eject MB eject sensor (MBES)
Cover MB cover open/close switch (MBCOCSW)
Over Flow1 MB overflow sensor 1 (MBOFS1)
Over Flow2 MB overflow sensor 2 (MBOFS2)
Over Flow3 MB overflow sensor 3 (MBOFS3)
Over Flow4 MB overflow sensor 4 (MBOFS4)
Over Flow5 MB overflow sensor 5 (MBOFS5)
Over Flow6 MB overflow sensor 6 (MBOFS6)
Over Flow7 MB overflow sensor 7 (MBOFS7)
Motor HP MB paper entry sensor (MBPES)
1-3-138
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U241 Method: [Booklet]
1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in
reverse.
Display Description
HP CF paper entry sensor (CFPES)
Eject CF eject sensor (CFES)
Paper CF paper sensor (CFPS)
Tray Full CF tray full sensor (CFTFS)
Bundle Up HP CF adjustment sensor 1 (CFADS1)
Bundle Down HP CF adjustment sensor 2 (CFADS2)
Width Up HP CF side registration sensor 1 (CFSRS1)
Width Down HP CF side registration sensor 2 (CFSRS2)
Blade HP CF blade sensor (CFBLS)
Tray CF tray switch (CFTSW)
Set CF set switch (CFSSW)
Left Guide CF left guide switch (CFLGSW)
Vertical Feed CF paper conveying sensor (CFPCS)
Method: [Punch]
1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in
reverse.
Display Description
Punch HP Punch home position sensor (PUHPS)
Edge Face1 Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES)
Edge Face2 Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES)
Edge Face3 Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES)
Edge Face4 Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES)
Tank Punch tank set switch (PUTSSW)
Tank Full Punch tank full sensor (PUTFS)
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-139
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors
Description
Turn the motors or solenoids in the DP on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DP motors and solenoids.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Feed Motor DP original feed motor (DPOFM) is turned on
Conv Motor DP original conveying motor (DPOCM) is turned on
Lift Motor DP lift motor (DPLM) is turned on
Eject Motor DP eject motor (DPEM) is turned on
Regist Motor DP registration motor (DPRM) is turned on
DP Fan DP fan motor 1 (DPFM1) is turned on
CIS Fan DP fan motor 2 (DPFM2) is turned on
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
1-3-140
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U244 Checking the DP switches
Description
Displays the status of the respective switches and sensors in the DP.
Purpose
To check if respective switches and sensors in the DP operate correctly.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in
reverse.
Display Description
Feed DP feed sensor (DPFS)
Timing DP timing sensor (DPTS)
CIS Head DP CIS sensor (DPCS)
Set DP original sensor (DPOS)
Longitudinal DP original length switch (DPOLSW)
Lift U-Limit DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1)
Lift L-Limit DP lift sensor 2 (DPLS2)
Cover Open DP interlock switch (DPILSW)
Open DP open/close switch (DPOCSW)
Eject DP eject sensor (DPES)
Slant DP slant sensor (DPSS)
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-141
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U245 Checking messages
Description
Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
To check the messages to be displayed.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the message using the cursor up/down keys.
When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed,
the message corresponding the specified number is displayed.
3. Change the language using the +/- keys.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-142
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U246 Setting the finisher
Description
Provides various settings for the 4000-sheet finisher, if furnished.
Purpose
Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode
Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the copy paper is Z-folded in punch mode.
Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode
To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one.
Adjustment of center position timing in the punch mode
Adjusts the center position of a punch hole in punch mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of front/rear side registration home position
Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the side registration
guides to paper.
Adjustment of front/rear shift home position
Performed when adjustment is lost with the ejected paper
Adjusting of front/back stapling home position
Adjusts the stapling position in the staple mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position
Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the side registration
guides to paper.
Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of center folding position
Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of tri- folding position
Adjusts the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Finisher Adjustment of 4000-sheet finisher
Booklet Adjustment of center-folding unit
Method: [Finisher]
1. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Punch Regist Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode
Punch Feed Adjustment of the paper stop timing in punch mode
Punch Width Adjustment of the center position timing in punch mode
Width Front HP Adjustment of front side registration home position
Width Tail HP Adjustment of rear side registration home position
Shift Front HP Adjustment of front shift home position
Shift Tail HP Adjustment of rear shift home position
Staple HP Adjustment of front and back stapling home position
1-3-143
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U246 Setting: [Punch Regist]
1. Select [Punch Regist].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Adjustment of registration stop timing -20 to 20 0 0.25 mm
If skewed paper conveying occurs (sample 1), increase the setting value. If the copy paper is
Z-folded (sample 2), decrease the setting value.
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-33
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Punch Feed]
1. Select [Punch Feed].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Adjustment of the paper stop timing -10 to 10 0 0.52 mm
If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A, increase
the setting value. If the distance is larger than the value A, decrease the setting value.
A
Preset value A: 13 mm (metric)
9.5 mm (inch)
Figure 1-3-34
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-144
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U246 Setting: [Punch Width]
1. Select [Punch Width].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Adjustment of the punch center position timing -4 to 4 0 0.52 mm
* : If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine, increase the setting value. If the
punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine, decrease the setting value.
Center line
(within ± 0.5 mm)
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-35
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Width Front HP/Width Tail HP]
1. Select [Width Front HP] or [Width Tail HP].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Adjustment of front side registration home position -15 to 15 0 0.19 mm
Adjustment of rear side registration home position -15 to 15 0 0.19 mm
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Motor], then [Width Test(A3)].
The width guides of the middle tray will move to A3-size position.
6. Pull the middle tray, insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides.
7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
Setting: [Shift Front HP/Shift Tail HP]
1. Select [Shift Front HP] or [Shift Tail HP].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Adjustment of front shift home position -15 to 15 0 0.19 mm
Adjustment of rear shift home position -15 to 15 0 0.19 mm
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Motor], then [Sort Test].
6. Repeat the above adjustment until eject paper is properly in position.
1-3-145
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U246 Setting: [Staple HP]
1. Select [Staple HP].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Adjustment of front and back stapling home position -15 to 15 0 0.19 mm
* : When staple positions are off toward the front side of the machine (sample 1), increase
the setting value. When staple positions are off toward the rear side of the machine (sam-
ple 2), decrease the setting value.
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-36
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Method: [Booklet]
1. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position
Width Down HP Adjustment of lower side registration home position
Staple Pos1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size
Staple Pos2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size
Staple Pos3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Booklet Pos1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size
Booklet Pos2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size
Booklet Pos3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Three Fold Adjustment of tri-folding position
1-3-146
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U246 Setting: [Width Up HP/Width Down HP]
1. Select [Width Up HP] or [Width Down HP].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Adjustment of upper side registration home position -15 to 15 0 0.34 mm
Adjustment of lower side registration home position -15 to 15 0 0.34 mm
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Booklet], then [Width Test(A3)].
The width guides of the center-folding unit will move to A3-size position.
6. Pull the center-folding unit, insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the
guides.
7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
Setting: [Staple Pos]
1. Select [Staple Pos1], [Staple Pos2] or [Staple Pos3].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
A4/Letter size
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
B4/Legal size
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
A3/Ledger/8K size
* : When staples are placed too far right (sample 1), decrease the preset value. When sta-
ples are placed too far left (sample 2), increase the preset value.
Reference value: within ± 2 mm
2 mm 2 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-37
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-147
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U246 Setting: [Booklet Pos]
1. Select [Booklet Pos1], [Booklet Pos2] or [Booklet Pos3].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/ -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
8K size
* : When the centerfold position too far right (sample 1), increase the preset value. When the
centerfold position too far left (sample 2), decrease the setting value.
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 3 mm
A
Center line Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-38
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Three Fold]
1. Select [Three Fold].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Adjustment of tri-folding position -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
* : When the tri-fold position too far right (sample 1), increase the preset value. When the tri-
fold position too far left (sample 2), decrease the setting value.
Reference value A: 7.0 ± 2 mm
A
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-39
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-148
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U247 Setting the paper feed device
Description
Turn on motor and clutches of paper feeder device.
Purpose
To check the operation of motor and clutches of paper feed device.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the paper feed device.
Display Description
LCF Large capacity feeder
Side Deck Side deck
SMT Side multi tray
Side 2PF Side paper feeder
Side LCF Side large capacity feeder
Method: [LCF/Side LCF]
1. Press [Motor] or [Device] and select the item.
Display Description
Motor Off PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned off
On PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned on
Device C1 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 1 (PFPCCL1) is turned on
C2 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 2 (PFPCCL2) is turned on
V Feed Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 3 (PFPCCL3) is turned on
H Feed1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) is turned on
H Feed2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) is turned on
Cassette1 Solenoid PF pickup solenoid 1 (PFPUSOL1) is turned on
Cassette2 Solenoid PF pickup solenoid 2 (PFPUSOL2) is turned on
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.
1-3-149
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U247 Method: [Side Deck]
1. Press [Motor] or [Device] and select the item.
Display Description
Motor Off SF paper feed motor (SFPFM) is turned off
On SF paper feed motor (SFPFM) is turned on
Device C1 Clutch SF paper conveying clutch (SFPCCL) is turned on
Cassette1 Solenoid SF pickup solenoid (PFPUSOL) is turned on
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.
Method: [SMT]
1. Press [Motor] or [Device] and select the item.
Display Description
Motor Off SM paper feed motor (SMPFM) is turned off
On SM paper feed motor (SMPFM) is turned on
Device C1 Clutch SM paper conveying clutch 1 (SMPCCL1) is turned on
Feed1 Clutch SM paper conveying clutch 2 (SMPCCL2) is turned on
Feed2 Clutch SM paper conveying clutch 3 (SMPCCL3) is turned on
Feed3 Clutch SM paper conveying clutch 4 (SMPCCL4) is turned on
Cassette1 Solenoid SM pickup solenoid (SMPUSOL) is turned on
Separator Solenoid SM feedshift solenoid (SMFSSOL) is turned on
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.
Method: [2PF/Side 2PF]
1. Press [Motor] or [Device] and select the item.
Display Description
Motor Off PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned off
On PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned on
Device C1 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 1 (PFPCCL1) is turned on
C2 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 2 (PFPCCL2) is turned on
V Feed(H) Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) is turned on
V Feed(L) Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) is turned on
Cassette1 Solenoid PF pickup solenoid 1 (PFPUSOL1) is turned on
Cassette2 Solenoid PF pickup solenoid 2 (PFPUSOL2) is turned on
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.
1-3-150
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U247 Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U249 Finisher operation test
Description
Perform operating tests on the 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To check the operation of the 4000-sheet finisher.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Punch Position Check the stop position of punching
Booklet Pass Check the paper paths to the center-folding unit
3. Press the start key.
4. Press the system menu key to make a test copy.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-151
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U250 Checking/clearing the maintenance cycle
Description
Changes preset values for maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Provides changing the time when the message to acknowledge to conduct maintenance and
automatic grayscale adjustment is periodically displayed.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting using the +- keys or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial setting
range
M.Cnt A Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit A) 0 to 9999999 600000
M.Cnt B Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit B) 0 to 9999999 600000
M.Cnt C Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit C) 0 to 9999999 300000
M.Cnt D Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit D) 0 to 9999999 300000
M.Cnt E Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit E) 0 to 9999999 300000
M.Cnt HT Preset values for automatic grayscale 0 to 9999999 0
adjustment
Cassette 1 Maintenance counter cassette1 0 to 9999999 150000
Cassette 2 Maintenance counter cassette1 0 to 9999999 150000
Cassette 3 Maintenance counter cassette1 0 to 9999999 150000
Cassette 4 Maintenance counter cassette1 0 to 9999999 150000
Cassette 5 Maintenance counter cassette5 0 to 9999999 150000
Cassette 6 Maintenance counter cassette6 0 to 9999999 150000
Cassette 7 Maintenance counter cassette7 0 to 9999999 150000
Clear Maintenance counter all clear 0 to 9999999 -
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The setting value is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
* : Cassette 1 to 7:
When the firmware is upgraded in the field, the standard counter value newly added
should be set to 150000.
1-3-152
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counter
Description
Displays and clears or changes the maintenance count and automatic grayscale adjustment
count.
Purpose
To verify the maintenance counter count and automatic grayscale count. Also to clear the count
during maintenance service.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be changed.
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial setting
range
M.Cnt A Count value for maintenance cycle (kit A) 0 to 9999999 0
M.Cnt B Count value for maintenance cycle (kit B) 0 to 9999999 0
M.Cnt C Count value for maintenance cycle (kit C) 0 to 9999999 0
M.Cnt D Count value for maintenance cycle (kit D) 0 to 9999999 0
M.Cnt E Count value for maintenance cycle (kit E) 0 to 9999999 0
M.Cnt HT Automatic grayscale adjustment count 0 to 9999999 0
Cassette 1 Maintenance counter cassette1 0 to 9999999 0
Cassette 2 Maintenance counter cassette2 0 to 9999999 0
Cassette 3 Maintenance counter cassette3 0 to 9999999 0
Cassette 4 Maintenance counter cassette4 0 to 9999999 0
Cassette 5 Maintenance counter cassette5 0 to 9999999 0
Cassette 6 Maintenance counter cassette6 0 to 9999999 0
Cassette 7 Maintenance counter cassette7 0 to 9999999 0
Clear Maintenance counter all clear 0 to 9999999 -
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The setting value is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
* : When the firmware is upgraded in the field, input the counter value of U901 into the pri-
mary feed counter.
If the counter value is larger than 150000, replace the primary feed roller and input “0”.
1-3-153
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U252 Setting the destination
Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
Purpose
To be executed after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before
replacement or initialization.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the destination.
Display Description
Inch Inch (North America) specifications
Europe Metric Metric (Europe) specifications
Asia Pacific Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
Australia Australia specifications
China China specifications
Korea Korea specifications
3. Press the start key.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error.
When errors occurred, turn main power switch off then on, and execute initialization using
maintenance item U252.
Error codes
Codes Description
0001 Entity error
0002 Controller error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
1-3-154
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U253 Switching between double and single counts
Description
Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters for every color mode.
Purpose
Used to select, according to the preference of the user (copy service provider), if A3/Ledger
paper is to be counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count).
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Full Color Count system of full color mode
Mono Color* Count system of single color mode
B/W Count system of black/white mode
* : Displayed only if the setting of U276 (Setting the copy count mode) is Mode1.
3. Select the count system.
Display Description
SGL(All) Single count for all size paper
DBL(A3/Ledger) Double count for A3/Ledger size or larger
DBL(B4) Double count for B4 size or larger
DBL(Folio) Double count for Folio size or larger
Initial setting: DBL(A3/Ledger)
4. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-155
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting
Description
Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
To be set according to user request.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the copy count timing.
Display Description
Feed When secondary paper feed starts
Eject When the paper is ejected
Initial setting: Eject
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code
Description
Sets the OEM purchaser code.
Purpose
Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
1-3-156
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U271 Setting the page count
Description
Banner counting
Purpose
To change when modifying counting Banner
* : If U253 is adjusted to double-counting, the value which is multiplied with this value will be
the count value.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
3. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
Banner A Counting for Banner A (470.1mm to 2 to 30 2
915mm/18.51” to 36”)
Banner B Counting for Banner B (915.1mm to 2 to 30 3
1,220mm/36.01” to 48”)
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U276 Setting the copy count mode
Description
Sets the count mode of single color mode.
Purpose
To change the charging counter which counts up in single color printing.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the mode.
Display Description
Mode0 This lets the full color counter count up in single color
Mode1 This lets the single color counter count up in single color
Initial setting: Mode 0
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-157
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U278 Setting the delivery date
Description
Enter delivery date in month, day, and year.
Purpose
To operate when installing the machine. Perform this to confirm the delivery date.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Today].
3. Press the start key. The delivery date is set.
Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The delivery date is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U284 Setting 2 color copy mode
Description
Sets whether to use 2 color copy mode.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On 2 color copy mode is enabled
Off 2 color copy mode is disabled
Initial setting: Off
* : If On is selected, 2-color copy will be displayed on the color function screen.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-158
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U285 Setting service status page
Description
Determines displaying the print coverage report on reporting.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Displays the print coverage
Off Not to display the print coverage
Initial setting: On
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U323 Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning
Description
Specify whether or not a notice is displayed on the operation panel when abnormal temperature
and humidity is detected.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Displays the abnormal temperature and humidity warning
Off Not to display the abnormal temperature and humidity warning
Initial setting: On
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-159
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U325 Setting the paper interval
Description
Due to the fact that, if toner consumption per driving time drastically lowers, the variation in color-
ing and low density and gray background become prominent, the print coverage that executes
toner ejection according to the low density at a continued vertical printing with the low coverage
data must be changed.
Purpose
The settings must be changed when printing an extensive volume with the vertical A4/Letter of
low coverage contents or the toner consumption per driving time is extremely low.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Interval On-Off control of Inter-paper toner ejection
Mode Setting mode of Inter-paper toner ejection
Setting: [Interval]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Inter-paper toner ejection is performed
Off Inter-paper toner ejection is not performed
Initial setting: Off
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Mode]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Mode Inter-paper toner ejection mode 1 to 2 1
* : Mode 1 or Mode 2 is effective when Interval is on.
Mode 1: For usages where the original date includes a low toner coverage or gray back-
ground is observed (T7 threshold is 3%).
Mode 2: For environments where printing is seldom made but the machine toggles in
warm-up mode. (Mostly scanning is used such as in a show room.)
(T7 threshold 3% + simplified refreshing is implemented after the warm-up calibration)
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-160
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication
Description
Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease
by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Black Line Mode Black line cleaning guidance ON/OFF setting
Black Line Cnt Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication
Setting: [Black Line Mode]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Displays the cleaning guidance
Off Not to display the cleaning guidance
Initial setting: On
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Black Line Cnt]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Cnt Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indi- 0 to 255 8
cation (x 1000 sheets)
When setting is 0, the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is
detected.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-161
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U327 Setting the cassette heater control
Description
Sets the cassette heater control.
Purpose
To change the setting according to the machine installation environment.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Mode1 Setting On when the humidity is 65%. (when sleep mode and
waiting mode)
Mode2 Setting On in full-time. (when sleep mode and waiting mode)
Off Cassette heater OFF
Initial setting: Off
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-162
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U332 Setting the size conversion factor
Description
Rate: Setting a factor to convert a non-standard size paper to A4/Letter. The coefficient set here
is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in user
simulation.
Mode: Make settings on the color copy and color print coverage counter displays, as well as the
coverage threshold.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Rate Size coefficient
Mode Toggling full-color count and color coverage count display
Level 1 Low coverage threshold value
Level 2 Middle coverage threshold value
Setting: [Rate]
Purpose: To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to
the A4/Letter size.
1. Change the setting using the +/-keys or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Rate Size coefficient 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Mode]
Purpose: Make settings on the color copy and color print color/coverage counter displays.
1. Select the mode.
Display Description
0 Full-color count display
1 Color coverage count display
Initial setting: 0
* : If ‘0’ has been changed to ‘1’, revert the U260 feed/eject counter switch to its initial state
(Eject).
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Level 1/2]
Purpose: Setting the coverage thresholds to segment the color count depending on the density
level of 1, 2, and 3, for the counters of color copying and color printing.
* : The coverage threshold will be used to categorize the following counters when using
U920.
Color Copy(H), Color Copy(M), Color Copy(L)
Color Prn(H), Color Prn(M), Color Prn(L)
1-3-163
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U332
1. Select the item.
2. Change the setting using the +/-keys or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Level 1 Low coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.8 1.0
Level 2 Middle coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.9 2.5
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U340 Setting the applied mode
Description
Allocates memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a
working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct print-
ing occurs.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Adj Memory Setting the memory allocation
Adj Max Job Setting the maximum of multiple jobs
Setting: [Adj Memory]
1. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Image Area temporarily used to create output -100 to 100 0
image. (MB)
* : Set the values below in case print failure occurs with the memory shortage.
(recommended value)
Image: +100
1. Press the start key. The value is set.
2. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Supplement
The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large.
1-3-164
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U340 Setting: [Adj Max Job]
1. Change the setting using the +/-keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Copy Maximum copy (Scan To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 10
Printer Maximum printer (Host To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 -
* : The maximum Printer jobs should be (maximum jobs) – (maximum copy jobs).
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function
Description
Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output (only if a printer kit is installed).
Purpose
To use a paper feed location only for printer output.
A paper feed location specified for printer output cannot be used for copy output.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the paper feed location for the printer.
* : Two or more cassette can be selected.
Display Description
Cassette1 Cassette 1
Cassette2 Cassette 2
Cassette3 Cassette 3
Cassette4 Cassette 4
Cassette5 Cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck)
Cassette6 Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
Cassette7 Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
Initial setting: Off (Cassette1 to 7)
* : When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not dis-
played.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-165
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode
Description
Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Duplex copy
Off Simplex copy
Initial setting: Off
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication
Description
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached,
by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the
maintenance count reaches the set value, the message is displayed.
Purpose
To change the time for maintenance due indication.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Cnt Time for maintenance due indication 0 to 9999 0
(Remaining number of copies that can be made
before the current maintenance cycle ends)
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-166
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode
Description
Switches configurations for sleep modes.
Purpose
Use this to switch configurations for sleep modes.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Disable Auto Sleep Setting for disabling the Auto Sleep display
Setting
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Transition to sleep mode is deactivated from the system menu.
Off Transition to sleep mode is activated from the system menu.
Initial setting: On
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-167
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
Description
Adjusts margins for image printing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect.
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Press the start key to output a test pattern.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Lead Printer leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
A Margin Printer left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
C Margin Printer right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
Trail Printer trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 mm
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
Printer leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin
(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Figure 1-3-40
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins, perform the following maintenance
modes.
U039 U034
U402
(P.1-3-44) (P.1-3-38)
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-168
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect.
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
A Margin Scanner left margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
B Margin Scanner leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
C Margin Scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
D Margin Scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
Leading edge margin of the copy image
(4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm)
Left margin of Right margin of
the copy image the copy image
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Trailing edge margin of the copy image
(4.0 mm or less)
Figure 1-3-41
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins, perform the following maintenance
modes.
U039 U034 U402
U403
(P.1-3-44) (P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-168)
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-3-169
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect.
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
A Margin DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
B Margin DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
C Margin DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
A Margin DP left margin (second side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
(Back)*
B Margin DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
(Back)* (second side)
C Margin DP right margin (second side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
(Back)*
D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
(Back) (second side)
6. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
DP leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm)
DP left margin DP right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
DP trailing edge margin
(4.0 mm or less)
Figure 1-3-42
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-170
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U404 Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins, perform the following maintenance
modes.
U039 U034 U402 U403
(P.1-3-44) (P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-168) (P.1-3-169) U404
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-171
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Description
Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying.
Purpose
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy
image on the front face and that on the reverse face during duplex switchback copying.
Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in mainte-
nance mode
U034 U402 U066 U403 U071
(P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-168) (P.1-3-59) (P.1-3-169) (P.1-3-64)
U404
U407
(P.1-3-170)
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Adj Data Leading edge registration for -47 to 47 0 0.1 mm
memory image printing
5. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, decrease the value. For copy example 2, increase the value.
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-43
6. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-172
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
Description
Carries out processing for the data acquisition that is required in order to perform either auto-
matic adjustment of the halftone or the ID correction operation.
Purpose
Performed when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Normal Mode Executing the automatic adjustment of the halftone
(continuous adjustment)
Method: [Normal Mode]
1. Select [Normal Mode].
2. Press the start key. A test patterns 1, 2 and 3 are outputted.
3. Place the output test pattern 1 as the original.
Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 1 and set them.
4. Press the start key.
Adjustment is made (first time).
5. Place the output test pattern 2 as the original.
Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 2 and set them.
6. Press the start key.
Adjustment is made (second time).
7. Place the output test pattern 3 as the original.
Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 3 and set them.
8. Press the start key.
Adjustment is made (third time).
9. When normally completed, [Finish] is displayed.
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed.
Error codes
Codes Description Codes Description
S001 Patch not detected E001 Engine status error
S002 Original deviation in the main E002 Engine sensor error
scanning direction
EFFF Engine other error
S003 Original deviation in the auxil- C001 Controller error
iary scanning direction
C100 Adjustment value error
S004 Original inclination error C200 Adjustment value error
S005 Original type error CFFF Controller other error
SFFF Scanner other error
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-173
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP
scanning sections.
Purpose
To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Perform adjustments using a new test chart (chart 1) when replacing ISC PWB, LED lamp PWB,
ISU, CIS and/or DP main PWB.
* : To automatically adjust the DP, to avoid damaging original documents, using a Chart 2-2
test chart is recommended.Method
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Original to be used for adjustment
Display Description
P/N Chart image
Table (Chart1) Adjusting the scanner color and 7505000005 Chart 1
centering and timing for the leading
edge
DP FaceUp Adjusting color, centering, and
(Chart1) timing for the leading edge of the
reading unit (fore side) of the DP COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
DP FaceDown Adjusting color and retrieval of the
(Chart1) target data of the reading unit (back
side) of the DP (CIS)
Table (Chart2) Adjusting the scanner color and 302FZ56990 Chart 2-1
centering and timing for the
leading edge
DP FaceUp Adjusting the scanner centering Chart 2-2
(Chart2) and timing for the leading edge 302AC68243
DP FaceDown Adjusting retrieval of the target
(Chart2) data of the reading unit (back side)
of the DP (CIS)
Adjusting color and retrieval of the 303JX57010 GAMMMA
target data of the reading unit
(back side) of the DP (CIS)
303JX57020 MATRIX
1-3-174
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U411
表 示 設定内容 内容
Target Set-up for obtaining the target Select Auto to automatically read and
value enter the target values using the Chart 1
test chart
Initial setting: U425
DP Auto Adj Automatic adjustment of auto-
matic document processor using
the chart printed from the
machine
Method: [Table (Chart1)
To perform table adjustment using Chart1.
To automatically enter the target value
* : Select this option for normal use.
1. Set a Chart1 original (P/N: 7505000005) on
the platen.
2. Enter maintenance item U411. Chart1
3. Select [Target].
4. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
5. Select [Table (Chart1)].
6. Select the item.
* : Select All for normal use. COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Figure 1-3-44
Display Description
All Executing the all scanner adjustment
LED/AGC Executing the adjustment for LED light quantity/AGC
White Executing the white reference compensation coefficient
Input Executing the adjustment for magnification, leading edge tim-
ing and center line
C.A. Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter
MTF Executing the adjustment for MTF filter
Gamma Executing the adjustment for input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment for matrix
1-3-175
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U411 7. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-181).
* : If the target values are not obtainable automatically, manually enter the following target
values in the following manner and perform adjustment.
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the chart1 original
(P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a chart1 original on the platen.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [Table (Chart1)].
7. Select the item.
* : Select All for normal use.
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart1)]
To perform adjustment on the first side of the DP using Chart 1.
To automatically enter the target value.
1. Set a chart1 original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face up.
2. Enter maintenance item U411.
3. Select [Target].
4. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
5. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart1)].
6. Select [Input].
Display Description
Input Executing the adjustment for input gamma and matrix
7. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-181).
1-3-176
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U411 * : If the target values are not obtainable automatically, manually enter the following target
values in the following manner and perform adjustment.
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the chart1original
(P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the DP face up.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart1)].
7. Select [Input].
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart1)]
To perform adjustment on the second side of the DP using Chart 1.
To automatically enter the target value
1. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face down.
2. Enter maintenance item U411.
3. Select [Target].
4. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
5. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)].
6. Select [All].
Display Description
All Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second
side) for magnification, leading edge timing, center line, MTF
filter, input gamma and matrix
7. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-181).
* : If the target values are not obtainable automatically, manually enter the following target
values in the following manner and perform adjustment.
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the specified original
(P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the DP face down.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)].
7. Select [All].
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
1-3-177
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U411 Method: [Table (Chart2)]
1. Enter the target values which are shown on
the back of the Chart 2-1original Chart2-1
(P/N: 302FZ56990) executing maintenance
item U425.
2. Set a Chart 2-1original on the platen.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [Table (Chart2)].
7. Select the item.
Figure 1-3-45
Display Description
All Executing the all scanner adjustment
Input Executing the adjustment for magnification, leading edge tim-
ing and center line
C.A. Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter
MTF Executing the adjustment for MTF filter
Gamma Executing the adjustment for input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment for matrix
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-181).
1-3-178
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U411 Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart2)]
1. Set a specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) on the DP.
Cut the trailing edge of the original.
5 mm
149 ± 1 mm
74 ± 1 mm
Figure 1-3-46
2. Enter maintenance item U411.
3. Select [Target].
4. Select [U425] and press the start key.
5. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart2)].
6. Select [INPUT].
Display Description
Input Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (first
side) for magnification, leading edge timing and center line
7. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-181).
Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart2)]
1. Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data (P/N: 303JX57010) on the
platen, and press the start key.
2. Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data (P/N: 303JX57020) on the platen,
and press the start key.
When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
3. Select the item.
1-3-179
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U411
Original to be used
Display Description
for adjustment (P/N)
All Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 302AC68243/
ning section (second side) for magnifica- 303JX57010/
tion, leading edge timing, center line, MTF 303JX57020
filter, input gamma and matrix
Input Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 302AC68243
ning section (second side) for magnifica-
tion, leading edge timing and center line
MTF/Gamma Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 303JX57010
ning section (second side) for MTF filter
and input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 303JX57020
ning section (second side) for matrix
[Input]
1. Select [Input].
2. Set a Chart 2-2 original (P/N: 302AC6824) on the DP face down.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
[MTF/Gamma]
1. Select [MTF/Gamma].
2. Set a Gamma original (P/N: 303JX57010) on the DP face down.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
[Matrix]
1. Select [Matrix].
2. Set a Matrix original (P/N: 303JX57020) on the DP face down.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
When [ALL] is selected, the adjustment of [Input], [MTF/Gamma] and [Matrix] can be executed at
once. When adjusting, place the three specified originals on the DP face down, and then press
the start key.
Set the original 303JX57020, and then place 303JX57010 and 302AC68243 in order on the top
of the original.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-181).
1-3-180
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U411 Method: [DP Auto Adj]
1. Load A4/ letter paper.
2. Press the start key to output the original for adjustment.
3. Set the output the original for adjustment and press the start key.
4. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face up.
5. Press the start key to scan documents.
6. Press the start key. Auto adjustment of first side starts.
7. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face down.
8. Press the start key to scan documents.
9. Press the start key. Auto adjustment of second side starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning.
Error Codes
Codes Description
01 Black band detection error (scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge
skew )
02 Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction far end skew)
03 Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction near end skew)
03 Black band detection error (scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge
skew)
04 Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
05 Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction far end)
06 Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction near end)
07 Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
08 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction far end)
09 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction near end)
0a Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
0b Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge origi-
nal check)
0c Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
0d White band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
0e DMA time out
0f Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error
10 Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge error
11 Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge error
12 DP uxiliary scanning direction skew error
13 Maintenance request error
14 Main scanning direction center line error
1-3-181
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U411 Error Codes
Codes Description
15 DP main scanning direction skew error
16 Main scanning direction magnification error
17 Service call error
18 DP paper misfeed error
19 PWB replacement error
1a Original error
1b Input gamma adjustment original error
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference compensation coefficient error
1e Lab value searching error
1f Lab value comparing error
63 Completed to obtain a test RAW
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-182
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U412 Adjusting the uneven density
Description
Adjusts the uneven developer/transfer density in the drum axis direction by scanning directly the
density distribution of test pattern with the scanner and adjusting LSU light quantity.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit.
When completed, perform maintenance mode U464, Calibration.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Normal Mode Executing the uneven density correction
On/Off Config Uneven density correction ON/OFF setting
Method: [Normal Mode]
1. Select [Default Value].
A test pattern is outputted with the initial light quantity setting. (1st sheet)
2. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the output test pattern and place as the
original.
3. Press the start key. the correction starts.
4. After the correction is completed, and press the start key.
A test pattern is outputted. (2nd sheet)
A test pattern is outputted with light quantity setting lower than the 1st test pattern by 20%.
5. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the output test pattern and place as the
original.
6. Press the start key. the correction starts.
7. After the correction is completed, and press the start key.
A test pattern is outputted. (3rd sheet)
8. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the output test pattern and place as the
original.
9. Press the start key.
The correction result is checked. When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Retry (1st time)
10. If the correction is not completed normally, [Retry] is displayed.
11. Repeat steps 4 and 9.
Retry (2nd time)
12. If the correction is not completed normally, [Retry] is displayed.
13. Repeat steps 4 and 9.
If a problem occurs during auto correction, error code is displayed.
1-3-183
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U412 Error codes
Codes Description Codes Description
S001 Patch not detected E001 Engine status error
S002 Original deviation in the main E002 Spotted background error
scanning direction
E003 Density error
S003 Original deviation in the auxil- E004 Uneven density error
iary scanning direction
EFFF Engine other error
S004 Original inclination error C001 Controller error
S005 Original type error CFFF Controller other error
SFFF Scanner other error
Setting: [On/Off Config]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Uneven density correction is enabled
Off Uneven density correction is disabled
* : Initial setting: Off
* : ON is automatically set after the correction is complete.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-184
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U415 Adjusting the print position automatically
Description
Automatically adjusts timings at the print engine.
Adjustment for leading edge timing, center line and margin.
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the print engine.
Method
1. Load A3/ledger paper.
Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
2. Press the start key.
3. Select [Execute].
4. Press the start key. A test pattern is outputted
5. Set the output test pattern as the original.
6. Press the start key.
Automatically Perform adjustment from the top to bottom cassettes.
7. When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed.
Error Codes
Codes Description
S001 Black band is not detected (main scanning direction far end)
S002 Black band is not detected (main scanning direction near end)
S003 Black band is not detected (auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
S004 Black band is not detected (auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
S005 Auxiliary scanning direction skew error (1.5 mm or more)
S006 Main scanning direction skew error (1.5 mm or more)
S007 Original error (detection of reverse original paper)
S008 Original error (page mismatch)
SFFF Scanner other error
C101 Adjustment value error (main scanning direction magnification)
C102 Adjustment value error (auxiliary scanning direction magnification)
C103 Adjustment value error (leading edge timing)
C104 Adjustment value error (center line)
C105 Adjustment value error (B margin)
C106 Adjustment value error (A margin)
C107 Adjustment value error (C margin)
C108 Adjustment value error (D margin)
CFFF Controller other error
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-185
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U425 Setting the target
Description
Enters the lab values that is indicated of the chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005) or chart 2
(P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment.
Purpose
Perform data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the chart to be used.
Figure 1-3-47
Display Description Chart image
Chart1 Chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005) Chart1
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Chart2 Chart 2 (P/N: 302FZ56990) Chart2-1
Method: [Chart1]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Figure 1-3-48
1-3-186
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U425
Display Description
White Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment
Black Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment
Gray2 Setting the Gray2 patch for the original for adjustment
Gray3 Setting the Gray3 patch for the original for adjustment
C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
R Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
G Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
B Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Adjust Original Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions
Setting: [White, Black, Gray1, Gray2, Gray3, C, M, Y, R, G, B]
1. Read the Lab values for
the items selected on
Chart 1.
Figure 1-3-49
Chart1
3. Enters the value that is indicated on the
face of the chart using the +/- keys or
numeric keys.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
. C D
Figure 1-3-50
1-3-187
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U425
Display Description Setting range
L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0
a Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0
b Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0
Setting: [Adjust Original]
* : This setting is usually unnecessary.
1. Press the start key. Adjust Original
Dist1 5.0
Dist2 10.0
Dist3 190.0
Figure 1-3-51
Display Description Setting range Initial Change in
setting value per step
Dist1 Measure the distance from the leading 4.0 to 6.0 5.0
edge to the top of black belt 1 of the
original
Dist2 Measure the distance from the left edge 9.0 to 11.0 10.0
to the right edge black belt 2 of the origi- 0.1mm
nal
Dist3 Measure the distance from the top edge 189.0 to 191.0 190.0
of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt
3 of the original
1-3-188
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U425 2. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A, B
and C.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A
(30 mm from the left edge), B (148.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left
edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + B + C) / 3)
3. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist1].
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F
(15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1).
6. Enter the values using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist2].
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
8. Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D and E.
1) Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D (30 mm from the left edge) and E (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2 + E/2)
9. Enter the measured value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist3].
10. Press the start key. The value is set.
30mm 148.5mm 267mm
A Black belt 1 B C Leading edge
15mm
Black
belt 2
D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005)
Figure 1-3-52
1-3-189
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U425 Method: [Chart2]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item. 2
CCD
DP
CIS
Figure 1-3-53
Display Description
CCD Entering the target values of the chart 2-1 (P/N: 302FZ56990)
used for adjustment
DP Entering the measurement value of the chart 2-2 (P/N:
302AC68243) used for adjustment
CIS Execution is not required
Method: [CCD]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
CCD
N875 B
N475 Adjust Original
Figure 1-3-54
1-3-190
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U425
Display Description
N875 Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment
N475 Setting the N475 patch for the original for adjustment
N125 Setting the N125 patch for the original for adjustment
C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
R Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
G Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
B Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Adjust Original Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions
Setting: [N875, N475, N125, C, M, Y, R, G, B]
1. Read the Lab values for the items
selected on Chart 2-1 test chart.
Figure 1-3-55
2. Enters the value that is indicated on the Chart2-1 Rear side
back of the chart using the +/- keys or
numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Figure 1-3-56
1-3-191
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U425
Display Description Setting range
L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0
a Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0
b Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0
Setting: [Adjust Original]
* : This setting is usually unnecessary.
1. Press the start key. Adjust Original
Lead 15.0
Main Scan 10.0
Sub Scan 190.0
Figure 1-3-57
Display Description Setting range Initial Change
setting in value
per step
Lead Measure the distance from the left edge to 14.0 to 16.0 15.0
the black belt (a) of the original
Main Scan Measure the distance from the leading edge 9.0 to 11.0 10.0
0.1mm
to the black belt (b) of the original
Sub Scan Measure the length from the edge of the 189.0 to 191.0 190.0
black belt (a) to edge of N475 of the original
1-3-192
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U425 2. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A, B
and C.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A
(30 mm from the left edge), B (148.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left
edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + B + C) / 3)
3. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist1].
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F
(15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1).
6. Enter the values using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist2].
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
8. Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D and E.
1) Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D (30 mm from the left edge) and E (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2 + E/2)
9. Enter the measured value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist3].
10. Press the start key. The value is set.
Leading edge
30 mm 148.5 mm 267 mm
Left edge
A B C
Black
35 mm belt (a)
D
Black Black
belt (b) belt (c)
110 mm G [Lead] =
E
((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2
[Main Scan] =
((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2
[Sub Scan] = G
185 mm
F
Original for adjustment (P/N: 302FZ56990)
Figure 1-3-58
1-3-193
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U425 Setting: [DP]
* : This setting is usually unnecessary.
1. Press the start key. DP
2. Enters the value that is indicated on the
Lead 15.0
face of the chart using the +/- keys or
numeric keys. Main Scan 15.0
Sub Scan 390.0
Figure 1-3-59
Display Description Setting range Initial Change
setting in value
per step
Lead Measure the distance from the leading edge 14.0 to 16.0 15.0
to the black belt (inside) of the original
Main Scan Measure the distance from the left edge to 14.0 to 16.0 15.0
the black belt (inside) of the original 0.1mm
Sub Scan Measure the distance from the black belt of 388.0 to 392.0 390.0
leading edge (inside) to the black belt of
trailing edge (inside) of the original
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Original for adjustment (P/N: 302AC68243)
Figure 1-3-60
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-194
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U429 Setting the offset for the color balance
Description
Displays and changes the density for each color during copying in the various image quality
modes.
Purpose
To change the balance for each color.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the image quality mode.
Display Description
Text+Photo Density of each color in the text & photo mode
Photo Density of each color in the photo mode
Photo/Printout Density of each color in the printed photo mode
Text Density of each color in the text mode
Graphics/Map Density of each color in the map mode
Copy/Printout Density of each color in the printed document mode
Setting
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Initial
Display Description Setting range
setting
C Value of the cyan setting -5 to 5 (0 to 10*) 0
M Value of the magenta setting -5 to 5 (0 to 10*) 0
Y Value of the yellow setting -5 to 5 (0 to 10*) 0
K Value of the black setting -5 to 5 (0 to 10*) 0
*: When selecting [Copy/Printout]
Increasing the value darkens the density and decreasing it lightens the density.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-195
2N3/2N2-2
Item No. Description
U460 Adjusting the conveying sensor
Description
Compensates the threshold value of the side multi tray’s multi feed sensor.
Purpose
If more than one sheet is fed at a time, modify the threshold depending on the environment.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
SMT Settings of multiple feed sensor on the side multi tray
Method: [SMT]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Conveying Sensor Multi feed sensor settings/Calibration
On/Off Config Paper conveying sensor On/Off settings
Setting: [Conveying Sensor]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Sensor(Non-P) Empty paper sensor display
Sensor Displaying sensor value when paper is present
Threshold(Single) Paper feeding threshold settings
Threshold(Multi) Multi feed threshold settings
Execute Executing the calibration
Setting: [Threshold(Single)/(Multi)]
1. Select the item.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Threshold(Single) Paper feeding threshold settings 0 to 254 0
Threshold(Multi) Multi feed threshold settings 0 to 254 0
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Method: [Execute]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Calibration is executed.
1-3-196
2N3/2N2-2
Item No. Description
U460 Setting: [On/Off Config]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Paper conveying sensor is enabled
Off Paper conveying sensor is disabled
Initial setting: Off
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-197
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U464 Setting the ID correction operation
Description
Turn ID correction (calibration) on or off. Also, this allows individual settings for calibration opera-
tion.
Purpose
Implements various settings of calibration when poor image quality is caused or to allow various
settings of calibration depending on the user preference.
To perform the calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Permission Setting to turn calibration on/off
Time Interval Setting the interval time of calibration after printing
Mode Setting the color print execution mode
On/Sleep Out* Setting execution parameters for calibration when powered up
or reverted from auto-sleep
AP/NE* Paper interval calibration ON/OFF setting at the time of cali-
bration/near end after toner feed
Leaving Time* Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry
out calibration based on the sleep time when the machine
recovers from the sleep mode
Driving Time* Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry
out paper interval calibration based on the driving time during
printing
Timing* Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry
out calibration based on the continuous print driving time dur-
ing printing
Target Value Setting the sensor target values for toner thick layer calibration
and light amount calibration
Print Rate(B/W)* Setting the proportion of black/white printing at which black/
white calibration is executed during color printing.
Calib Executing the calibration
Solid Image Reduces toner retention at trailing edges when printing high-
density half and solid images.
(automatic calibration is implemented after settings are com-
pleted)
*: Enabled when Mode is set to Custom.
1-3-198
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U464 Setting: [Permission]
1. Select On or Off.
.
Display Description
On Turn calibration ON
Off Turn calibration OFF
Initial setting: On
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Time Interval]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Time(sec) Setting the interval time of calibration 0 to 9999 (s) 480
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Mode]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Short Setting the color print execution mode: short
Normal Setting the color print execution mode: normal
Long Setting the color print execution mode: long
Custom Setting the color print execution mode: custom
Auto Setting the color print execution mode: auto
Initial setting: Normal
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [On/Sleep Out]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On At power-up: Perform calibration if the fusing temperature is
less than 50°C/122°F.
Recovering from Auto Sleep: Calibration is performed when 8
hours have passed since the machine has been in sleep
Off Not to execute calibration regardless of fuser temperature at
power-up or recovery from auto sleep mode
Initial setting: On
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
1-3-199
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U464 Setting: [AP/NE]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Paper interval calibration at the time of calibration/near end
after toner feed is carried out
Off Paper interval calibration at the time of calibration/near end
after toner feed is not carried out
Initial setting: On
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Leaving Time]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Initial
Display Description Setting range
setting
Time(min) Setting the standard time of sleep mode 0 to 480 (min) 480
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Driving Time]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Initial
Display Description Setting range
setting
Time(sec) Setting the drive standard time 300 to 3000 (s) 300
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Timing]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Initial
Display Description Setting range
setting
Time(sec) Setting the drive standard time of con- 0 to 3600 (s) 3600
tinuous print
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-200
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U464 Setting: [Target Value]
1. Select the item.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial setting
Display Description
range 65ppm 75ppm
Thick- Toner thick layer calibration 0 to 1000 910 910
ness(C) (cyan)
Thick- Toner thick layer calibration 0 to 1000 890 890
ness(M) (magenta)
Thick- Toner thick layer calibration 0 to 1000 910 910
ness(Y) (yellow)
Thick- Toner thick layer calibration 0 to 1000 800 800
ness(K) (black)
Gamma(C) Light amount calibration 0 to 500 400 400
(cyan)
Gamma(M) Light amount calibration 0 to 500 400 400
(magenta)
Gamma(Y) Light amount calibration 0 to 500 380 380
(yellow)
Gamma(K) Light amount calibration 0 to 500 430 430
(black)
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Print Rate(B/W)]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Threshold Proportion of black/white printing 0 to 100 (%) 50
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Method: [Calib]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Calibration is executed.
* : Duplicates selecting [System Menu] - [Adjustment/Maintenance] - [Calibration].
The same operation as System menu.
Setting: [Solid Image]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Enable smoothing edges
Off Disable smoothing edges
Initial setting: Off
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
1-3-201
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U464 Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U465 Data reference for ID correction
Description
References the data related to ID correction.
Purpose
To check the corresponding data.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be reference.
Display Description
TCONT Developer bias control value after ID correction
Laser Power Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration
Bias Calib Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration
T7 CTD T7 control value
Stress Intermediate transfer belt durability
Displaying: [TCOUNT]
Select [TCOUNT]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
Before(C) Developer bias control value for cyan before ID correction
Before(M) Developer bias control value for magenta before ID correction
Before(Y) Developer bias control value for yellow before ID correction
Before(K) Developer bias control value for black before ID correction
After(C) Developer bias control value for cyan after ID correction
After(M) Developer bias control value for magenta after ID correction
After(Y) Developer bias control value for yellow after ID correction
After(K) Developer bias control value for black after ID correction
Displaying: [Laser Power]
1. Select [Laser Power]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
C Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (cyan)
M Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (magenta)
Y Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (yellow)
K Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (black)
1-3-202
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U465 Displaying: [Bias Calib]
1. Select [Bias Calib]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
C Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (cyan)
M Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (magenta)
Y Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (yellow)
K Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (black)
Displaying: [T7 CTD]
1. Select [T7 CTD]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
C T7 control value (cyan)
M T7 control value (magenta)
Y T7 control value (yellow)
K T7 control value (black)
Displaying: [Stress]
1. Select [Stress]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
Front Intermediate transfer belt durability (Front)
Rear Intermediate transfer belt durability (Rear)
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-203
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U467 Setting the color registration adjustment
Description
Sets the color registration adjustment and transfer belt speed correction. Also, determines the
conditions by which color registration correction is executed depending on the LSU temperature.
Purpose
If color variance is uneven due to a sensor failure, etc., turn this off and temporarily make a man-
ual adjustment.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Color Regist Setting the color registration correction operation
Timing After the previous correction is executed, color registration is
compensated as the LSU temperature varies by the value
determined.
Setting: [Color Regist]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Enables the color registration correction operation.
Off Disables the color registration correction operation.
Initial setting: On
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Timing]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Timing Conditions for execution depending on 2 to 10 10
the LSU temperature variation
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-204
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U468 Checking the color registration data
Description
Displays the color registration correction data and transfer belt speed correction data.
Purpose
To check the corresponding data.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be reference.
Display Description
V Correction Display the transfer speed adjustment value
Auto(C) Display the auto color registration adjustment value for cyan
Auto(M) Display the auto color registration adjustment value for magenta
Auto(Y) Display the auto color registration adjustment value for yellow
Manual(C) Display the manual color registration adjustment value for cyan
Manual(M) Display the manual color registration adjustment value for magenta
Manual(Y) Display the manual color registration adjustment value for yellow
Displaying: [V Correction]
1. Select [V Correction]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
Status transfer speed adjustment value
Displaying: [Auto(C)/Auto(M)/Auto(Y)]
1. Select [Auto(C)], [Auto(M)] or [Auto(Y)]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
Main Scan Auto color registration adjustment value of the main scanning
direction
Sub Scan Auto color registration adjustment value of the auxiliary scan-
ning direction
Magnification Auto color registration adjustment value of the magnification
Displaying: [Manual(C)/Manual(M)/Manual(Y)]
1. Select [Manual(C)], [Manual((M)] or [Manual((Y)]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
Main Scan Manual color registration adjustment value of the main scan-
ning direction
Sub Scan Manual color registration adjustment value of the auxiliary
scanning direction
Magnification 1-6 Manual color registration adjustment value of the magnification
1-6
1-3-205
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U468 Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U469 Adjusting the color registration
Description
Perform the color registration correction and transfer belt speed correction.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the transfer belt unit or laser scanner unit.
Method
* : Before executing this mode, be sure to execute U464 Calib.
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Auto Executing the auto color registration correction
Manual Executing the manual color registration correction
Belt Initialize Executing the transfer belt speed correction
Belt Check Confirmation of transfer belt position
Method: [Auto]
1. Select [Print].
2. Press the start key. A chart for adjustment is outputted.
3. Set the output chart for adjustment as the original.
4. Select [Execute].
5. Press the start key. Color registration correction starts.
6. When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed.
Chart for adjustment
Figure 1-3-61
1-3-206
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U469 Error codes
Codes Description Codes Description
S001 Patch not detected S004 Original inclination error
S002 Original deviation in the main S005 Original type error
scanning direction
SFFF Scanner other error
S003 Original deviation in the auxil- E001 Engine state error
iary scanning direction
CFFF Controller other error
Method: [Manual]
1. Select [Print].
2. Press the start key. A chart for adjustment is outputted.
3. Select [Regist].
4. Read figures at MH-1 to 7/CH-1 to 7/YH-1 to 7 and MV-3/CV-3/YV-3 of the reference chart
and enter the figure marked at the scale which the BK fine line is in line with the M/C/Y fine
lines, using the # key or * key.
(example)
When a red bar exactly coincides
Chart for adjustment with B, enter B as a value.
Figure 1-3-62
5. Press the start key. The value is set.
6. Press the start key after all values have been entered. Color registration correction starts.
7. Print a chart for adjustment.
8. Verify that each scale is within the range of 1to A.
The scale must be corresponding
within the range of "A" from "1".
Figure 1-3-63
1-3-207
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U469 Method: [Belt Initialize]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Transfer belt speed correction starts.
Method:[Belt Check]
1. Select [Mode].
2. Select [Color] or [B/W].
Display Description
Angle Display of cam position
Belt Position Display of belt position
Mode Operational mode
Execute Execution of belt position confirmation
3. Select [Execute].
4. Press the start key. Transfer belt position confirmation starts, and the value is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Precheck before replacing the intermediate transfer belt
Upon the occurrence of C2770, check the angle of belt meandering and replace the intermediate
transfer belt unit.
[How to check] Maintenance Mode
Maintenance Mode Active U469
1. Select [Mode]. Belt Check
2. Setting the [B/W].
Angle 17
3. Select [Execute].
4. Press the start key. Belt Position 605
5. Check the value of [Angle].
Mode B/W
Execute
[Criteria]
Angle is from 6 to 26: Replacement is not necessary.
Angle is 5 or less or 27 or more: Replace the belt.
If [Angle] is 5 or less or 27 or more, before replacing the belt, confirm that the waste shutter is not
mispositioned on the intermediate transfer belt, draw out the intermediate transfer belt unit,
slowly insert the unit again, and retry checking [Angle].
1-3-208
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U470 Setting the JPEG compression ratio
Description
Sets the compression ratio for JPEG images in each image quality mode.
Purpose
To change the setting in accordance with the image that the user is copying. For example, in
order to soften the coarseness of the image when making copies at over 200% magnification,
change the level of compression by raising the value. Lowering the value will increase the com-
pression and thereby lower the image quality; Raising the value will increase image quality but
lower the image processing speed.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Copy Compression ratio for copying
Send Compression ratio for sending
System Compression ratio for temporary storage in system
Setting: [Copy]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Photo Compression ratio in the photo mode
Text Compression ratio in the text mode
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Y Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 90
CbCr Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 90
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-209
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U470 Setting: [Send]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
Photo Compression ratio in the photo mode
Text Compression ratio in the text mode
HC-PDF (BG) Compression ratio of high compression PDF
HC-PDF (Char) Setting the compression rate of the high-compression PDF
(text color)
HC-PDF (File Size) Setting the compression rate of the high-compression PDF
(reduced file size priority)
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
[Photo] or [Text]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Y1 to Y5 Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 30/40/51/70/90
CbCr1 to CbCr5 Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 30/40/51/70/90
[HC-PDF (BG)]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Y3 to Y3 Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 15/25/90
CbCr3 to CbCr3 Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 15/25/90
[HC-PDF (Char)]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Y3 to Y3 Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 15/75/90
CbCr3 to CbCr3 Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 15/75/90
4. [HC-PDF (File Size)]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Y3 to Y3 Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 15/25/75
CbCr3 to CbCr3 Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 15/25/75
5. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-210
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U470 Setting: [System]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Y Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 90
CbCr Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 90
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U474 Checking LSU cleaning operation
Description
Provides cleaning LSU by means of the LSU cleaning motor. Also, the cleaning cycle can be
adjusted.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Execute Executing the cleaning operation
Cycle Setting the cleaning cycle
Method: [Execute]
1. Press the start key. Cleaning the LSU slit glass.
Setting: [Cycle]
1. Select the item.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Cnt Cleaning cycle 0 to 5000 1000
Timing Setting the timing - Print End
Setting: [Cnt]
1. Change the setting value using +/- keys.
* : The setting can be changed by 1000 per step.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-211
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U474 Setting: [Timing]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Print Execute during a Job
Print End Execute after a Job has been completed
Initial setting: Print End
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U485 Setting the image processing mode
Description
Sets the detection level for scanning printed matter outputted with the confidential document
guard function. Also, sets the process PDF images are rotated. Perform changing or installing the
color table.
Purpose
To change the detection level when the confidential document guard is not printed well for detec-
tion in scanning. Also, changes the process of how PDF images are rotated. Execute this menu
to change the color table for copiers and printers.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Mode Setting the image processing mode
Color Table Setting the Color Table
Setting: [Mode]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Conf. Doc. Detection Confidential document guard detection level
PDF Rotation Processing the rotation of PDF images
Setting: [Conf. Doc. Detection]
1. Change the setting value using +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Conf. Doc. Confidential document guard detection 1 to 5 1
Detection level
A smaller value raises the detection sensitivity but increases the possibility of false detection.
A larger value lowers the detection sensitivity but decreases the possibility of false detection.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-212
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U485 Setting: [PDF Rotation]
1. Change the setting value using +/- keys or numeric keys.
Display Description
0 Assigns the image rotation with the internal parameter
1 Assigns the image rotation with the actual image
2 Assigns the image rotation with the internal parameter
(CTM rotation)
Initial setting: 0
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: [Color Table]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Color Table 1(Prn) Setting the printer color table (Default)
Color Table 2(Prn) Setting the printer color table (Custom)
Color Table 1(Copy) Setting the copy color table (Default)
Color Table 2(Copy) Setting the copy color table (Custom)
Install Install the printer color table
Uninstall (Prn) Uninstall the printer color table
Uninstall (Copy) Uninstall the copy color table
Setting: [Color Table 1(Prn)],[Color Table 2(Prn)]
1. Default/Custom printer color tables are shown.
2. Press the target button for switching
Display
TYPE_CA
TYPE_FJ
TYPE_HE
TYPE_KO
TYPE_KY*1
TYPE_RH
TYPE_ST*2
TYPE_TO
*1 :Use TYPE_KY to enable the factory-set color table.
*2 : sRGB (PC monitor like)
3. Press the Start key and [Complete] is displayed.
4. Press the reset key.
5. Once the screen changes to blue, turn the power switch off and on.
1-3-213
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U485 Setting: [Color Table 1(Copy)],[Color Table 2(Copy)]
1. Default/Custom printer color tables are shown.
2. Press the target button for switching
Display
CTYPE_A1*1
CTYPE_CA
CTYPE_FJ
CTYPE_KO
CTYPE_KY*2
CTYPE_SH
CTYPE_RH
CTYPE_TO
*1 : Similar to existing products.
*2 : Use CTYPE_KY to enable the factory-set color table.
3. Press the Start key and [Complete] is displayed.
4. Press the reset key.
5. Once the screen changes to blue, turn the power switch off and on.
* : If either of Color Table 1(Copy) or Color Table 2(Copy) is set, its name is displayed in the
Custom mode under Original Quality for copying.
Setting: [Install]
* : Before proceeding, make sure that the USB flash device that contains the color table files
is inserted.
The color table files must be placed in the root of the USB flash device.
1. Press the Execute button once it is activated.
2. Press the [Start] key.
3. Installation is completed when [OK] is displayed.
Setting: [Uninstall]
1. The color table currently being installed is displayed.
2. Select the color table you want to uninstall, then press the Start key.
* : You can select more than one file to simultaneously uninstall them.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-214
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U486 Setting color/black and white operation mode
Description
When color and B/W documents are mixed, sets operation mode after a color document is
detected.
Purpose
Mode: To ensure productivity when copying color and B/W documents in ACS mode, select
Mode3.
However, selecting Mode3 will increase the maintenance count for cyan, magenta, and yellow
color developer units even when there is a B/W original after a color original.
Permission: When the background of printing on envelope is colored, set On (3 colors release).
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Mode Setting color/black and white operation
Permission Permission for Half-speed monochrome printing
[Setting: Mode]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the mode.
Display Description
Mode1 A mode suited for the user with high black-and-white usage in which the
occurrence of color printing during continuous printing is minimum.
Once diverted to color printing mode, the subsequent black and white print-
ing is executed in the same linear velocity as in color printing with other pro-
cessings switched on the fly.
Mode2 A mode suited for the user with high black-and-white usage in which the
occurrence of color printing during continuous printing is maximum.
Printing in color mode resumes up to 9 pages in a row even an interrupt is
made to switch to black and white mode, until printing is diverted to black and
white mode from color mode at the 10th page (color processing is termi-
nated).
Mode3 A mode suited for the user with high black-and-white usage in which the
occurrence of color printing during continuous printing is maximum.
Mode suited for high color printing volume
Once diverted to color mode, the black and white printings are executed in
color processing mode (including the linear velocity).
Auto Mode that allows to select from modes 1 through 3 depending on the usage.
Mode is selected from three modes depending on the percentage of color
and black and white printings in the total number of print pages during a pre-
determined period.
Initial setting: Mode2
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
1-3-215
2N3/2N2-4
Item No. Description
U486 Details on the modes
On (4-color press)
Off (3 colors release)
System speed
On (4-color press)
Off (3 colors release)
System speed
On (4-color press)
Off (3 colors release)
System speed
* : There is a linear velocity change, through an increase in system speed, only in the 75
ppm model.
Figure 1-3-64
[Setting: Permission]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select On or Off
Display Description
On Monochrome printing in which the transfer belt is released on
three color drums
Off Monochrome printing in which the transfer belt is pressed on
four drums
Initial setting: Off
* : When the background of printing on envelope is colored, set On.
If perform it, there is a possibility that the jitter occurs.
1-3-216
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U486 Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U520 Set TDRS
Description
Perform TDRS settings and information views.
Purpose
Perform TDRS settings and information views.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Registration Transition to the TDRS Manager registering dialog
Information Transition to the Device Agent description dialog
On/Off Config Transition to the TDRS features dialog
Setting: [Registration]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
TDRS User Registering process using user and password
Access Code Registering process using an Access Code
Setting: [Access Code]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Regist Performing registration to TDRS Manager
TDRS Server TDRS Server URL
TDRS User TDRS Username
Access Code TDRS Access Code
Proxy Server TDRS Proxy Server URL
Proxy Port TDRS Proxy Port Number
Proxy User TDRS Proxy Username
Text TDRS Description
* : The status of Online or Offline will be indicated at the right bottom depending on connec-
tion with TDRS Manager.
The Regist button is inoperative if the USB is not installed.
A normal completion will be indicated by Complete in the status of the item that was per-
formed.
An occurrence of an error is indicated by an error number in the status of the item that
was performed.
1-3-217
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U520 * : If [User/Processing Registration using a Password] is selected in the previous dialog, the
TDRS User will be indicated.
If [Processing Registration using an Access Code] is selected, the Access Code will be
indicated.
Error Codes
Codes Description Codes Description
e0001 HDD is unavailable. t0001 Fatal error.
e0002 USB memory is unavailable. t0002 Error in processing the network.
e0003 The file to import does not exist in t0003 An illegal parameter error.
the USB.
e0004 Reading from the USB has failed. t0004 Insufficient resource.
e0005 Unmounting USB has failed. t0005 Communication error.
e0006 Moving or renaming the file has t0006 Error in processing communica-
failed. tion.
e0007 Opening the file has failed. t0007 Login error.
e0008 Closing the file has failed. t0008 External error.
e0009 Error in reading the file. t0009 Authentication error.
e000A Copying the file has failed. t000A Request error.
e000B Opening the directory has failed. t000B Error due to the server.
e00C Creating a working directory has t00C Error due to the client.
failed.
e00D Deleting a working file has failed.
Setting: [Information]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Agent ID Agent ID
Agent Type Agent Type
Model model name
Serial No Serial number
Setting: [On/Off Config]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
On Enable TDRS
Off Disable TDRS
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-218
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays or clears paper feed counts by paper feed locations.
Perform backup when the counters on the engine PWB and PF main PWB do not match.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the con-
sumable parts.
Backup the counter values after completing changing the PF main PWB and the paper feed unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
Display Description
MPT MP tray
Cassette1 Cassette 1
Cassette2 Cassette 2
Cassette3 Cassette 3
Cassette4 Cassette 4
Cassette5 Cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck)
Cassette6 Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
Cassette7 Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
Duplex Duplex unit
* : When an optional paper feed unit is not installed, the corresponding count is not dis-
played.
Clearing
1. Select the counts to be cleared.
[Cassette3], [Cassette4], [Cassette5], [Cassette6] and [Cassette7] cannot be cleared.
2. Select the counts for all and press [Clear].
3. Press the start key. The counts is cleared.
Back up
1. Select the paper feed location.
2. Select [Engine] when changing the PF main PWB.
Backup the [Engine] counter values to [Enhancement].
Select [Enhancement] when changing the paper feed unit.
Backup the [Enhancement] counter values to [Engine].
3. Select [Execute].
4. Press the start key. Back up the counter values.
5. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : The values of cassette 4 counter vary in accordance with the cassette 3 counter.
The values of cassette 7 counter vary in accordance with the cassette 6 counter.
Select [None] if the counter values are not backed up.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-219
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Cnt Displays/clears the jam counts
Total Cnt Displays the total jam counts
Method: [Cnt]
1. Select [Cnt]. The count of jam code by type is displayed.
Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Select the count value for jam code and press [Clear].
The individual counter cannot be cleared.
4. Press the start key. The counter value is cleared.
Method: [Total Cnt]
1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of jam code by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
The total number of jam count cannot be cleared.
How to display the history of paper jams
[Function]
To check the variation in the occurrences of paper jams as a consequence of firmware upgrade.
[Procedure]
1. Retrives versions of system and engine software at the timing of clearing.
2. Displays comparison of the occurrences of paper jams before and after firmware upgrades.
3. Displays the date of clearing.
[Method]
At firmware upgrade
1. Perform clearance of the counter following the above before performing firmware upgrade.
2. Clearing the counter records the date of clearing.
3. Perform firmware upgrade.
At performing service
1. Print a maintenance report using mode U000 and check the variance of occurrence of paper
jams after firmware upgrade was done.
1-3-220
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U903 Detail of history of paper jams
Maintenance Report
MFP 2013.01.17 08:17
Firmware version 2N2_2000.000.000 2012.11.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Machine No.: SPXXX00001 Life Count : 001234
(a) Paper Jam Log (b) 2012.12.12
JAM0000 1 10
JAM0100 0 2
JAM0101 0 2
JAM0110 (c) 0 2 (d)
JAM0111 1 2
JAM0112 0 1
JAM0131 5 89
JAM0210 2 7
Figure 1-3-65
No. Description
a Paper jam numbers
b Date of clearing counter records
c Occurrences of paper jams after clearing the paper jam counts
d Total number of paper jams
Method: [Total Cnt]
1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of jam code by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
The total number of jam count cannot be cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-221
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U904 Checking/clearing the call for service counts
Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types.
Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Cnt Displays/clears the call for service counts
Total Cnt Displays the total call for service counts
Method: [Cnt]
1. Select [Cnt]. The count for service call detection by type is displayed.
Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Select the count value for service call code and press [Clear].
The individual counter cannot be cleared.
4. Press the start key. The counter value is cleared.
Method: [Total Cnt]
1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of service call counts by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
The total number of service call count cannot be cleared.
How to display the history of service counts
[Function]
To check the variation in the occurrences of service calls as a consequence of firmware upgrade.
[Procedure]
1. Retrives versions of system and engine software at the timing of clearing.
2. Displays comparison of the occurrences of service calls before and after firmware upgrades.
3. Displays the date of clearing.
[Method]
At firmware upgrade
1. Perform clearance of the counter following the above before performing firmware upgrade.
2. Clearing the counter records the date of clearing.
3. Perform firmware upgrade.
At performing service
1. Print a maintenance report using mode U000 and check the variance of occurrence of ser-
vice calls after firmware upgrade was done.
1-3-222
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U904 Detail of history of service counts
Maintenance Report
MFP 17/Apr/2011 08:40
Firmware version 2N2_2000.000.000 2011.04.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Machine No.: SPXXX00001 Life Count : 001234
Paper Jam Log 2011.12.12
JAM0000 10 1
(a) Service Call Log (b) 2011.12.12
C0630 1 1
C1000 0 50
C1950 0 1
C2840 (c) 3 17 (d)
C4300 1 2
C9000 0 1
C9060 5 20
C9080 2 1
Figure 1-3-66
No Description
a Service call numbers
b Date of clearing counter records
c Occurrences of service calls after clearing the service call counts
d Total number of service calls
Method: [Total Cnt]
1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of service call counts by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
The total number of service call count cannot be cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-223
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U905 Checking counts by optional devices
Description
Displays the counts of DP, 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of DP, 4000-sheet finisher.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked.
The count of the selected device is displayed.
Display Description
DP Counts of DP
DF Counts of 4000-sheet finisher
Method: [DP]
Display Description
ADP No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP
RADP No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
CIS No. of dual scan originals that has passed through the DP
Method: [DF]
Display Description
Sorter No. of copies that has passed
Staple Frequency the stapler has been activated
Punch Frequency the punch has been activated
Stack Frequency the main tray eject has been activated
Saddle* Frequency the saddle eject has been activated
Fold* Frequency the center folding has been activated
Three Fold* Frequency the tri-folding has been activated
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-224
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U906 Resetting partial operation control
Description
Resets the service call code for partial operation control.
Purpose
To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the cassettes or other sec-
tions, and the related parts are serviced.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [Execute].
3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
U908 Checking the total counter value
Description
Displays the total counter value.
Purpose
To check the total counter value.
Method
1. Press the start key. The total count value is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U910 Clearing the print coverage data
Description
Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as
shown on the service status report).
Purpose
To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key. The print coverage data is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-225
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes
Description
Displays the paper feed counts by paper sizes.
Purpose
To check the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed.
Display Display
Description Description
(metric) (inch)
A3 Paper feed counts for A3 Ledger Paper feed counts for Ledger
B4 Paper feed counts for B4 Legal Paper feed counts for Legal
A4 Paper feed counts for A4 Letter Paper feed counts for Letter
B5 Paper feed counts for B5 Statement Paper feed counts for State-
ment
A5 Paper feed counts for A5
Folio Paper feed counts for Folio ETC Paper feed counts for other
size
ETC Paper feed counts for other
size
Clearing
1. Select the paper size of counts to be cleared.
2. Press the start key. The counts is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-226
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U917 Setting backup data reading/writing
Description
Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the machine; or writes the data from the USB
memory to the machine.
Purpose
To store and write data when replacing the HDD or main PWB.
Method
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the power indicator has gone
off, switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
Wait for 10 seconds to allow the machine to recognize the USB memory.
4. Enter maintenance item U917.
5. Select [Import] or [Export].
Display Description
Import Writing data from the USB memory to the machine
Export Retrieving from the machine to a USB memory
6. Select the item.
Display Description Depending data
Address Book Address book -
Job Account Job accounting -
One Touch Information on one-touch Address Book
key
User User managements Job Account
Document Box Document box information Job Account, User
Shortcut Shortcut information Job Account, User, Document Box
Fax Forward FAX transfer information Job Account, User, Document Box
System System information -
Network Network information -
Job Setting Job Setting information -
Printer Printer information -
Fax Setting Fax Setting information -
Program Program information Address Book, Job Account, User, Docu-
ment Box, Fax Forward, Fax Setting
Panel Setting Panel Setting information Address Book, Job Account, User, Docu-
ment Box, Fax Forward, Fax Setting, Pro-
gram
* : Since data are dependent with each other, data other than those assigned are also
retrieved or written in.
1-3-227
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U917 7. Press the start key. Starts reading or writing.
The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code is displayed.
8. When normally completed, [Finish] is displayed.
* : Turn the main power switch off and on after completing writing when selecting [Import].
Error Codes
Codes Description
e000 Unspecified error
e0001 Parameter error
e0002 Failed to generate a Dummy file
e0003 The target XML file to import does not exist
e0004 The exported file does not exist
e0100 to e01ff Error in handling the addressbook
e0200 to e02ff Error in handling One-touch
e0300 to e03ff Error in handling user management
e0400 to e04ff Error in handling panel-program data
e0500 to e05ff Error in handling forwarding Fax data
e0600 to e06ff Error in handling system configurations
e0700 to e07ff Error in handling network parameters
e0800 to e08ff Error in handling job accounting
e0900 to e09ff Error in handling short-cuts
e0a00 to e0aff Error in handling job information
e0b00 to e0bff Error in handling Fax data
e0c00 toe0cff Error in handling printer data
e0d00 to e0dff Error in handling panel data
e0e00 to e0eff Error in handling document boxes
e1000 to e1fff Error in handling device-related information
e2000 to e2fff Error in handling SOAP IF
e3000 to e3fff Error in handling KM-WSDL IF
e4000 to e4fff A file mandatory for importing is missing
(e4002)/Invalid file header (e4008)
e5000 to e5fff Error in handling rewriting SOAP data
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-228
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U920 Checking the copy counts
Description
Checks the copy counts.
Purpose
To check the copy counts.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Main Function Counts of main function
Sub Function Counts of sub function
[Setting: Main Function]
1. Select the item.
* : The current counts are displayed.
Display Description
Color Copy(H) Count value of full color copy (coverage: high)
Color Copy(M) Count value of full color copy (coverage: middle)
Color Copy(L) Count value of full color copy (coverage: low)
Mono Color Copy Count value of single color copy
B/W Copy Count value of black/white copy
Color Prn(H) Count value of full color print (coverage: high)
Color Prn(M) Count value of full color print (coverage: middle)
Color Prn(L) Count value of full color print (coverage: low)
B/W Prn Count value of black/white print
B/W Fax Count value of black/white FAX
[Setting: Sub Function]
1. Select the item.
* : The current counts are displayed.
Display Description
Simplex Count value of Simplex copy
Duplex Count value of Duplex copy
Combine(Off) Count value of Combine copy (Off)
Combine(2in1) Count value of Combine copy (2in1)
Combine(4in1) Count value of Combine copy (4in1)
1-3-229
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U920 Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only)
Description
Resets all of the counts back to zero.
Supplement
The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count val-
ues are 1000 or less.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key. All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U928 Checking machine life counts
Description
Displays the machine life counts.
Purpose
To check the machine life counts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current machine life counts is displayed.
Display Description
Cnt Machine life counts
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-230
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U930 Checking/clearing the charger roller count
Description
Displays the counts of the charger roller counter for checking or clearing.
Purpose
To check the count after replacement of the charger roller unit. To clear the counter value when
replacing the charger roller unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current counts of the charger roller count for each color is displayed.
Display Description
C Count value of cyan charger roller
M Count value of magenta charger roller
Y Count value of yellow charger roller
K Count value of black charger roller
Clearing
1. Select the counts to be cleared.
2. Select the counts for all and press [Clear].
3. Press the start key. The counts is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-231
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U933 Set Maintenance Mode Execute Log
Description
Perform individual configuration or log file printing for the date when maintenance mode is
entered and exited or for the feature which records the dates when maintenance mode numbers
are executed.
Purpose
Logs a history of execution of maintenance modes for an analysis of causes against the prob-
lems.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Export Exports a maintenance log
Setting Configures maintenance logs to output
Method: [Export]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key.
Exports a maintenance log to a USB flash device.
* : [Execute] is grayed out is a USB memory is not installed.
* : Displays a OK or NG after execution.
Setting: [Setting]
1. Select the item.
* : Select the key that includes the number you want to configure as the logs are displayed
block by block.
([U000-U019],[U020-U029], .... , [U900-U999])
2. Enable or disable the number to configure.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-232
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP
Description
Adjusts the deflection generated when the document processor is used.
Purpose
Use this mode if an original non-feed jam, oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the
document processor is used.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Front Deflection of single-sided original -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm
Mix Deflection of mixed original -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm
* : The greater the value, the larger the deflection; the smaller the value, the smaller the
deflection.
If an original non-feed jam or oblique feed occurs, increase the setting value. If wrinkling
of original occurs, decrease the value.
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key.
* : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-233
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U952 Maintenance mode workflow
Description
The maintenance modes configured in the machine or a USB flash device as a workflow must be
executed in succession.
Purpose
This allows maintenance mode to be preset as a template.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Continue Restarting an abandoned workflow
Execute(USB) Executes a workflow housed in a USB flash device
Execute Executes a workflow stored in the machine
Entry(USB) Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine
Entry Assigns a workflow in the machine manually
Log Displays a list of workflows recently executed
Method: [Execute]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Select the workflow.
* : The machine is preset with the following workflow at shipment.
Display Description
SETUP U464/ U469/ U410/ U000/ U927/ U278
WARRANTY U089/ U000
MK-A U119/ U930/ U140/ U469/ U127/ U464/ U469/ U412/ U464/
U410/ U251
MK-B U119/ U930/ U140/ U164/ U469/ U412/ U464/ U410/ U251
MK-C U167/ U464/ U469/ U410/ U251
EH SETUP U034/ U246
MK-D U930/ U140/ U464/ U469/ U464/ U410/ U251
MK-E U930/ U140/ U464/ U469/ U464/ U410/ U251
3. Press the start key.
Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in succession.
1-3-234
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U952 Method: [Entry]
1. Select [Entry].
2. Select the area to store workflow.
Display Description
Data1 - 8 The area to store workflows in the machine
3. Press the +/- keys or numeric keys to assign a maintenance Nbr. into a workflow.
Display Description
Flow1 - 14 Assign a maintenance Nbr.
4. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Press the start key.
Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in succession.
Method: [Execute(USB)]
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has
gone off, switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter maintenance item U952.
5. Select [Execute(USB)].
6. Select the workflow.
Display Description
WorkFlowData01 - 07 Workflow data in the USB flash device
7. Press the start key.
Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in succession.
Method: [Entry(USB)]
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has
gone off, switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter maintenance item U952.
5. Select [Entry(USB)].
6. Select the workflow.
Display Description
WorkFlowData01 - 07 Workflow data in the USB flash device
7. Select the work flow save area.
Display Description
Data1 - 8 The area to store workflows in the machine
8. Select [Execute].
Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine.
1-3-235
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U952 Example
Registration is feasible when a USB flash device that stores the commands and text/mainte-
nance ID (editable) is inserted.
File Format: xxx.mwf
!R! MNFC “WFPS”;
1, SET UP, 464, 469, 410, 000, 927, 278
2, WARRANTY, 089, 000
3, MK-A, 119, 930, 140, 469, 127, 464, 469, 412, 464, 410, 251
4, MK-B, 119, 930, 140, 464, 469, 412, 464, 410, 251
5, MK-C, 167, 464, 469, 410, 251
WRED;EXIT;
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-236
2N3/2N2-3
Item No. Description
U964 Checking of log
Description
Sends a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory.
Purpose
To transfer a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory as a means of investigating malfunc-
tions.
Method
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has
gone off, switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter maintenance item U964.
Display Description
Execute Executes transferring a log file.
Jam Log Switches functions for obtaining logs at a paper jam.
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the start key.
Starts sending the log file saved on the HDD to the USB memory.
Processing is displayed for approximately 3 to 5 minutes.
7. When normally completed, [Completed] is displayed.
8. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
If a problem occurs during auto correction, error code is displayed.
Setting: [Jam Log]
1. It is unnecessary to choose the Jam Log "On" / "Off" setting.
* : Regardless of the setting, the Jam Log is acquired.
Supplement
Instructions on how to obtain a log when the operation panel has frozen
Simultaneously press and hold the *, 8, 6, and Clear keys for 3 to 6 seconds to start logging.
The memory indicator keeps lighting during a log is generated and goes off when completed.
* : The logs obtained in this manner can be retrieved in the USB flash device using the main-
tenance mode.
Error codes
Display Description
No Usb Storage USB memory is not inserted
No File File is not found
Mount Error Failure to delete the existing files in the USB flash device
File Delete Error Failure to copy from the HDD to the USB flash device
Copy Error File copy error
Unmount Error USB memory unmount error
Other Error Other error
1-3-237
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U969 Checking of toner area code
Description
Displays the toner area code.
Purpose
To check the toner area code.
Method
1. Press the start key. The toner area code is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-238
2N3/2N2-1
Item No. Description
U977 Data capture mode
Description
Store the print data sent to the machine into USB memory.
Purpose
In case to occur the error at printing, check the print data sent to the machine.
Method
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has
gone off, switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter maintenance item U977.
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the start key.
7. Send the print data to the machine.
Once the print data is stored into USB memory, [Finish] will be displayed.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Error codes
Error codes Description
1 A removable memory has been crushed. A removable mem-
ory was removed during processing or is write-protected.
2 The removable memory is full.
50 Other error
U978 Clear Optional Function
Description
Clear the optional function error.
Purpose
Clear the optional function error.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
* : A message that prompts you to turn power off and on will be displayed after completion of
the normal operation, deactivating the keys.
Object error: C9940 Confidential document guard uninstalled error
1-3-239
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U984 Checking the developer unit number
Description
Displays the developer unit number.
Purpose
To check the developer unit number.
Method
1. Press the start key. The developer unit number for each color is displayed.
Display Description
C Cyan developer unit number
M Magenta developer unit number
Y Yellow developer unit number
K Black developer unit number
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U985 Displaying the developer unit history
Description
Displays the past record of machine number and the developer counter.
Purpose
To check the count value of machine number and the developer counter.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the color to check.
Display Description
C Cyan developer unit past record
M Magenta developer unit past record
Y Yellow developer unit past record
K Black developer unit past record
The history of a machine number and a developer counter for each color is displayed by
three cases.
Display Description
Machine History1 - 3 Historical records of the machine number
Cnt History1 - 3 Historical records of developer counter
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-240
2N3/2N2
Item No. Description
U989 HDD Scan disk
Description
Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk.
Purpose
If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed, the control information in the
hard disk drive may be damaged. Use this mode to restore the data.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light
Description
Displays the accumulated time for the CIS to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the CIS.
Method
1. Press the start key.
The accumulated time for the CIS to light is displayed in minutes.
Display Description
CIS The accumulated time for the CIS to light
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U991 Checking the scanner operation count
Description
Displays the scanner operation count.
Purpose
To check the status of use of the scanner.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current operation counts is displayed.
Display Description
Copy Scan Scanner operation counts for copying
Fax Scan Scanner operation counts for fax
Other Scan Scanner operation counts except for copying
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed.
1-3-241
2N3/2N2
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-3-242
2N3/2N2
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection
(1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed mes-
sage on the operation panel. To remove paper misfed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the paper
conveying unit or paper conveying cover.
The positions and the corrective actions are displayed on the touch panel when a paper jam has occurred.
Jam code: Jam code suggesting the cause of jam (see page 1-4-4)
Position code: Code suggesting the place of jam
Paper jam.
1. Remove the paper from
the paper ejector.
2. Open main unit right cover 1 and
remove the paper.
Remove the paper from
the multi purpose tray.
JAM code JAM0110
JAM 0110 3. Open fuser cover (A1) and
Position code 15, 18
15, 18 remove the paper.
4. Close the cover.
05/18
08/13
Figure 1-4-1
1-4-1
2N3/2N2
L-29
H-01
K-21
K-28 I
I-20
K-22
K-26 K-23 J-19 G-17
G-18
K-24 K-27
K-25
F-16
E-10,15 D-09
A-02
N-14
E-11 L
N-06
B-03 N-06
C-05 C-04 O-08 O-07
M-30 E-12 O-13
M-32 O-08
M-31
A-02
Position code (displayed on the panel)
Positions in the individual systems (See below.)
Figure 1-4-2 Paper misfeed indication
A. Misfeed in cassette 1
B. Misfeed in cassette 2
C. Misfeed in cassette 3 or 4
D. Misfeed in the MP tray
E. Misfeed in paper conveying unit, paper conveying
cover or PF paper conveying cover
F. Misfeed in the duplex section
G. Misfeed in the fuser section
H. Misfeed in document processor
I. Misfeed in job separator
J. Misfeed in bridge unit
K. Misfeed in document finisher (option)
L. Misfeed in Mail box (option)
M. Misfeed Center-folding unit (option)
N. Misfeed in cassette 5 (option)
O. Misfeed in cassette 6 or 7 (option)
1-4-2
Mailbox
MBES
TOFSW2
4000-sheet
TOFSW3 Document processor
finisher
TOFSW4 (dual scan DP)
J 9000
Machine + Option
J 93xx
Paper feeder
TOFSW5
J 9008
DPFS
TOFSW6 J 94xx
J 9110 SDFS
TOFSW7 DPCS SDPS
J 78x0 DPTS DPES J 0545
MBES J 0555
J 62x0
J 96xx
DFSES J 61xx J 47xx
JSES
J 67x0 DFPES SBS
J 66x0 BRES
BRES
DFDRS
BRCS2 BRCS1 ES DUS1
(2) Paper misfeed detection condition
J 51xx
J 46xx J 43xx
DFMTS J 49xx FUES
J 50xx
DFMES J 42xx
J 65x0
LPS J 41xx
1-4-3
J 63x0
J 44xx
J 40xx DUS2
DUS2
RS
Side multi tray
CFPCS J 13xx
MS
J 05x1 FS1 MPFS J 05x9 J 05x5
J 37xx
PCS2 SMMFS
SMES
PCS
J 15xx
J 05x2 SMFS J 31xx
FS2
J 71x0 SMPCS3 SMPCS1 J 26xx
J 73x0 SMPCS2
Figure 1-4-3 Paper jam location (Machine + Option)
J 21xx
J 72x0 J 05x4 J 27x4 PFPCS1 J 36 xx
CFPES J 34xx J 33xx PFPCS1
J 26xx J 35xx
J 27xx J 05x6
CFES
PFFS2
PFFS2 PFPCS2 J 05x3
PFPS2
PFFS1 PFPS1 PFFS1
PFPS1 PFPCS2
J 05x7 J 23x7
J 05x7 PFFS2
PFPS2
Side paper feeder
2N3/2N2
2N3/2N2-2
* : This model does not support the following codes:
0111 /0503 /0504 /0505 /0513 /0514 /0515 /1703 /1704 /1713 /1714 /1904 /1914 /6001 /6021 /6041 /
6101 /6111 /6301 /6311 /6401 /6411 /6511 /6811 /6911 /7001 /7951 /9004 /9006 /9007 /9020 /9030 /
9200 /9210 /9500
List of JAM Code
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
0000 Initial jam The power is turned on when a sensor in the convey- -
ing system is on.
0100 Secondary paper feed Secondary paper feed request given by the controller -
request time out is unreachable.
0101 Waiting for process package Process package won’t become ready. -
to become ready
0102 Waiting for toner package to Toner package won’t become ready. -
become ready
0103 Waiting for the image-sus- The image-sustaining package won’t become ready. -
taining package to become
ready
0104 Waiting for conveying pack- Conveying package won’t become ready. -
age to become ready
0106 Paper feeding request for Paper feeding request for duplex printing given by the -
duplex printing time out controller is unreachable.
0107 Waiting for fuser package to Fuser package won’t become ready. -
become ready
0108 Waiting for option package to Option package won’t become ready. -
become ready
0110 Paper conveying unit open The paper conveying unit is opened during printing. E
0112 Duplex cover open The duplex cover is opened during printing. F
0113 Paper conveying cover open The paper conveying cover is opened during printing. E
0114 BR conveying unit open The BR conveying unit is opened during printing. J
0115 BR eject cover open The BR eject cover is opened during printing. J
0131 MP lift sensor upper limit MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1) does not turn on within D
detection specified time of the MP lift plate rising.
0132 Rotary guide detection Rotary sensor (RTS) does not turn on. J
0200 Machine sequence error A sequence error has occurred. -
0210 PF paper conveying cover The PF paper conveying cover is opened during print- E
open ing.
0211 SM paper conveying cover The SM paper conveying cover is opened during print- N
open ing.
0212 SM top cover open The SM top cover is opened during printing. N
0213 SD cover open The SD cover is opened during printing. N
0214 PF paper conveying cover The PF paper conveying cover (side) is opened during O
(side) open printing.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-4
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
0215 Side multi tray release The side multi tray is released during printing. N
0300 Ejection uncompleted An ejection-completed error has occurred. -
0501 No paper feed from cassette Feed sensor 1 (FS1) does not turn on during paper A
1 feed from cassette 1.
0502 No paper feed from cassette Feed sensor 2 (FS2) does not turn on during paper B
2 feed from cassette 2.
0506 No paper feed from cassette PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during O
6 paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder).
0507 No paper feed from cassette PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during O
7 paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder).
0508 No paper feed from duplex Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during F
section paper feed from duplex section.
0509 No paper feed from MP tray MP feed sensor (MPFS) does not turn on during paper D
feed from MP tray.
0511 Multiple sheets in cassette 1 Feed sensor 1 (FS1) does not turn off during paper A
feed from cassette 1.
0512 Multiple sheets in cassette 2 Feed sensor 2 (FS2) does not turn off during paper B
feed from cassette 2.
0516 Multiple sheets in cassette 6 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during O
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder).
0517 Multiple sheets in cassette 7 PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during O
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder).
0518 Multiple sheets in duplex Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during F
section paper feed from duplex section.
0519 Multiple sheets in MP tray MP feed sensor (MPFS) does not turn off during paper D
feed from MP tray.
0523 No paper feed from cassette PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during C
3 paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity feeder).
0524 No paper feed from cassette PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during C
4 paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder).
0525 No paper feed from cassette SM feed sensor (SMFS) does not turn on during paper N
5 feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray).
0526 No paper feed from cassette PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during O
6 paper feed from cassette 6 (side large capacity
feeder).
0527 No paper feed from cassette PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during O
7 paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity
feeder).
0533 Multiple sheets in cassette 3 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during C
paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity feeder).
0534 Multiple sheets in cassette 4 PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during C
paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder).
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-5
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
0535 Multiple sheets in cassette 5 SM feed sensor (SMFS) does not turn off during paper N
feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray).
0536 Multiple sheets in cassette 6 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during O
paper feed from cassette 6 (side large capacity
feeder).
0537 Multiple sheets in cassette 7 PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during O
paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity
feeder).
0545 No paper feed from side SD feed sensor (SDFS) does not turn on during paper N
deck feed from side deck.
0555 Multiple sheets in side deck SD feed sensor (SDFS) does not turn off during paper N
feed from side deck.
1301 Middle sensor non arrival Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper A
jam feed from cassette 1.
1302 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper B
feed from cassette 2.
1303 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper C
feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
1304 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper C
feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
1305 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper N
feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
1306 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper O
feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
1307 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper O
feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-6
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
1311 Middle sensor stay jam Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper E
feed from cassette 1.
1312 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper E
feed from cassette 2.
1313 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper E
feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
1314 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper E
feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
1315 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper E
feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
1316 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper E
feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
1317 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper E
feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
1502 Paper conveying sensor non Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on dur- B
arrival jam ing paper feed from cassette 2.
1503 Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on dur- C
ing paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
1504 Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on dur- C
ing paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
1512 Paper conveying sensor stay Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off dur- E
jam ing paper feed from cassette 2.
1513 Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off dur- E
ing paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
1514 Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off dur- E
ing paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
2106 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn O
1 non arrival jam on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper
feeder).
2107 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn O
on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper
feeder).
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-7
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
2116 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn N
1 stay jam off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper
feeder).
2117 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn N
off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper
feeder).
2307 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn O
2 non arrival jam on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper
feeder).
2317 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn O
2 stay jam off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper
feeder).
2603 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn C
1 non arrival jam on during paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity
feeder).
2604 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn C
on during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity
feeder).
2606 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn O
on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large
capacity feeder).
2607 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn O
on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).
2613 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn E
1 stay jam off during paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity
feeder).
2614 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn E
off during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity
feeder).
2616 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn O
off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large
capacity feeder).
2617 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn O
off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).
2704 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn C
2 non arrival jam on during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity
feeder).
2707 PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn O
on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-8
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
2714 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn E
2 stay jam off during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity
feeder).
2717 PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn O
off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).
3106 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn O
1 non arrival jam on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large
capacity feeder).
3107 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn O
on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).
3116 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn N
1 stay jam off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large
capacity feeder).
3117 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn N
off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).
3307 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn O
2 non arrival jam on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).
3317 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn O
2 stay jam off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).
3405 SM paper conveying sensor SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not K
1 non arrival jam turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).
3406 SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not O
turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).
3407 SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not O
turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).
3415 SM paper conveying sensor SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not N
1 stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).
3416 SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not N
turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).
3417 SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not N
turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-9
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
3505 SM paper conveying sensor SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not N
2 non arrival jam turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).
3506 SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not O
turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).
3507 SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not O
turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).
3515 SM paper conveying sensor SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not N
2 stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).
3516 SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not N
turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).
3517 SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not N
turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).
3605 SM paper conveying sensor SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not N
3 non arrival jam turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).
3606 SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not N
turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).
3607 SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not N
turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).
3615 SM paper conveying sensor SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not N
3 stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).
3616 SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not N
turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).
3617 SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not N
turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).
3705 SM eject sensor non arrival SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn on during K
jam paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray).
3706 SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn on during O
paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi tray).
3707 SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn on during O
paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi tray).
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-10
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
3715 SM eject sensor stay jam SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn off during N
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray).
3716 SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn off during N
paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi tray).
3717 SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn off during N
paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi tray).
4001 Registration sensor non Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during E
arrival jam paper feed from cassette 1.
4002 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 2.
4003 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4004 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4005 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4006 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4007 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4009 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during E
paper feed from MP tray.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-11
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
4011 Registration sensor stay jam Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during E
paper feed from cassette 1.
4012 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during E
paper feed from cassette 2.
4013 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during E
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4014 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during E
paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4015 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during E
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4016 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during E
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4017 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during E
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4019 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during E
paper feed from MP tray.
4101 Loop sensor non arrival jam Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed E
from cassette 1.
4102 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed E
from cassette 2.
4103 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed E
from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).
4104 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed E
from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).
4105 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed E
from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4106 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed E
from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).
4107 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed E
from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).
4108 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed E
from duplex section.
4109 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed E
from MP tray.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-12
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
4111 Loop sensor stay jam Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed E
from cassette 1.
4112 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed E
from cassette 2.
4113 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed E
from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).
4114 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed E
from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).
4115 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed E
from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4116 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed E
from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).
4117 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed E
from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).
4118 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed E
from duplex section.
4119 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed E
from MP tray.
4201 Fuser eject sensor non Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during E
arrival jam paper feed from cassette 1.
4202 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 2.
4203 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4204 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4205 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4206 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4207 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4208 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during E
paper feed from duplex section.
4209 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during E
paper feed from MP tray.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-13
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
4211 Fuser eject sensor stay jam Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during G
paper feed from cassette 1.
4212 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during G
paper feed from cassette 2.
4213 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during G
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4214 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during G
paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4215 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during G
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4216 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during G
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4217 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during G
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4218 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during G
paper feed from duplex section.
4219 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during G
paper feed from MP tray.
4301 Duplex sensor 1 non arrival Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during G
jam paper feed from cassette 1.
4302 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 2.
4303 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4304 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4305 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4306 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4307 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4309 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during G
paper feed from MP tray.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-14
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
4311 Duplex sensor 1 stay jam Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 1.
4312 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 2.
4313 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4314 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4315 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4316 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4317 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4319 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during F
paper feed from MP tray.
4401 Duplex sensor 2 non arrival Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during F
jam paper feed from cassette 1.
4402 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during F
paper feed from cassette 2.
4403 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during F
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4404 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during F
paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4405 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during F
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4406 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during F
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4407 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during F
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4409 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during F
paper feed from MP tray.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-15
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
4411 Duplex sensor 2 stay jam Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 1.
4412 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 2.
4413 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4414 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4415 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4416 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4417 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during F
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4418 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during F
paper feed from duplex section.
4419 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during F
paper feed from MP tray.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-16
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
4601 Eject full sensor non arrival Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper G
jam feed from cassette 1.
4602 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper G
feed from cassette 2.
4603 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper G
feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
4604 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper G
feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
4605 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper G
feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4606 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper G
feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
4607 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper G
feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
4608 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper G
feed from duplex section.
4609 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper G
feed from MP tray.
4611 Eject full sensor stay jam Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper G
feed from cassette 1.
4612 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper G
feed from cassette 2.
4613 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper G
feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
4614 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper G
feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
4615 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper G
feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4616 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper G
feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
4617 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper G
feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
4618 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper G
feed from duplex section.
4619 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper G
feed from MP tray.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-17
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
4701 Switchback sensor non Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
arrival jam paper feed from cassette 1.
4702 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 2.
4703 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4704 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4705 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4706 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4707 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4708 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
paper feed from duplex section.
4709 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
paper feed from MP tray.
4711 Switchback sensor stay jam Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
paper feed from cassette 1.
4712 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
paper feed from cassette 2.
4713 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4714 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capac-
ity feeder).
4715 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
4716 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4717 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4718 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
paper feed from duplex section.
4719 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
paper feed from MP tray.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-18
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
4901 BR conveying sensor 1 non BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- G
arrival jam ing paper feed from cassette 1.
4902 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- G
ing paper feed from cassette 2.
4903 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- G
ing paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
4904 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- G
ing paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
4905 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- G
ing paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side
deck).
4906 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- G
ing paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4907 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- G
ing paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4908 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- G
ing paper feed from duplex section.
4909 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on dur- G
ing paper feed from MP tray.
4911 BR conveying sensor 1 stay BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- J
jam ing paper feed from cassette 1.
4912 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 2.
4913 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
4914 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
4915 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side
deck).
4916 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
4917 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-19
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
4918 BR conveying sensor 1 stay BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- J
jam ing paper feed from duplex section.
4919 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from MP tray.
5001 BR conveying sensor 2 non BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on dur- J
arrival jam ing paper feed from cassette 1.
5002 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 2.
5003 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
5004 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
5005 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side
deck).
5006 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
5007 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
5008 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on dur- J
ing paper feed from duplex section.
5009 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on dur- J
ing paper feed from MP tray.
5011 BR conveying sensor 2 stay BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- J
jam ing paper feed from cassette 1.
5012 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 2.
5013 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
5014 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
5015 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side
deck).
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-20
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
5016 BR conveying sensor 2 stay BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- J
jam ing paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
5017 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).
5018 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from duplex section.
5019 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off dur- J
ing paper feed from MP tray.
5101 BR eject sensor non arrival BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper J
jam feed from cassette 1.
5102 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper J
feed from cassette 2.
5103 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper J
feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
5104 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper J
feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
5105 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper J
feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
5106 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper J
feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
5107 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper J
feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
5108 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper J
feed from duplex section.
5109 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper J
feed from MP tray.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-21
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
5111 BR eject sensor stay jam BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper J
feed from cassette 1.
5112 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper J
feed from cassette 2.
5113 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper J
feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
5114 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper J
feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
5115 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper J
feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).
5116 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper J
feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
5117 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper J
feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).
5118 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper J
feed from duplex section.
5119 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper J
feed from MP tray.
6000 DF paper entry error DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turn on before the K
eject signal is output from the machine.
6020 DF front cover open DF front upper cover is opened during operation. K
6050 CF eject cover open CF eject cover is opened during operation. M
6060 MB cover open MB cover is opened during operation. L
6070 Center folding unit open Center folding unit is opened during operation. M
6080 CF left guide open CF left guide is opened during operation. M
6100 DF paper entry sensor non DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) does not turned on K
arrival jam even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine
eject signal was received.
6110 DF paper entry sensor stay DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) does not turned off K
jam within specified time of its turning on.
6200 DF sub eject sensor non DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) does not turn on within K
arrival jam specified time of DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turn-
ing on.
6210 DF sub eject sensor stay jam DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) does not turned off K
within specified time of its turning on.
6300 DF middle eject sensor non DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) does not turn on K
arrival jam within specified time of DF paper entry sensor
(DFPES) turning on.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-22
2N3/2N2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
6310 DF middle eject sensor stay DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) is not turned off K
jam within specified time of its turning on.
6400 DF tray upper surface sen- DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) does not turn K
sor non arrival jam on within specified time of DF middle eject sensor
(DFMES) turning on.
6410 DF tray upper surface sen- DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) is not turned K
sor stay jam off within specified time of its turning on.
6500 DF eject paper sensor non DF eject paper sensor (DFMTS) does not turn on K
arrival jam within specified time of DF middle eject sensor
(DFMES) turning on.
6510 DF eject paper sensor stay DF eject paper sensor (DFMTS) is not turned off since K
jam the bundle discharge starts.
6600 DF drum sensor non arrival DF drum sensor (DFDRS) does not turn on within K
jam specified time of DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turn-
ing on.
6610 DF drum sensor stay jam DF drum sensor (DFDRS) is not turned off within K
specified time of its turning on.
6710 Center folding unit stay jam During paper conveying to center folding unit, DF K
drum sensor (DFDRS) is not turned off within speci-
fied time of its turning on.
6810 DF side registration sensor 1 DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1) is not turned K
stay jam off within specified time after driving the DF side regis-
tration motor 1 (DFSRM1).
6910 DF side registration sensor 2 DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2) is not turned K
stay jam off within specified time after driving the DF side regis-
tration motor 2 (DFSRM2).
7000 DF staple operation error DF staple sensor (DFSTS) is not turned on within K
specified time after driving the DF staple motor
(DFSTM).
7100 CF paper entry sensor non CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) is not turned on even M
arrival jam if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject
signal was received.
7110 CF paper entry sensor stay CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) is not turned off M
jam within specified time of its turning on.
7200 CF eject sensor non arrival CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned on within speci- M
jam fied time since centerfold operation starts.
7210 CF eject sensor stay jam During centerfold operation, CF eject sensor (CFES) M
is not turned off within specified time of its turning on.
7300 CF eject sensor non arrival CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned on within speci- M
jam fied time since three fold operation starts.
7310 CF eject sensor stay jam During three fold operation, CF eject sensor (CFES) is M
not turned off within specified time of its turning on.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-23
2N3/2N2-2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
7400 CF side registration sensor 2 CF side registration sensor 2 (CFSRS2) is not turned M
non arrival jam on within specified time after driving the CF side regis-
tration motor 2 (CFSRM2).
7500 CF side registration sensor 1 CF side registration sensor 1 (CFSRS1) is not turned M
non arrival jam on within specified time after driving the CF side regis-
tration motor 1 (CFSRM1).
7600 CF staple operation error CF staple sensor (CFSTS) is not turned on within M
specified time after driving the CF staple motor
(CFSTM).
7700 CF paper conveying sensor CF paper conveying sensor (CFPCS) is not turned on M
non arrival jam even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine
eject signal was received.
7710 CF paper conveying sensor CF paper conveying sensor (CFPCS) is not turned off M
stay jam within specified time of its turning on.
7800 MB eject sensor non arrival MB eject sensor (MBES) is not turned on even if a L
jam specified time has elapsed after the machine eject sig-
nal was received.
7810 MB eject sensor stay jam MB eject sensor (MBES) is not turned off within speci- L
fied time of its turning on.
7900 Middle paddle error jam DF paddle sensor (DFPDS) is not turned on within K
specified time after driving the DF middle motor
(DFMM).
7950 Paper interval error jam An illegal inter-page or inter-copy interval has K
occurred.
9000 No original feed jam DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn on within speci- H
fied time during the first sheet feeding (Retry 5 times).
9001 DP original conveying jam DP timing sensor (DPTS) turn off within the specified H
time since the sensor turn on.
9002 DP sensor stay jam Sensor in the conveying system is on since original H
feeding starts.
9005 No original feed jam 2 DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1) does not turn on within spec- H
ified time of the lift plate rising.
9008 No original feed jam 3 DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn on within speci- H
fied time of the paper feed starting.
9009 DP original conveying jam 2 Next feed original became the stand-by states of H
paper feed while reading the image.
9010 Document processor open Document processor is opened during original feed- H
ing.
9011 DP top cover open The DP top cover is opened during original feeding. H
9110 DP feed sensor stay jam DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn off within speci- H
fied time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-24
2N3/2N2-2
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
9300 DP CIS sensor non arrival DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn on within speci- H
jam fied time of DP registration sensor (DPFS) turning on.
9310 DP CIS sensor stay jam DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn off within speci- H
fied time of DP registration sensor (DPFS) turning off.
9400 DP timing sensor non arrival DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn on within H
jam specified time of DP feed sensor (DPFS) turning on.
9410 DP timing sensor stay jam DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn off within H
specified time of DP feed sensor (DPFS) turning off.
9600 DP eject sensor non arrival DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn on within spec- H
jam ified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.
9610 DP eject sensor stay jam DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn off within spec- H
ified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning off.
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-25
2N3/2N2
1-4-2 Troubleshooting
(1) First check items
If the paper is fed askew, jammed, curled, or leading-edge dog-eared, first perform to check the following
items.
Check items Check description Corrective measures
Paper 1. Check the paper delivered is If a dog-ear has happened, check there are no objects
dog-eared, skewed, rumpled, existing in the conveying paths and, if any, fix.
loosely fused, or curled. If the paper is fed askew or crumpled, perform the fol-
lowing No.2.If an inferior fusing or curling is observed
and the fuser temperature is set to a abnormal value,
when measured by performing maintenance mode
U161, reset to the default. (see page 1-3-111)
2. Check how paper is loaded in Adjust the cursors to the size of the paper.
the cassette (deck). (If paper is fed askew, perform a skew cancellation
Check that the paper has adjustment of the width adjuster cursor.) (see page 1-5-
been properly aligned with 153)
width adjuster cursor and the
rear guide; it has been loaded
without skewing; or it is not
damaged. (Crumpled paper,
main unit/DF jam)
3. Check how paper is loaded. If the cutting edge of the paper bundle is crumpled, fan
Check if the cutting edge of the paper before loading.
the paper bundle inside is If the paper is folded, stretch before loading in the
cumpled or bent. cassette
4. If a large-capacity deck is Reloard the paper so that its edges won't be situated
being used, check how paper above the platform.
is loaded in the deck.
Check if the paper inside the
deck is placed above the
guide.
5. Check the paper is damp, 1. Load the paper bundle in the cassette upside down.
wavy, or curled. 2. Load the paper bundle after rotating it 180°and
reload.
3. Change the paper.
6. Check if the paper loaded Instruct the user to store paper in a dry, less humid
was stored in a continuously place.
humid place. Install a cassette heater and configure using U327. (see
page 1-3-162)
7. Check if the paper conforms Isolate the cause of the problem by replacing the paper
to the requirements. with the recommended paper.
(see page 1-1-1)
1-4-26
2N3/2N2
Check items Check description Corrective measures
Paper 8. Check the paper ejected is If the maintenance mode U161 shows that the fuser
dog-eared, skewed, rumpled, temperature is set to an abnormal value, reset it to the
loosely fused, or curled. default. (see page 1-3-111)
Settings/ 1. Check if the margin is If the check line is not situated at 20mm±1mm from the
Detection 4.0+1.5/-1.0mm from the leading edge, adjust the leading margin by U402. (see
leading edge of paper. page 1-3-168)
2. Perform U034 to check the
reference mark is situated at
20mm ±1mm from the edge.
(Fuser jam)
(see page 1-3-38)
3. Check the panel if the paper If the paper size is incorrectly displayed, adjust the
size is correctly detected and positions of the paper set guide cursors in accordance
the cassette size is not with the paper size, making sure that the paper is not
fixed.(Paper jam caused by askew to activate the size detector switch.
continously fed paper, DF
Jam J611X) Perform U000 to
obtain a Event Log to check if
the paper size and the size of
the paper loaded are met
when jam has occurred and if
the size of the original
document and the paper size
are met. see page 1-3-12)
4. Check that paper settings are Select Original/ Paper settings under common settings
made in accordance with the in the system menu to set media type and weight of
paper being used. (Jam paper.
caused by faulty separation)
Coveying unit Check the main unit vertical To open, first open the right-side conveying unit and
conveying unit or the front and close firmly. (Check the position of the safery switch)
back parts and right and left parts
of the deck's horizontal
conveying unit are slightly
strained and closed.
1-4-27
2N3/2N2
Check items Check description Corrective measures
Conveying 1. Check that the foreign If foreign objects such as scrips, etc., remain in the
guide, objects including scrips, paper conveying path, remove.
approaching paper clips, etc., do not exist
guide, feed- in the paper conveying paths.
shift guide 2. Check that the paper If dirty, clean the guide, ribs (by a cloth), and the
conveying guide and the separation needles (by a cleaning brush).If the ribs of
separation needles are not the conveying guides were broken or deposited with
contaminated with toner, toner, replace.
paper dusts, etc.
3. Check that the paper Clean the conveying guide or the paper approaching
conveying guide has no guide.Remove any protrusions including barrs.If floated,
barrs, deformations, or fix it properly.If deformation or abrasion is observed,
abrasions; and it is properly replace.
mounted without being
floated.
4. Check that the guide. If the guide is inoperative or won't operate smoothly,
Check that the guide is replace the guide or the unit.
smoothly operative when
manipulated.
5. Check that the guide. If the guide is inoperative or won't operate smoothly, re-
Perform U033 to check the assemble the guide or replace the solenoid or the unit.
operation of the solenoid to
sight-check or audio-check its
action. (see page 1-3-37)
1-4-28
2N3/2N2
Check items Check description Corrective measures
Conveying 1. Check the conveying rollers Clean the conveying rollers or the pulleys.
roller, feed have no paper dusts, toner, If variation in the external diameter or abrasion is
roller or foreign objects observed, replace.
stucked.Check a variation of
the external diameter of the
roller or abrasion is not
observed with the coveying
roller.
2. Turn the cover safety switch If the conveying motor or the clutch is inoperative,
on and perform U030 - Motor, replace.
U032 - Clutch, and U240 - If stained, replace the clutch.
Finished, check they operate If the clutch is kept turned on due to a tensioned wire,
normally. reroute wires.
* : At checking the clutch by
U032, confirm that the
roller won't turn when the
motor is turned on. (see
page 1-3-34,1-3-36,1-3-
135)
3. Check the conveying roller Clean the roller axle or the axle holder.Re-assemble it
rotates without overloading. while checking the pressure of the spring.
Check the axle holder or the
roller shaft are not
contaminated.
Check that the spring has not
fallen off and is mounted so
that it is properly applying
pressure against the rollers
or pulleys.
Sensor 1. Check if it does not operate Re-assemble the actuator or the return spring.
with smoothness due to an
abnormal move or dropping
off of the actuator of the
coveying switch.
2. Check that the surface of the If dirty, clean the sensor or the black felt piece.
sensor and the recveptor
black felt pieces are not
contaminated with toner,
paper dusts, etc.
3. Perform U031 - Conveying If U031has revealed that the sensor is inoperative,
switch and U241 - Finisher replace the switch.
switch to check the sensors
are normal without flickering,
etc. (see page1-3-35, 1-3-
137)
1-4-29
2N3/2N2
Check items Check description Corrective measures
Static Check if the location is Re-assemble and re-wire the static discharge sheet at
susceptible to build static the ejection unit or the metal guide at the tranfer unit so
discharge at the conveying guide that they are properly grounded.
during printing.
(2) Items and corrective actions relating to the device that will cause paper jam
Jam types Check description Corrective measures
No-paper-feed jam or 1. Check if the jammed Replace the primary feed roller.(Service life of rubber
the leading edge of paper or the printed roller is 150k.)
paper is curled back at paper has a tear Increase the spring pressure to pinch the separation
the position of the caused by the roller at rollers if the component is undue to its expected
roller its leading edge. life.Replace the spring.
(J0501,J0502, 2. Check abrasion and Clean the feed roller and the forward roller.Or, if not
J0503,J0504, J0505, paper dusts on the feed amended, replace.
J0506, J0507, J0509, roller and forward
J0523, J0524, J0525, rollers.
J0526, J0527, J0545)
3. Perform U032 to check If disconnected or or stained, replace the primary
the forward roller and feed clutch.
feed roller are rotating.
4. Check if a primary feed Distinguished by color: White x 2, black x 1
roller of a wrong Check that the feed rollers are installed at (1) Feed
material of rubber is Roller (Collar is white.), (2) Retard roller (black), and
installed. (3) Pickup Roller (white). 45-ppm/ 55-ppm devices
* : If not, install then at the correct positions.
5. Check that the Increase the conveying force during paper pickup by
conveying force of the increasing the spring load of the pickup roller.
pickup roller is
sufficient.
6. Check the film is Amount of protrusion of film in approaching (Gap: 0.2
sufficiently protruded in - 0.5 mm) must be maintained after adjustment.
front of approching the
feed roller and the
nip.(Too wide a gap
against the feed roller.)
1-4-30
2N3/2N2
Jam types Check description Corrective measures
No-paper-feed jam or 7. Check the separation If it gets in contact, replace the primary feed unit.
the leading edge of roller is not disturbed as
paper is curled back at a driving component is
the position of the in contact with the
roller frame during the
(J0501,J0502, separation roller is in
J0503,J0504, J0505, motion.
J0506, J0507J0509, 8. Depress the release Modify mounting the retard holder fixing plate.
J0523, J0524, J0525, lever to release the
J0526, J0527, J0545) pressure of the primary
feed rollers to check
that the retard holder
falls. (The pressure by
the retard roller to the
feed roller is
decreased.)
Multiple-feed Jam 1. Check if the cutting If the cutting edge of the paper bundle is crumpled or
(J0511, J0512, J0513, edge of the paper the cassette is loaded with multiple times of
J0514, J0516, J0517, bundle is crumpled or replenishing paper, load new paper.
J0519) the cassette is loaded
with multiple times of
replenishing paper.
2. Checking paper size. If the paper size does not agree.
Check that the size of 1. If the cassette cursors are open against the
the loaded paper and paper, set it properly.
the paper size chosen 2. Insert the cassette until the paper size detector
on the operator panel switch is turned on.
are met. If the size is not detectable while automatic sizing
is enabled, replace the size detection switch.
If the paper size agrees
1. If paper other than complying the requirements
such as coated paper, inkjet paper, etc., is used,
replace the paper.
2. RE-assemble the pulley retard in the primary
feed unit if it is mounted to the oppisite direction.
3. Check if the spring retard has not been fallen off
of the mounting position. If the spring retard is
not dropped off of the mount position, decrease
the spring pressure that is applied to the
separation rollers.
4. Replace the primary feed unit.
3. Check if paper dusts If the paper fanning roller is dirty, clean.
and abrasion are If abrasion is observed, replace.
observed on the paper
fanning roller and retard
roller.
1-4-31
2N3/2N2
Jam types Check description Corrective measures
Multiple-feed Jam 4. Select the motor by If the clutch rotates following the other component
(J0511, J0512, J0513, U032 and check the and its stain is observed, replace the clutch.
J0514, J0516, J0517, clutch rotates following
J0519) the other component
when the motor is
turned on. (see page 1-
3-36)
Duplex No-original- Perform U031 to check if If the duplex sensor 2 is not working, replace the
feed Jam (J0508) the duplex sensor 2 is duplex sensor 2.
Duplex Multiple-feed detected. (see page 1-3-35)
Jam (J0518)
Intermediate/ 1. Check to see if the If it won't operate without hinderance, re-assemble or
conveying sensor stay actuator is operative replace the actuator's return spring.
jam without hinderance.
(J1313, J1314, J1513, 2. Perform U031 to check If the sensor is inoperative, replace.
J1514) the operation of the
sensor.
3. Select the motor by If stained, replace the clutch.Re-assmeble the clutch
U032 and check if the so that it is not continuously energized. (Change of
coveying clutch rotates wirings, etc.)
following the other
component. (see page
1-3-36)
4. Check if the conveying If the bracket is twisted to be mounted, remove the
guide is twisted to be screw fixing the conveying guide and properly mount
mounted.(If the the bracket in the right position and fix again.
mounting parts of the
guide is floated, the
actuator won't protrude
sufficiently.)
5. Check no wrinkles are Adjust the cursors to the size of the paper.
observed at the sluck of (If paper is fed askew, perform a skew cancellation
paper during paper adjustment of the width adjuster cursor.) (see page 1-
feeding. 5-153)
1-4-32
2N3/2N2
Jam types Check description Corrective measures
Conveying sensor non 1. Check to see if the Re-assemble or replace the actuator's return spring.
arrival jam (J1503/ actuator is operative
J1504) without hinderance.
SM conveying sensor 2. Perform U030 to check If the roller won't rotate without hinderance, loosen
2 stay jam (J3415, the operation of the the screws for adjusting the position (at the gear train
J3416, J3417) motor. bracket) to mount the driving gears, and tighten so
Check the transmission that a gap between the gears and frame is
of the gear drive using eliminated.
U032.
* : Check the convey-
ing roller rotates and
is movable in the
direction of thrust
without hinderance.
(see page 1-3-36)
Loop sensor non 1. Check no wrinkles are Adjust the cursors to the size of the paper.
arrival jam (J4101, observed at the sluck of (If paper is fed askew, perform a skew cancellation
J4102, J4103, J4104, paper during paper adjustment of the width adjuster cursor.) (see page 1-
J4105, J4106, J4107) feeding. 5-153)
2. Check that the paper is Reload paper.
entirely loaded inside
the cassette without
being skewed.
Fuser eject sensor 1. If paper jam occurrs at If the distance between the housing and the feedshift
stay jam (J421X) the feedshift guide in guide is too small for the guide to move without
the eject unit, check if hinderance, replace the eject unit.
Ejection-full sensor the guide is operative
non arrival jam without hinderance.
(J460X)
2. Perform U031 to check Replace the defective eject sensor or the eject unit.
Inversion sensor non if the eject sensor does
arrival jam (J470X) not show a false
detection.
(see page 1-3-35)
1-4-33
2N3/2N2
Jam types Check description Corrective measures
Duplex sensors 1 and 1. Check that the duplex Clean or replace the duplex roller in the coveying
2, stuck/ non arrival rollers cause slipage in unit.
Jam (J43XX, J44XX) feeding paper.
2. Perform U031 to check Replace the defective duplex sensors 1 and 2 or the
if the duplex sensors 1 coveying unit.
and 2 do not show false
detections.
3. Check if the second Replace the paper with new paper.Try feeding paper
side of plain paper is lengthwise.
curled at its tail and
slacked in the middle
making the switch
disguised as no
existance of paper.
BR conveying sensor 1. Check contamination of Clean or replace the rollers.
1/2 non arrival/stay the rollers of the bridge
jam (J49XX) eject unit.
Eject sensor non 2. Check contamination or Clean the axle holder or replace with a new axle
arrival jam (J50XX) abrasion of the axle holder.
Eject sensor stay jam holders of the bridge
(J51XX) eject unit.
DF paper entry error
3. Check the location the Re-mount.
JAM (J600X)
bridge relay conveying
unit is mounted.
DF conveying sensor 1. Check it the main unit Perform the height adjustment by referring to the
non arrival jam and the DF are installation instructions.
(J610X) vertically flush with
DF conveying sensor each other.
stay jam (J611X)
1-4-34
2N3/2N2
Jam types Check description Corrective measures
DF conveying sensor 2. Check if the jammed 2.If a down-curled sheet is jammed at the DF
non arrival jam paper has a dog-ear. conveying guide ribs by being dog-eared, replace the
(J610X) DF conveying lower guide.
DF conveying sensor
stay jam (J611X)
3. Check if dog-ears are If a welding protrusion on the coveying side causes
caused within the paper to be trapped, try replacing the punch unit.
punch unit.
DF intermediate sen- 1. If there is not the Re-mount the actuator.
sor stay jam (J631X) jammed paper which is
DF main tray ejection causing J631, at the
stay JAM (J641X) paper processing area,
DF eject sensor non check to see if the
arrival jam (J6500) actuator (DF middle
DF eject sensor stay sensor) is operative.
jam (J651X)
1-4-35
2N3/2N2
Jam types Check description Corrective measures
DF intermediate sen- 2. Check the range of the If the gap is not correct, fix balance of the bundle
sor stay jam (J631X) up and down eject unit.
DF main tray ejection movement of the If (1): Correct the phase shifting with meshing of the
stay JAM (J641X) ejection guide. front and back gears.
DF eject sensor non Check if the operating (Turn on U240 - Motor-EjectUnlock (30) to check the
arrival jam (J6500) position after feeding in balance of the front and back rollers with the bundle
DF eject sensor stay the first sheet is normal. eject unit opened.see page 1-3-135)
jam (J651X) (1)If it moves askew (due to
the forward and backward
shift of phase on the eject
guide)
(2)If the range of motion is
too small
Check if the gap between
the ejection roller and the
ejection pulleys is approxi-
mately 3.5 - 5.5 mm.
(Check gaps while making If (2): Adjust the positioning of or replace the Mount
paper still in the intermedi- PI upper guide.
ate process tray.)
3. Execute U240 Motor - If the width adjuster cursor is wrongly positioned,
Width Test A3/LD to perform U246 Finisher - Width Front HP/Width Tail
adjust the position of HP. (see page 1-3-143)
the width adjuster
cursor of the process
tray. Check if the cursor
is located at 0 - +0.5
from the paper edge.
Or check if the cursor is
abnormally shifted.
(The DF and the main
unit paper sources)
(see page 1-3-135)
1-4-36
2N3/2N2
Jam types Check description Corrective measures
DF intermediate sen- 4.With stapling at one point 1. If a wire from the ejection motor is pinched by
sor stay jam (J631X) with about 65 sheets, other component or a connector is loosely
DF main tray ejection check for the failure on connected, correct.
stay JAM (J641X) the bundle when it is If a loss of synchronism is observed with the
DF eject sensor non delivered in the shape ejection motor due to lack of torque, replace the
arrival jam (J6500) of an arc. motor.
DF eject sensor stay 2. If paper slippage occurs due to the lack of
jam (J651X) pressure by the ejection rollers, check if the
pressure sufficient (3 springs, at the center).
If a malfunction to encumber the ejection rollers
to generate pressure is observed, correct.
SPRING EXIT PULLEY
5. With stapling set at 2 If the paper is curled, change the direction of loading
points and about 50 paper or replace the paper.
sheets, run a test print
and check the print
bundle delivered for the
failure on the direction
of ejection and the front
and back side, abrupt
alignment, and overall
alignment.
6. Check if a floated Configure each of the cassettes for the weight of the
staple, buckling, or paper loaded.replace the paper.
stapling at a wrong Adjust the stapling home position by U246 - Staple
position is occurred. HP. (see page 1-3-143)
7. Check stapling has Provide instructions with the following points
been properly done if emphasized.
the paper bundle 1. Tap the paper to align its ends and load all the
cannot be ejected way into the cassette.
causing J-6510. 2. After settings, let go off of the paper. (Allows
automatic ehection after stapling.)
3. Do not remove paper before the paper bundle is
ejected once it is stapled.
DF drum sensor non Paper is jammed with its Check it the axle of the diverting solenoid 1 is
arrival jam (J6600) leading edge caught by the inserted all the way into the lever of the DF diverting
diversion solenoid 1 in the solenoid 1, and insert the lever firmly if it is not.
middle of coveying paths.
1-4-37
2N3/2N2
Jam types Check description Corrective measures
DF drum sensor stay 1. Check if the size and If not matched, load the paper in the size and
jam (J6610) orientation of the orientation configured for the cassette or the manual
original document and feed tray.
the paper used match.
2. Check to see if the If the return spring has been fallen off of the fixing
actuator (DF drum position, fix it properly.If the actuator won't operate
sensor) is operative smoothly, replace.
without hinderance.
Center-folding unit If paper is jammed before If the drive transmission gears are not in mesh,
conveying stay JAM reaching the center-folding replace the pivot pin of the CF lock lever and the DF
(J6710) unit, check that the drive fixing pin.
Center-folding unit train gears are in mesh.
conveying sensor stay
JAM (J7710)
1-4-38
2N3/2N2
(3) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 1
Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary
feeding (to regist roller)
Timing of detection
Jam code
J0501,J0511,J1301,J1311,J4001,J4011
Measures
Related parts
Paper feed motor(PFM) Registration sensor (RS)
Paper feed clutch 1(PFCL1) Engine PWB (EPWB)
Assist clutch 1 (ACSL1) Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2)
Middle motor (MM) Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)
Registration motor (RM)
Feed sensor 1 (FS1)
Middle sensor (MS)
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J0501 (terminal), point of checking connection
J0501
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Feed sensor 1 (FS1): Conduct Feed PWB 2 YC8-11
connectivity check, mounting location
check, operation check (U031)
3 Paper feed clutch (PFCL1): Operation Feed PWB 2 YC4-1
check (U032)
4 Paper feed motor: Operation check Feed PWB 2 YC2-3(RDY),1(REM)
(U030)
5 Feed PWB 2: Replace
6 Engine PWB : Replace
1-4-39
2N3/2N2
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J13X1 (terminal), point of checking connection
J13X
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
Middle sensor (MS): Conduct
2 connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 2 YC8-9
check, operation check (U031)
Assist clutch 1 (ACSL1): Operation
3 Feed PWB 2 YC10-1
check (U032)
Middle motor (MM): Operation check
4 Feed PWB 2 YC7-1 to 4
(U030)
5 Feed PWB 2: Replace
6 Engine PWB: Replace
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J40X1 (terminal), point of checking connection
J40X1
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Registration sensor (RS): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location
Feed PWB 2 YC7-12
check, operation check (U031) and U051
- Slack Margin Settings.
3 Registration motor (RM): Operation
Feed PWB 1 YC25-1 to 4
check (U030)
4 Feed PWB 1: Replace
5 Engine PWB: Replace
1-4-40
2N3/2N2
(4) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 2
Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary
feeding (to regist roller)
Timing of detection
Jam code
J0502,J0512,J1302,J1312,J1502,J1512,J4002,J4012
Corrective Action
Related parts
Paper feed motor (PFM) Engine PWB (EPWB)
Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2)
Assist clutch 2 (ACSL2) Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)
Middle motor (MM)
Registration motor (RM)
Vertical conveying clutch (PCCL)
Feed sensor 2 (FS2)
Paper conveying sensor (PCS)
Middle sensor (MS)
Registration sensor (RS)
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J05X2 (terminal), point of checking connection
J05X2
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Feed sensor 1 (FS1): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 2 YC8-23
check, operation check (U031)
3 Paper feed clutch (PFCL1): Operation
Feed PWB 2 YC4-1
check (U032)
4 Paper feed motor: Operation check
Feed PWB 2 YC2-3(RDY), 5(REM)
(U030)
5 Feed PWB 2: Replace
6 Engine PWB: Replace
1-4-41
2N3/2N2
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J13X2 (terminal), point of checking connection
J13X2
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
Middle sensor (MS): Conduct
2 connectivity check, mounting location, Feed PWB 2 YC8-9
check operation check (U031)
Vertical conveying clutch (PCCL):
3 Feed PWB 2 YC5-3
Operation check (U032)
Middle motor (MM): Operation check
4 Feed PWB 2 YC7-1 to 4
(U030)
5 Feed PWB 2: Replace
6 Engine PWB: Replace
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J15X2 (terminal), point of checking connection
J15X2
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
Conveying sensor (PCS) I/O check and
2 Feed PWB 2 YC6-3
sensor check (U031)
Vertical conveying clutch (PCCL):
3 Feed PWB 2 YC5-3
Operation check (U032)
Assist clutch 2 (ACSL2):Operation check
4 Feed PWB 2 YC12-1
(U032)
5 Feed PWB 2: Replace
6 Engine PWB: Replace
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J40X2 (terminal), point of checking connection
J40X2
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Registration sensor (RS): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location
Feed PWB 2 YC7-12
check, operation check U031 and U051 -
Slack Margin Settings.
3 Registration motor (RM): Operation
Feed PWB 1 YC25-1 to 4
check (U030)
1-4-42
2N3/2N2
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J40X2 (terminal), point of checking connection
J40X2
4 Feed PWB 1: Replace
5 Engine PWB: Replace
(5) Paper jam during manual feeding
Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary
feeding (to regist roller)
Timing of detection
Jam code
J0131,J0509,J0519,J4009,J4019
Corrective Action
Related parts
Paper feed motor (PFM) Engine PWB (EPWB)
Manual feed clutch (MPPFCL) Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)
Relay PWB (RYPWB)
Middle motor (MM) * : In paper conveying unit
Registration motor (RM)
MP feed sensor (MPFS)
Registration sensor (RS)
Manual feed lift motor (MPLM)
MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1)
MP lift sensor 2 (MPLS2)
1-4-43
2N3/2N2
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J05X9 (terminal), point of checking connection
J05X9
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 MP feed sensor (MPFS): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 1 YC17-9
check, operation check (U031)
3 Manual feed conveying clutch (CL):
Feed PWB 2 YC4-1
Operation check (U032)
4 Middle motor (MM): Operation check
Feed PWB 2 YC7-1 to 4
(U030)
5 Feed PWB 2: Replace
6 Engine PWB: Replace
Checking On/Off control signal output connector
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of (terminal), point of checking connection
occurrence of J40X9
J40X9
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
Registration sensor (RS): Conduct
2 connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 2 YC7-12
check, operation check (U031)
Registration motor (RM): Operation
3 Feed PWB 1 YC25-1 to 4
check (U030)
4 Feed PWB 1: Replace
5 Engine PWB: Replace
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J0131 (terminal), point of checking connection
J0131
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Manual feed lift base elevation check:
1. Up-and-down movability of the paper
lift base of the manual feed tray.
2. Check if the lift lever is in contact with -
the lift motor cam (re-mount the
manual feed table).
1-4-44
2N3/2N2
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J0131 (terminal), point of checking connection
J0131
3 MP lift sensors 1 and 2: Check for Relay PWB (YC3-5, YC3-8) (YC12)
connection and the position of the sensor
to be mounted.
4 MP lift motor: Check if the paper lift base Relay PWB(YC3-11), (YC12)
is raised as the motor rotates.
5 Feed PWB 1: Replace Feed PWB 1(YC17),(YC1)
6 Engine PWB: Replace Engine PWB (YC6)
1-4-45
2N3/2N2
(6) Paper jam at the duplex re-feeding part
Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary
feeding (to regist roller)
Timing of detection
Jam code
J0508,J0518
Corrective Action
Related parts
Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) Engine PWB (EPWB)
Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J05X8 (terminal), point of checking connection
J05X8
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 1 YC 14-5
check, operation check (U031)
3 Duplex motor 2 (DUM2): Operation
Feed PWB 1 YC14-14 to 17
check (U030)
5 Feed PWB 1: Replace
6 Engine PWB: Replace
1-4-46
2N3/2N2
(7) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the Secondary transfer part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J410x,J411x
Corrective Action
Related parts
Secondary transfer roller - transfers the
Engine PWB (EPWB)
drive from the transfer belt
Registration motor (RM) Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)
Loop sensor (LPS) Relay PWB (RYPWB)
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J41XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J41XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Loop sensor (LPS): Conduct connectivity
check, mounting location check, Feed PWB 1 YC23-11
operation check (U031)
3 Registration motor (RM): Operation
Feed PWB 1 YC25-1 to 4
check (U030)
4 Check that the drive from the
Intermediate transfer belt unit is
transferred to the second transfer roller.
6 Check how the conveying unit and the
main unit drawer are connected (such as
a fallen pin) and, if they are normal,
replace the relay PWB.
7 Feed PWB 1: Replace
8 Engine PWB: Replace
1-4-47
2N3/2N2
(8) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the fuser and eject part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J420x,J421x,J460x,J461x,J470x,J471x
Corrective Action
Related parts
Fuser motor (FUM) Engine PWB (EPWB)
Eject motor (EM) Front PWB (FRPWB)
Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)
Fuser eject sensor (FUES)
Eject full sensor (EFS)
Switchback sensor (SBS)
JS eject motor (JSEM)
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J42XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J42XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Fuser eject sensor (FUES): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Engine PWB YC26-A13
check, operation check (U031)
3 feedshift solenoid (FSSOL): feedshift
Front PWB YC5-19
guide check (U033)
4 Fuser motor (FUM): Operation check
Feed PWB 1 YC18-3(RDY), 5(REM)
(U030)
5 Engine PWB : Replace
1-4-48
2N3/2N2
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J46XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J46XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Eject full sensor (EFS): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Front PWB YC5-16
check, operation check (U031)
3 feedshift solenoid (FSSOL): feedshift
Front PWB YC5-19
guide check (U033)
4 Eject motor (EM): Operation check
Front PWB YC5-8 to 11
(U030)
5 Front PWB (FRPWB): Replace
6 Engine PWB : Replace
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J47XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J47XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Switchback sensor (SBS): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Front PWB YC5-13
check, operation check (U031)
3 feedshift solenoid (FSSOL): feedshift
Front PWB YC5-19
guide check (U033)
4 Job separator eject motor (JSEM): JS main circuit PWB: YC2-4, 5, 6, 7,
Operational check (U030) YC-1 Feed PWB 1: YC20
5 Engine PWB : Replace Engine PWB: YC7 Front PWB: YC3
1-4-49
2N3/2N2
(9) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the duplex part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J430x,J431x,J440x,J441x
Corrective Action
Related parts
Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) Engine PWB (EPWB)
Relay PWB (RYPWB)
Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) * : In paper conveying unit
Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) Relay PWB (RYPWB)
Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1) J440X
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J43XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J43XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 1 YC23-1
check, operation check (U031)
3 Duplex motor 1 (DUM1): Operation
Feed PWB 1 YC23-6 to 9
check (U030)
4 Check how the conveying unit and the
main unit drawer are connected and, if
they are normal, replace the feed circuit
PWB1.
5 Feed PWB 1(FPWB1): replace
6 Engine PWB: Replace
7 Relay PWB (RYPWB): Replace
1-4-50
2N3/2N2
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J44XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J44XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 1 YC14-5
check, operation check (U031)
3 Duplex motor 2 (DUM2): Operation
Feed PWB 1 YC14-14 to 17
check (U030)
4 Check how the conveying unit and the
main unit drawer are connected and, if
they are normal, replace the feed circuit
PWB1.
5 Feed PWB 1(FPWB1): replace
6 Engine PWB: Replace
7 Relay PWB (RYPWB): Replace
1-4-51
2N3/2N2
(10) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the BR (bridge) part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J490x,J491x,J500x,J501x,J510x,J511x
Corrective Action
Related parts
BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) BR feedshift solenoid (BRSOL)
BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) Engine PWB (EPWB)
BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) BR PWB (BRPWB)
BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2)
BR eject sensor (BRES)
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J49XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J49XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1):
Conduct connectivity check, mounting BR PWB YC6-2
location check, operation check (U031)
3 BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1):
BR PWB YC7-1 to 4
Operation check (U030)
4 BR PWB (BRPWB): Replace
5 Engine PWB: Replace
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J50XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J50XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2):
Conduct connectivity check, mounting BR PWB YC4-2
location check, operation check (U031)
3 BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2):
BR PWB YC7-5 to 8
Operation check (U030)
4 BR PWB (BRPWB): Replace
5 Engine PWB: Replace
1-4-52
2N3/2N2
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J51XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J51XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 BR eject sensor (BRES): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Engine PWB YC20-17
check, operation check (U031)
3 BR feedshift solenoid (BRSOL): Check
Engine PWB YC20-17
for switching feedshift guide (U033)
4 BR PWB (BRPWB): Replace
5 Engine PWB: Replace
1-4-53
2N3/2N2
(11) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF paper entry, feedshift and
subtray left eject part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J610x,J611x,J620x,J621x,J630x,J631x
Corrective Action
Related parts
DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL)
DF middle motor (DFMM) DP main PWB (DFMPWB)
DF eject motor (DFEM)
BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1)
BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2)
DF paper entry sensor (DFPES)
DF middle sensor (DFMES)
DF sub eject sensor (DFSES)
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J61XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J61XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 DF paper entry sensor (DFPES):
Conduct connectivity check, mounting
DF main PWB YC21-9
location check, operation check
(U241:Finisher HP)
3 DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL):
Check to see the feedshift guide 3 is DF main PWB YC18-12,13
switchable (U240: Solenoied - Sub tray)
4 DF paper entry motor (DFPEM):
Operation check (U240: Motor →Feed In DF main PWB YC12-13 to 16
(H), Feed In (L))
5 BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1), BR
conveying motor 2 (BRCM2): Operation
check (U030: Bridge1, Bridge2)
6 DF main PWB(DFMPWB): Replace
1-4-54
2N3/2N2
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J62XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J62XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 DF sub eject sensor (DFSES): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location DF main PWB YC21-3
check, operation check (U241)
3 DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL):
Check to see the feedshift guide 3 is DF main PWB YC18-12,13
switchable (U240)
4 DF paper entry motor (DFPEM):
DF main PWB YC12-13 to 16
Operation check (U240)
5 DF eject motor (DFEM): Operation check
DF main PWB YC12-5 to 8
(U240)
6 DF main PWB (DFMPWB): Replace
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J63XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J63XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 DF middle sensor (DFMES): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location DF main PWB YC20-6
check, operation check (U241)
3 DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL):
Check to see the feedshift guide 3 is DF main PWB YC18-12,13
switchable (U240)
4 DF paper entry motor (DFPEM):
DF main PWB YC12-13 to 16
Operation check (U240)
5 DF middle motor (DFMM): Operation
DF main PWB YC10-5 to 8
check (U240)
6 DF main PWB(DFMPWB): Replace
1-4-55
2N3/2N2
(12) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF process part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J6500,J651x,J6600,J6610
Corrective Action
Related parts
DF middle motor (DFMM) DF main PWB(DFMPWB)
DF drum motor (DFDRM)
DF bundle eject sensor (DFBDS)
DF drum sensor (DFDRS)
DF feedshift solenoid 1 (DFDRSOL)
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J65XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J65XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 DF middle sensor (DFMES): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location DF main PWB YC20-6
check, operation check (U241)
3 DF bundle eject sensor (DFBDS):
Conduct connectivity check, mounting DF main PWB YC22-27
location check, operation check (U241)
4 DF middle motor (DFMM): Operation
DF main PWB YC12-9 to 12
check (U240)
5 DF main PWB(DFMPWB): Replace
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J66XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J66XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 DF drum sensor (DFDRS): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location DF main PWB YC20-3
check, operation check (U241)
3 DF feedshift solenoid 1 (DFDRSOL):
Check to see the feedshift guide 1 is DF main PWB YC18-12,13
switchable (U240)
1-4-56
2N3/2N2
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J66XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J66XX
4 DF drum motor (DFDRM): Operation
DF main PWB YC18-1 to 4
check (U240)
5 DF main PWB(DFMPWB): Replace
(13) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF eject tray part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J640x,J641x
Corrective Action
Related parts
DF eject motor (DFEM) DF main PWB(DFMPWB)
DF tray motor (DFTM)
DF middle sensor (DFMES)
DF tray upper sensor 1 and 2 (DFTUSS 1,2)
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J64XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J64XX
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 DF middle sensor (DFMES): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location DF main PWB YC20-6
check, operation check (U241)
3 DF tray upper sensor 1 and 2
(DFTUSS1, 2): Conduct connectivity DF main PWB YC21-19(DFTUSS1),
check, mounting location check, YC13-3(DFTUSS2)
operation check (U241)
4 DF eject motor (DFEM): Operational
DF main PWB YC12-5 to 8
check (U240)
5 DF tray motor (DFTM): Operation check
DF main PWB YC19-4
(U240)
6 DF main PWB(DFMPWB): Replace
1-4-57
2N3/2N2
(14) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the CF conveying part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J6710,J7700,J7710
Corrective Action
Related parts
DF drum motor (DFDRM) DF main PWB(DFMPWB)
CF paper entry motor (CFPEM) CF PWB (CFPWB)
DF drum sensor (DFDRS)
CF conveying sensor (CFPCS)
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J671X (terminal), point of checking connection
J671X
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 DF drum sensor (DFDRS): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location DF main PWB YC20-3
check, operation check (U241)
3 DF drum motor (DFDRM): Operation
DF main PWB YC18-1 to 4
check (U240)
4 CF paper entry motor (CFPEM): Check if
CF PWB YC18-1 to 4
the gears can chain the drive.
5 DF main PWB(DFMPWB): Replace
6 CF PWB (CFPWB): Replace
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J77X0 (terminal), point of checking connection
J77X0
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-26
2 CF conveying sensor (CFPCS): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location CF PWB YC20-15
check, operation check (U241)
3 CF paper entry motor (CFPEM): Check if
CF PWB YC18-1 to 4
the gears can chain the drive.
4 DF main PWB(DFMPWB): Replace
5 CF PWB (CFPWB): Replace
1-4-58
2N3/2N2-4
1-4-3 Self-diagnostic function
(1) Self-diagnostic function
1. This machine is equipped with self-
diagnostic function. When a problem is
detected, the machine stops printing
and display the dialog to retrieve the
relevant information in a log. (Self-diag-
nostic dialog)
* : Be sure not to turn power off until the
dialog has gone off.
* : The logs retrieved can be downloaded
in a flash memory device using U964
mode. (See page 1-3-237)
Figure 1-4-4
2. And then display an error message on
the operation panel. An error message
consists of a message prompting a con-
tact to service personnel and a four-
digit error code indicating the type of
the error.
Figure 1-4-5
1-4-59
2N3/2N2
(2) Self diagnostic codes
If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement
Caution:
Before attempting to check the power supply, fuser unit, and the IH controller PWB, be sure to turn the power
switch off and unplug the machine from power. Allow at least 5 seconds before starting to conduct service until
the capacitors on the circuit boards have been completely discharged.
To reset a service call for fuser, performing U163 Fuser Defects is required. (See page 1-3-113)
To reset a service call regarding the Maintenance T display and the DP, performing U906 Disconnection at
Defect is required. (See page 1-3-225)
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
0030 FAX control PWB system FAX control PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
error 5 seconds, re-mount the FAX controller
Processing with the fax soft- PWB, then turn power on.
ware was disabled due to a 2. Reinstall the fax software.
software problem. 3. Replace the FAX control PWB.
0070 FAX control PWB incompat- FAX control PWB 1. Install the FAX system designed for the
ible detection error (The FAX PWB model.
Abnormal detection of FAX installed will not be 2. Reinstall the fax software.
control PWB incompatibility In the one designed
the initial communication with for the machine.)
the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication com-
mand is not transmitted.
0080 Option printing system Defective FPGA for 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
device error. printing system 5 seconds, then turn power on.
The version of the FPGA for control. 2. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-
Fiery control is not readable. 82).
(Defective FPGA)
0100 Backup memory device EEPROM (main 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
error PWB) 5 seconds, then turn power on.
2. Check that the EEPROM on the main
circuit PWB is peroperly installed on the
main circuit PWB and, if not, re-install it.
3. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-
82).
0120 MAC address data error EEPROM (main 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
For data in which the MAC PWB) 5 seconds, then turn power on.
address is invalid. 2. Check the MAC address on the network
status page.
3. If it is blank, obtain an EEPROM with its
MAC address written from the service
support and install.
4. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-
82).
1-4-60
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
0150 Backup memory read/write EEPROM (Engine 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
error (engine PWB) PWB) 5 seconds, then turn power on.
1. No response is issued 2. Check that the EEPROM is peroperly
from the device in reading/ installed on the engine PWB and re-
writing for 5 ms or more install it.
and this problem is 3. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
repeated 5 times succes-
91).
sively.
4. Check the EEPROM and if the data are
2. Mismatch of reading data
currupted, contact the service support.
from 2 locations occurs 8
times successively.
3. Mismatch between writ-
ing data and reading data
occurs 8 times succes-
sively.
0160 Backup memory data error EEPROM 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
(engine PWB) 5 seconds, then turn power on.
Reading data from EEPROM 2. Execute U021 - memory initializing.(see
is abnormal. page 1-3-31)
3. If the EEPROM data are currupted,
contact the service support.
0170 Billing counting error EEPROM 1. Check that the EEPROMs installed in
The values on the main circuit the main PWB and the engine PWB are
PWB and on the engine do correct and, if not, use the correct
not match for any of charging EEPROM for the model.
counter, life counter, and 2. If the EEPROM data are currupted,
scanner counter. contact the service support.
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
Engine PWB Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-91).
0180 Machine number mismatch Data damage of 1. Confirm the machine data for the main
Machine number of main and EEPROM. and engine units by using U004 (see
engine does not match. page 1-3-27).
2. If the serial number data of different
models is alternately displayed, install
the correct EEPROM in the PWB of the
wrong serial number data.
3. Contact the Service Support.
1-4-61
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
0350 Panel PWB communication Operation PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
error (electronic volume I2C 5 seconds, then turn power on.
communication error) 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
NACK is received during I2C firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
communication -> retried 5 nect the connector all the way in.
times -> rebooting command Operation PWB (YC10) and Main PWB
sent -> retried 5 times (YC6)
If NACK is still received. 3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
0620 FAX image DIMM error FAX image DIMM 1. Install the FAX image DIMM supplied in
1. The Fax image DIMM has the FAX system onto the main PWB.
not been installed. 2. Firmly install the FAX image DIMM again
2. Fax image DIMM access onto the main board.
error. 3. Check the FAX image DIMM terminals
and remove any foreign objects that may
be adhered to it.
4. Replace with a new FAX image DIMM.
Main PWB. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
0630 DMA error DP CIS 1. Reconnect the CIS signal line.
DMA transmission of image 2. Confirm that the CIS connector
data does not complete within terminals are firmly connected. Insert
the specified period of time. the connector all the way in.
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
DP main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Main PWB firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
Wiring that connects the CIS and the DP
controller PWB.
Wiring that connects the DP main PWB
and the main PWB.
3. Replace the DP main PWB.
4. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-
82).
1-4-62
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
0640 Hard disk error HDD 1. If an abnormal noise is heard from the
The hard disk cannot be HDD, replace the HDD.
accessed. 2. Check the SATA wiring between the
HDD and the main circuit PWB for loose
connection, disconnection and
damages, and that it is connected into
the correct terminal.
Main PWB: YC1,YC27
YC2,YC32
3. Replace the SATA cable.
4. Execute U024 to initialize (FULL) the
HDD (see page 1-3-32).
5. If an error is detected after executing
U024, replace the HDD.
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
0650 FAX image DIMM check FAX DIMM. 1. Confirm that a used FAX image DIMM
error was used instead of the FAX image
A fax image DIMM which was DIMM contained in the FAX system.
used with another machine is 2. If a DIMM that was used with other unit
installed. has been installed, execute
maintenance mode U671 - Recovery
FAX DIMM.
3. Check whether the Fax DIMM is
properly inserted into the socket on the
main PWB.
4. Replace with a new FAX image DIMM.
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
0660 Hard disk encryption key EEPROM 1. Execute U004 if this occurs after the
error EEPROM has been changed.
HDD 1. If an abnormal noise is heard from the
HDD, replace the HDD.
2. Check the SATA wiring between the
HDD and the main circuit PWB for loose
connection, disconnection and
damages, and that it is connected into
the correct terminal.
Main PWB: YC1,YC27
YC2,YC32
3. Replace the SATA cable.
4. Execute U024 to initialize (FULL) the
HDD (see page 1-3-32).
5. If an error is detected after executing
U024, replace the HDD.
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
1-4-63
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
0670 Hard disk overwriting era- HDD 1. If an abnormal noise is heard from the
sure error HDD, replace the HDD.
2. Check the SATA wiring between the
HDD and the main circuit PWB for loose
connection, disconnection and
damages, and that it is connected into
the correct terminal.
Main PWB: YC1,YC27
YC2,YC32
3. Replace the SATA cable.
4. Execute U024 to initialize (FULL) the
HDD (see page 1-3-32).
5. If an error is detected after executing
U024, replace the HDD.
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
0800 Image processing error Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
JAM010X is detected twice.
0830 FAX control PWB flash pro- FAX software 1. Reinstall the fax software.
gram area checksum error 1. Execute initializing by U600.(Refer to
FAX control PWB
A checksum error occurred
the FAX service manual)
with the program of the FAX
2. Replace the FAX control PWB.
control PWB.
1-4-64
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
0840 Faults of RTC Battery (main 1. Make sure that the back-up batteries on
(“Time for maintenance T” is PWB) the main PWB are not short-circuited.
displayed) 2. Perform U209, adjust RTC setting.
[Check at power up] 3. Reset Maintenance T by executing
The RTC setting has reverted U906 (see page 1-3-225).
to a previous state. The 4. If the same C call is displayed when
machine has not been pow- power is switched on and off, replace the
ered for 5 years (compared to back up battery.
the settings stored periodically
5. If communication error (due to a noise,
in the EEPROM).
etc.) is present with the RTC on the main
The RTC setting is older than
circuit PWB, check the PWB is properly
00:01 on January 1, 2000.
[Checked periodically (in 5- grounded.
minute interval) after powered Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
up]
The RTC setting has reverted
to a state older than the last
time it was checked.
10 minutes have been passed
since the previous check.
After C840 is detected, the
machine enters in disconnec-
tion mode after the main
power switch has been
switched on and off and indi-
cates ‘Maintenance T.’
0870 PCFAX control PWB to main FAX control PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
PWB high capacity data 5 seconds, re-mount the FAX controller
transfer error PWB, then turn power on.
High-capacity data transfer 2. Replace the FAX control PWB.
between the FAX control PWB
HDD Execute U024 to initialize the HDD (see
and the main PWB of the
machine was not normally page 1-3-32).
performed even if the data Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
transfer was retried the speci-
fied times.
0920 Fax file system error FAX control PWB 1. Execute initializing by U600 (Refer to the
The backup data is not FAX service manual).
retained for file system abnor- 2. Replace the FAX control PWB.
mality of flash memory of the
FAX control PWB.
0980 24 V power down detect Power source 1. Check the +24V output is given at YC12-
If a 24V power disconnection PWB 1 to 3 of the power circuit PWB.
signal is observed and a 12V 2. Replace the power source PWB (see
power disconnection signal is page 1-5-95)
observed simultaneously for
one second.
1-4-65
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1000 MP lift motor error Manual feed lift 1. Check that the paper lift base of the
If the MP lift sensor 1 (upper base elevating manual feed tray can smoothly ascend
limit detect) or 2 (bottom mechanism and descent, if not, repair or replace.
detect) is not detectable to be 2. Check that the lift lever is located so that
turned on while the MP lift it can ascend or descend by the lift
motor is ascending or motor cam and that it not damaged and,
descending.
if necessary, re-install or replace the
manual feed table.
MP lift motor 1. Check that the paper elevator has been
ascended.
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
MP lift motor and Relay PWB (YC3)
Relay PWB (YC12) and Feed PWB1
(YC17)
Feed PWB1 (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC6)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the MP lift motor.
MP lift sensor1 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
MP lift sensor2 positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
MP lift sensor1,2 and Relay PWB (YC3)
Relay PWB (YC12) and Feed
PWB1(YC17)
Feed PWB1 (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC6)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the MP lift sensor1 or MP lift
sensor2.
Feed PWB 2 Replace the Feed PWB 2.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-66
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1010 Lift motor 1 error Cassette lift base Check that the cassette base can be
After cassette 1 is inserted, lift elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
sensor 1 does not turn on mechanism replace.
within 12 s. This error is
Lift motor 1 1. Check that the cassette base has been
detected 5 times successively.
ascended.
The lock signal of the motor is
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
detected continuously for 1 s.
This error is detected 5 times are not unusually loaded and, if
successively. necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Lift motor 1 and Feed PWB 2 (YC3)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC4)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the lift motor 1.
Lift sensor 1 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Lift sensor 1 and Feed PWB 2 (YC8)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC4)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the lift sensor1.
Feed PWB 2 Replace the Feed PWB 2.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-67
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1020 Lift motor 2 error Cassette lift base Check that the cassette base can be
After cassette 2 is inserted, lift elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
sensor 2 does not turn on mechanism replace.
within 12 s. This error is
Lift motor 2 1. Check that the cassette base has been
detected 5 times successively.
ascended.
The lock signal of the motor is
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
detected continuously for 1 s.
This error is detected 5 times are not unusually loaded and, if
successively. necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Lift motor 2 and Feed PWB 2 (YC3)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC4)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the lift motor 2.
Lift sensor 2 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Lift sensor 2 and Feed PWB 2 (YC8)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC4)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the lift sensor2.
Feed PWB 2 Replace the Feed PWB 2.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-68
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1050 SM lift motor error Cassette lift base Check that the cassette base can be
(side multi tray) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
After cassette 5 is inserted, mechanism replace.
SM lift sensor does not turn
SM Lift motor 1. Check that the cassette base has been
on within 12 s. This error is
ascended.
detected 5 times successively.
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.) are not unusually loaded and, if
During driving the motor, the necessary, replace.
lift overcurrent protective 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
monitor signal is detected for firmly connected and, if necessary,
1 s or more 5 times succes- connect the connector all the way in.
sively. However, the first 1 s SM Lift motor and SM main PWB (YC5)
after motor is turned on is 4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
excluded from detection. grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the SM Lift motor.
SM Lift sensor 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
SM Lift sensor and SM main PWB (YC7)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the SM Lift sensor.
SM main PWB Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-69
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1060 PF lift motor 1 error Cassette lift base Check that the cassette base can be
(side paper feeder) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
After cassette 6 is inserted, mechanism replace.
PF lift sensor 1 does not turn
PF Lift motor 1 1. Check that the cassette base has been
on within 12 s. This error is
ascended.
detected 5 times successively.
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.) are not unusually loaded and, if
During driving the motor, the necessary, replace.
lift overcurrent protective 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
monitor signal is detected for firmly connected and, if necessary,
1 s or more 5 times succes- connect the connector all the way in.
sively. However, the first 1 s PF Lift motor 1 and PF main PWB (YC7)
after motor is turned on is 4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
excluded from detection. grounded, replace the wiring.
*:The lift over-current protec- 5. Replace the lift motor 1.
tion monitor signal has been
detected for 200ms or longer PF Lift sensor 1 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
where LFC is installed. positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
PF Lift sensor1 and PF main PWB (YC5)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the lift sensor 1.
PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the ser-
vice manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-70
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1070 PF lift motor 2 error Cassette lift base Check that the cassette base can be
(side paper feeder) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
After cassette 7 is inserted, mechanism replace.
PF lift sensor 2 does not turn
PF Lift motor2 1. Check that the cassette base has been
on within 12 s. This error is
ascended.
detected 5 times successively.
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.) are not unusually loaded and, if
During driving the motor, the necessary, replace.
lift overcurrent protective 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
monitor signal is detected for firmly connected and, if necessary,
1 s or more 5 times succes- connect the connector all the way in.
sively. However, the first 1 s PF Lift motor 2 and PF main PWB (YC7)
after motor is turned on is 4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
excluded from detection. grounded, replace the wiring.
*:The lift over-current protec- 5. Replace the PF Lift motor2.
tion monitor signal has been
detected for 200ms or longer PF Lift sensor2 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
where LFC is installed. positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
PF Lift sensor 2 and PF main PWB
(YC4)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. PFReplace the lift sensor2.
PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-71
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1100 PF lift motor 1 error Paper feeder lift Check that the cassette base can be
(large capacity feeder) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
After cassette 3 is inserted, mechanism replace.
PF lift sensor 1 does not turn
PF Lift motor1 1. Check that the cassette base has been
on within 23 s. This error is
ascended.
detected 5 times successively.
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.) are not unusually loaded and, if
During driving the motor, the necessary, replace.
lift overcurrent protective 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
monitor signal is detected for firmly connected and, if necessary,
200 ms or more 5 times suc- connect the connector all the way in.
cessively. However, the first 1 PF Lift motor 1 and PF main PWB (YC7)
s after PF lift motor 1 is turned 4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
on is excluded from detection. grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the PF lift motor1.
PF Lift sensor1 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
PF Lift sensor 1 and PF main PWB
(YC5)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the PF lift sensor1.
PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-72
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1110 PF lift motor 2 error Paper feeder lift Check that the cassette base can be
(large capacity feeder) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
After cassette 4 is inserted, mechanism replace.
PF lift sensor 2 does not turn
PF Lift motor 2 1. Check that the cassette base has been
on within 23 s. This error is
ascended.
detected 5 times successively.
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.) are not unusually loaded and, if
During driving the motor, the necessary, replace.
lift overcurrent protective 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
monitor signal is detected for firmly connected and, if necessary,
200 ms or more 5 times suc- connect the connector all the way in.
cessively. However, the first 1 PF Lift motor 2 and PF main PWB (YC7)
s after PF lift motor 2 is turned 4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
on is excluded from detection. grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the PF Lift motor2.
PF Lift sensor2 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
PF Lift sensor 2 and PF main PWB
(YC4)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the PF Lift sensor 2.
PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-73
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1140 SD lift motor error Paper feeder lift Check that the cassette base can be
(side deck) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
After cassette 5 is inserted, mechanism replace.
SD lift sensor does not turn on
SD Lift motor 1. Check that the cassette base has been
within 30 s.
ascended.
The lock signal of the motor is
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
detected continuously for 200
ms. are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
SD Lift motor and SD main PWB (YC8)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the SD Lift motor.
SD Lift sensor 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
SD Lift sensor and SD main PWB (YC5)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the SD Lift sensor.
SD main PWB Replace the SD main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1250 SM multi feed sensor com- Side multi tray Check the wiring connection status with the
munication error (side multi main unit and, if necessary, try connecting it
tray) again.
A communication error is SM main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
detected 3 times in succes- firmly connected and, if necessary,
sion.
connect the connector all the way in.
SM main PWB (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC19)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-74
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1350 SM multi feed sensor error SM multi feed 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
(side multi tray) sensor positioned.
The SM multi feed sensor has 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
detected multi feeding 5 times firmly connected and, if necessary,
successively. connect the connector all the way in.
SM multi feed sensor and SM main
PWB (YC11)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the SM multi feed sensor.
SM main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1400 Rotary guide motor error Rotary guide motor 1. Check the rotary guide and drive gear
The guide sensor is not can rotate or they are not unusually
detected to be on at the home loaded and, if necessary, replace.
position detection with the 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
rotary guide for three times in firmly connected and, if necessary,
a row. connect the connector all the way in.
Rotary guide motor and BR PWB (YC5)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the rotary guide motor.
BR PWB Replace the BR PWB.
1410 Rotary de-curler error Rotary de-curler 1. Check the rotary de-curler and drive
If the de-curler won’t turn On/ motor gear can rotate or they are not unusually
Off despite it has been acti- loaded and, if necessary, replace.
vated for 400 steps during 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
waiting for the de-curler sen- firmly connected and, if necessary,
sor to be On/Off three times in connect the connector all the way in.
a row.
Rotary de-curler motor and BR PWB
(YC5)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the rotary de-curler motor.
BR PWB Replace the BR PWB.
1450 SM multi feed sensor SM multi feed 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
backup error sensor firmly connected and, if necessary,
(side multi tray) connect the connector all the way in.
When writing the data, read SM multi feed sensor and SM main
and write data does not match PWB (YC11)
3 times in succession. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
Deleting a block has failed
grounded, replace the wiring.
three times in a row.
3. Replace the SM multi feed sensor.
Writing won’t complete in 200
ms after writing has com- SM main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
menced. service manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-75
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1800 Paper feeder communica- Paper feeder Check the wiring connection status with the
tion error main unit and, if necessary, try connecting it
A communication error from again.
paper feeder is detected 10 PF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
times in succession. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
PF main PWB (YC13) and Engine PWB
(YC19)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1810 Side multi tray communica- Side multi tray Check the wiring connection status with the
tion error main unit and, if necessary, try connecting it
A communication error from again.
side multi tray is detected 10 SM main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
times in succession. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
SM main PWB (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC19)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
Engine PWB Check the engine software and upgrade to
the latest, if necessary. Replace the engine
PWB (see page 1-5-91).
SM main PWB Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-76
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1820 Side paper feeder communi- Side paper feeder Check the wiring connection status with the
cation error main unit and, if necessary, try connecting it
A communication error from again.
paper feeder is detected 10 SM main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
times in succession. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
SM main PWB (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC19)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
PF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
PF main PWB (YC13) and SM main
PWB (YC4)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1900 Paper feeder EEPROM error PF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
When writing the data, read (EEPROM) firmly connected and, if necessary,
and write data does not match connect the connector all the way in.
3 times in succession. 2. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1910 Side multi tray EEPROM SM main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error (EEPROM) firmly connected and, if necessary,
When writing the data, read connect the connector all the way in.
and write data does not match 2. Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the
3 times in succession. service manual for the paper feeder).
1920 Side paper feeder EEPROM PF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
When writing the data, read connect the connector all the way in.
and write data does not match 2. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
3 times in succession. service manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-77
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
1950 Intermediate transfer belt Transfer belt sen- 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
unit EEPROM error sor firmly connected and, if necessary,
No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in.
the device in reading/writing Engine PWB (YC27) and RFID PWB
for 5 ms or more and this (4P connector)
problem is repeated 5 times (Check wirings on the RFID side since
successively.
the signal line for the intermediate
Mismatch of reading data from
transfer belt sensor EEPROM on the
2 locations occurs 8 times
engine PWB and the signal line for the
successively.
Mismatch between writing toner container RFID are the same.)
data and reading data occurs Intermediate transfer belt unit and
8 times successively. Engine PWB (YC3)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Intermediate transfer belt
unit (see page 1-5-69).
2101 Developer motor K error Developer unit K 1. Check that the developer waste lock has
After developer motor K is been released and, if not, release the
driven, the ready signal does lock (see page 1-2-25).
not turn to L within 5 s. 2. Check that the gears and spiral screw of
After developer motor K is sta- the developer unit are not damaged.
bilized, the ready signal is at 3. Confirm that the developer roller can
the H level for 5 s continu-
rotate.
ously.
4. If it won't rotate, replace the developer
unit (see page 1-5-63).
Developer motor K 1. To check the motor operation, execute
DLP(K) by U030 (see page 1-3-34).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer motor K and Motor control
PWB (YC7)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Developer motor K.
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB. 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-78
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2102 Developer motor C error Developer unit C 1. Check that the developer waste lock has
After developer motor C is been released and, if not, release the
driven, the ready signal does lock (see page 1-2-25).
not turn to L within 5 s. 2. Check that the gears and spiral screw of
After developer motor C is the developer unit are not damaged.
stabilized, the ready signal is 3. Confirm that the developer roller can
at the H level for 5 s continu-
rotate.
ously.
4. If it won't rotate, replace the developer
unit (see page 1-5-63).
Developer motor C 1. To check the motor operation, execute
DLP(C) by U030 (see page 1-3-34).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer motor C and Motor control
PWB (YC7)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Developer motor C.
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB. 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-79
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2103 Developer motor M error Developer unit M 1. Check that the developer waste lock has
After developer motor M is been released and, if not, release the
driven, the ready signal does lock (see page 1-2-25).
not turn to L within 5 s. 2. Check that the gears and spiral screw of
After developer motor M is the developer unit are not damaged.
stabilized, the ready signal is 3. Confirm that the developer roller can
at the H level for 5 s continu-
rotate.
ously.
4. If it won't rotate, replace the developer
unit (see page 1-5-63).
Developer motor M 1. To check the motor operation, execute
DLP(M) by U030 (see page 1-3-34).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer motor M and Motor control
PWB (YC7)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Developer motor M.
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB. 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-80
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2104 Developer motor Y error Developer unit Y 1. Check that the developer waste lock has
After developer motor Y is been released and, if not, release the
driven, the ready signal does lock (see page 1-2-25).
not turn to L within 5 s. 2. Check that the gears and spiral screw of
After developer motor Y is sta- the developer unit are not damaged.
bilized, the ready signal is at 3. Confirm that the developer roller can
the H level for 5 s continu-
rotate.
ously.
4. If it won't rotate, replace the developer
unit (see page 1-5-63).
Developer motor Y 1. To check the motor operation, execute
DLP(Y) by U030 (see page 1-3-34).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer motor Y and Motor control
PWB (YC7)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Developer motor Y.
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB. 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-81
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2201 Drum motor K steady-state Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Meand (transfer
error Motor) and check that the drum motor
The motor revolution fluctu- can rotate (see page 1-3-34).
ates more than +/-6.2% of the 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
normal revolution for 5s con- are not unusually loaded and, if neces-
tinuously, after the drum motor sary, replace.
K has stabilized. The counter 3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
achieved by timer capture is can rotate.
less than 2200 in 10 times in a 4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit.
row. (see page 1-5-63)
Drum motor K 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor K and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the drum motor K (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-82
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2202 Drum motor C steady-state Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Meand (transfer
error Motor) and check that the drum motor
The motor revolution fluctu- can rotate (see page 1-3-34).
ates more than +/-6.2% of the 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
normal revolution for 5s con- are not unusually loaded and, if neces-
tinuously, after the drum motor sary, replace.
C has stabilized. The counter 3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
achieved by timer capture is can rotate.
less than 2200 in 10 times in a 4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit.
row. (see page 1-5-63)
Drum motor C 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor C and Motor control PWB
(YC4)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor C (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-83
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2203 Drum motor M steady-state Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Meand (transfer
error Motor) and check that the drum motor
The motor revolution fluctu- can rotate (see page 1-3-34).
ates more than +/-6.2% of the 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
normal revolution for 5s con- are not unusually loaded and, if
tinuously, after the drum motor necessary, replace.
M has stabilized. The counter 3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
achieved by timer capture is can rotate.
less than 2200 in 10 times in a 4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
row.
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor M 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor M and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor M (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-84
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2204 Drum motor Y steady-state Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor).
The motor revolution fluctu- (see page 1-3-34).
ates more than +/-6.2% of the 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
normal revolution for 5s con- are not unusually loaded and, if neces-
tinuously, after the drum motor sary, replace.
Y has stabilized. The counter 3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
achieved by timer capture is can rotate.
less than 2200 in 10 times in a 4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
row.
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor Y 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor Y and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor Y (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-85
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2211 Drum motor K startup error Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
Drum motor K is not stabilized U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor).
within 5 s since the motor is (see page 1-3-34).
activated. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Decrease Vpp using U100.
Change “set ac gain” of U100 from Auto
to mode1. (see page 1-3-75)
4. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
5. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor K 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor K and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor K (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-86
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2212 Drum motor C startup error Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
Drum motor C is not stabilized U030 Belt Mea nd (transfer motor).
within 5 s since the motor is (see page 1-3-34).
activated. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Decrease Vpp using U100.
Change “set ac gain” of U100 from Auto
to mode1. (see page 1-3-75)
4. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
5. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor C 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor C and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor C (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-87
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2213 Drum motor M startup error Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
Drum motor M is not stabilized U030 Belt Mea nd (transfer motor).
within 5 s since the motor is (see page 1-3-34).
activated. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Decrease Vpp using U100.
Change “set ac gain” of U100 from Auto
to mode1. (see page 1-3-75)
4. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
5. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor M 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor M and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor M (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-88
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2214 Drum motor Y startup error Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
Drum motor Y is not stabilized Belt Mean (transfer motor) by U030
within 5 s since the motor is motor operation check
activated. (see page 1-3-34).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Decrease Vpp using U100.
Change set ac gain of U100 from Auto to
mode1. (see page 1-3-75)
4. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
5. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor Y 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor Y and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor Y (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-89
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2231 Drum motor K sub sensor Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor).
No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-34).
sor for 100 ms continuously. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor K 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor K and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor K (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-90
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2232 Drum motor C main sensor Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor).
No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-34).
sor for 100 ms continuously. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor C 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor C and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor C (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-91
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2233 Drum motor M main sensor Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor).
No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-34).
sor for 100 ms continuously. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor M 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor M and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor M (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-92
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2234 Drum motor Y main sensor Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
error Belt Mean (transfer motor) by U030
No signal is input to the sen- motor operation check
sor for 100 ms continuously. (see page 1-3-34).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor Y 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor Y and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor Y (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-93
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2241 Drum motor K sub sensor Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor).
No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-34).
sor for 100 ms continuously. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor K 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor K and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor K (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-94
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2242 Drum motor C sub sensor Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor).
No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-34).
sor for 100 ms continuously. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor C 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor C and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor C (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-95
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2243 Drum motor M sub sensor Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor).
No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-34).
sor for 100 ms continuously. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor M 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor M and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor M (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-96
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2244 Drum motor Y sub sensor Drum unit 1. To check the motor operation, execute
error Belt Mean (transfer motor) by U030
No signal is input to the sen- motor operation check
sor for 100 ms continuously. (see page 1-3-34).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-63).
Drum motor Y 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Drum motor Y and Motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Drum motor Y (see page 1-
5-111).
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-97
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2300 Fuser motor error Fuser motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute
After fuser motor is driven, the U030 Fuser (fuser motor)
ready signal does not turn to L (see page 1-3-34).
within 2 s. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
After fuser motor is stabilized, are not unusually loaded and, if
the ready signal is at the H necessary, replace.
level for 1 s continuously.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser motor and Feed PWB 1(YC18)
Feed PWB 1(YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC6)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the fuser motor (see page 1-5-
117).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Feed PWB 1 Replace the Feed PWB 1.
Fuser unit Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-75).
2500 Paper feed motor error Paper feed motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute
After paper feed motor is U030 Feed (paper feed motor) (see
driven, the ready signal does page 1-3-34).
not turn to L within 2 s. 2. Check the paper feed roller and drive
After paper feed motor is sta- gear can rotate or they are not unusually
bilized, the ready signal is at loaded and, if necessary, replace.
the H level for 1 s continu-
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
ously.
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Paper feed motor and Feed PWB
2(YC2)
Feed PWB 2(YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC4)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the paper feed motor.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-98
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2600 PF paper feed motor error PF paper feed 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe-
(large capacity feeder) motor cute U247 LCF- Motor ON (see page 1-
After PF paper feed motor is 3-149).
driven, the ready signal does 2. Check the paper feed roller and drive
not turn to L within 2 s. gear can rotate or they are not unusually
loaded and, if necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB
(YC16)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the paper feed motor.
PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
2610 PF paper feed motor error PF paper feed 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe-
(paper feeder) motor cute U247 2PF - Motor ON (see page 1-
After PF paper feed motor is 3-149).
driven, the ready signal does 2. Check the paper feed roller and drive
not turn to L within 2 s. gear can rotate or they are not unusually
loaded and, if necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB
(YC16)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the paper feed motor.
PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-99
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2640 SD paper feed motor error SD paper feed 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe-
(side deck) motor cute U247 Side deck- Motor ON (see
After SD paper feed motor is page 1-3-149).
driven, the ready signal does 2. Check the paper feed roller and drive
not turn to L within 2 s. gear can rotate or they are not unusually
loaded and, if necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
SD paper feed motor and SD main PWB
(YC16)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the SD paper feed motor.
SD main PWB Replace the SD main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
2650 SM paper feed motor error SM paper feed 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe-
(side multi tray) motor cute U247 SMT- Motor ON (see page 1-
After SM paper feed motor is 3-149).
driven, the ready signal does 2. Check the paper feed roller and drive
not turn to L within 2 s. gear can rotate or they are not unusually
loaded and, if necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
SM paper feed motor and SM main PWB
(YC5)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the SM paper feed motor.
SM main PWB Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-100
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2660 PF paper feed motor error PF paper feed 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe-
(side large capacity feeder) motor cute U247 Side LCF - Motor ON (see
After PF paper feed motor is page 1-3-149).
driven, the ready signal does 2. Check the paper feed roller and drive
not turn to L within 2 s. gear can rotate or they are not unusually
loaded and, if necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB
(YC16)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the PF paper feed motor.
PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
2670 PF paper feed motor error PF paper feed 1. Execute Side 2PF - Motor ON of U247
(side paper feeder) motor feed unit operation check (see page 1-3-
After PF paper feed motor is 149).
driven, the ready signal does 2. Check the paper feed roller and drive
not turn to L within 2 s. gear can rotate or they are not unusually
loaded and, if necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB
(YC16)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the PF paper feed motor.
PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).
1-4-101
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2700 3-color release motor error Color release 1. To check the motor operation, execute
When the color release motor motor U30 CMY Release (see page 1-3-34).
is driven, the color release Color release sen- 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
sensor does not turn on/off for sor firmly connected and, if necessary,
5 s. (Intermediate connect the connector all the way in.
transfer belt unit) Intermediate transfer belt unit and
Engine PWB (YC3)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Intermediate transfer belt
unit (see page 1-5-69).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
2730 Secondary transfer release Transfer release 1. To check the motor operation, execute
motor error motor U030 Press Release (see page 1-3-34).
When the transfer release 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
motor is driven, the transfer are not unusually loaded and, if
release sensor does not turn necessary, replace.
on/off for 5 s. 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Transfer release motor and relay PWB
(YC14)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Transfer release motor.
Transfer release 1. When abnormal noise is observed at the
sensor execution of Press Release of U030
motor operation check.
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
board are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
4. Replace the Transfer release motor.
1-4-102
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2730 Paper conveying 1. The main-unit access drawer of the
unit paper conveying unit has no foreign
objects adhered or no distorted pins
and, if necessary, repair.
2. Check the paper conveying unit is firmly
closed.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Relay PWB (YC1) and Feed PWB
1(YC14)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the paper conveying unit and
execute U052 (see page 1-3-47).
Feed PWB 1 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC6)
2. Check that the IC on the feed circuit
PWB1 is not damaged (by an
overcurrent or foreign object) and, if
necessary, replace.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-103
2N3/2N2-3
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2760 Transfer motor startup error Transfer motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute
Transfer motor is not stabi- U030 Belt Meand (see page 1-3-34).
lized within 5 s since the 2. Rotate the drive gear, the belt and the
motor is activated. roller by the hand and check that they
are not unusually loaded.
3. Clean the Intermediate transfer belt unit.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Transfer motor and Feed PWB 1 (YC13)
Feed PWB 1(YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC5)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the Transfer motor.
Feed PWB 1 Replace the Feed PWB 1.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
2770 Intermediate transfer belt Intermediate trans- 1. Check that the Intermediate transfer belt
meandering correction fer belt unit unit has been properly installed so that
error the intermediate belt unit waste toner
If the intermediate transfer shutter won’t be derailed when the belt
belt position detecting sensor unit is strongly inserted.
has derived an incorrect 2. Reinstall the intermediate transfer belt
value.
unit (Insert slowly all the way in).
3. Run U469 Belt Position with B/W and
confirm “angle” (position of belt) is within
the range (6 to 26) (see page 1-3-206).
4. Check that the main unit is placed
perfectly horizontal.
5. Replace the intermediate transfer belt
unit (see page 1-5-69).
Transfer belt 1. Clean the toner off of the sensor and its
sensor (Intermedi- proximity using a blower.
ate transfer belt 2. Check the sensor actuator are correctly
unit) positioned.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-104
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2780 Intermediate transfer belt Transfer belt skew 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
skew correction sensor sensor firmly connected and, if necessary,
error (Intermediate connect the connector all the way in.
An abnormal value is detected transfer belt unit) intermediate transfer belt unit and
to transfer skew sensor. Engine PWB (YC3)
2. Replace the intermediate transfer belt
unit (see page 1-5-69).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
2790 Intermediate transfer belt Transfer belt skew 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
skew correction motor error motor firmly connected and, if necessary,
When the transfer skew motor connect the connector all the way in.
is driven, timeouts (300 ms) intermediate transfer belt unit and
were detected twice in a row. Engine PWB (YC3)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the intermediate transfer belt
unit (see page 1-5-69).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-105
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2810 Inner waste toner motor Waste toner box 1. Rotate the waste toner spiral by the
error hand and check that they are not
Initialized when an error is unusually loaded.
constantly observed for 2 sec- 2. If the spiral won’t rotate, replace the
onds after the inner waste waste toner tank.
toner motor is activated.
An error is detected twice for Waste toner motor
1. Rotate the drive gear by the hand and
2.5 seconds after rebooting. check that they are not unusually
The lock detect signal won’t loaded.
be H level three times in a row 2. Clean the drive gears and the axle
within 200 ms at 1.25 ms holder.
cycles after the inner waste 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
toner motor has been driven. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Waste toner motor and Front PWB
(YC16)
Front PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC7)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the waste toner motor.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
2820 Intermediate transfer belt Transfer motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute
motor steady-state error U030 Belt Meand (see page 1-3-34).
After transfer motor is stabi- 2. Rotate the roller, driving gear by the
lized, the ready signal is at the hand and check that they are not
H level for 5 s continuously. unusually loaded.
The counter value obtained by 3. Clean the intermediate transfer belt unit.
timer capture is lower than
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
2200 for 10 times in a row.
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Transfer motor and Feed PWB 1(YC13)
Feed PWB 1(YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC5)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the Transfer motor.
Feed PWB 1 Replace the Feed PWB 1.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-106
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2840 Intermediate transfer belt Transfer cleaning 1. Rotate the roller and the drive gear by
cleaning motor error motor the hand and check that they are not
After transfer cleaning motor unusually loaded.
is driven, the ready signal 2. Check if the waste toner is remaining
won’t be L lebel within 2 s. inside the cleaning unit without being
After transfer cleaning motor disposed of.
is stabilized, the ready signal
3. Clean inside the cleaning unit.
is at the H level for 1 s contin-
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
uously.
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Transfer cleaning motor and Engine
PWB (YC3)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the transfer cleaning motor.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
2850 Intermediate transfer belt Transfer motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute
sensor error U030 Belt Meand (see page 1-3-34).
The signal is not received for 2. Rotate the roller, driving gear by the
100 ms in succession. hand and check that they are not
unusually loaded.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Transfer motor and Feed PWB 1(YC13)
Feed PWB 1(YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC6)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Transfer motor.
Feed PWB 1 Replace the Feed PWB 1.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-107
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
2860 Transfer belt sub sensor Transfer belt 1. To check the motor operation, execute
error sensor U030 Belt Meand (see page 1-3-34).
The signal is not received for 2. Check that the drive roller for the sensor
100 ms in succession. pulse can be rotated.
3. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Transfer belt sensor and intermediate
transfer belt unit and Engine PWB (YC3)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the intermediate transfer belt
unit.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
2950 Motor control PWB commu- Motor control PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
nication error firmly connected and, if necessary,
A communication error from connect the connector all the way in.
the motor control PWB is Motor control PWB (YC3) and Engine
detected 10 times in succes- PWB (YC9)
sion. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Motor control PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-108
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
3100 Scanner carriage error The scanner mirror Check whether the scanner mirror frame has
1.The HP sensor won’t turn in frame is being been unlocked and unlock if necessary (see
a constant mode after the rel- locked after setup. page 1-2-25).
evant pulse has passed by
Scanner motor 1. To check the scanner motor, execute
during the HP sensor keeps
U073 (see page 1-3-67).
turning off at the initialization.
2. Move the scanner by the hand to check
2.The HP sensor won’t turn off
in a constant mode after the whether it is unusually difficult to move.
relevant pulse has passed by 3. Check that the optical wire rope is not
during the HP sensor keeps disengaged and engage the wire.
turning on at the initialization. 4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
3.The PI sensor has not firmly connected and, if necessary,
changed its status in a con- connect the connector all the way in.
stant speed mode during the Scanner motor and ISC PWB (YC5)
stop processing operation of ISC PWB (YC3) and Main PWB (YC11)
the HP at the initialization. 5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
4.The PI sensor has not
grounded, replace the wiring.
changed its status in a con-
6. Replace the scanner motor.
stant speed mode during the
PI sensor is turned off at the Home position 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
end of scanning. sensor positioned.
If an error has been observed 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
with either of 1 through 4 firmly connected and, if necessary,
above, the error is observed connect the connector all the way in.
at an initialization after a retry. Home position sensor and ISC PWB
(YC8)
3. Replace the home position sensor.
ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB and execute U411
(see page 1-3-174).
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
1-4-109
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
3210 CIS lamp error CIS 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
When input value at the time Release (see page 1-3-225).
of CIS illumination does not 2. Execute CCD of U061 lamp check (see
exceed the threshold value page 1-3-56).
between 5 s. 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CIS and DPSHD PWB (YC2)
DPSHD PWB (YC3) and DP relay PWB
(YC2)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the CIS and execute U091 and
U411 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174).
DPSHD PWB Replace the DPSHD PWB.
DP relay PWB Replace the DP relay PWB.
3220 CCD lamp activation error CIS 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
The threshold is calculated for Release (see page 1-3-225).
colors at initialization and the 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
pixel which does not exceed firmly connected and, if necessary,
that value is greater than
connect the connector all the way in.
1000.
LED lamp PWB and ISC PWB (YC6)
CCD PWB (YC2) and ISC PWB (YC9)
ISC PWB (YC3) and Main PWB (YC11)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. If the LED lamp won’t light, replace the
LED PWB and execut U411 (see page
1-3-174).
ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB and execute U411
(see page 1-3-174).
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
1-4-110
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
3300 Optical system (AGC) error LED lamp PWB 1. To check the lamp, execute U061 CCD
One of the gains is FF or 0x89 (see page 1-3-56).
during the CCD lamp AGC is 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
being processed. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
LED lamp PWB and ISC PWB (YC6)
CCD PWB (YC2) and ISC PWB (YC9)
ISC PWB (YC3) and Main PWB (YC11)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. If the LED lamp won’t light, replace the
LED PWB and execut U411 (see page
1-3-174).
CCD PWB Replace the ISU and execute U411 (see
page 1-3-174).
ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB and execute U411
(see page 1-3-174).
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
3310 CIS AGC error CIS 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
After AGC, correct input is not Release (see page 1-3-225).
obtained at CIS. 2. To check the lamp, execute U061 CCD
(see page 1-3-56).
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DP CIS and DPSHD PWB (YC2)
DPSHD PWB (YC3) and DP relay PWB
(YC2)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the CIS and execute U091 and
U411 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174).
DPSHD PWB Replace the DPSHD PWB.
3500 Communication error ISC PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
between scanner and ASIC firmly connected and, if necessary,
An error code is detected. connect the connector all the way in.
ISC PWB (YC3) and Main PWB (YC11)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the ISC PWB and execute
U411 (see page 1-3-174).
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-82).
1-4-111
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
3600 Scanner sequence error ISC PWB 1. Execute U021 memory initializing (see
An abnormal process has page 1-3-31).
occurred inside the program. 2. Replace the ISC PWB and execute
U411 (see page 1-3-174).
3700 Scanner device error CCD (ISU) Since the ISU is mounted with a CCD of
A CCD that does not fit the different type, install the ISU that matches
device has been attached. with the model.
3800 AFE error ISC PWB 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
When writing the data, read not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
and write data does not match all the way in.
3 times in succession. CCD PWB (YC2) and ISC PWB (YC9)
No response is received in 2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
100 ms from AEF. replace the FFC wiring.
3. Replace the ISC PWB and execute
U411 (see page 1-3-174).
CCD PWB Replace the ISU PWB and execute U411
(see page 1-3-174).
3900 Backup memory read/write Backup memory 1. Turn the main power switch off and after
error (ISC PWB) (ISC PWB) 5 seconds, turn it on.
Read and write data does not 2. Replace the ISC PWB and execute
match. U411 (see page 1-3-174).
4001 Polygon motor K synchroni- Polygon motor K 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
zation error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary,
After polygon motor K is connect the connector all the way in.
driven, the ready signal does Polygon motor K and LSU relay PWB
not turn to L within 30 s. (YC4)
The polygon motor speed LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
won’t stabilize within 10 s.
(YC12)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-112
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
4002 Polygon motor C synchroni- Polygon motor C 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
zation error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary,
After polygon motor C is connect the connector all the way in.
driven, the ready signal does Polygon motor C and LSU relay PWB
not turn to L within 30 s. (YC9)
The polygon motor speed LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
won’t stabilize within 10 s.
(YC12)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4003 Polygon motor M synchro- Polygon motor M 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
nization error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary,
After polygon motor M is connect the connector all the way in.
driven, the ready signal does Polygon motor M and LSU relay PWB
not turn to L within 30 s. (YC7)
The polygon motor speed LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
won’t stabilize within 10 s.
(YC12)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4004 Polygon motor Y synchroni- Polygon motor Y 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
zation error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary,
After polygon motor Y is connect the connector all the way in.
driven, the ready signal does Polygon motor Y and LSU relay PWB
not turn to L within 30 s. (YC11)
The polygon motor speed LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
won’t stabilize within 10 s.
(YC12)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-113
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
4011 Polygon motor K steady- Polygon motor K 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
state error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary,
After polygon motor K is stabi- connect the connector all the way in.
lized, the ready signal is at the Polygon motor K and LSU relay PWB
H level for 15 s continuously. (YC4)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4012 Polygon motor C steady- Polygon motor C 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
state error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary,
After polygon motor C is stabi- connect the connector all the way in.
lized, the ready signal is at the Polygon motor C and LSU relay PWB
H level for 15 s continuously. (YC9)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4013 Polygon motor M steady- Polygon motor M 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
state error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary,
After polygon motor M is sta- connect the connector all the way in.
bilized, the ready signal is at Polygon motor M and LSU relay PWB
the H level for 15 s continu- (YC7)
ously. LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB Check the engine software and upgrade to
the latest, if necessary.
Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-91).
1-4-114
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
4014 Polygon motor Y steady- Polygon motor Y 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
state error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary,
After polygon motor Y is stabi- connect the connector all the way in.
lized, the ready signal is at the Polygon motor Y and LSU relay PWB
H level for 15 s continuously. (YC11)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4101 BD initialization error K PD PWB K (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
After polygon motor K is not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
driven, the BD signal is not all the way in.
detected for 1 s. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC5)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
replace the FFC wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4102 BD initialization error C PD PWB C (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
After polygon motor C is not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
driven, the BD signal is not all the way in.
detected for 1 s. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC10)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
replace the FFC wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-115
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
4103 BD initialization error M PD PWB M (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
After polygon motor M is not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
driven, the BD signal is not all the way in.
detected for 1 s. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC8)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
replace the FFC wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4104 BD initialization error Y PD PWB Y (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
After polygon motor Y is not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
driven, the BD signal is not all the way in.
detected for 1 s. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC12)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
replace the FFC wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4201 BD steady-state error K PD PWB K (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
The BD signal is not detected. not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC5)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
shorted or grounded, replace the FFC
wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-116
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
4202 BD steady-state error C PD PWB C (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
The BD signal is not detected. not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC10)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
replace the FFC wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4203 BD steady-state error M PD PWB M (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
The BD signal is not detected. not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC8)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
replace the FFC wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4204 BD steady-state error Y PD PWB Y (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
The BD signal is not detected. not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC12)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
replace the FFC wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-117
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
4300 Polygon motor phase error Laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-
ASIC won’t settle in comple- 5-48).
tion of phase adjustment for 2 Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
s after a BD signal is to the latest, if necessary.
detected.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
4600 LSU cleaning motor error LSU cleaning 1. Execute LSU cleaning using
After LSU cleaning motor is motor Adjustment/Maintenance of the system
driven, the ready signal does menu.
not turn to L within 2 s. 2. Rotate the drive gear and the cleaning
After LSU cleaning motor is spiral by the hand and check that they
stabilized, the ready signal is are not unusually loaded, and replace if
at the H level for 1 s continu-
it is damaged.
ously.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
LSU cleaning motor and Engine PWB
(YC21)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the LSU cleaning motor.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-118
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
5101 Main high-voltage error K Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor
Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can
when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-34).
and verify if the difference of 2. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
the currents of 0 and step 2 is can rotate.
less than 42 (51 if lower high- 3. Check that the discharger lamp is
voltage board).
properly connected.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit.
Charger roller unit 1. Check that the high-voltage contacts are
not distorted or adhered with foreign
objects.
2. Reinstall the chrager roller unit.Or,
replace the charger roller unit (see page
1-5-66).
High voltage PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
1 firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
High voltage PWB 1(YC4) and Engine
PWB (YC17)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the High voltage PWB 1 (see
page 1-5-97).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-119
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
5102 Main high-voltage error C Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor
Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can
when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-34).
and verify if the difference of 2. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
the currents of 0 and step 2 is can rotate.
less than 42 (51 if lower high- 3. Check that the discharger lamp is
voltage board).
properly connected.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit.
Charger roller unit 1. Check that the high-voltage contacts are
not distorted or adhered with foreign
objects.
2. Reinstall the chrager roller unit.Or,
replace the charger roller unit (see page
1-5-66).
High voltage PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
1 firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
High voltage PWB 1(YC2) and Engine
PWB (YC16)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the High voltage PWB 1 (see
page 1-5-97).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-120
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
5103 Main high-voltage error M Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor
Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can
when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-34).
and verify if the difference of 2. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
the currents of 0 and step 2 is can rotate.
less than 42 (51 if lower high- 3. Check that the discharger lamp is
voltage board).
properly connected.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit.
Charger roller unit 1. Check that the high-voltage contacts are
not distorted or adhered with foreign
objects.
2. Reinstall the chrager roller unit.Or,
replace the charger roller unit (see page
1-5-66).
High voltage PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
1 firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
High voltage PWB 1(YC3) and Engine
PWB (YC17)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the High voltage PWB 1 (see
page 1-5-97).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-121
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
5104 Main high-voltage error Y Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor
Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can
when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-34).
and verify if the difference of 2. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
the currents of 0 and step 2 is can rotate.
less than 42 (51 if lower high- 3. Check that the discharger lamp is
voltage board).
properly connected.
4. If it won’t rotate, replace the drum unit.
Charger roller unit 1. Check that the high-voltage contacts are
not distorted or adhered with foreign
objects.
2. Reinstall the chrager roller unit.Or,
replace the charger roller unit (see page
1-5-63).
High voltage PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
1 firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
High voltage PWB 1(YC1) and Engine
PWB (YC16)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the High voltage PWB 1 (see
page 1-5-97).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-122
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6000 Broken fuser heater wire Fuser unit 1. Check that no paper jam is present.
Fuser center thermistor 1 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
does not reach 100° C/ 212 °F firmly connected and, if necessary,
even after 60 s during warm- connect the connector all the way in.
ing up. Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
The detected temperature of 3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
fuser center thermistor 1 does
grounded, replace the wiring.
not reach the specified tem-
4. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
perature (ready indication
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
temperature) for 420 s in
warming up after reached to (Deteriorated sensitivity due to the toner
100° C/ 212 °F. adhered to the center thermistor.)
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB(YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
48).
6020 Abnormally high fuser Cen- Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
ter thermistor 1 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary,
Fuser center thermistor 1 connect the connector all the way in.
detects a temperature higher Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
than 240°C/ 464°F for 1 s. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit (see page 1-5-
75).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-123
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6030 Broken fuser center therm- Fuser unit 1. Check that no paper jam is present.
istor 1 wire 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Input from fuser center therm- firmly connected and, if necessary,
istor 1 is 1010 or more (A/D connect the connector all the way in.
value) continuously for 1 s. Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
Verify if A/D read in the differ- 3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
ential output won’t change by
grounded, replace the wiring.
4 or more when it was turned
4. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
on for 10 seconds in a low-
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
temperature environment.
(Deteriorated sensitivity due to the toner
adhered to the center thermistor.)
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB(YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the Fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
1-4-124
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6040 Fuser heater error Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Input from fuser center therm- firmly connected and, if necessary,
istor 1 is abnormal value con- connect the connector all the way in.
tinuously for 1 s. Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
1-4-125
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6050 Abnormally low fuser center Power source 1. Check that the operating voltage falls
thermistor 1 temperature within +/-10%.
Fuser center thermistor 1 2. Check no voltage drop is caused. The
detects a temperature lower heater is deactivated at 70V or lower.
than 100°C/ 212°F for 1 s 3. Relocate the AC outlet that supplies
after warming up, during power.
ready or during print.
Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB(YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the Fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
1-4-126
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6100 Broken fuser heater wire Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Fuser press thermistor 5 won’t firmly connected and, if necessary,
reach the reference tempera- connect the connector all the way in.
ture in 480 s after shifting to Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
low power mode. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
6120 Abnormally high fuser Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
press thermistor 5 tempera- firmly connected and, if necessary,
ture connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser press thermistor 5 Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
detects a temperature higher 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
than 190°C/ 374°F for 1 s. grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-127
2N3/2N2-1
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6130 Broken fuser press thermis- Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
tor 5 wire firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
The input from the fuser press nect the connector all the way in.
thermistor 5 has been less Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
than 30°C/ 86°F (A/D: greater Fuser IH PWB(YC4)
thann992) for 60 seconds 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
continuously. grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB(YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
1-4-128
2N3/2N2-1
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6150 Abnormally low fuser press Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
thermistor 5 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary,
Fuser press thermistor 5 connect the connector all the way in.
detects a temperature lower Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
than 30°C/ 86°F for 1 s after 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
warming up. grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
1-4-129
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6200 Broken fuser edge heater Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
wire firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
Fuser edge thermistor 2 does nect the connector all the way in.
not reach 100° C/ 212 °F even Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
after 60 s during warming up. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
The detected temperature of grounded, replace the wiring.
fuser edge thermistor 2 does 3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
not reach the specified tem- U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
perature (ready indication Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
temperature) for 420 s in
to the latest, if necessary.
warming up after reached to
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
100° C/ 212 °F.
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
1-4-130
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6220 Abnormally high fuser edge Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
thermistor 2 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary,
Fuser edge thermistor 2 connect the connector all the way in.
detects a temperature higher Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
than 240°C/ 464°F for 1 s. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
1-4-131
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6230 Broken fuser edge thermis- Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
tor 2 wire firmly connected and, if necessary,
The Input signal from the connect the connector all the way in.
fuser edge thermistor 2 is 992 Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
or more (A/D value) continu- 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
ously for 1 s when the temper- grounded, replace the wiring.
ature at the fuser edge
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
thermistor 2 is higher than
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
100°C/ 212°F during warming
up. Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
1-4-132
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6250 Abnormally low fuser edge Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
thermistor 2 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary,
Fuser edge thermistor 2 connect the connector all the way in.
detects a temperature lower Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
than 100°C/ 212°F for 1 s dur- 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
ing ready or print. grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
6320 Abnormally high fuser mid- Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
dle thermistor 3 tempera- firmly connected and, if necessary,
ture connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser middle thermistor 3 Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
detects a temperature higher 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
than 215°C/419°F for 1 s. grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-133
2N3/2N2-1
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6330 Broken fuser middle therm- Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
istor 3 wire firmly connected and, if necessary,
Fuser middle thermistor 3 connect the connector all the way in.
detects a temperature lower Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
than 20°C/ 68°F continuously 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
for 1 s grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB(YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
6520 Abnormally high fuser Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
thermistor 4 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary,
Fuser thermistor 4 detects a connect the connector all the way in.
temperature higher than Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
215°C/ 419°F for 1 s. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
1-4-134
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6530 Broken fuser thermistor 4 Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
wire firmly connected and, if necessary,
Fuser thermistor 4 detects a connect the connector all the way in.
temperature lower than 20°C/ Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
68°F continuously for 1 s 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
1-4-135
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6600 Fuser belt rotation error Fuser motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute
A belt rotating pulse is not U030 Fuser (see page 1-3-34).
received for 1 s. 2. Check that the drive gear can rotate and
(Engine CPU) not heavily loaded and, if necessary,
apply grease to the axle holder and
gears.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser motor and Feed PWB (YC18)
and Engine PWB (YC6)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the fuser motor (see page 1-5-
117).
Fuser belt sensor 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-136
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6610 Fuser release sensor error Fuser release 1. To check the motor operation, execute
The fusing pressure release motor U030 Fuser Release (see page 1-3-34).
sensor won’t send an off sig- 2. Check that the drive gear can be rotated
nal in 5 seconds since a pres- and the separation is possible.
sure release instruction is 3. If the motor won’t rotate, confirm that the
given for the fusing pressure wiring connector is firmly connected
motor.
and, if necessary, connect the connector
The fusing pressure release
all the way in.
sensor won’t send an on sig-
Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
nal in 5 seconds since a pres-
sure instruction is given for 4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
the fusing pressure motor. grounded, replace the wiring.
. 5. Replace the fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Fuser release 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
sensor positioned.
2. Check that the sensor is not
contaminated or damaged.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
6620 IH core motor error IH core motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute
When the IH core motor is U030 Fuser Release (see page 1-3-34).
driven, the IH core sensor 2. Check that the drive gear can be rotated
does not turn off for 5 s. and the separation is possible.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
IH core motor and front PWB (YC10)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC7)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
IH core sensor 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Check that the sensor is not
contaminated or damaged.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-137
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6710 Fuser IH PWB CPU reset Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
Watch doc timer has been connect the connector all the way in.
overflowed. Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-138
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6720 Fuser IH belt rotation error Fuser motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute
While driving, the pulse count U030 Fuser (see page 1-3-34).
is less than 3 for 2 seconds 2. Check that the drive gear can rotate and
during the input to the rotation not heavily loaded and, if necessary,
pulse signal is 200 msec. apply grease to the axle holder and
gears.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser motor and Feed PWB (YC18)
and Engine PWB (YC6)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the fuser motor (see page 1-5-
117).
Fuser belt sensor 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser unit and execute
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-113).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB(YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-139
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6730 Abnormally high fuser IH Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
PWB temperature 1 (IGBT1) firmly connected and, if necessary,
The input detect temperature connect the connector all the way in.
is higher than 115°C/ 221 °F. Fuser IH PWB ( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
6740 Abnormally high fuser IH Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
PWB temperature 2 (IGBT2) firmly connected and, if necessary,
The input detect temperature connect the connector all the way in.
is higher than 115°C/ 221 °F. Fuser IH PWB ( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-140
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6750 Fuser IH output over-cur- Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
rent error firmly connected and, if necessary,
The output current of IH CPU connect the connector all the way in.
is higher than 110 A for 10 ms Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
in succession. (YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
6760 Fuser IH input over-current Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
The input current of IH CPU is connect the connector all the way in.
higher than 20A (100V/120V), Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
10A (200V) for 100 ms in suc- (YC26)
cession. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-141
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6770 Fuser IH low electric power Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
Less than 0.6 times of the pre- connect the connector all the way in.
set power is detected for 120 Fuser unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC6)
ms in succession after the IH 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
heater remote has turned on. grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Fuser IH unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC9
and 10)
Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the fuser IH unit (see page 1-5-
77).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-142
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6910 Engine software ready error Engine PWB 1. Turn the main power switch off and after
The device won’t engage in 5 seconds, turn it on.
ready state in 60 minutes after 2. Reinstall the engine software.
warming-up has began. 3. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
(A previous timeout process 91).
has not been cancelled.)
6920 Fuser front fan motor error Fuser front fan 1. To check the fan motor operation, exe-
When the fuser front fan motor cute U037 IH Coil (see page 1-3-43).
motor is driven, alarm signal is 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
detected for 5 s continuously. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser front fan motor and Front PWB
(YC4)
Front PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC7)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the fuser front fan motor.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
6930 Fuser rear fan motor error Fuser rear fan 1. To check the fan motor operation, exe-
When the fuser rear fan motor motor cute U037 Fuser Cooling (see page 1-3-
is driven, alarm signal is 43).
detected for 5 s continuously. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser rear fan motor and Engine PWB
(YC26)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the fuser rear fan motor.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-143
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6940 IH PWB cooling fan motor IH fan motor 1. To check the fan motor operation, exe-
error cute U037 IH PWB (see page 1-3-43).
When the IH fan motor is 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
driven, the alarm signal is firmly connected and, if necessary,
detected for 5 s continuously. connect the connector all the way in.
IH fan motor and Feed PWB 1(YC11)
Feed PWB 1(YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC5)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the IH fan motor.
Feed PWB 1 Replace the Feed PWB1.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-144
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6950 Fuser IH PWB communica- Power source PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
tion error firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
No response is received in 30 nect the connector all the way in.
ms since a command is sent Power source PWB (YC9) and Feed
to IHCPU. PWB 1(YC4)
A checksum error is detected Power source PWB (YC3) and Fuser IH
10 times in succession. PWB (YC1)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. If the +24V output is not given by the
power source PWB (YC9), replace the
power source PWB.
Feed PWB 1 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Power source PWB (YC3) and Fuser IH
PWB (YC1)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. If the +24V output is not given by the
feed PWB1 (YC27), replace the feed
PWB1.
Fuser IH PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Fuser IH PWB(YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC26)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Fuser IH PWB (see page 1-
5-103).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
6960 Current PWB error Current PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
The power current is greater firmly connected and, if necessary,
than 1A for 5 seconds contin- connect the connector all the way in.
uously despite that 500W was Current PWB(YC17) and Feed PWB2
indicated as the fuser power (YC13)
during power-up. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Current PWB.
1-4-145
2N3/2N2-1
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
6990 Fuser power supply incom- Differences in When this has happened after initialization
patibility settings after using U021, make settings identical with the
Information won’t match initialization voltages on the IH PWB using U169 (see
between the engine backup page 1-3-31,1-3-114).
and the fuser IH PWB.
Fuser IH PWB Replace with a fuser IH PWB specifically
designed with the standard voltage (see
page 1-5-103).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7001 Toner motor K error Toner container K 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner
During the toner motor is container can be rotated by the hand.
driven, an event in which a 2. Check for broken gears and replace if
locking was detected for 5 any.
times in 200 ms intervals has
Toner motor K 1. Draw out the toner container and
occurred in 30 sets.
execute U135 to check the toner motor
operation (see page 1-3-99).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner motor K and Engine PWB (YC27)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Toner motor K.
Screw sensor K 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Screw sensor K and Engine PWB
(YC27)
3. Replace the screw sensor K.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-146
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7002 Toner motor C error Toner container C 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner
During the toner motor is container can be rotated by the hand.
driven, an event in which a 2. Check for broken gears and replace if
locking was detected for 5 any.
times in 200 ms intervals has
Toner motor C 1. Draw out the toner container and
occurred in 30 sets.
execute U135 to check the toner motor
operation (see page 1-3-99).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner motor C and Engine PWB (YC27)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Toner motor C.
Screw sensor C 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Screw sensor C and Engine PWB
(YC27)
3. Replace the screw sensor C.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-147
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7003 Toner motor M error Toner container M 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner
During the toner motor is container can be rotated by the hand.
driven, an event in which a 2. Check for broken gears and replace if
locking was detected for 5 any.
times in 200 ms intervals has
Toner motor M 1. Draw out the toner container and
occurred in 30 sets.
execute U135 to check the toner motor
operation (see page 1-3-99).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner motor M and Engine PWB (YC27)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Toner motor M.
Screw sensor M 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Screw sensor M and Engine PWB
(YC27)
3. Replace the screw sensor M.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-148
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7004 Toner motor Y error Toner container Y 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner
During the toner motor is container can be rotated by the hand.
driven, an event in which a 1. Check for broken gears and replace if
locking was detected for 5 any.
times in 200 ms intervals has
Toner motor Y 1. Draw out the toner container and
occurred in 30 sets.
execute U135 to check the toner motor
operation (see page 1-3-99).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner motor Y and Engine PWB (YC27)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Toner motor Y.
Screw sensor Y 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Screw sensor Y and Engine PWB
(YC27)
3. Replace the screw sensor Y.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-149
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7101 Toner sensor K error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the
Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if
less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup. not, release the outlet (see page 1-2-25).
for 3 s. Toner sensor K 1. Check the toner sensor output by U155
(see page 1-3-108).
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner sensor K and Front PWB (YC9)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Check that the gears of the developer
unit K are not damaged and the spiral
can rotate.
5. Replace the Developer unit K (see page
1-5-63).
Toner motor K 1. Draw out the toner container and
execute U135 to check the toner motor
operation (see page 1-3-99).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner motor K and Engine PWB (YC27)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Toner motor K.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-150
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7102 Toner sensor C error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the
Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if
less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup. not, release the outlet (see page 1-2-25).
for 3 s. Toner sensor C 1. Check the toner sensor output by U155
(see page 1-3-108).
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner sensor C and Front PWB (YC13)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Check that the gears of the developer
unit C are not damaged and the spiral
can rotate.
5. Replace the Developer unit C (see page
1-5-63).
Toner motor C 1. Draw out the toner container and
execute U135 to check the toner motor
operation (see page 1-3-99).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner motor C and Engine PWB (YC27)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Toner motor C.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-151
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7103 Toner sensor M error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the
Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if
less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup. not, release the outlet (see page 1-2-25).
for 3 s. Toner sensor M 1. Check the toner sensor output by U155
(see page 1-3-108).
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner sensor M and Front PWB (YC11)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Check that the gears of the developer
unit M are not damaged and the spiral
can rotate.
5. Replace the Developer unit M (see page
1-5-63).
Toner motor M 1. Draw out the toner container and
execute U135 to check the toner motor
operation (see page 1-3-99).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner motor M and and Engine PWB
(YC27)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Toner motor M.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-152
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7104 Toner sensor Y error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the
Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if
less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup. not, release the outlet (see page 1-2-25).
for 3 s. Toner sensor Y 1. Check the toner sensor output by U155
(see page 1-3-108).
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner sensor Y and Front PWB (YC15)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Check that the gears of the developer
unit Y are not damaged and the spiral
can rotate.
5. Replace the Developer unit Y (see page
1-5-63).
Toner motor Y 1. Draw out the toner container and
execute U135 to check the toner motor
operation (see page 1-3-99).
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner motor Y and Engine PWB (YC27)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the Toner motor Y.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-153
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7200 Broken outer temperature Outer temperature 1. Confirm Ext/Int is displayed by U139
sensor 2 wire sensor 2 temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-100).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Outer temperature sensor 2 and Front
PWB (YC19)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the outer temperature sensor 2.
Front PWB Replace the front PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7210 Short-circuited outer tem- Outer temperature 1. Confirm Ext/Int is displayed by U139
perature sensor 2 sensor 2 temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-100).
less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Outer temperature sensor 2 and Front
PWB (YC19)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the outer temperature sensor 2.
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-154
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7221 Broken LSU thermistor K LSU thermistor K 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139
wire temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-100).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC5)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB REPLACE the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7222 Broken LSU thermistor C LSU thermistor C 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139
wire temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-100).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC10)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB REPLACE the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-155
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7223 Broken LSU thermistor M LSU thermistor M 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139
wire temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-100).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC8)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB REPLACE the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7224 Broken LSU thermistor Y LSU thermistor Y 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139
wire temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-100).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC12)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB REPLACE the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-156
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7231 Short-circuited LSU therm- LSU thermistor K 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139
istor K temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-100).
less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC5)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB Replace the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7232 Short-circuited LSU therm- LSU thermistor C 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139
istor C temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-100).
less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC10)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB REPLACE the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-157
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7233 Short-circuited LSU therm- LSU thermistor M 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139
istor M temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-100).
less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC8)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB REPLACE the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7234 Short-circuited LSU therm- LSU thermistor Y 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139
istor Y temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-100).
less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC12)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC12)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB REPLACE the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-158
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7241 Broken developer thermis- Developer 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by
tor K wire thermistor K U139 temperature and humidity (see
The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-100).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer unit K and Front PWB (YC9)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Developer unit K (see page
1-5-63).
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7242 Broken developer thermis- Developer 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by
tor C wire thermistor C U139 temperature and humidity (see
The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-100).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer unit C and Front PWB (YC13)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Developer unit C (see page
1-5-63).
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-159
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7243 Broken developer thermis- Developer 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by
tor M wire thermistor M U139 temperature and humidity (see
The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-100).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer unit M and Front PWB (YC11)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Developer unit M (see page
1-5-63).
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7244 Broken developer thermis- Developer 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by
tor Y wire thermistor Y U139 temperature and humidity (see
The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-100).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer unit Y and Front PWB (YC15)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Developer unit Y (see page
1-5-63).
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-160
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7251 Short-circuited developer Developer 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by
thermistor K thermistor K U139 temperature and humidity (see
The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-100).
less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer unit K and Front PWB (YC9)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Developer unit K (see page
1-5-63).
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7252 Short-circuited developer Developer 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by
thermistor C thermistor C U139 temperature and humidity (see
The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-100).
less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Developer unit C and Front PWB (YC13)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Developer unit C (see page
1-5-63).
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-161
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7253 Short-circuited developer Developer 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by
thermistor M thermistor M U139 temperature and humidity (see
The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-100).
less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Developer unit M and Front PWB (YC11)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Developer unit M (see page
1-5-63).
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7254 Short-circuited developer Developer 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by
thermistor Y wire thermistor Y U139 temperature and humidity (see
The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-100).
less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer unit Y and Front PWB (YC15)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Developer unit Y (see page
1-5-63).
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-162
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7301 Toner hopper motor K error Toner hopper 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
During the Toner hopper motor K are not unusually loaded and, if neces-
motor K is driven, an event in sary, replace.
which a locking was detected 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
for 15 times in 200 ms inter- firmly connected and, if necessary,
vals. connect the connector all the way in.
Toner hopper motor K and retainer PWB
(YC4)
Retainer PWB (YC3) and front PWB
(YC6)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC7)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Toner motor K.
Screw sensor K 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Screw sensor K and Engine PWB
(YC27)
3. Replace the screw sensor K.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-163
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7302 Toner hopper motor C error Toner hopper 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
During the Toner hopper motor C are not unusually loaded and, if neces-
motor C is driven, an event in sary, replace.
which a locking was detected 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
for 15 times in 200 ms inter- firmly connected and, if necessary,
vals. connect the connector all the way in.
Toner hopper motor C and retainer PWB
(YC4)
Retainer PWB (YC3) and front PWB
(YC6)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC7)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Toner motor C.
Screw sensor C 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Screw sensor C and Engine PWB
(YC27)
3. Replace the screw sensor C.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-164
2N3/2N2-1
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7303 Toner hopper motor M error Toner hopper 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
During the Toner hopper motor M are not unusually loaded and, if neces-
motor M is driven, an event in sary, replace.
which a locking was detected 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
for 15 times in 200 ms inter- firmly connected and, if necessary,
vals. connect the connector all the way in.
Toner hopper motor M and retainer PWB
(YC4)
Retainer PWB (YC3) and front PWB
(YC6)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC7)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Toner motor M.
Screw sensor M 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Screw sensor M and Engine PWB
(YC27)
3. Replace the screw sensor M.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-165
2N3/2N2-1
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7304 Toner hopper motor Y error Toner hopper 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
During the Toner hopper motor Y are not unusually loaded and, if neces-
motor Y is driven, an event in sary, replace.
which a locking was detected 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
for 15 times in 200 ms inter- firmly connected and, if necessary,
vals. connect the connector all the way in.
Toner hopper motor Y and retainer PWB
(YC4)
Retainer PWB (YC3) and front PWB
(YC6)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC7)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Toner motor Y.
Screw sensor Y 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Screw sensor Y and Engine PWB
(YC27)
3. Replace the screw sensor Y.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7460 Developer shutter error The developer Release the developer shutter (see page 1-
Power is turned on while the shutter has been 2-25).
developer shutter is locked. locked.
Developer shutter 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
sensor firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Developer shutter sensor and front PWB
(YC5)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC7)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the developer shutter sensor.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-166
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7470 Toner fan motor 1 error Toner fan motor 1 1. To check the fan motor operation, exe-
The toner fan motor 1 signal cute U037 Toner (see page 1-3-43).
has been detected as uncon- 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
nected at power up. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner fan motor 1 and Engine PWB
(YC26)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Toner fan motor 1.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7480 Toner fan motor 2 error Toner fan motor 2 1. To check the fan motor operation, exe-
The toner fan motor 2 signal cute U037 Toner (see page 1-3-43).
has been detected as uncon- 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
nected at power up. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Toner fan motor 2 and Engine PWB
(YC26)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the Toner fan motor 2.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-167
2N3/2N2-1
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7601 ID sensor 1 error ID sensor1 (front) 1. Execute U464 Calib for setting ID
An abnormal value is detected compensation operation and check the
in the input data to ID sensor displayed values by U465 Boas Calib for
1. ID compensation reference. (see page
Dark potential error 1-3-198,1-3-202).
FrontDarkP and FrontDarkS 2. Detach the imtermediate intermediate
are greater than 0.80V. transfer belt unit and clean the ID sensor
Light potential error on its surface.
FrontBrightS is smaller than 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
FrontDarkS. firmly connected and, if necessary,
FrontBrightP is smaller than connect the connector all the way in.
[FrontDarkP + 0.5V]. ID sensor 1 (front) and Feed PWB
1(YC10)
Feed PWB 1(YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC6)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
Feed PWB 1 Replace the Feed PWB 1.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7602 ID sensor 2 error ID sensor 2 (rear) 1. Execute U464 Calib for setting ID
Dark potential error compensation operation and check the
RearDarkP and RearDarkS displayed values by U465 Boas Calib for
are greater than 0.80V. ID compensation reference. (see page
Light potential error 1-3-198,1-3-202).
RearBrightS is smaller than 2. Detach the imtermediate intermediate
RearDarkS.
transfer belt unit and clean the ID sensor
RearBrightP is smaller than
on its surface.
[RearDarkP + 0.5V].
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
ID sensor2 (rear) and Feed PWB
1(YC10)
Feed PWB 1(YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC6)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
Feed PWB 1 Replace the Feed PWB 1.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-168
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7800 Broken outer temperature Outer temperature 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
sensor 1 wire sensor 1 firmly connected and, if necessary,
The device did not respond for connect the connector all the way in.
more than 5 ms during Outer temperature sensor 1 and Front
reading, in 5 times. PWB (YC16)
Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC10)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Outer temperature sensor
1.
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7901 Drum K EEPROM error DR PWB-K 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
No response is issued from firmly connected and, if necessary,
the device in reading/writing connect the connector all the way in.
for 5 ms or more and this DR PWB-K and Front PWB (YC7)
problem is repeated five times Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
successively. (YC10)
Mismatch of reading data from
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
two locations occurs 8 times
grounded, replace the wiring.
successively.
3. Replace the Drum unit K (see page 1-5-
Mismatch between writing
63).
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively. Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-169
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7902 Drum C EEPROM error DR PWB- C 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
No response is issued from firmly connected and, if necessary,
the device in reading/writing connect the connector all the way in.
for 5 ms or more and this DR PWB- C and Front PWB (YC12)
problem is repeated five times Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
successively. (YC10)
Mismatch of reading data from
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
two locations occurs 8 times
grounded, replace the wiring.
successively.
3. Replace the Drum unit C (see page 1-5-
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs 63).
8 times successively. Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7903 Drum M EEPROM error DR PWB- M 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
No response is issued from firmly connected and, if necessary,
the device in reading/writing connect the connector all the way in.
for 5 ms or more and this DR PWB- M and Front PWB (YC10)
problem is repeated five times Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
successively. (YC10)
Mismatch of reading data from
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
two locations occurs 8 times
grounded, replace the wiring.
successively.
3. Replace the Drum unit M (see page 1-5-
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs 63).
8 times successively. Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7904 Drum Y EEPROM error DRPWB- Y 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
No response is issued from firmly connected and, if necessary,
the device in reading/writing connect the connector all the way in.
for 5 ms or more and this DRPWB- Y and Front PWB (YC14)
problem is repeated five times Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
successively. (YC10)
Mismatch of reading data from
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
two locations occurs 8 times
grounded, replace the wiring.
successively.
3. Replace the Drum unit Y (see page 1-5-
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs 63).
8 times successively. Front PWB Replace the front PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-170
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7911 Developer unit K EEPROM Developer unit K 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in.
the device in reading/writing Developer unit K and Front PWB (YC9)
for 5 ms or more and this Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
problem is repeated five times (YC10)
successively.
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
Mismatch of reading data from
grounded, replace the wiring.
two locations occurs 8 times
3. Replace the Developer unit K (see page
successively.
Mismatch between writing 1-5-63).
data and reading data occurs Front PWB Replace the front PWB
8 times successively. Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7912 Developer unit C EEPROM Developer unit C 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in.
the device in reading/writing Developer unit C and Front PWB (YC13)
for 5 ms or more and this Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
problem is repeated five times (YC10)
successively.
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
Mismatch of reading data from
grounded, replace the wiring.
two locations occurs 8 times
3. Replace the Developer unit C (see page
successively.
1-5-63).
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs Front PWB Replace the front PWB
8 times successively. Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-171
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7913 Developer unit M EEPROM Developer unit M 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in.
the device in reading/writing Developer unit M and Front PWB (YC11)
for 5 ms or more and this Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
problem is repeated five times (YC10)
successively.
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
Mismatch of reading data from
grounded, replace the wiring.
two locations occurs 8 times
3. Replace the Developer unit M (see page
successively.
Mismatch between writing 1-5-63).
data and reading data occurs Front PWB Replace the front PWB
8 times successively. Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7914 Developer unit Y EEPROM Developer unit Y 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in.
the device in reading/writing Developer unit Y and Front PWB (YC15)
for 5 ms or more and this Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
problem is repeated five times (YC10)
successively.
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
Mismatch of reading data from
grounded, replace the wiring.
two locations occurs 8 times
3. Replace the Developer unit Y (see page
successively.
Mismatch between writing 1-5-63).
data and reading data occurs Front PWB Replace the front PWB
8 times successively. Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-172
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7941 Laser scanner unit K APC PWB K 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
EEPROM error not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
Mismatch of reading data from all the way in.
two locations occurs 8 times APC PWB K and LSU relay PWB (YC5)
successively. LSU relay PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
Mismatch between writing (YC11)
data and reading data occurs
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
8 times successively.
shorted or grounded, replace the FFC
wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB Replace the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7942 Laser scanner unit C APC PWB C 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
EEPROM error not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
Mismatch of reading data from all the way in.
two locations occurs 8 times APC PWB C and LSU relay PWB
successively. (YC10)
Mismatch between writing LSU relay PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
data and reading data occurs
(YC11)
8 times successively.
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
shorted or grounded, replace the FFC
wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB Replace the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-173
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
7943 Laser scanner unit M APC PWB M 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
EEPROM error not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
Mismatch of reading data from all the way in.
two locations occurs 8 times APC PWB M and LSU relay PWB (YC8)
successively. LSU relay PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
Mismatch between writing (YC11)
data and reading data occurs
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
8 times successively.
shorted or grounded, replace the FFC
wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB Replace the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
7944 Laser scanner unit Y APC PWB Y 1. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
EEPROM error not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
Mismatch of reading data from all the way in.
two locations occurs 8 times APC PWB Y and LSU relay PWB
successively. (YC12)
Mismatch between writing LSU relay PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
data and reading data occurs
(YC11)
8 times successively.
2. If the FFC wiring is disconnected,
shorted or grounded, replace the FFC
wiring.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-48).
LSU relay PWB Replace the LSU relay PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
8000 Finisher incompatible The finisher is The finisher must be installed with the
detection error installed with a devices to which it is compatible.
The finisher has been device to which it is
installed with a device to incompatible.
which it is incompatible.
1-4-174
2N3/2N2-1
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8010 Punch motor error 1 Punch motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check
When the punch motor is the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
driven, punch home position 135).
sensor does not turn on within 2. Manipulate the punch up and down to
200 ms. check it can smoothly move up and
down.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the punch cam.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch motor and Punch PWB (YC4)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the punch motor.
Punch home 1. Execute U241 Punch - Punch HP to
position sensor check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch home position sensor and Punch
PWB (YC8)
4. Replace the Punch home position
sensor.
Punch PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB
(YC7)
2. Replace the punch PWB.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-175
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8020 Punch motor error 2 Punch motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check
Home position is not obtained the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
in 3 s after home position is 135).
initialized or in standby. 2. Manipulate the punch up and down to
check it can smoothly move up and
down.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the punch cam.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch motor and Punch PWB (YC4)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the punch motor.
Punch PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB
(YC7)
2. Replace the punch PWB.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-176
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8030 Punch motor error 3 Punch motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check
Home position does not turn the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
from On to Off in 50 ms after 135).
home position has been ini- 2. Manipulate the punch up and down to
tialized. check it can smoothly move up and
down.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the punch cam.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch motor and Punch PWB (YC4)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the punch motor.
Punch PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB
(YC7)
2. Replace the punch PWB.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-177
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8090 DF paddle motor error DF paddle motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Beat to check the
When the DF paddle motor is finisher operation (see page 1-3-135).
driven, DF paddle sensor 2. Check that the paddle can rotate.
does not turn on within 1 s. 3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the paddle.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF paddle motor and DF main PWB
(YC15)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF paddle motor.
DF paddle sensor 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Bundle Eject
HP to check the finisher switch (see
page 1-3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
board are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF paddle sensor and DF main PWB
(YC22)
4. Replace the DF paddle sensor.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-178
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8100 DF eject release motor error DF eject release 1. Execute Motor - Eject Unlock (Full) of
When the DF eject release motor U240 finisher operation check (see page
motor is driven, DF bundle DF bundle 1-3-135).
discharge sensor does not discharge unit 2. Check that the eject guide of the
turn on within 1 s. sensor process tray is opened and, if not, cor-
rect the guide.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the eject guide.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF bundle discharge unit sensor and DF
main PWB (YC22)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF eject release motor.
DF bundle 1. Execute Finisher - Bundle Eject HP of
discharge unit U241 finisher switch check (see page 1-
sensor 3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
board are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF bundle discharge unit sensor and DF
main PWB (YC22)
4. Replace the DF bundle discharge unit
sensor.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-179
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8110 DF shift motor 1 error DF shift motor 1 1. Execute U240 Motor - Sort Test to check
DF shift sensor 1 won’t turn on [front] the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
when it has travelled 160 mm 135).
after DF shift motor 1 is 2. Manipulate the front shift guide back and
driven. forth to check that it is smoothly
operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the front shift guide.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF shift motor 1 and DF main PWB
(YC14)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF shift motor 1
DF shift sensor 1 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Shift Front HP
[front] to check the finisher switch (see page 1-
3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF shift sensor 1 and DF main PWB
(YC23)
4. Replace the DF shift sensor 1.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-180
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8120 DF shift motor 2 error DF shift motor 2 1. Execute U240 Motor - Sort Test to check
DF shift sensor 1 won’t turn on [rear] the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
when it has travelled 160 mm 135).
after DF shift motor 1 is 2. Manipulate the rear shift guide back and
driven. forth to check it is smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the rear shift guide.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF shift motor 2 and DF main PWB
(YC14)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF shift motor 2.
DF shift set sensor 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Shift Trail HP to
2 [rear] check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF shift sensor 2 and DF main PWB
(YC23)
4. Replace the DF shift set sensor2.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-181
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8130 DF shift release motor error DF shift release 1. Check that cancelling the maintenance
When the DF shift release motor mode after executing U240 Motor - Sort
motor is driven, DF shift for the finisher operation check lets the
release sensor does not turn rear and forth cursors return to the home
on within 1 s. position (see page 1-3-135).
2. Manipulate the shift guide back and forth
to check it is smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the shift guide front and rear.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF shift release motor and DF main
PWB (YC23)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF shift release motor.
DF shift release 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Shift Unlock HP
sensor to check the finisher switch (see page 1-
3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF shift release sensor and DF main
PWB (YC23)
4. Replace the DF shift release sensor.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-182
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8140 DF tray motor error 1 DF tray motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the
When the main tray has finisher operation (see page 1-3-135).
ascended, DF tray sensor 1 or 2. Manipulate the main tray up and down to
DF tray upper surface sensor check it is smoothly operable.
does not turn on within 20 s. 3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the main tray.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF tray motor and DF Main
PWB(YC16)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF tray motor.
DF tray sensor 1 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Tray U-Limit,
DF tray upper Tray Top to check the finisher switch
surface sensor (see page 1-3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF tray sensor 1 and DF Main
PWB(YC22)
DF tray upper surface sensor and DF
Main PWB(YC21,YC13)
4. Replace the DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray
upper surface sensor.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-183
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8150 DF tray motor error 2 DF tray motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the
When the main tray has finisher operation (see page 1-3-135).
descended, DF tray sensor 1 2. Manipulate the main tray up and down to
or DF tray upper surface sen- check it is smoothly operable.
sor does not turn off within 5s. 3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the main tray.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB
(YC16)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF tray motor.
DF tray sensor 1 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Tray U-Limit,
DF tray upper Tray Top to check the finisher switch
surface sensor (see page 1-3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB
(YC22)
DF tray upper surface sensor and DF
main PWB (YC21,YC13)
4. Replace the DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray
upper surface sensor.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-184
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8160 DF tray motor error 3 DF tray motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the
When the main tray has finisher operation (see page 1-3-135).
descended, DF tray sensor 4 2. Manipulate the main tray up and down to
does not turn on within 20 s. check it is smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the main tray.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB
(YC16)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF tray motor.
DF tray sensor 4 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Tray Middle to
check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF tray sensor 4 and DF main PWB
(YC23)
4. Replace the DF tray sensor 4.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-185
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8170 DF side registration motor 1 DF side registration 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to
error 1 motor 1 check the finisher operation (see page
When initial operation, DF 1-3-135).
side registration sensor 1 2. Manipulate the front side registration
does not turn on within 3 s. guide to check it is smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the front side registration guide.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF side registration motor 1 and DF
main PWB (YC15)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF side registration motor
1.
DF side registration 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Width Front to
sensor 1 check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF side registration sensor 1. and DF
main PWB (YC22)
4. Replace the DF side registration sensor
1.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-186
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8180 DF side registration motor 1 DF side registration 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to
error 2 motor 1 check the finisher operation (see page
JAM6810 (jam in front of width 1-3-135).
alignment) is detected twice. 2. Manipulate the front side registration
guide back and forth to check it is
smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the front side registration guide.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF side registration motor 1 and DF
main PWB (YC15)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF side registration motor
1.
DF side registration 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Width Front to
sensor 1. check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF side registration sensor 1. and DF
main PWB (YC22)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the DF side registration sensor
1.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-187
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8190 DF side registration motor 2 DF side registration 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to
error 1 motor 2 check the finisher operation (see page
When initial operation, DF 1-3-135).
side registration sensor 2 2. Manipulate the rear side registration
does not turn on within 3 s. guide back and forth to check it is
smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the rear side registration guide.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF side registration motor 2 and DF
main PWB (YC15)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF side registration motor
2.
DF side registration 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Width tail HP
sensor 2 to check the finisher switch (see page 1-
3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF side registration sensor 2 and DF
main PWB (YC22)
4. Replace the DF side registration sensor
2.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-188
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8200 DF side registration motor 2 DF side registration 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to
error 2 motor 2 check the finisher operation (see page
JAM6910 (jam in rear of width 1-3-135).
alignment) is detected twice. 2. Manipulate the rear side registration
guide back and forth to check it is
smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the rear side registration guide.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF side registration motor 2 and DF
main PWB (YC15)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF side registration motor
2.
DF side registration 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Width tail HP
sensor 2 to check the finisher switch (see page 1-
3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF side registration sensor 2 and DF
main PWB (YC22)
4. Replace the DF side registration sensor
2.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-189
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8210 DF slide motor error DF slide motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Staple Move to
When initial operation, DF sta- check the finisher operation (see page
ple sensor does not turn on 1-3-135).
within 3 s. 2. Manipulate the staple unit back and forth
to check it is smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the staple unit.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF slide motor and DF main PWB
(YC12)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the DF slide motor.
DF staple sensor 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Width Staple
HP to check the finisher switch (see
page 1-3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF staple sensor and DF main PWB
(YC22)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the DF staple sensor.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-190
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8230 DF staple motor error 1 DF staple motor 1. Remove the staple unit and check that
Staple JAM (DF) has been stapling is possible without a jam.
detected twice in a row. (The 2. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
second JAM detection not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
condition fullfilled with the all the way in.
home position did not Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC17)
detected in 600 ms after the 3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
motor was driven.) grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the staple unit. (Refer to the
service manual for the document
finisher).
DF staple sensor Replace the staple unit.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
8240 DF staple motor error 2 DF staple motor 1. Remove the staple unit and check that
Staple JAM (DF) has been stapling is possible without a jam.
detected twice in a row. 2. Confirm that the FFC wiring connector is
(The second JAM detection not distorted and connect the FFC wiring
condition fullfilled with a lock all the way in.
detection signal maintained 1 Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC17)
V for 500 ms continuously,
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
while the stapler motor was
grounded, replace the wiring.
driven.)
4. Replace the staple unit. (Refer to the
service manual for the document
finisher).
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-191
2N3/2N2-3
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8260 DF middle motor home DF middle motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Middle(H)(L) (see
position error page 1-3-135).
DF paddle sensor is not 2. Check that the drive from the motor
turned on within 1s after
reaches the paddle.
driving the DF middle motor.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF middle motor and DF main PWB
(YC12)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the DF middle motor.
DF paddle sensor 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Lead Paddle to
check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DF paddle sensor and DF main PWB
(YC22)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the DF paddle sensor.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
8300 Center-folding unit commu- CF unit set switch 1. Execute U241 Booklet - Set to check the
nication error finisher switch (see page 1-3-137).
Communication with the cen- 2. Check that the switch and its mounting
ter-folding unit is not possible. bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF main PWB (YC7) and DF main PWB
(YC9)
4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the CF unit set switch.
CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).
1-4-192
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8310 CF side registration motor 2 CF side registration 1. Execute Motor - Width Test of U240
error motor 2 finisher operation check (see page 1-3-
When initial operation, CF 135).
side registration sensor 2 2. Manipulate the side registration upper
does not turn on within 1 s. guide back and forth to check it can
smoothly move back and forth.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the side registration upper
guide.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF side registration motor 2 and CF
main PWB (YC10)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the CF side registration motor.
CF side registration 1. Execute U241 Booklet - Width Up HP to
sensor 2 check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF side registration sensor 2 and CF
main PWB (YC20)
4. Replace the CF side registration sensor
2.
CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB
1-4-193
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8320 CF adjustment motor error CF adjustment 1. Execute U240 Motor - Bundle Up / Down
When initial operation, CF motor1,2 to check the finisher operation (see page
adjustment sensor does not 1-3-135).
turn on within 2.5 s. 2. Manipulate the fold moving belt up and
down to check it is smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the fold moving belt. (Check if
the belt is bent.)
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF adjustment motor 1,2 and CF main
PWB (YC10)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the CF adjustment motor1,2.
CF adjustment 1. Execute U241 Booklet - bundle Up /
sensor1,2 Down HP to check the finisher switch
(see page 1-3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF adjustment sensor 1,2 and CF main
PWB (YC20)
4. Replace the CF adjustment sensor1,2.
CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB.
1-4-194
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8330 CF blade motor error CF blade motor 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Blade to check
When initial operation, CF the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
blade sensor does not turn on 135).
within 1500 ms. 2. Manipulate the fold blade up and down
to check it is smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the fold blade.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF blade motor and CF main PWB
(YC15)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the CF blade motor.
CF blade sensor 1. Execute U241 Booklet - Blade HP to
check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF blade sensor and CF main PWB
(YC20)
4. Replace the CF blade sensor.
CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB
8340 CF staple motor error 1 CF staple motor 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Staple to check
Staple JAM (center-folding the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
unit) has been detected twice 135).
in a row. (The second JAM 2. Manipulate the staple up and down
detection condition fullfilled check it is smoothly operable.
with the home position did not 3. Check that the drive from the motor
detected in 600 ms after the
reaches the staple unit.
motor was driven.)
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF staple unit and CF main PWB
(YC13)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the CF staple motor.
CF staple sensor Replace the CF staple unit.
CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB.
1-4-195
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8350 CF side registration motor 1 CF side registration 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Width Test to
error motor 1 check the finisher operation (see page
When initial operation, CF 1-3-135).
side registration sensor 1 2. Manipulate the side registration lower
does not turn on within 1 s. guide back and forth to check it can
smoothly operable.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the side registration lower
guide.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF side registration motor 1 and CF
main PWB (YC10)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the CF side registration motor
1.
CF side registration 1. Execute U241 Booklet - Width Down HP
sensor 1 to check the finisher switch (see page 1-
3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF side registration sensor 1 and CF
main PWB (YC20)
4. Replace the CF side registration sensor
1.
CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB
1-4-196
2N3/2N2-3
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8360 CF main motor error CF main motor 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Folding to check
During driving the motor, the the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
lock signal is detected for 1 s 135).
continuously. 2. Manipulate the conveying roller to check
it can smoothly rotate.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the conveying roller.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
CF main motor and CF main PWB
(YC16)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the CF main motor.
CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB
1-4-197
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8410 Punch slide motor error 1 Punch slide motor 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Punch Move to
The punch slide sensor won’t check the finisher operation (see page
turn On when home position 1-3-135).
has been moved by 30 mm. 2. Manipulate the punch slide part of the
punch unit back and forth to check it can
smoothly move.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches punch area.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch slide motor and Punch PWB
(YC3)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the punch slide motor.
Punch slide sensor 1. Execute U241 Punch - Punch HP to
check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
135).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch slide sensor and Punch PWB
(YC6)
4. Replace the punch slide sensor.
Punch PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB
(YC7) (4000-sheet finisher)
2. Replace the punch PWB.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB
1-4-198
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8420 Punch slide motor error 2 Punch slide motor 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Punch Move to
In detection of paper edges, check the finisher operation (see page
the paper edge cannot be 1-3-135).
detected in 30 mm move. 2. Manipulate the punch slide part of the
punch unit back and forth to check it can
smoothly move.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches punch part.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch slide motor and Punch PWB
(YC3)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the punch slide motor.
Punch paper edge 1. Execute U241 Punch - Edge Face
sensor 1,2 1,2,3,4 to check the finisher switch (see
page 1-3-137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch paper edge sensor 1,2 and
Punch PWB (YC5,YC7)
4. Replace the punch paper edge sensor
1,2.
Punch PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB
(YC7) (4000-sheet finisher)
2. Replace the Punch PWB.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB
1-4-199
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8430 Punch unit communication Punch PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
Communication with the connect the connector all the way in.
punch unit is not possible. Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB
(YC7)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Punch PWB.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB
8500 Mailbox communication MB main PWB 1. Turn the main power switch off and after
error 5 seconds, turn it on.
Communication failed to be 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
established after the mailbox firmly connected and, if necessary,
was hooked up. connect the connector all the way in.
MB main PWB (YC3) and DF main PWB
(YC6)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the MB main PWB
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB
8510 MB conveying motor error 1 MB conveying 1. If the transfer roller won’t rotate
When initial operation, MB motor smoothly, repair its mechanism.
home position sensor does 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
not turn on within 5 s. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
MB conveying motor and MB main
PWB (YC5)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the MB conveying motor.
MB home position 1. Execute U241 Mail Box - Motor HP to
sensor check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
MB home position sensor and MB main
PWB (YC2)
4. Replace the MB home position sensor.
MB main PWB Replace the MB main PWB
1-4-200
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8520 MB conveying motor error 2 MB conveying 1. Execute Mail Box - Conv of U240
When standby operation, MB motor finisher operation check (see page 1-3-
home position sensor does 135).
not turn off within 1 s. 2. Manipulate the conveying roller of the
mailbox to check it can smoothly rotate.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the conveying roller.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
MB conveying motor and MB main
PWB (YC5)
5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
6. Replace the MB conveying motor.
MB home position 1. Execute U241 Mail Box - Motor HP to
sensor check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
137).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
MB home position sensor and MB main
PWB (YC2)
4. Replace the MB home position sensor.
MB main PWB Replace the MB main PWB
8800 Document finisher main DF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
program error firmly connected and, if necessary,
Document finisher main pro- connect the connector all the way in.
gram error at power up. DF main PWB (YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC18)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the DF main PWB
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-201
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
8900 Document finisher backup DF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
Read and write data does not connect the connector all the way in.
match 3 times in succession. DF main PWB (YC4) and Engine PWB
(YC18)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the DF main PWB
8930 Center-folding unit backup CF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
Read and write data does not connect the connector all the way in.
match 3 times in succession. CF main PWB (YC7) and DF main PWB
(YC9)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Install the EEPROM properly.
4. Replace the CF main PWB
9000 Document processor com- DP main PWB 1. Check that the versions of the main unit
munication error firmware and the DP firmware are
Communication with the docu- identical.
ment processor is not possi- 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
ble. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DP main PWB(YC1) and ISC
PWB(YC12)
ISC PWB (YC3) and Main PWB (YC11)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the DP main PWB
ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB.
9010 Coin vender communica- U206 setting Set maintenance mode U206 to off when a
tion error coin vender is not installed (see page 1-3-
A communication error from 125).
coin vender is detected 10 Coin vender control 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
times in succession. firmly connected and, if necessary,
PWB
connect the connector all the way in.
Coin vender control PWB and Engine
PWB (YC23)
2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
3. Replace the Coin vender control PWB.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
1-4-202
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
9040 DP lift motor going up error DP lift motor 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
When the DP lift motor is Release (see page 1-3-225).
driven, DP lift sensor 1 does 2. Execute U243 Lift Motor to check the DP
not turn on within 1500 pulse. motor operation (see page 1-3-140).
(Three recovery times.) 3. Check that the original document lift
The above has been detected guide can move upwards.
5 times.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
* : The number of detec-
firmly connected and, if necessary,
tion should be
connect the connector all the way in.
weighted with one for
the rise at job start and DP lift motor and DP MAIN PWB (YC5)
two for the irregular 5. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
rise during transport- grounded, replace the wiring.
ing. The accumulated 6. Replace the DP lift motor.
number must be DP lift sensor 1 1. Execute U244 LIFT L-Limit to check DP
cleared at completion switch (see page 1-3-141).
of a normal rise. The
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
default threshold is 5.
bracket are correctly positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DP lift sensor 1 and DP Main PWB
(YC4)
4. Replace the DP lift sensor 1.
DP Main PWB Replace the DP main PWB
1-4-203
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
9050 DP lift motor going down DP lift motor 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
error Release (see page 1-3-225).
When the DP lift motor is 2. Execute U243 Lift Motor to check the DP
driven, DP lift sensor 2 does motor operation (see page 1-3-140).
not turn on within 1500 pulse. 3. Check that the original document lift
(Three recovery times.) guide can move downwards.
The above has been detected
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
5 times.
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the DP lift motor.
DP lift sensor 2 1. Execute U244 LIFT L-Limit to check DP
switch (see page 1-3-141).
2. Confirm that the DP lift sensor 2 has
been firmly fitted.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DP lift sensor 2 and DP main PWB
(YC2)
4. Replace the DP lift sensor2.
DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB
9060 DP EEPROM error DP main PWB 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
Mismatch of reading data from Release (see page 1-3-225).
two locations occurs 3 times 2. Confirm that the EEPROM has been
successively. properly installed.
Mismatch between writing 3. Replace the DP main PWB
data and reading data occurs
3 times successively. Device damage of Contact the Service Support.
EEPROM
9070 Communication error DP SHD PWB 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
between DP and SHD Release (see page 1-3-225).
A communication error is 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
detected. firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DP SHD PWB (YC1) and DP main PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the DP SHD PWB.
1-4-204
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
9080 LED fault detection DP CIS 1. Execute CIS automatic original
A block is existent below a document alignment by U411 (see page
peak which was obtained by 1-3-174).
activating the LEDs in the four 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
CIS blocks at power on, which firmly connected and, if necessary,
is less than 80hex. connect the connector all the way in.
CIS and DP SHD PWB (YC2)
DP SHD PWB (YC1) and DP main PWB
(YC10)
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
4. Replace the CIS and execute U411.
DP SHD PWB Replace the DP SHD PWB.
9100 Coin vender control PWB Coin vender control Replace the coin mec.
error PWB
Communication error has
been detected at the coin mec
of the coin vender control
PWB.
9110 Coin vender rejector error Rejector 1. Check that the rejector is firmly installed
Communication error has and, if not, install firmly.
been detected in connection 2. Replace the rejector.
with the coin mec and the
rejector.
9120 Sensor error in coin vender Coin jam in the Check visually and remedy.
change (Yen 10) change tube
Change is empty despite Contact in the Check the connection of the empty change
change is enough. connector sensor.
Change empty Replace the coin mec.
sensor
Coin vender control Replace the coin mec.
PWB
9130 Sensor error in coin vender Coin jam in the Check visually and remedy.
change (Yen 50) change tube
Change is empty despite Contact in the Check the connection of the empty change
change is enough. connector sensor.
Change empty Replace the coin mec.
sensor
Coin vender control Replace the coin mec.
PWB
1-4-205
2N3/2N2-2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
9140 Sensor error in coin vender Coin jam in the Check visually and remedy.
change (Yen 100) change tube
Change is empty despite Contact in the Check the connection of the empty change
change is enough. connector sensor.
Change empty Replace the coin mec.
sensor
Coin vender control Replace the coin mec.
PWB
9150 Sensor error in coin vender Change tube Check no exchange jam is observed at the
change (Yen 500) outlet and, if necessary, repair it.
Change is empty despite Contact in the Check the connection of the empty change
change is enough. connector sensor.
Change empty Replace the coin mec.
sensor
Coin vender control Replace the coin mec.
PWB
9160 Coin vender pay-out error Pay-out motor Replace the coin mec.
Coin is paid out despite the
pay-out motor is determined
not active.
9170 Coin vender pay-out sensor Pay-out area Check no exchange jam is observed at the
error outlet and, if necessary, repair it.
Coin is paid out despite the Pay-out motor Replace the coin mec.
pay-out motor is determined
not active. Pay-out sensor Replace the coin mec.
1-4-206
2N3/2N2-2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
9500 ISC PWB error A Main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
ISC PWB firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Main PWB (YC25) and ISC PWB (YC4)
2. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-
82).
3. Replace the ISC PWB
4. Contact the Service Support.
9510 ISC PWB error B Main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
DP SHD PWB firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
DP relay PWB (YC2) and DP SHD PWB
(YC3)
2. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-
82).
3. Replace the DP SHD PWB.
4. Contact the Service Support.
9520 ISC PWB error C Main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
ISC PWB firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Main PWB (YC25) and ISC PWB (YC4)
2. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-
82).
3. Replace the ISC main PWB
4. Contact the Service Support.
9940 Confidential document Confidential 1. Check that the confidential document
guard uninstalled error document guard guard PWB is firmly installed and, if not,
The confidential document PWB install firmly.
guard PWB is removed while 2. Replace the confidential document
the confidential document guard PW.
guard PWB is valid.
9950 Confidential document Confidential 1. Reinsert the FFC connector if its
guard PWB error document guard connection is loose.
FPGA configuration error PWB 2. Replace the confidential document
CPU version information error guard PW.
This is caused when the PWB 3. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-
of a double-side scanning DP 82).
is connected, the confidential
guard PWB is inserted, and
the harness is not correctly
connected.
1-4-207
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
F000 Communication error Main PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
between main PWB and 5 seconds, then turn power on.
operation PWB 2. Check that the wirings and connetors
between the main circuit PWB and the
operation circuit PWB and between the
main circuit PWB and the HDD are
normal.
Main PWB (YC12,YC17,YC30) and
Operation PWB (YC1,YC2,YC3)
3. Check that the DDR memories in the
main circuit PWB are well conducted
and, if not, replace.
4. Execute U024 to initialize (FULL) the
HDD (see page 1-3-32).
5. Execute U021 to initialize memory. (see
page 1-3-31)
6. Replace the Main PWB.
7. Copy the log File saved in the HDD by
U964 in USB memory and contact the
service support (see page 1-3-237).
Operation PWB Replace the operation PWB (see page 1-5-
99).
F010 Main PWB checksum error Main PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
5 seconds, then turn power on.
2. If not corrected, replace the main PWB
(see page 1-5-82).
F040 Communication error Main PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
between Main PWB and 5 seconds, then turn power on.
Print engine 2. Repair or replace the wire from the
engine PWB, that may be grounded.
(Check short-circuit between 5V and
3.3V.)
3. Check that the FFC wire connecting
between the main PWB (YC3) and the
engine PWB (YC46) is normal and, if
necessary, re-insert.Or, replace the FFC
wire.
4. If not corrected, replace the main PWB
(see page 1-5-82).
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
91).
HDD Replace the HDD (see page 1-5-149).
1-4-208
2N3/2N2
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
F041 Communication error Main PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
between Main PWB and 5 seconds, then turn power on.
Scanner engine 2. Check that the wires between the main
PWB and the ISC PWB are normal.
3. If not corrected, replace the main PWB
(see page 1-5-82).
ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB.
F050 Print engine ROM check- Engine software Install the latest engine software.
sum error Engine PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
5 seconds, then turn power on.
2. Confirm that the EEPROM has been
properly installed.
3. If not corrected, Replace the engine
PWB (see page 1-5-91).
F051 Scanner engine ROM Scanner software Install the latest scanner software.
checksum error ISC PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
5 seconds, then turn power on.
2. Confirm that the EEPROM has been
properly installed.
3. If not corrected, Replace the ISC PWB.
F278 Power supply in drive sys- The main power Turn the main power swtch off and after 5
tem error switch was turned seconds, then turn power on.
off before the (Before turning power off, verify that the
power switch is power key has been pressed and the power
pressed. Shutdown indicator has gone off, then switch the main
due to a power power switch.)
failure
1-4-209
2N3/2N2-4
(3) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline
The document is subscribed to describe the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in
the
service manual. Please utilize it to refer to checking the factors.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on
or it frequently occurs.
It may be from the hardware factor while the error (Fxxx) is indicated.
Please initially check the following.
Check the DDR2 memory and neighboring parts:
Check the contact of YS1 or YS2 with the memory. Replace the memory if the error repeats.
Check the HDD if the error repeats after replacing the main board.
Take care, however, of handling the data when formatting or replacing the HDD.
Check the HDD: Replace the HDD if the error repeats after formatting the HDD.
1-4-210
2N3/2N2-4
No. Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2
1) Check connection of the harness (Panel to Main board), (Main board to HDD)
and connectors and check function.
2) Check contact of the DDR memory by detaching and reattaching. and check [Main - Panel Interface]
function. replace it if available and check function. *User data and installed Main bord:YC12, YC1,YC30
Lock-up at Welcome display
3) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) software is deleted if Panel board:YC1,YC2,YC3
- (The display unchages after 3
4) Execute the U021Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory executing the U024.
minutes 30 seconds or more)
and check function. Reinstallation is required. [Main - HDD]
5) Replace the panel board and check function. Main board:YC1,YC2
6) Replace the main board and check function.
7) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
[Main-Panel Interface]
1) Check connection of the harness (Panel to Main board), (Main board to HDD)
Mainboard: YC12,YC17,YC30
and connectors and check function.
Panel borad: YC1,YC2,YC3
CF000 appears in 3minutes 2) Check contact of the DDR memory by detaching and reattaching. and check
30 seconds after the function. replace it if available and check function.
If the LEDs are in the state
Welcome display continues 3) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F000 belwo when the F000 appears,
4) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
the DDR2 memory failure may
Panel㧙Main board and check function.
be the cause. Check contact of
communication error 5) Replace the main board and check function.
theYS1 or YS2 with the
6) Replace the Panel board and check function.
memory.
7) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
Memory LED turned on
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F10X 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at OS or and check function.
some of device drivers. 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F11X 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
[Main-Scan Interface]
Main board:YC11,YC25
1) Check connection of the harness (Scan/DP - Main board) and connectors and
ISC board:
check function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) [Main-DP relay Interface]
An error is detected at the 3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory (Check if the boards are firmly
F12X
Scan control section and check function. connected via the board-to-
4) Replace the Scan/DP board and check function. board connector.)
5) Replace the main board and check function. Main board:YC10
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division. DP relay board:YC4
1) Check connection of the harness (Panel - Main board) and connectors and
check function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
[Main-Panel Interface]
An error is detected at the 3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F13X Main board:YC12,YC17,YC30
Panel control section and check function.
Panel board:YC1,YC2,YC3
4) Replace the panel board and check function.
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Check connection of the harness (FAX - Main board) and connectors and check
function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F14A,F14F: KUIO error
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
Main board (USB hub)
and check function.
An error is detected at the
F14X 4) Execute the U671 Clear FAX back up data (FAX DIMM clear) and check
FAX control section [Main-KUIO Interface]
function. (Take cae of the received data since it is cleared)
Main board:YC8,YC9
5) Replace the FAX_DIMM and check function.
KUIO board:YC3,YC4
6) Replace the FAX board and check function.
7) Replace the main board and check function.
8) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Check connection of the harness (Authentication device - Main board) and
connectors and check function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
An error is detected at the
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory Authentication device: Card
F15X authentication device control
and check function. Reader, etc.
section
4) Replace the main board and check function.
5) Replace the HDD and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F17X
print data control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Check connection of the harness (Engine - Main board) and connectors and
check function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
[MainЊENGINE Interface]
An error is detected at the 3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F18X Main board:YC3
Video control secion and check function.
Engine board:YC46ޓorޓYC50
4) Replace the engine board and check function.
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F19X 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
OS or some of device drivers 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F1AX 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F1BX
Security management section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1-4-211
2N3/2N2-4
No. Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the *The F1C4 error appears
and check function.
F1CX File System management with the HDD security kit at
3) Replace the main board and check function.
section work.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
*The F1D4 error is RAM
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the allocation error.
and check function.
F1DX Image memory management ޓ1Check it with the U340
3) Replace the main board and check function.
section ޓ2Initialize the setting
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
valued with the U021
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F1EX
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F1FX
OS or some of device drivers 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F20X 5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F21X [DDR2 memory contact check]
1) Check contact of the DDR memory and check function.
Main board:YS1 or YS2
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
A certain part of the memory be
F22X 3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the faulty. The frequency of faiure
and check function.
Image processing section occurrence is dependent on the
4) Replace the main board and check function.
frequency of access to the
F23X 5) Replace the HDD and check function.
faulty bit. The ASIC may be
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
faulty if the memory is not
[DDR2 memory contact check]
1) Check contact of the DDR memory and check function. Main board:YS1 or YS2
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) *The F248 eror is printer A certain part of the memory be
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory process error. if it repeats faulty. The frequency of failure
An error is detected at the
F24X and check function. with a certain print data, occurrence is dependent on the
System management section
4) Replace the main board and check function. retrieve the capture data and frequency of access to the
5) Replace the HDD and check function. USBLOG. faulty bit. The ASIC may be
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division. faulty if the memory is not
sensitive.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the
and check function. *This may be owing to the
F25X Network management
3) Replace the main board and check function. users network environment.
section
4) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administratuve Division.
(or retrieve the packet capture data depending on the reult of analysis)
F26X 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F27X 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F28X
System management section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F29X 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F2AX 5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F2BX
F2CX 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F2DX 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F2EX An error is detected at the and check function.
F2FX Network control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F30X 4) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administratuve Division.
F31X (or retrieve the packet capture data depending on the reult of analysis)
F32X
1) Check connection of the harness (Scan/DP board - main board) and connectors
and check function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
An error is detected at the 3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F33X
Scan management section and check function.
4) Replace the Scan/DP board and check function.
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Check connection of the harness (Panel board - main board) and connectors
and check function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
An error is detected at the 3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F34X
Panel management section and check function.
4) Replace the panel board and check function
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F35X
Print control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F36X
Print management section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
and check function.
An error is detected at the F14A,F14F:KUIO error
3) Execute the U671 Clear FAX back up data (FAX DIMM clear) and check
F37X FAX management section Main board (USB hub)
function. (Take cae of the received data since it is cleared)
[Main-KUIO Interface]
4) Replace the FAX_DIMM and check function.
Main board: YC8,YC9
5) Replace the main board and check function.
KUIO board: YC3,YC4
6) Replace the HDD and check function.
7) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1-4-212
2N3/2N2-4
No. Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the
and check function.
F38X Authentication/permit
3) Replace the main board and check function.
management section
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F3AX
F3BX
F3CX
F3DX 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F3EX 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F3FX An error is detected at the and check function.
F40X Entity management section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F41X 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F42X 5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F43X
F44X
F45X
*The F46F is printer process
error. if it repeats with a
1) Replace the main board and check function.
An error is detected at the certain print data, retrieve
F46X 2) Retrieve the USBLOG
Print image process section the capture data and
(or retrieve the print capture data by case)
USBLOG.
F47X 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the
and check function.
F48X Image edit process control
3) Replace the main board and check function.
section
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F49X 5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F4AX 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
Print image process section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F4CX 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F4DX 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
Entity control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F4EX 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F4FX
Job control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F50X
FAX control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F51X 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F52X 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F53X An error is detected at the and check function.
F55X Job execution section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F56X 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F57X 5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F58X 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F59X
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F5AX
An error is detected at the and check function.
F5BX
Service management section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F5CX
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F5DX
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F5EX
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F5FX
Service execution section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the
and check function.
F60X Maintenance mode
3) Replace the main board and check function.
management section
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F61X
Report compiling section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F62X
Service execution section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1-4-213
2N3/2N2-4
No. Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the and check function.
F63X
Device control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F64X 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F65X An error is detected at the and check function.
F66X Print image process section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F67X 5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at the
and check function. *F684 is Overwrite error with
F68X Storage device control
3) Replace the main board and check function. the HDD security kit
section
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F69X 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F6AX An error is detected at the and check function.
F6BX HyPAS control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F6CX 5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F6DX
F6EX 1) Check the external server and check function.
F6FX 2) Chekc the connection to the external server and check function.
F70X An error is detected at the
3) Check the network settings and check function.
F71X External Server management *FieryOption related
4) Replace the bridge board and check function.
F72X section
5) Replace the main board and check function.
F73X
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F74X
F75X
1-4-214
2N3/2N2
1-4-4 Image formation problems
Isolate the component an image defect has occurred from.
<A guide to isolate the component of the cause.>
Run U089 to print a test page and check whether an image defect happens.
YES: Main unit as the cause of defect
NO: Scanner as the cause of defect
Perform enlarged or reduced copying and verify if the defective images are enlarged or reduced, accordingly.
YES: Scanner as the cause of defect
1. Scanner as the cause of defect:
If the defect occurs with copying or sending, refer to P.1-4-217.
(Defects caused by a reading error that occurs at the original (glass) LED lamp to CCD (DP: CIS).)
Isolate the problem at the location that the originals are scanned.
a. Single side DP (read by Main CCD)
b. On the contact glass (read by Main CCD)
c. Back side DP (For DP mounted with CIS)
2. Main unit as the cause of defect:
Verify whether the problem is caused with mono or full color development (defects seen over the entire
image).
(1)Main unit as the cause of defect (Mono color) If the defect of image occurs with mono color development of
a particular color, refer to P. 1-4-258.
(A defect of image forming occurs from the rendering process that involves charging, drum, LSU,
developer, and primary transferring.)
(2)Main unit as the cause of defect (Image entirety) If the defect of image occurs with full color development,
refer to P. 1-4-274.
(A defect of transferring and paper conveyance occurs from the rendering process that involves the interme-
diate belt, secondary transfer roller, fuser, ejection.)
<Flow of image data>
Copying :
LED lump CCD ISC Main Engine
→ → LSU
PWB PWB PWB
→ → HDD → → relay → LSU
(DDR (DDR
CIS DP relay PWB
→ memory) memory)
(DP: back) PWB
Sending :
LED lump CCD ISC Main Main
→ →
PWB PWB PWB
→ (DDR → HDD → (DDR → PC
CIS DP relay
→ memory) memory)
(DP: back) PWB
1-4-215
2N3/2N2
Printing data from PC :
Printer Main PWB Main PWB Engine
LSU relay
Driver → (DDR mem- → HDD → (DDR mem- → PWB → → LSU
PWB
ory ory
FAX (send) :
LED lump CCD ISC Main Main
→ →
PWB PWB PWB
→ (DDR → HDD → (DDR → FAX PWB
CIS DP relay
→ memory) memory)
(DP: back) PWB
FAX receive :
Main PWB
Main PWB
FAX PWB → → HDD → (DDR mem- → FAX PWB
(FAX DIMM)
ory)
<Flow of rendering image>
Chraging > Drum > LSU > Development > Primary transfer (Intermediate transfer belt)
>Secondary transfer > Fusing
1-4-216
2N3/2N2
1-4-5 Poor image (due to DP and scanner reading)
(1) No image (2) No image (3) Image is too (4) The back- (5) White streaks
appears appears light. ground is col- are printed ver-
(entirely white). (entirely black). ored. tically.
See page1-4-218 See page1-4-220 See page1-4-222 See page1-4-225 See page1-4-228
(6) Black or color (7) Streaks are (8) One side of the (9) Black or color (10) Image is
streaks appear printed horizon- print image is dots appear on blurred.
longitudinally. tally. darker or the image.
brighter than
the other.
See page1-4-230 See page1-4-233 See page1-4-235 See page1-4-238 See page1-4-240
(11) The leading (12) Part of image (13) Image is out of (14) Image center (15) Shifted colors
edge of the is missing. focus. does not align
image is con- with the origi-
sistently mis- nal center.
aligned with
the original.
See page1-4-242 See page1-4-244 See page1-4-247 See page1-4-249 See page1-4-250
(16) Moire (17) Skewed image (18) Abnormal image
See page1-4-253 See page1-4-254 See page1-4-256
1-4-217
2N3/2N2
(1) No image appears (entirely white).
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
1
glass is mounted.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
2 properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
Home position sen- Check the location the home Re-mount the home position sensor if it is
3 sor position sensor is mounted. hanged off.
Scanner wire drum Check that the scanner drive If the scanner wire drum is loosely mounted,
4 gear is loosely mounted. secure the screws.
Scanner drive gear Check that the scanner drive If the scanner drive gear loosely mounted,
5 gear is loosely mounted. secure the screw.
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
6 (see page 1-3-174)
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
7 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
8
1-4-218
2N3/2N2
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Verify the sides of the original If the sides of the original document are
1 document. reversed, place the original document properly.
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
2
glass is mounted.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
3 properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
Home position sen- Check the location the home Re-mount the home position sensor if it is
4 sor position sensor is mounted. hanged off.
Scanner wire drum Check that the scanner wire If the scanner wire drum is loosely mounted,
5 drum is loosely mounted. secure the screws.
Scanner drive gear Check that the scanner drive If the scanner drive gear loosely mounted,
6 gear is loosely mounted. secure the screw.
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
7 (see page 1-3-174)
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
8 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
9
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Verify the sides of the original If the sides of the original document are
1 document. reversed, place the original document properly.
White-reference Check that the white-reference If the white-reference roller does not rotate
2 roller (Counter the roller is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-install.
CIS)
White-reference Check if the white reference If the white-reference roller is dirty, clean. Or, if
3 roller (Counter the roller is contaminated on its sur- the roller is damaged, replace.
CIS) face or damaged.
DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
4 is mounted.
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
5 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
6 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
7
1-4-219
2N3/2N2-1
(2) No image appears (entirely black).
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
1
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
2
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU PWB and perform U411.
3 (see page 1-3-174)
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
4 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
5
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Scanning position Confirm the value using mainte- If a large value is observed in maintenance
1 of the DP nance mode U068, DP Read. mode U068, DP Read, perform
adjustment.(see page 1-3-61)
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
2
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
3
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
4 (see page 1-3-174)
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
5 (see page 1-3-174)
1-4-220
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
6
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
1 is mounted.
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
2 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
3 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
4
1-4-221
2N3/2N2-1
(3) Image is too light.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
The settings of the Check the settings of the adjust- 1. Deactivate EcoPrint if it is activated. Or, if
adjustment of den- ment of density. the density is too low, chosse an image
sity quality that suits the original docuemt in
1 type.
2. Increase density.
3. Perform the background color adjustment
using the system menu.
Settings of anti-off- Check the settings of anti-offset. If anti-offset is set to on, set it to off.
2 set
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411,
3 scanner of the scanner. table(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-174)
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
4 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
Home position Check the location the home Re-mount the home position sensor if it is
5 sensor position sensor is mounted. hanged off.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
6
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
FFC cable LED Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the LED PWB and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
7
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
Lamp unit Check the location the lamp unit Re-mount the lamp unit if it is hanged off.
8 is mounted.
LED PWB Check that the LED is lit. If the LED is not lit, replace the LED PWB and
9 perform U411.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
10 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
11 (see page 1-3-174)
1-4-222
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
12
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
The settings of the Check the settings of the adjust- 1. Deactivate EcoPrint if it is activated. Or, if
adjustment of den- ment of density. the density is too low, chosse an image
sity quality that suits the original docuemt in
1 type.
2. Increase density.
3. Perform the background color adjustment
using the system menu.
Settings of anti-off- Check the settings of anti-offset. If anti-offset is set to on, set it to off.
2 set
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411,
3 scanner of the scanner. DP FaceUp(Chart1)_Input(see page 1-3-174)
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
4 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
Home position Check the location the home Re-mount the home position sensor if it is
5 sensor position sensor is mounted. hanged off.
Scanning position Check whether the scanning If the scanning position of the DP is shifted,
6 of the DP position of the DP is wrong. perform maintenance mode U068, DP
Read.(see page 1-3-61)
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
7
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
FFC cable LED Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the LED PWB and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
8
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
Lamp unit Check the location the lamp unit Re-mount the lamp unit if it is hanged off.
9 is mounted.
LED PWB Check that the LED is lit. If the LED is not lit, replace the LED PWB and
10 perform U411.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
11 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
12 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
13
1-4-223
2N3/2N2
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
The settings of the Check the settings of the adjust- 1. Deactivate EcoPrint if it is activated. Or, if
adjustment of den- ment of density. the density is too low, chosse an image
sity quality that suits the original docuemt in
1 type.
2. Increase density.
3. Perform the background color adjustment
using the system menu.
Settings of anti-off- Check the settings of anti-offset. If anti-offset is set to on, set it to off.
2 set
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411,
3 scanner of the scanner. DP FaceDown(Chart1)_All
(see page 1-3-174)
White-reference Check that the white-reference If the white-reference roller does not rotate
4 roller (Counter the roller is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-install.
CIS)
White-reference Check if the white reference If the white-reference roller is dirty, clean. Or, if
5 roller (Counter the roller is contaminated on its sur- the roller is damaged, replace.
CIS) face or damaged.
DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
6 is mounted.
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
7 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
8 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
9
1-4-224
2N3/2N2-1
(4) The background is colored.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document 1. Check if the background 1. If the background density of the original
density of the original document is too dense, perform automatic
document is too dense. background adjustment.Or, adjust density
1 2. Check if the original with background adjustment.
document is floated during 2. If the original document is floated during
scanning. scanning, press down the original
document.
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411,
2 scanner of the scanner. table(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-174)
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
3 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
4
glass is mounted.
Home position Check the location the home Re-mount the home position sensor if it is
5 sensor position sensor is mounted. hanged off.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
6
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
FFC cable LED Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the LED PWB and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
7
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
Lamp unit Check the location the lamp unit Re-mount the lamp unit if it is hanged off.
8 is mounted.
LED PWB Check that the LED is lit. If the LED is not lit, replace the LED PWB and
9 perform U411.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
10 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
11 (see page 1-3-174)
1-4-225
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
12
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document 1. Check if the background 1. If the background density of the original
density of the original document is too dense, perform automatic
document is too dense. background adjustment.Or, adjust density
1
2. Check if the original with background adjustment.
document is floated during 2. Adjust the location the DP is mounted.
scanning.
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
2 scanner of the scanner. FaceUp(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-174)
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
3 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
4
glass is mounted.
Home position Check the location the home Re-mount the home position sensor if it is
5 sensor position sensor is mounted. hanged off.
Installing DP Check whether the DP frame is If the DP is damaged, replace the DP.
6 distorted or the hinges are dam-
aged.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
7
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
FFC cable LED Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the LED PWB and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
8
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
Lamp unit Check the location the lamp unit Re-mount the lamp unit if it is hanged off.
9 is mounted.
LED PWB Check that the LED is lit. If the LED is not lit, replace the LED PWB and
10 perform U411.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
11 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
12 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
13
1-4-226
2N3/2N2
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document 1. Check if the background 1. If the background density of the original
density of the original document is too dense, perform automatic
document is too dense. background adjustment.Or, adjust density
1
2. Check if the original with background adjustment.
document is floated during 2. Adjust the location the CIS unit is mounted.
scanning.
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
2 scanner of the scanner. FaceDown(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-174)
White-reference Check that the white-reference If the white-reference roller does not rotate
3 roller (Counter the roller is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-install.
CIS)
White-reference Check if the white reference If the white-reference roller is dirty, clean. Or, if
4 roller (Counter the roller is contaminated on its sur- the roller is damaged, replace.
CIS) face or damaged.
DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
5 is mounted.
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
6 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
7 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
8
1-4-227
2N3/2N2-1
(5) White streaks are printed vertically.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
2 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
Mirror Check whether the mirrors are If the mirrors are dirty, clean the three mirrors.
3 dirty.
Lamp unit Check that the lamp unit is con- If dusts are observed on the lamp unit, remove
4 taminated with dusts. the dusts in the light paths.
Lamp unit Check whether the LED cover is Re-mount the LED cover if it is hanged off.
5 hanged off.
ISU Check whether the lens cover is Re-mount the lens cover if it is hanged off.
6 hanged off.
Shading plate Check whether the shading plate If the shading plate is dirty, perform
is dirty. maintenance mode U063 to modify the
7 shading position. If it does not cure, replace the
contact glass assembly.
(see page 1-3-174)
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
8 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
9 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
10
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
2 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
1-4-228
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Mirror Check whether the mirrors are If the mirrors are dirty, clean the three mirrors.
3 dirty.
Lamp unit Check that the lamp unit is con- If dusts are observed on the lamp unit, remove
4 taminated with dusts. the dusts in the light paths.
Lamp unit Check whether the LED cover is Re-mount the LED cover if it is hanged off.
5 hanged off.
ISU Check whether the lens cover is Re-mount the lens cover if it is hanged off.
6 hanged off.
Shading plate Check whether the shading plate If the shading plate is dirty, perform
is dirty. maintenance mode U063 to modify the
7 shading position. If it does not cure, replace the
contact glass assembly.
(see page 1-3-56)
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
8 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
9 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
10
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
White-reference Check if the white reference If the white-reference roller is dirty, clean. Or, if
1 roller (Counter the roller is contaminated on its sur- the roller is damaged, replace.
CIS) face or damaged.
DP_CIS glass Check whether the CIS glass is If the CIS glass is contaminated, clean the CIS
2 contaminated. glass and conveying guide. If it has a scuff,
replace.
White streaks com- Check the white streaks com- If the white streaks compensation is
3 pensation settings pensation settings. insufficient, perform maintenance mode U091.
DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
4 is mounted.
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
5 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
6 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
7
1-4-229
2N3/2N2-1
(6) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Original document Check if the size of the original If the size of the original document and its
2 document and its reference size reference size do not match, set the correct
match. document size or activate border erasure.
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
3
glass is mounted.
Adjustment of the Check whether the outer areas 1. Perform maintenance mode U067,
scanner of the original document have Front.(see page 1-3-60)
4 streaks or lines. 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, Table
(Chart1)_Input.
(see page 1-3-174)
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean.
5 is dirty.
mirror Check whether the mirrors are If the mirrors are dirty, clean the three mirrors.
6 dirty.
Lamp unit Check that the lamp unit is con- If dusts are observed on the lamp unit, remove
7 taminated with dusts. the dusts in the light paths.
CCD sensor Check that the CCD sensor If dusts are observed on the CCD sensor
8 glass is contaminated with dusts. glass,remove the dusts by an air blower.
Shading plate Check whether the shading plate If the shading plate is dirty, perform
is dirty. maintenance mode U063 to modify the
9 shading position. If it does not cure, replace the
contact glass assembly.
(see page 1-3-56)
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
10 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
11 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
12
1-4-230
2N3/2N2
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Original document Check if the size of the original If the size of the original document and its
2 document and its reference size reference size do not match, set the correct
match. document size or activate border erasure.
Scanning position Check whether the scanning If the scanning position of the DP is shifted,
3 of the DP position of the DP is wrong. perform maintenance mode U068, DP Read.
(see page 1-3-61)
Adjustment of the Check whether the outer areas 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, Front.
scanner of the original document have (see page 1-3-66)
streaks or lines. 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
4 Auto Adj.
3. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
FaceUp(Chart2)_Input.
(see page 1-3-174)
Slit glass, Contact Check whether the slit glass and If the slit glass and contact glass are dirty,
glass contact glass are dirty. clean the contact glass, the slit glass, the
5
bottom part of the shading plate, and the
conveying guide.
Mirror Check whether the mirrors are If the mirrors are dirty, clean the three mirrors.
6 dirty.
Lamp unit Check that the lamp unit is con- If dusts are observed on the lamp unit, remove
7 taminated with dusts. the dusts in the light paths.
CCD sensor Check that the CCD sensor If dusts are observed on the CCD sensor
8 glass is contaminated with dusts. glass,remove the dusts by an air blower.
Shading plate Check whether the shading plate If the shading plate is dirty, perform
is dirty. maintenance mode U063 to modify the
9 shading position. If it does not cure, replace the
contact glass assembly.
(see page 1-3-56)
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
10 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
11 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
12
1-4-231
2N3/2N2
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Adjustment of the Check if the outer areas of the 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, CIS.
scanner original document have streaks (see page 1-3-66)
or lines. 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
1 Auto Adj.
3. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
FaceDown(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-174)
DP_CIS glass Check whether the CIS glass of If the CIS glass of the DP is contaminated,
2 the DP is contaminated. clean. Or, if it has scuffs, replace.
DP guide plate Check whether the DP guide If the guide plate is dirty, clean the guide plate
3 plate is dirty. and the conveying guide.
DP regist pulley The DP regist pulley is contami- If the DP regist pully is contaminated, clean the
4 nated. DP regist pulley.
White-reference Check if the white reference If the white-reference roller is dirty, clean. Or, if
5 roller (Counter the roller is contaminated on its sur- the roller is damaged, replace.
CIS) face or damaged.
White streaks com- Check the white streaks com- If the white streaks compensation is
6 pensation settings pensation settings. insufficient, perform maintenance mode
U091.(see page 1-3-71)
DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
7 is mounted.
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
8 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
9 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
10
1-4-232
2N3/2N2-1
(7) Streaks are printed horizontally.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
2 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
Ajusting scanner Check that the image at the back 1. If the image at the back of the size
of the size indicator has been indicator, has been rendered perform
rendered. maintenance mode U066, Front. (see page
3
1-3-59)
2. Perform maintenance mode U411,
Table(Chart1)_Input.(see page 1-3-174)
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
4
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
FFC cable LED Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the LED PWB and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
5
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
6
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
LED PWB Check that the LED is lit. If the LED is not lit, replace the LED PWB and
7 perform U411.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
8 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
9
1-4-233
2N3/2N2
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
2 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
3
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
FFC cable LED Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the LED PWB and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
4
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
5
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
LED PWB Check that the LED is lit. If the LED is not lit, replace the LED PWB and
6 perform U411.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
7 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
8
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
DP_CIS glass Check whether the CIS glass of If the CIS glass of the DP is contaminated,
2 the DP is contaminated. clean. Or, if it has scuffs, replace.
DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
3 is mounted.
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
4 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_SATA cable Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the SHD PWB and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
5
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
6 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
7
1-4-234
2N3/2N2-1
(8) One side of the print image is darker or brighter than the other.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Original document Check if the original document If the original document has foldings or
2 has creases or foldings or wrin- creases, remove them.
kles.
Position of the mat Check whether the position of If the position of the mat of the DP or the platen
3 of the platen the mat of the DP or the platen is is shifted, re-mount.
wrong.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
4 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
5
glass is mounted.
Lamp unit Check the position at which the If the light guide panel has been fallen off of the
6 light guide panel is mounted. mounting position, fix it properly.
Mirror Check whether the mirrors are If the mirrors are dirty, clean the three mirrors.
7 dirty.
ISU Check the location the ISU unit Insert a spacer between the scanner unit and
8 is mounted. the ISU to change the height.
(see page 1-5-48)
LED PWB Check that the LED is lit. If the LED is not lit, replace the LED PWB and
9 perform U411.(see page 1-3-174)
LED Assy Check the mounting position of If the LED assy is hanged off of the mounting
10 the refelector board or if it is dis- position of the reflector or it is deformed,
torted. replace the LED assy.
Lamp unit Check that the contact part of If the contact part of the lamp unit and the rail is
11 the lamp unit and the rail is dis- distorted, replace the lamp unit.
torted.
Mirror unit Check the location the mirror is Re-mount the mirror if it is hanged off. Or, if the
12 mounted. mirror is damaged, replace.
Mirror unit Check that the contact part of If the contact part of the mirror unit and the rail
13 the mirror unit and the rail is dis- is distorted, replace the mirror unit.
torted.
1-4-235
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
14 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
15 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
16
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Original document Check if the original document If the original document has foldings or
2 has creases or foldings or wrin- creases, remove them.
kles.
DP scanning guide Check that the scanning guide is If the scanning guide does not move smoothly,
3 smoothly operative. re-install.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
4 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
5
glass is mounted.
LED PWB Check that the LED is lit. If the LED is not lit, replace the LED PWB and
6 perform U411.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
7 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
8 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
9
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Original document Check if the original document If the original document has foldings or
2 has creases or foldings or wrin- creases, remove them.
kles.
White-reference Check that the white-reference If the white-reference roller does not rotate
3 roller (Counter the roller is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-install.
CIS)
1-4-236
2N3/2N2-1
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
4 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
5
1-4-237
2N3/2N2
(9) Black or color dots appear on the image.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
2 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
3
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
4
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
5
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
2 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
FFFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
3
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
4
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
5
1-4-238
2N3/2N2
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
2 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_SATA cable Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
the SHD PWB and I/F PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
3
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
4 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
5
1-4-239
2N3/2N2-1
(10) Image is blurred.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Rail Check that the carriage is If the carriage does not travel smoothly,
1 smoothly operative. remove foreign objects on the front and back
optical rails.
Lamp unit Check that the carriage is If the carriage does not travel smoothly
2 smoothly operative. because the lamp unit contacts with the frame,
rectify.
Scanner wire drum Confirm that a foreign object If a foreign object exists, remove.
3 exists between the wire rope and
the scanner wire drum.
Mirror unit Check that a foreign object If a foreign object exists in the grooves of the
4 exists in the grooves of the pul- pulleys, remove.
ley.
Pulley Check that a foreign object If a foreign object exists in the grooves of the
5 exists in the grooves of the pul- pulleys, remove.
leys other than above.
Wire rope Confirm that the wire rope has a If a foreign object exists on the wire rope,
6 foreign object sticked or has a remove the foreign object. Or, if it is damaged,
scuff. replace.
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP conveying pul- Check that the conveying pulley If the conveying pulley does not rotate
1 ley is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-asslemble the conveying roller
and springs.
Adjustment height Check the height of the front and If the front and back side of the DP is not
2 of the hinge back portions of the DP. leveled, adjust the hinge on the left side.
portions of the DP
Install DP Check how DP is mounted on If mounting to the main unit is improper, check
3 the main unit. positioning and secure the screws.
DP hinge Check that the DP hinge is If the DP is not operative smoothly or is not
operative in both ascending and held stably open, replace the hinges.
4
descending directions and kept
open.
1-4-240
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP document mat Check the location the document Re-mount the document mat of the DP if it is
5 mat of the DP is mounted. hanged off.
Original document Check that the leading edge of If the leading edge of the original documet is
6 the original document is dog- dog-eared, straighten.
eared.
Scanning guide Check if the scanning guide is If the scanning guide deformed, replace.
7 distorted.
Scopper guide Check that the scopper guide is If the scopper guide does not rotate smoothly,
8 smoothly operative. re-install.
Conveying roller Check whether the conveying If the conveying roller is dirty, clean.
9 (before and after roller is dirty.
of scanning)
Drive belt Check if the drive belt is jumping If the drive belt is jumping gear teeth, re-mount
10 gear teeth. the belt tensioner.
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP conveying pul- Check that the conveying pulley If the conveying pulley does not rotate
1 ley is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-asslemble the conveying roller
and springs.
Install DP Check how DP is mounted on If mounting to the main unit is improper, check
2 the main unit. positioning and secure the screws.
DP hinge Check that the DP hinge is If the DP is not operative smoothly or is not
operative in both ascending and held stably open, replace the hinges.
3
descending directions and kept
open.
DP document mat Check the location the document Re-mount the document mat of the DP if it is
4 mat of the DP is mounted. hanged off.
Original document Check that the leading edge of If the leading edge of the original documet is
5 the original document is dog- dog-eared, straighten.
eared.
Scanning roller Check if the scanning roller is If the scanning roller is floated, re-assemble.
6 floated.
Conveying roller Check whether the conveying If the conveying roller is dirty, clean.
7 (before and after roller is dirty.
of scanning)
Scanning glass Check if the scanning glass is If the scanning glass is floated, re-assemble.
8 floated.
Drive belt Check if the drive belt is jumping If the drive belt is jumping gear teeth, re-mount
9 gear teeth. the belt tensioner.
1-4-241
2N3/2N2-1
(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed
1 loaded correctly on the contact on the contact glass, place it correctly.
glass.
Secures the lamp Confirm the direction of the If the bracket that fixes the wire rope and the
2 unit bracket that secures the wire lamp unit is misaligned, align the bracket
rope and the lamp unit. properly.
Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U066, Front.
scanner of the scanner. (see page 1-3-59)
3
2. Perform maintenance mode U411,
table(Chart1)_Input. (see page 1-3-174)
Home position sen- Check the location the home Re-mount the home position sensor if it is
4 sor position sensor is mounted. hanged off.
Drive belt Check if the tension of the drive If the tension of the drive belt is insufficient,
5 belt is insufficient. tense the belt.
Scanner wire drum Check if the optical wire drum is If the optical wire drum is loosely fixed, secure
6 loosely fixed. the screws.
Scanner drive gear Check that the scanner drive If the scanner drive gear loosely mounted,
7 gear is loosely mounted. secure the screw.
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U071, CIS
scanner of DP scanning. Head. (see page 1-3-64)
2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
1
Auto Adj. (only a dual scan DP installed)
3. Perform maintenance mode U411,
FaceUp(Chart2)_Input. (see page 1-3-174)
Original conveying Check if the conveyer roller is If the conveying roller is dirty, clean the con-
2 roller contaminated or worn. veying roller and its axles.If the roller is worn
out, replace.
1-4-242
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP drive motor Check whether the DP drive If the DP motor is fluctuated in rotation, apply
3 motor is fluctuated in rotation. grease with the drive gear. If no improvement
is observed, replace the motor.
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U071, CIS
scanner of DP scanning. Head. (see page 1-3-64)
2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
1 Auto Adj.
3. Perform maintenance mode U411,
FaceDown(Chart1)_All. (see page 1-3-
174)
1-4-243
2N3/2N2-1
(12) Part of image is missing.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed
1 loaded correctly on the contact on the contact glass, place it correctly.
glass.
Original document 1. Check that the size of the 1. If the sizes of the original document and
original document and the the paper size do not match, manually set
paper size match on the the proper paper size for the original
panel. document.
2 2. Check that the copying 2. Check the paper size automatic detection
position has been switch and replace if faulty.
automatically rotated. 3. If the copying position is automatically
rotated, deactivate automatic image
rotation by the system menu.
Settings of Border Check the value of border If a large value is given to bordere erasure,
3 removal removal. change it to a smaller value.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
4 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
5
glass is mounted.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
6
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
7
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
Lamp unit Check the location the lamp unit Re-mount the lamp unit if it is hanged off.
8 is mounted.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
9 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
10 (see page 1-3-174)
1-4-244
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
11
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed
1 loaded correctly in the DP. in the DP, place it correctly.
Original document 1. Check that the size of the 1. If the sizes of the original document and
original document and the the paper size do not match, manually set
paper size match on the the proper paper size for the original
panel. document.
2 2. Check that the copying 2. Check the paper size automatic detection
position has been switch and replace if faulty.
automatically rotated. 3. If the copying position is automatically
rotated, deactivate automatic image
rotation by the system menu.
Settings of Border Check the value of border If a large value is given to bordere erasure,
3 removal removal. change it to a smaller value.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
4 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
FFFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
5
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
6
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
7 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
8 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
9
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed
1 loaded correctly in the DP. in the DP, place it correctly.
Original document Check the size of the original If the size of the original document and its
2 document and its reference size. reference size do not match, manually set the
document size.
1-4-245
2N3/2N2-1
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Settings of Border Check the value of border If a large value is given to bordere erasure,
3 removal removal. change it to a smaller value.
DP_SATA cable Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
the SHD PWB and I/F PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
4
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
5 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
6 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
7
1-4-246
2N3/2N2-1
(13) Image is out of focus.
Print example
1. Table scanning and DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check whether the original If the original document is wavy, straighten.Or,
1 document is wavy. replace the original document.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dew condensed, remove
2 is dew condensed. the dew.
Mirror Check whether the mirror is dew If the mirrors are dew-condensed, remove the
3 condensed. dew.
Lens Check whether the lens is dew If the lens is dew condensed, remove the dew.
4 condensed.
CCD sensor Check whether the CCD sensor If the CCD sensor glass is dew condensed,
5 glass is dew condensed. remove the dew.
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411,
6 scanner of the scanner. table(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-174)
ISU Confirm the position of the lens If the lenses and the CCD sensor are
7 and the CCD sensor. misaligned, replace the ISU and perform U411.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
8 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
9
2. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP_CIS glass Check whether the CIS glass is If the CIS glass is dew condensed, remove the
1 dew condensed. dew.
DP_CIS glass Check whether the CIS glass is If the CIS glass is contaminated, clean the CIS
2 contaminated. glass. If it has a scuff, replace.
White-reference Check that the white-reference If the white-reference roller does not rotate
3 roller (Counter the roller is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-install.
CIS)
1-4-247
2N3/2N2-1
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411,
4 scanner of the scanner. DP FaceDown(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-174)
DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
5 is mounted.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
6 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
1-4-248
2N3/2N2
(14) Image center does not align with the original center.
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed
1 loaded correctly on the contact on the contact glass, place it correctly.
glass.
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
2
glass is mounted.
Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U067,
scanner of the scanner. Front.(see page 1-3-60)
3 2. Perform maintenance mode U411,
Table(Chart1)_Input.
(see page 1-3-174)
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed
1 loaded correctly in the DP. in the DP, place it correctly.
Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, Front.
scanner of DP scanning. 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
Auto Adj. (If a duplex scanning DP is
2
installed.)
3. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
FaceUp(Chart2)_Input. (see page 1-3-174)
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed
1 loaded correctly in the DP. in the DP, place it correctly.
1-4-249
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, CIS .
scanner of DP scanning. (see page 1-3-66)
2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
2 Auto Adj.
3. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
FaceDown (Chart1)_All. (see page 1-3-
174)
(15) Shifted colors
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Rail Check that the carriage is If the carriage does not travel smoothly,
1 smoothly operative. remove foreign objects on the front and back
optical rails.
Lamp unit Check that the carriage is If the carriage does not travel smoothly
2 smoothly operative. because the lamp unit contacts with the frame,
rectify.
Scanner wire drum Confirm that a foreign object If a foreign object exists, remove.
3 exists between the wire rope and
the scanner wire drum.
Mirror unit Check that a foreign object If a foreign object exists in the grooves of the
4 exists in the grooves of the pul- pulleys, remove.
ley.
Pulley Check that a foreign object If a foreign object exists in the grooves of the
5 exists in the grooves of the pul- pulleys, remove.
leys other than above.
Wire rope Confirm that the wire rope has a If a foreign object exists on the wire rope,
6 foreign object sticked or has a remove the foreign object. Or, if it is damaged,
scuff. replace.
1-4-250
2N3/2N2-1
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP conveying pul- Check that the conveying pulley If the conveying pulley does not rotate
1 ley is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-asslemble the conveying roller
and springs.
Adjustment height Check the height of the front and If the front and back side of the DP is not
2 of the hinge back portions of the DP. leveled, adjust the hinge on the left side.
portions of the DP.
Install DP Check how DP is mounted on If mounting to the main unit is improper, check
3 the main unit. positioning and secure the screws.
DP hinge Check that the DP hinge is If the DP is not operative smoothly or is not
operative in both ascending and held stably open, replace the hinges.
4
descending directions and kept
open.
DP document mat Check the location the document Re-mount the document mat of the DP if it is
5 mat of the DP is mounted. hanged off.
Original document Check that the leading edge of If the leading edge of the original documet is
6 the original document is dog- dog-eared, straighten.
eared.
Scanning guide Check if the scanning guide is If the scanning guide deformed, replace.
7 distorted.
Scopper guide Check that the scopper guide is If the scopper guide does not rotate smoothly,
8 smoothly operative. re-install.
Conveying roller Check whether the conveying If the conveying roller is dirty, clean.
(before and after roller is dirty.
9
portions of
scanning)
Drive belt Check if the drive belt is jumping If the drive belt is jumping gear teeth, re-mount
10 gear teeth. the belt tensioner.
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP conveying pul- Check that the conveying pulley If the conveying pulley does not rotate
1 ley is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-asslemble the conveying roller
and springs.
Install DP Check how DP is mounted on If mounting to the main unit is improper, check
2 the main unit. positioning and secure the screws.
DP hinge Check that the DP hinge is If the DP is not operative smoothly or is not
operative in both ascending and held stably open, replace the hinges.
3
descending directions and kept
open.
1-4-251
2N3/2N2-1
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP document mat Check the location the document Re-mount the document mat of the DP if it is
4 mat of the DP is mounted. hanged off.
Original document Check that the leading edge of If the leading edge of the original documet is
5 the original document is dog- dog-eared, straighten.
eared.
Scanning roller Check if the scanning roller is If the scanning roller is floated, re-assemble.
6 floated.
Conveying roller Check whether the conveying If the conveying roller is dirty, clean.
(before and after roller is dirty.
7
portions of
scanning)
Scanning glass Check if the scanning guide is If the scanning glass is floated, re-assemble.
8 floated.
Drive belt Check if the drive belt is jumping If the drive belt is jumping gear teeth, re-mount
9 gear teeth. the belt tensioner.
1-4-252
2N3/2N2
(16) Moire
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Settings of print Confirm whether the moire Switch print quality mode if the moire varies
quality mode varies depending on print quality depending on print quality mode.
1
mode. 1. Execute printing in text or print mode.
2. Reduce the sharpness (to minus).
Original document Check if moire is observed along If moire is observed, place the original
2 the direction of scanning of the document after rotating it 90-degree.
original document.
Scaling factor Happens with the zoom ratio of Reduce the real-size ratio of the main scan
3 100%. direction by U065.
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411,
4 scanner of the scanner. Table(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-174)
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Settings of print Confirm whether the moire Switch print quality mode if the moire varies
quality mode varies depending on print quality depending on print quality mode.
1
mode. 1. Execute printing in text or print mode.
2. Reduce the sharpness (to minus).
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411,
2 scanner of the scanner. Table(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-174)
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Settings of print Confirm whether the moire Switch print quality mode if the moire varies
quality mode varies depending on print quality depending on print quality mode.
1
mode. 1. Execute printing in text or print mode.
2. Reduce the sharpness (to minus).
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411,
2 scanner of the scanner. DP FaceDown(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-174)
1-4-253
2N3/2N2-1
(17) Skewed image
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not placed askew on
1 fed askew. the contact glass, place it correctly.
Adjustment of Check the scanner unit is quite If the scanner unit is not quite level, perform
2 height of main unit level. the height adjustment of the entirer scanner
and scanner unit unit.
Lamp unit Check the location the lamp unit Re-mount the lamp unit if it is hanged off.
3 is mounted.
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check if the original document If the original document has foldings or
1 has creases or foldings or creases, remove them.
wrinkles.
DP paper feed Check if the original document is If the original document is fed askew, set the
2 fed askew. width guides correctly.
Lamp unit Check the location the lamp unit Re-mount the lamp unit if it is hanged off.
3 is mounted.
DP feed roller Check whether the feed roller is If the feed roller is dirty, clean.Or, if not cured,
4 dirty. replace the feed roller.
DP regist roller Check whether the DP regist If the DP regist roller is dirty, clean.
5 roller is dirty.
DP regist pulley Check that the DP regist pulley If the DP regist pulley does not rotate smoothly,
6 is smoothly operative. re-install.
Adjustment Check the amount of slack of the If the amount of the slack of the original
amount of slack of original document when it document roller improper is perform
7
the original reaches at the regist. maintenance mode U942, DP slack
documen settings.(see page 1-3-233)
Original document Check that the cursor fits with Align the cursor to fit with the original
8 setting the original document. document, if necessary.
1-4-254
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Adjustment posi- Check the front and back adjust- If the front and back adjustment positions of
9 tions of the hinge ment positions of the right hinge. the right hinge are improper, perform
adjustment.
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Original document Check if the original document If the original document has foldings or
1 has creases or foldings or creases, remove them.
wrinkles.
DP feed roller Check whether the DP feed If the DP feed roller is dirty, clean.
2 roller is dirty.
DP regist roller Check whether the DP regist If the DP regist roller is dirty, clean.
3 roller is dirty.
DP regist pulley Check that the DP regist pulley If the DP regist pulley does not rotate smoothly,
4 is smoothly operative. re-install.
Adjustment Check the amount of slack of the If the amount of the slack of the original
amount of slack of original document when it document roller improper is perform
5
the original reaches at the regist. maintenance mode U942, DP slack
documen settings.(see page 1-3-233)
Original document Check that the cursor fits with Align the cursor to fit with the original
6 setting the original document. document, if necessary.
Install the CIS Check whether CIS is loosely Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
7 mounted.
1-4-255
2N3/2N2-1
(18) Abnormal image
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
1
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
2
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
HDD Check the wires to the HDD in 1. Reinsert the connector if its connection is
conduction. Check the connector loose.
3 for connection. Check the con- 2. Check the wires and connetctors, and
nector pins for distortion. replace if faulty.
3. Replace the HDD or the SATA wire.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
4 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
5 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
6
2. DP-scanning first (front) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector it its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
1
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
2
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
1-4-256
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
HDD Check the wires to the HDD in 1. Reinsert the connector if its connection is
conduction. Check the connector loose.
3 for connection. Check the con- 2. Check the wires and connetctors, and
nector pins for distortion. replace if faulty.
3. Replace the HDD or the SATA wire.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
4 (see page 1-3-174)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
5 (see page 1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
6
3. DP-scanning second (back) page
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
1 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_SATA cable Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the SHD PWB and I/F PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
2
properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
3 (see page 1-3-71,1-3-174)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
4
1-4-257
2N3/2N2-1
1-4-6 Poor image (Image rendering problems: Mono-color
printer engine)
(1) No image (2) No image (3) Image is too (4) The back- (5) White streaks
appears appears light. ground is col- are printed ver-
(entirely white). (entirely black). ored. tically.
See page1-4-259 See page1-4-261 See page1-4-262 See page1-4-264 See page1-4-266
(6) Black or color (7) Black, white or color streaks appear (8) Uneven density longitudinally.
streaks appear horizontally.
longitudinally.
See page1-4-267 See page1-4-268 See page1-4-269
(9) Uneven density horizontally. (10) Black or color (11) Offset occurs. (12) Part of Image
dots appear on is missing.
the image.
See page1-4-270 See page1-4-270 See page1-4-271 See page1-4-272
(13) Image is out of (14) Poor grayscale reproducibility. (15)Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in
focus. the printed objects.Colored spots in
the printed objects.
See page1-4-272 See page1-4-273 See page1-4-273
1-4-258
2N3/2N2
(1) No image appears (entirely white).
Print example Cause of trouble
1. No or defective developing bias output.
2. Failure of the rotation of the developing roller.
3. Defective primary transfer.
4. Laser is not dispersed from the laser scanner unit (LSU).
5. The drum does not rotate.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Developing unit Executing U089 to generate
four-color PGs and check the fol-
lowing with the color which is
defective:
Check whether the developer If the gear is damaged, replace the developer
drive gear is damaged. unit.
1
Check whether the developing If the developer unit is in fault, replace the
roller is rotated by hand. developer unit. (see page 1-5-63)
Check contamination and defor- If the connecting terminals are dirty, clean.
mation on the terminals of the If the connecting terminals are deformed,
developer unit or the high-volt- correct for a proper conduction.
age PWB1.
High-voltage Check the connection of the con- Reinsert the connector if its connection is
PWB1 nectors in the high-voltage loose.
PWB1. Or, verify conduction of Replace the cable if it has no conduction.
the wires. High voltage PWB 1 (YC1, 2) and engine
PWB (YC16)
2 High voltage PWB 1 (YC3, 4) and engine PWB
(YC17)
Check if the developing bias 1. If the value obtaines by U140 does not
value at its default by U140. confirm to the default value, reset it to the
default (see page 1-3-101).
2. Replace the high-voltage PWB1.
High-voltage Check contamination and defor- 1. If the connecting terminals are dirty, clean.
PWB2 (Transfer) mation on the terminals of the 2. If the connecting terminals are deformed,
primary transfer roller and the correct for a proper conduction.
high-voltage PWB2.
3
Transfer current supplied by the Replace the high-voltage PWB2.
high-voltage PWB2 (transfer) is
faulty.
1-4-259
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Laser scanner unit Check the connection of the con- 1. Reinsert the FFC wire if it its connection is
(LSU) nectors. loose.
4 Or, verify conduction of the Replace the cable if it has no conduction.
wires. 2. Replace the LSU
(see page 1-5-48)
Engine PWB A control signal is not derived Replace the enging PWB.
5 from the engine PWB. (see page 1-5-91)
1-4-260
2N3/2N2
(2) No image appears (entirely black).
Print example Cause of trouble
1. No main charging.
2. The laser from the LSU is activated simultaneously for all colors.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Charging roller Check whether the charging If the charging roller is not fixed properly, fix the
roller is properly mounted. roller properly.
Check whether the connecting If the connecting terminals are deformed,
1
terminals of the charging roller correct for a proper conduction.
and high-voltage PWB1 are
deformed.
High-voltage Check the connection of the con- Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
PWB1 nectors. Or, verify conduction of loose.
the wires. Replace the cable if it has no conduction.
High voltage PWB 1 (YC1, 2) and engine PWB
(YC16)
2 High voltage PWB 1 (YC3, 4) and engine PWB
(YC17)
Main charging current supplied Replace the high-voltage PWB1.
by the high-voltage PWB1 is (see page 1-5-97)
faulty.
Laser scanner unit Switching on and off the laser Replace the LSU. (see page 1-5-48)
3 (LSU) diode on the LSU PWB is out of
control.
Engine PWB The engine PWB is detective. Replace the engine PWB.(see page 1-5-91)
4
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-82)
5
1-4-261
2N3/2N2
(3) Image is too light.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Variance in environments (dew formation).
2. Toner is under supplied, or deteriorated in quality.(Under charged)
3. The volatage of the developing bias is too low.
4. The volatage of the primary transfer current is too low.
5. The power of LSU laser is too low.
6. The surface potential of the drum is too high.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Drum unit Check that the drum has dew If a dew condensation is observed, perform
1 condensation. drum refreshing.
(System Menu >Adjustment / Maintenance)
Developer unit Executing U089 to generate
four-color PGs and check the
following with the color which is
defective:
(see page 1-3-70)
Check the value of U155. If the value is less than 542, perform U132 to
(see page 1-3-108) forcibly replenish toner.
(see page 1-3-98)
Replace the developer unit if the output is kept
too low.
Check if the device executed a 1. If the device was executing a low-density
low-density printing for a pro- printing for a prolonged period, perform
longed period. developing refreshing.
(System Menu >Adjustment /
2 Maintenance)
2. If developer refreshing does not correct the
problem, perform the following
Execute maintenance modes U464
Calibration and U410 Grayscale
Adjustment.
(see page 1-3-173,1-3-198)
Check if the connecting termi- If the connecting terminals are deformed,
nals for developer bias are correct for a proper conduction.
deformed.
Check the value of U140 If the MagDC value is in excess of the upper
MagDC. limit by U140, perform U464 to set the
(see page 1-3-101) Thickness Target Value from 0 to +30.
Execute maintenance modes U464
Calibration.(see page 1-3-198)
1-4-262
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Toner container Shake the toner container up If the message prompting toner replenishing is
and down approx. 10 times, and shown, the toner inlet is not open, replace the
check the following: toner container.
3 1. Check the message of the
toner replenishing is shown.
2. Check whether the toner
supply inlet is open.
Toner supply motor Execute U135 to check the If the toner supply motor does not rotate,
4 revolution of the toner supply replace.
motor. (see page 1-3-99)
High-voltage Check if the developing bias 1. If the value obtained by U140 does not
PWB1 value is at its default by U140. conform to the default value, reset it to the
5
default. (see page 1-3-101)
2. Replace the high-voltage PWB1.
Intermediate trans- 1. Check whether the 1. If the connecting terminals are deformed,
fer belt unit connecting terminals are correct for a proper conduction.
deformed. 2. If the value obtained by U106 does not
6
2. Check the value of the U106. conform to the default value, reset it to the
(see page 1-3-81) default.
3. Replace the intermediate transfer belt unit.
High-voltage The primary transfer current sup- Replace the high-voltage PWB2.
7 PWB2 plied by the high-voltage PWB2
is faulty.
LSU 1. The laser diode on the LSU Replace the LSU. (Perform U119)
APC PWB is out of control. (see page 1-3-93)
8
2. Check whether the internal
mirrors are contaminated.
Drum unit 1. Check if the discharging 1. If the discharging lamp is dirty, clean.
lamp is dirty. 2. If not cured, or it does not light, replace the
9
2. Check whether it is lit. drum unit. (Perform U119)(see page 1-3-
93)
Engine PWB The engine PWB is defective. Replace the enging PWB. (see page 1-5-91)
10
1-4-263
2N3/2N2
(4) The background is colored.
Print example 要因
1. Toner is deteriorated in quality (under-charged).
2. Toner is over-supplied.
3. Developing bias is too high.
4. The layer of toner is too thick on the developing roller (too much toner).
5. The surface potential of the drum is too low (under low temperature
environment).
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Developer unit Executing U089 to generate
four-color PGs and check the
following with the color which is
defective:
(see page 1-3-70)
1. Check whether the device If the device was being continuously operated
was being continuously with high density under a hot environment,
operated with high density, perform developing refreshing. (System Menu
under a hot environment. >Adjustment / Maintenance)
2. Check the value of the U140 If the density ID is too low at calibration,
1
developer bias. (see page 1- execute maintenance modes U464 Calibration
3-101) and U410 Grascale Adjustment. (see page 1-
3-198,1-3-173)
3. Check contamination and If the connecting terminals for developer bias
deformation on the are dirty, clean.If the connecting terminals are
connecting terminals for deformed, correct for a proper conduction.
developer bias.
4. Check the toner sensor If the toner sensor output obtained by U155 is
output by U155. 100 or less, replace the developer unit. (see
(see page 1-3-108) page 1-5-63)
Drum unit 1. Execute U139 to check the If the internal temperature is 16°C/ 61°F or
internal temperature. less, continue printing until the temperature
(see page 1-3-100) reaches 16°C/ 61°F or higher.
2. Check the value of the main Fix the inner unit properly.
high voltage by U100. (see page 1-5-60)
(see page 1-3-75)
2 3. Check that the ground If the connecting terminals are dirty, clean.
terminal is not contaminated If the amount of the grease applied is too
or the conductive grease is small, apply conductive grease to the bearing
not applied with the on the receiver side of the drum drive axle.
connecting terminals. Replace the drum unit. (Perform U119)
4. Check if the charging roller is If the charging roller is dirty, clean.Or replace it.
dirty. (Perform U930)(see page 1-3-231)
1-4-264
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
High-voltage The developing bias and charg- Replace the high-voltage PWB1.
3 PWB1 ing current supplied by the high- (see page 1-5-97)
voltage PWB1 is faulty.
Engine PWB The engine PWB is defective. Replace the enging PWB. (see page 1-5-91)
4
Toner supply motor Check if the toner supply motor If the harnesses are short-circuited and the
5 is continuously rotating.Check toner motor is continuously rotating,
wires for short circuiting. replace the toner supply motor.
1-4-265
2N3/2N2
(5) White streaks are printed vertically.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Dirty LSU slit glass.
2. Foreign objects inside the developer unit.
3. Internal contamination
4. Dirty drum unit inside.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
LSU Check if the LSU slit glass is If the LSU slit glass is dirty,
1 dirty. perform laser scanner cleaning.
Developer unit Executing U089 to generate Replace the developer unit in fault.
2 four-color PGs. (see page 1-3- (see page 1-5-63)
70)
Light path between Check if there are dusts, dirts, or If a foreign object exists on the frame or the
3 the LSU and the toner obstructing the light paths. sealings between the developer unit and the
drum drum unit, remove.
Drum unit Check if the charging roller is If the charging roller is dirty,clean. Or replace it.
dirty. (Perform U930) (see page 1-5-63)
4
Check if the discharging lamp is If the discharging lamp is dirty,clean.
dirty.
1-4-266
2N3/2N2
(6) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Dirty charging roller
2. Flawed or dirty drum unit
3. Damaged or paper dust bitten cleaning blade
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Charging roller unit Check if there is no toner streaks If the charging roller has streaks on its surface,
on the surface of the charging clean the charging roller. Replace the charging
1
roller. roller, if necessary.
(Perform U930) (see page 1-3-231)
Drum unit Check if the drum is dirty on its Execute drum refreshing.
surface. (System Menu >Adjustment / Maintenance)
Check if the drum has scratches. Replace the drum unit. (Perform U119)
Check whether the edge of the (see page 1-5-63)
2 cleaning blade is damaged.
Check whether it is abraded or
paper dusts are accumulated.
Check whether toner is accumu-
lated in the cleaning section.
1-4-267
2N3/2N2
(7) Black, white or color streaks appear horizontally.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Dirty developer unit or terminals
2. Flawed or dirty drum unit
Improper grounding
3. Dirty primary transfer roller terminals
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Developer unit 1. Check the print image on 1. If the ends of the developing roller and the
paper has a problem at an connecting terminals for developer bias are
interval equivalent to the cir- dirty, clean.
cumference of the develop- 2. Replace the developer unit. (see page 1-5-
1
ing roller (39mm). 63)
2. Check that the developing
roller is dirty at its ends or at
the developing bias tab.
Drum unit 1. Check the print image on Execute drum refreshing.
paper has a problem at an (System Menu >Adjustment / Maintenance)
interval equivalent to the
circumference of the drum
(94mm).
2 2. Check if the drum has Replace the drum unit. (Perform U119)
scratches. (see page 1-5-63)
3. Check the grounding tab of 1. Check how the inner unit is mounted, and
the drum or the drum drive correct, if necessary.
shaft. 2. Replace the drum unit. (Perform U119)
(see page 1-5-63)
Primary transfer Check if the connecting termi- 1. If the connecting terminals is dirty, clean it
roller (transfer belt) nals between the transfer high- using a brush.
voltage PWB and the primary 2. If the connecting terminals are deformed,
4 transfer roller are contaminated correct for a proper conduction.
by toner. 3. Replace the intermediate transfer belt unit.
Or, the connecting terminals are (see page 1-5-69)
deformed losing contacts.
High-voltage The bias voltage output sup- Replace the high-voltage PWB1. (see page 1-
5 PWB1 plied by the high-voltage PWB1 5-97)
is not even.
1-4-268
2N3/2N2
(8) Uneven density longitudinally.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Dirty LSU inside
2. The transfer belt is not pressed against the drum properly.
3. Drum condensation.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
LSU The emission of laser dispersed Replace the LSU.(Perform U119)
1 from the LSU is not even. (Mirror
is dropped off inside.)
Primary transfer Check the position at which the 1. If the axle holder is hanged off of the
roller (intermediate primary transfer roller axles are mounting position,
2 transfer belt) mounted. 1. fix the axle holder properly.
2. Replace the intermediate transfer belt unit.
(see page 1-5-69)
Drum unit 1. Check if toner is evenly 1. Execute drum refreshing.
layered on the drum surface. 2. Execute U148 Drum refresh-Dew. (see
2. Check whether the device page 1-3-107)
3
has been operated under a 3. Install a cassette heater.
highly humid environment. 4. Replace the drum unit. (Perform U119)
(see page 1-5-63)
Developer unit Check that toner is evenly lay- Replace the developer unit. (see page 1-5-63)
4 ered on the developing roller.
1-4-269
2N3/2N2
(9) Uneven density horizontally.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Defective laser scanner unit.
2. Improper charging roller rotation
3. Improper contact on the developer unit terminals
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
LSU Check if the emission of laser is Replace the LSU. (see page 1-5-48)
1 even.
Charging roller Check if the charging roller is 1. Fix the charging roller properly.
2 improperly mounted. 2. Replace the charging roller.
(Perform U930) (see page 1-3-231)
Developer unit Check If the connecting termi- 1. If the connecting terminals is dirty, clean it
nals of the developing bias is using a brush.
3
contaminated by toner. 2. Replace the developer unit.
(Perform U140) (see page 1-3-101)
(10) Black or color dots appear on the image.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Dirty charging roller
2. Flawed or dirty drum unit
3. Damaged or paper dust bitten cleaning blade
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Drum unit Check the print image on paper If the drum has scratches, replace the drum
has a problem at an interval unit. (see page 1-5-63)
1
equivalent to the circumference
of the drum(94mm).
Charging roller Check the print image on paper A problem is observed at a constant interval of
has a problem at an interval the charging roller (38 mm), replace the
2
equivalent to the circumference charging roller.(U930)
of the charging roller(38mm). (see page 1-3-231)
1-4-270
2N3/2N2
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Developer unit 1. Check if that the developing Execute AC calibration by U140.
bias is leaked. (see page 1-3-101)
2. Check the print image on 1. If the print image on paper has a problem
paper has a problem at an at an interval equivalent to the
3
interval equivalent to the circumference of the developer roller, clean
circumference of the the developer unit.
developing roller (39mm). 2. Replace the developer unit.
(see page 1-5-36)
(11) Offset occurs.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Flawed or dirty drum unit
2. Developing bias leakage.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Drum unit Check the print image on paper If the print image on paper has a problem at an
has a problem at an interval interval equivalent to the circumference of the
1
equivalent to the circumference drum, replace the drum unit. (see page 1-5-63)
of the drum (94mm).
Developer unit Check if offsets are observed at If offsets are observed at an constant interval
an constant interval of 39 mm, of 39 mm, which is equivalent to the
which is equivalent to the cir- circumference of the developing roller, replace
2 cumference of the developing the developer unit.
roller. (Waste toner is not properly sweeped from the
developing roller.)
(see page 1-5-63)
1-4-271
2N3/2N2
(12) Part of Image is missing.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Flawed or dirty drum unit.
2. Deformed or dirty primary transfer roller on its surface.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Drum unit Check the print image on paper If the print image on paper has a problem at an
has a problem at an interval interval equivalent to the circumference of the
1
equivalent to the circumference drum, execute drum refreshing
of the drum (94mm) (System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance).
Primary transfer Check if the primary transfer If the intermediate transfer belt unit is
roller (intermediate roller is deformed or deformed or contaminated, replace the inter-
2
transfer belt unit) contaminated on its surface. mediate transfer belt unit.
(see page 1-5-69)
(13) Image is out of focus.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Drum condensation.
2. Dirty LSU slit glass.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Drum unit Check that the surface of the Execute drum refreshing.
1 drum has dew condensation. System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
LSU Check whether the LSU slit 1. If the LSU slit glass is dirty, perform laser
glass is contaminated in its scanner cleaning.
2
entirety. 2. Replace the LSU. (Perform U119)
(see page 1-5-48)
1-4-272
2N3/2N2
(14) Poor grayscale reproducibility.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Poor image adjustment.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Image adjustment Check if color adjustment is Execute maintenance modes U464 Calibration
1 insufficient. and U410 Grayscale Adjustment. (see page 1-
3-173,1-3-198)
(15) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects.Colored spots in the
printed objects.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Installation at a high altitude.
2. Using the paper with high surface resistance.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Developer unit The device is installed in an If the device is installed in an altitude higher
altitude higher than 1500 m sea than 1500 m sea level, perform the following.
level.
1. Run maintenance mode U140 to apply AC
Calib and Calibration with the applicable
colors.
1
2. Run maintenance mode U140 and set AC
Calib and Maintenance negative. Max. 10
3. Run maintenance mode U140 and turn
both AC Calib and High Altitude to Mode1.
4. If changing to Mode1 won’t work, change
to Mode2. (see page 1-3-101)
Paper Check if paper is of high surface Change the paper to another.
resistance.
2
1-4-273
2N3/2N2
1-4-7 Poor image (Caused by transferring toner, paper
conveying, or fusing: Four-color printer engine)
(1) No image (2) Image is too (3) The back- (4) White streaks (5) Black or color
appears light. ground is col- are printed ver- streaks appear
(entirely white). ored. tically. longitudinally.
See page1-4-276 See page1-4-277 See page1-4-278 See page1-4-278 See page1-4-279
(6) Black, white or color streaks appear (7) Uneven transferring toner. (8) Black or color
horizontally. dots appear on
the image.
See page1-4-280 See page1-4-281 See page1-4-282
(9) Image is (10) The leading (11) The leading (12) Paper is wrin- (13) Offset occurs.
blurred edge of the edge of the kled.
(Shifted image is con- image is spo-
transferring). sistently mis- radically mis-
aligned with aligned with
the original. the original.
See page1-4-283 See page1-4-284 See page1-4-284 See page1-4-285 See page1-4-286
1-4-274
2N3/2N2
(14) Image is partly (15)Fusing is loose. (16) Image is out of (17)Image center
missing focus. does not align with
(Outlines the original center.
objects and
white dots).
See page1-4-287 See page1-4-288 See page1-4-289 See page1-4-289
(18)Dirty paper edges with toner. (19)Inferior color (20)Shifted colors.
reproducibility.
See page1-4-290 See page1-4-291 See page1-4-292
(21)Dirty reverse
side of paper.
See page1-4-292
1-4-275
2N3/2N2
(1) No image appears (entirely white).
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Defective secondary transfer bias output.
2. The secondary transfer roller is not pressurized.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Secondary transfer Check if the right side conveying If the conveying unit has not been closed,
1 roller unit is closed. check how the conveying guide is locked and
open the conveying guide once, then close.
Secondary trans- 1. Execute U030 Press 1. Reinsert the connector if its connection is
fer roller pressure Release to confirm that the loose.
motor pressure motor for the sec- 2. Replace the motor.
2 ondary transfer roller is acti-
vated.
2. Check the connection of the
connectors.
High-voltage 1. Check the connection of the 1. Reinsert the connector if its connection is
PWB2 connectors. loose.
High voltage PWB 2 (YC1) and engine
3 2. Verify conduction of the PWB (YC8)
wires. 2. Replace the cable if it has no conduction.
3. Replace the high-voltage PWB2.
(see page 1-5-98)
Enging PWB 1. Check the connection of the 1. Reinsert the connector if its connection is
connectors. loose.
2. Verify conduction of the 2. Replace the cable if it has no conduction.
wires. 3. If a signal is not obtained, replace the
4
3. Check whether the engine PWB. (see page 1-5-91)
secondary transfer high
voltage-on signal is derived
from the engine PWB.
1-4-276
2N3/2N2
(2) Image is too light.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. The paper absorbs moisture.
2. The contact pressure at the secondary trasnfer roller and the intermediate
transfer belt is too low.
3. The voltage applied to the secondary transfer current is incorrect.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Paper 1. Check if the paper has 1. If the paper is damp, replace. Choose a dry
moisture absorbed. place to store paper.
1 2. Check the humidity at the 2. If necessary, install a cassette heater.
place the paper has been
stored.
Conveying unit Check if the right side conveying If the conveying unit has not been closed,
2 unit is closed. check how the conveying guide is locked and
open the conveying guide once, then close.
Secondary transfer Check the position of the sec- Position the pressure cam correctly if the
3 roller ondary transfer roller during secondary transnfer roller is off-set.
printing.
High-voltage Check if the connecting termi- 1. If the connecting terminals are dirty, clean.
PWB2 nals between the high-voltage 2. If the connecting terminals are deformed,
4
PWB2 and the conveying unit correct for a proper conduction.
are not dirty nor deformed.
U106 the second- Check the secondary transfer If the value of the secondary transfer voltage
5 ary transfer voltage voltage by U106. by U106 is not its default, reset it to the default.
setting (see page 1-3-81)
1-4-277
2N3/2N2
(3) The background is colored.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Defective intermediate transfer belt unit grounding.
2. Dirty secondary transfer roller.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Intermediate trans- 1. Check if the belt is bleached Increase the U140 MagDC value if the U140
fer belt unit on its surface. MagDC value has not reached at its maximum
Check the value of U140 even though the belt is bleached on its surface.
MagDC after conducting If the MagDC increased to its maximum won't
1 calibration. cure, replace the intermediate transfer belt
unit. (see page 1-5-69)
2. Check if the ground tab of If the grounding tab is deformed, correct it so
the intermediate transfer belt that it is properly grounded.
unit is deformed.
Secondary transfer Check that the roller is dirty in its If the secondary transfer roller is dirty in its
2 roller entirely. entirely, replace.
(4) White streaks are printed vertically.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Dirty the intermediate transfer belt unit.
2. Dirty the secondary transfer roller.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Intermediate trans- Check whether a white streak 1. Clean the intermediate transfer belt if it is
fer belt unit occurs at the same position as dirty.
1 2. Replace the intermediate transfer belt unit.
the smear on the intermediate
transfer belt. (see page 1-5-69)
Secondary transfer Check whether a white streak Clean the secondary transfer roller if it is dirty.
roller occurs at the same position as If not cured, replace the secondary transfer
2 the smear on the secondary roller. (see page 1-5-73)
transfer roller.
1-4-278
2N3/2N2
(5) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Poor voltage applied for intermediate transfer belt cleaning.
2. Dirty secondary transfer roller.
3. Dirty separation brush.
4. Dirty fuser unit inside.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Intermediate trans- Check if paper dusts have 1. If paper dusts are accumulated, clean the
fer belt unit accumulated at the proximity of pre-brush by removing the cleaning cover.
the cleaning pre-brush. (see page 1-5-71)
2. If cleaning does not help improve the
symptom, replace intermediate transfer
belt unit.
(see page 1-5-69)
Check if the cleaning bias 1. If the connector or terminals are dirty,
1 connector or the connecting clean.
terminals of high voltage are not 2. If the connecting terminals are deformed,
dirty or deformed. correct for a proper conduction.
3. Replace the high-voltage PWB2.
(see page 1-5-98)
Check if the intermediate 1. If smear and scuff are observed on the
transfer belt roller is Intermediate transfer belt, replace the unit.
contaminated on its surface or (see page 1-5-69)
damaged.
Secondary transfer Check if the secondary transfer Clean the secondary transfer roller if it is dirty.
2 roller roller is contaminated, deformed Replace the roller if it is deformed or abraded.
or abraded. (see page 1-5-73)
Separation brush Check if the separation brush is If the separation brush is dirty, clean it using a
3 dirty with paper dusts or waste brush.
toner.
Fuser unit 1. The paper separation plate is 1. If the paper separation plate is dirty, clean
contaminated with toner. the paper separation plate.
2. Check if the device is 2. If the settings for paper weight and the
4
adjusted for a correct paper paper being used do not match, make a
weight that matches the proper configuration.
paper in use.
Eject guide The rib is contaminated with If it is duty,clean.
toner.
1-4-279
2N3/2N2
(6) Black, white or color streaks appear horizontally.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Defective intermediate transfer belt unit grounding.
2. Dirty secondary transfer roller.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Intermediate trans- Check if the phenomenon 1. If the print image has a problem, clean the
fer belt unit appears at a pitch of the intermediate transfer belt by a soft cloth.
1
circumference of the 2. If cleaning does not cure, replace interme-
intermediate roller. diate transfer belt unit.
Fuser unit Check the print image on paper If the print image has a problem, clean the
has a problem at an interval fuser roller.If it does not cure, replace the fuser
2
equivalent to the circumference unit.
of the fuser roller.
1-4-280
2N3/2N2
(7) Uneven transferring toner.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Defective intermediate transfer belt unit grounding.
2. Dirty secondary transfer roller.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Intermediate trans- Check if paper dusts have 1. If paper dusts are accumulated, clean the
fer belt unit accumulated at the proximity of pre-brush by removing the cleaning cover.
the cleaning pre-brush. 2. If cleaning does not help improve the
symptom, replace intermediate transfer
belt unit.
(see page 1-5-69)
Check if the cleaning bias con- 1. If the connector or terminals are dirty,
1 nector or the connecting termi- clean.
nals of high voltage are not dirty 2. If the connecting terminals are deformed,
or deformed. correct for a proper conduction.
3. Replace the high-voltage PWB2.
(see page 1-5-98)
Check if the intermediate trans- 1. Replace the intermediate transfer belt unit.
fer belt roller is contaminated on (see page 1-5-69)
its surface or damaged.
Secondary transfer Check if the secondary transfer 1. If the secondary transfer roller is dirty,
roller roller is contaminated, deformed clean.
2 or abraded. 2. If cleaning does not help improve the
symptom, replace the secondary trasnfer
roller. (see page 1-5-73)
Fuser unit Check if the roller, its driving If the roller, its driving unit, or the fusing
unit, or the fusing pressure pressure release mechanism is deformed,
3
release mechanism is deformed, abraded, or damaged, replace the fuser unit.
abraded, or damaged. (see page 1-5-69)
1-4-281
2N3/2N2
(8) Black or color dots appear on the image.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Flawed or dirty transfer belt.
2. Dirty secondary transfer roller.
3. Dirty Fuser unit inside.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Intermediate trans- Check the intermediate transfer 1. Clean the cleaning pre-brush.
fer belt unit belt cleaning. 2. If it does not cure, replace the cleaning pre-
brush.
1 (see page 1-5-71)
Check if smears or scuffs appear Replace the intermediate transfer belt unit.
at a pitch of the circumference of (see page 1-5-69)
the intermediate transfer belt.
Secondary transfer Check the print image on paper 1. If the print image has a problem, clean the
roller has a problem at an interval secondary transfer roller.
2 equivalent to the circumference 2. If cleaning does not help improve the
of the secondary transfer symptom, replace the roller.
roller(75mm). (see page 1-5-73)
Fuser unit Check the print image on paper 1. If the print image has a problem, clean the
has a problem at an interval fuser roller or the fuser belt.
3 equivalent to the circumference 2. If cleaning does not help improve the
of the fuser roller or the fuser symptom, replace the fuser unit.
belt. (see page 1-5-75)
1-4-282
2N3/2N2
(9) Image is blurred (Shifted transferring).
Print example Cause of trouble
1. The paper used does not conform to the requirement.
2. Imbalanced fuser unit pressures.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1. If the type of the paper being used falls
paper used falls within the outside the requirements, replace and use
range of specifications. a suitable type of paper.
1
2. Check the settings of the 2. If the settings made for the paper being
type and weight of the paper. used is inadequate, configure the settings
according to the paper being used.
Fuser unit 1. Check the fuser pressure 1. If the pressures at the front and rear are
balance. unbalanced, replace the fuser unit.
2 2. Check if the fuser paper- (see page 1-5-75)
inserting guide is deformed. 2. If the fuser unit is deformed, replace.
(see page 1-5-75)
Paper conveying Check to see if the driving mech- If the drive does not operate normally, apply
3 motor anism for paper conveying is grease.
operative without a hinderance.
Paper conveying The paper conveying guide is Replace the paper conveying guide.
4 guide deformed.
1-4-283
2N3/2N2
(10) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Improperly adjusted leading edge timing.
2. Improper amount of slack of the original document in front of the registration.
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Regist roller 1. Check whether the leading- If theadjustment is not sufficient, perform U034
edge timing is adequately to adjust the leading edge timing. (see page 1-
adjusted. 3-38)
1 2. Check whether the amount If the amount of the slack in front of the regist
of slack of the original roller is insufficient, perform maintenance
document when it reaches at mode U051 to optimize the slack. (see page 1-
the DP regist is adequate. 3-45)
(11) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original.
Print example
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Paper feed clutch, Check that the clutches and 1. If it is not fixed properly, fix it properly.
Middle motor, Reg- motors are properly fit.Or, check 2. If it does not operate without a hinderance,
1
istration motor, they are operative without a replace the clutch or motor.
Duplex motor hinderance.
1-4-284
2N3/2N2
(12) Paper is wrinkled.
Print example
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Paper-width guides Check the paper-width guides If the width adjuster cursors are not flush with
1 are flush with the paper. paper, set them correctly.
Paper 1. Check if paper is curled or 1. If the paper is curled or wavy, replace.
wavy. 2. Choose a dry place to store paper.
2
2. Check if paper is stored in a
humid place.
Registration roller The pressures at the front and Replace the spring with the one having a
3 back springs are unbalanced. correct pressure.
Fuser unit The pressuring spring of the Replace the fuser unit. (see page 1-5-75)
4 fuser unit is defective.
1-4-285
2N3/2N2
(13) Offset occurs.
Print example
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1. If the type of the paper being used falls
paper used falls within the outside the requirements, replace and use
range of specifications. a suitable type of paper.
1
2. Check the settings of the 2. If the settings made for the paper being
type and weight of the paper. used is inadequate, configure the settings
according to the paper being used.
Intermediate trans- Check the transfer cleaning 1. If the transfer cleaning volatage by U107 is
fer belt unit volatage by U107. not its default, reset it to the default.
(see page 1-3-88) 2. Replace the intermediate transfer belt unit.
(see page 1-5-69)
2
Check if offsets are occurred at a If an offset happens at a pitch of the outer cir-
pitch of the outer circumference cumference, clean the intermediate transfer
of the intermediate transfer belt. belt.
Fuser unit Check if the fuser unit roller is If the fuser unit roller is dirty, replace the unit.
3 dirty.
Fusing Check the fusing temperature If the fusing temperature value by U161 is not
4 temperature set- value by U161. its default, reset it to the default.
ting (see page 1-3-111)
1-4-286
2N3/2N2
(14) Image is partly missing (Outlines objects and white dots).
Print example
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Paper 1. Check that the paper has 1. If the paper is damp, replace.Choose a dry
moisture absorbed. place to store paper.
1 2. Check that the paper has 2. If necessary, install a cassette heater.
stored in a humid place. (see page 1-2-73)
Intermediate trans- Check the print image that 1. Clean the intermediate transfer belt by a
fer belt unit implies dirt, deformation, or soft cloth.
scratches on the intermediate 2. Replace the intermediate transfer belt unit.
2
transfer belt, which will be
appearing at an interval equal to
its circumference (936mm).
Secondary transfer Check the print image on paper 1. Clean the secondary transfer roller.
roller has a problem at an interval 2. Replace the secondary transfer roller.
3 equivalent to the circumference (see page 1-5-73)
of the secondary transfer
roller(75mm).
Fusing Execute U161 to check the value 1. Choose a paper weight appropriate for the
temperature set- and check whether the fuser weight of the paper actually being used, if
ting temperature is set to low. (see the fusing temperature was set low using
4
page 1-3-111) U161.
2. Execute U161 for an appropriate fusing
temperature.
1-4-287
2N3/2N2
(15) Fusing is loose.
Print example
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1. If the type of the paper being used falls
paper used falls within the outside the requirements, replace and use
range of specifications. a suitable type of paper.
1
2. Check the settings of the 2. If the settings made for the paper being
type and weight of the paper. used is inadequate, configure the settings
according to the paper being used.
Paper weight set- Check If the weight of the paper If the weight of the paper is not correctly set,
2 ting is correctly set. choose the correct weight that matches the
paper being used.
Fuser unit Check the fuser pressure set- Replace the fuser unit. (see page 1-5-75)
3 ting.
Fusing Check the value of the U161. 1. Choose a paper weight appropriate for the
temperature set- (see page 1-3-111) weight of the paper actually being used, if
ting the fusing temperature was set low using
4
U161.
2. Perform U161 for an appropriate fusing
temperature.
1-4-288
2N3/2N2
(16) Image is out of focus.
Print example
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Paper 1. Check that the paper has 1. If the paper is damp, replace.
moisture absorbed. Choose a dry place to store paper.
1 2. Check that the paper has 2. If necessary, install a cassette heater.
stored in a humid place. (see page 1-2-73)
(17) Image center does not align with the original center.
Print example
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Paper setting Check if paper is set correctly. Reload paper if the paper was not loaded
1 correctly.
Image position Execute U034 to confirm the Perform adjustment if the value of U034 Center
2 adjustment center alignment during writing Line Adjustment is inadequate.
images. (see page 1-3-38)
1-4-289
2N3/2N2
(18) Dirty paper edges with toner.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. Toner scattering due to an internal temperature
increase.(Developer unit)
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Conveying guide Check if the conveying guide is If the conveying guide is dirty with toner, clean
1 dirty with toner. the developer unit and the cooling ducts.
Internal tempera- Check the device has been used If the device has been used for printing a large
ture increase for printing a large amount of amout of data or for printing in duplex mode
2
data or for printing in duplex with a high density, clean the developer unit.
mode with a high density.
1-4-290
2N3/2N2
(19) Inferior color reproducibility.
Print example
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Paper Check that the paper has 1. If the paper is damp, replace.
moisture absorbed. Choose a dry place to store paper.
1
Check that the paper has stored 2. If necessary, install a cassette heater. (see
in a humid place. page 1-2-73)
Paper specifica- Slight uneveness in glossiness is If the type of the paper being used falls outside
tions observed at the high density the requirement, use a suitable type of paper.
area of the image on paper. 1. If the rough paper intended for
monochrome printing is being used,
change the paper to the type intended for
color printing.
2
2. Select the Gain Mode by U161 and select
a lower fusing temperature.
3. If the installation environment is at a high
altitude, select and perform U140 High
Altitude.
(see page 1-3-101)
Paper type Check the settings of the type If the paper and the paper type or weight do
3 and weight of the paper. not match, choose the correct match.
Image adjustment Check whether the above has Execute maintenance modes U464 Calibration
4 been cured. and U410 Grayscale Adjustment.
Engine PWB Check if the color printing is If the print image is florid, replace the engine
5 florid in its entirety. PWB. (see page 1-5-91)
Printer driver set- Check that what color table is 1. If a proper color table is not being selected
ting being selected for the printer. for the printer, manipulate the printer driver
for a mode that provides a proper color
fidelity.
6 2. Select an adequate mode by U485.
Check that the print data is of If the print data is of CMYK,
CMYK. select an adequate mode by the KPDL Color
Conversion Process.
1-4-291
2N3/2N2
(20) Shifted colors.
Print example Cause of trouble
1. False detection of the velocity of rotation of the
transfer belt.(Noise)
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Color Regist Check if U469 Color Regist If U469 Color Registration adjustment has not
Adjustment Adjustment is performed after been done, perform U464 Calibration, then
1
power is turned on and warming- U469 Color Registration.
up completes. (see page 1-3-198,1-3-206)
Motor control PWB If the above remedy won't work, If it does not cure,replace the motor control
check whether an intensive color PWB.
2
shift in the direction of sub scan
is observed.
LSU Check if adjusting the color shift Replace the laser scanner unit if necessary.
3 can help compensation in the (see page 1-5-48)
direction of main scan.
(21) Dirty reverse side of paper.
Print example
Defective part Check description Corrective Action
Secondary transfer Check if the secondary transfer 1. Clean the secondary transfer roller.
1 roller roller is dirty with toner. 2. Reset U106 Bias settings to its default.
Fuser pressure Check that a foreign object is 1. If a foreign object exists, clean the fuser
roller stuck on the fuser pressure pressure roller.
2 roller. 2. If the paper and the paper weight do not
match, choose the proper paper weight
setting.
Upper conveying Check if the conveying guide is If the conveying guide is dirty with toner,clean
3 guide dirty with toner. the conveying guide or the developer unit.
1-4-292
2N3/2N2
1-4-8 Electric problems
If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms.
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1) 1. No electricity at the Measure the input voltage.
The machine does power outlet.
not operate when
2. The power cord is Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.
the main power
not plugged in prop-
switch is turned on.
erly.
3. Broken power cord. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.
4. Defective main Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace
power switch. the main power switch.
5. Defective power Replace the power source PWB (see page 1-5-95).
source PWB.
(2) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
MP lift motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
not operate. tact in the connector. MP lift motor and relay PWB (YC3)
Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the MP lift motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and
check for correct operation (see page 1-5-91).
(3) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Scanner motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Scanner motor and ISC PWB (YC5)
ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the scanner motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the ISC PWB or main PWB and check for correct
operation (see page 1-5-82).
(4) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Registration motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Registration motor and feed PWB 1 (YC25)
Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the registration motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
1-4-293
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(5) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Middle motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
not operate. tact in the connector. Middle motor and feed PWB 2 (YC7)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the middle motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(6) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Eject motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
not operate. tact in the connector. Eject motor and front PWB (YC5)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the eject motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(7) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Duplex motor 1 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Duplex motor 1 and relay PWB (YC16)
Relay PWB (YC13) and feed PWB 1 (YC23)
Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the duplex motor 1.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and
check for correct operation (see page 1-5-91).
(8) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Duplex motor 2 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Duplex motor 2 and relay PWB (YC7)
Relay PWB (YC1) and feed PWB 1 (YC14)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the duplex motor 2.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and
check for correct operation (see page 1-5-91).
1-4-294
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(9) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
BR conveying cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor 1 does not tact in the connector. BR conveying motor 1 and BR main PWB (YC7)
operate. BR main PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC20)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the BR conveying motor 1.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the BR main PWB or engine PWB and check for
correct operation (see page 1-5-91).
(10) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
BR conveying cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor 2 does not tact in the connector. BR conveying motor 2 and BR main PWB (YC7)
operate. BR main PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC20)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the BR conveying motor 2.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the BR main PWB or engine PWB and check for
correct operation (see page 1-5-91).
(11) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
JS eject motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. JS eject motor and JS main PWB (YC2)
JS main PWB (YC1)and feed PWB 1 (YC20)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the JS eject motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the JS main PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB
and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-91).
(12) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Toner fan motor 1, cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
2 does not operate. tact in the connector. Toner fan motor 1, 2 and engine PWB (YC19)
2. Defective motor. Replace the toner fan motor 1 or 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-91).
1-4-295
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(13) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Developer fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor K/M/C/Y tact in the connector. Developer fan motor K/M/C/Y and retainer PWB (YC2)
does not operate. Retainer PWB (YC1) and front PWB (YC6)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)
2. Defective motor. Replace the developer fan motor K/M/C/Y.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(14) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Exhaust fan motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
1, 2, 3 does not tact in the connector. Exhaust fan motor 1, 2, 3 and engine PWB (YC19)
operate. 2. Defective motor. Replace the exhaust fan motor 1, 2 or 3.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-91).
(15) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
LSU fan motor K/ cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
M/C/Y does not tact in the connector. LSU fan motor K/M/C/Y and front PWB (YC18)
operate. Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)
2. Defective motor. Replace the LSU fan motor K/M/C/Y.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(16) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Belt fan motor 1, 2 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Belt fan motor 1, 2 and engine PWB (YC19)
2. Defective motor. Replace the belt fan motor 1 or 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-91).
(17) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Eject fan motor 1, cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
2 does not operate. tact in the connector. Eject fan motor 1, 2 and relay PWB (YC11)
Relay PWB (YC13) and feed PWB 1 (YC23)
Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)
2. Defective motor. Replace the eject fan motor 1 or 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and
check for correct operation (see page 1-5-91).
(18) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Eject front fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. Eject front fan motor and front PWB (YC4)
operate. Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)
2. Defective motor. Replace the eject front fan motor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
1-4-296
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(19) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Eject rear fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. Eject rear fan motor and feed PWB 1 (YC19)
operate. Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective motor. Replace the eject rear fan motor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(20) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Power source fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. Power source fan motor and engine PWB (YC22)
operate.
2. Defective motor. Replace the power source fan motor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-91).
(21) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Controller fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. Controller fan motor and main PWB (YC23)
operate.
2. Defective motor. Replace the controller fan motor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-82).
(22) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Bridge fan motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Bridge fan motor and engine PWB (YC26)
2. Defective motor. Replace the bridge fan motor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-91).
(23) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Paper feed clutch cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
1, 2 does not oper- tact in the connector. Paper feed clutch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC4)
ate. Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the paper feed clutch 1 or 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(24) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Assist clutch 1, 2 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Assist clutch 1 and feed PWB 2 (YC10)
Assist clutch 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC12)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the assist clutch 1 or 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
1-4-297
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(25) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Paper conveying cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
clutch does not tact in the connector. Paper conveying clutch and feed PWB 2 (YC5)
operate. Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the paper conveying clutch.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(26) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
MP paper feed cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
clutch does not tact in the connector. MP paper feed clutch and relay PWB (YC3)
operate. Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the MP paper feed clutch.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and
check for correct operation (see page 1-5-91).
(27) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
PF paper feed cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
clutch 1, 2 does tact in the connector. PF paper feed clutch 1, 2 and PF main PWB (YC15)
not operate. 2. Defective clutch. Replace the PF paper feed clutch 1 or 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the PF main PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-108).
(28) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
PF paper convey- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing clutch 1, 2, 3 tact in the connector. PF paper conveying clutch 1 and PF main PWB (YC5)
does not operate. PF paper conveying clutch 2, 3 and PF main PWB (YC15)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the PF paper conveying clutch 1, 2 or 3.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the PF main PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-108).
(29) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Pickup solenoid 1, cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
2 does not operate. tact in the connector. Pickup solenoid 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC8)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
2. Defective solenoid. Replace the pickup solenoid 1 or 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(30) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Feedshift solenoid cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Feedshift and front PWB (YC5)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)
2. Defective solenoid. Replace the feedshift solenoid 1 or 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
1-4-298
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(31) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
Cleaning solenoid cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Cleaning solenoid and feed PWB 1 (YC10)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
2. Defective solenoid. Replace the cleaning solenoid.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(32) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
PF pickup sole- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
noid 1, 2 does not tact in the connector. PF pickup solenoid 1 and PF main PWB (YC5)
operate. PF pickup solenoid 2 and PF main PWB (YC14)
2. Defective solenoid. Replace the PF pickup solenoid 1 or 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the PF main PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-108).
(33) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
BR feedshift sole- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
noid does not oper- tact in the connector. BR feedshift solenoid and engine PWB (YC20)
ate. 2. Defective solenoid. Replace the BR feedshift solenoid.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-91).
(34) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
JS feedshift sole- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
noid does not oper- tact in the connector. JS feedshift solenoid and JS main PWB (YC2)
ate. JS main PWB (YC1) and feed PWB 1 (YC20)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective solenoid. Replace the JS feedshift solenoid.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the JS main PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB
and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-91).
(35) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The message cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
requesting paper to tact in the connector. Paper sensor 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC8)
be loaded is shown Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
when paper is
2. Deformed actuator. Check visually and replace if necessary.
present on the cas-
sette 1, 2. 3. Defective sensor. Replace the paper sensor 1 or 2.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(36) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The message cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
requesting paper to tact in the connector. PF paper feed sensor 1 and PF main PWB (YC5)
be loaded is shown PF paper feed sensor 2 and PF main PWB (YC4)
when paper is 2. Deformed actuator. Check visually and replace if necessary.
present on the cas-
sette 3, 4. 3. Defective sensor. Replace the PFpaper feed sensor 1 or 2.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the PF main PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-108).
1-4-299
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(37) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The message cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
requesting paper to tact in the connector. MP paper sensor and relay PWB (YC3)
be loaded is shown Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
when paper is Feed PWB 1 (YC1)and engine PWB (YC6)
present on the MP 2. Deformed actuator. Check visually and replace if necessary.
tray.
3. Defective sensor. Replace the MP paper sensor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(38) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The size of paper cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
on the cassette 1, tact in the connector. Paper length switch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3)
2 is not displayed Paper width switch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3)
correctly. Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
2. Defective switch. Replace the paper length switch 1, 2 or paper width switch
1, 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-91).
(39) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The size of paper cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
on the cassette 3, tact in the connector. PF size detection switch 1 and PF main PWB (YC3)
4 is not displayed PF size detection switch 2 and PF main PWB (YC6)
correctly. 2. Defective switch. Replace the PF size detection switch 1, 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the PF main PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-108).
(40) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The size of paper cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
on the MP tray is tact in the connector. MP paper length switch and relay PWB (YC2)
not displayed cor- MP paper width switch and relay PWB (YC2)
rectly. Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1)and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective switch. Replace the MP paper length switch or MP paper width
switch.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and
check for correct operation (see page 1-5-91).
1-4-300
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(41) 1. A piece of paper torn Check visually and remove it, if any.
A paper jam in the from paper is caught
paper feed, paper around feed sensor
conveying, feed- 1, 2, MP feed sensor,
shift or eject sec- middle sensor, paper
tions is indicated conveying sensor,
when the main registration sensor,
power switch is loop sensor, fuser
turned on. eject sensor, duplex
sensor 1, 2, eject
sensor, switchback
sensor, PF feed sen-
sor 1, 2, PF paper
conveying sensor 1,
2, 3, BR conveying
sensor 1, 2, BR eject
sensor or JS eject
sensor.
2. Defective sensor. Replace the feed sensor 1, 2, MP feed sensor, middle sen-
sor, paper conveying sensor, registration sensor, loop sen-
sor, fuser eject sensor, duplex sensor 1, 2, eject sensor,
switchback sensor, PF feed sensor 1, 2, PF paper convey-
ing sensor 1, 2, 3, BR conveying sensor 1, 2, BR eject sen-
sor or JS eject sensor.
(42) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing cover open is tact in the connector. Front cover switch and front PWB (YC16)
displayed when the Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)
front cover is 2. Defective switch. Replace the front cover switch.
closed.
(43) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing unit open is dis- tact in the connector. Paper conveying unit switch and feed PWB 1 (YC15)
played when the Feed PWB 1 (YC4) and power source PWB (YC12)
paper conveying 2. Defective switch. Replace the paper conveying unit switch.
unit is closed.
(44) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing cover open is tact in the connector. Duplex cover switch and relay PWB (YC7)
displayed when the Relay PWB (YC1) and feed PWB 1 (YC14)
duplex cover is Feed PWB 1 (YC1)and engine PWB (YC6)
closed. 2. Defective switch. Replace the duplex cover switch.
(45) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing cover open is tact in the connector. Paper conveying cover switch and feed PWB 2 (YC6)
displayed when the Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and power source PWB (YC4)
paper conveying 2. Defective switch. Replace the paper conveying cover switch.
cover is closed.
1-4-301
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(46) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing unit open is dis- tact in the connector. PF paper conveying unit switch and PF main PWB (YC14)
played when the 2. Defective switch. Replace the PF paper conveying unit switch.
PF paper convey-
ing unit is closed.
(47) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing cover open is tact in the connector. PF paper conveying cover switch and PF main PWB (YC5)
displayed when the 2. Defective switch. Replace the PF paper conveying cover switch.
PF paper convey-
ing cover is closed.
(48) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing unit open is dis- tact in the connector. BR conveying unit switch and BR main PWB (YC6)
played when the BR main PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC20)
bridge conveying 2. Defective switch. Replace the BR conveying unit switch.
unit is closed.
(49) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing cover open is tact in the connector. BR eject cover switch and engine PWB (YC20)
displayed when the 2. Defective switch. Replace the BR eject cover switch.
bridge eject cover
is closed.
(50) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP feed motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. DP feed motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP feed motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
(51) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP registration cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. DP registration motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
operate.
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP registration motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-302
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(52) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP conveying cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. DP conveying motor and DP main PWB (YC14)
operate.
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP conveying motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
(53) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP eject motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. DP eject motor and DP main PWB (YC14)
2. Defective connector Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
cable or poor con- grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
tact in the connector. replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP eject motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
(54) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP fan motor 1 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. DP fan motor 1 and DP main PWB (YC7)
2. Defective fan motor. Replace the DP fan motor 1.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
(55) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP fan motor 2 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. DP fan motor 2 and DP main PWB (YC8)
2. Defective fan motor. Replace the DP fan motor 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
(56) 1. A piece of paper torn Check visually and remove it, if any.
An original jams from an original is
when the main caught around the
power switch is DP feed sensor, DP
turned on. CIS sensor, DP
timing sensor, DP
eject sensor.
2. Defective sensor. Replace the DP feed sensor, DP CIS sensor, DP timing
sensor or DP eject sensor.
(57) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The LED lamp cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not turn on tact in the connector. DP original sensor and DP main PWB (YC2)
when an original is DP LED PWB and DP main PWB (YC4_B)
present on the DP.
2. Defective sensor. Replace the DP original sensor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP LED PWB or DP main PWB and check for
correct operation.
1-4-303
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(58) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The size of the cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
original on the DP tact in the connector. DP original width switch and DP main PWB (YC2)
is not displayed DP original length switch and DP main PWB (YC2)
correctly. Replace the DP original width switch or DP original length
2. Defective switch.
switch.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
(59) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing the cover is tact in the connector. DP interlock switch and DP main PWB (YC6)
open is displayed Replace the DP interlock switch.
2. Defective switch.
when the DP top
cover is closed.
(60) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The table is cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
scanned when DP tact in the connector. DP open/close switch and DP main PWB (YC4_B)
is closed and the Check the hinges and DP reading guide.
2. Defective DP shut-
original is set. ting.
3. Defective switch. Replace the DP open/close switch.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-304
2N3/2N2
1-4-9 Mechanical problems
If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1) Check if the surfaces of the following roll- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No primary paper ers are dirty with paper powder.
feed. Forwarding pulley
Paper feed pulley
MP paper feed pulley
PF forwarding pulley
PF paper feed pulley
Check if the following rollers is deformed. Check visually and replace any
Forwarding pulley deformed (see page 1-5-20, 1-5-23).
Paper feed pulley
MP paper feed pulley
PF forwarding pulley
PF paper feed pulley
Defective paper feed clutch 1, 2, MP Check visually and remedy if necessary.
paper feed clutch or PF paper feed clutch
1, 2 installation.
(2) Check if the surfaces of the following roll- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No secondary paper ers are dirty with paper powder.
feed. Right registration roller
Left registration roller
Defective registration motor installation. Check visually and remedy if necessary.
(3) Paper width guide in a cassette installed Check the paper width guide visually
Skewed paper feed. incorrectly. and remedy or replace if necessary.
(4) Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.
Multiple sheets of Paper is loaded incorrectly. Load the paper correctly.
paper are fed.
Check if the separation pulley is worn. Replace the separation pulley if it is
worn (see page 1-5-20, 1-5-23).
(5) Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.
Paper jams.
Check if the contact between the right Check visually and remedy if necessary.
and left registration rollers is correct.
Check if the heat roller or press roller is Check visually and replace the fuser
extremely dirty or deformed. unit (see page 1-5-75).
Check if the contact between the PF feed Check visually and remedy if necessary.
roller 1, 2 and PF feed pulleys is correct.
(6) Check if the drum unit or developer unit Clean the drum unit or developer unit.
Toner drops on the is extremely dirty.
paper conveying path.
1-4-305
2N3/2N2
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(7) Check if the rollers, pulleys and gears Grease the bushes and gears.
Abnormal noise is operate smoothly.
heard. Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Check if the following clutches are
installed correctly.
Paper feed clutch 1, 2
Assist clutch 1, 2
Paper conveying clutch
MP paper feed clutch
PF paper feed clutch 1, 2
PF paper conveying clutch 1, 2, 3
(8) Check if the surfaces of the following pul- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No primary original leys are dirty with paper powder.
feed. DP forwarding pulley
DP feed belt
Check if the following pulleys is Check visually and replace any
deformed. deformed (see page 1-5-128).
DP forwarding pulley
DP original feed belt
(9) Original is not correctly set. Set the original correctly.
Multiple sheets of orig- Check if the DP separation pulley is
Replace the DP separation pulley if it is
inal are fed.
worn. worn (see page 1-5-132).
(10) Originals being used do not conform with Use only originals conforming to the
Originals jam. the specifications. specifications.
Check if the surfaces of the following pul- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
leys are dirty with paper powder.
DP forwarding pulley
DP feed belt
Check if the contact between the DP reg- Check visually and remedy if necessary.
istration roller and DP registration pulley
is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP Check visually and remedy if necessary.
upper conveying roller and DP conveying
pulley is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP left Check visually and remedy if necessary.
conveying roller and DP conveying pulley
is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP right Check visually and remedy if necessary.
conveying roller and DP conveying pulley
is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP Check visually and remedy if necessary.
eject roller and DP eject pulley is correct.
1-4-306
2N3/2N2
1-4-10 Send error code
This section describes the scanning errors and descriptions, preventive actions, as well as corrective actions.
Error codes not described here could fall within software errors.
If such an error is encountered, turn power off then on, and advise the service representative.
(1) Scan to SMB error codes
Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures
1101 Host destined does not exist on the net- 1. Confirm destined host.
work. 2. Confirm device's network parameters.
3. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
1102 Login to the host has failed. 1. Confirm user name and password.
2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
3. Check the host if the folder is properly shared.
1103 Destined host, folder, and/or file names 1. Check illegal characters are not contained within
are invalid. these names.
2. Check the name of the folder and files conform with
the naming syntax.
3. Confirm destined host and folder.
1105 SMB protocol is not enabled. 1. Confirm device's SMB protocols.
2101 Login to the host has failed. 1. Confirm destined host.
2. Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to
the device.
3. Check the SMB port number.
4. Confirm device's network parameters.
5. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
2201 Writing scanned data has failed. 1. Check the scanning file name.
2. Confirm device's network parameters.
3. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
2203 No response from the host during a cer- 1. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
tain period of time. nected.
2. Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to
the device.
1-4-307
2N3/2N2
(2) Scan to FTP error codes
Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures
1101 FTP server does not exist on the net- 1. Check the FTP server name.
work. 2. Confirm device's network parameters.
3. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
1102 Login to the FTP server has failed. 1. Confirm user name and password.
2. Check the FTP server name.
1103 Destined folder is invalid. 1. Check illegal characters are not contained within
these names.
2. Check the FTP server name.
1105 FTP protocol is not enabled. 1. Confirm device's FTP protocols.
1131 Initializing TLS has failed. 1. Confirm device's security parameters.
1132 TLS negotiation has failed. 1. Confirm device's security parameters.
2. Check the FTP server name.
2101 Access to the FTP server has failed. 1. Check the FTP server name.
2. Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to
the device.
3. Check the FTP port number.
4. Confirm device's network parameters.
5. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
6. Check the FTP server name.
2102 Access to the FTP server has failed. 1. Check the FTP server name.
(Connection timeout) 2. Check the FTP port number.
3. Confirm device's network parameters.
4. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
5. Check the FTP server name.
2103 The server cannot establish communi- 1. Check the FTP server name.
cation. 2. Check the FTP port number.
3. Confirm device's network parameters.
4. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
5. Check the FTP server name.
2201 Connection with the FTP server has 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
3. Confirm destined folder.
4. Check the FTP server name.
2202 Connection with the FTP server has 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
(Timeout) nected.
2203 No response from the server during a 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
certain period of time. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
1-4-308
2N3/2N2
Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures
2231 Connection with the FTP server has 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
(FTPS communication) nected.
3101 FTP server responded with an error. 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
3. Check the FTP server.
(3) Scan to E-mail error codes
Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures
1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on 1. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name.
the network. 2. Confirm device's network parameters.
3. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has 1. Confirm user name and password.
failed. 2. Check the SMTP/POP3 server.
1104 The domain the destined address 1. Confirm device's SMTP parameters.
belongs is prohibited by scanning
restriction.
1105 SMTP protocol is not enabled. 1. Confirm device's SMTP protocols.
1106 Sender’s address is not specified. 1. Confirm device's SMTP protocols.
2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server 1. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name.
has failed. 2. Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to
the device.
3. Check the SMTP/POP3 port number.
4. Confirm device's network parameters.
5. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
6. Check the SMTP/POP3 server.
2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server 1. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name.
has failed. 2. Check the SMTP/POP3 port number.
(Connection timeout) 3. Confirm device's network parameters.
4. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
5. Check the SMTP/POP3 server.
2103 The server cannot establish communi- 1. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name.
cation. 2. Check the SMTP/POP3 port number.
3. Confirm device's network parameters.
4. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
5. Check the SMTP/POP3 server.
2201 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
has failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
1-4-309
2N3/2N2-4
Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures
2202 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
has failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
(Timeout) nected.
2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit. 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
error. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
3. Check the SMTP/POP3 server.
3102 Error: Server Response. 1. Check the SMTP/POP3 server.
2. Wait a minute and trye again.
3201 No SMTP authentication is found. 1. Check the SMTP server.
The device supports SMTP authentication services
including CRAM-MD5, DIGEST-MD5, PLAIN and
LOGIN.
4803 Failed to establish the SSL session. 1. Verify the self certificate of the device.
2. Check the server certificate of the SMTP/POP3
server.
3. Check the SMTP/POP3 configuration of the device
and the SMTP/POP3 server.
1-4-310
2N3/2N2
1-4-11 Error codes
(1) Error code
Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code
indication U followed by a 5-digit number. (Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an E indica-
tion, followed by five digits.)
The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause, while the lower two
indicate the detailed classification. Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have 00 as the last
two digits.
Error code
UXXXXX
Detailed classification of error code
General classification of error code
Error code indication
Figure 1-4-6
1-4-311
2N3/2N2
(2) Table of general classification
Error code Description
U00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U004XX A connection was made but interrupted during handshake with the receiver unit (refer to
P.1-4-314 U004XX error code table).
U006XX Communication was interrupted because of a machine problem (refer to P.1-4-314
U006XX error code table).
U00700 Communication was interrupted because of a problem in the destination unit.
U008XX A page transmission error occurred in G3 mode (refer to P.1-4-314 U008XX error code
table).
U009XX A page reception error occurred in G3 mode (refer to P.1-4-314 U009XX error code
table).
U010XX Transmission in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to P.1-4-315 U010XX
error code table).
U011XX Reception in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to P.1-4-316 U011XX error
code table).
U01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U017XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during transmission in V.34
mode (refer to P.1-4-317 U017XX error code table).
U018XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during reception in V.34
mode (refer to P.1-4-317 U018XX error code table).
U03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03200 In interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, data was not stored in the box
specified by the destination unit.
U03300 In polling reception from a unit of our make, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch
in permit ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board
reception, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone num-
ber.
U03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destina-
tion unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer).
U03500 In interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, the specified Subaddress confi-
dential box number was not registered in the destination unit.
U03600 An interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a
mismatch in the specified subaddress confidential box number.
U03700 Interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit
had no subaddress-based bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored
in any subaddress confidential box in the destination unit.
1-4-312
2N3/2N2
Error code Description
U04000 In interoffice subaddress-based transmission mode, the specified subaddress box num-
ber was not registered in the destination unit.
U04100 Subaddress-based transmission failed because the destination unit had no subaddress-
based reception capability.
U04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the desti-
nation unit.
U04300 Encrypted transmission failed because the destination unit had no encrypted communi-
cation capability.
U04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100 Password check transmission or restricted transmission was interrupted because the
permit ID’s did not agree with.
U05200 Password check reception or restricted reception was interrupted because the permit
ID’s did not match, the rejected FAX number’s did match, or the destination receiver did
not return its phone number.
U05300 The password check reception or the restricted reception was interrupted because the
permitted numbers did not match, the rejected numbers did match, or the machine in
question did not acknowledge its phone number.
U14000 Memory overflowed during confidential reception. Or, in subaddress-based confidential
reception, memory overflowed.
U14100 In interoffice subaddress-based transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission.
U19300 Transmission failed because an error occurred during JBIG encoding.
1-4-313
2N3/2N2
(2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B
Error code Description
U00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit number.
Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted
because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit.
U00431 An subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified
subaddress confidential box was not registered.
U00432 An subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because of a mis-
match in Subaddress confidential box numbers.
U00433 Subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not
present in the subaddress confidential box.
U00440 Subaddress-based confidential reception was interrupted because the specified subad-
dress box was not registered.
U00450 The destination transmitter disconnected because the permit ID’s did not agree with
while the destination transmitter is in password-check transmission or restricted trans-
mission.
U00460 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was
not registered.
U00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified
encryption box was not registered.
(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit
Error code Description
U00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00613 Image writing section problem
U00656 Data was not transmitted to a modem error.
U00690 System error.
(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error
Error code Description
U00800 A page transmission error occurred because of reception of a RTN or PIN signal.
U00811 A page transmission error reoccurred after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error
Error code Description
U00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U00910 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
1-4-314
2N3/2N2
(2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission
Error code Description
U01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal.
U01016 An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an
EOM signal, and T1 timeout was detected.
U01019 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01020 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01021 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal, and the preset
number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01022 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01028 T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).
U01052 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal (ECM).
U01080 A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal.
U01092 During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because of an impos-
sible combination of the symbol speed and communication speed.
U01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.
U01094 The preset number of command retransfers for DCS/NSS signals was exceeded during
phase B of transmission.
U01095 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS (Q) signal during phase D of
transmission, and the preset number of command transfers was exceeded.
U01096 A DCN signal or invalid command was received during phase D of transmission.
U01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR
signal or no response.
1-4-315
2N3/2N2
(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception
Error code Description
U01100 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal.
U01101 Function of the unit (excl. communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an
NSS signal.
U01102 A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit.
U01110 No response after transmission of a DIS signal.
U01111 No response after transmission of a DTC (NSC) signal.
U01113 No response after transmission of an FTT signal.
U01125 No response after transmission of a CNS signal (between units of our make).
U01129 No response after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).
U01141 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal.
U01143 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal.
U01155 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).
U01160 During message reception, transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time
per line.
U01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.
U01191 Communication was interrupted because an error occurred during an image data recep-
tion sequence in the V.34 mode.
U01193 There was no response, or a DCN signal or invalid command was received, during
phase C/D of reception.
U01194 A DCN signal was received during phase B of reception.
U01195 No message was received during phase C of reception.
U01196 Error line control was exceeded and a decoding error occurred for the message being
received.
1-4-316
2N3/2N2
(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission
Error code Description
U01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).
U01721 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed
between units.
U01700: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after transmission of INFO0
before entering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/A/Abar
(B/Bbar, for polling transmission)/INFOh was not detected.
U01720: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after initiating the control
channel before entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.
U01721: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible
combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange; 1) a DCN sig-
nal was received from the destination unit, and the line was cut; or 2) a DIS (NSF, CSI) signal was
received from the destination unit and, in response to the signal, the unit transmitted a DCN signal,
and the line was cut.
(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception
Error code Description
U01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).
U01821 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed
between units.
U01800: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after transmission of INFO0
before entering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/B/Bbar
(A/Abar, for polling reception)/probing tone was not detected.
U01810: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device
training). For example, S/Sbar/PP/TRN was not detected.
U01820: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel
before entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.
U01821: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible
combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange, a DCN signal
was transmitted to the destination unit and the line was cut.
1-4-317
2N3/2N2
1-4-12 Printing System Troubleshooting
(1) List of Error Code
Problem/ Condition of Check procedures/ Corrective
Causes
Error code detection measures
1.Error 1020 is dis- Error occurs during Bridge Board error. Replace Bridge Board.
played. Bridge Board mem-
ory check.
2.Error 1030 is dis- Timeout for Fiery Printing system is not pow- Check power cable connection or
played. Ready signal not ered. replace.
received.
DVI cable between Fiery Re-insert/replace DVI cable.
Print Controller and MFP is
disconnected.
3.Error 1031 is dis- Receiving VIDEO DVI cable between Fiery Re-insert/replace DVI cable.
played. from Fiery fails. Print Controller and MFP is
(IP Exchange fail- disconnected.
ure) Bridge board error. Replace Bridge Board.
4.Error 1040 is dis- LINKLOCAL con- Network cable between Re-insert/replace network cable.
played. nection fails. Fiery Print Controller and
MFP is disconnected.
Network setting failure. Check network settings.
IPv6: ON
HTTP: ON
Enhanced WSD: ON
5.Error 2000 is dis- Mismatch of Prod- Unsupported Fiery Print Install supported Fiery Print Con-
played. uct ID from Fiery. Controller is installed. troller. (Use with correct combi-
nation)
FW version of Main Con- Check FW version and update
troller and Fiery Print Con- FW.
troller version do not match.
6.Error 2010 is dis- Comet FPGA ver- Unsupported Bridge Board Replace Bridge Board.
played. sion mismatch. is installed.
7.Error 2020 is dis- FW version mis- FW version of Main Con- Check FW version and update
played. match. troller and Fiery Print Con- FW.
troller does not match.
8.Error 3000 is dis- Timeout of ERPD Bad data in IP Exchange. Turn on MFP power again.
played. Server boot-up of Replace Bridge Board.
External RIP Proto-
Replace Main Board.
col.
Replace Fiery Print Controller.
1-4-318
2N3/2N2
Problem/ Condition of Check procedures/ Corrective
Causes
Error code detection measures
9.“Fiery” is not Connection error of Defective DVI cable or poor Reinsert the connector. Also
shown on the MFP the DVI cable (dam- contact. check for continuity within the
application. aged or loose con- connector cable. If none, replace
nected). the cable.
Connection error of Local network cable failure Reinsert the network cable. Also
the network cable or loose connection.Failure check for continuity within the
(damaged or loose or wrong version. connector cable. If none, replace
connected). the cable.
Connection error of Network settings are incor- Check network cable connec-
the network. rect with the MFP. tion or replace.
[System Menu]
→[System]
→Enter LoginUserName and
LoginPassword and login.
→[NetWork]
→[TCP/IP Setting]
TCP/IP : ON
IPv4 DHCP : ON
AutoIP : ON
IPv6 : ON
→[Protocol Settings]
HTTP : ON
Enhanced WSD : ON
Network settings are incor- Perform the following steps.
rect with the PC. [Network Connection] on the
control panel
→[Local Area Connection]
(Properties)
→[Internet Protocol] (TCP/IP)
(Properties)
→Check [Resolve the IP
address automatically].
FW version mis- The version does not match See item 7 above.
match. with the MFP firmware and
the Printing system firm-
ware.
1-4-319
2N3/2N2
Problem/ Condition of Check procedures/ Corrective
Causes
Error code detection measures
9.“Fiery” is not Connection error of Wiring failure or loose con- Reinsert the connector. Also
shown on the MFP the harness nection. check for continuity within the
application. between the Main connector cable. If none, replace
board and the the cable.
bridge board(dam-
aged or loose con-
nected).
Defective bridge Bridge board mounting Replace the bridge board and
board. error. check for correct operation.
Defective main Main board mounting error. Replace the main board and
board. check for correct operation.
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in Replace the Printig system
system. the Printing system. board and check for correct opera-
tion.
10.Fiery is not Connection error of Defective DVI cable or poor Reinsert the connector. Also
detectable with Com- the DVI cable (dam- contact. check for continuity within the
mand Work Station. aged or loose con- connector cable. If none, replace
nected). the cable.
Connection error of Local network cable failure Reinsert the network cable. Also
the network cable or loose connection.Failure check for continuity within the
(damaged or loose or wrong version. connector cable. If none, replace
connected). the cable.
Connection error of Network settings are incor- See item 9 above.
the network. rect with the MFP.
Network settings are incor- See item 9 above.
rect with the PC.
FW version mis- The version does not match See item 7 above.
match. with the MFP firmware and
the Printing system firm-
ware.
Connection error of Defective cable or poor Reinsert the connector. Also
the harness contact. check for continuity within the
between the Main connector cable. If none, replace
board and the the cable.
Bridge board (dam-
aged or loose con-
nected).
Defective bridge Bridge board mounting Replace the bridge board.
board. error.
Defective main Main board mounting error. Replace the main board.
board.
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in Replace the Printing system.
system. the Printing system.
1-4-320
2N3/2N2
Problem/ Condition of Check procedures/ Corrective
Causes
Error code detection measures
11.Printing is not Defective bridge Bridge board mounting Replace the bridge board.
possible with Com- board. error.
mand Work Station.
Defective main Main board mounting error. Replace the main board.
board.
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in Replace the Printing system.
system. the Printing system.
12.An abnormal Connection error of Defective cable or poor Reinsert the connector. Also
printing occurs when the harness contact. check for continuity within the
printing from Com- between the Main connector cable. If none, replace
mand Work Station. board and the the cable.
Bridge board (dam-
aged or loose con-
nected).
Defective bridge Bridge board mounting Replace the bridge board and
board. error. check for correct operation.
The image data is Engine board mounting Replace the engine board and
not entered. error. check for correct operation.
Defective main Main board mounting error. Replace the main board and
board. check for correct operation.
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in Replace the Printing system and
system. the Printing system. check for correct operation.
(2) Remarks on Relay PWB replacement
To remove the FFC from the locked connector, unlock the connector by pressing the lock lever at the triangu-
lar mark.
To insert an FFC cable, hold it at both ends and insert it all the way in.
[State of lock] [Lock release/FFC detaching]
FFC
Lock lever
Figure 1-4-7
1-4-321
2N3/2N2
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-4-322
2N3/2N2
1-5 Assembly and disassembly
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power
lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. Then, unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
When the fax kit is installed, be sure to disconnect the modular cable before starting disassembly.
When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands.
The PWBs are susceptible to static charge.
Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook.
Take care not to get the cables caught.
To reassemble the parts, use the original screws. If the types and the sizes of screws are not known, refer to
the PARTS LIST.
(2) Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum.
When removing the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between -20°C/-4°F and 40°C/104°F and at a relative humidity not
higher than 85% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
(3) Toner
Store the toner container in a cool, dark place.
Avoid direct light and high humidity.
1-5-1
2N3/2N2
1-5-2 Outer covers
(1) Detaching and refitting the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover
Procedure
1. Remove nine screws and then remove
the rear upper cover.
*: To fix a cover, insert the hook at the left
top first by bowing the cover.
Hook
Rear upper
cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-5-3
2. Remove the toner disposal box (see
page 1-5-147).
3. Remove nine screws.
4. Release two hanging parts and then
remove the rear lower cover.
Screw
Screw
Screws
Rear lower
cover
Screws
Figure 1-5-4
1-5-3
2N3/2N2
(2) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying cover and PF paper conveying cover
Procedure
1. Pull the cassette 1 to 4 out completely.
2. Pull the paper conveying unit out. Strap
3. Open the paper conveying cover.
4. Remove the strap and then remove the
paper conveying cover.
Paper
conveying
unit
Paper conveying
cover
Figure 1-5-5
5. Open the PF paper conveying cover.
6. Remove the strap and then remove the
PF paper conveying cover.
Strap
Strap
PF paper
conveying cover
Figure 1-5-6
1-5-4
2N3/2N2-1
(3) Detaching and refitting the right lower rear cover
Procedure
1. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-3).
2. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
3. Unhook two hooks using a flat blade
screwdriver and then remove the inter-
face cover Interface
4. Remove five screws of the right lower cover
rear cover.
5. Remove the right lower rear cover.
Screws
Right lower Interface
rear cover Screws cover
Figure 1-5-7
1-5-5
2N3/2N2
(4) Detaching and refitting the right lower front cover
Procedure
1. Pull the paper conveying unit out. Right lower
2. Open the handle cover. front cover
3. Remove four screws.
4. Unhook the hook at the bottom of the
right-bottom front cover, unhook the Hook
three hooks at the machine front side
while opening it from the near side, and
remove the right-bottom front cover.
Unhook the hook and then remove the
right lower front cover. Hooks
Hook
Screws
Handle cover
Screws
Right lower
front cover
Figure 1-5-8
1-5-6
2N3/2N2
(5) Detaching and refitting the right cover and DU cover assembly
Procedure
1. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
Screws
2. Open the MP tray.
3. Remove four screws.
Screw
Paper conveying MP tray
unit
Figure 1-5-9
4. Unhook eight hooks and then remove Right cover
the right cover and DU cover assembly.
Hooks
Hook
Hooks
DU cover
assembly Right cover
Figure 1-5-10
1-5-7
2N3/2N2
(6) Detaching and refitting the right front cover
Procedure
1. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
Paper conveying unit
2. Remove three screws.
3. Unhook three hooks and then remove Right front cover
the right front cover.
Screw
Hook
1
2 Hook
Right front Hook
cover
Screws
Figure 1-5-11
(7) Detaching and refitting the ISU right cover and right upper cover
Procedure
1. Remove two screws and then remove
the ISU right cover. Clip holder A Screws ISU Right cover
2. Remove the clip holder A.
3. Remove the screw and then remove
the clip holder B.
4. Unhook three hooks and then remove Screw
the right upper cover.
Clip holder B
Right
upper cover
Figure 1-5-12
1-5-8
2N3/2N2
5. Remove the screw.
6. Unhook three hooks and then remove
the right middle cover.
Right middle
rear cover
Screw
Figure 1-5-13
(8) Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB cover and IH electric wire cover
Procedure
IH electric wire cover
1. Remove the right middle cover (see
page 1-5-8).
2. Remove four screws and the remove
the fuser IH PWB cover.
3. Remove the IH electric wire cover.
Screws
Screw Screw
Fuser IH PWB cover
Figure 1-5-14
1-5-9
2N3/2N2
(9) Detaching and refitting the left upper cover
Procedure.
1. Remove the controller cover.
2. Remove the screw and then remove the
controller lid.
Screw
Controller lid
Controller
cover
Figure 1-5-15
3. Remove three screws.
4. Unhook six hooks and then remove the
left upper cover.
Screws
Left upper
cover
Figure 1-5-16
1-5-10
2N3/2N2
(10)Detaching and refitting the ISU front cover, ISU right cover and ISU rear cover
Procedure
1. Remove the document processor. Screws Screws
ISU front cover
2. Remove two screws and then remove
the ISU front cover.
3. Remove two screws and then remove
the ISU right cover.
ISU right cover
Figure 1-5-17
4. Remove the screw and then operation ISU rear cover
mount cover C Screw
Screw
5. Open the bridge eject cover.
6. Remove two screws and then remove
Screw
the ISU rear cover.
Operation
mount
Bridge eject cover cover C
Figure 1-5-18
1-5-11
2N3/2N2
(11)Detaching and refitting the PF rear cover
Procedure
1. Remove three screws and then remove
the PF rear cover.
Screw
Screw
Screw PF rear cover
Figure 1-5-19
(12)Detaching and refitting the DP front cover and DP front left cover
Procedure DP top cover
1. Open the DP top cover. Screw
2. Remove four screws from the upper
side and reverse side of DP. Screw
3. Pull forwards and then remove the DP DP front
front left cover and DP front cover. left cover
DP front cover
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-20
1-5-12
2N3/2N2
(13)Detaching and refitting the DP front cover and DP front left cover
Procedure
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Remove the strap from the DP top
cover.
3. Remove four screws and then remove
the DP rear cover.
Strap
Screw
DP rear cover
Screw
Screws
Figure 1-5-21
1-5-13
2N3/2N2
1-5-3 Paper feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit and PF primary paper feed
unit
Procedure
1. Pull the cassette 1 to 4 out completely.
Strap
2. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
3. Open the paper conveying cover.
4. Remove the strap and then remove the
paper conveying cover.
Paper
conveying
unit
Paper conveying
cover
Figure 1-5-22
5. Open the PF paper conveying cover.
6. Remove the strap and then remove the
PF paper conveying cover.
Strap
Strap
PF paper
conveying cover
Figure 1-5-23
1-5-14
2N3/2N2
7. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-3).
8. Unhook two hooks using a flat blade
screwdriver and then remove the inter-
face cover Interface
9. Remove five screws of the right lower cover
rear cover.
10. Remove the right lower rear cover.
Screws
Right lower Interface
Figure 1-5-24 rear cover Screws cover
Right lower
11. Open the handle cover. front cover
12. Remove four screws.
13. Unhook the hook and then remove the
right lower front cover.
Hook
Hooks
Hook
Screws
Handle cover
Screws
Right lower
front cover
Figure 1-5-25
1-5-15
2N3/2N2
14. Release two wire saddles.
15. Remove two connectors.
Connector
Wire saddles
Connector
Figure 1-5-26
Detaching the primary paper feed unit
16. Remove two screws each from primary
Primary paper
paper feed unit. feed unit
17. Remove the primary paper feed unit.
Screws
Primary paper
feed unit
Primary paper
feed unit
Figure 1-5-27
1-5-16
2N3/2N2
18. Check or replace the primary paper
feed unit and refit all the removed parts. Driving coupler
*: When refit the primary paper feed unit, Pin
you must confirm the inserted pin to the
driving coupler. Pin
19. When the primary paper feed unit is
Driving coupler
replaced, perform maintenance mode
U903 (clearing the jam counter) (see Primary paper
page 1-3-220). feed unit
Run “Maintenance counter – cassette –
cassette counter clear” with U251
(Maintenance counter set/clear) (see
page 1-3-153).
Primary paper
feed unit
Primary paper
feed unit
Figure 1-5-28
1-5-17
2N3/2N2
Detaching the PF primary paper feed unit
20. Remove the wire holder.
21. Remove the connector.
Wire holder
Connector
Figure 1-5-29
22. Remove two screws from PF primary PF primary
paper feed unit. paper feed unit
23. Remove the PF primary paper feed
unit.
Screws
PF primary
paper feed unit
Figure 1-5-30
1-5-18
2N3/2N2
24. Check or replace the PF primary paper
Pin
feed unit and refit all the removed parts.
*: When refit the PF primary paper feed
unit, you must confirm the inserted pin
to the driving coupler. Driving coupler
25. When the PF primary paper feed unit is
replaced, perform maintenance mode PF primary
U903 (clearing the jam counter) (see paper feed unit
page 1-3-220).
Run “Maintenance counter – cassette –
cassette counter clear” with U251
(Maintenance counter set/clear) (see
page 1-3-153).
PF primary
paper feed unit
Figure 1-5-31
1-5-19
2N3/2N2-2
(2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley, separation
pulley
Procedure
1. Pull out the cassette 1 completely. Cassette
2. Pull up the cassette.
Figure 1-5-32
3. Remove the cassette 2 in the same
manner as above.
Figure 1-5-33
1-5-20
2N3/2N2
4. Unhook the hook and remove the for-
warding pulley from the axle.
5. Unhook the hook and remove the feed
pulley from the axle.
Hook
Paper feed
pulley
Forwarding pulley
Figure 1-5-34
6. Unhook the two hooks and then remove
the cover.
Hooks
Cover
Figure 1-5-35
1-5-21
2N3/2N2
7. Unhook the hook and remove the sepa-
ration pulley from the axle.
*: Confirm that the contact between the
feed roller and separation roller is
released.
8. Clean or replace the forwarding pulley, Hook
paper feed pulley and separation pulley.
9. Refit the forwarding pulley, paper feed
pulley and separation pulley to the pri-
mary paper feed unit.
*: Make sure that the collars are properly
installed by checking its color.
Forwarding pulley (Collar is white.) Separation pulley
Paper feed pulley (Collar is white.)
Separation pulley (Collar is black.)
10. When the forwarding pulley, paper feed
pulley or separation pulley is replaced,
perform maintenance mode U903
(clearing the jam counter) (see page 1-
3-220).
11. Execute Maintenance Counter - Cas-
sette - Counter Clear of U251 (Mainte-
nance counter limits/clear) (see page 1-
3-153).
Figure 1-5-36
1-5-22
2N3/2N2
(3) Detaching and refitting the PF forwarding pulley (right), PF paper feed pulley
(right) and PF separation pulley (right).
Procedure
1. Pull the cassette 3 completely.
2. Remove the four screws and then
remove the cassette 3.
Cassette 3
Screw Screw
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-37
3. Remove the hook and remove the for-
warding pulley (right) from the axle.
4. Remove the hook and remove the feed
pulley (right) from the axle.
Hook
Paper feed
pulley (right)
Forwarding
pulley (right)
Figure 1-5-38
1-5-23
2N3/2N2
5. Unhook the two hooks and then remove
the cover.
Hooks
Cover
Figure 1-5-39
6. Remove the hook and remove the sep-
aration pulley (right) from the axle.
*: Confirm that the nipping between the
feed roller and separation roller is
released.
7. Clean or replace the forwarding pulley
(right), paper feed pulley (right) and Hook
separation pulley (right).
8. Refit the forwarding pulley (right), paper
feed pulley (right) and separation pulley
(right) to the primary paper feed unit.
*: Make sure that the collars are properly
installed by checking its color. Separation
Forwarding pulley (right) (Collar is pulley (right)
white.)
Paper feed pulley (right) (Collar is
white.)
Separation pulley (right) (Collar is
black.)
9. When the forwarding pulley (right),
paper feed pulley (right) or separation
pulley (right) is replaced, perform main-
tenance mode U903 (clearing the jam
counter) (see page 1-3-220).
Figure 1-5-40
10. Execute Maintenance Counter - Cassette - Counter Clear of U251 (Maintenance counter limits/clear)
(see page 1-3-153).
1-5-24
2N3/2N2
(4) Detaching and refitting the PF forwarding pulley (left), PF paper feed pulley (left)
and PF separation pulley (left).
Procedure
1. Remove the cassette 2 and the cas- Stopper
sette cover (see page 1-5-20).
2. Pull out cassette3 and 4 completely. Screw
3. Pull the PF paper conveying unit.
4. Remove the screw and remove the
stopper.
5. Remove the PF paper conveying unit.
PF paper
conveying unit
Cassette 4
Cassette 3
Figure 1-5-41
6. Turn the PF paper conveying unit inside
out. Screw
7. Remove the screw and then remove the
cover.
Cover
PF paper conveying
unit (lower side)
Figure 1-5-42
1-5-25
2N3/2N2
8. Remove the hook and remove the for-
warding pulley (left) from the axle.
9. Remove the hook and remove the feed
pulley (left) from the axle.
Hook
Paper feed
pulley (left)
Forwarding
pulley (left)
Figure 1-5-43
10. Unhook the two hooks and then remove
the cover.
Hooks
Cover
Figure 1-5-44
1-5-26
2N3/2N2
11. Remove the hook and remove the sep-
aration pulley (left) from the axle.
12. Clean or replace the forwarding pulley
(left), paper feed pulley (left) and sepa-
ration pulley (left).
13. Refit the forwarding pulley (left), paper Hook
feed pulley (left) and separation pulley
(left) to the primary paper feed unit.
*: Make sure that the collars are properly
installed by checking its color.
Forwarding pulley (left) (Collar is white.)
Paper feed pulley (left) (Collar is white.)
Separation pulley (left) (Collar is black.)
14. When the forwarding pulley (left), paper
feed pulley (left) or separation pulley Separation
(left) is replaced, perform maintenance pulley (left)
mode U903 (clearing the jam counter)
(see page 1-3-220).
15. Execute Maintenance Counter - Cas-
sette - Counter Clear of U251 (Mainte-
nance counter limits/clear) (see page 1-
3-153).
Figure 1-5-45
1-5-27
2N3/2N2
(5) Detaching and refitting the MP tray paper feed unit
Procedure
1. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
Screws
2. Open the MP tray.
3. Remove four screws.
Screw
Paper conveying MP tray
unit
Figure 1-5-46
4. Unhook eight hooks and then remove Right cover
the right cover and DU cover assembly.
Hooks
Hook
Hooks
DU cover
assembly Right cover
Figure 1-5-47
1-5-28
2N3/2N2
5. Remove two connectors. Connecor
6. Release the wire saddle.
7. Remove the wire saddle.
*: To refit the wire saddle, be sure to fit in
the positioning hole that was previously
used.
Wire
Connecor saddle
Installation
hole
Wire
saddle
Figure 1-5-48
8. Remove the MP tray.
*: When refitting the MP tray, insert it in
the MP tray paper feed unit side by
turning the lift arm.
MP tray
Lift arm
MP tray paper feed unit MP tray
Figure 1-5-49
1-5-29
2N3/2N2
9. Remove two screws.
10. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit.
Screw
MP tray
paper feed unit
Screw
MP tray
paper feed unit
Figure 1-5-50
1-5-30
2N3/2N2
(6) Detaching and refitting the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP
separation pulley
Procedure
DU lower guide
1. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit
(see page 1-5-28).
Detaching the forwarding pulley and paper
feed pulley
2. Unhook three hooks and then remove Hooks
the DU lower guide.
*: Remove the DU lower guide easily by
bending the top base that the hook is
hooking because the hook of the DU Hook
lower guide lacks flexibility.
MP tray
paper feed unit
Top base
Figure 1-5-51
3. Remove the stop ring A and then slide
the driving joint. Driving joint Stop ring A
4. Slide the bush A.
5. Remove the stop ring B and then Bush A
remove the bush B.
Bush B
Stop ring B
Figure 1-5-52
1-5-31
2N3/2N2
6. Unhook the hook of the feed holder Spring
assembly.
Hook
7. Remove the spring and the feed holder
assembly from the top base.
Feed holder assembly
Top base
Top base
Spring
Hook
Figure 1-5-53
8. Remove one stop ring. Oneway gear MP paper feed pulley
Z30R
9. Pull the feed MPF shaft out. Oneway gear Stop ring
10. Remove two bushes, one way gear Z30R
Z30R and MP paper feed pulley.
*: To refit the one-way gear Z30R, mount
the gear in the correct direction as
shown.
Oneway
clutch Bush
Bush
Stop ring
Feed MFP shaft
Figure 1-5-54
1-5-32
2N3/2N2
11. Remove the pickup MPF shaft from the Pickup MPF shaft
axis holes of feed MPF holder.
12. Pull the pickup gear Z30R and MP for- MP forwarding pulley
warding pulley out from the pickup MPF
shaft. Pickup gear Z30R
Feed gear Z26H
Axis hole
Feed MPF holder
Axis hole
Figure 1-5-55
Detaching the MP separation pulley
13. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
middle guide.
Hook
Hook
Middle guide
Figure 1-5-56
1-5-33
2N3/2N2
14. Remove the spring.
15. Release the joint by sliding the retard
holder assembly.
Joint
Retard holder
assembly
Spring
Figure 1-5-57
16. Remove the retard holder assembly by
turning it as shown.
Retard holder
assembly
Figure 1-5-58
1-5-34
2N3/2N2
17. Remove two stop rings.
Retard MPF shaft
18. Remove two bushes.
19. Pull the retard MPF shaft out and then
remove the torque limiter and the MP
Torque limiter
separation pulley.
20. Clean or replace the MP forwarding pul- MP separation
pulley
ley, MP paper feed pulley and MP sepa-
ration pulley.
21. Refit the MP forwarding pulley, MP
paper feed pulley and MP separation Bush
pulley to the MP tray paper feed unit.
22. When the MP forwarding pulley, MP
paper feed pulley or MP separation pul-
ley is replaced, perform maintenance
mode U903 (clearing the jam counter)
(see page 1-3-220). Stop ring
Retard holder
Bush
Stop ring
Figure 1-5-59
1-5-35
2N3/2N2
1-5-4 Optical section
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp
Notes on handling the LED mount assembly
Do not touch the diffusion seat and the light guid- Diffusion seat
LED mount assembly
ing plate. Light guiding
Use air blow when you clean the diffusion seat, plate
the light guiding plate, and reflector.
Do not clean it using a cleaning cloth that Reflector
adheres the fiber easily.
LED lamp
PWB
White LED
Diffusion seat
Figure 1-5-60
Procedure
1. Remove the document processor. Screws
ISU front cover Screws
2. Remove two screws and then remove
the ISU front cover.
3. Remove two screws and then remove
the ISU right cover.
ISU right cover
Figure 1-5-61
1-5-36
2N3/2N2
4. Remove the screw and then operation ISU rear cover
mount cover C Screw
Screw
5. Open the bridge eject cover.
6. Remove two screws and then remove
Screw
the ISU rear cover.
Operation
mount
Bridge eject cover cover C
Figure 1-5-62
7. Remove the platen. Platen
8. Peels two films off.
Film Film
Film Film
Figure 1-5-63
1-5-37
2N3/2N2
9. Move the LED mount assembly to the LED mount assembly
cutting lack part. Cutting lack part
10. Unhook the hook and remove the FFC
cover from LED mount assembly.
11. Remove the FFC from the FFC connec-
tor.
12. Unhook two hooks and remove the FFC
guide from the LED mount assembly.
Cutting lack part
FFC cover
Hook
Hook
FFC
FFC connector
LED mount assembly
FFC guide Hook
Figure 1-5-64
13. Remove two screws and then remove Screw
the LED mount assembly.
14. Check or replace the LED mount
assembly and refit all the removed LED mount assembly
parts.
*: When cleaning the reflector, the light Screw
guiding plate and the diffusion sheet of
the LED mount assembly, clean it by air
blow. Not to leave the hair dust.
15. When the LED mount assembly is
replaced, perform maintenance mode
U411 (Adjusting the scanner automati-
cally) (see page 1-3-174).
Figure 1-5-65
1-5-38
2N3/2N2
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires
NOTE
When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front: (P/N: 302H717381), gray
Machine rear: (P/N: 302H717391), black
Fitting requires the following tools
Two frame securing tools (P/N 302FZ17100)
Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 3596811)
Procedure
1. Remove the exposure lamp
Mirror 1 frame Cutting lack part
(see page 1-5-36).
2. Remove each screw and then remove
front and rear wire holder plates from
mirror 1 frame.
3. Remove the mirror 1 frame.
Cutting lack part
Rear wire holder plate
Front wire holder plate
Screw
Screw
Mirror 1 frame
Mirror 1 frame
Figure 1-5-66
1-5-39
2N3/2N2
4. Remove the round terminals from the
Round terminal
scanner wire springs on scanner unit Round terminal
left side.
5. Remove the scanner wire.
Red-marked
Red-marked
Scanner wire
spring
Scanner wire
spring
Figure 1-5-67
Fitting the scanner wires
6. Move the mirror 2 frame as shown in Frame securing tool
the figure and insert two frame securing
tools into the positioning holes at the
front and rear of the machine center to
fix the mirror 2 frame in position.
Frame securing tool
Mirror 2 frame
Figure 1-5-68
1-5-40
2N3/2N2
7. Hook the round terminals (Non-red-marked) onto the catches inside of the scanner unit.(1)
8. Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame,
winding from below to above. ............... (2)
9. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit right,
winding from above to below................. ................................................................................... (3)
10. Wind the scanner wires around the scanner wire drum five turns from the rear toward the hole
in the drum. ........................................... (4)
11. Insert the locating ball on the scanner wire into the hole in the scanner wire drum.(5)
12. Wind the scanner wires three turns from the inner toward the hole in the drum.(6)
13. Install the scanner wire stoppers to the scanner wire drum to fix the wires.(7)
14. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit left,
winding from below to above. ............... (8)
15. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame,
winding from below to above. ............... (9)
16. Hook the scanner wires around the pulleys at the machine left.(10)
17. Hook the round terminal (Red-marked) onto the scanner wire spring.(11)
Five turns from Five turns from
the rear toward the rear toward
Locating ball
Three turns from Three turns from
the inner toward the inner toward
Figure 1-5-69
1-5-41
2N3/2N2
18. Remove the two scanner wire stoppers
and frame securing tools.
19. Focusing on the locating ball of the wire
drum, move aside the wires to inside.
20. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to
side to correctly locate the wires in posi-
tion.
21. Refit the mirror 1 frame.
22. Move the mirror 1 and 2 frames to the
machine left, and insert the two frame
securing tools into the positioning holes
at the front and rear of the scanner unit
to secure the frames in position.
23. Hold the wires and fix each front and Front wire holder plate Rear wire holder plate
rear wire holder plate to mirror 1 frame Frame securing tool
Frame securing tool
with the screw. Screw Screw
24. Remove the two frame securing tools.
25. Refit the exposure lamp.
Mirror 2 frame
Mirror 1 frame
Mirror 1 frame
Mirror 2 frame
Figure 1-5-70
1-5-42
2N3/2N2
(3) Detaching and refitting the ISU
Procedure
Detaching the ISU Screws
Screw
1. Worn the electrostatic prevention band
for the destruction prevention of the Lens cover
CCD board by static electricity.
2. Remove the platen (see page 1-5-36). Screw
3. Remove six screws and then remove
the lens cover.
CCD PWB
Figure 1-5-71
4. Remove the connector.
5. Remove the FFC from the FFC connec-
tor with a lock.
*: When removing the FFC from the FFC
connector with a lock, remove the FFC
after released by lifting down the lock
lever. FFC connector
FFC with a lock
Connector
Figure 1-5-72
1-5-43
2N3/2N2
6. Remove four screws and then remove
the ISU.
Screw Screw
Screw
Screw
ISU
Figure 1-5-73
Refitting the ISU
1. Install the FFT.
*: The FFT should be inserted while hold-
ing the position (A) shown in the illustra-
1
tion (A).
Figure 1-5-74
1-5-44
2N3/2N2
2. Decide the fix position of ISU by the fol-
lowing.
The right and left of machine:
Verify the number prefixed by a (a)
mark.
Match the line (c) of ISU to the position-
ing line (b) of same number on frame c
side.
Line (c) is the one which is marked with b
the appropriate number. Lens
c
The rear and front of machine: a
Match the edge (e) of ISU to the posi-
tioning line (d) on frame side.
3. Fix the ISU as before with four screws.
e
d
ISU
Figure 1-5-75
Refitting the ISU
a
4. Check the image
After replacing the CCD unit, check the
copy image. According to the condition,
execute the procedures below.
1. In case of no problem on the image, go
to “9.Image Adjustment”
2. In case a part of the image is whitish
from the leading edge or the back-
ground image appears like the illustra-
tion “a”, go to “5. The CCD unit Height
Adjustment 1”.
b
3. In case white vertical lines appear on
the image like the illustration “b”, go to
“7. The CCD unit Height Adjustment 2”.
*: The CCD unit height adjustment is nec-
essary for above 2 and 3 because an
optical axis shifts and the light path is
not secured.
Figure 1-5-76
1-5-45
2N3/2N2
5. The CCD unit Height Adjustment 1
In case a part of the image is whitish from the leading edge or the background image appears like the
illustration “a”.
The replacement ISU comes complete with a ISU(CCD unit)
large spacer (B) and a small spacer (C). A
B C
Spacer (large) Spacer (small)
Figure 1-5-77
1. Set the spacer (large) (B) into the inside
screw holes at the CCD sensor side.
2. Check the image.
In case of no problem on the image, go B
to “9. Image Adjustment”.
In case of the problem on the image, go
to “6. Re-adjustment 1”.
Figure 1-5-78
6. Re-adjustment 1
1. In case the whitish or background c
image still appears.
c: Insert the additional spacer (small) (C)
2. In case the white vertical lines appear. C
d: Remove the spacer (large) (B) and insert the B
spacer (small) (C).
Check the image and go to “9. Image Adjust-
ment”.
Figure 1-5-79
1-5-46
2N3/2N2-1
7. The CCD unit Height Adjustment 2
In case of white vertical lines appear like the illustration “b” on page 1.
1. Set the spacer (large) (B) into the out-
side screw holes at the lens side.
2. Check the image.
In case of no problem on the image, go
to “9. Image Adjustment”.
In case of the problem on the image, go B
to “8. Re-adjustment 2”.
Figure 1-5-80
8. Re-adjustment 2
c
1. In case the white vertical lines still
appear.
c: Insert the additional spacer (small)
(C) C
B
In case the whitish or background
image appears.
d: Remove the spacer (large) (B) and
insert the spacer (small) (C).
2. Check the image and go to “9. Image
Adjustment”.
d
Figure 1-5-81
9. Image Adjustment
Execute the U411 Auto Adjustment (see page 1-3-174).
Set a new auto adjustment chart (part no. 7505000005) on the contact glass.
Execute the U411- Target – Auto –Table (chart1) - ALL.
10. Refit all the removed parts.
1-5-47
2N3/2N2
(4) Detaching and refitting the LSU
Procedure
1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page
1-5-3).
2. Remove the controller cover.
3. Remove the screw and then remove the
controller lid.
Screw
Controller lid
Controller
cover
Figure 1-5-82
4. Remove three screws.
5. Unhook six hooks and then remove the
left upper cover.
Screws
Left upper
cover
Figure 1-5-83
1-5-48
2N3/2N2
6. Remove four screws and then remove
the LSU retainer.
Screws
LSU retainer
Screws
Figure 1-5-84
7. Remove two screws and then remove
the middle feed plate and the middle
feed plate B.
8. Remove two LSU retainer pins and two
springs.
Spring
LSU retainer pin
Screw
Middle feed plate B
Screw
Middle feed plate
Figure 1-5-85
1-5-49
2N3/2N2
9. Pull the LSU out a little.
10. Remove the following connector from
the LSU.
FFC with a connector: 2pcs
Connector: 2pcs
*: When remove the FFC with a connec-
tor, unlock the lock by pressing the lock
lever in its center.
LSU
Connectors
FFC with
a connector
FFC with a connector
Figure 1-5-86
11. Pull the LSU out from the body of the
machine.
LSU
Figure 1-5-87
1-5-50
2N3/2N2
12. Remove seven screws and then
remove the LSU mount lid. Screws
Screws
Screws
LSU mount lid
Screw
Figure 1-5-88
13. Remove the screw.
14. Unhook four hooks and then remove
the LSU relay PWB cover.
Screw
Hooks
LSU relay PWB cover
Hooks
Figure 1-5-89
1-5-51
2N3/2N2
LSU(K)
15. Remove all the connectors and the FFC
connectors with a lock.
*: When remove the FFC from the FFC
connector with a lock, removing it after
release the lock by lifting the lock lever
up.
*: For the 75 ppm model, detach two FFC
connectors from LSU (K).
FFC
16. Remove the electric wire from the elec- (75 ppm
tric wire support portion. model only)
17. Remove the FFC from the FFC support
potion.
FFC support portions
Electric wire
support portion
FFC
FFC connector Connector
with a lock
Figure 1-5-90
18. Remove the LSU retainer pins and the
springs.
19. Remove two screws each and then
remove the LSU front holder.
Screw
Spring LSU front holder
LSU retainer pin Screw
Figure 1-5-91
1-5-52
2N3/2N2
20. Wrap an antistatic discharging belt LSU (rear side) LSU (front side)
around your wrist to prevent damage to Support
the LSU. portions
*: Do not touch terminals and FFC con-
tacts in the APC PWB of the LSU.
21. Remove four LSUs, following the pre-
cautions and instructions below.
(1) Lift the far end of the LSU.
(2) Unhook the protrusions at the front
of the LSU.
*: Be sure to handle the front and rear Support portions
handholds when handling the LSU.
LSU(Y)
*: Do not get the LSU in direct contact
with the holding frame subsequently
applying shocks to the polygon motor
inside.
22. Check or replace the LSU and refit all
the removed parts.
*: When reconnecting FFCs, be sure to
insert the FFC all the way in with the
FFC connector.This is to avoid a
LSU(Y)
lengthy servicing due to a possible error
which could cause re-disassembly and LSU(C)
-assembly. LSU(M)
LSU(K)
23. When replacing the new LSU, proceed
as follows:
1)Perform the color registration adjust- LSU support frame
ments described on next page, 5.
2)Perform maintenance mode U119 LSU (rear side) LSU (front side)
(Setting the drum) (see page 1-3-93).
3)Perform maintenance mode U464 (1) (2)
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-198).
4)Perform maintenance mode U412
(Adjusting the uneven density) (see
page 1-3-183).
5)Perform maintenance mode U464
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-198). Bos
6)Perform maintenance mode U410
(Adjusting the halftone automatically)
(see page 1-3-173).
LSU(C)
LSU(M)
LSU(K)
Figure 1-5-92
1-5-53
2N3/2N2
(5) Color registration adjustment
Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit.
Procedure
1. Press the system menu key.
2. Press [Adjustment/Maintenance], [Calibration] and then [Start]. Calibration begins.
Auto correction
3. Press [Color Registration], [Auto] and then [Start]. A chart is printed.
4. Place the printed chart as the original and then [Start]. Color registration begins.
Chart for adjustment
Figure 1-5-93
Manual correction
5. Press [Color Registration], [Manual], [Chart] and then [Ptint]. A chart is printed.
6. Press [Registration].
Read figures at MH-1 to 7/CH-1 to 7/YH-1 to 7 and MV-3/CV-3/YV-3 of the reference chart and
enter the figure marked at the scale which the BK fine line is in line with the M/C/Y fine lines,
using the +/- keys.
7. Press [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.
(example)
When a red bar exactly coincides
Chart for adjustment with B, enter B as a value.
Figure 1-5-94
1-5-54
2N3/2N2
8. Press [Chart] and [Print] to print a chart.
9. Verify that each scale is within the
range of 1to A. If they are within the
range, proceed to step 10.
If scales are out of range, repeat steps
6 through 9.
The scale must be corresponding
within the range of "A" from "1".
Figure 1-5-95
10. Verify that scales of MV-1,2,4,5/CV-
1,2,4,5/YV-1,2,4,5 coincide within the
range of 1 to A.
If they are within the range, adjustment
is complete.
If they are out of range, proceed to step
11.
Chart for adjustment
Figure 1-5-96
If manual color registration has failed:
11. If the balance between V-1 and V-5 is
more than 2 scales (sample 1) or less
than -2
scales (sample 2), perform the following
steps:
Sample 1 Sample 2
V-1 V-2 V-3 V-4 V-5 V-1 V-2 V-3 V-4 V-5
Figure 1-5-97
1-5-55
2N3/2N2
12. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-5-60).
13. Rotate the adjustment knob using a 5 mm hex wrench.
Direction of rotation
(V-1 - V-5) >= 2 scales (sample 1): rotate counterclockwise.
(V-1 - V-5) <= -2 scales (sample 2): rotate clockwise.
Number of rotation
(V-1- V-5) x 4 clicks
14. Refit the inner unit.
15. Perform calibration using U464 after switching off and on the main power switch.
16. Print a reference chart (U469) and verify the result.
Caution
After the adjustment for the abgle of the mirror has been made, run the maintenance mode U464
(Calibration). (see page 1-3-198)
Hexagon socket
Allen wrench
Hexagon socket Hexagon socket Hexagon socket
Figure 1-5-98
1-5-56
2N3/2N2
(6) LSU squareness adjustment
Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit.
<confirmation >
1. Execute the light axis adjustment using <Test copy>
the maintenance mode U034 (paper A A'
timing data settings).
2. Print 5 test copies. (From any of the
paper sources)
In the direction of paper travel
*Measure the difference of AA' from
the reference value of 20mm and
verify how much the right and left
alignments differ.
Figure 1-5-99
3. If the test copy appears to shift in the
direction of main scanning (due to (test copies sample) <paper conveyance
LSU), measure the amount of shift* and
<due to LSU> failure>
perform the following:
*: If the test copy appears to shift in the
directions of both main and sub scan-
ning, the following procedure is not nec-
essary because a paper conveyance
failure is suspected.
Figure 1-5-100
<adjust>
1. Remove the left cover (see page 1-5-
10)
2. Remove four screws and then remove
the LSU retainer.
Screws
LSU retainer
Screws
Figure 1-5-101
1-5-57
2N3/2N2
3. Loosen the two screws, position the Adjustment bracket
alignment board and the LSU fixing
mount so that they are exactly aligned,
and fix the two screws. The scale posi-
tion should be determined depending
on the amount of shifts sight-checked in
step 2 of the section Confirmation
above.
4. Mount the LSU mounting bracket on the
machine using the four screws.
5. Perform the steps 1 and 2 above again
and verify that the shifts are improved.
6. After the LSU squareness has been Screws
adjusted, perform the following:
Perform maintenance mode U464 LSU retainer
(Calibration). (see page 1-3-198)
Perform maintenance mode U469 (Auto
color registration correction) (see page
1-3-206).
Figure 1-5-102
Knob
Scales on adjustment bracket
To adjust, move the knob left and right so that
the marking on the adjuster bracket and that on
the LSU mounting bracket are coincided.
Scales on LSU
1.0 0 -1.0
Mounting Bracket
㧖0.2 increment for the scale
Figure 1-5-103
1-5-58
2N3/2N2
Amount of adjustment changes (reference)
Amount of image shifts Scale Scale position
position
Farthest left
1.0
(about 1.5mm)
0.67 1.0
Right side up 0.53 0.8
0.40 0.6
0.27 0.4
0.13 0.2
Reference value 0 0
0.13 -0.2
0.27 -0.4
0.40 -0.6
Left side up 0.53 -0.8
0.67 -1.0
Farthest right
1.0
(about 1.5mm)
1-5-59
2N3/2N2-3
1-5-5 Image formation section
(1) Detaching and refitting the inner unit
Procedure
1. Open the front upper cover.
2. Remove the toner container.
3. Close the front upper cover.
Toner containers
;
%
/
-
Front upper
cover Front middle cover
Figure 1-5-104
4. Open the waste toner box cover.
5. Remove the waste toner box. Waste toner
box cover
Waste toner
box
Figure 1-5-105
1-5-60
2N3/2N2
6. Pull the paper conveying unit out. Screw Screw
7. Remove two screws and then open the
front middle cover.
8. Lock the developer waste exit that was
unlocked (see page 1-2-25).
Front middle
cover
Front middle
cover
Figure 1-5-106
9. Release the inner unit by pulling the
lock lever and remove the inner unit.
Inner unit
Lock lever
Figure 1-5-107
1-5-61
2N3/2N2
10. Close the four toner supply shutters of
the inner unit. Inner unit
11. Lift the inner unit and take it off of the
slider rail pins on both sides.
Toner supply shutter
Slider rail
Caution
When re-inserting the inner unit, make sure
the unit is correctly inserted.
Failure to do so may result in defective
printing or difficulty locking the developer Slider rail
unit in place.
When inserting the inner unit, make sure to
close it by simultaneously pressing both
sides.
After inserting the inner unit, make sure that
the lock lever is parallel with the inner unit
cover; if not, remove the inner unit out
once, then try inserting properly.
Failure to properly insert it may result in
defective printing or difficulty locking the Pins
Pins
developer unit in place.
Slider rail Slider rail
Be sure to unlock the developer waste exit
after the inner unit has been installed.
Figure 1-5-108
The waste toner box must be installed
following the installation of the inner unit.
Inner unit
Otherwise, the waste shutter may be damaged
or the waste toner paths may be clogged.
Lock lever
Inner unit cover
Figure 1-5-109
1-5-62
2N3/2N2
(2) Detaching and refitting the developer unit and drum unit
Detaching example: Developer unit Y and Drum unit Y
Procedure
Connector
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-
75). Connector
2. Pull the transfer belt unit out a little (see
page 1-5-69). Toner supply shutter
3. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-5-
60).
4. Close the toner supply shutter.
5. Remove two connectors.
Developer unit
Figure 1-5-110
6. Pull out as one body the developer unit
and the drum unit.
(The developer unit becomes basic and
the drum units are combined.)
7. Detach the developer unit while sup-
porting the bottom.
Developer unit
Drum unit
Drum unit
Developer unit
Figure 1-5-111
1-5-63
2N3/2N2-4
8. Remove the drum unit from the devel-
oper unit. Drum unit
9. Check or replace the drum unit and the
developer unit and refit all the removed
parts.
Developer unit
Figure 1-5-112
*: When a new development unit is
installed, the developing roller protec-
tive sheet must be removed.
*: To install the drum unit onto the devel-
oper unit, insert the front end first, then
the rear end of the unit.
Developer roller
protection seat
Figure 1-5-113
10. When replacing the new developer unit, proceed as follows:
1)Perform maintenance mode U140 (AC calibration) (see page 1-3-101).
2)Perform maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-198).
3)Perform maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page 1-3-206).
4)Perform maintenance mode U410 (Adjusting the halftone automatically) (see page 1-3-173).
11. When replacing the new drum unit, proceed as follows:
1)Performing LSU cleaning (see the operation guide)
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Laser Scanner Cleaning].
Press [Execute] to perform LSU cleaning.
2)Perform maintenance mode U119 (drum setup) (see page 1-3-93).
3)Perform maintenance mode U930 (clearing the charger roller count) (see page 1-3-231).
4)Perform maintenance mode U140 (AC calibration) (see page 1-3-101).
5)Perform maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-198).
6)Perform maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page 1-3-206).
7)Perform maintenance mode U412 (Adjusting the uneven density) (see page 1-3-183).
8)Perform maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-198).
9)Perform maintenance mode U410 (Adjusting the halftone automatically) (see page 1-3-173).
1-5-64
2N3/2N2
(3) Detaching and refitting the charger roller unit
Detaching example: Charger roller unit Y
Procedure
1. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-5-
60).
2. Pull out the charger roller unit by pick-
ing and releasing the MC lock lever.
3. Check or replace the charger roller unit
and refit all the removed parts.
*: When refitting the charger roller unit,
hook the hook curefuly by operating the
MC lock lever after inserting the charger
roller unit until click.
4. When replacing the new charger roller
unit, proceed as follows:
1) Perform maintenance mode U930
(clearing the charger roller count)
(see page 1-3-231). Charger roller unit
2) Perform maintenance mode U464
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-198).
3) Perform maintenance mode U410 Hook
(Adjusting the halftone automatically)
(see page 1-3-173).
MC lock lever
Charger roller unit
Figure 1-5-114
1-5-65
2N3/2N2
1-5-6 Transfer section
(1) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit
Procedure
1. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
2. Remove three screws. Paper conveying unit
3. Unhook three hooks and then remove Right front cover
the right front cover.
Screw
Hook
1
2 Hook
Right front Hook
cover
Screws
Figure 1-5-115
4. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
conveying inner cover from the paper Paper
conveying unit
conveying unit.
Hook
Hook
Conveying inner cover
Figure 1-5-116
1-5-66
2N3/2N2
5. Remove four screws.
Paper conveying unit
6. Remove the paper conveying unit by
lifting upward.
Screws Screws
Paper conveying unit
Figure 1-5-117
1-5-67
2N3/2N2
(2) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt unit
Procedure
1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see
page 1-5-67).
2. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-
75).
3. Remove the connector.
Connector
Figure 1-5-118
4. Pull out the transfer belt unit by lifting up
both ends.
Transfer belt unit
Figure 1-5-119
1-5-68
2N3/2N2
5. Remove the transfer belt unit.
6. Check or replace the transfer belt unit
and refit all the removed parts.
*: When refitting the new transfer belt
Transfer belt unit
unit, set the projected part aligned with
the rail entrance.
Hold the transfer belt unit at its ends
and insert all the way in, then press
firmly into the machine.
7. When replacing the new transfer belt
unit, proceed as follows:
1)Perform maintenance mode U469
(Transfer belt speed correction) (see
page 1-3-206).
2)Perform maintenance mode U464
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-198).
3)Perform maintenance mode U469
(Auto color registration correction)
(see page 1-3-206).
4)Perform maintenance mode U410
(Adjusting the halftone automatically)
(see page 1-3-173).
Transfer belt unit
Rail entrance
Projection part
Rail entrance
Projection
part
Transfer belt unit Transfer belt unit
Figure 1-5-120
1-5-69
2N3/2N2
(3) Detaching and refitting the cleaning pre brush
Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit (see page
1-5-69).
2. Unhook the front and back springs from
the hooks.
Spring Spring
Transfer
belt unit
Figure 1-5-121
3. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
cleaning cover.
Hook Hook
Cleaning cover
Figure 1-5-122
1-5-70
2N3/2N2
4. Remove the cleaning pre brush by turn-
ing it as shown. Cleaning pre brush
5. Check or replace the cleaning pre brush
and refit all the removed parts. 2
Figure 1-5-123
*: Hook the springs back in place onto the
cleaning pre brush when installing. Spring
Spring
Figure 1-5-124
1-5-71
2N3/2N2
(4) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller
Procedure
1. Pull out the paper conveying unit.
Paper conveying
unit
Figure 1-5-125
Transfer roller (shaft)
2. Loosen two fixed screws on the TC Bearing
guide. Bearing Stop ring
3. Remove the stop ring.
4. Unhook the hook and remove the TC
gear Z29R.
5. Remove two bearings. Transfer
6. Remove the transfer roller. roller (shaft)
TC gear Z29R
Hook
Transfer roller
TC guide
Screw
Screw
TC guide
Figure 1-5-126
1-5-72
2N3/2N2
7. Check or replace the transfer roller and
refit all the removed parts.
*: When refitting the transfer roller, con-
firm that the terminal of the ground plate
is in contact with the ground plate in the
frame.
8. When replacing the new transfer roller,
proceed as follows:
1)Perform maintenance mode U127
(clearing the transfer counter) (see
page 1-3-94). Ground plate
2)Perform maintenance mode U464
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-198).
3)Perform maintenance mode U469
(Auto color registration correction)
(see page 1-3-206).
4)Perform maintenance mode U410
(Adjusting the halftone automatically)
(see page 1-3-173). Ground plate Ground plate
(terminal) (frame)
Figure 1-5-127
1-5-73
2N3/2N2
1-5-7 Fuser section
(1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit
Procedure
1. Pull out the paper conveying unit.
2. Remove the screw and then the fuser
wire cover.
3. Remove two connectors
Connector Connector
Fuser wire cover
Screw
Paper
conveying unit
Figure 1-5-128
1-5-74
2N3/2N2
4. Remove two screws (M4 × 12) and then
remove the fuser unit.
5. Check or replace the fuser unit and refit
all the removed parts.
6. When replacing the new fuser unit, pro-
ceed as follows:
1)Perform maintenance mode U167
(clearing the fuser count) (see page
1-3-113).
2)Perform maintenance mode U464
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-198).
Fuser unit Screws
3)Perform maintenance mode U469
(M4 x 12)
(Auto color registration correction)
(see page 1-3-206).
4)Perform maintenance mode U410
(Adjusting the halftone automatically)
(see page 1-3-173).
Screws
(M4 x 12)
Figure 1-5-129
1-5-75
2N3/2N2
(2) Detaching and refitting fuser IH unit
Procedure
1. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-3). Fuser IH PWB
2. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-
75). Wire holder
3. Remove the right upper cover (see
page 1-5-8).
4. Remove the right middle rear cover
(see page 1-5-8).
5. Remove four screws and then remove
the fuser IH PWB cover (see page 1-5-
9).
6. Remove the IH wire cover (see page 1-
Wire saddles Connectors
5-9). Wire holder
7. Remove two wire holders.
8. Release two wire saddles.
9. Remove two connectors from the fuser
IH PWB according to the following
notes.
*: Confirm the power plug is removed
from the outlet without fail when you
remove the connector because a high
current is supplied to fuser IH unit by
this connector.
*: Confirm the connected connector was Fuser IH PWB
surely locked when you connect this
connector again.
Figure 1-5-130
1-5-76
2N3/2N2
10. Remove two connectors.
11. Release the wire saddle. Ground
terminal
12. Remove the screw and the remove the
ground terminal. Screw
13. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
fuser IH unit.
Ground
terminal
Hook
Hook
Fuser IH unit
Wire saddle
Connectors
Figure 1-5-131
1-5-77
2N3/2N2
1-5-8 Feedshift/ switchback sections
(1) Detaching and refitting job separator
Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-
75).
Connector
2. Remove the right upper cover (see
page 1-5-8).
3. Remove the connector.
4. Remove two screws and the remove
the job separator.
Screw
Screw Job separator
Figure 1-5-132
1-5-78
2N3/2N2-3
(2) Detaching and refitting eject unit
Procedure
1. Remove the job separator (see page 1-
5-79).
2. Remove the screw and then remove the
arm hinge cover A and B.
Screw
Arm hinge
cover B
Arm hinge
cover A
Figure 1-5-133
3. Remove the screw and then remove the Screw
operation mount cover B.
Operation mount
cover B
Figure 1-5-134
1-5-79
2N3/2N2-1
4. Remove the connector.
5. Remove two screws and the remove
the eject unit.
Connector
Screw
Eject unit
Screw
Figure 1-5-135
1-5-80
2N3/2N2
1-5-9 PWBs
(1) Detaching and refitting the main PWB
Procedure
1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page
1-5-3).
2. Remove the controller cover.
3. Remove the screw and then remove the
controller lid.
Screw
Controller lid
Controller
cover
Figure 1-5-136
1-5-81
2N3/2N2
4. Release seven wire saddles on the con- Wire holder
troller box. Wire
saddles Wire saddles
5. Remove three wire holders.
Controller box
Wire
saddle
Wire
saddles
Wire holders
Figure 1-5-137
1-5-82
2N3/2N2
6. Remove the connector from the DP
relay PWB,
7. Remove the following connectors that Connector
connected to the main PWB from the
DP relay PWB
outside of the control box.
YC25
YC11
YC30
YC42
YC43 (Connector type FFC)
YC21 (WH)
YC22 (WH) Controller box
YC26 (BK) Main PWB
YC6
YC12 YC25 YC6 YC12
YC11
*: Before removing the connector type YC30
FFC YC43, unlock the lock by pressing
the lock levers at both ends.
YC42 YC43 YC21
YC26
YC22
Main PWB
Figure 1-5-138
8. Remove five screws.
9. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
controller box.
Controller box
Hook
Screw Hook
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-5-139
1-5-83
2N3/2N2
10. Remove the following connectors that Main PWB
connected to the main PWB.
YC23
YC27
YC32
YC8 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC9
YC1 [BLACK] (with a lock)
YC2 [BLUE] (with a lock)
YC23
*: When removing the FFC from the FFC
connector with a lock, remove the FFC
YC27
after released by lifting down the lock BLACK
YC32 YC1
lever. BLUE
YC2
YC8
YC9
FFC connector with a lock
Main PWB
Controller box
[State of lock] [Lock release/FFC detaching]
blue-colored tape
FFC
Lock lever Lock lever
Figure 1-5-140
1-5-84
2N3/2N2
Screws
11. Release the wire saddle.
12. Remove two screws.
13. Remove the fan motor holder.
Fan mootor holder
Controller box
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-141
14. Remove two screws and then remove Screws
the DP relay PWB. Main PWB
15. Remove seven screws from the main
PWB. Screws
Screws
Screw
Screw
DP raley PWB
Main PWB
Figure 1-5-142
1-5-85
2N3/2N2
16. Remove the main PWB by releasing the
projection of ground plate in the net-
work connector.
17. Check or replace the main PWB and Network connector
refit all the removed parts.
*: When replacing the main PWB, remove
the following devices from the main
PWB and then reattach it to the new
main PWB (see page 1-5-88).
Network connector
Projections
EEPROM (YC14) for ground
Memory DDR (YS1, YS3)
Main PWB
Memory Memory EEPROM
Main PWB DDR (YS1) DDR (YS3) (YC14)
YS1 YC14
YS3
Figure 1-5-143
1-5-86
2N3/2N2
(2) Remarks on main PWB replacement
When replacing the main PWB, remove the EEPROM (YC14) and DIMM (YS1,YS3) from the main PWB that
has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PWB.
EEPROM
Main PWB
YC14
1GB
2GB
Figure 1-5-144
When refitting DIMM, Refit them to the original positions.
* : YS1:1GB YS3:2GB To avoid mounting a wrong memory chip, identify the memory by its label.
Main PWB
YS1
1GB YS3
2GB
DIMM
1GB
2GB
Figure 1-5-145
If the main PWB was replaced with a service supplied part, perform the following.
1. Insert the USB flash device in which an upgrade pack of the latest firmware or the Main/MMI/Browser
and Language BR (excluding Dictionary) were copied, into the slot on the machine and turn power on.
(see page 1-6-1).
2. After the main-circuit PWB has been replaced, perform U026 to restore backed-up data.
*: Do not replace the main-circuit PWB and the HDD at the same time.
(Otherwise, the settings retained by U026 in the HDD will not become restorable.)
*: Referring to the U000 maintenance report printed previously, enter the following values.
U278 Setting the delivery date
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
U952 Maintenance mode workflow
*:Since the U952 settings are not printed on the maintenance report, perform U952 to register settings
again.
1-5-87
2N3/2N2-1
3. Reset machine settings.(Resets system menu settings modified at setup to their defaults.)
Main items for settings
[Date/Timer] - Date/Time settings
[Date/Timer] - Timer settings (Sleep timer)
[Edit Destination] - One-touch presetting
[User/Job accounting] - Defaults for user authentication and job accounting only.
Resettings are not required as the data are stored in hard disk.
*: If the IP address has been changed to a printer name in printer settings, set the IP address again.
Procedure to be followed after the EEPROM on the main PWB has been replaced
1. Run U004 – model number entry.
The C0130 (mismatching model number) is displayed when the device is powered up after its EEPROM
has been replaced. Restore the counter values and serial number that are stored in the engine
EEPROM.
2. Referring to the maintenance report that was printed using U000 at setup, set the following maintenance
modes:
1) U252 - Setting the destination
2) U265 - Setting OEM purchaser code
3. Reconfigure settings if the U250 maintenance counter preset value has been changed from the initial
settings.
4. Run the following maintenance mode for image adjustment:
1) U410 – Adjusting the halftone automatically
When connecting the hard disk cables (YC1, YC2) to the PWB, match “BLACK” and “BLUE” marked on the
PWB with the connector colors.
Main PWB
BLACK
YC1
BLUE
YC2
Figure 1-5-146
1-5-88
2N3/2N2
When connecting the USB cables (YC21, YC22, YC26) to the PWB, connect to the connectors which the
cable length match.
(Connecting to any connector is satisfactory.)
Main PWB
WH
YC21
BK
YC26
YC22
WH
Figure 1-5-147
1-5-89
2N3/2N2-1
(3) Detaching and refitting the engine PWB
Procedure
1. Remove the controller box (see page 1-5-82).
2. Remove twenty four connectors of following from the engine PWB.
YC1, YC2, YC3, YC4(Connector type FFC), YC5(Connector type FFC)
YC6(Connector type FFC), YC7(Connector type FFC),
YC10(Connector type FFC), YC26, YC8, YC9, YC50(Connector type FFC)
YC47(FFC connector with a lock), YC11(Connector type FFC)
YC12(Connector type FFC), YC15, YC16, YC17, YC18, YC19, YC20, YC21, YC22, YC45
*: To remove the FFC from the locked connector YC47, unlock the connector by pressing the lock lever at
the triangular mark.
To insert an FCC cable, hold it at both ends and insert it all the way in.
*: Before removing the connector type FFCs of YC4-7 and YC10-12, unlock the lock by pressing the lock
lever in its center
*: Before removing the connector type FFC YC50, unlock the lock by pressing the lock levers at both ends.
YC27
YC18
YC22
YC26 YC21 YC20 YC19
YC17
YC1
YC16
YC2
YC45
YC3
YC15
YC13
YC12
YC6
YC4
YC5
YC11
YC10 YC47
YC7 YC50
FFC connector
YC9 YC8 with a lock
Engine PWB
[State of lock] [Lock release/FFC detaching]
FFC
Engine PWB Lock lever
Figure 1-5-148
1-5-90
2N3/2N2
3. Remove six screws.
4. Remove the engine PWB.
5. Check or replace the engine PWB and
refit all the removed parts.
*: When replacing the engine PWB,
remove the EEPROM (U100) from the
engine PWB and then reattach it to the
new engine PWB.
Screws
Screws
Screws Engine PWB
Engine PWB
U100
EEPROM
(U100)
Figure 1-5-149
1-5-91
2N3/2N2
(4) Remarks on engine PWB replacement
When replacing the engine PWB, remove the EEPROM (U100) from the engine PWB that has been removed
and then reattach it to the new engine PWB.
Engine PWB
EEPROM
U100
Figure 1-5-150
1-5-92
2N3/2N2-1
(5) Error symptom at an erroneous insertion of the engine PWB FFC
If an FFC is inserted improperly, the following symptom could be observed:
YC12
YC6
YC4
YC5
YC11
YC10
YC7 YC50
Figure 1-5-151
Engine Connect Occurrence
PWB PWB
YC6 FEED1 [System error](C0980)
[Machine failure](C6950)
[The cover is open](right cover1)
YC5 FEED1 [Machine failure](C6940)
YC4 FEED2 [Paper jam](JAM0000_02,03,10,15)
[The cover is open](right cover3)
YC7 FRONT [Machine failure](C6920)
YC10 FRONT [Machine failure](C7904)
YC11 LSU [Machine failure](C4001,C4004)
YC12 LSU [Machine failure](C4001,C4004)
[System error](C4104)
YC50 Main [System error](F040)
[System error](F186)
[Paper jam](JAM4201 to 4217)
→unusual image
1-5-93
2N3/2N2
(6) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB
Procedure
1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page Connectors
1-5-3).
2. Remove the toner disposal box (see
page 1-5-60).
3. Remove the rear lower cover (see page Connectors
1-5-3).
4. Remove six connectors.
Wire
5. Release four wire saddles.
saddles
Wire
saddles
Wire
saddles
Wire
saddle
Figure 1-5-152
6. Release six wire saddles. Wire saddles
7. Remove the following eleven connec- Power source
tors and three tabs from the power assembly
source PWB.
YC1 2-pin relay
YC3 connector
YC4
TB1
TB2
TB5 Wire saddles
YC8
YC9
YC10 Wire saddles
YC11
YC12
YC13
YC14 Power source PWB
YC16
YC17
YC3 YC17 YC14 YC12 YC16 YC13 YC10 YC11
8. Remove 2-pin relay connector. TB5
YC1
TB1 TB2
YC4 YC8 YC9
Power source PWB
Figure 1-5-153
1-5-94
2N3/2N2
9. Remove screw.
10. Remove cooling duct1.
11. Remove two screws.
12. Remove the power source assembly.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Power source
Cooling duct1 assembly
Figure 1-5-154
2-pin relay connector
13. Release wire saddle. Wire saddles
14. Remove 2-pin relay connector.
15. Remove screw.
16. Remove cooling duct2.
17. Remove eight screws.
18. Unhook the board support and then
remove the power source PWB.
19. Check or replace the power source
PWB and refit all the removed parts.
Screw
Cooling duct2
Screws
Screws
Screw
Power source PWB
Screw
Board support
Figure 1-5-155
1-5-95
2N3/2N2
(7) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 1
Procedure
1. Remove the power source PWB (see
page 1-5-95).
2. Remove the main drive unit (see page
1-5-113).
3. Remove six connectors from high volt-
age PWB 1.
High voltage PWB 1
Connectors
YC6
YC4
YC3 Connectors
YC5
YC2
YC1
High voltage
PWB 1
Connector
Figure 1-5-156
4. Remove eight screws.
5. Unhook two hooks of PWB spacer and
then remove the high voltage PWB 1.
6. Check or replace the high voltage PWB
1 and refit all the removed parts.
Screws
Screw
Screws
Screw
PWB spacer
High voltage PWB 1
Screws
Figure 1-5-157
1-5-96
2N3/2N2
(8) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 2
Procedure
1. Remove the main drive unit (see page
1-5-113).
2. Pull the transfer belt unit out a little (see
page 1-5-69).
3. Remove two connectors from the high
voltage PWB 2 assembly.
High voltage
PWB 2 assembly
Connectors High voltage
PWB 2 assembly
Figure 1-5-158
4. Remove two screws.
5. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
high voltage PWB 2.
6. Check or replace the high voltage PWB
2 and refit all the removed parts.
Hook
Hook
Screws
High voltage
PWB 2 asssembly
Figure 1-5-159
1-5-97
2N3/2N2
(9) Detaching and refitting the operation PWB
Procedure
1. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
operation hinge cover A.
Operation hinge cover A
Operation hinge cover A
Hooks
Figure 1-5-160
2. Remove two screws of the operation
Operation rear lid
rear lid.
3. Unhook four hooks and then remove
the operation rear lid. Screw
Operation rear lid
Screw
Hooks
Hooks
Figure 1-5-161
1-5-98
2N3/2N2
4. Remove the lock spring.
5. Remove two screws and then remove
Wire saddle
the USB wire (connector).
6. Release three wire saddles.
7. Remove the wire holder. Wire saddle
8. Remove three connectors.
Wire holder
Connector
Wire saddle
Screws
Connectors
USB wire
(connector)
Lock spring
Figure 1-5-162
9. Remove four screws and then remove
the operation unit.
Screws
Operation unit
Screws
Figure 1-5-163
1-5-99
2N3/2N2
10. Remove three connectors and four
[State of lock] [Lock release/FFC detaching]
FFCs from the operation PWB.
*: To remove the FFC from the locked FFC
connector A, unlock the connector by
raising the lock lever.
*: To remove the FFC from the locked
connector B, unlock the connector by
sliding the stopper. FFC
Stopper Stopper
FFC FFC FFC
FFC
Connectors
FFC connector
with a lock B
FFC connector
with a lock A
Operation
PWB
Operation unit Connectors
[State of lock] [Lock release/FFC detaching]
FFC
FFC
Lock lever
Figure 1-5-164
1-5-100
2N3/2N2
11. Remove six screws and then remove Screw Operation unit
the operation PWB. Screw
12. Check or replace the operation PWB
Screws
and refit all the removed parts. Screw
Screw
Operation unit
Figure 1-5-165
1-5-101
2N3/2N2
(10)Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB
Procedure
1. Remove seven screws and then
remove the rear upper cover.
*: To install the cover, insert the hook at
the left top first by bowing the cover.
Hook
Rear upper
cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-5-166
2. Remove the toner disposal box (see
page 1-5-147).
3. Remove nine screws.
4. Release two hanging parts and then
remove the rear lower cover.
5. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-
75). Screw
Screw
Screws
Rear lower
cover
Screws
Figure 1-5-167
1-5-102
2N3/2N2
6. Remove two screws and then remove
the ISU right cover. Clip holder A Screws ISU Right cover
7. Remove the clip holder A.
8. Remove the screw and then remove
the clip holder B.
9. Unhook three hooks and then remove Screw
the right upper cover.
Clip holder B
Right
upper cover
Figure 1-5-168
10. Remove the screw.
11. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
right middle rear cover.
Right middle
rear cover
Screw
Figure 1-5-169
1-5-103
2N3/2N2
12. Remove four screws and the remove IH electric wire cover
the fuser IH PWB cover.
13. Remove the IH wire cover.
Screws
Screw Screw
Fuser IH PWB cover
Figure 1-5-170
14. Release two wire saddles.
15. Remove four connectors from the fuser
IH PWB.
Wire saddle
Connector
Connectors
Fuser IH PWB
Connector
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-171
1-5-104
2N3/2N2
16. Remove two wire holders.
17. Remove the connector (YC27) from
feed PWB 1.
Connector
(YC27)
Feed PWB 1
Wire holder
Wire holder
Figure 1-5-172
18. Remove three screws.
IH box assembly
19. Unhook two hooks and then remove IH
box assembly.
Screw
Hook
Hook
Screws
IH box assembly
Figure 1-5-173
1-5-105
2N3/2N2
20. Remove two connectors. Connector
21. Remove the screw, and then remove
the duct. Duct
Connector
Screw
Figure 1-5-174
22. Remove eight screws. Screws
23. Unhook the hook of the board support
and then remove fuser IH PWB.
24. Check or replace the fuser IH PWB and
refit all the removed parts. Screws
Screws
Screws
Fuser IH
PWB
Board support
IH box assembly
Figure 1-5-175
1-5-106
2N3/2N2
(11)Detaching and refitting the PF main PWB and PF power source PWB
Procedure
1. Remove three screws and then remove
the PF rear cover.
Screw
Screw
Screw PF rear cover
Figure 1-5-176
Detaching the PF main PWB
2. Remove all connectors from the PF
main PWB.
PF main PWB
PF main PWB
YC12 YC11
YC14
YC5
YC15
YC8
YC2 YC4
YC10
YC7
YC13
YC16
YC1
YC3 YC6
Figure 1-5-177
1-5-107
2N3/2N2
3. Remove two screws and then remove
the PF main PWB from two holder.
4. Check or replace the PF main PWB and
refit all the removed parts.
5. Enter maintenance mode U901 after
powerup and port the counters on the
engine board to the PF main board.
Screws
PF main PWB
PF main PWB
Holder
Holder
Figure 1-5-178
1-5-108
2N3/2N2
Detaching the PF power source PWB
6. Remove two connectors and two tabs
from the PF power source PWB.
7. Remove three screws.
8. Unhook the hook of the board support
and then remove PF power source
PWB.
9. Check or replace the PF power source
PWB and refit all the removed parts.
PF power
source PWB
Board
support
Screw
Connectors
Screw
Tabs
PF power PF power
source PWB source PWB
Screw
Figure 1-5-179
1-5-109
2N3/2N2
1-5-10 Drive section
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum drive unit K and drum drive unit M, C, Y
Procedure
Detaching the drum drive unit K
1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page
1-5-3).
2. Remove the toner disposal box (see
page 1-5-147).
3. Remove the rear lower cover (see page
1-5-3).
Connector
4. Remove the connector.
5. Release the wire saddle.
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-180
6. Remove three screws.
7. Remove the drum drive unit K.
*: Do not have a shaft part alone when Screw
you carry drum drive unit K. (Have the
housing.)
*: Put support on the tip of the shaft so
that the shaft may become the horizon- Screws
tal when you put drum drive unit K on
the table etc.
Screw
(Shaft portion)
Screws
Drum drive unit K
(housing portion)
Figure 1-5-181
1-5-110
2N3/2N2
Detaching the drum drive unit K
1. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-3).
2. Remove the toner disposal box (see
page 1-5-147).
3. Remove the rear lower cover (see page
1-5-3). Connector
4. Remove the connector.
5. Release the wire saddle.
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-182
6. Remove three screws.
7. Remove the drum drive unit K.
Screw
Screws
Screw
Screws Drum drive unit K
Figure 1-5-183
8. Remove two screws. Drum Motor K
9. Remove the drive mounting bracket.
Drive mounting bracket
Screws
Figure 1-5-184
1-5-111
2N3/2N2
Detaching the drum drive unit M, C, Y
1. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-3).
2. Remove the toner disposal box (see
page 1-5-147).
3. Remove the rear lower cover (see page
1-5-3).
4. Remove two screws and then remove
the toner duct unit.
Toner duct unit
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-185
5. Release two wire saddles
6. .Remove three connectors.
Connector
Connector
Connector
Wire saddles
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-186
1-5-112
2N3/2N2
7. Remove each three screws and then
remove the drum drive unit M, C and Y.
*: Do not have a shaft part alone when
you carry drum drive unit. (Have the
housing.)
(Shaft portions)
*: Put support on the tip of the shaft so
that the shaft may become the horizon- (Housing portions)
tal when you put drum drive unit on the
table etc.
8. Check or replace the drum drive unit K
and the drum drive unit M, C, Y and refit
all the removed parts.
Drum drive
unit M Screw
Drum drive Drum drive
unit C unit Y
Screws
Figure 1-5-187
1-5-113
2N3/2N2
Detaching the drum motor M, C, Y
9. Remove the toner duct unit (See page -
1-5-113.)
10. Remove the connector.
11. Release the wire saddle.
Connector
Connector
Connector
Wire saddle
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-188
12. Remove three screws
13. Remove the drum drive unit M, C, Y.
Screw
Screws
Screw
Screws Drum drive unit M, C, Y
Figure 1-5-189
Drum Motor M, C, Y
14. Remove two screws
15. Remove the drive mounting bracket. Drive mounting bracket
Screws
Figure 1-5-190
1-5-114
2N3/2N2
(2) Detaching and refitting the main drive unit
Procedure
1. Remove the drum drive unit K and the
drum drive unit M, C, Y (see page 1-5-
111).
2. Release four wire saddles on the main
drive unit. Main drive
3. Remove four connectors. unit
Connector
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-191
4. Remove five screws.
5. Remove the main drive unit.
6. Check or replace the main drive unit
and refit all the removed parts.
Main drive
unit
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw Screw
Figure 1-5-192
1-5-115
2N3/2N2
(3) Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit, transfer drive unit and feed drive unit
Procedure
Feed PWB 1
Detaching the fuser drive unit assembly
1. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-3).
2. Remove the toner disposal box (see
page 1-5-147).
3. Remove the rear lower cover (see page
1-5-3).
4. Remove five wire holders of feed PWB
1 assembly.
5. Release two wire saddles.
Feed PWB 1
assembly
Wire holder
Wire
holder Wire
saddle Wire holder
Wire
holder
Wire holder
Wire
saddle
Figure 1-5-193
;%
;%
6. Remove the following twenty connec-
tors from the feed PWB 1. ;%
Feed PWB 1
;%
;% ;%
;%
YC1 (Connector type FFC)
YC2 (Connector type FFC)
YC3, YC4
;%
YC5, YC10
;%
YC11,YC12
YC13, YC14
YC15, YC16
;%
YC17, YC18
;%
YC19, YC20
;%
YC23, YC25
;%
YC26, YC27
;%
;%
;%
;%
*: Before removing the connector type
FFCs of YC1 and YC2, unlock the lock
by pressing the lock lever in its center. ;%;%
;%
Figure 1-5-194
1-5-116
2N3/2N2
7. Remove the FFC from the Connector
type FFC (YC4) on the engine PWB.
Remove the FFC from the Connector Engine
type FFC (YC1) on the feed PWB 2. PWB Connector type
FFC (YC4)
*: Before removing the connector type
FFCs, unlock the lock by pressing the
lock lever in its center.
FFC
Connector type
FFC (YC1)
Feed PWB 2
Figure 1-5-195
8. Remove three screws.
Feed PWB 1 assembly
9. Remove the feed PWB 1 assembly.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Feed PWB 1 assembly
Figure 1-5-196
1-5-117
2N3/2N2
10. Remove the connector.
11. Remove three screws.
12. Remove the fuser drive unit.
Fuser drive unit
Screw Fuser drive
unit
Connector
Screw Screw
Figure 1-5-197
Detaching the transfer drive unit
13. Pull out the transfer belt unit a little (see
page 1-5-69).
14. Release the clamp.
15. Remove the connector.
16. Remove three screws.
17. Remove the transfer drive unit.
Tramsfer drive unit
Tramsfer drive unit
Screw
Clamp
Connector
Screws
Figure 1-5-198
1-5-118
2N3/2N2
Detaching the feed drive unit
18. Remove three wire holders from the
feed 2 FFC guide.
Feed 2
FFC guide
Wire
holders
Figure 1-5-199
19. Remove two screws and then remove
the feed 2 FFC guide.
Feed 2
FFC guide
Screw
Screw
Screw
Feed 2
FFC guide
Screw
Figure 1-5-200
1-5-119
2N3/2N2
20. Remove the following nine connectors
from the feed PWB 2.
YC10
YC11
YC7
YC8
YC3 Feed PWB 2
YC5
YC10
YC6 YC11
YC13
YC12
YC7
YC3
YC8
YC13
YC5
YC6
YC12
Feed PWB 2
Figure 1-5-201
21. Remove the rear lower cover (see page
1-5-3).
22. Remove the right lower rear cover (see
page 1-5-5).
23. Remove two screws and then remove
the inlet unit.
Inlet unit
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-202
1-5-120
2N3/2N2
24. Remove three screws.
25. Remove the feed drive unit.
Feed drive
unit
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw Screw
Feed drive
unit
Screw
Figure 1-5-203
1-5-121
2N3/2N2
26. Check or replace the feed drive unit and
refit all the removed parts.
*: Connect the connector (yellow) to the
Feed drive unit
connector of paper feed clutch 1 on
stamp [YELLOW] side as before, when
removing the connector of the paper
feed clutch as the check of the feed
drive unit etc.
Paper feed
clutch 1
Marking
[YELLOW]
Connector
Connector
(Yellow)
Paper feed clutch 2
Figure 1-5-204
1-5-122
2N3/2N2
(4) Detaching and refitting the PF drive unit
Procedure
1. Remove the PF rear cover. (see page
1-5-108)
2. Remove the connector of AC wire from
the paper feeder.
Connector
Figure 1-5-205
3. Remove three wire holders.
4. Release three wire saddles and then Wire saddle
remove the wire.
Wire saddles
Wire holders
Figure 1-5-206
1-5-123
2N3/2N2
5. Remove the connector and the band of
PF paper feed motor.
6. Remove the connector (YC15) from the
PF main PWB and then release the
wire from two wire saddles.
Connector
Band
PF main PWB
YC15
Wire saddles
PF main PWB
Figure 1-5-207
7. Remove four screws and then remove
the PF drive unit.
8. Check or replace the PF drive unit and
PF drive unit
refit all the removed parts.
Screws
Screw
Screw Screw
Screw
Screw Screw
Figure 1-5-208
1-5-124
2N3/2N2
(5) Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2
Procedure
1. Remove the rear lower cover (see page
1-5-3).
2. Remove the power source assembly
(see page 1-5-95).
3. Remove the connector each.
4. Remove two screws each and then
remove the lift motor 1 and 2.
5. Check or replace the lift motor and refit
all the removed parts.
Lift motor 1
Lift motor 2
Lift motor 1
Connector
(white)
Screws
Lift motor 2
Connector
(gray)
Screws
Figure 1-5-209
1-5-125
2N3/2N2
(6) Detaching and refitting the PF lift motor 1 and 2
Procedure
1. Remove the PF rear cover (see page 1-
5-108).
2. Remove the connector each.
3. Remove three screws each and then
remove the PF lift motor 1 and 2.
4. Check or replace the PF lift motor and
refit all the removed parts.
PF lift
motor 1
PF lift
motor 2
Connector
Screws
Screw PF lift motor
Figure 1-5-210
1-5-126
2N3/2N2
1-5-11 DP
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley
Procedure
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Remove two screws from the DP origi-
nal feed guide. DP top cover
Screw
Screw
DP original
feed guide
Figure 1-5-211
3. Turn upward and then remove the DP
original feed guide.
DP original feed guide
Figure 1-5-212
1-5-127
2N3/2N2-1
4. Turn the DP original feed unit upward.
DP original feed unit
Figure 1-5-213
5. Remove the stop ring from the front
side of the DP original feed belt shaft A.
6. Pull forward and then remove the DP
original feed unit from the DP.
DP original
feed unit
Stop ring
DP original feed
belt shaft A
Figure 1-5-214
1-5-128
2N3/2N2
7. Remove the stop ring from the DP origi- DP original feed unit
nal feed belt shaft A.
8. Remove the stop ring and pulley from Pulley
the DP original feed unit.
9. Slide the DP feed holder and then Stop ring
remove the DP original feed belt unit
from the DP original feed unit.
DP original feed
belt shaft A
Stop ring
DP original feed
belt unit
DP original feed holder
Figure 1-5-215
10. Remove the DP original feed holder A
from the DP original feed belt shaft A.
11. Pull out the DP original feed belt shaft A
from the DP original feed belt unit and
then remove the DP original feed collar
A.
Drive belt
DP original feed
belt unit
Pulley
DP original feed
DP original holder B
feed collar A
DP original
feed holder A DP original feed
belt shaft A
Figure 1-5-216
1-5-129
2N3/2N2
12. Remove the stop ring from the DP origi- DP original feed
belt shaft B
nal feed belt shaft B.
13. Pull out the DP original feed belt shaft B
from the DP original feed belt unit.
14. Remove the DP feed collar B and DP
original feed belt from the DP original
feed belt shaft B.
DP original feed
collar B
DP original feed
belt unit
Stop ring DP original feed belt
Figure 1-5-217
15. Remove the stop ring from the DP for- Pulley
warding pulley shaft. DP forwarding
16. Pull out the DP forwarding pulley shaft DP original pulley shaft
from the DP original feed unit and then feed unit
remove the DP forwarding pulley.
17. Check or replace the DP original feed
belt and DP forwarding pulley and refit DP forwarding
all the removed parts. pulley
Bush
Stop ring
Figure 1-5-218
1-5-130
2N3/2N2
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley
Procedure
DP top cover
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Remove the DP original feed guide and
DP original feed unit. (See page 1-5-
128)
3. Unhook the hook and then remove the
DP separation pulley cover.
Hook
DP separation
pulley cover
Figure 1-5-219
4. Remove the stop ring and then remove
the DP separation pulley and torque Torque limiter
limiter. DP separation
5. Check or replace the DP separation pully
pulley and refit all the removed parts.
Stop ring
Figure 1-5-220
1-5-131
2N3/2N2
(3) Detaching and refitting the CIS
Perform this to replace the CIS.
Procedure DP top cover
1. Open the DP top cover. Screw
2. Remove four screws from the upper
side and reverse side of DP. Screw
DP front
3. Pull forwards and then remove the DP
left cover
front left cover and DP front cover.
DP front cover
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-221
4. Remove the strap from the DP top
cover.
5. Remove four screws and then remove
the DP rear cover.
Strap
Screw
DP rear cover
Screw
Screws
Figure 1-5-222
1-5-132
2N3/2N2
6. Remove two screws from the rear side
of machine and then remove the CIS
unit upwards.
CIS unit
Screws
Figure 1-5-223
7. Remove three connectors from the DP Connector
SHD PWB.
DP SHD PWB
Connector
Connector
DP SHD PWB
Figure 1-5-224
1-5-133
2N3/2N2
8. Remove the screw and then remove the CIS lower guide
CIS lower guide. CIS rear
9. Remove the screw and then remove the Screw holder
CIS upper guide. Screw
10. Remove the screw and then remove the
CIS rear holder. CIS unit
Screw
CIS upper guide
Figure 1-5-225
11. Remove six pins by using a flat screw-
driver and then remove the DP SHD
PWB.
12. Remove the screw and then remove the
CIS front holder.
13. Replace the CIS and refit all the
Flat screw
removed parts.
driver
14. When the CIS is replaced with a new
one, carry out the following procedure. Screw
15. Clean the CIS roller and contact glass
(CIS).
16. Perform maintenance mode U091 (set-
ting the white line correction) (see page
1-3-71).
Pins
17. Make a test copy of a gray document. DP SHD PWB
If problems such as white lines appear
on the test copy, repeat the procedure Pins
from steps 15 and 16 onwards until the CIS front
white lines no longer appear. holder
18. Perform maintenance mode U411
(Adjusting the scanner automatically)
(see page 1-3-174).
Figure 1-5-226
1-5-134
2N3/2N2
(4) Adjusting the angle of leading edge
Perform the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is laterally skewed.
Procedure 3mm/4mm 3mm/4mm
1. Place an original on the DP and press
the start key to make a test copy.
2. If the gap of leading edge exceeds the
reference value, perform the following
adjustment.
Reference value
For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm Original Copy Copy
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm example 1 example 2
Figure 1-5-227
3. Loosen two screws of right and left fix-
ing fittings. Fixing fitting
Screw
Fixing fitting
Fixing fitting
Figure 1-5-228
1-5-135
2N3/2N2
4. Remove the right hinge cover.
5. Turn adjusting screw at the rear side of
the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example 1:
Turn the adjusting screw counterclock-
wise and move the DP to the inner side.
For copy example 2:
Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and
move the DP to the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1 Right hinge cover
mm
6. Make a test copy.
7. Repeat the steps above until the gap of
the leading edge falls within the refer- Adjusting screw
ence values.
8. After adjustment is completed, retighten
two screws that have been loosened in
step 3.
Figure 1-5-229
9. Remove the original mat.
10. Place original mat with its Velcro
upward over the contact glass. Original mat
*: Align original mat corner that has 90
degrees of angle with the inner left cor-
ner of the original instruction panel.
11. Close DP and attach original mat onto it
with Velcros.
DP
Velcros
Velcros
Original mat
Figure 1-5-230
1-5-136
2N3/2N2
(5) Adjusting the angle of trailing edge
Perform the following adjustment if the trailing edge of the copy image is laterally skewed.
Procedure
1. Place an original on the DP and press
the start key to make a test copy.
2. If the gap of trailing edge exceeds the
reference value, perform the following
adjustment.
Reference value 3mm/4mm 3mm/4mm
For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm Original Copy Copy
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm example 1 example 2
Figure 1-5-231
3. Open the DP top cover.
4. Remove the right hinge cover.
5. Remove the screw and then remove the DP top cover
left hinge cover
Left hinge cover
Screw
Right hinge cover
Figure 1-5-232
1-5-137
2N3/2N2
6. Remove the strap from the DP top
cover.
7. Remove four screws and then remove
the DP rear cover.
Strap
Screw
DP rear cover
Screw
Screws
Figure 1-5-233
8. Adjust the height of DP.
Loosen the nut.
For copy example 1:
Loosen the adjusting screw.
For copy example 2:
Tighten the adjusting screw.
Amount of change per scale:
Approx. 0.5 mm
Retighten the nut.
9. Refit the DP rear cover.
Adjusting screw
10. Refit the right hinge cover and left hinge
cover. Nut
Scale
Figure 1-5-234
1-5-138
2N3/2N2
11. Open the DP.
12. Remove the original mat.
13. Place original mat with its Velcro
Original mat
upward over the contact glass.
*: Align original mat corner that has 90
degrees of angle with the inner left cor-
ner of the original instruction panel.
14. Close DP and attach original mat onto it
with Velcros.
DP
Velcros
Velcros
Original mat
Figure 1-5-235
15. Make a test copy again.
16. Repeat steps 1 to 14 above until the
gap of the trailing edge falls within the
reference values.
1-5-139
2N3/2N2
(6) Adjusting the hinge
Perform this adjustment when the DP trails down when it is open.
Procedure
1. Open the DP.
2. Rotate the adjusting screws at the front
of the left hinge using a flat screwdriver Adjusting screw
so that the DP won’t trail down.
3. Close the document processor when
adjustment was done.
DP
Left hinge
Figure 1-5-236
1-5-140
2N3/2N2
1-5-12 Others
(1) Detaching the eject filters
Procedure
1. Unhook each hook and remove three
eject filter units. Eject filter
2. Remove the eject filter from the eject Eject filter unit
cover.
3. Clean or replace the eject filter and refit
the filter.
Hook
Eject cover
Eject filter unit Eject filter
Hook
Hook
Eject cover
Figure 1-5-237
1-5-141
2N3/2N2
(2) Detaching and refitting the left filter
Procedure
1. Remove the left filter cover by releasing
the lever.
2. Remove the left filter.
3. Clean or replace the left filter and refit
the filter.
Left filter
Lever
Left filter cover
Figure 1-5-238
1-5-142
2N3/2N2
(3) Detaching and refitting the fan filter and PU dust filters
Procedure
1. Open the front middle cover (see page
1-5-60).
2. Remove the fan filter by releasing the
lever.
3. Clean the fan filter and refit the filter.
4. Pull four PU dust filters out and then
remove the filters.
5. Clean the PU dust filters and refit filters.
Front middle
cover
Lever
Fan filter
PU dust
filters
Figure 1-5-239
1-5-143
2N3/2N2
(4) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt filters
Procedure
1. Remove two transfer belt filters by
releasing the lever.
2. Clean the transfer belt filters and refit
the filters.
Lever
Transfer
belt filter Lever
Transfer
belt filter
Figure 1-5-240
1-5-144
2N3/2N2
(5) Detaching and refitting the developer filter
Procedure
1. Remove the developer filter cover by
releasing the lever.
2. Remove the developer filter.
3. Clean the developer filter and refit the
filter.
Lever
Developer filter
Developer filter cover
Figure 1-5-241
1-5-145
2N3/2N2
(6) Detaching and refitting the toner disposal box
Procedure
1. Cover the area under the toner disposal
box to prevent contamination due to the
scattered toner.
2. Remove the screw and then remove the
cable cover.
3. Remove the connector.
Connectors
Cable
cover
Screw
Toner disposal box
Sheet
Figure 1-5-242
4. Remove three screws and then remove
the toner disposal box.
Toner
disposal box
Screws
Screw Screw
Screw Toner
disposal box
Screw
Figure 1-5-243
1-5-146
2N3/2N2
5. To replace the toner disposal box, per- Toner cap sheet
form the following procedure:
6. Insert the sponge at the toner cap sheet
into the opening of the toner disposal
box that was removed. Sponge
Aperture
Toner
disposal box
Figure 1-5-244
7. Peel the protective pad from the toner
cap sheet.
8. Affix the toner cap sheet over the toner
disposal box.
Toner cap sheet
9. Refit the new toner disposal box to the
machine.
10. Refit all the removed parts. Protective pad
Toner
disposal box
Toner cap sheet
Figure 1-5-245
1-5-147
2N3/2N2
(7) Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit
Procedure
1. Perform maintenance mode U917
(backup data reading) (see page 1-3-
227).
2. Remove the rear upper cover (see page
1-5-3).
3. Release the wire saddle.
4. Remove two screws.
Screws
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-246
5. Unhook two hooks and pull out the
HDD bracket a little. Hook
Hook
HDD bracket
Figure 1-5-247
1-5-148
2N3/2N2
6. Remove four connectors from the hard
disk unit while pushing the lock lever.
7. Replace the hard disk unit and refit all
Black
the removed parts.
*: Handle the HDD so as not to drop or
get it in touch with hard objects as it is Hard disk unit
susceptible to vibrations and impacts
especially along the direction of disc Blue
rotation. Be careful not to apply shocks
while securing the screws.
Lever Lever
Connector
Connector
Figure 1-5-248
8. Perform maintenance mode U024 (HDD formatting) (see page 1-3-32).
9. Install the firmwares by the following procedure.
1)Connects to the machine the USB memory that preserved Software LANGUAGE BR (Opt Font,Opt
Msg, opt Eweb).The firmware is installed by switching the main power switch to ON/OFF.
Install the OCR dictionary software in the same manner.
2)Connects to the machine the USB memory that preserved FMU application. Installs the firmware from
the application screen of the system menu (Refer to operation guide).
3)Copy two Multi Color Tables (copiers and printers) from a USB flash device by running U485.
4)AS formatting U024 Full will cause the OCR dictionary software to be deleted, reinstall the OCR dic-
tionary software from a USB flash device by toggling power on and off.
10. Perform maintenance mode U917 (backup data writing) (see page 1-3-227).
1-5-149
2N3/2N2
(8) Direction of installing the principal fan motors
When detaching or refitting the fan motors, be careful of the airflow direction (intake or exhaust).
Fuser front fan motor
(Rating label:outside)
LSU fan motor Y Eject front
(Rating label:outside) fan motor
(Rating label:inside)
LSU fan motor C
Eject fan motor 2
(Rating label
(Rating label:inside)
:outside)
IH fan motor
(Rating label:inside)
LSU fan motor M
(Rating label:outside)
Developer LSU fan motor K
fan motor Y (Rating label:outside)
(Rating label Eject fan motor 1
:outside) Developer fan motor K (Rating label:inside)
(Rating label:outside)
Developer fan motor C
(Rating label:outside) Developer fan motor M
(Rating label:outside)
Figure 1-5-249
1-5-150
2N3/2N2
DP fan motor
(Rating label:inside)
Bridge fan motor
(Rating label:inside)
Eject rear fan motor
(Rating label:outside)
Exhaust fan motor 1
(Rating label:inside)
Controller fan motor
Fuser rear fan motor (Rating label:inside)
(Rating label:outside)
Toner fan motor 1
(Rating label:outside) Belt fan motor 1
(Rating label:inside)
Exhaust fan motor 3 Belt fan motor 2
(Rating label:outside) (Rating label:inside)
Exhaust fan motor 2
Toner fan motor 2
(Rating label:inside)
(Rating label:outside)
Power source fan motor
(Rating label:inside)
Figure 1-5-250
1-5-151
2N3/2N2
(9) Skewed paper feeding check/adjustment
At the paper feed source which a sheet of wrinkled paper has caused, check how the paper is fed askew.
Run U051 to reduce the curvature of paper at the regist roller and measure how the paper is fed askew.
1. Print a maintenance report and note the
U051 value (see page 1-3-45).
2. Reduce the value by 10 for the paper
source in question.
Skew value㧩B-A
3. Press the system menu button to print a
test chart. A B
Check the skew value (balance of left and
right, B-A).
Less than 1mm: OK
1mm or more:
Correct the skew by using the paper angle
adjusting mechanism (in cassette) that modi-
fies the angle of the paper width guides.
Figure 1-5-251
Procedure
1. Unsecure the fixing screws (screw 1 to 4)
and adjust the angle of the paper width
guide by the skew feed adjustment
screw.
If the B-A is negative, rotate clockwise.
If the B-A is positive, rotate counter-clockwise.
2. Tighten the four screw.
*: Secure the screws in the order of
screws 1, 2, 3, then 4.
3. Run U051 and reset the curvature the regist roller.
1-5-152
2N3/2N2
Screw 4
3
Screw
Paper width guide
Cassette
Paper width guide
Screw 2 Screw
If the B-A is positive, If the B-A is negative,
rotate counter-clockwise. rotate clockwise
The skew feed
adjustment screw Paper width guide
Paper width guide
Figure 1-5-252
1-5-153
2N3/2N2
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-5-154
2N2/2N3
1-6 Upgrading the firmware
1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware
Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB, operation PWB, engine PWB, ISC PWB,
fuser IH PWB, motor control PWB, optional language, color table and optional devices.
* : Firmware upgrade must be preceded by an authentication using U025 if the security level is set to Very
High.
Preparation
Extract the file that has the download firmware and put them in the USB flash device.
Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off.
2. Insert the USB flash device in which the
firmware was copied into the USB flash
device slot at the left of the machine.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Rewriting of the PWB software will start
for restoration.
(The LCD, memory LED, and attention
LED on the operation panel will be
showing the progress.)
5. The operation panel LCD will show
“Completed” when rewriting has been
finished.
* : In case rewriting has been failed, “Error
XXXX" (XXXX means an error code)
will be shown.
6. Turn the main power switch off. USB flash device
7. Wait for several seconds and then
remove the USB flash device from the
machine.
Figure 1-6-1
8. Turn the main power switch on.
9. Perform maintenance item U000 (main-
tenance report output) and check that
U019 ROM version has been upgraded.
1-6-1
2N3/2N2-1
Emergency-UPDATE
If the device is accidentally switched off and upgrading was incomplete, upgrade becomes impossible from a
USB flash device.
In that case, retry upgrading after recovering the software by following the procedure below.
Note that this is unoperable when the device is operating normally.
Preparation
The USB flash device must be formatted in FAT or FAT32 in advance.
Extract the main firmware to download from the file.
Rename the file which was extracted from the archive. [DL_CTRL.2N2] to [KM_EMRG.2N2]
Copy the all extracted files to the root of the USB flash device.
Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off.
2. Insert the USB flash device in which the
firmware was copied into the USB flash
device slot at the left of the machine.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Rewriting of the PWB software will start
for restoration.
(The LCD, memory LED, and attention
T1
LED on the operation panel will be OP
showing the progress.)
Caution:
Never turn off the power switch or
remove the USB flash device during
upgrading.
5. The operation panel LCD will show
“Completed” when rewriting has been USB flash device
finished.
* : In case rewriting has been failed, “Error
XXXX" (XXXX means an error code)
will be shown.
Figure 1-6-2
6. Turn the main power switch off.
7. Wait for several seconds and then
remove the USB flash device from the
machine.
8. Insert the USB flash device in which an
upgrade pack of the latest firmware or
the Main/MMI/Browser and LAN-
GUAGE BR (excluding Dictionary) were
copied, into the slot on the machine and
turn power on. (see page P.1-6-1).
1-6-2
2N3/2N2
2-1 Mechanical Construction
2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section
Paper feed/conveying section consists of the paper feed unit that feeds paper from the cassette and the MP
tray paper feed unit that feeds paper from the MP tray, and the paper conveying section that conveys the fed
paper to the transfer/separation section.
(1) Cassette paper feed section
Cassette paper feed section consists of the paper holder with the cassette operation plate activated by lift
motor 1 and 2, and the pulleys, such as the forwarding pulley, the paper feed pulley and the separation pulley,
for extracting and conveying the paper. Paper is fed out of the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley,
paper feed pulley and separation pulley.
11 7
5 21
4
1 13
8
6 10
17 23
2
3 15 9
12
4 5 22
24
7
16
1 14
8
20 6
2
3 18
10
9
19
Figure 2-1-1 Cassette paper feed section
1. Cassette base 12. Paper sensor 2 (PS2) 19. Paper gauge sensor 2 (L)
2. Cassette operation plate 13. Lift sensor 1 (LS1) (PGS2(L))
3. Cassette 14. Lift sensor 2 (LS2) 20. Actuator
4. Forwarding pulleys 15. Paper gauge sensor 1 (U) (Paper gauge sensor 2)
5. Paper feed pulleys (PGS1(U)) 21. Feed sensor 1 (FS1)
6. Separation pulleys 16. Paper gauge sensor 1 (L) 22. Feed sensor 2 (FS2)
7. Assist rollers (PGS1(L)) 23. Paper conveying sensor
8. Assist pulleys 17. Actuator (PCS)
9. Paper conveying roller (Paper gauge sensor 1) 24. Actuator
10. Paper conveying pulley 18. Paper gauge sensor 2 (U) (Paper conveying sensor)
11. Paper sensor 1 (PS1) (PGS2(U))
2-1-1
2N3/2N2
FEED_MOT_DIR
YC2-2 6
FEED_MOT_RDY
YC2-3 5
FEED_MOT_CLK PFM
YC2-4 4
FEED_MOT_REM 3
YC2-5
ASIST_CL1
YC10-1
FEED_CL1_REM ASCL1
YC4-1 PFCL1
CAS1_P0_SENS
YC8-11
PICK_SOL1_REM
YC8-2 FS1
PICK_SOL1_RET PUSOL1
YC8-3
CAS1_EMPTY_SENS PS1
YC8-6
CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS
YC8-9 LS1
LIFT_MOT1_RET PCCL
YC3-13
LIFT_MOT1_DR LM1
YC3-14
PGS1(U) PCS
CAS1_QUANT1
YC3-19
CAS1_QUANT2 PGS1(L)
YC3-22
YC3-5 CAS1_WID
PWSW1
CAS1_LNG1,2,3 ASCL2
YC3-1,2,4 PLSW1 PFCL2
CAS2_P0_SENS
YC8-23
PICK_SOL2_REM
YC8-14 FS2
PICK_SOL2_RET PUSOL2
YC8-15
CAS2_EMPTY_SENS PS2
YC8-18
CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS
YC8-21 LS2
LIFT_MOT2_RET
YC3-15
LIFT_MOT2_DR LM2
YC3-16
CAS2_QUANT1 PGS2(U)
YC3-25
CAS2_QUANT2 PGS2(L)
YC3-28
CAS2_WID
YC3-12 PWSW2
CAS2_LNG1,2,3
YC3-7,8,10 PLSW2
FEED_CL2_REM
YC4-3
ASIST_CL2
YC12-1
FEED2_SENS
YC6-3
V-FEED_CL_REM
V
YC5-3
FPWB2
YC1 YC4 EPWB
Figure 2-1-2 Cassette paper feed section block diagram
2-1-2
2N3/2N2
(2) Large capacity feeder
The paper feeder is comprised of the right- and left-hand cassettes and their feeding units, and the paper
feeding section for the left-hand cassette.
The paper loaded on the lifting plate in the right-hand cassette is picked up to the PF forwarding pulley, PF
feeding pulley, and PF separator pulley, one by one; then the PF feed roller 1 drives the paper into the device.
The paper fed by the left-hand cassette is separated in the similar manner and guided by the driving roller into
the device.
Right cassette section
16 14 13 15 14 13 2 17
10 4
11 5
1
6 12
3
7
8
Figure 2-1-3 Large capacity feeder (right cassette section)
1. PF forwarding pulley 10. PF paper sensor 1 (PFPS1)
2. PF paper feed pulley 11. PF lift sensor 1 (PFLS1)
3. PF separation pulley 12. PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1)
4. PF feed roller 1 13. PF paper conveying roller
5. PF feed pulley 14. PF paper conveying pulley
6. PF size detection switch 1 (PFSDSW1) 15. PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2)
7. PF cassette detection switch 1 (PFCDSW1) 16. PF paper conveying unit switch (PFPCUSW)
8. PF paper gauge sensor 1 upper (PFPGS1(U)) 17. PF paper conveying cover switch
9. PF paper gauge sensor 1 lower (PFPGS1(L)) (PFPCCSW)
2-1-3
2N3/2N2
Left cassette section
1 2 4 5
10
11
6 3
12
7
8
Figure 2-1-4 Large capacity feeder (left cassette section)
1. PF forwarding pulley 2 7. PF cassette detection switch 2 (PFCDSW2)
2. PF paper feed pulley 2 8. PF paper gauge sensor 2 upper (PFPGS2(U))
3. PF separation pulley 2 9. PF paper gauge sensor 2 lower (PFPGS2(L))
4. PF feed roller 2 10. PF paper sensor 2 (PFPS2)
5. PF feed pulley 11. PF lift sensor 2 (PFLS2)
6. PF size detection switch 2 (PFSDSW2) 12. PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2)
2-1-4
2N3/2N2-1
VFDSW
YC5-7 PFPCS1
YC5-3 VFDCL
PFPCCL1
PFPS1
PFLS1 PFPFCL1
YC3-15 SIZE_R_SW
PFSDSW1
PFPCCL2 PFFS1
CW/CCW,CLK,REM
YC16-1,2,3,4 RDY PFPFM
PFLM1
PAP_R_SW2
YC3-6 PFPGS1(U)
PAP_R_SW1
YC3-3 PFPGS1(L)
YC7-3,4 OUT1B, OUT1A
EMPTY_R_SW
LIMY_R_SW
FD_R_SW
PF_R_CL
YC15-3 HFDCL1
YC5-13
YC5-16
YC5-18
YC15-1
PFMPWB
Figure 2-1-5 Large capacity feeder (right cassette section) block diagram
2-1-5
2N3/2N2-1
PFMPWB
PFPS2 EMPTY_L_SW YC4-3
PFLS2 LIMIT_L_SW YC4-6
PFPCCL3 HFDCL2 YC15-5
PFPFCL2 FP_L_CL YC15-7
HFDSW YC4-12
PFPCS2
FD_L_SW
PFFS2 YC4-8
SIZE_L_SW YC6-15
PFSDSW2
PFLM2 OUT2B, OUT2A YC7-1,2
PAP_L_SW2 YC6-6
PFPGS2(U)
PAP_L_SW1
PFPGS2(L) YC6-3
Figure 2-1-6 Large capacity feeder (left cassette section) block diagram
2-1-6
2N3/2N2
(3) MP tray paper feed section
Paper is fed out of the MP tray by the rotation of the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP sep-
aration pulley. The MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque lim-
iter.
2 7
1
12 14 5
3 4 11
6
15
10 13
Figure 2-1-7 MP tray paper feed section
1. MP forwarding pulley 10. MP lift sensor 2 (MPLS2)
2. MP paper feed pulley 11. MP paper length switch
3. MP separate pulley (MPPLSW)
4. MP table 12. Actuator
5. MP support Tray (MP paper length switch)
6. Lift base 13. MP paper width switch
7. MP paper sensor (MPPS) (MPPWSW)
8. Actuator (MP paper sensor) 14. MP tray switch (MPTSW)
9. MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1) 15. MP feed sensor (MPFS)
2-1-7
2N3/2N2
RYPWB
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPLS1
YC3-5
MPF_PPR_SET MPPS
YC3-3
MPF_CL_REM MP
YC3-13 PFCL
MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS MPLS2 MPPLSW MPTSW
YC3-8
MPPWSW
MPF_JAM_SENS MPFS
YC3-11
MPF_LIFT_DR_B
YC3-16
YC3-15 MPF_LIFT_DR_A MPLM
MPF_WID1
YC2-7
MPF_WID2
YC2-5
MPF_WID3
YC2-4
MPF_LNG
YC2-2
MPF_TABLE
YC2-9
YC12 YC17 YC1 YC6
FPWB1 EPWB
Figure 2-1-8 MP tray paper feed section block diagram
2-1-8
2N3/2N2
(4) Paper conveying section
The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer/separation section as paper feeding from the cas-
sette or MP tray, or as paper refeeding for duplex printing. Paper by feeding is conveyed by the middle roller to
the position where the registration sensor (RS) is turned on, and then sent to the transfer/separation section
by the right registration roller and left registration roller.
3
5
7
2
Figure 2-1-9 Paper conveying section
1. Middle roller 5. Paper conveying pulley
2. Middle pulley 6. Middle sensor (MS)
3. Left registration roller 7. Regist deflection sensor (RS)
4. Right registration roller
2-1-9
2N3/2N2
REG_MOT_B/
FPWB2 YC25-1
REG_MOT_A/
YC25-2
RM REG_MOT_B
YC25-3
REG_MOT_A
YC25-4
REG_SENS
YC7-12 RS
FFED1_SENS
YC7-9 MS FPWB1
MID_B/
YC7-1
MID_A/
YC7-2
MID_B MM
YC7-3
MID_A
YC7-4
FEED_MOT_DIR
YC2-2 6
FEED_MOT_RDY
YC2-3 5
FEED_MOT_CLK PFM
YC2-4 4
FEED_MOT_REM 3
YC2-5
YC1 YC4 YC5-42 YC2-9
EPWB
Figure 2-1-10 Paper conveying section block diagram
2-1-10
2N3/2N2
2-1-2 Drum section
The drum section consists of the charger roller unit, drum and cleaning section. The drum is electrically
charged uniformly by means of a charger roller to form a latent image on the surface. The cleaning section
consists of the cleaning blade and the cleaning roller which remove residual toner from the drum surface after
transfer. The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main
charging.
10
1 7
2
9
6
3
Figure 2-1-11 Drum section
1. Drum 6. Cleaning blade
2. Charger roller 7. Cleaning roller
3. Charger cleaning roller 8. Control roller
4. Charger case 9. Drum screw
5. Drum frame 10. Cleaning lamp (CL)
2-1-11
Main chager
SIG2 YC4-2 high voltage Y
11 SIG1
10 YC4-4 EEP_SCL1
CW/CCW YC14-2
6 YC4-14 EEP_SDA1
5 FG YC4-16 YC14-3
EEPROM
DRPWB-Y
VM
DRM-Y
4 YC4-18
Drum
unit Y
START
3 /STOP YC4-20
CL-Y
ERS_Y_REM
YC14-8
YC10 YC2 Main chager
SIG2 YC4-1 high voltage C
11 SIG1
10 YC4-3 EEP_SCL1
CW/CCW YC12-2
6 YC4-13 EEP_SDA1
5 FG YC4-15 YC12-3
EEPROM
DRPWB-C
VM
DRM-C
4 YC4-17
Drum
unit C
START
3 /STOP YC4-19
CL-C
ERS_C_REM
YC12-8
2-1-12
EPWB
FRPWB
HVPWB1
Main chager
MCPWB
SIG2 YC5-2 high voltage M
11 SIG1
10 YC5-4 EEP_SCL1
CW/CCW YC10-2
6 YC5-14 EEP_SDA1
5 FG YC5-16 YC10-3
EEPROM
VM DRPWB-M
DRM-M
4 YC5-18
Drum
unit M
START
3 /STOP
Figure 2-1-12 Drum section block diagram
YC5-20
CL-M
ERS_M_REM
YC10-8
YC3 YC9
Main chager
SIG2 YC5-1 high voltage K
11 SIG1
10 YC5-3 EEP_SCL1
CW/CCW YC7-2
6 YC5-13 EEP_SDA1
5 FG YC5-15 YC7-3
EEPROM
DRPWB-K
VM
DRM-K
4 YC5-17
Drum
unit K
START
3 /STOP
CL-K
YC5-19 ERS_K_REM
YC7-8
2N3/2N2
2N3/2N2
2-1-3 Developer section
The developer unit consists of the sleeve roller that forms the magnetic brush, the magnet roller, the devel-
oper blade and the developer screws that agitate the toner. Also, the toner sensor (TS) checks whether or not
toner remains in the developer unit.
6
8
4 7 9
Figure 2-1-13 Developer section
1. Sleeve roller 6. Developer case
2. Magnet roller 7. Developer cover
3. Developer screw A 8. Magnet cover
4. Developer screw B 9. Toner sensor (TS)
5. Developer blade
2-1-13
YC15-1 TPD_TEMP
CW/CCW YC15-2 VCONT
6 YC6-2 TPD_Y
LD YC15-3
5 YC6-3 TN_CLK
unit Y
YC15-4
TS-Y
CLOCK
4 YC6-4 YC15-8 EEP_SDA Magnet bias Y
START
DEVM-Y
Developer
/STOP YC15-9 EEP_SCL
3 YC6-5
Sleeve bias Y
YC15-12 VIB_MOT
VM-Y
YC10 YC2
YC13-1 TPD_TEMP
CW/CCW YC13-2 VCONT
6 YC6-9 TPD_C
LD YC13-3
5 YC6-10 TN_CLK
unit C
YC13-4
TS-C
CLOCK
4 YC6-11 YC13-8 EEP_SDA Magnet bias C
START
DEVM-C
Developer
/STOP YC13-9 EEP_SCL
3 YC6-12
Sleeve bias C
YC13-12 VIB_MOT
VM-C
EPWB
TPD_TEMP
FRPWB
YC11-1
HVPWB
2-1-14
MCPWB
YC11-2 VCONT
CW/CCW
6 YC7-2 YC11-3 TPD_M
LD TN_CLK
5 YC7-3 YC11-4
unit M
TS-M
CLOCK EEP_SDA Magnet bias M
4 YC7-4 YC11-8
Developer
START
DEVM-M
YC11-9 EEP_SCL
/STOP
3 YC7-5 Sleeve bias M
YC11-12 VIB_MOT
Figure 2-1-14 Developer section block diagram
VM-M
YC3 YC9
YC9-1 TPD_TEMP
YC9-2 VCONT
CW/CCW YC9-3 TPD_K
6 YC7-9
LD TN_CLK
unit K
YC9-4
TS-K
5 YC7-10
CLOCK YC9-8 EEP_SDA Magnet bias K
Developer
4 YC7-11 EEP_SCL
START
DEVM-K
YC9-9
/STOP YC7-12 Sleeve bias K
3
YC9-12 VIB_MOT
VM-K
2N3/2N2
2N3/2N2
2-1-4 Optical section
The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner section for print-
ing.
(1) Image scanner section
The original image is illuminated by the LED lamp and scanned by the CCD image sensor in the CCD PWB
(CCDPWB) via the three mirrors and ISU lens, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.
The mirror frame A and B travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from
side to side. The speed of the mirror frame B is half the speed of the mirror frame A.
6 12 13 4 3 11 9 15
6 2 14 5 1 7 8 10
Figure 2-1-15 Image scanner section
1. Mirror frame A 9. ISU cover
2. Mirror frame B 10. Scanner wire drum
3. LED mount 11. Contact glass
4. Scanner reflector 12. Slit glass
5. Mirror A 13. Original size indicator plate
6. Mirror B 14. Home position sensor (HPS)
7. ISU lens 15. Original detection switch
8. CCD PWB (CCDPWB) (ODSW)
2-1-15
unit
Image
scanner
HP_SW
YC8-3
HPS
SDA
YC6-3
SCL
YC6-4
VSET
YC6-5
POW
LLPWB
YC6-9
ORG_SW
YC13-2 OSS
Lens
2-1-16
MPWB
ISCPWB
Reading
image data
Original
YC9 YC2
YC11 YC3
CCD
image
CCDPWB
sensor
YC25 YC4
Figure 2-1-16 Image scanner section block diagram
SMOT_AP
YC5-1
SMOT_BP
YC5-2
SMOT_AN
SM
YC5-3
SMOT_BN
YC5-4
CO_SW
YC14-3
ODSW
2N3/2N2
2N3/2N2
(2) Laser scanner section
The charged surface of the drum is then scanned by the laser beam from the laser scanner unit. The laser
beam is dispersed as the polygon motor (PM) revolves to reflect the laser beam over the drum. Various lenses
and mirror are housed in the laser scanner unit, adjust the diameter of the laser beam, and focalize it at the
drum surface. Also the LSU cleaning motor (LSUCM) is activated to conduct automatically cleaning of the
LSU dust shield glass.
8
5 7
2 1
Figure 2-1-17 Laser scanner section
1. Polygon motor (PM) 5. f-θ lens B
2. f-θ lens A 6. Mirror C
3. Mirror A 7. LSU dust shield glass
4. Mirror B 8. LSU spiral
2-1-17
2N3/2N2
YC5-2 BD_Bk YC1-29 TH
LSU_TH_Bk BD PDPWB-K
YC5-3 YC1-28
LDD_CS_Bk
YC5-9 YC1-22
DATA_1N_Bk APC
YC5-25 YC1-6 Laser
DATA_1P_Bk PWB-K
YC5-26 YC1-5 scanner
DATA_2N_Bk unit K
YC5-28 YC1-3
DATA_2P_Bk YC1-2
YC5-29
REM_Bk
YC4-3 3
LOCK_Bk PM-K
YC4-4 2
CLK_Bk
YC4-5 1
YC8-2 BD_M YC1-29 TH
LSU_TH_M BD PDPWB-M
YC8-3 YC1-28
LDD_CS_M
YC8-9 YC1-22
DATA_1N_M APC
YC8-25 YC1-6 Laser
DATA_1P_M PWB-M
YC8-26 YC1-5 scanner
DATA_2N_M unit M
YC8-28 YC1-3
DATA_2P_M YC1-2
YC8-29
REM_M
YC7-3 3
LOCK_M PM-M
YC7-4 2
CLK_M
YC7-5 1
LSURPWB
YC10-2 BD_C YC1-29 TH
LSU_TH_C BD PDPWB-C
YC10-3 YC1-28
LDD_CS_C
YC10-9 YC1-22
DATA_1N_C APC
YC10-25 YC1-6 Laser
DATA_1P_C PWB-C
YC10-26 YC1-5 scanner
DATA_2N_C unit C
YC10-28 YC1-3
DATA_2P_C YC1-2
YC10-29
REM_C
YC9-3 3
LOCK_C PM-C
YC9-4 2
CLK_C
YC9-5 1
YC12-2 BD_Y YC1-29 TH
LSU_TH_Y BD PDPWB-Y
YC12-3 YC1-28
LDD_CS_Y
YC12-9 YC1-22
DATA_1N_Y APC
YC12-25 YC1-6 Laser
DATA_1P_Y PWB-Y
YC12-26 YC1-5 scanner
DATA_2N_Y unit Y
YC12-28 YC1-3
DATA_2P_Y YC1-2
YC12-29
REM_Y
YC11-3 3
LOCK_Y PM-Y
YC11-4 2
CLK_Y
YC11-5 1
DR_CCW
YC2 YC11 YC21-1 LSU
EPWB DR_CW
YC3 YC12 YC21-2 CM
Figure 2-1-18 Laser scanner unit block diagram
2-1-18
2N3/2N2
2-1-5 Transfer/Separation section
The transfer/separation section consists of the intermediate transfer unit section and the secondary transfer
roller section.
(1) Intermediate transfer unit section
The intermediate transfer unit section consists of the transfer cleaning unit, the transfer belt, and the four pri-
mary transfer rollers for respective color drums, and forms a full-color toner image by superimposing and
transferring single-color toner images formed on each drum onto the transfer belt. Also with the ID sensors
(IDS) mounted on the machine frame, the toner density on the transfer belt is measured.
The transfer cleaning unit collects toner remaining on the transfer belt after secondary transfer and forwards it
as waste toner to the waste toner box.
17 16 10 11 13 15 8 1
18
19 7
20
2 6 5 4 2 3 14 12 9 2
Figure 2-1-19 Intermediate transfer unit section
1. Drive roller 11. Color release sensor (CRS)
2. Backup roller 12. Transfer belt sensor (TRBLS)
3. Primary transfer roller K 13. Transfer skew sensor (TRSS)
4. Primary transfer roller M 14. Transfer edge sensor (TRES)
5. Primary transfer roller C 15. Transfer skew motor (TRSM)
6. Primary transfer roller Y 16. Cleaning pre brush
7. Tension roller 17. Cleaning fur brush
8. Transfer belt 18. Cleaning roller
9. ID sensor (IDS) 19. Cleaning blade
10. Color release motor (CRM) 20. Cleaning screw
2-1-19
2N3/2N2
HVPWB2
Primary transfer bias Y
Primary transfer bias C
Primary transfer bias M
Primary transfer bias K
Cleaning bias
Transfer
belt unit
TRSS
TRES
CRS
TRBLS
TRCM CRM TRSM
ZIG_REV_SENS
3
4
5
6
ZIG_DR_CCW
BELT_SPEED
ZIG_DR_CW
RLS_SENS
ZIG_SENS
ICL_REM
ICL_RDY
ICL_CLK
RLS_DR
ICL_DIR
YC3-A3
YC3-A4
YC3-A5
YC3-A6
YC3-A7
YC3-A12
YC3-A13
YC3-A10
YC3-B2
YC3-B5
YC3-B8
EPWB
YC6
YC5
YC1
YC2
YC10-6 REG_SENS_F_P
YC10-7 REG_SENS_F_S IDS1
YC10-11 REG_SENS_R_P
YC10-12 REG_SENS_R_S IDS2
YC10-14 CLN_SOL_REM
FPWB1 YC10-15 CLN_SOL_RET CLSOL
TR_BRK
YC13-1 7
TR_DIR
YC13-2 6
TR_RDY TRM
YC13-3 5
TR_CLK
YC13-4 4
TR_REM
YC13-5 3
Figure 2-1-20 Intermediate transfer unit section block diagram
2-1-20
2N3/2N2
(2) Secondary transfer roller section
The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller mounted to the paper conveying
unit and the separation brush. To the secondary transfer roller, DC bias is applied from the high voltage PWB
2 (HVPWB2). The toner image formed on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper by the potential differ-
ence and the paper is separated by curvature separation.
5
1
6
Figure 2-1-21 Secondary transfer roller section
1. Secondary transfer roller
2. Separation brush
3. Secondary transfer frame
4. Transfer guide
5. Transfer release sensor (TRRS)
6. Transfer release motor (TRRM)
2-1-21
2N3/2N2
EPWB
HVPWB2
Separation brush
Separation bias SP_REM
YC1-8 YC8-5
Secondary transfer bias T2_REM
YC1-7 YC8-6
TRRS
Secondary
transfer roller
TRRM
PRS_REM1
PRS_REM2
PRS_SENS
FPWB1
YC-14-4
YC-14-5
YC-14-2
PRS_REM1
YC1-16 YC6-49
PRS_REM2
YC1-15 YC6-50
PRS_SENS
YC1-14 YC6-51
RYPWB YC1 YC14
Figure 2-1-22 Secondary transfer roller section block diagram
2-1-22
2N3/2N2-1
2-1-6 Fuser section
The paper sent from the transfer/separation section is interleaved between the fuser roller and the press
roller. The fuser roller (fuser belt) is heated by the fuser IH (FIH), and the toner is fused by heat and pressure
and fixed onto the paper because the press roller is pressed by the fuser press spring. The surface tempera-
ture of fuser roller and press roller are detected by the fuser thermistor (FTH) and controlled by the engine
PWB (EPWB).
10
11
6 5 19
9 20
8
7
16
1
2
4
18 13,17
12,14,15
Figure 2-1-23 Fuser section
1. Fuser roller 11. Fuser eject roller
2. Press roller 12. Fuser thermistor 1 (FTH1): Center
3. Fuser heater (FH) 13. Fuser thermistor 2 (FTH2) :Edge 1
4. Heat roller 14. Fuser thermistor 3 (FTH3): A4T
5. Belt tension roller 15. Fuser thermistor 4 (FTH4): A3
6. Fuser belt 16. Fuser thermistor 5 (FTH5): Press
7. Fuser IH 17. Fuser thermistor 6 (FTH6): Edge 2
8. Separators1 18. Fuser thermostat 1 (FTS1)
9. Separators2 19. Fuser thermostat 2 (FTS2)
10. Fuser eject pulley 20. Fuser eject sensor (FUES)
2-1-23
2N3/2N2
YC18-2 CW/CCW 6
YC18-3 LD 5
CLOCK FUM
YC18-4 4
YC18-5 START/STOP 3 Fuser unit
FIHPWB FUES
YC27 YC8
FTH5
YC5-1 LIVE_OUT FTS2
FUBLS
NEUTRAL_OUT
YC5-3 FH
COIL_LIVE
FPWB1 YC9-1
COIL_COM FIH
YC10-1 FURM FURS
+15V1 FTH6
YC6-1
+15V2
YC6-2 FTS1
FTH1 FTH3 FTH4 FTH2
FRPWB YC4
IH_CORE_B/,B,A,A/
YC17-4,5,6,7 IHCM
FSR_RLS_DR_CCW
FSR_RLS_DR_CW
FSR_SIZE_SENS
FSR_RLS_SENS
IH_CORE_SENS IHCS
FSR_BLT_PLS
YC17-2
GUIDE_TH2
GUIDE_TH1
EDGE_TH2
PRESS_TH
MAIN_TH2
MAIN_TH1
EDGE_TH
YC3
YC26-A4
YC26-A10,11
YC26-B17
YC26-B16
YC26-B15
YC26-B11
YC26-A19
YC26-B9
YC26-A13
YC26
YC26-B13
YC26-A16
YC7
EPWB
Figure 2-1-24 Fuser section block diagram
2-1-24
2N3/2N2
2-1-7 Feedshift/switchback sections
The paper feedshift/switchback sections consists of the conveying path which sends the paper that has
passed the fuser section to the bridge section, duplex conveying section or job separator.
12
13 5
10
4
3
9
7
11
2
1 8
6
Figure 2-1-25 Feed shift/switchback section
1. Middle pulley 8. Lower duplex roller
2. Eject roller 9. Lower change guide
3. Eject pulley 10. Upper change guide
4. Eject roller B 11. Eject sensor (ES)
5. Eject pulley B 12. Switchback sensor (SBS)
6. Upper duplex roller 13. Actuator (switchback sensor)
7. Duplex pulley
2-1-25
2N3/2N2
JUNC_SOL_KYU
YC5-19
JUNC_SOL_FUK FSSOL
YC5-20
EXIT_FEED_SENS SBS
YC5-13
EXIT_PAP_SENS ES
YC5-16
FRPWB
SB_CORE_B/
YC5-8
SB_CORE_A/
YC5-9
SB_CORE_B EM
YC5-10
SB_CORE_A
YC5-11
YC3 YC7
EPWB
Figure 2-1-26 Feed shift/switchback section block diagram
2-1-26
2N3/2N2
2-1-8 Bridge section
Bridge section activates the convey roller to deliver the paper, which was sent by the feedshift/switchback sec-
tion, to the eject tray after de-curling the paper using the decurler.
15
14
4 7 4 7 4 1
13
12 11
10
8 3 6 3 5 3 2
Figure 2-1-27 Bridge section
1. BR press roller 1 9. BR eject pulley 1
2. BR press roller 2 10. BR feedshift roller
3. BR conveying roller 11. BR feedshift pulley
4. BR conveying pulley 12. BR eject sensor (BRES)
5. BR conveying sensor1 (BRCS1) 13. Actuator (BR eject sensor)
6. BR conveying sensor2 (BRCS2) 14. BR eject roller 2
7. Actuator (BR conveying sensor) 15. BR eject pulley 2
8. BR eject roller 1
2-1-27
2N3/2N2
EPWB
YC20 YC1
YC20-12,13
YC20-17
YC20 YC2 BRMPWB
YC20 YC3
BRIDGE2_B/,A/,B,A
EXIT_SENS
YC7-5,6,7,8
EXIT_SOL_REM
EXIT_SOL_RET
BRIDGE_SENS2
YC4-2
BRIDGE1_B/,A/,B,A
YC7-1,2,3,4
GUIDE_B/,A/,B,A
YC5-5,6,7,8
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC5-1,2,3,4
BRFSSOL
BRIDGE_SENS1
DECAL_HP_SENS
DECAL_B/,A/,B,A
BRES
BRCM2 BRCM1 BRGM BRDM
BRCS2 BRCS1
BRDS
Figure 2-1-28 Bridge section block diagram
2-1-28
2N3/2N2
2-1-9 Job separator section
The job separator switches the paper path to eject printed paper to the right tray.
3
6
2
5
4
Figure 2-1-29 Job separator section
1. JS eject roller
2. JS eject pulleys
3. JS eject sensor (JSES)
4. Actuator (JS eject sensor)
5. Right tray
6. Tray extension
2-1-29
2N3/2N2
JSMPWB
JOB_OPEN_SENS
YC2-2 JSES
JOB_B/,A/,B,A
YC2-4,5,6,7 JSEM
JOB_SOL_OUT
YC2-9 JSFSSOL
YC1
YC20
FPWB1
Figure 2-1-30 Job separator section block diagram
2-1-30
2N3/2N2
2-1-10 Duplex conveying section
The duplex conveying section consists of conveying path which sends the paper sent from the feedshift/
switchback section to the paper feed/conveying section when duplex printing
.
1
4
5 2
9
5
8
3
4
4
Figure 2-1-31 Duplex conveying section
1. Upper duplex roller 6. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1)
2. Middle duplex roller 7. Actuator (duplex sensor 1)
3. Lower duplex roller 8. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2)
4. Duplex pulleys A 9. Actuator (duplex sensor 2)
5. Duplex pulleys B
2-1-31
2N3/2N2
DU_ENTER_SENS DUS1
YC23-1 YC13-12 YC11-2
DU1_B/
YC23-6 YC13-7 YC16-1
DU1_A/
YC23-7 YC13-6 YC16-2
DU1_B DUM1
YC23-8 YC13-5 YC16-3
DU1_A
YC23-9 YC13-4 YC16-4
FPWB1 RYPWB
DU_SENS DUS2
YC14-5 YC1-14 YC9-2
DU2_B/
YC14-14 YC1-5 YC7-5
DU2_A/
YC14-15 YC1-4 YC7-6
DU2_B DUM2
YC14-16 YC1-3 YC7-7
DU2_A
YC14-17 YC1-2 YC7-8
YC1
YC2
YC6
YC5
EPWB
Figure 2-1-32 Duplex conveying section block diagram
2-1-32
2N3/2N2-2
2-1-11 Document processor
(1) Original feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts shown in figure. An original placed on the original table is con-
veyed to the original conveying section. Original is fed by the rotation of the DP forwarding pulley and DP orig-
inal feed belt. The DP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time, via the torque
limiter.
6 5 7 9 4 3 2 1
10 8
Figure 2-1-33 Original feed section
1. Original tray 6. DP feed collar A
2. DP original width switch 7. DP feed collar B
(DPOWSW) 8. DP separation pulley
3. Original lift guide 9. DP original sensor (DPOS)
4. DP forwarding pulley 10. DP feed sensor (DPFS)
5. DP feed belt
2-1-33
FEED_2B,2A,1A,1B
YC5-1,2,3,4
DPOFM
FD_SW
YC4-A5
DPFS
LIFT_2B,2A,1A,1B
YC5-9,10,11,12
DPLM
LF_DNSW
YC2-10
DPLS2
DPLS1
LF_UPSW
YC4-A3
SET_SW
2-1-34
YC2-6
DPOS
DPMPWB
Figure 2-1-34 Original feed section block diagram
WIDE3,2,1
YC2-11,12,14
DPOWSW
2N3/2N2-2
2N3/2N2
(2) Original conveying section
The original conveying section consists of the parts shown in figure. A conveyed original is scanned by the
optical section (CCD) of machine when it passes through the slit glass of machine.
An original of which scanning is complete is ejected to the original eject table by the eject roller.
4 2
1
6 3 13 15
10 9 17 11 12 14 16
Figure 2-1-35 Original conveying section
1. DP registration roller 10. DP conveying pulley
2. DP registration pulley 11. DP right conveying roller
3. DP upper conveying roller 12. DP conveying pulley
4. DP conveying pulley 13. DP eject sensor (DPES)
5. DP CIS sensor (DPCS) 14. DP eject roller
6. DP CIS roller 15. DP eject pulley
7. CIS 16. )Original eject table
8. DP timing sensor (DPTS) 17. Slit glass (machine main body)
9. DP left conveying roller
2-1-35
2N3/2N2
DPMPWB
RGST_2B,2A,1A,1B
DPRM YC5-5,6,7,8
DPCS
CIS CNVY_2B,2A,1B,1A
DPOCM YC14-1,2,3,4
EXIT_SW
DPES YC4-A12
CCD_TMG_SW
DPTS YC4-B6
Image data
CIS_TMG_SW
RVRS_1B,1A,2A,2B
DPSBM YC14-5,6,7,8
YC2
YC4-2
Serial communication data signal
YC1 YC10
YC3
DPSPWB
YC2
DPRPWB
Figure 2-1-36 Original conveying section block diagram
2-1-36
2N3/2N2
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
(1) PWBs
8 6
7 38
39
1 37
2
34
10
33
9
5
26 25 24
31
12
30 29 28 27 23
14
18 17 16 15 32
22 21 20 19
11
13
3 40
36
Machine front
35 Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs
2-2-1
2N3/2N2
43
41
42
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-2 PWBs (operation section)
1. Main PWB (MPWB) .............................. Controls the software such as the print data processing and
provides the interface with computers.
2. Engine PWB (EPWB)............................ Controls printer hardware such as high voltage/bias output con-
trol, paper conveying system control, and fuser temperature con-
trol, etc.
3. Power source PWB (PSPWB) .............. After full-wave rectification of AC power source input, switching
for converting to 24 V DC and 12 V DC for output.
4. High voltage PWB 1 (HVPWB1) ........... Generates main charging and developer bias.
5. High voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2) ........... Generates transfer bias and separation bias.
6. ISC PWB (ISCPWB) ............................. Controls the scanner section.
7. CCD PWB (CCDPWB).......................... Reads the image of originals.
8. LED lamp PWB (LLPWB) ..................... Exposes originals.
9. Front PWB (FRPWB) ............................ Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and drum
units, developer units, eject unit.
10. Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1).......................... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and fuser
drive unit, relay PWB.
11. Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2).......................... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and paper
conveying section, drive section.
12. Relay PWB (RPWB) ............................. Consists of wiring relay circuit between feed PWB 1 and paper
conveying unit.
13. Motor control PWB (MCPWB)............... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and drum
motors, developer motors.
14. LSU relay PWB (LSURPWB)................ Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and laser
scanner unit.
15. APC PWB K (APCPWB-K) ................... Generates and controls the laser beam (black).
16. APC PWB M (APCPWB-M) .................. Generates and controls the laser beam (magenta).
17. APC PWB C (APCPWB-C) ................... Generates and controls the laser beam (cyan).
18. APC PWB Y (APCPWB-Y) ................... Generates and controls the laser beam (yellow).
2-2-2
2N3/2N2
19. PD PWB K (PDPWB-K) ........................ Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (black).
20. PD PWB M (PDPWB-M) ....................... Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (magenta).
21. PD PWB C (PDPWB-C)........................ Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (cyan).
22. PD PWB Y (PDPWB-Y) ........................ Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (yellow).
23. Drum PWB K (DRPWB-K) .................... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage.
24. Drum PWB M (DRPWB-M) ................... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage.
25. Drum PWB C (DRPWB-C).................... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage.
26. Drum PWB Y (DRPWB-Y) .................... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage.
27. Encoder PWB K (ECPWB-K)................ Controls the drum motor K.
28. Encoder PWB M (ECPWB-M)............... Controls the drum motor M.
29. Encoder PWB C (ECPWB-C) ............... Controls the drum motor C.
30. Encoder PWB Y (ECPWB-Y)................ Controls the drum motor Y.
31. Retainer PWB (RTPWB) ....................... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and toner
hopper motors, developer fan motors.
32. Fuser IH PWB (FIHPWB)...................... Controls the fuser IH.
33. RFID PWB (RFPWB) ............................ Reads the container information.
34. Interface PWB (IFPWB) ........................ Consists of wiring relay circuits between main PWB and Fax con-
trol PWB.
35. PF main PWB (PFMPWB) .................... Controls electrical parts of the large capacity feeder.
36. PF power source PWB (PFPSPWB)..... Power source output to large capacity feeder.
37. BR main PWB (BRMPWB) ................... Controls electrical parts of the bridge section.
38. JS main PWB (JSMPWB) ..................... Controls electrical parts of the job separator.
39. DP relay PWB (DPRPWB).................... Relay of image data.
40. Current PWB (CRPWB) ........................ Converts the AC current input to the analog signal and delivers.
41. Operation PWB 1 (OPWB1).................. Controls touch panel and LCD indication.
42. Operation PWB 2 (OPWB2).................. Consists of the LED indicators and key switches.
43. Operation PWB 3 (OPWB3).................. Consists of the LED indicators.
2-2-3
2N3/2N2-1
List of correspondences of PWB names
No. Name used in service manual Part No. Name used in parts list
1 Main PWB (MPWB) 302N294190 PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP
2 Engine PWB (EPWB) 302N294180 PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP
3 Power source PWB (PSPWB) 302N494080 PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE SP
4 High voltage PWB 1 (HVPWB1) 302LC94330 PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SP
5 High voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2) 302K994401 PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFER
6 ISC PWB (ISCPWB) 302N494201 PARTS PWB ISC ASSY SP
7 CCD PWB (CCDPWB) -
8 LED lamp PWB (LLPWB) -
9 Front PWB (FRPWB) 302N294210 PARTS PWB FRONT CLR ASSY SP
10 Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1) 302N494160 PARTS PWB FEED 1 ASSY SP
11 Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2) 302N494170 PARTS PWB FEED 2 ASSY SP
12 Relay PWB (RPWB) 302K994201 PARTS PWB JUNCTION ASSY SP
13 Motor control PWB (MCPWB) 302K994171 PARTS PWB MOTOR CONTROL ASSY SP
14 LSU relay PWB (LSURPWB) 302N494190 PARTS PWB LSU JUNC CLR ASSY SP
15 APC PWB K (APCPWB-K) -
16 APC PWB M (APCPWB-M) -
17 APC PWB C (APCPWB-C) -
18 APC PWB Y (APCPWB-Y) -
19 PD PWB K (PDPWB-K) -
20 PD PWB M (PDPWB-M) -
21 PD PWB C (PDPWB-C) -
22 PD PWB Y (PDPWB-Y) -
23 Drum PWB K (DRPWB-K) -
24 Drum PWB M (DRPWB-M) -
25 Drum PWB C (DRPWB-C) -
26 Drum PWB Y (DRPWB-Y) -
27 Encoder PWB K (ECPWB-K) -
28 Encoder PWB K (ECPWB-M) -
29 Encoder PWB K (ECPWB-C) -
30 Encoder PWB K (ECPWB-Y) -
31 Retainer PWB (RTPWB) -
32 Fuser IH PWB (FIHPWB) 302K094240 120 V Specification Model:
PARTS IH BOX ASSY J SP
302K094250 230 V Specification Model:
PARTS IH BOX ASSY E SP
33 RFID PWB (RFPWB) 302K994260 PARTS PWB RFID ASSY SP
2-2-4
2N3/2N2
No. Name used in service manual Part No. Name used in parts list
34 Interface PWB (IFPWB) 302K994270 PARTS PWB KUIO ASSY SP
35 PF main PWB (PFMPWB) 303NF94060 PARTS PWB FRONT DECK ASSY SP
36 PF power source PWB (PFPSPWB) 302N294070 120 V Specification Model:
PARTS LVU MAIN 100 SP
302N294080 230 V Specification Model:
PARTS LVU MAIN 200 SP
37 BR main PWB (BRMPWB) 302K994830 PARTS PWB BRIDGE ASSY SP
38 JS main PWB (JSMPWB) 302K994600 PARTS PWB JOB SEPA ASSY SP
39 DP relay PWB (DPRPWB) 303P294010 PARTS PWB DPIF ASSY SP
40 Current PWB (CRPWB) 302N494210 120 V Specification Model:
PARTS PWB CURRENT AVE 100 ASSY SP
302LC94270 230 V Specification Model:
PARTS PWB CURRENT AVE ASSY SP
41 Operation PWB 1 (OPWB1) 302N294150 PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY J SP
42 Operation PWB 2 (OPWB2) 302N294160 PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP
43 Operation PWB 3 (OPWB3) 302N294170 PARTS PWB OPERATION LED ASSY SP
2-2-5
2N3/2N2-1
(2) Switches and sensors
95 28
27
93 29 96
62
2
63
61
92 91 90 59
94 54
52 56
60 57
55
53
51
53,54, 58
45 47 55,56, 50
48
38 37 36 35 58 49
46 65
33 32 31 30 43,44 64
42 41 40 39 26 69 19
34 24
68 18 21 23
22
3 25
15 20 1
5
7 17 70
66 13 4
8
11 16
6
67 9
14
10 72 71
12
74 88 87
89
84 76 78 73
86 83 75 77
85
81
82 79 Machine front
80 Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-3 Switches and sensors
1. Main power switch (MSW) .................... Turns ON/OFF the AC power source.
2. Front cover switch (FRCSW) ................ Detects the opening and closing of the front cover.
3. Paper sensor 1 (PS1) ........................... Detects the presence of paper (cassette 1).
4. Paper sensor 2 (PS2) ........................... Detects the presence of paper (cassette 2).
5. Lift sensor 1 (LS1)................................. Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate (cassette 1).
6. Lift sensor 2 (LS2)................................. Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate (cassette 2).
7. Paper gauge sensor 1 (U) (PGS1(U))... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 1).
8. Paper gauge sensor 1 (L) (PGS1(L)).... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 1).
9. Paper gauge sensor 2 (U) (PGS2(U))... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 2).
2-2-6
2N3/2N2-1
10. Paper gauge sensor 2 (L) (PGS2(L)).... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 2).
11. Paper length switch 1 (PLSW1) ............ Detects the length of paper (cassette 1).
12. Paper length switch 2 (PLSW2) ............ Detects the length of paper (cassette 2).
13. Paper width switch 1 (PWSW1) ............ Detects the width of paper (cassette 1).
14. Paper width switch 2 (PWSW2) ............ Detects the width of paper (cassette 2).
15. Feed sensor 1 (FS1) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper feed section (cassette 1).
16. Feed sensor 2 (FS2) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper feed section (cassette 2).
17. Paper conveying sensor (PCS)............. Detects a paper misfeed in the vertical conveying section.
18. MP paper sensor (MPPS) ..................... Detects the presence of paper (MP tray).
19. MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1) ...................... Detects activation of upper limit of the MP plate.
20. MP lift sensor 2 (MPLS2) ...................... Detects activation of lower limit of the MP plate.
21. MP paper length switch (MPPLSW)...... Detects the length of paper (MP tray).
22. MP paper width switch (MPPWSW)...... Detects the width of paper (MP tray).
23. MP tray switch (MPTSW)...................... Detects the MP tray extension is extend.
24. MP feed sensor (MPFS) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the MP paper feed section.
25. Middle sensor (MS)............................... Detects a paper misfeed in the paper conveying section.
26. Registration sensor (RS)....................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing.
27. Original size sensor (OSS) ................... Detects the size of the original.
28. Original detection switch (ODSW) ........ Detects the opening/closing of the document processor.
29. Home position sensor (HPS) ................ Detects the optical system in the home position.
30. Screw sensor K (SRS-K) ...................... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner hopper K.
31. Screw sensor M (SRS-M) ..................... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner hopper M.
32. Screw sensor C (SRS-C) ...................... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner hopper C.
33. Screw sensor Y (SRS-Y) ...................... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner hopper Y.
34. Developer shutter sensor (DEVSS) ...... Detects the opening and closing of the developer shutter.
35. Toner hopper sensor K (THS-K) ........... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner hopper K.
36. Toner hopper sensor M (THS-M) .......... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner hopper M.
37. Toner hopper sensor C (THS-C) ........... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner hopper C.
38. Toner hopper sensor Y (THS-Y) ........... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner hopper Y.
39. Toner sensor K (TS-K) .......................... Detects the toner density in the developer unit K.
40. Toner sensor M (TS-M) ......................... Detects the toner density in the developer unit M.
41. Toner sensor C (TS-C).......................... Detects the toner density in the developer unit C.
42. Toner sensor Y (TS-Y) .......................... Detects the toner density in the developer unit Y.
43. ID sensor 1 (IDS1) ................................ Measures image density for color calibration.
44. ID sensor 2 (IDS2) ................................ Measures image density for color calibration.
45. Color release sensor (CRS).................. Detects separation of primary transfer rollers M, C, and Y.
46. Transfer belt sensor (TRBLS) ............... Detects positioning of transfer belt rotation.
47. Transfer skew sensor (TRSS)............... Detects skew of transfer belt center position.
48. Transfer edge sensor (TRES) ............... Detects edge position of the transfer belt.
49. Transfer release sensor (TRRS) ........... Detects separation of secondary transfer roller.
50. Loop sensor (LPS) ................................ Detects a paper misfeed. Controls the fuser motor by detecting
deflection in the paper.
51. Fuser belt sensor (FUBLS) ................... Detects positioning of fuser belt rotation.
52. Fuser release sensor (FURS) ............... Detects fuser pressure release setting (envelope mode).
53. Fuser thermistor 1 (FTH1) .................... Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (Center)
54. Fuser thermistor 2 (FTH2) .................... Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (Edge 1)
55. Fuser thermistor 3 (FTH3) .................... Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (A4T)
56. Fuser thermistor 4 (FTH4) .................... Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (A3)
57. Fuser thermistor 5 (FTH5) .................... Detects the press roller temperature.
58. Fuser thermistor 6 (FTH6) .................... Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (Edge 2)
59. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) ................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section.
60. IH core sensor (IHCS)........................... Detects position of the IH center core.
61. Eject sensor (ES) .................................. Detects a paper misfeed in the feedshift section.
62. Switchback sensor (SBS) ..................... Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section.
2-2-7
2N3/2N2
63. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex section.
64. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex section.
65. Duplex cover switch (DUCSW) ............. Detects the opening and closing of the duplex cover.
66. Waste toner sensor 1 (WTS1)............... Detects when the waste toner box is full.
67. Waste toner sensor 2 (WTS2)............... Detects when the waste toner box is near end.
68. Waste toner detection switch
(WTDSW).............................................. Detects the waste toner box is installed.
69. Paper conveying unit switch
(PCUSW) .............................................. Detects the opening and closing of the paper conveying unit.
70. Paper conveying cover switch
(DUCSW) .............................................. Detects the opening and closing of the paper conveying cover.
71. Outer temperature sensor
(OTEMS)............................................... Detects the outside temperature and humidity.
72. PF paper conveying cover switch
(PFPCCSW).......................................... Detects the opening and closing of the PF paper conveying cover.
73. PF paper sensor 1 (PFPS1).................. Detects the presence of paper (cassette 3).
74. PF paper sensor 2 (PFPS2).................. Detects the presence of paper (cassette 4).
75. PF lift sensor 1 (PFLS1)........................ Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate (cassette 3).
76. PF lift sensor 2 (PFLS2)........................ Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate (cassette 4).
77. PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) .................... Detect paper jams of paper feed section (cassette 3).
78. PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) .................... Detect paper jams of paper feed section (cassette 4).
79. PF paper gauge sensor 1 upper
(PFPGS1(U))......................................... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 3).
80. PF paper gauge sensor 1 lower
(PFPGS1(L)) ......................................... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 3).
81. PF paper gauge sensor 2 upper
(PFPGS2(U))......................................... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 4).
82. PF paper gauge sensor 2 lower
(PFPGS2(L)) ......................................... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 4).
83. PF paper size detection switch 1
(PFSDSW1) .......................................... Detects the size of paper (cassette 3).
84. PF paper size detection switch 2
(PFSDSW2) .......................................... Detects the size of paper (cassette 4).
85. PF cassette detection switch 1
(PFCDSW1) .......................................... Detects the presence of cassette 3.
86. PF cassette detection switch 2
(PFCDSW2) .......................................... Detects the presence of cassette 4.
87. PF paper conveying sensor 1
(PFPCS1).............................................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper vertical conveying section.
88. PF paper conveying sensor 2
(PFPCS2).............................................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper horizontal conveying sec-
tion.
89. PF paper conveying unit switch
(PFPCUSW).......................................... Detects the presence of PF paper conveying unit.
90. BR decurler sensor (BRDS).................. Detects positioning of decurler rotation.
91. BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1).......... Detects a paper misfeed in the bridge section.
92. BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2).......... Detects a paper misfeed in the bridge section
93. BR eject sensor (BRES) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the bridge eject section
94. BR conveying unit switch
(BRCUSW)........................................... Detects presence of the bridge conveying unit.
95. BR eject cover switch (BRECSW) ....... Detects opening/closing of the bridge eject cover.
96. JS eject sensor (JSES) ......................... Detects a paper misfeed in the job separator section.
2-2-8
2N3/2N2
(3) Motors
5
52
51 50 49 48
42
39
15 14 13 12 13 43
40
41
36
35 37 34
38
27 31 26 30 25 29 24 28
33 10
44
32 53 23 19 22 18 21 17 20 16 1
11 4
9 8 7 6
Machine front
45
Machine inside
47
Machine rear
46
Figure 2-2-4 Motors
1. Paper feed motor (PFM) ....................... Drives the paper feed section.
2. Lift motor 1 (LM1).................................. Operates the bottom plate (cassette 1).
3. Lift motor 2 (LM2).................................. Operates the bottom plate (cassette 2).
4. MP lift motor (MPLM) ............................ Operates the MP plate.
5. Scanner motor (SM).............................. Drives the optical system.
6. Polygon motor K (PM-K) ....................... Drives the polygon mirror K.
7. Polygon motor M (PM-M)...................... Drives the polygon mirror M.
8. Polygon motor C (PM-C)....................... Drives the polygon mirror C.
9. Polygon motor Y (PM-Y) ....................... Drives the polygon mirror Y.
2-2-9
2N3/2N2
10. Registration motor (RM)........................ Drives the registration section.
11. Middle motor (MM)................................ Drives the paper conveying section.
12. Toner motor K (TM-K) ........................... Drives the toner container K.
13. Toner motor M (TM-M) .......................... Drives the toner container M.
14. Toner motor C (TM-C)........................... Drives the toner container C.
15. Toner motor Y (TM-Y) ........................... Drives the toner container Y.
16. Drum motor K (DRM-K) ........................ Drives the drum unit K.
17. Drum motor M (DRM-M) ....................... Drives the drum unit M.
18. Drum motor C (DRM-C) ........................ Drives the drum unit C.
19. Drum motor Y (DRM-Y) ........................ Drives the drum unit Y.
20. Toner hopper motor K (THM-K) ............ Replenishes toner to the developer unit K.
21. Toner hopper motor M (THM-M) ........... Replenishes toner to the developer unit M.
22. Toner hopper motor C (THM-C) ............ Replenishes toner to the developer unit C.
23. Toner hopper motor Y (THM-Y) ............ Replenishes toner to the developer unit Y.
24. Developer motor K (DEVM-K)............... Drives the developer unit K.
25. Developer motor M (DEVM-M) ............. Drives the developer unit M.
26. Developer motor C (DEVM-C) .............. Drives the developer unit C.
27. Developer motor Y (DEVM-Y)............... Drives the developer unit Y.
28. Vibration motor K (VM-K) ...................... Toner lump in the developer unit K vibrates.
29. Vibration motor M (VM-M)..................... Toner lump in the developer unit M vibrates.
30. Vibration motor C (VM-C) ..................... Toner lump in the developer unit C vibrates.
31. Vibration motor Y (VM-Y) ...................... Toner lump in the developer unit Y vibrates.
32. LSU cleaning motor (LSUCM) .............. Drives LSU dust shield glass cleaning system.
33. Waste toner motor (WTM)..................... Drives waste toner system.
34. Transfer motor (TRM) ........................... Drives the transfer section.
35. Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) .......... Drives the transfer cleaning section.
36. Color release motor (CRM)................... Drives separation of primary transfer rollers M, C, and Y.
37. Transfer skew motor (TRSM)................ Drives skew of transfer tension roller.
38. Transfer release motor (TRRM) ............ Drives separation of secondary transfer roller.
39. Fuser motor (FUM) ............................... Drives the fuser section.
40. Fuser release motor (FURM) ................ Drives fuser pressure release.
41. IH core motor (IHCM)............................ Drives the fuser IH section.
42. Eject motor (EM) ................................... Drives the eject section.
43. Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) ........................ Drives the duplex section.
44. Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) ........................ Drives the duplex section.
45. PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) ............. Drives the paper feed section of the large capacity feeder.
46. PF lift motor 1 (PFLM1)......................... Operates the bottom plate (cassette 3).
47. PF lift motor 2 (PFLM2)......................... Operates the bottom plate (cassette 4).
48. BR decurler motor (BRDM)................... Drives the decurler (press roller).
49. BR guide motor (BRGM)....................... Drives the rotary decurler.
50. BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1)........... Drives the paper conveying section.
51. BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2)........... Drives the paper conveying section.
52. JS eject motor (JSEM) .......................... Drives the job separator.
53. Toner vibration motor (TVM) ................. Vibration of the filter inside the waste toner box.
2-2-10
2N3/2N2-1
(4) Fan motors
25
7
19
18
20,21
17
24 16
14,15
1
2
6 5 4 3 22
8
9
13 12 11 10
23
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-5 Motors
1. Toner fan motor 1 (TFM1) ..................... Collecting scattered toner.
2. Toner fan motor 2 (TFM2) ..................... Collecting scattered toner.
3. Developer fan motor K (DEVFM-K) ...... Cools the developer unit K.
4. Developer fan motor M (DEVFM-M) ..... Cools the developer unit M.
5. Developer fan motor C (DEVFM-C) ...... Cools the developer unit C.
6. Developer fan motor Y (DEVFM-Y) ...... Cools the developer unit Y.
7. Exhaust fan motor 1 (EXFM1) .............. Cools the machine inside.
8. Exhaust fan motor 2 (EXFM2) .............. Cools the machine inside.
9. Suction fan motor 3 (EXFM3) ............... Cools the machine inside.
2-2-11
2N3/2N2-1
10. LSU fan motor K (LSUFM-K) ................ Cools the laser scanner unit K.
11. LSU fan motor M (LSUFM-M) ............... Cools the laser scanner unit M.
12. LSU fan motor C (LSUFM-C)................ Cools the laser scanner unit C.
13. LSU fan motor Y (LSUFM-Y) ................ Cools the laser scanner unit Y.
14. Belt fan motor 1 (BLFM1)...................... Cools the transfer belt section.
15. Belt fan motor 2 (BLFM2)...................... Cools the transfer belt section.
16. Fuser front fan motor (FUFFM)............. Cools the fuser section (front side).
17. Fuser rear fan motor (FURFM) ............. Cools the fuser section (rear side).
18. Eject front fan motor (EFFM) ................ Cools the eject section (front side).
19. Eject rear fan motor (ERFM)................. Cools the eject section (rear side).
20. Eject fan motor 1 (EFM1)...................... Cools the eject section.
21. Eject fan motor 2 (EFM2)...................... Cools the eject section.
22. IH fan motor (IHFM) .............................. Cools the fuser IH PWB.
23. Power source fan motor (PSFM) .......... Cools the power source section.
24. Controller fan motor (CONFM).............. Cools the controller section.
25. Bridge fan motor (BRFM)...................... Cools the bridge section.
2-2-12
2N3/2N2
(5) Others
14 13
26
15
23
20
21
22
19 18 17 16
12
6
1
3
5
2
24
8 11
7 10
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
25
Figure 2-2-6 Others
1. Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ................ Primary paper feed from cassette 1.
2. Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) ................ Primary paper feed from cassette 2.
3. Assist clutch 1 (ASCL1) ........................ Controls the drive of the assist roller.
4. Assist clutch 2 (ASCL2) ........................ Controls the drive of the assist roller.
5. Paper conveying clutch (PCCL)............ Controls the drive of vertical conveying section.
6. MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) .......... Controls primary paper feed from the MP tray.
7. PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1)....... Primary paper feed from cassette 3.
8. PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)....... Primary paper feed from cassette 4.
2-2-13
2N3/2N2
9. PF paper conveying clutch 1
(PFPCCL1)............................................ Controls the drive of the vertical conveying section.
10. PF paper conveying clutch 2
(PFPCCL2)............................................ Controls the drive of the vertical conveying section.
11. PF paper conveying clutch 3
(PFPCCL3)............................................ Controls the drive of the horizontal conveying section.
12. Cleaning solenoid (CLSOL) .................. Controls the ID sensor cleaning.
13. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL).................. Operates the feedshift guide.
14. BR feedshift solenoid (BRFSSOL) ........ Operates the feedshift guide.
15. JS feedshift solenoid (JSFSSOL) ......... Operates the feedshift guide.
16. Cleaning lamp K (CL-K) ........................ Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum (black).
17. Cleaning lamp M (CL-M)....................... Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum
(magenta).
18. Cleaning lamp C (CL-C)........................ Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum (cyan).
19. Cleaning lamp Y (CL-Y) ........................ Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum (yellow).
20. Fuser IH (FIH) ....................................... Heats the heat roller (fuser belt).
21. Fuser heater (FH) ................................. Heats the press roller.
22. Fuser thermostat 1 (FTS1).................... Prevents overheating of the heat roller.
23. Fuser thermostat 2 (FTS2).................... Prevents overheating of the press roller.
24. Cassette heater (CH) ............................ Dehumidifies paper in cassette 1 and 2 (option).
25. PF Cassette heater (PFCH).................. Dehumidifies paper in cassette 3 and 4 (option).
26. Hard disk 1,2(HDD 1,2)......................... Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode.
2-2-14
2N3/2N2
(6) PWBs (document processor)
1
3
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
Figure 2-2-7 PWBs (document processor)
1. DP main PWB (DPMPWB) ................... Controls electrical components of the document processor.
2. DP LED PWB (DPLPWB) ..................... Indicates presence of originals or an original jam.
3. DP SHD PWB (DPSPWB) .................... Controls the image processing.
2-2-15
2N3/2N2-2
(7) Switches and sensors (document processor)
4
2 6
8 7
9 3
5
11
10
1
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
Figure 2-2-8 Switches and sensors (document processor)
1. DP open/close switch (DPOCSW) ........ Detects the opening/closing of the document processor.
2. DP interlock switch (DPILSW) .............. Breaks the safety circuit when the DP top cover is opened; resets
original misfeed detection.
3. DP original sensor (DPOS) ................... Detects the presence of an original.
4. DP lift sensor1 (DPLS1) ........................ Detects the original tray reaching the upper limit.
5. DP lift sensor2 (DPLS2) ........................ Detects the original tray reaching the lower limit.
6. DP original length switch (DPOLSW).... Detects the length of the original.
7. DP original width switch (DPOWSW).... Detects the width of the original.
8. DP feed sensor (DPFS) ........................ Detects primary original feed end timing.
9. DP CIS sensor (DPCS)......................... Detects the original scanning timing.
10. DP timing sensor (DPTS)...................... Detects the original scanning timing.
11. DP eject sensor (DPES) ....................... Detects an original misfeed in the original eject section.
2-2-16
2N3/2N2
(8) Motors (document processor)
2 1
6 7
5
3
4
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
Figure 2-2-9 Motors (document processor)
1. DP original feed motor (DPOFM).......... Drives the original feeding section.
2. DP ragistration motor (DPRM) .............. Drives the DP registration roller.
3. DP conveying motor (DPOCM)............. Drives the original conveying section.
4. DP eject motor (DPEM) ........................ Drives the DP eject roller.
5. DP lift motor (DPLM)............................. Operates the original lift guide.
6. DP fan motor1 (DPFM1) ....................... Cools the drive section.
7. DP fan motor2 (DPFM2) ....................... Cools the CIS.
2-2-17
2N3/2N2
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-2-18
2N3/2N2
2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 Main PWB
20
1 7 1
YC25 YC12
1 7
YC6 BAT1
200
1 8 YC11 YS1 YC31
1 STD
YC30 OPT 200
1 6
12
1
1GB
YS3
1
2GB
YC7 U2
50
YC23 1
YC10 U9
10
1 3
YC33
1
U1
YC27
1 3 YS5 1
BLACK
1 41
YC32 YC1 72 YC5
1 3
10 BLUE
YC43
1
YC42 YC2
WH
1
YC21
5
BK
6
YC26
1
5 1
YC8 YC22
WH
5 1
15
1
YC9 YC20
Figure 2-3-1 Main PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-1
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 TXP O - HDD1 data signal
hard disk 1
3 TXN O - HDD1 data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RXN I - HDD1 data signal
6 RXP I - HDD1 data signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 TXP O - HDD2 data signal
hard disk 2
3 TXN O - HDD2 data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RXN I - HDD2 data signal
6 RXP I - HDD2 data signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC5 1 TD1+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
Connected to 2 TD1- O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
ethernet
3 TD2+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
4 TD2- O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
5 CT1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
6 CT2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
7 TD3+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
8 TD3- O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
9 TD4+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
10 TD4- O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
11 GRLED_A1 O 0/3.3 V DC LED emitter signal
12 GRLED_K1 O 0/3.3 V DC LED emitter signal
13 YWLED_A2 O 0/3.3 V DC LED emitter signal
14 YWLED_K2 O 0/3.3 V DC LED emitter signal
YC6 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 LCD_OFF O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
operation 3 LOCKN O 0/3.3 V DC Lock signal
panel PWB1
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal
6 TX0P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal
7 GND - - Ground
2-3-2
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC7 1 KMDET I 0/3.3 V DC KMAS set signal
Connected to 2 NC - - Not used
KMAS
3 KMDREQ I 0/3.3 V DC KMAS control signal
4 KMACK O 0/3.3 V DC KMAS control signal
5 KMRXD O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KMAS received data signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 KMTXD I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KMAS transmission data signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
11 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to KMAS
12 +5V - - Not used
YC8 1 VBUS1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to IFPWB
Connected to 2 USB_DN1 I/O - USB data signal
interface
3 USB_DP1 I/O - USB data signal
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 AUDIO1 I Analog Audio signal
6 WAKEUP1 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
7 RESET1 I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 VBUS0 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to IFPWB
10 USB_DN0 I/O - USB data signal
11 USB_DP0 I/O - USB data signal
12 GND - - Ground
13 AUDIO0 I Analog Audio signal
14 WAKEUP0 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
15 RESET0 I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
YC9 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 5V_CUT0 I 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC cut signal
interface
3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to IFPWB
5 GND - - Ground
6 5V_CUT1 I 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC cut signal
2-3-3
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC10 1 DP_CONECTN I 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal
Connected to 2 DP_SYSCLKOUT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal
DP relay 3 PCIEN3_DP2A I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 PCIEP3_DP2A I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 PCIEN_REFCLK_ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal
D
9 GND - - Ground
10 PCIEP_REFCLK_ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal
D
11 PCIEN3_A2DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
12 GND - - Ground
13 PCIEP3_A2DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
14 GND - - Ground
15 GND - - Ground
16 URAN_RSTN O 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal
17 PCIEN2_DP2A I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
18 +3.3V3 - 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB
19 PCIEP2_DP2A I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
20 +3.3V3 - 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB
21 GND - - Ground
22 +3.3V3 - 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB
23 PCIEN2_A2DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
24 +3.3V3 - 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB
25 PCIEP2_A2DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
26 +3.3V3 - 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB
27 GND - - Ground
28 +3.3V3 - 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB
29 PCIEN1_DP2A I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
30 +3.3V3 - 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB
31 PCIEP1_DP2A I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
32 +3.3V3 - 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB
33 GND - - Ground
34 +3.3V3 - 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB
2-3-4
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC10 35 PCIEN1_A2DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
Connected to 36 GND - - Ground
DP relay 37 PCIEP1_A2DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
PWB
38 GND - - Ground
39 GND - - Ground
40 GND - - Ground
41 PCIEN0_DP2A I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
42 GND - - Ground
43 PCIEN0_DP2A I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
44 GND - - Ground
45 GND - - Ground
46 PCIEN0_A2DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
47 GND - - Ground
48 PCIEP0_A2DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
49 PCIE3_SWRST_ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal
A2
50 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 SC_IRN O 0/3.3 V DC Scanner interrupt signal
ISC PWB
3 SC_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC Scanner communication direction sig-
nal
4 SC_HLDN O 0/3.3 V DC Scanner hold signal
5 SC_BSY O 0/3.3 V DC Scanner busy signal
6 SC_SI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 SC_SO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
8 SC_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scanner clock signal
YC12 1 HUMAN_SENS_F - - Not used
AR
Connected to 2 JOB_LED O 0/3.3 V DC JOB LED control signal
operation 3 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V D C power to OPWB1
PWB 1
4 HUMAN_SENS_N - - Not used
EAR
5 ANY_KEY I 0/3.3 V DC ANY KEY return signal
6 C2P_SCK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Panel clock signal
7 P2C_SBSY I 0/3.3 V DC Panel busy signal
8 P2C_SDIR I 0/3.3 V DC Panel communication direction signal
2-3-5
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC12 9 C2P_SDAT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
Connected to 10 P2C_SDAT I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
operation 11 GND - - Ground
PWB 1
12 PANEL RESET O 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
13 BEEP_POWERO O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep return signal
N
14 LED_MEMORY_N O 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
15 LED_ATTENTION O 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
_N
16 LED_PROCESSI O 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal
NG_N
17 AUDIO O Analog Audio output signal
18 INT_POWERKEY I 0/3.3 V DC Power key: On/Off
_N
19 GND - - Ground
20 LIGHTOFF_POW O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep return signal
ERON
YC20 A1 VBUS_A O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
Connected to A2 D-_A I/O - USB data signal
USB A3 D+_A I/O - USB data signal
A4 GND_A - - Ground
B1 VBUS_B O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
B2 D-_B I/O - USB data signal
B3 D+_B I/O - USB data signal
B4 GND_B - - Ground
YC21 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
Connected to 2 DATA - I/O - USB data signal
USB host
3 DATA + I/O - USB data signal
4 NC - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
YC22 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
Connected to 2 DATA- I/O - USB data signal
key board 3 DATA+ I/O - USB data signal
4 ID - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
2-3-6
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC23 1 SPEED CON- O 0/3.3 V DC CONFM: On/Off
TROL
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
controller fan 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
motor
YC25 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 HTPDN I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
ISC PWB
3 LOCKN I 0/3.3 V DC Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RX0N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data signal
6 RX0P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC26 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
Connected to 2 DATA- I/O - USB data signal
card reader 3 DATA+ I/O - USB data signal
4 ID - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
YC27 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 +5V_HDD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to HDD1
hard disk 1
3 GND - - Ground
YC30 1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to OPWB1
Connected to 2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to OPWB1
operation
3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to OPWB1
PWB 1
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC31 1 CD/DAT3 I/O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
Connected to 2 CMD I/O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
SD card 3 VSS - - Ground
4 VDD - 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
5 CLK - 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
6 VSS - - Ground
7 DAT0 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
8 DAT1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
9 DAT2 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
10 CD I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
11 COMMON - 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
12 WP I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
2-3-7
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC32 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 +5V_HDD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to HDD2
hard disk 2
3 GND - - Ground
YC42 1 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from PSPWB
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
power source
3 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from PSPWB
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from PSPWB
6 GND - - Ground
7 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from PSPWB
8 GND - - Ground
9 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from PSPWB
10 GND - - Ground
YC43 1 SLEEP_INT I 0/3.3 V DC Sleep notice signal
Connected to 2 EGSCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Engine clock signal
engine PWB 3 EGSI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 EGSDIR O 0/3.3 V DC Engine communication direction
signal
5 EGSBSY O 0/3.3 V DC Enngine busy signal
6 EGSO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 EGIRN O 0/3.3 V DC Engine interrupt signal
8 JS_LED O 0/3.3 V DC Jobseparetor LED signal
9 ENG_OFF - - Not used
10 HLDENG O 0/3.3 V DC Engine hold signal
11 SLEEP O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep signal
12 HSYNDD_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
13 HSYNDD_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
14 HSYNCC_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
15 HSYNCC_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
16 HSYNCB_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
17 HSYNCB_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
18 HSYNCA_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
19 HSYNCA_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
20 VSYNDD_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
21 VSYNDD_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
22 VSYNCC_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
2-3-8
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC43 23 VSYNCC_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
Connected to 24 VSYNCB_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
engine PWB 25 VSYNCB_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
26 VSYNCA_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
27 VSYNCA_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
28 GND - - Ground
29 TCLKP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
30 TCLKN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
31 GND - - Ground
32 TCP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
33 TCN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
34 GND - - Ground
35 TBP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
36 TBN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
37 GND - - Ground
38 TAP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
39 TAN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
40 GND - - Ground
2-3-9
2N3/2N2
2-3-2 Engine PWB
A10 A1
24
38
1
A20 A1 1 12 6 1 20 1 B19 B1
4
2 1
YC27
YC18
8
YC23 YC22
1
B10 YC25 B1
B1 YC26 B20 A1 A19
YC20 YC19
1
YC24 YC21
7
12
YC17 11
14
15
13
12
1 YC1
YC16
A16
B1
22
1
1 10
YC3
28
U4
1
YC2
YC15
1
1 4
U1
B16
YC13
A1
U100
1
U13
60
1
YC12
YC6
YC4
U8
1
64
50
1
64
YC5
YC11
YC10 1 11
12 1 1 YC47 40
50
YC7 1 YC50 40
1
1 40 22
YC9 12 YC8
1 50
Figure 2-3-2 Engine PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-10
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FPWB1
to feed
3 GND - - Ground
PWB 1
4 5V0 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from FPWB1
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1
8 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to front
3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FRPWB
7 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FRPWB
8 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FRPWB
9 +3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to FRPWB
10 +3.3V1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to FRPWB
YC3 A1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TRCM
Connected A2 GND - - Ground
to transfer
A3 ICL_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC TRCM: On/Off
belt unit
A4 ICL_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal
A5 ICL_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC TRCM ready signal
A6 ICL_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC TRCM drive switch signal
A7 RLS_MOT_DR O 0/24 V DC CRM: On/Off
A8 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CRM
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 RLS_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC CRS: On/Off
A11 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to CRS
A12 ZIG_MOT_DR_CC O 0/24 V DC TRSM: On/Off (CCW)
W
A13 ZIG_MOT_DR_CW O 0/24 V DC TRSM: On/Off (CW)
A14 GND - - Ground
A15 BLT_INDEX - - Not used
A16 +5V - - Ground
B1 GND - - Ground
B2 ZIG_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC TRSS: On/Off
B3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to TRSS
2-3-11
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 B4 GND - - Ground
Connected B5 BLT_SPEED I 0/3.3 V DC TRBLS: On/Off
to transfer
B6 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to TRBLS
belt unit
B7 ZIG_TEMP I Analog TEMP signal
B8 ZIG_REV_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC TRES: On/Off
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to TRES
B11 +3.3V2 - - Not used
B12 EEP_SCL2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
B13 EEP_SDA2 I 0/3.3 V DC EEPROM data signal
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 A0 - - Not used
B16 A1 - - Not used
YC4 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 FEED_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC PFM: On/Off
to feed
3 FEED_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal
PWB 2
4 FEED_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC PFM ready signal
5 FEED_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC PFM drive switch signal
6 FEED_CL1_REM O 0/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2_REM O 0/24 V DC PFCL2: On/Off
8 ASIST_CL2 O 0/24 V DC ASCL2: On/Off
9 LIFT_MOT2_REM O 0/3.3 V DC LM2: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 LIFT_MOT1_REM1 O 0/3.3 V DC LM1: On/Off
12 CAS2_WID I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW2: On/Off
13 CAS2_LNG3 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
14 CAS2_LNG2 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
15 CAS2_LNG1 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
16 CAS1_WID I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW1: On/Off
17 CAS1_LNG3 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
18 CAS1_LNG2 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
19 CAS1_LNG1 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground
2-3-12
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC4 21 CAS2_QUANT2 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(L): On/Off
Connected 22 CAS2_QUANT1 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(U): On/Off
to feed
23 CAS1_QUANT2 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(L): On/Off
PWB 2
24 CAS1_QUANT1 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(U): On/Off
25 LIFT_MOT1_LOCK I 0/3.3 V DC LM1 lock signal
26 LIFT_MOT2_LOCK I 0/3.3 V DC LM2 lock signal
27 CURRENT_SIG I 0/3.3 V DC Current signal
28 V-FEED_CL O 0/24 V DC PCCL: On/Off
29 COVER_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PCCSW: On/Off
30 FEED2_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPCS1: On/Off
31 CAS1_P0 I 0/3.3 V DC FS1: On/Off
32 CAS1_LIFT_UP I 0/3.3 V DC LS1: On/Off
33 GND - - Ground
34 CAS1_EMPTY I 0/3.3 V DC PS1: On/Off
35 PICK_SOL1_RET - - Not used
36 PICK_SOL1_REM - - Not used
37 CAS2_P0 I 0/3.3 V DC FS2: On/Off
38 CAS2_LIFT_UP I 0/3.3 V DC LS2: On/Off
39 CAS2_EMPTY I 0/3.3 V DC PS2: On/Off
40 PICK_SOL2_RET - - Not used
41 PICK_SOL2_REM - - Not used
42 GND - - Ground
43 REG_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC RS: On/Off
44 FEED1_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PCS: On/Off
45 BEND_SENS - - Not used
46 MID_MOT_PH O 0/3.3 V DC MM control signal
47 MID_MOT_REM(R O 0/3.3 V DC MM: On/Off
OL_CL)
48 MID_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MM clock signal
49 MID_MOT_PD O 0/3.3 V DC MM control signal
50 ASIST_CL1 O 0/24 V DC ASCL1: On/Off
2-3-13
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC5 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 M_TEMP - - Not used
to feed
3 LOOP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off
PWB 1
4 GND - - Ground
5 EDGE_FAN_H O 0/24 V DC FUFM: On/Off
6 DU1_MOT_PD O 0/3.3 V DC DUM1 control signal
7 DU1_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM1 clock signal
8 DU1_MOT_REM(C O 0/3.3 V DC DUM1: On/Off
L_H)
9 GND - - Ground
10 EXIT_FAN O 0/24 V DC EFM: On/Off
11 DU_ENTER_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off
12 TCON_SET - - Not used
13 GND - - Ground
14 TRANS_MOT_RE O 0/3.3 V DC TRCM: On/Off
M
15 TRANS_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal
16 TRANS_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC TRCM ready signal
17 TRANS_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC TRCM drive switch signal
18 TRANS_MOT_BRK O 0/3.3 V DC TRCM break signal
19 GND - - Ground
20 DRM_MOT_BK_R - - Not used
EM
21 DRM_MOT_BK_R - - Not used
DY
22 DRM_MOT_BK_DI - - Not used
R
23 DRM_MOT_BK_B - - Not used
RK
24 GND - - Ground
25 DLP_MOT_BK_RE - - Not used
M
26 DLP_MOT_BK_CL - - Not used
K
27 DLP_MOT_BK_RD - - Not used
Y
28 DLP_MOT_BK_DI - - Not used
R
29 GND - - Ground
2-3-14
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC5 30 DRM_MOT_CLR_ - - Not used
REM
Connected 31 DRM_MOT_BK_CL - - Not used
to feed R_CLK
PWB 1
32 DRM_MOT_CLR_ - - Not used
RDY
33 DRM_MOT_CLR_ - - Not used
DIR
34 GND - - Ground
35 DLP_MOT_CLR_R - - Not used
EM
36 DLP_MOT_CLR_C - - Not used
LK
37 DLP_MOT_CLR_R - - Not used
DY
38 DLP_MOT_CLR_DI - - Not used
R
39 GND - - Ground
40 REG_MOT_PD O 0/3.3 V DC RM control signal
41 REG_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal
42 REG_MOT_REM(C O 0/3.3 V DC RM: On/Off
L)
43 GND - - Ground
44 IH_PWB_FAN_L O 0/24 V DC IHFM: On/Off
45 IH_PWB_FAN_H O 0/24 V DC IHFM: On/Off
46 IH_PWB_FAN_AL I 0/3.3 V DC IHFM alarm signal
M
47 POWER_OFF_24V O 0/3.3 V DC Power off signal
1
48 DRM_HEAT - - Not used
49 GND - - Ground
50 GND - - Ground
2-3-15
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC6 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 JOB_SET I 0/3.3 V DC Job separator set signal
to feed
3 JOB_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC JSEM: On/Off
PWB 1
4 JOB_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JSEM clock signal
5 JOB_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC JSEM drive switch signal
6 JOB_OPEN_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC JSOCS: On/Off
7 JOB_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC JSFSSOL: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 MAIN_HEAT - - Not used
10 PRESS_REM O 0/3.3 V DC Fuser heater remote signal
11 ZEROC O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal
12 FSR_RELAY O 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
13 PRESS_REM - - Not used
14 EXIT_REAR_FAN_ O 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off
L
15 EXIT_REAR_FAN_ O 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off
H
16 GND - - Ground
17 GND - - Ground
18 FSR_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC FUM: On/Off
19 FSR_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal
20 FSR_MOT_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC FUM ready signal
21 FSR_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC FUM drive switch signal
22 FSR_MOT_BARKE O 0/3.3 V DC FUM brake signal
23 GND - - Ground
24 MPF_TABLE I 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off
25 MPF_WID1 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
26 MPF_WID2 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
27 MPF_WID3 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
28 MPF_LNG I 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off
29 GND - - Ground
30 MPF_PPR I 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off
31 MPF_UP I 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off
32 MPF_DOWN I 0/3.3 V DC MPLS2: On/Off
33 MPF_JAM I 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off
34 MPF_CL O 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off
2-3-16
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC6 35 MPF_LIFT2 O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
Connected 36 MPF_LIFT1 O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
to feed
37 GND - - Ground
PWB 1
38 GND - - Ground
39 GND - - Ground
40 GND - - Ground
41 GND - - Ground
42 INTER_LOCK I DC0V/24V PCUSW: On/Off
43 DU2_MOT_PD O 0/3.3 V DC DUM2 control signal
44 DU2_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM2 clock signal
45 DU2_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC DUM2/DUCL2: On/Off
46 GND - - Ground
47 DU_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off
48 DU_FAN - - Not used
49 PRESS_RLS_MOT O 0/24 V DC TRRM: On/Off
_REM1
50 PRESS_RLS_MOT O 0/24 V DC TRRM: On/Off
_REM2
51 PRESS_RLS_SEN I 0/3.3 V DC TRRS: On/Off
S
52 DU_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off
53 BELT_JAM_SENS - - Not used
54 GND - - Ground
55 CLN_SOL_RET O 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (RET)
56 CLN_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (ACT)
57 REG_SENS_R_S( I Analog IDS2 detection signal
BK)
58 REG_SENS_R_P( I Analog IDS2 detection signal
BK)
59 REG_R_LED O Analog IDS2 control signal
60 GND - - Ground
61 REG_SENS_F_S I Analog IDS1 detection signal
62 REG_SENS_F_P I Analog IDS1 detection signal
63 REG_F_LED O Analog IDS1 control signal
64 GND - - Ground
2-3-17
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC7 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 WTNR_SET I 0/3.3 V DC WTDSW: On/Off
to front
3 INTER_LOCK - - Not used
PWB
4 IH_CORE_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC IHCS: On/Off
5 IH_CORE_MOT_R O 0/24 V DC IHCM: On/Off
EM
6 IH_CORE_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) IHCM clock signal
7 WTNR_LED O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal
8 IH_COIL_FAN_AL I 0/3.3 V DC FUFFM alarm signal
M
9 IH_COIL_FAN_H O 0/24 V DC FUFFM: On/Off
10 IH_COIL_FAN_L O 0/24 V DC FUFFM: On/Off
11 EXIT_FAN O 0/24 V DC EFFM: On/Off
12 VIB_MOT_REM O 0/24 V DC VM: On/Off
13 JUNC_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (ACT)
14 JUNC_SOL_RET O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (RET)
15 GND - - Ground
16 EXIT_PAPE_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC ES: On/Off
17 EXIT_FEED_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC SBS: On/Off
18 SB_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC EM: On/Off
19 SB_MOT_PH O 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal
20 SB_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal
21 SB_MOT_PD O 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal
22 SB_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC EM drive switch signal
23 GND - - Ground
24 WTNR_FULL_CON I 0/3.3 V DC WTS2 control signal
T
25 THOP_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC THM drive switch signal
26 DLP_FAN_CLR_H O 0/24 V DC DEVFM: On/Off
27 DLP_FAN_CLR_L O 0/24 V DC DEVFM: On/Off
28 WTNR_FULL I Analog WTS1 detection signal
29 WTNR_NEAR I Analog WTS2 detection signal
30 WTNR_VCONT O 0/3.3 V DC WTS2 control signal
31 GND - - Ground
32 ROT_MOT_REM - - Not used
33 ROT_MOT_CLK - - Not used
34 ROT_MOT_PD - - Not used
2-3-18
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC7 35 ROT_MOT_DIR - - Not used
Connected 36 ROT_HP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DEVSS: On/Off
to front
37 THOP_MOT_Bk_R O 0/24 V DC THM-K: On/Off
PWB EM
38 THOP_MOT_M_R O 0/24 V DC THM-M: On/Off
EM
39 THOP_MOT_C_RE O 0/24 V DC THM-C: On/Off
M
40 THOP_MOT_Y_RE O 0/24 V DC THM-Y: On/Off
M
41 GND - - Ground
42 ENCODE_ Bk I 0/3.3 V DC SRS-K: On/Off
43 ENCODE_M I 0/3.3 V DC SRS-M: On/Off
44 ENCODE_C I 0/3.3 V DC SRS-C: On/Off
45 ENCODE_Y I 0/3.3 V DC SRS-Y: On/Off
46 THOP_ Bk I 0/3.3 V DC THS-K: On/Off
47 THOP_M I 0/3.3 V DC THS-M: On/Off
48 THOP_C I 0/3.3 V DC THS-C: On/Off
49 THOP_Y I 0/3.3 V DC THS-Y: On/Off
50 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to high volt- 3 SP_CNT O Analog Separation bias control voltage
age PWB 2
4 T2_CNT O Analog Secondary transfer bias control volt-
age
5 SP_REM O 0/3.3 V DC Separation bias: On/Off
6 T_REM O 0/3.3 V DC Secondary transfer bias: On/Off
7 FB_CNT O 0/3.3 V DC Primary transfer cleaning bias: On/Off
8 T1_CNT_Bk O Analog Primary transfer bias K control volt-
age
9 T1_CNT_M O Analog Primary transfer bias M control volt-
age
10 T1_CNT_C O Analog Primary transfer bias C control volt-
age
11 T1_CNT_Y O Analog Primary transfer bias Y control volt-
age
12 T1_CLR_OFF_RE O 0/3.3 V DC Primary transfer control signal
M
2-3-19
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC9 1 MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB clock signal
Connected 2 MOT_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data
to motor signal
control 3 MOT_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB select signal
PWB
4 MOT_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data
signal
5 MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB ready signal
6 EMERGENCY O 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB control signal
7 BLT_SPEED O 0/3.3 V DC TBLS: On/Off
8 BLT_INDEX - - Not used
9 DRM_INDEX_BK O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-K control signal
10 DRM_INDEX_M O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-M control signal
11 DRM_INDEX_C O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-C control signal
12 DRM_INDEX_Y O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-Y control signal
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
15 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MCPWB
16 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MCPWB
17 BLT_BRAKE - - Not used
18 BLT_VM - - Not used
19 BLT_REM - - Not used
20 MOT_DATA_SET O 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB control signal
21 DRM_ON O 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB control signal
22 BLT_FG - - Not used
YC10 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 DRM_INDEX_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC DRM-K control signal
to front 3 ERS_Bk O 0/24 V DC CL-K: On/Off
PWB
4 TPD_Bk_1 I Analog TS-K detection signal
5 DLP_VCONT_Bk_1 O 0/3.3 V DC TS-K control signal
6 TPD_TEMP_Bk I Analog Developer thermistor K detection sig-
nal
7 GND - - Ground
8 DRM_INDEX_M I 0/3.3 V DC DRM-M control signal
9 ERS_M O 0/24 V DC CL-M: On/Off
10 TPD_M_1 I Analog TS-M detection signal
11 DLP_VCONT_M_1 O 0/3.3 V DC TS-M control signal
12 TPD_TEMP_M I Analog Developer thermistor M detection sig-
nal
2-3-20
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC10 13 GND - - Ground
Connected 14 ECO_SENS - - Not used
to front
15 ERS_C O 0/24 V DC CL-C: On/Off
PWB
16 TPD_C_1 I Analog TS-C detection signal
17 DLP_VCONT_C_1 O 0/3.3 V DC TS-C control signal
18 TPD_TEMP_C I Analog Developer thermistor C detection sig-
nal
19 GND - - Ground
20 TN_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
21 GND - - Ground
22 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
23 GND - - Ground
24 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
25 GND - - Ground
26 TPD_Y_1 I Analog TS-Y detection signal
27 DLP_VCONT_Y_1 O 0/3.3 V DC TS-Y control signal
28 TPD_TEMP_Y I Analog Developer thermistor Y detection sig-
nal
29 ERS_Y O 0/24 V DC CL-Y: On/Off
30 DRM_INDEX_Y I 0/3.3 V DC DRM-Y control signal
31 FRONT_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC FRCSW: On/Off
32 GND - - Ground
33 I2C_SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
34 GND - - Ground
35 I2C_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 LSU_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC LSUFM: On/Off
38 CLEAN_MOT_LOC I 0/3.3 V DC WTM lock signal
K
39 CLEAN_MOT_RE O 0/24 V DC WTM: On/Off
M
40 GND - - Ground
2-3-21
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC11 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 DATA_2PBK(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
to LSU
3 DATA_2NBK(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
relay PWB )
4 GND - - Ground
5 GAIN_FIX_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
6 PARA_SIG_P2_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
7 PARA_SIG_P1_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
8 PARA_SIG_P0_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
9 INT_ST_1_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
10 INT_ST_2_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
11 PARA_SIG_P3_2B O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
K
12 GND - - Ground
13 DATA_4PBK(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
14 DATA_4NBK(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
)
15 GND - - Ground
16 DATA_3PBK(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
17 DATA_3NBK(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
)
18 GND - - Ground
19 DATA_2P_M(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)
)
20 DATA_2N_M(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)
)
21 GND - - Ground
22 GAIN_FIX_M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
23 PALA_STG_P2_M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
24 PALA_STG_P1_M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
25 PALA_STG_P0_M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
26 INT_ST_M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
27 GND - - Ground
28 DATA_2P_C(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)
29 DATA_2N_C(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)
30 GND - - Ground
31 GAIN_FIX_C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
2-3-22
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC11 32 PALA_STG_P2_C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
Connected 33 PALA_STG_P1_C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
to LSU
34 PALA_STG_P0_C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
relay PWB
35 INT_ST_C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)
38 DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)
39 GND - - Ground
40 GAIN_FIX_Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
41 PALA_STG_P2_Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
42 PALA_STG_P1_Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
43 PALA_STG_P0_Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
44 INT_ST_Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
45 GND - - Ground
46 EEPROM_CS_1_B I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal
K
47 IDD_CS_1_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
48 EEPROM_CS_2_B I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal
K
49 IDD_CS_2_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
50 EEPROM_CS_M I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M EEPROM data signal
51 IDD_CS_M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
52 EEPROM_CS_C I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C EEPROM data signal
53 IDD_CS_C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
54 EEPROM_CS_Y I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y EEPROM data signal
55 IDD_CS_Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
56 GND - - Ground
57 MSET_N O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
58 GND - - Ground
59 SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
60 GND - - Ground
61 SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
62 GND - - Ground
63 CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
64 GND - - Ground
2-3-23
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC12 1 CLK_BK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal
Connected 2 LOCK_BK I 0/3.3 V DC PM-K lock signal
to LSU
3 REM_BK O 0/24 V DC PM-K: On/Off
relay PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 DATA_1PBK(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
6 DATA_1NBK(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
)
7 GND - - Ground
8 SDCLK_BK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 PARA_SIG_P4_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
11 PARA_SIG_P3_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
12 CUALM_BK I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K alarm signal
13 LSU_TH_BK I Analog LSU thermistor K detection signal
14 BD_BK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal K
15 GND - - Ground
16 CLK_M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-M clock signal
17 LOCK_M I 0/3.3 V DC PM-M lock signal
18 REM_M O 0/24 V DC PM-M: On/Off
19 GND - - Ground
20 DATA_1P_M(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)
)
21 DATA_1N_M(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)
)
22 GND - - Ground
23 SDCLK_M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal
24 GND - - Ground
25 PARA_SIG_P4_M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
26 PARA_SIG_P3_M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
27 CUALM_M I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M alarm signal
28 LSU_TH_M I Analog LSU thermistor M detection signal
29 BD_M I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal M
30 GND - - Ground
31 CLK_C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-C clock signal
32 LOCK_C I 0/3.3 V DC PM-C lock signal
33 REM_C O 0/24 V DC PM-C: On/Off
2-3-24
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC12 34 GND - - Ground
Connected 35 DATA_1P_C(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)
to LSU
36 DATA_1N_C(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)
relay PWB
37 GND - - Ground
38 SDCLK_C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal
39 GND - - Ground
40 PARA_SIG_P4_C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
41 PARA_SIG_P3_C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
42 CUALM_C I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C alarm signal
43 LSU_TH_C I Analog LSU thermistor C detection signal
44 BD_C I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal C
45 GND - - Ground
46 CLK_Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-Y clock signal
47 LOCK_Y I 0/3.3 V DC PM-Y lock signal
48 REM_Y O 0/24 V DC PM-Y: On/Off
49 GND - - Ground
50 DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)
51 DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)
52 GND - - Ground
53 SDCLK_Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal
54 GND - - Ground
55 PARA_SIG_P4_Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
56 PARA_SIG_P3_Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
57 CUALM_Y I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y alarm signal
58 LSU_TH_Y I Analog LSU thermistor Y detection signal
59 BD_Y I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal Y
60 GND - - Ground
YC13 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to feed
3 3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to FPWB1
PWB 1
4 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to FPWB1
2-3-25
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC15 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LSURPWB
to LSU
3 GND - - Ground
relay PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 +5V AN O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LSURPWB
6 +5V AN O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LSURPWB
YC16 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 AC_MAIN_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC charger roller Y clock signal
to high volt-
age PWB 1
3 DC_MAIN_REM O 0/3.3 V DC DC main charger Y: On/Off
4 DC_MAIN_CNT_Y O PWM DC charger roller Y control signal
5 MAIN_IDC_Y O PWM DC charger roller Y control signal
6 AC_SLV_CLK_Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias Y clock signal
7 DC_SLV_CNT_Y O PWM DC sleeve bias Y control voltage
8 DC_MAG_CNT_Y O PWM DC magnet bias Y control voltage
9 AC_SLV_CNT_Y O PWM AC sleeve bias Y control voltage
10 AC_MAIN_CNT_Y O PWM AC charger roller Y control signal
11 DISCHARGE_Y I PWM Main charger Y control signal
12 AC_MAG_CNT_Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias Y control voltage
13 AC_MAG_CLK_Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias Y clock signal
14 DC_REC_CNT O PWM DC bias Y control voltage
15 N.C - - Not used
16 DC_REC_REM O PWM DC bias C control voltage
17 AC_MAG_CLK_C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias C clock signal
18 AC_MAG_CNT_C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias C control voltage
19 DISCHARGE_C I PWM Main charger C control signal
20 AC_MAIN_CNT_C O PWM AC charger roller C control signal
21 AC_SLV_CNT_C O PWM AC sleeve bias C control voltage
22 DC_MAG_CNT_C O PWM DC magnet bias C control voltage
23 DC_SLV_CNT_C O PWM DC sleeve bias C control voltage
24 AC_SLV_CLK_C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias C clock signal
25 DC_MAG_REM O 0/3.3 V DC DC main charger C: On/Off
26 MAIN_IDC_C O PWM DC charger roller C control signal
27 DC_MAIN_CNT_C O PWM DC charger roller C control signal
28 GND - - Ground
2-3-26
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC17 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 DC_MAIN_CNT_M O PWM DC charger roller M control signal
to high volt-
3 MAIN_IDC_M O PWM DC charger roller M control signal
age PWB 1
4 AC_SLV_CLK_M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias M clock signal
5 DC_SLV_CNT_M O PWM DC sleeve bias M control voltage
6 DC_MAG_CNT_M O PWM DC magnet bias M control voltage
7 AC_SLV_CNT_M O PWM AC sleeve bias M control voltage
8 AC_MAIN_CNT_M O PWM AC charger roller M control signal
9 DISCHARGE_M I PWM Main charger M control signal
10 AC_MAG_CNT_M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias M control voltage
11 AC_MAG_CLK_M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias M clock signal
12 AC_MAG_CLK_Bk O PWM DC charger roller K control signal
13 AC_MAG_CNT_Bk O PWM DC charger roller K control signal
14 DISCHARGE_Bk I PWM Main charger K control signal
15 AC_SLV_CNT_Bk O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias K clock signal
16 DC_MAG_CNT_Bk O PWM DC sleeve bias K control voltage
17 DC_SLV_CNT_Bk O PWM DC magnet bias K control voltage
18 AC_SLV_CLK_Bk O PWM AC sleeve bias K control voltage
19 AC_MAIN_CNT_Bk O PWM AC charger roller K control signal
20 MAIN_IDC_Bk O PWM DC charger roller K control signal
21 DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk O PWM DC charger roller K control signal
22 GND - - Ground
YC18 1 DF_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB clock signal
Connected 2 DF_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB serial communication data
to 4000- signal
sheet fin-
3 DF_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC DFMPWB select signal
isher
4 DF_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB serial communication data
signal
5 DF_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC DFMPWB ready signal
6 DF_DET I 0/3.3 V DC DFMPWB detection signal
7 GND - - Ground
2-3-27
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC19 A1 PF_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB clock signal
Connected A2 PF_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data
to large signal
capacity A3 PF_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB select signal
feeder,
toner fan A4 PF_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data
motor 1/2, signal
belt fan A5 PF_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB ready signal
motor 1/2
A6 PF_PAUSE O 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB pause signal
and exhaust
fan motor 1/ A7 PF_CAS1_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB control signal
2/3 A8 PF_CAS2_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB control signal
A9 +3.3V4 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to PFMPWB
A10 GND - - Ground
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 TN_FAN1 O 0/24 V DC TFM1: On/Off
A13 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TFM1
A14 TN_FAN2 O 0/24 V DC TFM2: On/Off
A15 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TFM2
A16 LVU_FAN1 O 0/24 V DC EXFM3: On/Off
A17 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EXFM3
A18 LVU_FAN2 - - Not used
A19 +24V1 - - Not used
B1 SIDE_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB clock signal (side)
B2 SIDE_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data
signal (side)
B3 SIDE_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB select signal (side)
B4 SIDE_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data
signal (side)
B5 SIDE_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB ready signal (side)
B6 SIDE_PAUSE O 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB pause signal (side)
B7 TANDEM_CAS1OP I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB control signal (side)
EN
B8 TANDEM_CAS2OP I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB control signal (side)
EN
B9 SIDE_MULTI_OPE O 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB control signal (side)
N
B10 +3.3V4 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to PFMPWB (side)
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BLFM1
2-3-28
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC19 B13 BELT_FAN1 O 0/24 V DC BLFM1: On/Off
Connected B14 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BLFM2
to large
B15 BELT_FAN2 O 0/24 V DC BLFM2: On/Off
capacity
feeder, B16 DLP_FAN1 O 0/24 V DC EXFM1: On/Off
toner fan B17 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EXFM1
motor 1/2,
B18 DLP_FAN2 O 0/24 V DC EXFM2: On/Off
belt fan
motor 1/2 B19 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EXFM2
and exhaust
fan motor 1/
2/3
YC20 1 DECAL_HP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC BRDS: On/Off
Connected 2 GUIDE_REM O 0/3.3 V DC BRGM: On/Off
to bridge 3 GUIDE_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRGM clock signal
unit
4 GUIDE_PD O 0/3.3 V DC BRGM control signal
5 GUIDE_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC BRGM drive switch signal
6 DECAL_REM O 0/3.3 V DC BRDM: On/Off
7 DECAL_PH O 0/3.3 V DC BRDM control signal
8 DECAL_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRDM clock signal
9 DECAL_PD O 0/3.3 V DC BRDM control signal
10 DECAL_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC BRDM drive switch signal
11 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BRSOL
12 EXIT_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC BRSOL: On/Off (ACT)
13 EXIT_SOL_RET O 0/24 V DC BRSOL: On/Off (RET)
14 GND - - Ground
15 EXIT_COV_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC BRECSW: On/Off
16 GND - - Ground
17 EXIT_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC BRES: On/Off
18 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to BRES
19 N.C - - Not used
20 BRIDGE2 REM O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2: On/Off
21 BRIDGE2 PH O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2 control signal
22 BRIDGE2 CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRCM2 clock signal
23 BRIDGE2 PD O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2 control signal
24 BRIDGE2 DIR O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2 drive switch signal
25 BRIDGE1 REM O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2: On/Off
26 BRIDGE1 PH O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM1 control signal
2-3-29
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC20 27 BRIDGE1 CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRCM1 clock signal
Connected 28 BRIDGE1 PD O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM1 control signal
to bridge
29 BRIDGE1 DIR O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM1 drive switch signal
unit
30 BRIDGE_SENS 2 I 0/3.3 V DC BRCS2: On/Off
31 BRIDGE_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC BRCSW: On/Off
32 BRIDGE_SENS 1 I 0/3.3 V DC BRCS1: On/Off
33 GND - - Ground
34 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to BRPWB
35 GND - - Ground
36 GND - - Ground
37 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BRPWB
38 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BRPWB
YC21 1 DR_CCW O 0/24 V DC LSUCM: On/Off (CCW)
Connected 2 DR_CW O 0/24 V DC LSUCM: On/Off (CW)
to LSU
cleaning
motor
YC22 1 LVU_FAN O 0/24 V DC PSFM: On/Off
Connected 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PSFM
to power
source fan
motor
YC23 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to coin vender
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to coin
3 GND - - Ground
vender
4 COIN_EN I 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender enable signal
5 FGND - - Ground
6 FEED_COUNT O 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender control signal
7 EJECT_COUNT O 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender control signal
8 COPYING_SIG O 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender control signal
9 TXD_COIN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
10 GND - - Ground
11 RXD_COIN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
12 GND - - Ground
2-3-30
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC24 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 DC1_SET I 0/3.3 V DC Key counter set signal
to key coun-
3 DC1_COUNT O 0/3.3 V DC Key counter count signal
ter
4 +24V 1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to key card
YC25 A1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
Connected A2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
to key card
A3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
A4 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
A5 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
A6 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
A7 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
A8 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
A9 COPY_ENABLE I 0/3.3 V DC Key card enable signal
A10 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to key card
B1 KEY7 O 0/3.3 V DC Key card control signal
B2 KEY6 O 0/3.3 V DC Key card control signal
B3 KEY5 O 0/3.3 V DC Key card control signal
B4 KEY4 O 0/3.3 V DC Key card control signal
B5 KEY3 O 0/3.3 V DC Key card control signal
B6 KEY2 O 0/3.3 V DC Key card control signal
B7 KEY1 O 0/3.3 V DC Key card control signal
B8 KEY0 O 0/3.3 V DC Key card control signal
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 COUNT O 0/3.3 V DC Key card count signal
YC26 A1 HR_TH - - Not used
Connected A2 GND - - Ground
to fuser unit A3 EDG_FAN - - Not used
and fuser IH
PWB A4 EDGE_TH2 I Analog FTH6 detection signal
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 EDGE_FAN - - Not used
A7 FSR_FAN_ALM I 0/3.3 V DC FURFM alarm signal
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 FSR_FAN O 0/24 V DC FURFM: On/Off
A10 FSR_RLS_DR_CC O 0/24 V DC FURM: On/Off (CCW)
W
A11 FSR_RLS_DR_CW O 0/24 V DC FURM: On/Off (CW)
2-3-31
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC26 A12 GND - - Ground
Connected A13 FSR_SIZE_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC FUES: On/Off
to fuser unit
A14 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FUES
and fuser IH
PWB A15 GND - - Ground
A16 FSR_RLS_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC FURS: On/Off
A17 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FURS
A18 GND - - Ground
A19 FSR_BLT_PLS I 0/3.3 V DC FUBLS: On/Off
A20 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FUBLS
B1 PRESS_HEART_R - - Not used
EM
B2 IH_RXD I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
B3 IH_TXD O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
B4 ROTATION O 0/3.3 V DC FIH control signal
B5 IH_HEAT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC FIH: On/Off
B6 +3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to FIH
B7 GND - - Ground
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 PRESS_TH I Analog FTH5 detection signal
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 EDGE_TH I Analog FTH2 detection signal
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 GUIDE_TH1 I Analog FTH4 detection signal
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 GUIDE_TH2 I Analog FTH3 detection signal
B16 MAIN_TH2 I Analog FTH1 detection signal
B17 MAIN_TH1 I Analog FTH1 detection signal
B18 GND - - Ground
B19 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BRFM
B20 BRIDGE_FAN O 0/24 V DC BRFM: On/Off
2-3-32
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC27 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
to RFID
3 SCL I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
PWB, toner
motor K/M/ 4 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to RFPWB
C/Y and 5 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TM-Y
screw sen-
6 TMOT_Y_DR O 0/24 V DC TM-Y: On/Off
sor K/M/C/Y
7 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TM-C
8 TMOT_C_DR O 0/24 V DC TM-C: On/Off
9 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TM-M
10 TMOT_M_DR O 0/24 V DC TM-M: On/Off
11 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TM-K
12 TMOT_Bk_DR O 0/24 V DC TM-K: On/Off
13 GND - - Not used
14 ENCODE_Y - - Not used
15 +5V - - Not used
16 GND - - Not used
17 ENCODE_C - - Not used
18 +5V - - Not used
19 GND - - Not used
20 ENCODE_M - - Not used
21 +5V - - Not used
22 GND - - Not used
23 ENCODE_K - - Not used
24 +5V - - Not used
YC47 1 NC - - Not used
Connected 2 NC - - Not used
to fiery relay
3 NC - - Not used
PWB
4 NC - - Not used
5 NC - - Not used
6 NC - - Not used
7 NC - - Not used
8 NC - - Not used
9 NC - - Not used
10 NC - - Not used
11 NC - - Not used
12 GND - - Ground
13 CH1_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
2-3-33
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC47 14 CH1_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
Connected 15 GND - - Ground
to fiery relay
16 CH2_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
PWB
17 CH2_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
18 GND - - Ground
19 CH3_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
20 CH3_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
21 GND - - Ground
22 VCLK_N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
23 VCLK_P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
24 GND - - Ground
25 VSYNC_DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
26 VSYNC_DN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
27 VSYNC_CP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
28 VSYNC_CN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
29 VSYNC_BP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
30 VSYNC_BN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
31 VSYNC_AP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
32 VSYNC_AN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
33 HSYNC_DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
34 HSYNC_DN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
35 HSYNC_CP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
36 HSYNC_CN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
37 HSYNC_BP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
38 HSYNC_BN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
39 HSYNC_AP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
40 HSYNC_AN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
YC49 1 24VC - - Not used
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to PF power 3 SIG O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep signal
source
PWB
YC50 1 SLEEP_INT O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep notice signal
Connected 2 G6_EG_SCLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Engine clock signal
to main G6_EG_SI I
3 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
PWB
4 G6_EG_SDIR I 0/3.3 V DC Engine communication direction signal
5 G6_EG_SBSY I 0/3.3 V DC Engine busy signal
6 G6_EG_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
2-3-34
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC50 7 G6_EG_IRN I 0/3.3 V DC Engine interrupt signal
Connected 8 JS_LED I 0/3.3 V DC Jobseparetor LED signal
to main ENG_OFF
9 - - Not used
PWB
10 HLD_ENG I 0/3.3 V DC Engine hold signal
11 SLEEP_ENG I 0/3.3 V DC Sleep signal
12 HSYNC_DP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
13 HSYNC_DN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
14 HSYNC_CP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
15 HSYNC_CN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
16 HSYNC_BP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
17 HSYNC_BN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
18 HSYNC_AP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
19 HSYNC_AN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
20 VSYND_DP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
21 VSYND_DN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
22 VSYNC_CP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
23 VSYNC_CN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
24 VSYNC_BP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
25 VSYNC_BN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
26 VSYNC_AP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
27 VSYNC_AN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
28 GND - - Ground
29 RCLK_P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
30 RCLK_N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
31 GND - - Ground
32 RC_P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
33 RC_N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
34 GND - - Ground
35 RB_P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
36 RB_N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
37 GND - - Ground
38 RA_P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
39 RA_N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
40 GND - - Ground
41 GND - - Ground
2-3-35
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC54 1 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to TVM
Connected 2 TN_VIB O 0/3.3 V DC TVM: On/Off
to toner
vibration
motor
2-3-36
2N3/2N2
2-3-3 Power source PWB
1 3 1 6 16 1 1 4 1 6
YC3 10 1
8
1 2 YC17 1 YC16 YC10
YC14 YC12 YC13 YC11
TB5
YC1
1 4
TB1 TB2
YC4
1 4 1 3
6 1
YC8 YC9
Figure 2-3-3 Power source PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-37
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
TB 1 LIVE I 120 V AC AC power input
220-240 V AC
Connected to 2 NEUTRAL I 120 V AC AC power input
AC inlet and 220-240 V AC
main power
5 DH_LIVE I 120 V AC AC power input
switch
220-240 V AC
YC1 1 LIVE_IN I 120 V AC AC power output from MSW
220-240 V AC
Connected to 2 LIVE_OUT O 120 V AC AC power output to MSW
main power 220-240 V AC
switch
3 NEUTRAL_OUT O 120 V AC AC power output to MSW
220-240 V AC
4 NEUTRAL_IN I 120 V AC AC power output from MSW
220-240 V AC
YC3 1 LIVE O 220-240 V AC AC power output to FIHPWB
Connected to 2 NEUTRAL O 220-240 V AC AC power output to FIHPWB
fuser IH PWB
*:230V model
only
YC4 1 LIVE O 120 V AC AC power output to PFPSPWB
220-240 V AC
Connected to 2 NC - - Not used
fuser PF 3 NEUTRAL O 120 V AC AC power output to PFPSPWB
power source
220-240 V AC
PWB
YC8 1 DH_LIVE O 120 V AC AC power output to CH
220-240 V AC
Connected to 2 DH_LIVE - - Not used
cassette
3 NC - - Not used
heater
4 NC - - Not used
5 DH_NEUTRAL O 120 V AC AC power output to CH
220-240 V AC
6 DH_NEUTRAL - - Not used
YC9 1 DH_LIVE O 120 V AC AC power output to PFCH
220-240 V AC
Connected to 2 DH_NEUTRAL O 120 V AC AC power output to PFCH
large capac- 220-240 V AC
ity feeder
2-3-38
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC12 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1
Connected to 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1
feed PWB 1
3 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1
4 5V1 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FPWB1
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
YC13 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to large capacity
feeder
Connected to 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to large capacity
large capac- feeder
ity feeder, 3 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to 4000-sheet finisher
4000-sheet
finisher and 4 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to 4000-sheet finisher
ISC PWB 5 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ISCPWB
6 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ISCPWB
7 +24V1 - - Not used
8 +24V1 - - Not used
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
15 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
YC14 1 5V1 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPWB
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
main PWB
3 5V1 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 5V1 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPWB
6 GND - - Ground
7 5V1 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPWB
8 GND - - Ground
9 5V1 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPWB
10 GND - - Ground
2-3-39
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC16 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB1
Connected to 2 +24V1 - - Not used
high voltage
3 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB1
PWB 1
4 PGND - - Ground
5 PGND - - Not used
6 PGND - - Ground
YC17 1 POWER_OFF_24 I 0/3.3 V DC Sleep mode signal: On/Off
V1
Connected to 2 DRUM_HEAT_RE I 0/3.3 V DC FH: On/Off
feed PWB 1 M
3 GND - - Ground
2-3-40
2N3/2N2-1
2-3-4 IH PWB
(1) 120V model
6
YC4
YC3
1
YC1
1
1 2
1
1
YC5
YC6
YC8
3
YC9
9
YC10
Figure 2-3-4 IH PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-41
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 AC_LIVE I 120 V AC 120V AC power input
Connected to 2 AC_NEUTRAL I 120 V AC 120V AC power input
Inlet2
YC4 1 SGAND - - Ground
Connected to 2 Vcc I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB
engine PWB
3 IH_REM I 0/3.3 V DC FIH: On/Off
4 ROTATION I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FIH control signal
5 RXD I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
6 TXD O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
YC5 1 LIVE_OUT O 120 V AC AC power output to FTS2
220-240 V AC
Connected to 2 - - Not used
fuser heater 3 NEUTRAL_OUT O 120 V AC AC power output to FH
and fuser- 220-240 V AC
thermostat 2
YC6 1 +15V1 O 15 V DC 15V DC power to FTS1
Connected to 2 +15V2 I 15 V DC 15V DC power from FTS1
fuser thermo-
stat 1
YC8 1 FSR_RELAY_24V I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
Connected to 2 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from feed PWB 1
feed PWB 1 3 FSR_RELAY I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 ZEROC - - Not used
7 +24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from feed PWB 1
8 PRESS_REM I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser heater remote signal
YC9 1 VS O 70 V to 185 V AC Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
Connected to
Fuser IH
YC10 1 COIL_COM O 70 V to 185 V AC Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
Connected to
Fuser IH
2-3-42
2N3/2N2-1
(2) 220-240V model
6
YC4
YC3
1
YC1
1
1 2
1
1
YC5
YC6
YC8
3
YC9
9
YC10
Figure 2-3-5 IH PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-43
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 LIVE I 220-240 V AC 220-240 V AC power input
Connected to 2 NEUTRAL I 220-240 V AC 220-240 V AC power input
Power
source PWB
YC4 1 SGAND - - Ground
Connected to 2 Vcc I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB
engine PWB 3 IH_REM I 0/3.3 V DC FIH: On/Off
4 ROTATION I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FIH control signal
5 RXD I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
6 TXD O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
YC5 1 LIVE_OUT O 120 V AC AC power output to FTS2
220-240 V AC
Connected to 2 - - Not used
fuser heater 3 NEUTRAL_OUT O AC power output to FH
120 V AC
and fuser- 220-240 V AC
thermostat 2
YC6 1 +15V1 O 15 V DC 15V DC power to FTS1
Connected to 2 +15V2 I 15 V DC 15V DC power from FTS1
fuser thermo-
stat 1
YC8 1 FSR_RELAY_24V I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
Connected to 2 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from feed PWB 1
feed PWB 1 3 FSR_RELAY I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 ZEROC - - Not used
7 +24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from feed PWB 1
8 PRESS_REM I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser heater remote signal
YC9 1 VS O 138 V to 370 V AC Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
Connected to
Fuser IH
YC10 1 COIL_COM O 138 V to 370 V AC Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
Connected to
Fuser IH
2-3-44
2N3/2N2
2-3-5 ISC PWB
4 1
3 1
YC5
1
YC14
YC1
5
1
YC13
3
1
YC9
40
1
YC6
11
1
YC11
6
1
YC4
7
1
8
YC7
YC3
6
1
1
YC12
3
YC8
16
YC2
1 5
Figure 2-3-6 ISC PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-45
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 1 SC_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scanner clock signal
Connected to 2 SC_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
main PWB
3 SC_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 SC_BSY I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner busy signal
5 SC_HLDN I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner hold signal
6 SC_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner communication direction sig-
nal
7 SC_IRN I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner interrupt signal
8 GND(SPARE) - - Ground
YC4 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 HTPDN O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
main PWB
3 LOCKN O 0/3.3 V DC Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal
6 TX0P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC5 1 SMOT AP O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
Connected to 2 SMOT BP O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
scanner 3 SMOT AN O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
motor
4 SMOT BN O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
YC6 1 +5V1 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LLPWB
Connected to 2 FAIL I 0/3.3 V DC Error signal
LED lamp
3 SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC Data signal
PWB
4 SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
5 VSET O Analog Analog voltage
6 GND - - Ground
7 PGND - - Ground
8 PWM O 0/3.3 V DC PWM signal
9 POW O 0/3.3 V DC LED driver: On/Off
10 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LLPWB
11 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LLPWB
YC7 1 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
power source
3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 +24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
6 +24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
2-3-46
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC8 1 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to HPS
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
home posi-
3 HP_SW I 0/3.3 V DC HPS: On/Off
tion sensor
YC9 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 CCDCLK1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
CCD PWB
3 GND - - Ground
4 CCDCLK2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 CP O 0/3.3 V DC Clamp signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 RS O 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
9 VSG O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
10 TG O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
11 SH O 0/3.3 V DC Shift gate signal
12 AFE_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
13 AFE_EN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Enable signal
14 AFE_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
15 AFECLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 DSI_CIS_1N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
18 DSI_CIS_1P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
19 GND - - Ground
20 DSI_CIS_2N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
21 DSI_CIS_2P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
22 GND - - Ground
23 DSI_CIS_3N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
24 DSI_CIS_3P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
25 GND - - Ground
26 DSI_CIS_4N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
27 DSI_CIS_4P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
28 GND - - Ground
29 DSI_CIS_5N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
30 DSI_CIS_5P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
31 GND - - Ground
32 DSI_CISCKN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
33 DSI_CISCKP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
2-3-47
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC9 34 GND - - Ground
Connected to 35 CCDSEL O 0/3.3 V DC Select signal
CCD PWB
36 GND - - Ground
37 AFE_MCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
38 GND(AFE_SHD) - - Ground
39 CLPIN O 0/3.3 V DC Clamp signal
40 GND(AFE_SHP) - - Ground
YC11 1 +5.1V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to CCDPWB
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
CCD PWB
3 +10V O DC10V 10 V DC power to CCDPWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to CCDPWB
6 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 GND(SPARE) - - Ground
Connected to 2 DP_TMG I 0/3.3 V DC DPTS: On/Off
DP main
3 DP_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC ready signal
PWB
4 DP_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC Select signal
5 DP_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
6 DP_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 DP_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
8 DP_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC DPOCSW: On/Off
9 Reserve - - Not used
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 Reserve - - Not used
14 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DPMPWB
15 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DPMPWB
16 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DPMPWB
YC13 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 ORG_SW I 0/3.3 V DC OSS: On/Off
original size
3 +5.1V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to OSS
sensor
2-3-48
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC14 1 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to ODSW
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
original
3 CO_SW I 0/3.3 V DC ODSW: On/Off
detection
switch
2-3-49
2N3/2N2
2-3-6 Operation PWB 1
60 1
YC20 1 7
YC17
A10
B1
YC15
YC10
6
1 A1
YC3
B10
1
2
YC9
4
YC7 4
1
YC1 1
30
Figure 2-3-7 Operation PWB 1 silk-screen diagram
2-3-50
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to OPWB2
Connected to 2 NC - - Not used
operation 3 INT_POWERKEY I Power key: On/Off
0/3.3 V DC
PWB2 _N
4 GND - - Ground
5 KEY6 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return
signal 6
6 NC - - Not used
7 LED3 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive
signal 3
8 NC - - Not used
9 KEY5 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return
signal 5
10 KEY4 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return
signal 4
11 SCAN4 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 4
12 SCAN2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 2
13 GND - - Ground
14 SCAN3 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 3
15 SCAN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 1
16 NC - - Not used
17 LED0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive
signal 0
18 LED1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive
signal 1
19 LED2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive
signal 2
20 NC - - Not used
21 KEY0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return
signal 0
22 KEY1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return
signal 1
23 KEY2 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return
signal 2
24 SCAN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 0
25 KEY3 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return
signal 3
26 GND - - Ground
27 ATTENTION O 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
2-3-51
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 28 MEMORY O 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
Connected to 29 PROCESSING O 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal
operation 30 JOB_LED O JOBLED control signal
0/3.3 V DC
PWB2
YC3 1 VO2 O Analog Speaker sound signal (+)
Connected to 2 VO1 O Analog Speaker sound signal (-)
speaker
YC6 1 LED_A O 0/3.3 V DC LED control signal
Connected to 2 LED_C I 0/3.3 V DC LED control signal
LCD
YC8 1 BOTTOM Y- I Analog Touch panel Y- position signal
Connected to 2 LEFT X+ I Analog Touch panel X+ position signal
touch panel
3 TOP Y+ I Analog Touch panel Y+ position signal
4 RIGHT X- I Analog Touch panel X- position signal
YC10 A1 LIGHTOFF_POW I 0/3.3 V DC LCD power On/ Off signal
ERON
Connected to A2 GND - - Ground
main PWB A3 INT_POWERKEY O 0/3.3 V DC Power key: On/Off
A4 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal
A5 LED_PROCESSI I 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal
NG
A6 LED_ATTENTION I 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
A7 LED_MEMORY I 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
A8 BEEP_POWERO I 0/3.3 V DC Acknowledging beep restoration sig-
N nal
A9 PANEL RESET I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
A10 GND - - Ground
B1 P2C_SDAT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
B2 C2P_SDAT I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
B3 P2C_SDIR O 0/3.3 V DC Panel communication direction signal
B4 P2C_SBSY O 0/3.3 V DC Panel busy signal
B5 C2P_SCK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Panel clock signal
B6 ANY_KEY O 0/3.3 V DC ANY KEY return signal
B7 HUMAN_SENS_N - - Not used
EAR
B8 5V0 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB
B9 JOB_LED I 0/3.3 V DC JOB LED control signal
B10 HUMAN_SENS_F - - Not used
AR
2-3-52
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC11 1 5V6 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to OPWB3
Connected to 2 ATTENTION_LED O 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
operation
3 MEMORY_LED O 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
PWB3
4 PROCESSING_L O 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal
ED
YC15 1 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB
Connected to 2 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB
main PWB
3 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC18 1 POL O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
Connected to 2 STVD I/O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
LCD
3 OE O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
4 CKG O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD clock signal
5 STVU I/O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 EDGSL O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
8 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LCD
9 V9 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
10 VM O Analog LCD control signal
11 V2 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
12 VH O Analog LCD control signal
13 V6 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
14 UD O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
15 VCOM O Analog LCD control signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 VLS O Analog LCD control signal
18 V14 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
19 V11 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
20 V8 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
21 V5 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
22 V3 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
23 GND - - Ground
24 RO5 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
25 RO4 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
2-3-53
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC18 26 RO3 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
Connected to 27 RO2 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
LCD
28 RO1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
29 RO0 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
30 GND - - Ground
YC19 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 GO5 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
LCD
3 GO4 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
4 GO3 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
5 GO2 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
6 GO1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
7 GO0 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
8 DIO2 I/O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
9 REV O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
10 GND - - Ground
11 CKS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD clock signal
12 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LCD
13 DIO1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
14 LD O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
15 BO5 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
16 BO4 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
17 BO3 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
18 BO2 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
19 BO1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
20 BO0 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
21 SHL O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
22 V1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
23 V4 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
24 V7 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
25 V10 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
26 V12 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
27 V13 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
28 VLS O Analog LCD control signal
29 GND - - Ground
30 VCOM O Analog LCD control signal
2-3-54
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC22 1 GND - - -
Connected to 2 LCD_OFF I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
main PWB 3 LOCKN I Lock signal
0/3.3 V DC
4 GND - - -
5 RX0N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data signal
6 RX0P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data signal
7 GND - - -
2-3-55
2N3/2N2-1
Figure 2-3-8 Front PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-56
20
21
1 YC4 9 1 YC5 20
1 5 YC20
YC6
1 10 1 9
1 20 40 1 50 1
YC16 YC1 YC3 YC17
YC2
2-3-7 Front PWB
1 8 YC19
YC18
YC14 YC13 YC12 YC11 YC9
40
1
1 12 1 12 1 11 1 12 1 4
YC10 1 YC7 11
YC15 1 12
1 11
1 11
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 +3.3V1 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB
Connected to 2 +3.3V2 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB
engine PWB
3 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB
4 +24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from EPWB
5 +24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from EPWB
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 DRM_INDEX_Bk O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-K control signal
engine PWB
3 ERS_Bk_REM I 0/24 V DC CL-K: On/Off
4 TPD_ Bk_1 O Analog TS-K detection signal
5 DLP_VCONT_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC TS-K control signal
_1
6 TPD_TEMP_Bk O Analog Developer thermistor K detection sig-
nal
7 GND - - Ground
8 DRM_INDEX_M O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-M control signal
9 ERS_ M_REM I 0/24 V DC CL-M: On/Off
10 TPD_M_1 O Analog TS-M detection signal
11 DLP_VCONT_M_ I 0/3.3 V DC TS-M control signal
1
12 TPD_TEMP_M O Analog Developer thermistor M detection sig-
nal
13 GND - - Ground
14 DRM_INDEX_C O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-C control signal
15 ERS_C_REM I 0/24 V DC CL-C: On/Off
16 TPD_C_1 O Analog TS-C detection signal
17 DLP_VCONT_C_ I 0/3.3 V DC TS-C control signal
1
18 TPD_TEMP_C O Analog Developer thermistor C detection sig-
nal
19 GND - - Ground
20 TN_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
21 GND - - Ground
22 EEP_SCL1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
2-3-57
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC2 23 GND - - Ground
Connected to 24 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
engine PWB
25 GND - - Ground
26 TPD_Y_1 O Analog TS-Y detection signal
27 DLP_VCONT_Y_ I 0/3.3 V DC TS-Y control signal
1
28 TPD_TEMP_Y O Analog Developer thermistor Y detection sig-
nal
29 ERS_Y_REM I 0/24 V DC CL-Y: On/Off
30 DRM_INDEX_ Y O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-Y control signal
31 FRONT_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC FRCSW: On/Off
32 GND - - Ground
33 I2C_SCL I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
34 GND - - Ground
35 I2C_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 LSU_FAN_REM I 0/24 V DC LSUFM: On/Off
38 CLEAN_MOT_LO O 0/3.3 V DC WTM lock signal
CK
39 CLEAN_MOT_RE I 0/24 V DC WTM: On/Off
M
40 GND - - Ground
YC3 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 WTNR_SET/ O 0/3.3 V DC WTDSW: On/Off
engine PWB
3 INTER_LOCK - - Not used
4 IH_CORE_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC IHCS: On/Off
5 IH_CORE_MOT_ I 0/3.3 V DC IHCM: On/Off
REM
6 IH_CORE_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) IHCM clock signal
7 WTNR_LED I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal
8 IH_COIL_FAN_AL O 0/3.3 V DC FUFFM alarm signal
M
9 IH_COIL_FAN_H I 0/24 V DC FUFFM: On/Off
10 IH_COIL_FAN_L I 0/24 V DC FUFFM: On/Off
11 EXIT_FAN I 0/24 V DC EFFM: On/Off
12 VIB_MOT_REM I 0/24 V DC VM: On/Off
13 JUNC_SOL_REM I 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (ACT)
14 JUNC_SOL_RET I 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (RET)
15 GND - - Ground
2-3-58
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 16 EXIT_PAPER_SE O 0/3.3 V DC ES: On/Off
NS
Connected to 17 EXIT_FEED_SEN O 0/3.3 V DC SBS: On/Off
engine PWB S
18 SB_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC EM: On/Off
19 SB_MOT_PH I 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal
20 SB_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal
21 SB_MOT_PD I 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal
22 SB_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC EM drive switch signal
23 GND - - Ground
24 WTNR_FULL_CO I 0/3.3 V DC WTS2 control signal
NT
25 THOP_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC THM drive switch signal
26 DLP_FAN_CLR_ I 0/24 V DC DEVFM1: On/Off
H
27 DLP_FAN_CLR_L I 0/24 V DC DEVFM1: On/Off
28 WTNR_FULL O Analog WTS2 detection signal
29 WTNR_NEAR O Analog WTS2 detection signal
30 WTNR_VCONT I 0/3.3 V DC WTS2 control signal
31 GND - - Ground
32 ROT_MOT_REM - - Not used
33 ROT_MOT_CLK - - Not used
34 ROT_MOT_PD - - Not used
35 ROT_MOT_DIR - - Not used
36 ROT_HP_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC DEVSS: On/Off
37 THOP_MOT_Bk_ I 0/24 V DC THM-K: On/Off
REM
38 THOP_MOT_M_R I 0/24 V DC THM-M: On/Off
EM
39 THOP_MOT_C_R I 0/24 V DC THM-C: On/Off
EM
40 THOP_MOT_Y_R I 0/24 V DC THM-Y: On/Off
EM
41 GND - - Ground
42 ENCODE_ Bk O 0/3.3 V DC SRS-K: On/Off
43 ENCODE_M O 0/3.3 V DC SRS-M: On/Off
44 ENCODE_C O 0/3.3 V DC SRS-C: On/Off
45 ENCODE_Y O 0/3.3 V DC SRS-Y: On/Off
46 THOP_ Bk O 0/3.3 V DC THS-K: On/Off
47 THOP_M O 0/3.3 V DC THS-M: On/Off
2-3-59
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 48 THOP_C O 0/3.3 V DC THS-C: On/Off
Connected to 49 THOP_Y O 0/3.3 V DC THS-Y: On/Off
engine PWB
50 GND - - Ground
YC4 1 5V - - Not used
Connected to 2 LED1 - - Not used
fuser front
3 5V - - Not used
fan motor
and eject 4 LED2 - - Not used
front fan 5 IH_COIL_FAN_AL I 0/3.3 V DC FUFFM alarm signal
motor M
6 IH_COIL_FAN O 0/24 V DC FUFFM: On/Off
7 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FUFFM
8 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EFFM
9 EXIT FAN O 0/24 V DC EFFM: On/Off
YC5 1 ROT_MOT A - - Not used
Connected to 2 ROT_MOT B - - Not used
eject unit
3 ROT_MOT A/ - - Not used
4 ROT_MOT B/ - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
6 ROT_HP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DEVSS: On/Off
7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to DEVSS
8 SB_MOT B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
9 SB_MOT A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
10 SB_MOT B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
11 SB_MOT A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
12 GND - - Ground
13 EXIT_FEED_SEN I 0/3.3 V DC SBS: On/Off
S
14 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to SBS
15 GND - - Ground
16 EXIT_PAPER_SE I 0/3.3 V DC ES: On/Off
NS
17 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to ES
18 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FSSOL
19 JUNC_SOL_KYU O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (ACT)
20 JUNC_SOL_FUK O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (RET)
2-3-60
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC6 1 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVFM
Connected to 2 DLP_FAN_B/M O 0/24 V DC DEVFM: On/Off
inner unit
3 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVFM
4 DLP_FAN_C/M O 0/24 V DC DEVFM: On/Off
5 THOP_MOT_Bk_ O 0/3.3 V DC THM-K drive switch signal
DIR
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 ENCODE_BK I 0/3.3 V DC SRS-K: On/Off
11 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to SRS-K
12 GND - - Ground
13 ENCODE_M I 0/3.3 V DC SRS-M: On/Off
14 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to SRS-M
15 GND - - Ground
16 THOP_BK I 0/3.3 V DC THS-K: On/Off
17 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to THS-K
18 GND - - Ground
19 THOP_M I 0/3.3 V DC THS-M On/Off
20 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to THS-M
21 GND - - Ground
22 THOP_Y I 0/3.3 V DC THS-Y On/Off
23 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to THS-Y
24 GND - - Ground
25 THOP_C I 0/3.3 V DC THS-C On/Off
26 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to THS-C
27 GND - - Ground
28 ENCODE_Y I 0/3.3 V DC SRS-Y: On/Off
29 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to SRS-Y
30 GND - - Ground
31 ENCODE_C I 0/3.3 V DC SRS-C: On/Off
32 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to SRS-C
33 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to RTPWB
34 THOP_MOT_Y_D O 0/3.3 V DC THM-Y drive switch signal
IR
2-3-61
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC6 35 THOP_MOT_C_D O 0/3.3 V DC THM-C drive switch signal
IR
Connected to 36 THOP_MOT_M_D O 0/3.3 V DC THM-M drive switch signal
inner unit IR
37 THOP_MOT_BK O 0/24 V DC THM-K: On/Off
38 THOP_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC THM drive switch signal
39 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RTPWB
40 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RTPWB
YC7 1 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-K
Connected to 2 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
drum unit K
3 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 DRM_ADR0_Bk - - Not used
6 DRM_ADR1_Bk - - Not used
7 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CL-K
8 ERS_Bk_REM O 0/24 V DC CL-K: On/Off
9 5V - - Not used
10 DRM_INDWX_Bk - - Not used
11 GND - - Not used
YC9 1 TPD_TEMP_BK I Analog Developer thermistor K detection sig-
nal
Connected to 2 DLP_VCONT_BK O 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB-K control signal
developer _1
unit K
3 TPD_BK_1 I Analog DEVPWB-K detection signal
4 TN_CLK_BK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 DLP_ADR1_BK - - Not used
7 DLP_ADR0_BK - - Not used
8 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
9 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
10 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DEVPWB-K
11 3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to VM-K
12 VIB_MOT O 0/24 V DC VM-K: On/Off
2-3-62
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC10 1 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-M
Connected to 2 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
drum unit M
3 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 DRM_ADR0_M - - Not used
6 DRM_ADR1_M - - Not used
7 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CL-M
8 ERS_M_REM O 0/24 V DC CL-M: On/Off
YC11 1 TPD_TEMP_M I Analog Developer thermistor M detection sig-
nal
Connected to 2 DLP_VCONT_M_ O 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB-M control signal
developer 1
unit M
3 TPD_M_1 I Analog DEVPWB-M detection signal
4 TN_CLK_M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 DLP_ADR1_M - - Not used
7 DLP_ADR0_M - - Not used
8 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
9 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
10 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DEVPWB-M
11 3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to VM-M
12 VIB_MOT O 0/24 V DC VM-M: On/Off
YC12 1 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-C
Connected to 2 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
drum unit C
3 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 DRM_ADR0_C - - Not used
6 DRM_ADR1_C - - Not used
7 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CL-C
8 ERS_C_REM O 0/24 V DC CL-C: On/Off
2-3-63
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC13 1 TPD_TEMP_C I Analog Developer thermistor C detection sig-
nal
Connected to 2 DLP_VCONT_C_ O 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB-C control signal
developer 1
unit C
3 TPD_C_1 I Analog DEVPWB-C detection signal
4 TN_CLK_C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 DLP_ADR1_C - - Not used
7 DLP_ADR0_C - - Not used
8 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
9 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
10 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DEVPWB-C
11 3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to VM-C
12 VIB_MOT O 0/24 V DC VM-C: On/Off
YC14 1 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-Y
Connected to 2 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
drum unit Y
3 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 DRM_ADR0_ Y - - Not used
6 DRM _ADR1_ Y - - Not used
7 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CL-Y
8 ERS_ Y _REM O 0/24 V DC CL-Y: On/Off
YC15 1 TPD_TEMP_Y I Analog Developer thermistor Y detection sig-
nal
Connected to 2 DLP_VCONT_Y_ O 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB-Y control signal
developer 1
unit Y
3 TPD_Y_1 I Analog DEVPWB-Y detection signal
4 TN_CLK_Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 DLP_ADR1_Y - - Not used
7 DLP_ADR0_Y - - Not used
8 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
9 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
10 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DEVPWB-Y
11 3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to VM-Y
12 VIB_MOT O 0/24 V DC VM-Y: On/Off
2-3-64
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC16 1 NC - - Not used
Connected to 2 NC - - Not used
front cover
3 NC - - Not used
switch, waste
toner sensor 4 NC - - Not used
1/2 and 5 FRONT_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC FRCSW: On/Off
waste toner
6 GND - - Ground
detection
switch 7 24V - - Not used
8 LSU_FAN_OUT - - Not used
9 CL_MOT1 - - Not used
10 CL_MOT2 - - Not used
11 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS1
12 WTNR_FULL I Analog WTS1 detection signal
13 WTNR_LED O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal
14 5V_LED O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS1
15 WTNR_SET I 0/3.3 V DC WTDSW: On/Off
16 GND - - Ground
17 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS2
18 WTNR_NEAR I Analog WTS2 detection signal
19 WTNR_LED O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS2 LED emitter signal
20 5V_LED O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS2
YC17 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 IH_CORE_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC IHCS: On/Off
IH core sen- 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to IHCS
sor and IH
core motor 4 IH_CORE B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) IHCM drive control signal
5 IH_CORE B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) IHCM drive control signal
6 IH_CORE A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) IHCM drive control signal
7 IH_CORE A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) IHCM drive control signal
8 24V - - Not used
9 NC - - Not used
YC18 1 LSU_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC LSUFM-K: On/Off
Connected to 2 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSUFM-K
LSU fan 3 LSU_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC LSUFM-M: On/Off
motor K/M/C/
Y 4 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSUFM-M
5 LSU_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC LSUFM-C: On/Off
6 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSUFM-C
7 LSU_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC LSUFM-Y: On/Off
8 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSUFM-Y
2-3-65
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC19 1 3.3V1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to OTEM
Connected to 2 I2C_SDA I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
outer temper-
3 GND - - Ground
ature sensor
4 I2C_SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
YC20 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to WTM
waste toner
3 FG - - Ground
motor
4 CLEAN_MOT_CL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
K
5 DIR O 0/3.3 V DC WTM drive switch signal
2-3-66
2N3/2N2-1
2-3-8 Feed PWB 1
64 1
YC1
1
YC5
1
1 YC4 8
3
50 YC2 1
1
YC26 1
YC11
2
YC3
YC29
3
1
YC25
9 4
1
1
YC8
YC27
8
YC23
YC16
1
2 1
7
YC15
1
YC20
1
12
YC12
YC9
15 YC10 1 6 1
3
11
7 1 20 1 18 1
8
2 1
1 10
YC19 YC18 YC17 YC14 YC13
Figure 2-3-9 Feed PWB 1 silk-screen diagram
2-3-67
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 REG_F_LED O Analog IDS1 control signal
engine PWB
3 REG_SENS_F_P O Analog IDS1 detection signal
4 REG_SENS_F_S O Analog IDS1 detection signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 REG_R_LED O Analog IDS2 control signal
7 REG_SENS_RP(B O Analog IDS2 detection signal
K)
8 REG_SENS_RS(B O Analog IDS2 detection signal
K)
9 CLN_SOL_REM I 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (ACT)
10 CLN_SOL_RET I 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (RET)
11 GND - - Ground
12 BELT_JAM_SENS - - Not used
13 DU_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off
14 PRESS_RLS_SEN O 0/3.3 V DC TRRS: On/Off
S
15 PRESS_MOT_RE I 0/24 V DC TRRM: On/Off
M2
16 PRESS_MOT_RE I 0/24 V DC TRRM: On/Off
M1
17 DU_FAN - - Not used
18 DU_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off
19 GND - - Ground
20 DU2_REM(CL_LO I 0/3.3 V DC DUM2: On/Off
W)
21 DU2_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM2 clock signal
22 DU2_PD I 0/3.3 V DC DUM2 control signal
23 INTER_LOCK O DC0V/24V PCUSW: On/Off
24 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
28 GND - - Ground
29 MPF_LIFT1 I 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
30 MPF_LIFT2 I 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
31 MPF_CL I 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off
2-3-68
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 32 MPF_JAM O 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off
Connected to 33 MPF_LIFT_DOWN O 0/3.3 V DC MPLS2: On/Off
engine PWB
34 MPF_LIFT_UP O 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off
35 MPF_PPR_SET O 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off
36 GND - - Ground
37 MPF_LNG O 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off
38 MPF_WID3 O 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
39 MPF_WID2 O 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
40 MPF_WID1 O 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
41 MPF_TABLE O 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off
42 GND - - Ground
43 FSR_MOT_BRK I 0/3.3 V DC FUM break signal
44 FSR_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC FUM drive switch signal
45 FSR_MOT_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC FUM ready signal
46 FSR_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal
47 FSR_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC FUM: On/Off
48 FSR_CL_REM - - Not used
49 GND - - Ground
50 EXIT_REAR_FAN_ I 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off
H
51 EXIT_REAR_FAN_ I 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off
L
52 PRESS_REM - - Not used
53 FSR_RELAY I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
54 ZEROC I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal
55 PRESS_REM I 24 V DC Fuser heater remote signal
56 MAIN_HEAT_REM - - Not used
57 GND - - Ground
58 JOB_SOL_REM I 0/24 V DC JSFSSOL: On/Off
59 JOB_OPEN_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC JSOCS: On/Off
60 JOB_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC JSEM drive switch signal
61 JOB_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JSEM clock signal
62 JOB_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC JSEM: On/Off
63 JOB_SET O 0/3.3 V DC Job separator set signal
64 GND - - Ground
2-3-69
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
engine PWB
3 DRM_HEAT_REM - - Not used
4 POWER_OFF_24V I 0/3.3 V DC Power off signal
1
5 IH_PWB_FAN_AL O 0/3.3 V DC IHFM alarm signal
M
6 IH_PWB_FAN_H I 0/24 V DC IHFM: On/Off
7 IH_PWB_FAN_L - - Not used
8 GND - - Ground
9 REG_MOT_REM(C I 0/3.3 V DC RM: On/Off
L)
10 REG_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal
11 REG_MOT_PD I 0/3.3 V DC RM control signal
12 GND - - Ground
13 DLP_MOT_CLR_DI - - Not used
R
14 DLP_MOT_CLR_R - - Not used
DY
15 DLP_MOT_CLR_C - - Not used
LK
16 DLP_MOT_CLR_R - - Not used
EM
17 GND - - Ground
18 DRM_MOT_CLR_ - - Not used
DIR
19 DRM_MOT_CLR_ - - Not used
RDY
20 DRM_MOT_BK_CL - - Not used
R_CLK
21 DRM_MOT_CLR_ - - Not used
REM
22 GND - - Ground
23 DLP_MOT_BK_DI - - Not used
R
24 DLP_MOT_BK_RD - - Not used
Y
25 DLP_MOT_BK_CL - - Not used
K
26 DLP_MOT_BK_RE - - Not used
M
2-3-70
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC2 27 GND - - Ground
Connected to 28 DRM_MOT_BK_B - - Not used
engine PWB RK
29 DRM_MOT_BK_DI - - Not used
R
30 DRM_MOT_BK_R - - Not used
DY
31 DRM_MOT_BK_R - - Not used
EM
32 GND - - Ground
33 TRANS_MOT_BRK I 0/3.3 V DC TRCM break signal
34 TRANS_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC TRCM drive switch signal
35 TRANS_MOT_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC TRCM ready signal
36 TRANS_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal
37 TRANS_MOT_RE I 0/3.3 V DC TRCM: On/Off
M
38 GND - - Ground
39 TCON_SET - - Not used
40 DU_ENTER_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off
41 EXIT_FAN I 0/24 V DC EFM: On/Off
42 GND - - Ground
43 DU1_MOT_REM(C I 0/3.3 V DC DUM1: On/Off
L_H)
44 DU1_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM1 clock signal
45 DU1_MOT_PD I 0/3.3 V DC DUM1 control signal
46 EDGE_FAN_H I 0/24 V DC FUFM: On/Off
47 GND - - Ground
48 LOOP_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off
49 M_TEMP - - Not used
50 GND - - Ground
YC3 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EPWB
Connected to 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EPWB
engine PWB
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to EPWB
6 GND - - Ground
7 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB
8 GND - - Ground
2-3-71
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC4 1 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
Connected to 2 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
power source
3 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
PWB
4 5V0 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from PSPWB
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
YC5 1 POWER_OFF_24V O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep mode signal: On/Off
1
Connected to 2 DRM_HEAT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC FH: On/Off
power source 3 GND - - Ground
PWB
YC10 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 M_TEMP - - Not used
ID sensor1/2
3 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to IDS1
and cleaning
solenoid 4 REG_F_LED O Analog IDS1 control signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 REG_SENS_F_P I Analog IDS1 detection signal
7 REG_SENS_F_S I Analog IDS1 detection signal
8 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to IDS2
9 REG_R_LED O Analog IDS2 control signal
10 GND - - Ground
11 REG_SENS_R_P I Analog IDS2 detection signal
12 REG_SENS_R_S I Analog IDS2 detection signal
13 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CLSOL
14 CLN_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (ACT)
15 CLN_SOL_RET O 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (RET)
YC11 1 IH_PWB_FAN O 0/24 V DC IHFM: On/Off
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
IH fan motor
3 IH_PWB_ALM I 0/3.3 V DC IHFM alarm signal
YC12 1 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB2
Connected to 2 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB2
feed PWB 2
3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FPWB2
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
2-3-72
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC13 1 TRANS_MOT_BRK O 0/3.3 V DC TRM break signal
Connected to 2 TRANS_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC TRM drive switch signal
transfer
3 TRANS_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC TRM ready signal
motor
4 TRANS_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRM clock signal
5 TRANS_MOT_RE O 0/24 V DC TRM: On/Off
M
6 GND - - Ground
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TRM
8 GND - - Not used
9 24V2 - - Not used
10 TANK_SET - - Not used
YC14 1 REG_BK_LED - - Not used
Connected to 2 REG_BK_SENS1_ - - Not used
relay PWB P
3 REG_BK_SENS1_ - - Not used
S
4 BELT_JAM_SENS - - Not used
5 DU_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off
6 PRESS_RLS_SEN I 0/3.3 V DC TRRS: On/Off
S
7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to RYPWB
8 PRESS_MOT_RE O 0/24 V DC TRRM: On/Off
M1
9 PRESS_MOT_RE O 0/24 V DC TRRM: On/Off
M2
10 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RYPWB
11 DU_FAN - - Not used
12 DU_CL_LOWER_R - - Not used
EM
13 DU_OPEN_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off
14 DU2_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
15 DU2_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
16 DU2_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
17 DU2_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
18 GND - - Not used
YC15 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PCUSW
Connected to 2 N.C - - Not used
paper con-
3 +24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PCUSW
veying unit
switch
2-3-73
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC16 1 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB2
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
high voltage
PWB 2
YC17 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
relay PWB
3 CL_SOL_REM - - Not used
4 24V2 - - Not used
5 MPF_LIFT_MOT_B O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
6 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V dc power to RYPWB
8 MPF_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off
9 MPF_JAM_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off
10 MPF_LIFT_DOWN I 0/3.3 V DC MPLS2: On/Off
_SENS
11 MPF_LIFT_UP_SE I 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off
NS
12 MPF_PPR_SET I 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off
13 LED_3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to RYPWB
14 MPF_LNG I 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off
15 MPF_WID3 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
16 MPF_WID2 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
17 MPF_WID1 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
18 MPF_TABLE I 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off
19 GND - - Ground
20 GND - - Ground
YC18 1 FSR_MOT_BRK O 0/3.3 V DC FUM break signal
Connected to 2 FSR_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC FUM drive switch signal
fuser motor
3 FSR_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC FUM ready signal
4 FSR_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal
5 FSR_MOT_REM O 0/24 V DC FUM: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FUM
2-3-74
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC19 1 EXIT_REAR_FAN O 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off
Connected to 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ERFM
eject rear fan
motor
YC20 1 JOB_SET I 0/3.3 V DC Job separator set signal
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
job separator
3 GND - - Ground
4 JOB_MOT_REM O 0/24 V DC JSEM: On/Off
5 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to JSMPWB
6 JOB_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JSEM clock signal
7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to JSMPWB
8 JOB_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC JSEM drive switch signal
9 JOB_OPEN_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC JSOCS: On/Off
10 JOB_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC JSFSSOL: On/Off
11 NC - - Not used
YC23 1 DU_ENTER_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off
Connected to 2 EXIT_FAN O 0/24 V DC EFM: On/Off
relay PWB
3 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RYPWB
4 DU_CL_UPPER_R O 0/24 V DC DUCL1: On/Off
EM
5 GND - - Ground
6 DU1_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
7 DU1_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
8 DU1_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
9 DU1_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
10 EDGE_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC FUFM: On/Off
11 LOOP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off
12 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to RYPWB
YC25 1 REG_MOT_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) RM drive control signal
Connected to 2 REG_MOT_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) RM drive control signal
registration
3 REG_MOT_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) RM drive control signal
motor
4 REG_MOT_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) RM drive control signal
YC26 1 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to EPWB
Connected to 2 3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to EPWB
engine PWB
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
2-3-75
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC27 1 MAIN_HEAT_REM - - Not used
Connected to 2 PRESS_REM O 24 V DC Fuser heater remote signal
fuser IH PWB
3 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FIHPWB
4 ZEROC - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 FSR_RELAY O 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
8 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FIHPWB
9 RELAY_24V O 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
2-3-76
2N3/2N2
2-3-9 Feed PWB 2
3 1 2 1
13 24
YC5 YC10
50
12 1 15 YC7 1
5 1 YC8
YC6
YC1
1
1
YC11
YC13
1
15 YC3 28
3 1
YC2
YC4
2 1
14 1
7
YC12 4 1
Figure 2-3-10 Feed PWB 2 silk-screen diagram
2-3-77
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 FEED_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC PFM: On/Off
engine PWB
3 FEED_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal
4 FEED_MOT_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC PFM ready signal
5 FEED_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC PFM drive switch signal
6 FEED_CL1_REM I 0/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2_REM I 0/24 V DC PFCL2: On/Off
8 ASIST_CL2 I 0/24 V DC ASCL2: On/Off
9 LIFT_MOT2_REM I 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 LIFT_MOT1_REM I 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off
1
12 CAS2_WID O 0/3.3 V DC PWSW2: On/Off
13 CAS2_LNG3 O 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
14 CAS2_LNG2 O 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
15 CAS2_LNG1 O 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
16 CAS1_WID O 0/3.3 V DC PWSW1: On/Off
17 CAS1_LNG3 O 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
18 CAS1_LNG2 O 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
19 CAS1_LNG1 O 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground
21 CAS2_QUANT2 O 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(L): On/Off
22 CAS2_QUANT1 O 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(U): On/Off
23 CAS1_QUANT2 O 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(L): On/Off
24 CAS1_QUANT1 O 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(U): On/Off
25 LIFT_MOT1_LOC O 0/3.3 V DC LM1 lock signal
K
26 LIFT_MOT2_LOC O 0/3.3 V DC LM2 lock signal
K
27 CURRENT_SIG O 0/3.3 V DC Current signal
28 V-FEED_CL I 0/24 V DC PCCL: On/Off
29 COVER_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC PCCSW: On/Off
30 FEED2_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC PFPCS1: On/Off
31 CAS1_P0 O 0/3.3 V DC FS1: On/Off
32 CAS1_LIFT_UP O 0/3.3 V DC LS1: On/Off
33 GND - - Ground
34 CAS1_EMPTY O 0/3.3 V DC PS1: On/Off
2-3-78
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 35 PICK_SOL1_RET - - Not used
Connected to 36 PICK_SOL1_REM - - Not used
engine PWB
37 CAS2_P0 O 0/3.3 V DC FS2: On/Off
38 CAS2_LIFT_UP O 0/3.3 V DC LS2: On/Off
39 CAS2_EMPTY O 0/3.3 V DC PS2: On/Off
40 PICK_SOL2_RET - - Not used
41 PICK_SOL2_REM - - Not used
42 GND - - Ground
43 REG_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC RS: On/Off
44 FEED1_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC PCS: On/Off
45 BEND_SENS - - Not used
46 MID_MOT_PH I 0/3.3 V DC MM control signal
47 MID_MOT_REM( I 0/3.3 V DC MM: On/Off
ROL_CL)
48 MID_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MM clock signal
49 MID_MOT_PD I 0/3.3 V DC MM control signal
50 ASIST_CL1 I 0/24 V DC ASCL1: On/Off
YC2 1 FEED_MOT_GAI - - Not used
N
Connected to 2 FEED_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC PFM drive switch signal
paper feed
3 FEED_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC PFM ready signal
motor
4 FEED_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal
5 FEED_MOT_REM O 0/24 V DC PFM: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PFM
YC3 1 CAS1_LNG1 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
Connected to 2 CAS1_LNG2 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
paper length 3 GND - - Ground
switch 1/2,
paper width 4 CAS1_LNG3 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
switch 1/2, lift 5 CAS1_WID I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW1: On/Off
motor 1/2,
6 GND - - Ground
paper gauge
sensor 1(U)/ 7 CAS2_LNG1 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
(L) and paper 8 CAS2_LNG2 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
gauge sen-
sor 2(U)/(L) 9 GND - - Ground
10 CAS2_LNG3 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
11 CAS2_WID I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW2: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
2-3-79
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 13 LIFT_MOT1_- O 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off
Connected to 14 LIFT_MOT1_+ O 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off
paper length
15 LIFT_MOT2_- O 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off
switch 1/2,
paper width 16 LIFT_MOT2_+ O 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off
switch 1/2, lift 17 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS1(U)
motor 1/2,
18 GND - - Ground
paper gauge
sensor 1(U)/ 19 CAS1_QUANT1 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(U): On/Off
(L) and paper 20 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS1(L)
gauge sen-
sor 2(U)/(L) 21 GND - - Ground
22 CAS1_QUANT2 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(L): On/Off
23 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS2(U)
24 GND - - Ground
25 CAS2_QUANT1 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(U): On/Off
26 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS2(L)
27 GND - - Ground
28 CAS2_QUANT2 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(L): On/Off
YC4 1 FEED_CL1_REM O 0/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off
Connected to 2 24V2 O 24 V DC PFCL124 V DC power to PFCL1
paper feed
3 FEED_CL2_REM O 0/24 V DC PFCL2: On/Off
clutch 1/2
4 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PFCL2
YC5 1 NC - - Not used
Connected to 2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PCCL
paper con-
3 V-FEED_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC PCCL: On/Off
veying clutch
YC6 1 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PCS
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
paper con- 3 FEED2_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PCS: On/Off
veying sen-
sor and 4 COVER_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PCCSW: On/Off
paper con- 5 GND - - Ground
veying cover
switch
2-3-80
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC7 1 MID_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal
Connected to 2 MID_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal
middle motor,
3 MID_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal
middle sen-
sor and reg- 4 MID_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal
istration 5 BEND_SENS - - Not used
sensor
6 GND - - Not used
7 5V - - Not used
8 GND - - Ground
9 FEED1_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC MS: On/Off
10 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MS
11 GND - - Ground
12 REG_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC RS: On/Off
13 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to RS
14 MID_CL_REM - - Not used
15 24V2 - - Not used
YC8 1 24V2 - - Not used
Connected to 2 PICK_SOL1_REM - - Not used
primary
3 PICK_SOL1_RET - - Not used
paper feed
unit 4 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PS1
5 GND - - Ground
6 CAS1_EMPTY_S I 0/3.3 V DC PS1: On/Off
ENS
7 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LS1
8 GND - - Ground
9 CAS1_LIFT_UP_ I 0/3.3 V DC LS1: On/Off
SENS
10 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FS1
11 CAS1_P0_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC FS1: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
13 24V2 - - Not used
14 PICK_SOL2_REM - - Not used
15 PICK_SOL2_RET - - Not used
16 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PS2
17 GND - - Ground
18 CAS2_EMPTY_S I 0/3.3 V DC PS2: On/Off
ENS
19 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LS2
2-3-81
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC8 20 GND - - Ground
Connected to 21 CAS2_LIFT_UP_ I 0/3.3 V DC LS2: On/Off
primary SENS
paper feed 22 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FS2
unit
23 CAS2_P0_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC FS2: On/Off
24 GND - - Ground
YC10 1 ASIST_CL1 O 0/24 V DC ASCL1: On/Off
Connected to 2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ASCL1
assist clutch
1
YC11 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
feed PWB 1
3 GND - - Ground
4 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from FPWB1
5 +24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1
6 +24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1
YC12 1 ASIST_CL2 O 0/24 V DC ASCL2: On/Off
Connected to 2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ASCL2
assist clutch
2
2-3-82
2N3/2N2
2-3-10 Relay PWB
1 YC6 7
10 YC5 1
9
2
YC15
YC2
1
1
1
1
YC12
YC3
16
20
1
YC4
8
2
1
YC7
4
1
YC8
YC1
1 6
3
YC14
YC9
18
1
12
11
YC10
YC13
1
YC16
1
1 8
YC11
9 1
Figure 2-3-11 Relay PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-83
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 5V_LED - - Not used
Connected to 2 DU2_A I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
feed PWB 1
3 DU2_B I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
4 DU2_A/ I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
5 DU2_B/ I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
6 DU_OPEN_SW O 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off
7 DU_CL_LOWER_ - - Not used
REM
8 DU_FAN - - Not used
9 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1
10 PRESS_MOT_RE I 0/24 V DC TRRM: On/Off
M2
11 PRESS_MOTS_R I 0/24 V DC TRRM: On/Off
EM1
12 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from FPWB1
13 PRESS_RLS_SE O 0/3.3 V DC TRRS: On/Off
NS
14 DU_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off
15 BELT_JAM_SENS - - Not used
16 REG_BK_SENS1 - - Not used
_S
17 REG_BK_SENS1 - - Not used
_P
18 REG_BK_LED - - Not used
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 MPF_LNG I 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off
MP tray unit 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPPLSW
4 MPF_WID3 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
5 MPF_WID2 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
7 MPF_WID1 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 MPF_TABLE I 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off
2-3-84
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 1 LED_3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to MPPLSW
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
MP tray unit
3 MPF_PPR_SET I 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 MPF_LIFT_UP_S I 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off
ENS
6 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPLS1
7 GND - - Ground
8 MPF_LIFT_DOW I 0/3.3 V DC MPLS2: On/Off
N_SENS
9 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPLS1
10 GND - - Ground
11 MPF_JAM_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off
12 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPFS
13 MPF_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off
14 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MPPFCL
15 MPF_LIFT_DR_A O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
16 MPF_LIFT_DR_B O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
YC7 1 24V2 - - Not used
Connected to 2 DU_CL2_REM - - Not used
duplex cover 3 DU_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off
switch and
duplex motor 4 GND - - Ground
2 5 DU2_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
6 DU2_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
7 DU2_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
8 DU2_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
YC9 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 DU_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off
duplex sen- 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to DUS2
sor 2
2-3-85
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC10 1 LOOP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
loop sensor
3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LPS
4 3.3V - - Not used
5 REG_BK_LED - - Not used
6 GND - - Not used
7 REG_BK_SENS1 - - Not used
_P
8 REG_BK_SENS1 - - Not used
_S
9 GND - - Not used
10 BELT_JAM_SENS - - Not used
11 5V - - Not used
YC11 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 DU_ENTER_SEN I 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off
duplex sen- S
sor 1 and
3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to DUS1
eject fan
motor 1, 2 4 EXIT_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC EFM1: On/Off
5 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EFM1
6 EXIT_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC EFM2: On/Off
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EFM2
8 24V2 - - Not used
9 DU_CL_UPPER_ - - Not used
REM
YC12 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
feed PWB 1
3 MPF_TABLE O 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off
4 MPF_WID1 O 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
5 MPF_WID2 O 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
6 MPF_WID3 O 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
7 MPF_LNG O 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off
8 LED_3.3V3 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from FPWB1
9 MPF_PPR_SET O 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off
10 MPF_LIFT_UP_S O 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off
ENS
11 MPF_LIFT_DOW O 0/3.3 V DC MPLS2: On/Off
N_SENS
12 MPF_JAM_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off
2-3-86
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC12 13 MPF_CL_REM I 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off
Connected to 14 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1
feed PWB 1
15 MPF_LIFT_MOT_ I 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
A
16 MPF_LIFT_MOT_ I 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
B
17 24V2 - - Not used
18 CLN_SOL_REM - - Not used
19 GND - - Ground
20 GND - - Ground
YC13 1 3.3V I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from FPWB1
Connected to 2 LOOP_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off
feed PWB 1
3 EDGE_FAN_REM - - Not used
4 DU1_A I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
5 DU1_B I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
6 DU1_A/ I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
7 DU1_B/ I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 DU_CL_UPPER_ - - Not used
REM
10 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1
11 EXIT_FAN I 0/24 V DC EFM: On/Off
12 DU_ENTER_SEN O 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off
S
YC14 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 PRESS_RLS_SE I 0/3.3 V DC TRRS: On/Off
transfer NS
release sen- 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to TRRS
sor and
transfer 4 PRESS_RLS_RE O 0/24 V DC TRRM: On/Off
release M1
motor 5 PRESS_RLS_RE O 0/24 V DC TRRM: On/Off
M2
6 NC - - Not used
2-3-87
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC16 1 DU1_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
Connected to 2 DU1_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
duplex motor
3 DU1_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
1
4 DU1_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
5 EDGE_FAN_REM - - Not used
6 24V2 - - Not used
7 EDGE_FAN_REM - - Not used
8 24V2 - - Not used
2-3-88
2N3/2N2
2-3-11 Motor control PWB
1 24
YC5
22
14
YC3
YC7
12
11
1
14
10
YC1
YC6
1
1 YC4 24
1 YC2 6
Figure 2-3-12 Motor control PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-89
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
power source
3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
5 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
6 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
YC3 1 DRM_INDEX_C I 0/3.3 V DC DRM-C control signal
Connected to 2 DRM_INDEX_M I 0/3.3 V DC DRM-M control signal
engine PWB
3 DRM_INDEX_BK I 0/3.3 V DC DRM-K control signal
4 BLT_INDEX - - Not used
5 BLT_SPEED I 0/3.3 V DC TBLS: On/Off
6 EMERGENCY I 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB control signal
7 ENG_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB ready signal
8 ENG_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data
signal
9 ENG_SEL I 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB select signal
10 ENG_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data
signal
11 ENG_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB clock signal
12 BLT_FG - - Not used
13 MOT_ON I 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB control signal
14 MOT_DATA_SET I 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB control signal
15 BLT_REM - - Not used
16 BLT_VM - - Not used
17 BLT_BRAKE - - Not used
18 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MCPWB
19 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MCPWB
20 GND - - Ground
21 GND - - Ground
22 DRM_INDEX_Y I 0/3.3 V DC DRM-Y control signal
2-3-90
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC4 1 SIG2_C I DC0V/3.3V DRM-C rotate position signal
Connected to 2 SIG2_Y I DC0V/3.3V DRM-Y rotate position signal
drum motor
3 SIG1_C I DC0V/3.3V DRM-C rotate position signal
C/Y
4 SIG1_Y I DC0V/3.3V DRM-Y rotate position signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 +5V I DC5V 5 V DC power to DRM-C
8 +5V I DC5V 5 V DC power to DRM-Y
9 DRM_C_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V DRM-C control signal
10 DRM_Y_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V DRM-Y control signal
11 NC - - Not used
12 NC - - Not used
13 DRM_C_CW/ O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-C control signal
CCW
14 DRM_Y_CW/ O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-Y control signal
CCW
15 DRM_C_FG O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-C control signal
16 DRM_Y_FG O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-Y control signal
17 DRM_C_VM O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-C control signal
18 DRM_Y_VM O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-Y control signal
19 DRM_C_S/S O DC0V/3.3V DRM-C: On/Off
20 DRM_Y_S/S O DC0V/3.3V DRM-Y: On/Off
21 PGND - - Ground
22 PGND - - Ground
23 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DRM-C
24 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DRM-Y
YC5 1 SIG2_BK I DC0V/3.3V DRM-BK rotate position signal
Connected to 2 SIG2_M I DC0V/3.3V DRM-M rotate position signal
drum motor 3 SIG1_BK I DC0V/3.3V DRM-BK rotate position signal
K/M
4 SIG1_M I DC0V/3.3V DRM-M rotate position signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 +5V I DC5V 5 V DC power to DRM-BK
8 +5V I DC5V 5 V DC power to DRM-M
9 DRM_BK_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V DRM-BK control signal
10 DRM_M_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V DRM-M control signal
11 NC - - Not used
2-3-91
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC5 12 NC - - Not used
Connected to 13 DRM_BK_CW/ O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-BK control signal
drum motor CCW
K/M 14 DRM_M_CW/ O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-M control signal
CCW
15 DRM_BK_FG O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-BK control signal
16 DRM_M_FG O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-M control signal
17 DRM_BK_VM O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-BK control signal
18 DRM_M_VM O 0/3.3 V DC DRM-M control signal
19 DRM_BK_S/S O DC0V/3.3V DRM-BK: On/Off
20 DRM_M_S/S O DC0V/3.3V DRM-M: On/Off
21 PGND - - Ground
22 PGND - - Ground
23 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DRM-BK
24 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DRM-M
YC6 1 DLP_Y_GAIN - - Not used
Connected to 2 DLP_Y_CW/CCW O 0/24 V DC DEVM-Y clock signal
developer
3 DLP_Y_LD O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM-Y control signal
motor C/Y
4 DLP_Y_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM-Y clock signal
5 DLP_Y_S/S O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM-Y: On/Off
6 PGND - - Ground
7 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVM-Y
8 DLP_C_GAIN - - Not used
9 DLP_C_CW/CCW O 0/24 V DC DEVM-C clock signal
10 DLP_C_LD O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM-C control signal
11 DLP_C_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM-C clock signal
12 DLP_C_S/S O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM-C: On/Off
13 PGND - - Ground
14 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVM-C
2-3-92
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC7 1 DLP_M_GAIN - - Not used
Connected to 2 DLP_M_CW/CCW O 0/24 V DC DEVM-M clock signal
developer
3 DLP_M_LD O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM-M control signal
motor K/M
4 DLP_M_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM-M clock signal
5 DLP_M_S/S O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM-M: On/Off
6 PGND - - Ground
7 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVM-M
8 DLP_BK_GAIN - - Not used
9 DLP_BK_CW/ O 0/24 V DC DEVM-K clock signal
CCW
10 DLP_BK_LD O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM-K control signal
11 DLP_BK_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM-K clock signal
12 DLP_BK_S/S O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM-K: On/Off
13 PGND - - Ground
14 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVM-K
2-3-93
2N3/2N2
2-3-12 LSU relay PWB
10
YC3
1
5
YC4
1
10
YC5
15
YC6
1
10
YC7
1
5
YC8
1
10
YC9
1
YC10
YC2
1
60 1
YC1
8 1
Figure 2-3-13 LSU relay PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-94
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
Connected 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
to power
3 GND - - Ground
source
PWB and 4 GND - - Ground
engine 5 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB
PWB
6 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB
10 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
to engine
3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 SDI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 SDO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 MSET_N I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 IDD_CS 1 Y I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
11 EEPROM CS Y I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y EEPROM data signal
12 IDD_CS 1 C I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
13 EEPROM CS C I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C EEPROM data signal
14 IDD_CS 1 M I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
15 EEPROM CS M I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M EEPROM data signal
16 IDD_CS 2 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
17 EEPROM CS 2 Bk I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal
18 IDD_CS 1 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
19 EEPROM CS 1 Bk I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal
20 GND - - Ground
21 INT_ST 1 Y I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
22 PALA_SIG P0 Y I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
23 PALA_SIG P1 Y I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
24 PALA_SIG P2 Y I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
25 GAIN FIX Y I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
26 GND - - Ground
2-3-95
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC2 27 DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)
Connected 28 DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)
to engine
29 GND - - Ground
PWB
30 INT_ST 1 C I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
31 PALA_SIG P0 C I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
32 PALA_SIG P1 C I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
33 PALA_SIG P2 C I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
34 GAIN FIX C I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
35 GND - - Ground
36 DATA_2N_C(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)
37 DATA_2P_C(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)
38 GND - - Ground
39 INT_ST 1 M I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
40 PALA_SIG P0 M I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
41 PALA_SIG P1 M I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
42 PALA_SIG P2 M I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
43 GAIN FIX M I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
44 GND - - Ground
45 DATA_2N_M(LVDS I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)
)
46 DATA_2P_M(LVDS I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)
)
47 GND - - Ground
48 DATA_3NBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
49 DATA_3PBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
50 GND - - Ground
51 DATA_4NBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
52 DATA_4PBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
53 GND - - Ground
54 PALA_SIG P3_2Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
55 INT_ST 2 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
56 _ST 1 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
57 PALA_SIG P0 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
58 PALA_SIG P1 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
59 PALA_SIG P2 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
60 GAIN FIX Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
2-3-96
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC2 61 GND - - Ground
Connected 62 DATA_2NBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
to engine
63 DATA_2PBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
PWB
64 GND - - Ground
YC3 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 BD Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal Y
to engine
3 LSU_TH Y O Analog LSU thermistor Y detection signal
PWB
4 CUALM Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y alarm signal
5 PALA_SIG P3 Y I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
6 PALA_SIG P4 Y I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 SDCLK Y I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)
11 DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)
12 GND - - Ground
13 REM Y I 0/24 V DC PM-Y: On/Off
14 LOCK Y O 0/3.3 V DC PM-Y lock signal
15 CLK Y I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-Y clock signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 BD C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal C
18 LSU_TH C O Analog LSU thermistor C detection signal
19 CUALM C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C alarm signal
20 PALA_SIG P3 C I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
21 PALA_SIG P4 C I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
22 GND - - Ground
23 SDCLK C I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal
24 GND - - Ground
25 DATA_1N_C(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)
26 DATA_1P_C(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)
27 GND - - Ground
28 REM C I 0/24 V DC PM-C: On/Off
29 LOCK C O 0/3.3 V DC PM-C lock signal
30 CLK C I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-C clock signal
31 GND - - Ground
2-3-97
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 32 BD M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal M
Connected 33 LSU_TH M O Analog LSU thermistor M detection signal
to engine
34 CUALM M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M alarm signal
PWB
35 PALA_SIG P3 M I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
36 PALA_SIG P4 M I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
37 GND - - Ground
38 SDCLK M I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal
39 GND - - Ground
40 DATA_1N_M(LVDS I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)
)
41 DATA_1P_M(LVDS I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)
)
42 GND - - Ground
43 REM M I 0/24 V DC PM-M: On/Off
44 LOCK M O 0/3.3 V DC PM-M lock signal
45 CLK M I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-M clock signal
46 GND - - Ground
47 BD Bk O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal K
48 LSU_TH Bk O Analog LSU thermistor K detection signal
49 CUALM Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K alarm signal
50 PALA_SIG P3 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
51 PALA_SIG P4 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
52 GND - - Ground
53 SDCLK Bk I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal
54 GND - - Ground
55 DATA_1NBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
56 DATA_1PBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
57 GND - - Ground
58 REM Bk I 0/24 V DC PM-K: On/Off
59 LOCK Bk O 0/3.3 V DC PM-K lock signal
60 CLK Bk I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal
YC4 1 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PM-K
Connected 2 PGND - - Ground
to polygon 3 REM Bk O 0/24 V DC PM-K: On/Off
motor K
4 LOCK Bk I 0/3.3 V DC PM-K lock signal
5 CLK Bk O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal
2-3-98
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC5 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 BD Bk I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal K
to APC
3 LSU_TH Bk I Analog LSU thermistor K detection signal
PWB K
4 PALA_SIG P3_2Bk - - Not used
5 LDD_CS 2 Bk - - Not used
6 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-K
7 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-K
8 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-K
9 LDD_CS 1 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
10 SDI1 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
11 SDO1 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
12 CLK1 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal
13 EEPROM CS 1 Bk I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal
14 MSET_N O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
15 CUALM Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K alarm signal
16 INT_ST 2 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
17 INT_ST 1 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
18 PALA_SIG P0 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
19 PALA_SIG P1 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
20 PALA_SIG P2 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
21 PALA_SIG P3 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
22 PALA_SIG P4 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
23 SDCLK Bk O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal
24 GAIN FIX Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal
25 DATA_1NBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
26 DATA_1PBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
27 GND - - Ground
28 DATA_2NBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
29 DATA_2PBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
30 GND - - Ground
2-3-99
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC6 1 SDI2 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
Connected 2 SDO2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
to APC
3 CLK2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal
PWB M
4 EEPROM CS 2 Bk I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal
5 GND - - Not used
6 DATA_3NBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
7 DATA_3PBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
8 GND - - 5 V DC power to APCPWB-M
9 DATA_4NBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)
10 DATA_4PBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)
YC7 1 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PM-M
Connected 2 PGND - - Ground
to polygon
3 REM M O 0/24 V DC PM-M: On/Off
motor M
4 LOCK M I 0/3.3 V DC PM-M lock signal
5 CLK M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-M clock signal
YC8 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 BD M I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal M
to APC
3 LSU_TH M I Analog LSU thermistor M detection signal
PWB M
4 - - - Not used
5 - - - Not used
6 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-M
7 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-M
8 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-M
9 LDD_CS 1 M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
10 SDI1 M I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
11 SDO1 M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
12 CLK1 M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal
13 EEPROM CS M I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M EEPROM data signal
14 MSET_N O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
15 CUALM M I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M alarm signal
16 - - - Not used
17 INT_ST 1 M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
18 PALA_SIG P0 M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
19 PALA_SIG P1 M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
20 PALA_SIG P2 M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
2-3-100
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC8 21 PALA_SIG P3 M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
Connected 22 PALA_SIG P4 M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
to APC
23 SDCLK M O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal
PWB M
24 GAIN FIX M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal
25 DATA_1N_M(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)
)
26 DATA_1P_M(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)
)
27 GND - - Ground
28 DATA_2N_M(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)
)
29 DATA_2P_M(LVDS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)
)
30 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PM-C
Connected 2 PGND - - Ground
to polygon 3 REM C O 0/24 V DC PM-C: On/Off
motor C
4 LOCK C I 0/3.3 V DC PM-C lock signal
5 CLK C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-C clock signal
YC10 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 BD C I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal C
to APC 3 LSU_TH C I Analog LSU thermistor C detection signal
PWB C
4 - - - Not used
5 - - - Not used
6 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-C
7 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-C
8 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-C
9 LDD_CS 1 C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
10 SDI1 C I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
11 SDO1 C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
12 CLK1 C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal
13 EEPROM CS C I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C EEPROM data signal
14 MSET_N O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
15 CUALM C I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C alarm signal
16 - - - Not used
17 INT_ST 1 C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
18 PALA_SIG P0 C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
2-3-101
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC10 19 PALA_SIG P1 C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
Connected 20 PALA_SIG P2 C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
to APC
21 PALA_SIG P3 C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
PWB C
22 PALA_SIG P4 C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
23 SDCLK C O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal
24 GAIN FIX C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal
25 DATA_1N_C(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)
26 DATA_1P_C(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)
27 GND - - Ground
28 DATA_2N_C(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)
29 DATA_2P_C(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)
30 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PM-Y
Connected 2 PGND - - Ground
to polygon
3 REM Y O 0/24 V DC PM-Y: On/Off
motor Y
4 LOCK Y I 0/3.3 V DC PM-Y lock signal
5 CLK Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-Y clock signal
YC12 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 BD Y I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal Y
to APC
3 LSU_TH Y I Analog LSU thermistor Y detection signal
PWB Y
4 - - - Not used
5 - - - Not used
6 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-Y
7 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-Y
8 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-Y
9 LDD_CS 1 Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
10 SDI1 Y I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
11 SDO1 Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
12 CLK1 Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal
13 EEPROM CS Y I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y EEPROM data signal
14 MSET_N O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
15 CUALM Y I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y alarm signal
16 - - - Not used
17 INT_ST 1 Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
18 PALA_SIG P0 Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
2-3-102
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC12 19 PALA_SIG P1 Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
Connected 20 PALA_SIG P2 Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
to APC
21 PALA_SIG P3 Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
PWB Y
22 PALA_SIG P4 Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
23 SDCLK Y O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal
24 GAIN FIX Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal
25 DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)
26 DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)
27 GND - - Ground
28 DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)
29 DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)
30 GND - - Ground
2-3-103
2N3/2N2
2-3-13 PF main PWB
1 3 1 4
YC12 YC11
1
1
YC14
YC5
2
1
YC15
19
1
7
8
YC4
12
1
9 YC13 1
YC7
1 4
YC16
18 YC3 1 19 YC6 1
Figure 2-3-14 PF main PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-104
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 1 PAP_R_SW1_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to
PFPGS1(L)
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the PF paper 3 PAP_R_SW1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS1(L): On/Off
gauge sen-
sor 1 lower, 4 PAP_R_SW2_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to
PF paper PFPGS1(U)
gauge sen- 5 GND - - Ground
sor 1 upper,
6 PAP_R_SW2 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS1(U): On/Off
PF size
detection 7 NC - - Not used
switch 1, PF 8 GND - - Ground
cassette
detection 9 NC - - Not used
switch 1 10 NC - - Not used
11 GND - - Ground
12 NC - - Not used
13 SIZE_R_SW_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFSDSW1
14 GND - - Ground
15 SIZE_R_SW I 0/3.3 V DC PFSDSW1: On/Off
16 DEK_R_SW1_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to
PFCDSW1
17 GND - - Ground
18 DEK_R_SW4 I 0/3.3 V DC PFCDSW1: On/Off
YC4 1 EMPTY_L_SW_P O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPS2
W
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the PF paper
3 EMPTY_L_SW I 0/3.3 V DC PFPS2: On/Off
sensor 2, PF
lift sensor 2, 4 LIMIT_L_SW_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFLS2
PF feed sen- 5 GND - - Ground
sor 2, PF
6 LIMIT_L_SW I 0/3.3 V DC PFLS2: On/Off
paper con-
veying sen- 7 3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFFS2
sor 2 8 FD_L_SW I 0/3.3 V DC PFFS2: On/Off
9 GND - - Ground
10 VFDSW_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPCS2
11 GND - - Ground
12 VFDSW I 0/3.3 V DC PFPCS2: On/Off
2-3-105
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC5 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 R_COVER_SW I 0/3.3 V DC PFPCCSW: On/Off
the PF paper
3 VFDCL O 0/24 V DC PFPCCL1: On/Off
conveying
cover switch, 4 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFPCCL1
PF paper 5 VFDSW_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPCS1
conveying
6 GND - - Ground
sensor 1, PF
paper con- 7 VFDSW I 0/3.3 V DC PFPCS1: On/Off
veying clutch 8 24V - - Not used
1, PF paper
sensor 1, PF 9 PF_R_SOL_ACT - - Not used
lift sensor 1, 10 PF_R_SOL_KEP - - Not used
PF feed sen-
11 EMPTY_R_SW_P O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPS1
sor 1
W
12 GND - - Ground
13 EMPTY_R_SW I 0/3.3 V DC PFPS1: On/Off
14 LIMIT_R_SW_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFLS1
15 GND - - Ground
16 LIMIT_R_SW I 0/3.3 V DC PFLS1: On/Off
17 3.3V1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFFS1
18 FD_R_SW I 0/3.3 V DC PFFS1: On/Off
19 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 PAP_L_SW1_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to
PFPGS2(L)
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the PF paper 3 PAP_L_SW1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS2(L): On/Off
gauge sen-
sor 2 lower, 4 PAP_L_SW2_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to
PF paper PFPGS2(U)
gauge sen- 5 GND - - Ground
sor 2 upper,
6 PAP_L_SW2 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS2(U): On/Off
PF size
detection 7 NC - - Not used
switch 2, PF 8 GND - - Ground
cassette
detection 9 NC - - Not used
switch 2 10 NC - - Not used
11 GND - - Ground
12 NC - - Not used
13 SIZE_L_SW_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFSDSW1
14 GND - - Ground
2-3-106
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC6 15 SIZE_L_SW I 0/3.3 V DC PFSDSW1: On/Off
Connected to 16 DEK_L_SW_PW O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to
the PF paper PFCDSW1
gauge sen- 17 GND - - Ground
sor 2 upper,
PF paper 18 DEK_L_SW I 0/3.3 V DC PFCDSW1: On/Off
gauge sen- 19 NC - - Not used
sor 2 lower,
PF size
detection
switch 2, PF
cassette
detection
switch 2
YC7 1 OUT2B O 0/24 V DC(pulse) PFLM2 drive control signal
Connected to 2 OUT2A O 0/24 V DC(pulse) PFLM2 drive control signal
the PF lift
3 OUT1B O 0/24 V DC(pulse) PFLM1 drive control signal
motor 2, PF
lift motor 1 4 OUT1A O 0/24 V DC(pulse) PFLM1 drive control signal
YC11 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the engine
3 24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from machine
PWB
4 24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from machine
YC12 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the side
3 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to side deck
feeder
and side multi tray
YC13 1 ENG_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
Connected to 2 ENG_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
the engine
3 ENG_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
PWB
4 ENG_SEL I 0/3.3 V DC Select signal
5 ENG_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal
6 ENG_PAU I 0/3.3 V DC Posed signal
7 DEK_OPN1 O 0/3.3 V DC Cassette 4 open/close signal output
8 DEK_OPN2 O 0/3.3 V DC Cassette 3 open/close signal input
9 +3.3V2 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input from machine
10 GND - - Ground
2-3-107
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC14 1 HCUSW I 0/3.3 V DC PFPCUSW: On/Off
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the PF paper
3 24V3 - - Not used
conveying
unit switch 4 RESOL_ACT - - Not used
5 RESOL_KEP - - Not used
6 24V3 - - Not used
7 PF_L_SOL_ACT - - Not used
8 PF_L_SOL_KEP - - Not used
YC15 1 RF_R_CL O 0/24 V DC PFPFCL1: On/Off
Connected to 2 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFPFCL1
the PF paper
3 HFDCL1 O 0/24 V DC PFPCCL2: On/Off
feed clutch
1,PF paper 4 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFPCCL2
conveying 5 HFDCL2 O 0/24 V DC PFPCCL3: On/Off
clutch 2, PF
6 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFPCCL3
paper con-
veying clutch 7 PF_L_CL O 0/24 V DC PFPFCL2: On/Off
3, PF paper 8 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFPFCL2
feed clutch 2
YC16 1 CW/CCW O 0/24 V DC PFPFM Normal rotation/reversing
signal
Connected to 2 RDY I 0/24 V DC PFPFM ready signal
the PF paper 3 CLK O 0/24 V DC(pulse) PFPFM clock signal
feed motor
4 REM O 0/24 V DC PFPFM remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFPFM
2-3-108
2N3/2N2
2-3-14 DP main PWB
14 13 1 15
2 16
YC1
YC10
YS1
2 1
1
YC11
8
A1
B13
YC4
A13
B1
1 2
1
YC2
YC6
13 14 3
1
YC3
3
1
YC7
2
1
YC8
2
6 YC9 1 YC5
1 YC14 8 12 1
Figure 2-3-15 DP main PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-109
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 FG - - Ground
Connected to 2 ENG_PAGEST O 3.3 V DC Page set signal
ISC PWB
3 ENG_RDY O 3.3 V DC Ready signal
4 ENG_SEL I 3.3 V DC Select signal
5 ENG_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
6 ENG_SI I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 ENG_SO O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
8 DP_OPEN O 3.3 V DC DPOCSW: On/Off
9 NC(GND) - - Not used
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 NC(GND) - - Not used
14 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from ISCPWB
15 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from ISCPWB
16 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from ISCPWB
YC2 1 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPOLSW
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
DP original
3 LNG_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPOLSW: On/Off
length
switch, DP 4 LNG_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
original 5 GND - - Ground
sensor, DP
6 SET_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPOS: On/Off
lift sensor 2,
DP original 7 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPOS
width switch 8 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPLS2
9 GND - - Ground
10 LF_DNSW I 0/3.3 V DC DPLS2: On/Off
11 WIDE3 I 0/3.3 V DC DPOWS: On/Off
12 WIDE2 I 0/3.3 V DC DPOWS: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
14 WIDE1 I 0/3.3 V DC DPOWS: On/Off
2-3-110
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC4_A A1 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPLS1
Connected to A2 GND - - Ground
DP lift sen-
A3 LF_UPSW I 0/3.3 V DC DPLS1: On/Off
sor 1, DP
feed sensor, A4 GND - - Ground
DP eject A5 FD_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPFS: On/Off
sensor
A6 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPFS
A7 NC - - Not used
A8 NC - - Not used
A9 NC - - Not used
A10 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPES
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 EXIT_SW(M) I 0/3.3 V DC DPES: On/Off
A13 NC - - Not used
YC4_B B1 NC - - Not used
Connected to B2 LED_PW O 5.6 V DC 5.6 V DC power output to LEDPWB
DPLED
B3 LED_REM O 0/5.6 V DC LED control signal
PWB, DP
timing sen- B4 NC(GND) - - Not used
sor, DP open/ B5 GND - - Ground
close switch
B6 CCD_TMG_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPTS: On/Off
B7 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPTS
B8 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPOCSW
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 DP_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC DPOCSW: On/Off
B11 ANODE - - Not used
B12 GND - - Not used
B13 SKEW_SW - - Not used
2-3-111
2N3/2N2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC5 1 FEED3_OUT2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
Connected to 2 FEED1_OUT2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
DP feed
3 FEED2_OUT1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
motor, DP
registration 4 FEED4_OUT1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
motor, DP lift 5 RGST3_OUT2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPRM drive control signal
motor
6 RGST1_OUT2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPRM drive control signal
7 RGST2_OUT1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPRM drive control signal
8 RGST4_OUT1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPRM drive control signal
9 LIFT3_OUT2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
10 LIFT1_OUT2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
11 LIFT2_OUT1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
12 LIFT4_OUT1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
YC6 1 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DPILSW
Connected to 2 NC - - Not used
DP interlock
3 R24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from DPILSW
switch
YC7 1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DPFM1
Connected to 2 FAN_REM1 O 0/24 V DC DPFM1: On/Off
DP fan motor
1
YC8 1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DPFM2
Connected to 2 FAN_REM2 O 0/24 V DC DPFM2: On/Off
DP fan motor
2
YC10 1 CIS_TMG_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPCS: On/Off
Connected to 2 SHD_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
SHD PWB 3 SHD_SO O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 SHD_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC Select signal
5 SHD_PAGEST O 0/3.3 V DC Pageset signal
6 RESETN O 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
7 SHD_OVMON I 0/3.3 V DC OVMON signal
8 SHD_SI I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
9 SHD_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal
10 NC - - Not used
11 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to SHDPWB
12 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to SHDRWB
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
2-3-112
2N3/2N2-2
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC11 1 SS_SCL - - Not used
2 SS_SDA - - Not used
3 SS_1P - - Not used
4 SS_2P - - Not used
5 GND - - Not used
6 3.3V1 - - Not used
7 GND - - Not used
8 24V1 - - Not used
YC14 1 CNVY4_OUT2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
DP convey- 2 CNVY3_OUT2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
ing motor, DP
3 CNVY2_OUT1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
eject motor
4 CNVY1_OUT1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
5 RVRS4_OUT1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPEM drive control signal
6 RVRS2_OUT1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPEM drive control signal
7 RVRS1_OUT2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPEM drive control signal
8 RVRS3_OUT2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPEM drive control signal
2-3-113
2N3/2N2-1
2-3-15 BR PWB
7 1
1
8 4 1
YC7 YC6 YC8
8
1
YC1 YC5
1
1 1
3 1
13 10
YC3 YC2 YC4
Figure 2-3-16 BR PWB silk-screen diagram
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 +24V I 24V DC 24 V DC power input from machine
Connected to 2 +24V I 24V DC 24 V DC power input from machine
the engine 3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 +5V I 5V DC 5 V DC power input from machine
6 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 DECAL_DIR O 0/3.3V DC BRDM drive change signal
Connected to 2 DECAL_PD O 0/3.3V DC BRDM control signal
the engine 3 DECAL_CLK O 0/3.3V DC(pulse) BRDM clock signal
PWB
4 DECAL_MODE O 0/3.3V DC BRDM control signal
5 DECAL_REM O 0/3.3V DC BRDM: On/Off
6 GUIDE_DIR O 0/3.3V DC BRGM drive change signal
7 GUIDE_PD O 0/3.3V DC BRGM control signal
8 GUIDE_CLK O 0/3.3V DC(pulse) BRGM clock signal
9 GUIDE_REM O 0/3.3V DC BRGM: On/Off
10 DECAL_HP_SENS I 0/3.3V DC BRDS: On/Off
2-3-114
2N3/2N2-1
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 1 BRIDGE_SENS 1 O 0/5V DC BRCS1: On/Off
Connected to 2 BRIDGE OPEN O 0/5V DC BRCUSW: On/Off
the engine
PWB 3 BRIDGE_SENS 2 O 0/5V DC BRCS2: On/Off
4 BRIDGE1 DIR I 0/5V DC BRCM1 control signal
5 BRIDGE1 PD I 0/5V DC BRCM1 control signal
6 BRIDGE1 CLK I 0/5V DC(pulse) BRCM1 clock signal
7 BRIDGE1 MODE I 0/5V DC BRCM1 mode signal
8 BRIDGE1 REM I 0/5V DC BRCM1: On/Off
9 BRIDGE2 DIR I 0/5V DC BRCM2 control signal
10 BRIDGE2 PD I 0/5V DC BRCM2 control signal
11 BRIDGE2 CLK I 0/5V DC(pulse) BRCM2 clock signal
12 BRIDGE2 MODE I 0/5V DC BRCM2 mode signal
13 BRIDGE2 REM I 0/5V DC BRCM2: On/Off
YC4 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 BRIDGE_SENS 2 I 0/5V DC BRCM2: On/Off
the BR con- 3 +5V O 5V DC 5 V DC power output to BRCS2
veying sen-
sor 2
YC6 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 BRIDGE_SENS 1 I 0/5V DC BRCS1: On/Off
the BR con- 3 +5V O 5V DC 5 V DC power output to BRCS1
veying sen-
4 GND - - Ground
sor 2 and BR
cover switch 5 BRIDGE_OPEN I 0/5V DC BRCUSW: On/Off
6 +5V O 5V DC 5 V DC power output to BRCUSW
7 NC - - Not used
YC7 1 BRIDGE1_B/ O 0/24V DC(pulse) BRCM1 control signal
Connected to 2 BRIDGE1_A/ O 0/24V DC(pulse) BRCM1 control signal
the BR 3 BRIDGE1_B O 0/24V DC(pulse) BRCM1 control signal
conveying
motor1,2 4 BRIDGE1_A O 0/24V DC(pulse) BRCM1 control signal
5 BRIDGE2_B/ O 0/24V DC(pulse) BRCM2 control signal
6 BRIDGE2_A/ O 0/24V DC(pulse) BRCM2 control signal
7 BRIDGE2_B O 0/24V DC(pulse) BRCM2 control signal
8 BRIDGE2_A O 0/24V DC(pulse) BRCM2 control signal
YC8 1 NC - - Not used
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the BR deca- 3 DECAL_HP_SENS I 0/5V DC BRDS: On/Off
ler sensor
4 5V O 5V DC 5 V DC power output to BRDS
2-3-115
2N3/2N2
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-3-116
2N3/2N2-3
2-4 Appendixes
2-4-1 Appendixes
(1) List of maintenance parts
Maintenance part name Alternative
Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list part No.
Paper feed pulley PULLEY FEED 302N406030 2N406030
Separation pulley PULLEY RETARD 302N406040 2N406040
Forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED 302N406030 2N406030
Left registration roller PARTS ROLLER REGIST H SP 302K994A00 2K994A00
Right registration roller PARTS ROLLER REGIST R SP 302K994440 2K994440
Middle roller PARTS ROLLER MIDDLE L SP 302LC94550 2LC94550
Paper conveying roller PARTS ROLLER FEED LOW SP 302K994430 2K994430
Assist roller PARTS ROLLER ASSIST SP 302K994420 2K994420
Secondly transfer roller PARTS ROLLER SECONDLY 302LK94050 2LK94050
TRANSFER SP
MP paper feed pulley PULLEY PAPER FEED 2AR07220 -
MP forwarding pulley PULLEY SEPARATION 2AR07230 -
Contact glass PARTS CONTACT-GLASS ASSY(C) 302K994040 2K994040
for Metric SP
PARTS CONTACT-GLASS ASSY(I) 302K994030 2K994030
for Inch SP
LED mount PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP 302N493040 2N493040
Original size sensor SENSOR ORIGINAL 302H044110 2H044110
ISU PARTS IMAGE SCANNER H SP 302N493120 2N493120
2-4-1
2N3/2N2-1
Maintenance part name Alternative
Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list part No.
Lower duplex roller PARTS ROLLER DU LOW SP 302K994470 2K994470
Middle duplex roller PARTS ROLLER DU MID SP 302K994480 2K994480
Upper duplex roller PARTS ROLLER DU UP SP 302K994491 2K994491
Eject roller B PARTS ROLLER EXIT B SP 302K994A40 2K994A40
Eject roller PARTS ROLLER EXIT SP 302K994910 2K994910
BR conveying roller PARTS ROLLER RELAY MIDDLE B 302LF94430 2LF94430
SP
BR eject roller 1 PARTS ROLLER RELAY EXIT 302LF94440 2LF94440
LOWER B SP
BR feedshift roller PARTS ROLLER RELAY EXIT 302LF94030 2LF94030
MIDDLE SP
JS eject roller PARTS ROLLER EXIT RIGHT SP 303NM94010 3NM94010
Fan filter PARTS COVER FILTER LSU ASSY 302K994761 2K994761
SP
PU dust filter PARTS COVER FILTER DUST PU 302K994A20 2K994A20
SP
Developer filter FILTER DLP COOLING 302LC33500 2LC33500
Transfer belt filter PARTS FILTER BELT UNIT(M2) SP 302K994E20 2K994E20
Toner disposal box PARTS DISPOSAL UNIT(M) SP 302N294120 2N294120
Left filter FILTER LEFT SIDE 302LC33370 2LC33370
Eject filter FILTER TOP 302N433010 2N433010
2-4-2
2N3/2N2-1
(2) Maintenance kits
Maintenance part name Alternative
Parts No.
Name used in service Name used in parts list part No.
MK-8715A/Maintenance kit MK-8715A/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702N20UN0 072N20UN
(600,000 pages)
Drum unit K DK-8705(K) - -
Developer unit K DV-8705K - -
Transfer belt unit TR-8505 - -
Transfer roller PARTS ROLLER SECONDLY - -
TRANSFER SP
Toner disposal box PARTS DISPOSAL UNIT(M2) SP - -
MK-8715B/Maintenance kit MK-8715B/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702N20UN1 072N20U1
(600,000 pages)
Drum unit C DK-8705(C) - -
Drum unit M DK-8705(M) - -
Drum unit Y DK-8705(Y) - -
Developer unit C DV-8705C - -
Developer unit M DV-8705M - -
Developer unit Y DV-8705Y - -
120 V specifications
MK-8715C/Maintenance kit MK-8715C/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702N27US0 072N27US0
(300,000 pages)
Fuser unit FK-8701 - -
Eject filter FILTER TOP - -
Left filter FILTER LEFT SIDE - -
Cleaning pre brush PARTS PRE BELT CLN ASSY SP - -
220 - 240 V specifications
MK-8715C/Maintenance kit MK-8715C/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702N28NL0 072N28NL
(300,000 pages)
Fuser unit FK-8702 - -
Eject filter FILTER TOP - -
Left filter FILTER LEFT SIDE - -
Cleaning pre brush PARTS PRE BELT CLN ASSY SP - -
2-4-3
2N3/2N2-1
Maintenance part name Alternative
Parts No.
Name used in service Name used in parts list part No.
MK-8715D/Maintenance kit MK-8715D/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702N20UN2 072N20U2
(300,000 pages)
Charger roller unit MC-8705 - -
Developer unit K DV-8705K - -
Toner disposal box PARTS DISPOSAL UNIT(M2) SP - -
MK-8715E/Maintenance kit MK-8715E/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702N20UN3 072N20U3
(300,000 pages)
Charger roller unit MC-8705 - -
Developer unit C DV-8705C - -
Developer unit M DV-8705M - -
Developer unit Y DV-8705Y - -
2-4-4
2N3/2N2-3
(3) Periodic maintenance procedures
CH: Check, CL: Clean, AD: Adjust, LU: Lubrication, RE: Replace
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User
Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page
part/location call
300 600 900 1200
Test copy Perform at the Test copy
CH CH CH CH CH
and test maximum copy
AD AD AD AD AD
print size
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User
Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page
part/location call
300 600 900 1200
Inner Toner disposal CH - RE - RE Replace: MK-8715A P.1-5-146
Cleaning box RE RE - RE - Replace: MK-8715D
Cleaning the toner CH CH CH CH CH Vacuum. P.2-4-11
collection duct CL CL CL CL CL
Cleaning the toner CH CH CH CH CH Vacuum. P.2-4-12
duct unit CL CL CL CL CL
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User
Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page
part/location call
300 600 900 1200
Fuser Fuser unit CH Replace: MK-8715C P.1-5-74
RE RE RE RE
section RE
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User
Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page
part/location call
300 600 900 1200
Transfer Transfer belt unit CH CH CH Replace: MK-8715A P.1-5-68
RE RE
section RE CL CL
Secondly transfer Replace: MK-8715A P.1-5-72
- - RE - RE
roller
Cleaning pre Replace: MK-8715C P.1-5-70
- RE RE RE RE
brush
2-4-5
2N3/2N2-3
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User
Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page
part/location call
300 600 900 1200
Devel- Cleaning the inner Vacuum. P.2-4-14
CH CH CH CH CH
oper sec- air duc * : If toner is observed at
CL CL CL CL CL
tion the duct.
CH - RE - RE Replace: MK-8715A
Developer unit K P.1-5-63
RE RE - RE - Replace: MK-8715D
CH - RE - RE Replace: MK-8715B
Developer unit C P.1-5-63
RE RE - RE - Replace: MK-8715E
CH - RE - RE Replace: MK-8715B
Developer unit M P.1-5-63
RE RE - RE - Replace: MK-8715E
CH - RE - RE Replace: MK-8715B
Developer unit Y P.1-5-63
RE RE - RE - Replace: MK-8715E
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User
Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page
part/location call
300 600 900 1200
Drum Drum unit K Replace: MK-8715A P.1-5-63
section CH CH CH Vacuum: Clean toner from
RE RE
RE CL CL the top and both sides of
the unit.
Drum unit C Replace: MK-8715B P.1-5-63
CH CH CH Vacuum: Clean toner from
RE RE
RE CL CL the top and both sides of
the unit.
Drum unit M Replace: MK-8715B P.1-5-63
CH CH CH Vacuum: Clean toner from
RE RE
RE CL CL the top and both sides of
the unit.
Drum unit Y Replace: MK-8715B P.1-5-63
CH CH CH Vacuum: Clean toner from
RE RE
RE CL CL the top and both sides of
the unit.
Charger roller unit CH Replace: P.1-5-65
RE - RE -
RE MK-8715D/ MK-8715E
Cleaning the inner CH CH CH CH CH Vacuum. P.1-5-60
unit CL CL CL CL CL
2-4-6
2N3/2N2-3
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User (x1000 counts)
Section Points and cautions Page
part/location call 150/ 450/ 750/ 1050/
300 600 900 1200
Paper Paper feed pulley Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-5-20
feed , cloth. P.1-5-23
CH CH CH CH CH
convey- CH: performing U901 and
CL RE RE RE RE
ing sec- check feeding count: Tar-
tion get to replace at 150K.
Separation pulley Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-5-20
cloth. P.1-5-23
CH CH CH CH CH
CH: performing U901 and
CL RE RE RE RE
check feeding count: Tar-
get to replace at 150K.
Forwarding pulley Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-5-20
cloth. P.1-5-23
CH CH CH CH CH
CH: performing U901 and
CL RE RE RE RE
check feeding count: Tar-
get to replace at 150K.
Left registration CH Clean with alcohol or a dry
- /CL - /CL - /CL - /CL
roller CL cloth.
Right registration CH Clean with alcohol or a dry
- /CL - /CL - /CL - /CL
roller CL cloth.
Middle roller CH Clean with alcohol or a dry
- /CL - /CL - /CL - /CL
CL cloth.
Paper conveying CH Clean with alcohol or a dry
- /CL - /CL - /CL - /CL
roller CL cloth.
Assist roller CH Clean with alcohol or a dry
- /CL - /CL - /CL - /CL
CL cloth.
MP paper feed Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-5-31
pulley cloth.
CH CH CH CH CH
CH: performing U901 and
CL RE RE RE RE
check feeding count: Tar-
get to replace at 150K.
MP forwarding Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-5-31
pulley CH CH CH CH CH cloth.
CL RE RE RE RE CH: performing U901 and
check feeding count: Tar-
Cleaning the Clean with alcohol or a dry P.2-4-15
paper conveying CL - /CL - /CL - /CL - /CL cloth.
plate
Cleaning the sep- Cleaning brush P.2-4-15
CL - /CL - /CL - /CL - /CL
arator
2-4-7
2N3/2N2-3
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User
Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page
part/location call
300 600 900 1200
Eject, Lower duplex Clean with alcohol or a dry
CL CL CL CL CL
Duplex roller cloth.
section
Middle duplex Clean with alcohol or a dry
CL CL CL CL CL
roller cloth.
Upper duplex Clean with alcohol or a dry
CL CL CL CL CL
roller cloth.
Eject roller B Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-5-79
CL CL CL CL CL
cloth.
Eject roller Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-5-79
CL CL CL CL CL
cloth.
BR conveying Clean with alcohol or a dry
CL CL CL CL CL
roller cloth.
BR eject roller 1 Clean with alcohol or a dry
CL CL CL CL CL
cloth.
BR feedshift roller Clean with alcohol or a dry
CL CL CL CL CL
cloth.
JS eject roller Clean with alcohol or a dry
CL CL CL CL CL
cloth.
Lower change Clean toner from the lib. P.1-5-79
guide Clean with alcohol or a dry
CL CL CL CL CL
Upper change cloth.
guide
2-4-8
2N3/2N2-3
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User
Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page
part/location call
300 600 900 1200
Scanner Contact glass DP slit glass: CL dry cloth
Optical or alcohol wet cloth is
section strictly prohibited.
When installing DP, CL
with dry cloth.Contact
glass for original: CL alco-
CL CL CL CL CL hol or dry cloth.(Face
Side)
Only when unusual image
(line or stain) appear, wipe
the back side with dry
cloth after cleaning with
alcohol only. (Back side)
Mirror A/ B Clean: air blow after dry
CH
- - - - cloth only when unusual
CL
image (line) arises.
ISU lens Clean: air blow after dry
CH
- - - - cloth only when unusual
CL
image (line) arises.
LED (mount) CH Replace if there are image
- - - -
RE problems.
RAIL ISU R/F Apply grease if abnormal
sound and jitter image
CH appears
- - - -
LU Optical rail grease PG-
671
(P/N:60170000)
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User
Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page
part/location call
300 600 900 1200
Outer, Outer Covers, CH Clean with alcohol or a dry
CL CL CL CL
Cover Tray CL cloth.
2-4-9
2N3/2N2-3
Periodic maintenance
Maintenance User
Section (x1000 counts) Points and cautions Page
part/location call
300 600 900 1200
Driving, Fan filter CL CL CL CL CL Vacuum. P.1-5-143
Other
PU dust filter CL CL CL CL CL Vacuum. 4pcs P.1-5-142
Developer filter CL CL CL CL CL Vacuum. P.1-5-145
Transfer belt filter CL CL CL CL CL Vacuum. 2pcs P.1-5-144
Left filter CH Replace: MK-8715C P.1-5-142
RE RE RE RE
CL
Eject filter CH Replace: MK-8715C P.1-5-141
RE RE RE RE
CL 3pcs
Each Clutches Check the image regis-
tration and paper feed
CH conveying condition on
CH CH CH CH
RE paper feed conveying
(registration) part.
Sensors Clean with alcohol or a
dry cloth.
CH CH CH CH CH
(lighting part and light
reception part.)
Image quality Check/ Adjust P.1-3-211
U474 (LSU cleaning) P.1-3-198
CH CH CH CH CH
U464 (Calibration) P.1-3-173
AD AD AD AD AD
U410 (Adjusting the half-
tone automatically)
* : Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
2-4-10
2N3/2N2-3
(4) Image adjustment after replacing the maintenance kit
Perform the following maintenance modes after replacing the maintenance kit (MK-8715A,
MK-8715B, MK-8715C MK-8715D, MK-8715E):
Executable using preset-settings of the U952 maintenance mode workflow (see page P.1-3-234).
* : When replacing the new drum unit, perform maintenance mode U474 (LSU cleaning) (see page P.1-3-
211).
Maintenance kits Maintenance mode
MK-A U119/ U930/ U140/ U469/ U127/ U464/ U469/ U412/ U464/
U410/ U251
MK-B U119/ U930/ U140/ U164/ U469/ U412/ U464/ U410/ U251
MK-C U167/ U464/ U469/ U410/ U251
MK-D U930/ U140/ U464/ U469/ U464/ U410/ U251
MK-E U930/ U140/ U464/ U469/ U464/ U410/ U251
When the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley or separation pulley is replaced, perform maintenance mode
U903 (clearing the jam counter) (see page P.1-3-220).
Execute Maintenance Counter - Cassette - Counter Clear of U251 (Maintenance counter limits/clear) (see
page P.1-3-153).
(5) Inner Cleaning
To avoid contamination due to the toner that scatters from the unit, perform checking toner clogging and vac-
uuming the toner in the duct of the toner collection unit. (To be performed at 300kpm maintenance.)
1. Cleaning the toner collection duct
Procedure
1. Remove the toner disposal box (see
page P.1-5-146).
2. Insert the vacuum cleaner inlet from the
opening at the back side of the rear
cover and vacuum toner for 1 minute.
(Perform this step with the developer
unit installed.)
Screws
Screw Toner
disposal box
Figure 2-4-1
2-4-11
2N3/2N2-3
2. Cleaning the toner duct unit
Procedure
1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page
P.1-5-3).
2. Remove the rear lower cover (see page
P.1-5-3).
3. Remove two screws and then remove
the toner duct unit.
Toner duct unit
Screw
Screw
Figure 2-4-2
4. Vacuum the toner duct unit at its main
unit intakes (4) from the direction indi-
cated by the arrow in the diagram to the
right, using a vacuum cleaner.
* : Make sure that toner won’t fall even
when the duct is shaken or tilted after
the cleaning of the duct has been fin-
ished.
Toner duct unit
Figure 2-4-3
2-4-12
2N3/2N2
5. Vacuum the main unit duct at its toner
duct unit outtakes (4), using a vacuum
cleaner.
Figure 2-4-4
2-4-13
2N3/2N2-3
3. Cleaning the inner air duct
* : If toner is observed at the duct through the toner retrieval outlet.
Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit (see page P.1-5-68).
2. Remove the inner unit (see page P.1-5-60).
3. Remove the developer unit and drum unit (see page P.1-5-63).
4. Visually examine the toner at the toner Toner Collection Inlet
retrieval outlet through the opening on
the right-hand side conveying unit.
Y C
M
B
Figure 2-4-5
5. Remove the toner by the vacuum Before the toner at the duce is cleaned
cleaner from the toner retrieval outlet
(30 seconds).
* : Keep the vacuum cleaner running until
the toner at the duct is entirely vacu-
umed.
After the toner at the duce was cleaned
Figure 2-4-6
2-4-14
2N3/2N2-3
4. Cleaning the paper conveying plate
Procedure
1. Pull out the paper conveying unit. Paper conveying unit
2. Clean the side of the paper conveying Paper conveying plate
plate, which paper runs through.
* : Use a dry, soft cloth for cleaning.
Figure 2-4-7
5. Cleaning the separator
Procedure
1. Open the front upper cover.
Remove the cleaning brush (blue col- Cleaning brush
ored).
2. Pull out the paper conveying unit.
3. As shown in the figure, clean dirt from
the separator by moving the brush from
side to side along the separator.
Separator
Paper conveying unit
Figure 2-4-8
2-4-15
2N3/2N2
(6) Repetitive defects gauge
First occurrence of defect
37.5 mm/1 1/2" Charger roller
39 mm/1 9/16" Magnet roller
Sleeve roller
57 mm/2 1/4" Right registration roller
63 mm/2 1/2" Left registration roller
75 mm/2 15/16" Transfer roller
125 mm/4 15/16" Drum
157 mm/6 3/16" Press roller
206.6 mm/8 1/8" Fuser belt
936 mm/36 7/8" Transfer belt
2-4-16
2N3/2N2-3
(7) Firmware environment commands
The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. There parameters may be changed per-
manently with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands.
This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.
Using FRPO commands for reprogramming firmware
The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as optional values on the service status page.
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameter, print out a service status page, so you will know the parameter
values before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values, send the
FRPO INIT (FRPO-INITialize) command.(!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:
!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Changing emulation mode to PCL6
!R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT;
FRPO parameters
Factory
Item FRPO Setting values
setting
Top margin A1 Integer value in inches 0
A2 Fraction value in 1/100 inches 0
Left margin A3 Integer value in inches 0
A4 Fraction value in 1/100 inches 0
Page length A5 Integer value in inches 17
A6 Fraction value in 1/100 inches 30
Page width A7 Integer value in inches 17
A8 Fraction value in 1/100 inches 30
Default pattern resolution B8 0: 300 dpi 0
1: 600 dpi
Page orientation C1 0: Portrait 0
1: Landscape
Default font No. * C2 Middle two digits of power-up font 0
C3 Last two digits of power-up font 0
C5 First two digits of power-up font 0
PCL font switch C8 0: HP compatibility mode 0
32: Conventional compatibility mode
Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5 5
Form feed time-out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99) 6 (30 s)
Duplex mode N4 0: Off 0
1: Long edge binding
2: Short edge binding
Sleep timer time-out time N5 Value in units of 1 minute (1 to 240) 60
2-4-17
2N3/2N2
Factory
Item FRPO Setting values
setting
Ecoprint level N6 0: Off 0
2: On
Default emulation mode P1 6: PCL 6 120V: 9
9: KPDL 220-240V: 6
Carriage-return action P2 0: Ignores 1
1: Carriage-return
2: Carriage-return + linefeed
Linefeed action P3 0: Ignores 1
1: Linefeed
2: Linefeed + carriage-return
Automatic emulation switching P4 0: AES disabled 120V: 1
1: AES enabled 220-240V: 0
Alternative emulation P5 Same as the P1 values except that 9 is 6
ignored.
Automatic emulation switching P7 0: Page eject commands 120V: 11
trigger 1: None 220-240V: 10
2: Page eject and prescribe EXIT commands
3: Prescribe EXIT commands
4: Formfeed (^L) commands
6: Prescribe EXIT and formfeed commands
10: Page eject commands; if AES fails,
resolves to KPDL
Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82 (R)
Default stacker R0 1 (inner tray) 1
Default paper size R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 0
1: Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2 inches)
2: Business (4-1/8 × 9-1/2 inches)
3: International DL (11 × 22 cm)
4: International C5 (16.2 × 22.9 cm)
5: Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2 inches)
6: US Letter (8-1/2 × 11 inches)
7: US Legal (8-1/2 × 14 inches)
8: A4 (21.0 × 29.7 cm)
9: JIS B5 (18.2 × 25.7 cm)
10: A3 (29.7 ´ 42 cm)
11: B4 (25.7 ´ 36.4 cm)
12: US Ledger (11 ´ 17 inches)
13: ISO A5
14: A6 (10.5 × 14.8 cm)
15: JIS B6 (12.8 × 18.2 cm)
16: Commercial #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8 inches)
17: Commercial #6 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2 inches)
18: ISO B5 (17.6 × 25 cm)
19: Custom (11.7 × 17.7 inches)
20:B4toA4
21:A3toA4
2-4-18
2N3/2N2-3
Factory
Item FRPO Setting values
setting
Default paper size R2 22:A4toA4[98%]
23:STKtoA4
24:STKtoB4
30: C4 (22.9 ´ 32.4 cm)
31: Hagaki (10 × 14.8 cm)
32: Ofuku-hagaki (14.8 × 20 cm)
33: Officio II
38:12 × 18
39: 8K
40: 16K
42: 8.5 × 13.5 inches
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei 2
53: Youkei 4
Default cassette R4 0: MP tray 1
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
5: Cassette 5
6: Cassette 6
7: Cassette 7
Sorter full action S3 0: Stop operation with detecting tray-full 0
1: Switching to the eject-able destinations
when bin becomes tray full
A4/letter equation S4 0: Off 1
1: On
Host buffer size S5 0: 10 KB 1
1: 100 KB
2: 1024 KB
Wide A4 T6 0: Off 0
1: On
Line spacing * U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6
U1 Lines per inch (decimal value) 0
Character spacing * U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10
U3 Characters per inch (decimal value) 0
2-4-19
2N3/2N2
Factory
Item FRPO Setting values
setting
Country code U6 0: US-ASCII 41
1: France
2: Germany
3: UK
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US Legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multilingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America
50 - 99: HP PCL symbol set coding
Code set at power up in U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 53
daisywheel emulation 1: IBM
6: PCL
7 - 99: HP PCL symbol set coding
Font pitch for fixedpitch scalable U8 Default font pitch (integer value) 10
font *
U9 Default font pitch (decimal value) 0
Font height for the default scal- V0 Integer value in 100 points: 0 to 9 0
able font *
V1 Integer value in points: 0 to 99 12
V2 decimal value in 1/100 points: 0, 25, 50, 75 0
Default scalable font * V3 Name of typeface of up to 32 characters, Courier
enclosed with single or double quotation
marks.
Default weight V9 0: Courier = darkness 5
(courier and letter Gothic) Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular
Color mode W1 0: Black & white 1
1: Color
Gloss mode W6 0: Low (normal) 0
1: High
2-4-20
2N3/2N2
Factory
Item FRPO Setting values
setting
Paper type for the MP tray X0 1: Plain 1
2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Label
5: Bond
6: Recycle
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Cardstock
14: Coated
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28: Custom1 to 8
Paper type for cassettes 1 and 2 X1 1: Plain 1
X2 3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28: Custom1 to 8
Paper type for optional cassettes X3 1: Plain 1
3 to 7 X4 3: Preprinted
X5 5: Bond
X6 6: Recycled
X10 9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
17: High quality
21 to 28: Custom1 to 8
PCL paper source X9 0: Paper selection depending on an escape 0
sequence compatible with HP-LJ5Si.
2: Paper selection depending on an escape
sequence compatible with HP-LJ8000.
Automatic continue for ‘Press Y0 0: Off 0
GO’ 1: On
Automatic continue timer Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99) 6 (30 s)
Error message for device error Y3 0: Not detect 127
127: Detect
2-4-21
2N3/2N2
Factory
Item FRPO Setting values
setting
Duplex operation for specified Y4 0: Off 0
paper type 1: On
(Prepunched, Preprintedand Let-
terhead)
Default operation for PDF direct Y5 0: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the 0
printing current paper size. Loads paper from the
current paper cassette.
1: Through the image. Loads paper which is
the same size as the image.
2: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the
current paper size. Loads Letter, A4 size
paper depending on the image size.
3: Through the image. Loads Letter, A4 size
paper depending on the image size.
8: Through the image. Loads paper from the
current paper cassette.
9: Through the image. Loads Letter, A4 size
paper depending on the image size.
10: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the
current paper size. Loads Letter, A4 size
paper depending on the image size.
e-MPS error Y6 0: Does not print the error report and display 3
the error message.
1: Prints the error report.
2: Displays the error message.
3: Prints the error report and displays the error
message.
*: Ignored in some emulation modes.
2-4-22
2N3/2N2-3
(8) Timing chart
1. Cassette1 paper feeding, Paper size A4, Simplex, Preset 1
2. Cassette1 paper feeding, Paper size A4, Simplex, Preset 3
BRCM2 BRCM1
BRCS2 BRCS1 BRDM EM ES
FUM FUES
LPS
RS RM
PFM
MM
MS
PFCL1
ASCL1
FS1
Figure 2-4-9
2-4-23
(1) Simplex_Preset 1_cassette1_A4
㪇 㪉㪌㪇㫄㫊 㪌㪇㪇㫄㫊
㪥 㪘㪤㪜 㪠㪆㪦
㪈 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪧㪝㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㪈㩷㩿㪧㪝㪚㪣㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪊 㪘 㫊㫊㫀㫊㫋㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㪈㩷㩿㪘㪪㪚㪣㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪋 㪝㪼㪼㪻㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪝㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪌 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪍 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪎 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪏 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪐 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪇 㪣㫆㫆㫇㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪣㪧㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪈 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㪼㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
2-4-24
㪈㪉 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪊 㪜㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪋 㪙 㪩㩷㪻㪼㪺㫌㫉㫃㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪛㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪌 㪜㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪍 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪎 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪉㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪏 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪉㪀 㪠㪥
2N3/2N2-3
(2) Simplex_Preset 3_cassette1_A4
㪇 㪉㪅㪌㫊 㪌㫊 㪎㪅㪌㫊
㪥 㪘㪤㪜 㪠㪆㪦
㪈 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪧㪝㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㪈㩷㩿㪧㪝㪚㪣㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪊 㪘 㫊㫊㫀㫊㫋㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㪈㩷㩿㪘㪪㪚㪣㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪋 㪝㪼㪼㪻㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪝㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪌 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪍 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪎 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪏 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪐 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪇 㪣㫆㫆㫇㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪣㪧㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪈 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㪼㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
2-4-25
㪈㪉 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪊 㪜㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪋 㪙 㪩㩷㪻㪼㪺㫌㫉㫃㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪛㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪌 㪜 㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪍 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪎 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪉㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪏 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪉㪀 㪠㪥
2N3/2N2-3
2N3/2N2-3
3. Cassette2 paper feeding, Paper size A4, Simplex, Preset 3
BRCM2 BRCM1
BRDM
BRCS2 BRCS1 EM ES
FUM FUES
LPS
RM
RS
PFM
MM
MS
PCS
FS2 PCCL
ASCL2
PFCL2
Figure 2-4-10
2-4-26
(3) Simplex_Preset 3_cassette2_A4
㪇 㪉㪅㪌㫊 㪌㫊 㪎㪅㪌㫊
㪥 㪘㪤㪜 㪠㪆㪦
㪈 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪧㪝㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㪉㩷㩿㪧㪝㪚㪣㪉㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪊 㪘 㫊㫊㫀㫊㫋㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㪉㩷㩿㪘㪪㪚㪣㪉㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪋 㪝㪼㪼㪻㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪝㪪㪉㪀 㪠㪥
㪌 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㩿㪧㪚㪚㪣㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪍 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪧㪚㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪎 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪏 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪐 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪇 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪈 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
2-4-27
㪈㪉 㪣㫆㫆㫇㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪣㪧㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪊 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㪼㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪋 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪌 㪜㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪍 㪙 㪩㩷㪻㪼㪺㫌㫉㫃㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪛㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪎 㪜 㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪏 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪐 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪉㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉㪇 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪉㪀 㪠㪥
2N3/2N2-3
2N3/2N2-3
4. MPF paper feeding, Paper size A4, Simplex, Preset 1
BRCM2 BRCM1
BRCS2 BRCS1 BRDM
EM ES
FUM FUES
LPS
RS RM
PFM MPPFCL
MM
MPFS
MPLM
Figure 2-4-11
2-4-28
(4) Simplex_Preset 3_MPF_A4
㪇 㪉㪅㪌㫊 㪌㫊 㪎㪅㪌㫊 㪈㪇㫊
㪥 㪘㪤㪜 㪠㪆㪦
㪈 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪧㪝㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉 㪤㪧㩷㫃㫀㪽㫋㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪧㪣㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪊 㪤㪧㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㩿㪤㪧㪧㪝㪚㪣㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪋 㪤㪧㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪧㪝㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪌 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪍 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪎 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪏 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪐 㪣㫆㫆㫇㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪣㪧㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪇 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㪼㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪈 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
2-4-29
㪈㪉 㪜 㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪊 㪙 㪩㩷㪻㪼㪺㫌㫉㫃㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪛㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪋 㪜㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪌 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪍 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪉㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪎 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪉㪀 㪠㪥
2N3/2N2-3
2N3/2N2-3
5. Cassette1 paper feeding, Paper size A4, Duplex, Preset 1
6. Cassette1 paper feeding, Paper size A4, Duplex, Preset 3
SBS
BRCM2 BRCM1 FSSOL
ES DUS1
BRCS2 BRCS1 BRDM
EM DUM1
FUM FUES
LPS
DUS2
RS RM DUM2
PFM
MM
MS
PFCL1
FS1 ASCL1
Figure 2-4-12
2-4-30
(5) Duplex_Preset 1_cassette1_A4
㪇 㪉㪅㪌㫊 㪌㫊 㪎㪅㪌㫊 㪈㪇㫊 㪈㪉㪅㪌
㪥 㪘㪤㪜 㪠㪆㪦
㪈 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪧㪝㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㪈㩷㩿㪧㪝㪚㪣㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪊 㪘 㫊㫊㫀㫊㫋㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㪈㩷㩿㪘㪪㪚㪣㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪋 㪝㪼㪼㪻㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪝㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪌 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪍 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪎 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪏 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪐 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪇 㪣㫆㫆㫇㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪣㪧㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪈 㪝㪼㪼㪻㫊㪿㫀㪽㫋㩷㫊㫆㫃㪼㫅㫆㫀㪻㩷㩿㪝㪪㪪㪦㪣㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
2-4-31
㪈㪉 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㪼㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪊 㪜 㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪋 㪪㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㪹㪸㪺㫂㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪪㪙 㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪌 㪛 㫌㫇㫃㪼㫏㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪛㪬 㪤㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪍 㪛 㫌㫇㫃㪼㫏㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪛㪬 㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪎 㪛 㫌㫇㫃㪼㫏㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪛㪬 㪤㪉㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪏 㪛 㫌㫇㫃㪼㫏㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪛㪬 㪪㪉㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪐 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉㪇 㪙 㪩㩷㪻㪼㪺㫌㫉㫃㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪛㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉㪈 㪜 㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪉㪉 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪉㪊 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪉㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉㪋 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪉㪀 㪠㪥
2N3/2N2-3
(6) Duplex_Preset 3_cassette1_A4
㪇 㪌㫊 㪈㪇㫊 㪈㪌㫊
㪥 㪘㪤㪜 㪠㪆㪦
㪈 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪧㪝㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉 㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㪈㩷㩿㪧㪝㪚㪣㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪊 㪘 㫊㫊㫀㫊㫋㩷㪺㫃㫌㫋㪺㪿㩷㪈㩷㩿㪘㪪㪚㪣㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪋 㪝㪼㪼㪻㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪝㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪌 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪍 㪤㫀㪻㪻㫃㪼㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪤㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪎 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪏 㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪩㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪐 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪇 㪣㫆㫆㫇㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪣㪧㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪈 㪝㪼㪼㪻㫊㪿㫀㪽㫋㩷㫊㫆㫃㪼㫅㫆㫀㪻㩷㩿㪝㪪㪪㪦㪣㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
2-4-32
㪈㪉 㪝㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㪼㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪝㪬 㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪊 㪜㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪋 㪪㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㪹㪸㪺㫂㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪪㪙 㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪌 㪛 㫌㫇㫃㪼㫏㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪛㪬 㪤㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪍 㪛 㫌㫇㫃㪼㫏㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪛 㪬㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪎 㪛 㫌㫇㫃㪼㫏㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪛㪬 㪤㪉㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪈㪏 㪛 㫌㫇㫃㪼㫏㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪛 㪬㪪㪉㪀 㪠㪥
㪈㪐 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪈㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉㪇 㪙 㪩㩷㪻㪼㪺㫌㫉㫃㪼㫉㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪛㪤㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉㪈 㪜 㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㩿㪜㪪㪀 㪠㪥
㪉㪉 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪈㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪈㪀 㪠㪥
㪉㪊 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙㪩㪚㪤㪉㪀 㪦㪬 㪫
㪉㪋 㪙 㪩㩷㪺㫆㫅㫍㪼㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪉㩷㩿㪙 㪩㪚㪪㪉㪀 㪠㪥
2N3/2N2-3
2N3/2N2
(9) Chart of image adjustment procedures
Adjusting Maintenance mode
Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
order Item No. Mode
Adjusting the magnification in the Data processing U039 Sub Scan U039 test pattern P.1-3-44
auxiliary scanning direction
1 (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the center line of the MP Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU Out Left U034 test pattern P.1-3-38 To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
tray Duplex.
2 (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the center line of the cas- Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU Out Left U034 test pattern P.1-3-38
settes
3 (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the leading edge registra- Registration motor turning on timing U034 LSU Out Top U034 test pattern P.1-3-38 To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
tion of the MP tray (secondary paper feed start timing) Duplex.
4 (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the leading edge registra- Registration motor turning on timing U034 LSU Out Top U034 test pattern P.1-3-38
tion of the cassette (secondary paper feed start timing)
5 (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the leading edge margin LSU illumination start timing U402 Lead U402 test pattern P.1-3-168
(printing adjustment)
6
Adjusting the trailing edge margin LSU illumination end timing U402 Trail U402 test pattern P.1-3-168
(printing adjustment)
7
Adjusting the left and right margins LSU illumination start/end timing U402 A Margin U402 test pattern P.1-3-168
(printing adjustment) C Margin
8
Adjusting magnification of the Data processing U065 Main Scan Test chart P.1-3-57 U065: For copying an original placed on
scanner in the main scanning direc- the platen.
9 tion U070 Main Scan P.1-3-62 U070: For copying originals from the DP.
(scanning adjustment)
Adjusting magnification of the Original scanning speed U065 Sub Scan Test chart P.1-3-57 U065: For copying an original placed on
scanner in the auxiliary scanning the platen.
10 direction U070 Sub Scan P.1-3-62 U070: For copying originals from the DP.
(scanning adjustment)
2-4-33
2N3/2N2
Adjusting Maintenance mode
Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
order Item No. Mode
Adjusting the center line Adjusting the original scan data U067 Front Test chart P.1-3-60 U067: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) Rotate the platen.
To make an adjustment for rotate copying, select
11 Rotate.
U072 Front P.1-3-66 U072: For copying originals from the DP.
Back To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
Back.
Adjusting the leading edge registra- Original scan start timing U066 Front Test chart P.1-3-59 U066: For copying an original placed on
tion Rotate the platen.
(scanning adjustment) To make an adjustment for trailing edge registra-
12 tion, select Rotate.
U071 Front Head P.1-3-64 U071: For copying originals from the DP.
Back Head To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
Back Head.
Adjusting the leading edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 B Margin Test chart P.1-3-169 U403: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) the contact glass
13 U404 B Margin P.1-3-170 U404: For copying originals from the DP.
Adjusting the trailing edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 D Margin Test chart P.1-3-169 U403: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) the contact glass
14 U404 D Margin P.1-3-170 U404: For copying originals from the DP.
Adjusting the left and right margins Adjusting the original scan data U403 A Margin Test chart P.1-3-169 U403: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) C Margin the contact glass
15 U404 A Margin P.1-3-170 U404: For copying originals from the DP.
C Margin
Image quality
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000005),
the following adjustments are automatically made: Item Specifications Item Specifications
Adjusting the scanner auxiliary scanning direction magnification (U065) Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)
Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) 100% magnifica- Machine: ± 0.8% Leading edge Cassette: +1.0/-1.5 mm
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Adjusting the DP center line (U072) tion registration
Using DP: ± 1.5% MP tray: +1.0/-1.5 mm
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243), Enlargement/ Machine: ± 1.0% Duplex: +1.0/-1.5 mm
the following adjustments are automatically made: reduction
Using DP: ± 1.5% Skewed paper Cassette: 1.5 mm or less
Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) feed
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) Lateral square- Machine: ± 1.5 mm/375 mm MP tray: 1.5 mm or less
(left-right differ-
Adjusting the DP center line (U072) ness
Using DP: ± 3.0 mm/375 mm ence) Duplex: 2.0 mm or less
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the chart printed from the machine, Lateral image Cassette: ± 2.0 mm
the following adjustments are automatically made: shifting
MP tray: ± 2.0 mm
Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) Duplex: ± 3.0 mm
Adjusting the DP center line (U072) Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When maintenance item U415 (Adjusting the print position automatically) is run, the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the printer leading edge registration (U034)
Adjusting the printer center line (U034)
Adjusting the printer margin (U402)
2-4-34
2N3/2N2-1
(10) Wiring diagram
No.1
Bridge unit YC18
DF_CLK 1 1 A1 A1
DF_SDO 2 2 A2 A2
DF_SEL 3 3 A3 A3
DF_SDI 4 4 A4 A4
5V 1 1 5 1 DF_RDY 5 5 A5 A5
BRES Vout 2 2 4 2 DF_DET 6 6 A6 A6
GND 3 3 3 3 GND 7 7 A7 A7
Relay A8 A8
YC20 A9 A9
1 1 2 4 19 1 19 19 N.C A10 A10
BRECSW 2 2 1 5 18 2 18 18 +5V B1 B1 DFMPWB
17 3 17 17 EXIT_SENS 1 1 B2 B2
16 4 16 16 GND 2 2 B3 B3
15 5 15 15 EXIT_COV_OPEN 3 3 B4 B4
14 6 14 14 GND 4 4 B5 B5
RET 3 1 13 7 13 13 EXIT_SOL_RET B6 B6
BRFSSOL ACT
COM
2
1
Relay 2
3
12
11
8
9
12
11
12
11
EXIT_SOL_REM
+24V1
B7
B8
B7
B8
B9 B9
B10 B10
YC4 YC2
GND 3 3 1 1 GND DECAL DIR 1 1 10 10 10 10 DECAL_DIR
BRIDGE_SENS2 DECAL_PD
Document finisher
BRCS2 Vout 2 2 2 2 DECAL PD 2 2 9 11 9 9
DECAL_CLK
5V 1 1 3 3 +5V DECAL CLK
DECAL MODE
3
4
3
4
8
7
12
13
8
7
8
7 DECAL_PH
(option)
DECAL REM 5 5 6 14 6 6 DECAL_REM
YC6 GUIDE DIR 6 6 5 15 5 5 GUIDE_DIR
GND 3 3 1 1 GND GUIDE PD 7 7 4 16 4 4 GUIDE_PD
BRCS1 Vout 2 2 2 2 BRIDGE_SENS 1 GUIDE CLK 8 8 3 17 3 3 GUIDE_CLK
5V 1 1 3 3 +5V GUIDE REM 9 9 2 18 2 2 GUIDE_REM Paper feeder
Connector holder
Connector holder
Connector holder
DECAL_HP_SENS 10 10 1 19 1 1 DECAL_HP_SENS
2 2 4 4 GND
BRCVSW
Relay
1 1 5 5 BRIDGE_OPEN 1 1 1
6 6 +5V YC1 From PSPWB (1) 2 2 PFPSPWB
7 7 NC +24V 1 1 19 1 19 38 +24V1 3 3 3
+24V 2 2 18 2 18 37 +24V1
YC7 GND 3 3 17 3 17 36 GND
/B 4 4 1 1 BRIDGE1_B/ GND 4 4 16 4 16 35 GND
2 BRIDGE1_A/ 1 1 1
BRCM1 /A
B
3
2
3
2 3
2
3 BRIDGE1_B
+5V
GND
5
6
5
6
15
14
5
6
15
14
34
33
5V
GND
From PSPWB (2)
3 2 2 PFCH
A 1 1 4 4 BRIDGE1_A YC8
YC3 1 1 +24V
2 2 +24V
/B 4 4 5 5 BRIDGE2_B/ BRIDGE_SENS 1 1 1 13 7 13 32 BRIDGE_SENS 1 3 3 GND
/A 3 3 6 6 BRIDGE2_A/ BRIDGE OPEN 2 2 12 8 12 31 BRIDGE_OPEN 4
BRCM2 B 2 2 7 7 BRIDGE2_B BRIDGE_SENS 2 3 3 11 9 11 30 BRIDGE_SENS 2 5
4
5
GND
GND
A 1 1 8 8 BRIDGE2_A BRIDGE1 DIR 4 4 10 10 10 29 BRIDGE1 DIR 6 6 GND
BRIDGE1 PD 5 5 9 11 9 28 BRIDGE1 PD 7 7 GND
BRIDGE1 CLK 6 6 8 12 8 27 BRIDGE1 CLK 1 1 A1 A1 8 8 +24V
YC8 BRIDGE1 MODE 7 7 7 13 7 26 BRIDGE1 PH 3 3 A2 A2 9 9 +24V
1 1 NC BRIDGE1 REM 8 8 6 14 6 25 BRIDGE1 REM 1 5 5 A3 A3 10 10 +24V
GND 3 3 2 2 GND BRIDGE2 DIR 9 9 5 15 5 24 BRIDGE2 DIR 5 7 7 A4 A4
BRDS Vout 2
1
2
1
3 3 DECAL_HP_SENS BRIDGE2 PD 10 10 4 16 4 23 BRIDGE2 PD
To ISCPWB
2 2 B1 B1
5V 4 4 +5V BRIDGE2 CLK 11 11 3 17 3 22 BRIDGE2 CLK 4 4 B2 B2
BRIDGE2 MODE 12 12 2 18 2 21 BRIDGE2 PH 2 6 6 B3 B3 YC7
BRIDGE2 REM 13 13 1 19 1 20 BRIDGE2 REM 4 8 8 B4 B4 1 1 NC
YC5
/B 4 4 1 1 DECAL_B/ NC
/A 3 3 2 2 DECAL_A/
BRDM B 2 2 3 3 DECAL_B 13 13 NC
A 1 1 4 4 DECAL_A 14 14 GND
YC49 15 15 SLEEP1
BRMPWB 24VC 1 3
GND 2 2
/B 4 4 5 5 GUIDE_B/ SIG 3 1
/A 3 3 6 6 GUIDE_A/
BRGM B 2 2 7 7 GUIDE_B
A 1 1 8 8 GUIDE_A YC19
PF_CLK A1 A1 A12 A1 A1 A1
PF_SDO A2 A2 A11 A2 A2 A2
PF_SEL A3 A3 A10 A3 A3 A3
PF_SDI A4 A4 A9 A4 A4 A4
PF_RDY A5 A5 A8 A5 A5 A5
PF_PAUSE A6 A6 A7 A6 A6 A6
PF_CAS1_OPEN A7 A7 A6 A7 A7 A7
PF_CAS2_OPEN A8 A8 A5 A8 A8 A8
+3.3V4 A9 A9 A4 A9 A9 A9
GND A10 A10 A3 A10 A10 A10
Connector holder
Connector holder
GND A11 A11 A2 A11 A11 A11
A1 A12 A12 A12
Key counter YC24 PFMPWB
Relay
A13 A13
1 4 4 +24V1 A14 A14
(option) 2 3 3 DC1_COUNT TN_FAN1 A12 A12
B12
B11
B1
B2 B1 B1
KEY COUNTER 3 2 2 DC1_SET +24V1_SNS A13 A13 B10 B3 B2 B2
4 1 1 GND B9 B4 B3 B3
TN_FAN2 A14 A14 B8 B5 B4 B4
+24V1_SNS A15 A15 B7 B6 B5 B5
B6 B7 B6 B6
LVU_FAN1 A16 A16 B5 B8 B7 B7
Key card (option for JAPAN only) YC25 EPWB
+24V1 A17 A17 B4 B9 B8 B8
B3 B10 B9 B9
A1 A1 +5V LVU_FAN2 A18 A18 B2 B11 B10 B10
A2 A2 +5V +24V1 A19 A19 B1 B12 B11 B11
Connector holder
A3 A3 +5V B12 B12
A4 A4 +5V B13 B13
A5 A5 +5V B14 B14
A6 A6 +5V
A7 A7 +5V
Connector holder
A8 A8 +5V
A9 A9 COPY_ENABLE SIDE_CLK
KEY CARD A10 A10 +24V SIDE_SDO
B1
B2
B1
B2 2 1 -
MK-2 B1 B1 KEY7 SIDE_SEL B3 B3 1
Relay
2 + EXFM3
B2 B2 KEY6 SIDE_SDI B4 B4
B3 B3 KEY5 SIDE_RDY B5 B5
B4 B4 KEY4 SIDE_PAUSE B6 B6 1 1
4 1 2 +
B5 B5 KEY3 TANDEM_CAS1_OPEN B7 B7 2
Relay
2
3 2
Relay
1 - BLFM1
B6 B6 KEY2 TANDEM_CAS2_OPEN B8 B8
B7 B7 KEY1 Relay
SIDE_MULTI_OPEN B9 B9
B8 B8 KEY0 +3.3V4 B10 B10 3 2 1 2 +
B9 B9 GND GND B11 B11 4 1 2
Relay
1 - BLFM2
FG B10 B10 COUNT
+24V1 B12 B12
BELT_FAN1 B13 B13 2 1 -
1
Relay
2 + EXFM1
Coin vender (option) YC23 +24V1 B14 B14
1 1 1 1 +24V BELT_FAN2 B15 B15 1 2 -
2 2 2 2 GND 2
Relay
1 + EXFM2
3 3 3 3 GND
4 4 4 4 COIN_EN DLP_FAN1 B16 B16
5 5 5 5 FGND +24V1 B17 B17
Relay
6 6 6 6 FEED_COUNT
COIN VENDER 7 7 7 7 EJECT_COUNT
8 8 8 8 COPYING_SIG DLP_FAN2 B18 B18
9 9 9 9 TXD_COIN +24V1 B19 B19
10 10 10 10 GND
11 11 11 11 RXD_COIN 8 1
5 1 7 2 1 2 -
12 12 12 12 GND
4 2 6 3 2
Relay
1 + TFM1
Relay
3 3 5 4 1 2 -
2 4 4
Relay
5 2
Relay
1 + TFM2
YC54
3.3V2 1 1 2 1 3 6 2 1 +
TN_VIB 2 2 1 Relay 2 2 7 1
Relay
2 - TVM
1 8
2-4-35
2N3/2N2
No.2
YC11 YC2 YC5 YC1
SGND 64 64 1 1 SGND SGND 1 1 30 30 SGND YC3
CLK 63 63 2 2 CLK BD Bk 2 2 29 29 BD Bk GND 1 1 4 4 GND
SGND 62 62 3 3 SGND LSU_TH Bk 3 3 28 28 LSU_TH Bk TH 2 2 3 3 TH
SDI 61 61 4 4 SDI PALA_SIG P3_2Bk 4 4 27 27 PALA_SIG P3_2Bk BD 3 3 2 2 PD PDPWB-K YC10 YC1
SGND 60 60 5 5 SGND LDD_CS 2 Bk 5 5 26 26 LDD_CS 2 Bk +5V2 4 4 1 1 +5V SGND 1 1 30 30 SGND
YC2
SDO 59 59 6 6 SDO +5V 6 6 25 25 +5V BD C 2 2 29 29 BD C GND 1 1 4 4 GND
SGND 58 58 7 7 SGND +5V 7 7 24 24 +5V LSU_TH C 3 3 28 28 LSU_TH C TH 2 2 3 3 TH
MSET_N 57 57 8 8 MSET_N +5V 8 8 23 23 +5V - 4 4 27 27 - PD 3 3 2 2 PD PDPWB-C
SGND 56 56 9 9 SGND LDD_CS 1 Bk 9 9 22 22 LDD_CS 1 Bk - 5 5 26 26 - +5V2 4 4 1 1 +5V
IDD_CS_Y 55 55 10 10 IDD_CS_Y SDI1 Bk 10 10 21 21 SDI1 Bk +5V 6 6 25 25 +5V
EEPROM_CS_Y 54 54 11 11 EEPROM_CS_Y SDO1 Bk 11 11 20 20 SDO1 Bk +5V 7 7 24 24 +5V
IDD_CS_C 53 53 12 12 IDD_CS_C CLK1 Bk 12 12 19 19 CLK1 Bk +5V 8 8 23 23 +5V
EEPROM_CS_C 52 52 13 13 EEPROM_CS_C EEPROM CS 1 Bk 13 13 18 18 EEPROM CS 1 Bk LDD_CS 1 C 9 9 22 22 LDD_CS 1 C
IDD_CS_M 51 51 14 14 IDD_CS_M MSET_N 14 14 17 17 MSET_N SDI1 C 10 10 21 21 SDI1 C
EEPROM_CS_M 50 50 15 15 EEPROM_CS_M CUALM Bk 15 15 16 16 CUALM Bk SDO1 C 11 11 20 20 SDO1 C
IDD_CS_2_BK 49 49 16 16 IDD_CS_2_BK INT_ST 2 Bk 16 16 15 15 INT_ST 2 Bk CLK1 C 12 12 19 19 CLK1 C
EEPROM_CS_2_BK 48 48 17 17 EEPROM_CS_2_BK INT_ST 1 Bk 17 17 14 14 INT_ST 1 Bk EEPROM CS C 13 13 18 18 EEPROM CS C
IDD_CS_1_BK 47 47 18 18 IDD_CS_1_BK PALA_SIG P0 Bk 18 18 13 13 PALA_SIG P0 Bk MSET_N 14 14 17 17 MSET_N
EEPROM_CS_1_BK 46 46 19 19 EEPROM_CS_1_BK PALA_SIG P1 Bk 19 19 12 12 PALA_SIG P1 Bk APCPWB-K CUALM C 15 15 16 16 CUALM C APCPWB-C
SGND 45 45 20 20 SGND PALA_SIG P2 Bk 20 20 11 11 PALA_SIG P2 Bk - 16 16 15 15 -
INT_ST_Y 44 44 21 21 INT_ST 1 Y PALA_SIG P3 Bk 21 21 10 10 PALA_SIG P3 Bk INT_ST 1 C 17 17 14 14 INT_ST 1 C
PALA_STG_P0_Y 43 43 22 22 PALA_STG_P0_Y PALA_SIG P4 Bk 22 22 9 9 PALA_SIG P4 Bk PALA_SIG P0 C 18 18 13 13 PALA_SIG P0 C
PALA_STG_P1_Y 42 42 23 23 PALA_STG_P1_Y SDCLK Bk 23 23 8 8 SDCLK Bk PALA_SIG P1 C 19 19 12 12 PALA_SIG P1 C
PALA_STG P2_Y 41 41 24 24 PALA_STG P2_Y GAIN FIX Bk 24 24 7 7 GAIN FIX Bk PALA_SIG P2 C 20 20 11 11 PALA_SIG P2 C
GAIN_FIX_Y 40 40 25 25 GAIN_FIX_Y DATA_1N_Bk(LVDS) 25 25 6 6 DATA_1N_Bk(LVDS) PALA_SIG P3 C 21 21 10 10 PALA_SIG P3 C
SGND 39 39 26 26 SGND DATA_1P_Bk(LVDS) 26 26 5 5 DATA_1P_Bk(LVDS) PALA_SIG P4 C 22 22 9 9 PALA_SIG P4 C
DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) 38 38 27 27 DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) SGND 27 27 4 4 SGND SDCLK C 23 23 8 8 SDCLK C
DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) 37 37 28 28 DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) DATA_2N_Bk(LVDS) 28 28 3 3 DATA_2N_Bk(LVDS) GAIN FIX C 24 24 7 7 GAIN FIX C
SGND 36 36 29 29 SGND DATA_2P_Bk(LVDS) 29 29 2 2 DATA_2P_Bk(LVDS) DATA_1N_C(LVDS) 25 25 6 6 DATA_1N_C(LVDS)
INT_ST_ C 35 35 30 30 INT_ST 1 C SGND 30 30 1 1 SGND DATA_1P_C(LVDS) 26 26 5 5 DATA_1P_C(LVDS)
PALA_STG_P0_C 34 34 31 31 PALA_STG_P0_C SGND 27 27 4 4 SGND
PALA_STG_P1_C 33 33 32 32 PALA_STG_P1_C DATA_2N_C(LVDS) 28 28 3 3 DATA_2N_C(LVDS)
PALA_STG_P2_C 32 32 33 33 PALA_STG_P2_C YC6 YC2 DATA_2P_C(LVDS) 29 29 2 2 DATA_2P_C(LVDS)
GAIN_FIX_C 31 31 34 34 GAIN_FIX_C SDI_2 Bk 1 1 10 10 SDI_2 Bk SGND 30 30 1 1 SGND
SGND 30 30 35 35 SGND SDO_2 Bk 2 2 9 9 SDO_2 Bk
DATA_2N_C(LVDS) 29 29 36 36 DATA_2N_C(LVDS) CLK_2 Bk 3 3 8 8 CLK_2 Bk
DATA_2P_C(LVDS) 28 28 37 37 DATA_2P_C(LVDS) EEPROM CS 2_Bk 4 4 7 7 EEPROM CS 2_Bk
SGND 27 27 38 38 SGND SGND 5 5 6 6 SGND
INT_ST_M 26 26 39 39 INT_ST 1 M DATA_3N_Bk(LVDS) 6 6 5 5 DATA_3N_Bk(LVDS)
PALA_STG_P0_M 25 25 40 40 PALA_STG_P0_M DATA_3P_Bk(LVDS) 7 7 4 4 DATA_3P_Bk(LVDS)
PALA STG_P1_M
_ 24 24 41 41 PALA STG_P1_M
_ SGND 8 8 3 3 SGND
PALA_STG_P2_M 23 23 42 42 PALA_STG_P2_M DATA_4N_Bk(LVDS) 9 9 2 2 DATA_4N_Bk(LVDS)
GAIN_FIX_M 22 22 43 43 GAIN_FIX_M DATA_4P_Bk(LVDS) 10 10 1 1 DATA_4P_Bk(LVDS) YC9
SGND 21 21 44 44 SGND 24V1 1 1 5 5 +24V
DATA_2N_M(LVDS) 20 20 45 45 DATA_2N_M(LVDS) PGND 2 2 4 4 GND
DATA_2P_M(LVDS) 19 19 46 46 DATA_2P_M(LVDS) YC4 REM C 3 3 3 3 START/STOP
SGND 18 18 47 47 SGND 24V1 1 1 5 5 +24V LOCK C 4 4 2 2 LOCKED PM-C
DATA_3N_BK(LVDS) 17 17 48 48 DATA_3N_BK(LVDS) PGND 2 2 4 4 GND CLK C 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK
DATA_3P_BK(LVDS) 16 16 49 49 DATA_3P_BK(LVDS) REM Bk 3 3 3 3 START/STOP
SGND 15 15 50 50 SGND LOCK Bk 4 4 2 2 LOCKED PM-K
DATA_4N_BK(LVDS) 14 14 51 51 DATA_4N_BK(LVDS) CLK Bk 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK
DATA_4P_BK(LVDS) 13 13 52 52 DATA_4P_BK(LVDS)
SGND 12 12 53 53 SGND
PARA_SIG_P3_2_BK 11 11 54 54 PARA_SIG_P3_2 BK
INT_ST_2_BK 10 10 55 55 INT_ST 2 BK
INT_ST_1_BK 9 9 56 56 INT_ST 1 BK
PARA_SIG_P0_BK 8 8 57 57 PARA_SIG_P0_BK
PARA_SIG_P1_BK 7 7 58 58 PARA_SIG_P1_BK
PARA_SIG_P2_BK 6 6 59 59 PARA_SIG_P2_BK
GAIN_FIX_BK 5 5 60 60 GAIN_FIX_BK YC8 YC1
SGND 4 4 61 61 SGND SGND 1 1 30 30 SGND YC2 YC12 YC1
DATA_2N_BK(LVDS) 3 3 62 62 DATA_2N_BK(LVDS) BD M 2 2 29 29 BD M GND 1 1 4 4 GND SGND 1 1 30 30 SGND YC2
DATA_2P_ BK(LVDS) 2 2 63 63 DATA_2P_ BK(LVDS) LSU_TH M 3 3 28 28 LSU_TH M TH 2 2 3 3 TH BD Y 2 2 29 29 BD Y GND 1 1 4 4 GND
SGND 1 1 64 64 SGND - 4 4 27 27 - PD 3 3 2 2 PD PDPWB-M LSU_TH Y 3 3 28 28 LSU_TH Y TH 2 2 3 3 TH
PDPWB-Y
- 5 5 26 26 - +5V2 4 4 1 1 +5V - 4 4 27 27 - PD 3 3 2 2 PD
+5V 6 6 25 25 +5V - 5 5 26 26 - +5V2 4 4 1 1 +5V
YC12 YC3 +5V 7 7 24 24 +5V +5V 6 6 25 25 +5V
SGND 60 60 1 1 SGND +5V 8 8 23 23 +5V +5V 7 7 24 24 +5V
BD_Y 59 59 2 2 BD_Y LDD_CS 1 M 9 9 22 22 LDD_CS 1 M +5V 8 8 23 23 +5V
LSU_TH_Y 58 58 3 3 LSU_TH_Y SDI1 M 10 10 21 21 SDI1 M LDD_CS 1 Y 9 9 22 22 LDD_CS 1 Y
CUALM_Y 57 57 4 4 CUALM_Y SDO1 M 11 11 20 20 SDO1 M SDI1 Y 10 10 21 21 SDI1 Y
EPWB
PARA_SIG_P3_Y 56 56 5 5 PARA_SIG_P3_Y CLK1 M 12 12 19 19 CLK1 M SDO1 Y 11 11 20 20 SDO1 Y
PARA_SIG_P4_Y 55 55 6 6 PARA_SIG_P4_Y EEPROM CS M 13 13 18 18 EEPROM CS M CLK1 Y 12 12 19 19 CLK1 Y
SGND 54 54 7 7 SGND MSET_N 14 14 17 17 MSET_N EEPROM CS Y 13 13 18 18 EEPROM CS Y
SDCLK_Y 53 53 8 8 SDCLK_Y CUALM M 15 15 16 16 CUALM M MSET_N 14 14 17 17 MSET_N
SGND 52 52 9 9 SGND - 16 16 15 15 - CUALM Y 15 15 16 16 CUALM Y
DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) 51 51 10 10 DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) INT_ST 1 M 17 17 14 14 INT_ST 1 M APCPWB-M - 16 16 15 15 -
DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) 50 50 11 11 DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) PALA_SIG P0 M 18 18 13 13 PALA_SIG P0 M INT_ST 1 Y 17 17 14 14 INT_ST 1 Y
SGND 49 49 12 12 SGND _
PALA SIG P1 M 19 19 12 12 _
PALA SIG P1 M PALA_SIG P0 Y 18 18 13 13 PALA_SIG P0 Y APCPWB-Y
REM_Y 48 48 13 13 REM_Y PALA_SIG P2 M 20 20 11 11 PALA_SIG P2 M PALA_SIG P1 Y 19 19 12 12 PALA_SIG P1 Y
LOCK_Y 47 47 14 14 LOCK_Y PALA_SIG P3 M 21 21 10 10 PALA_SIG P3 M PALA_SIG P2 Y 20 20 11 11 PALA_SIG P2 Y
CLK_Y 46 46 15 15 CLK_Y PALA_SIG P4 M 22 22 9 9 PALA_SIG P4 M PALA_SIG P3 Y 21 21 10 10 PALA_SIG P3 Y
SGND 45 45 16 16 SGND SDCLK M 23 23 8 8 SDCLK M PALA_SIG P4 Y 22 22 9 9 PALA_SIG P4 Y
BD_C 44 44 17 17 BD_C GAIN FIX M 24 24 7 7 GAIN FIX M SDCLK Y 23 23 8 8 SDCLK Y
LSU_TH_C 43 43 18 18 LSU_TH_C DATA_1N_M(LVDS) 25 25 6 6 DATA_1N_M(LVDS) GAIN FIX Y 24 24 7 7 GAIN FIX Y
CUALM_C 42 42 19 19 CUALM_C DATA_1P_M(LVDS) 26 26 5 5 DATA_1P_M(LVDS) DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) 25 25 6 6 DATA_1N_Y(LVDS)
PARA SIG_P3_C
_ 41 41 20 20 PARA SIG_P3_C
_ SGND 27 27 4 4 SGND DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) 26 26 5 5 DATA_1P_Y(LVDS)
PARA_SIG_P4_C 40 40 21 21 PARA_SIG_P4_C DATA_2N_M(LVDS) 28 28 3 3 DATA_2N_M(LVDS) SGND 27 27 4 4 SGND
SGND 39 39 22 22 SGND DATA_2P_M(LVDS) 29 29 2 2 DATA_2P_M(LVDS) DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) 28 28 3 3 DATA_2N_Y(LVDS)
SDCLK_C 38 38 23 23 SDCLK_C SGND 30 30 1 1 SGND DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) 29 29 2 2 DATA_2P_Y(LVDS)
SGND 37 37 24 24 SGND SGND 30 30 1 1 SGND
DATA_1N_C(LVDS) 36 36 25 25 DATA_1N_C(LVDS)
DATA_1P_C(LVDS) 35 35 26 26 DATA_1P_C(LVDS)
SGND 34 34 27 27 SGND
REM_C 33 33 28 28 REM_C
LOCK_C 32 32 29 29 LOCK_C YC7 YC11
CLK_C 31 31 30 30 CLK_C 24V1 1 1 5 5 +24V 24V1 1 1 5 5 +24V
SGND 30 30 31 31 SGND PGND 2 2 4 4 GND PGND 2 2 4 4 GND
BD_M 29 29 32 32 BD_M REM M 3 3 3 3 START/STOP REM Y 3 3 3 3 START/STOP
LSU_TH_M 28 28 33 33 LSU_TH_M LOCK M 4 4 2 2 LOCKED PM-M LOCK Y 4 4 2 2 LOCKED PM-Y
CUALM_M 27 27 34 34 CUALM_M CLK M 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK CLK Y 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK
PARA_SIG_P3_M 26 26 35 35 PARA_SIG_P3_M
PARA_SIG_P4_M 25 25 36 36 PARA_SIG_P4_M
SGND 24 24 37 37 SGND
SDCLK_M 23 23 38 38 SDCLK_M
SGND 22 22 39 39 SGND
DATA_1N_M(LVDS) 21 21 40 40 DATA_1N_M(LVDS)
DATA_1P_M(LVDS) 20 20 41 41 DATA_1P_M(LVDS)
SGND 19 19 42 42 SGND LSURPWB
REM_M 18 18 43 43 REM_M
LOCK_M 17 17 44 44 LOCK_M
CLK_M 16 16 45 45 CLK_M
SGND 15 15 46 46 SGND
BD_BK 14 14 47 47 BD_BK
LSU_TH_BK 13 13 48 48 LSU_TH_BK YC1 YC10
CUALM_BK 12 12 49 49 CUALM_BK +24V1 1 1 1 1 +24V1
PARA_SIG_P3_BK 11 11 50 50 PARA_SIG_P3_BK +24V1 2 2 2 2 +24V1 PSPWB
PARA_SIG_P4_BK 10 10 51 51 PARA_SIG_P4_BK GND 3 3 3 3 GND
SGND 9 9 52 52 SGND GND 4 4 4 4 GND
SDCLK_BK 8 8 53 53 SDCLK_BK
SGND 7 7 54 54 SGND +5V 5 5
DATA_1N_BK(LVDS) 6 6 55 55 DATA_1N_BK(LVDS) +5V 6 6
DATA_1P_BK(LVDS) 5 5 56 56 DATA_1P_BK(LVDS) GND 7 7
SGND 4 4 57 57 SGND GND 8 8 YC15
REM_BK 3 3 58 58 REM_BK +3.3V 9 9 6 6 +5V_AN
LOCK_BK 2 2 59 59 LOCK_BK GND 10 10 5 5 +5V_AN
CLK_BK 1 1 60 60 CLK_BK 4 4 GND
3 3 GND
2 2 +3.3V2
1 1 GND EPWB
YC21
2 1 2 2 CW
LSUCM 1
Relay
2 1 1 CCW
2-4-36
2N3/2N2
No.3
YC16
1 1 NC
2 2 NC YC9 YC1 Developer unit K
3 3 NC TPD_TEMP_BK 1 1 1 1 TPD_TEMP
4 4 NC DLP_VCONT_BK_1 2 2 2 2 DLP_VCONT
TPD_BK_1 3 3 3 3 TPD_1
2 2 5 5 FRONT_OPEN TN_CLK_BK 4 4 4 4 TN_CLK
FRCSW 1 1 6 6 GND GND 5 5 5 5 GND TS-K
DLP_ADR1_BK 6 6 6 6 DLP_ADR1
7 7 24V DLP_ADR0_BK 7 7 7 7 DLP_ADR0
8 8 LSU_FAN_OUT FRPWB EEP_SDA1 8 8 8 8 EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1 9 9 9 9 EEP_SCL1
3.3V2 10 10 10 10 3.3V2
9 9 CL_MOT1
10 10 CL_MOT2
3V 11 11 2 2
TR C 1 4 1 10 11 11 VIB_MOT 12 12 1 1 VM-K
E 2 3 2 9 12 12 WTNR_SET
WTS1 K 3
Relay
2 3 8 13 13
LED A 4 1 4 7 14 14 5V
WTNR_FULL YC7
WTDSW 2 2 5
Relay
6 15 15 WTNR_LED 3.3V2 1 1 6 6 +3.3V Drum unit K
1 1 6 5 16 16 5V_LED EEP_SCL1 2 2 5 5 EEP SCL
EEP_SDA1 3 3 4 4 EEP SDA
TR C 1 4 7 4 17 17 5V GND 4 4 3 3 GND DRPWB-K
E 2 3 8 3 18 18 WTNR_NEAR DRM_ADR0_Bk 5 5 2 2 A0
WTS2 K 3
Relay
2 9 2 19 19 WTNR_LED DRM_ADR1_Bk 6 6 1 1 A1
LED A 4 1 10 1 20 20 5V_LED
24V 7 7 2 2 DRM1 ERASER (+)
Developer unit Y YC1 YC15 ERS_Bk_REM 8 8 1 1 ERS1 DR (-) CL-K
TPD_TEMP 1 1 1 1 TPD_TEMP_Y
DLP_VCONT 2 2 2 2 DLP_VCONT_Y_1
TPD_1 3 3 3 3 TPD_Y_1
TN_CLK 4 4 4 4 TN_CLK_Y 5V 9
TS-Y GND 5 5 5 5 GND DRM_INDEX_Bk 10
DLP_ADR1 6 6 6 6 DLP_ADR1_Y GND 11
DLP_ADR0 7 7 7 7 DLP_ADR0_Y
EEP_SDA1 8 8 8 8 EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1 9 9 9 9 EEP_SCL1
3.3V2 10 10 10 10 3.3V2 YC18
LSU_FAN_REM 1 1 8 1 2 1 -
24V 2 2 7 2 1 Relay 2 + LSUFM-K
2 2 11 11 3V
VM-Y 1 1 12 12 VIB_MOT YC2 YC1 LSU_FAN_REM 3 3 6 3 2 1 -
+3.3V1 10 10 1 1 +3.3V1 24V 4 4 5 4 1 Relay 2 + LSUFM-M
+3.3V2 9 9 2 2 +3.3V2 Relay
YC14 +5V 8 8 3 3 +5V LSU_FAN_REM 5 5 4 5 2 1 -
+3.3V 6 6 1 1 3.3V2 +24V 7 7 4 4 +24V 24V 6 6 3 6 1 Relay 2 + LSUFM-C
Drum unit Y EEP SCL 5 5 2 2 EEP_SCL1 +24V 6 6 5 5 +24V
EEP SDA 4 4 3 3 EEP_SDA1 GND 5 5 6 6 GND LSU_FAN_REM 7 7 2 7 2 1 -
DRPWB-Y GND 3 3 4 4 GND GND 4 4 7 7 GND 24V 8 8 1 8 1
Relay
2 + LSUFM- Y
A0 2 2 5 5 DRM_ADR0_Y GND 3 3 8 8 GND
A1 1 1 6 6 DRM_ADR1_Y GND 2 2 9 9 GND
GND 1 1 10 10 GND
EPWB
DRM1 ERASER (+) 2 2 7 7 24V YC7 YC3
CL-Y ERS1 DR (-) 1 1 8 8 ERS_Y_REM GND 1 1 1 1 GND
WTNR_SET/NEAR 2 2 2 2 WTNR_SET/NEAR
INTER_LOCK 3 3 3 3 INTER_LOCK
5V IH CORE_SENS
_ 4 4 4 4 IH CORE_SENS
_
DRM_INDEX_Y IH_CORE_MOT_REM 5 5 5 5 IH_CORE_MOT_REM
GND IH_CORE_CLK 6 6 6 6 IH_CORE_CLK
WTNR_LED 7 7 7 7 WTNR_LED
IH_COIL_FAN_ALM 8 8 8 8 IH_COIL_FAN_ALM
YC10 IH_COIL_FAN_H 9 9 9 9 IH_COIL_FAN_H
Developer unit C YC1 YC13 YC2 IH_COIL_FAN_L 10 10 10 10 IH_COIL_FAN_L
TPD_TEMP 1 1 1 1 TPD_TEMP_C GND 1 1 1 1 GND EXIT_FAN 11 11 11 11 EXIT_FAN
DLP_VCONT 2 2 2 2 DLP_VCONT_C_1 DRM_INDEX_Bk 2 2 2 2 DRM_INDEX_Bk VIB_MOT_REM 12 12 12 12 VIB_MOT_REM
TPD_1 3 3 3 3 TPD_C_1 ERS_Bk_REM 3 3 3 3 ERS_Bk JUNC_SOL_REM 13 13 13 13 JUNC_SOL_REM
TN_CLK 4 4 4 4 TN_CLK_C TPD_Bk_1 4 4 4 4 TPD_Bk_1 JUNC_SOL_RET 14 14 14 14 JUNC_SOL_RET
TS-C GND 5 5 5 5 GND DLP_VCONT_Bk_1 5 5 5 5 DLP_VCONT_Bk_1 GND 15 15 15 15 GND
DLP_ADR1 6 6 6 6 DLP_ADR1_C TPD_TEMP_Bk 6 6 6 6 TPD_TEMP_Bk EXIT_PAPE_SENS 16 16 16 16 EXIT_PAPE_SENS
DLP_ADR0 7 7 7 7 DLP_ADR0_C GND 7 7 7 7 GND EXIT_FEED_SENS 17 17 17 17 EXIT_FEED_SENS
EEP_SDA1 8 8 8 8 EEP_SDA1 DRM_INDEX_M 8 8 8 8 DRM_INDEX_M SB_MOT_REM 18 18 18 18 SB_MOT_REM
EEP_SCL1 9 9 9 9 EEP_SCL1 ERS_M_REM 9 9 9 9 ERS_M SB_MOT_PH 19 19 19 19 SB_MOT_PH
3.3V2 10 10 10 10 3.3V2 TPD_M_1 10 10 10 10 TPD_M_1 SB_MOT_CLK 20 20 20 20 SB_MOT_CLK
DLP_VCONT_M_1 11 11 11 11 DLP_VCONT_M_1 SB_MOT_PD 21 21 21 21 SB_MOT_PD
TPD_TEMP_M 12 12 12 12 TPD_TEMP_M SB_MOT_DIR 22 22 22 22 SB_MOT_DIR
2 2 11 11 3V GND 13 13 13 13 GND GND 23 23 23 23 GND
VM-C 1 1 12 12 VIB_MOT DRM_INDEX_C 14 14 14 14 DRM_INDEX_C WTNR_FULL_CONT 24 24 24 24 WTNR_FULL_CONT
ERS_C_REM 15 15 15 15 ERS_C THOP_DIR 25 25 25 25 THOP_DIR
TPD_C_1 16 16 16 16 TPD_C_1 DLP_FAN_CLR_H 26 26 26 26 DLP_FAN_CLR_H
YC12 DLP_VCONT_C_1 17 17 17 17 DLP_VCONT_C_1 DLP_FAN_CLR_L 27 27 27 27 DLP_FAN_CLR_L
+3.3V 6 6 1 1 3.3V2 TPD_TEMP_C 18 18 18 18 TPD_TEMP_C WTNR_SET 28 28 28 28 WTNR_FULL
Drum unit C EEP SCL 5 5 2 2 EEP_SCL1 GND 19 19 19 19 GND WTNR_NEAR 29 29 29 29 WTNR_NEAR
EEP SDA 4 4 3 3 EEP_SDA1 TN_CLK 20 20 20 20 TN_CLK WTNR_VCONT 30 30 30 30 WTNR_VCONT
DRPWB-C GND 3 3 4 4 GND GND 21 21 21 21 GND GND 31 31 31 31 GND
A0 2 2 5 5 DRM_ADR0_C EEP_SCL1 22 22 22 22 EEP_SCL1 ROT_MOT_REM 32 32 32 32 ROT_MOT_REM
A1 1 1 6 6 DRM_ADR1_C GND 23 23 23 23 GND ROT_MOT_CLK 33 33 33 33 ROT_MOT_CLK
EEP_SDA1 24 24 24 24 EEP_SDA1 ROT MOT_PD
_ 34 34 34 34 ROT MOT_PD
_
GND 25 25 25 25 GND ROT_MOT_DIR 35 35 35 35 ROT_MOT_DIR
TPD_Y_1 26 26 26 26 TPD_Y_1 ROT_HP_SENS 36 36 36 36 ROT_HP_SENS
DRM1 ERASER (+) 2 2 7 7 24V DLP_VCONT_Y_1 27 27 27 27 DLP_VCONT_Y_1 THOP_MOT_Bk_REM 37 37 37 37 THOP_MOT_Bk_REM
CL-C ERS1 DR (-) 1 1 8 8 ERS_C_REM TPD TEMP_Y
_ 28 28 28 28 TPD TEMP_Y
_ THOP_MOT_M_REM 38 38 38 38 THOP_MOT_M_REM
ERS_Y_REM 29 29 29 29 ERS_Y THOP_MOT_C_REM 39 39 39 39 THOP_MOT_C_REM
DRM_INDEX_Y 30 30 30 30 DRM_INDEX_Y THOP_MOT_Y_REM 40 40 40 40 THOP_MOT_Y_REM
5V FRONT_OPEN 31 31 31 31 FRONT_OPEN GND 41 41 41 41 GND
DRM_INDEX_C GND 32 32 32 32 GND ENCODE_Bk 42 42 42 42 ENCODE_Bk
GND I2C_SCL 33 33 33 33 I2C_SCL ENCODE_M 43 43 43 43 ENCODE_M
GND 34 34 34 34 GND ENCODE_C 44 44 44 44 ENCODE_C
I2C_SDA 35 35 35 35 I2C_SDA ENCODE_Y 45 45 45 45 ENCODE_Y
YC1 YC11 GND 36 36 36 36 GND THOP_Bk 46 46 46 46 THOP_Bk
Developer unit M LSU_FAN_REM 37 37 37 37 LSU FAN_REM
_ THOP_M 47 47 47 47 THOP_M
TPD_TEMP 1 1 1 1 TPD_TEMP_M
DLP_VCONT 2 2 2 2 DLP_VCONT_M_1 CLEAN_MOT_LOCK 38 38 38 38 CLEAN_MOT_LOCK THOP_ C 48 48 48 48 THOP_ C
TPD_1 3 3 3 3 TPD_M_1 CLEAN_MOT_REM 39 39 39 39 CLEAN_MOT_REM THOP_Y 49 49 49 49 THOP_Y
TN_CLK 4 4 4 4 TN_CLK_M GND 40 40 40 40 GND GND 50 50 50 50 GND
GND 5 5 5 5 GND
TS-M DLP_ADR1 6 6 6 6 DLP_ADR1_M
DLP_ADR0 7 7 7 7 DLP_ADR0_M
EEP_SDA1 8 8 8 8 EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1 9 9 9 9 EEP_SCL1
3.3V2 10 10 10 10 3.3V2
2 2 11 11 3V
VM-M 1 1 12 12 VIB_MOT
YC10
Drum unit M +3.3V 6 6 1 1 3.3V2
EEP SCL 5 5 2 2 EEP_SCL1
EEP SDA 4 4 3 3 EEP_SDA1
DRPWB-M GND 3 3 4 4 GND
A0 2 2 5 5 DRM_ADR0_M
A1 1 1 6 6 DRM_ADR1_M
DRM1 ERASER (+) 2 2 7 7 24V
CL-M ERS1 DR (-) 1 1 8 8 ERS_M_REM
5V
DRM_INDEX_M
GND
2-4-37
2N3/2N2
No.4
FRPWB
RTPWB
YC8 YC6 YC1
5V_LED 10 24V 1 1 12 C31 C31 1 9 9 24V
WTNR_LED 9 DLP_FAN_B/M 2 2 11 C32 C32 2 8 8 DLP_FAN_B/M
WTNR_SP 8 24V 3 3 10 C33 C33 3 7 7 24V
5V 7 DLP_FAN_C/Y 4 4 9 C34 C34 4 6 6 DLP_FAN_C/Y
THOP_MOT_Bk_DIR 5 5 8 C35 C35 5 5 5 THOP_MOT_Bk_DIR
WTNR_NEAR 6 GND 6 6 7 C36 C36 6 4 4 GND
GND 5 GND 7 7 6 C37 C37 7 3 3 GND
5V_LED 4 GND 8 8 5 C38 C38 8 2 2 GND
WTNR_LED 3 4 C39 C39 9 1 1 NC
3 C40 C40 10
WTNR_FULL 2 2 C41 C41 11
5V 1 1 C42 C42 12
YC2
YC4
18 D43 D43 1 24V 1 1 2 1 +
5V 1 1
17 D44 D44 2 DLP_FAN_Bk 2 2 1 Relay 2 - DEVFM-K
LED1 2 2 16 D45 D45 3
15 D46 D46 4 24V 3 3 2 1 +
14 D47 D47 5 DLP_FAN_M 4 4 1 Relay 2 - DEVFM-M
13 D48 D48 6
5V 3 3
GND 9 9 12 D49 D49 7 3 3 GND 24V 5 5 2 1 +
LED2 4 4
ENCODE_Bk 10 10 11 D50 D50 8 2 2 SIG SRS-K DLP_FAN_C 6 6 1 Relay 2 - DEVFM-C
5V 11 11 10 D51 D51 9 1 1 +5V
24V 7 7 2 1 +
IH_COIL_FAN_ALM 5 5 3 1 S GND 12 12 9 D52 D52 10 3 3 GND DLP_FAN_Y 8 8 1
Relay
2 - DEVFM- Y
IH_COIL_FAN 6 6 2 Relay 2 - FUFFM ENCODE_M
24V 7 7 1 3 + 5V
13
14
13
14
8
7
D53
D54
D53
D54
11
12
2
1
2
1
SIG
+5V
SRS-M
24V 8 8 2 1 +
EXIT FAN 9 9 1
Relay
2 - EFFM GND
THOP_Bk
15 15 6 D55 D55 13 3 1 3 3 GND
5V
16
17
16
17
5
4
D56
D57
D56
D57
14
15
2
1
Relay 2
3
2
1
2
1
SIG
+5V
THS-K
YC17 GND 18 18 3 D58 D58 16 3 1 3 3 GND YC4
GND 1 1 3 1 3 3 GND THOP_M 19 19 2 D59 D59 17 2 Relay 2 2 2 SIG THS-M
IH_CORE_SENS 2 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 Vout IHCS 5V 20 20 1 D60 D60 18 1 3 1 1 +5V TH_MOT_Y_CCW 1 1 2 1
5V 3 3 1 3 1 1 5V TH_MOT_Y_CW 2 2 1 Relay 2 THM-Y
Relay
TH_MOT_C_CCW 3 3 2 1
IH_CORE B/ 4 4 4 1 B/ GND 21 21 10 A1 A1 1 3 1 3 3 GND TH_MOT_C_CW 4 4 1 Relay 2 THM-C
IH_CORE B 5 5 3 2 B THOP_Y 22 22 9 A2 A2 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 SIG THS-Y
IH_CORE A 6 6 2
Relay
3 A IHCM 5V 23 23 8 A3 A3 3 1 3 1 1 +5V TH_MOT_M_CCW 5 5 2 1
IH_CORE A/ 7 7 1 4 A/ TH_MOT_M_CW 6 6 1 Relay 2 THM-M
GND 24 24 7 A4 A4 4 3 1 3 3 GND
24V 8 8 THOP_C 25 25 6 A5 A5 5 2 Relay 2 2 2 SIG THS-C TH_MOT_Bk_CCW 7 7 2 1
NC 9 9 5V 26 26 5 A6 A6 6 1 3 1 1 +5V TH_MOT_Bk_CW 8 8 1
Relay
2 THM-K
GND 27 27 4 A7 A7 7 3 3 GND
ENCODE_Y 28 28 3 A8 A8 8 2 2 SIG SRS-Y
5V 29 29 2 A9 A9 9 1 1 +5V
1 A10 A10 10
9
8 FRPWB
7 GND 30 30 20 B11 B11 1 3 3 GND
ENCODE_C 31 31 19 B12 B12 2 2 2 SIG SRS-C
YC5 5V 32 32 18 B13 B13 3 1 1 +5V YC3
ROT_MOT A 1 1
ROT_MOT B 2 2 10 1 5V 33 33 17 B14 B14 4 8 8 5V
ROT_MOT A/ 3 3 9 2 Eject unit THOP_MOT_Y 34 34 16 B15 B15 5 7 7 THOP_MOT_Y
ROT_MOT B/ 4 4 8 3 THOP_MOT_C 35 35 15 B16 B16 6 6 6 THOP_MOT_C
7 4 THOP_MOT_M 36 36 14 B17 B17 7 5 5 THOP_MOT_M
GND 5 5 THOP_MOT_Bk 37 37 13 B18 B18 8 4 4 THOP_MOT_Bk
ROT_HP_SENS 6 6 6 5 THOP_MOT_M_DIR 38 38 12 B19 B19 9 3 3 THOP_MOT_M_DIR
5V 7 7 5 6 THOP_MOT_Y_DIR 39 39 11 B30 B30 10 2 2 THOP_MOT_Y_DIR
4 7 THOP_MOT_C_DIR 40 40 10 B21 B21 11 1 1 THOP_MOT_C_DIR
5 9 B22 B22 12 3 1 3 3 GND
3 8 6 8 B23 B23 13 2 Relay 2 2 2 SIG DEVSS
Connector holder
Connector holder
2 9 7 7 B24 B24 14 1 3 1 1 +5V
1 10 6 B25 B25 15
Relay
5 B26 B26 16
4 B27 B27 17
SB_MOT B/ 8 8 10 1 4 4 B/ 3 B28 B28 18
SB_MOT A/ 9 9 9 2 3 3 A/ 2 B29 B29 19
SB_MOT B 10 10 8 3 2 2 B EM 1 B30 B30 20
SB_MOT A 11 11 7 4 1 1 A
GND 12 12 6 5 3 3 GND
EXIT_FEED_SENS 13 13 5 6 2 2 Vout SBS YC20
5V 14 14 4 7 1 1 5V
GND 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 GND
GND 15 15 3 8 3 3 GND 24V 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 24V
EXIT_PAPER_SENS 16 16 2 9 2 2 Vout ES FG 3 3 3 Relay 3 3 3 3 FG WTM
5V 17 17 1 10 1 1 5V CLEAN_MOT_CLK 4 4 2 4 4 4 4 PMW
DIR 5 5 1 5 5 5 5 DIR
+24V1 18 18
JUNC_SOL_KYU 19 19
JUNC_SOL_FUK 20 20 3 1 COM
2
1
Relay 2
3
ACT
KEEP
FSSOL
YC19
3.3V1 1 1 4 1 4 1 +3.3V
I2C_SD A 2 2 3 Relay 2 3 2 SDA
GND 3 3 2 3 2 3 GND OTEMS
I2C_SC L 4 4 1 4 1 4 SCL
2-4-38
2N3/2N2
No.5
YC26
+5V A20 A20 A1 A1 1 1 5V
FSR_BLT_PLS A19 A19 A2 A2 2 2 Vout FUBLS Fuser unit
GND A18 A18 A3 A3 3 3 GND
+5V A17 A17 A4 A4 1 1 5V
FSR_RLS_SENS A16 A16 A5 A5 2 2 Vout FURS
GND A15 A15 A6 A6 3 3 GND
+5V A14 A14 A7 A7 1 1 5V
FSR_SIZE_SENS A13 A13 A8 A8 2 2 Vout FUES
GND A12 A12 A9 A9 3 3 GND
FSR_RLS_DR_CW A11 A11 A10 A10 1 2
FSR_RLS_DR_CCW A10 A10 A11 A11 2 Relay
1 FURM
FSR_FAN A9 A9
GND A8 A8
FSR_FAN_ALM A7 A7
EDGE_FAN A6 A6
GND A5 A5 A12 A12 1 2
EDGE_TH2 A4 A4 A13 A13 2 1 FTH6
A14 A14
A3 A3
GND A2 A2
Connector holder
HR_TH A1 A1 B12 B12
B13 B13
BRIDGE_FAN B20 B20 2 1 - B14 B14
+24V1 B19 B19 1
Relay
2 + BRFM
GND B18 B18 B1 B1 1 3 GND
MAIN_TH1 B17 B17 B2 B2 2 Relay 2 FSR_NCTH1 FTH1
MAIN_TH2 B16 B16 B3 B3 3 1 FSR_NCTH2
GUIDE_TH2 B15 B15 B4 B4 1 2
GND B14 B14 B5 B5 2
Relay
1 FTH3
GUIDE_TH1 B13 B13 B6 B6 1 2
GND B12 B12 B7 B7 2
Relay
1 FTH4
EDGE_TH B11 B11 B8 B8 1 2
GND B10 B10 B9 B9 2
Relay
1 FTH2
PRESS_TH B9 B9 B10 B10 1 2
GND B8 B8 B11 B11 2
Relay
1 FTH5
YC4
GND B7 B7 1 1 SGND
+3.3V2 B6 B6 2 2 Vcc 1 3 +
IH_HEAT_REM B5 B5 3 3 IH_REM 2 Relay 2 - FURFM
ROTATION B4 B4 4 4 ROTATION 3 1 S
IH_TXD B3 B3 5 5 RXD FIH
IH_RXD B2 B2 6 6 TXD YC9
PRESS_HEART_REM B1 B1 VS 1 1
YC10
COIL_COM 1 1
EPWB
FIHPWB YC6
+15V1 1 1 1 1 FTS1
+15V2 2 2 2 2
YC8
8 8 PRESS_REM YC5
7 7 +24V2 LIVE_OUT 1 1 3 3
3 6 ZEROC 2 2
2 5 GND NEUTRAL_OUT 3 3 4 4 FTS2
4 4 GND
3 3 FSR_RELAY
2 2 +24V YC1 120V model: 1 1
1 1 RELAY_24V IH_LIVE 1 1 1 From PSPWB (Inlet2)
IH_NEUTRAL 2 2 2
230V model:
From PSPWB (YC3)
FPWB1 1 1
FH
YC27
MAIN_HEAT_REM 1 1
PRESS_REM 2 2
+24V2 3 3
ZEROC 4 4
GND 5 5
GND 6 6
FSR_RELAY 7 7
+24V1 8 8
RELAY_24V 9 9
YC11
IH_PWB_FAN 1 3 1 3 +
GND
IH_PWB_ALM
2
3
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
-
S
IHFM
YC19
EXIT_REAR_FAN 1 2 1 2 -
+24V1 2 1 2
Relay
1 + ERFM
2-4-39
2N3/2N2
No.6
YC6 YC1
GND 1 1 64 64 GND
JOB_SET 2 2 63 63 JOB_SET Fuser drive unit
JOB_MOT_REM 3 3 62 62 JOB_MOT_REM
YC10
JOB MOT_CLK
_ 4 4 61 61 JOB MOT_CLK
_ GND 1 1
JOB_MOT_DIR 5 5 60 60 JOB_MOT_DIR M_TEMP 2 2
JOB_OPEN_SENS 6 6 59 59 JOB_OPEN_SENS
JOB_SOL_REM 7 7 58 58 JOB_SOL_REM YC18
GND 8 8 57 57 GND FSR_MOT_BRK 1 1 3.3V 3 3 5 5 +3.3V4 ID sensor
MAIN_HEAT_REM 9 9 56 56 MAIN_HEAT_REM FSR_MOT_DIR 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW REG_F_LED 4 4 4 4 LED_REF
PRESS_REM 10 10 55 55 PRESS_REM FSR_MOT_RDY 3 3 5 5 LD GND 5 5 3 3 GND IDS1
ZEROC 11 11 54 54 ZEROC FSR_MOT_CLK 4 4 4 4 CLOCK REG SENS_F_P
_ 6 6 2 2 IDS
FSR_RELAY 12 12 53 53 FSR_RELAY FSR_MOT_REM 5 5 3 3 START/STOP FUM REG_SENS_F_S 7 7 1 1 IDP
PRESS_REM 13 13 52 52 PRESS_REM GND 6 6 2 2 GND
EXIT REAR_FAN_L
_ 14 14 51 51 EXIT REAR_FAN_L
_ 24V2 7 7 1 1 +24V
EXIT_REAR_FAN_H 15 15 50 50 EXIT_REAR_FAN_H 3.3V 8 8 5 5 +3.3V4
GND 16 16 49 49 GND REG_R_LED 9 9 4 4 LED_REF
GND
FSR_MOT_REM
17
18
17
18
48
47
48
47
GND
FSR_MOT_REM
GND
REG_SENS_R_P
10
11
10
11
3
2
3
2
GND
IDS
IDS2
FSR_MOT_CLK 19 19 46 46 FSR_MOT_CLK REG_SENS_R_S 12 12 1 1 IDP
FSR MOT_RDY
_ 20 20 45 45 FSR_MOT_RDY CN1 CN2
FSR_MOT_DIR 21 21 44 44 FSR_MOT_DIR 11 11 SIG2 VCC 1
FSR_MOT_BRK 22 22 43 43 FSR_MOT_BRK 10 10 SIG1 S.GND 2 24V1 13 13 3 1 COM
GND 23 23 42 42 GND
YC13 9 9 SGND SIG_1 3 CLN_SOL_REM 14 14 2 Relay 2 ACT CLSOL
MPF_TABLE 24 24 41 41 MPF_TABLE 8 8 VCC VCC 4 CLN_SOL_RET 15 15 1 3 RET
MPF_WID1 25 25 40 40 MPF_WID1 TRANS_MOT_BRK 1 1 7 7 BRAKE S.GND 5
MPF_WID2 26 26 39 39 MPF_WID2 TRANS_MOT_DIR 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW SIG_2 6
MPF_WID3 27 27 38 38 MPF_WID3 TRANS_MOT_RDY 3 3 5 5 FG
MPF_LNG 28 28 37 37 MPF_LNG TRANS_MOT_CLK 4 4 4 4 VM
GND 29 29 36 36 GND TRANS_MOT_REM 5 5 3 3 START/STOP
MPF_PPR_SET 30 30 35 35 MPF_PPR_SET GND 6 6 2 2 PGND
MPF_LIFT_UP 31 31 34 34 MPF_LIFT_UP 24V2 7 7 1 1 +24V1
TRM
MPF_LIFT_DOWN 32 32 33 33 MPF_LIFT_DOWN GND 8 8 Job separator
MPF_JAM 33 33 32 32 MPF_JAM 24V2 9 9
MPF_CL 34 34 31 31 MPF_CL TANK_SET 10 10 JSMPWB
MPF_LIFT2 35 35 30 30 MPF_LIFT2
MPF_LIFT1 36 36 29 29 MPF_LIFT1
GND 37 37 28 28 GND YC8
TC_MOT_LOCK 38 38 27 27 TC_MOT_LOCK NC 1 YC2
TC_TONER_LED 39 39 26 26 TC_TONER_LED DLP_MOT_BK_DIR 2 GND 1 1 3 3 GND
TC TONER_FULL
_ 40 40 25 25 TC TONER_FULL
_ DLP_MOT_BK_RDY 3 YC20 YC1 JOB_OPEN_SENS 2 2 2 2 Vout JSES
TC_TONER_VCONT 41 41 24 24 TC_TONER_VCONT DLP_MOT_BK_CLK 4 JOB_SET 1 1 10 1 10 10 JOB_SET +5V1 3 3 1 1 5V
INTER_LOCK 42 42 23 23 INTER_LOCK DLP_MOT_BK_REM 5 GND 2 2 9 2 9 9 GND
DU2_PD 43 43 22 22 DU2_PD GND 6 GND 3 3 8 3 8 8 GND JOB_B/ 4 4 4 4 B/
DU2_CLK 44 44 21 21 DU2_CLK +24V1 7 JOB_MOT_REM 4 4 7 4 7 7 JOB_MOT_REM JOB_A/ 5 5 3 3 A/
DU2_REM_(CL_LOW) 45 45 20 20 DU2_REM_(CL_LOW) 24V1 5 5 6
Relay
5 6 6 24V1 JOB_B 6 6 2 2 B JSEM
GND 46 46 19 19 GND JOB_MOT_CLK 6 6 5 6 5 5 JOB_MOT_CLK JOB_A 7 7 1 1 A
DU_OPEN 47 47 18 18 DU_OPEN 5V 7 7 4 7 4 4 5V
DU_FAN 48 48 17 17 DU_FAN JOB_MOT_DIR 8 8 3 8 3 3 JOB_MOT_DIR
PRESS_MOT_REM1 49 49 16 16 PRESS_MOT_REM1 JOB_OPEN_SENS 9 9 2 9 2 2 JOB_OPEN_SENS +24V1 8 8 2 1 COM
PRESS_MOT_REM2 50 50 15 15 PRESS_MOT_REM2 JOB_SOL_REM 10 10 1 10 1 1 JOB_SOL_REM JOB_SOL_OUT 9 9 1 Relay 2 ACT JSFSSOL
PRESS_RLS_SENS 51 51 14 14 PRESS_RLS_SENS NC 11 11
DU_SENS 52 52 13 13 DU_SENS
BELT_JAM_SENS 53 53 12 12 BELT_JAM_SENS
GND 54 54 11 11 GND
CLN_SOL_RET 55 55 10 10 CLN_SOL_RET
CLN_SOL_REM 56 56 9 9 CLN_SOL_REM
REG SENS_R_S(BK)
_ 57 57 8 8 REG SENS_R_S(BK)
_
REG_SENS_R_P(BK) 58 58 7 7 REG_SENS_R_P(BK)
REG_R_LED 59 59 6 6 REG_R_LED
GND 60 60 5 5 GND
REG_SENS_F_S 61 61 4 4 REG_SENS_F_S
YC22
REG_SENS_F_P 62 62 3 3 REG_SENS_F_P REG_CL_REM 2
REG_F_LED 63 63 2 2 REG_F_LED YC9
GND 64 64 1 1 GND NC 1 24V2 1
DRM_MOT_BK_BRK 2
DRM_MOT_BK_DIR 3
YC5 YC2 DRM_MOT_BK_RDY 4
GND 1 1 50 50 GND DRM_MOT_BK_CLK 5
YC25
M_TEMP 2 2 49 49 M_TEMP DRM_MOT_BK_REM 6
LOOP_SENS 3 3 48 48 LOOP_SENS GND 7 REG_MOT_B/ 1 1 4 4 B/
GND 4 4 47 47 GND +24V2 8 REG_MOT_A/ 2 2 3 3 A/
EDGE_FAN_H 5 5 46 46 EDGE_FAN_H REG_MOT_B 3 3 2 2 B RM
DU1_MOT_PD 6 6 45 45 DU1_MOT_PD REG_MOT_A 4 4 1 1 A
DU1_MOT_CLK 7 7 44 44 DU1_MOT_CLK
DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H) 8 8 43 43 DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H)
GND 9 9 42 42 GND
EXIT_FAN 10 10 41 41 EXIT_FAN
DU_ENTER_SENS 11 11 40 40 DU_ENTER_SENS
TCON_SET 12 12 39 39 TCON_SET
GND 13 13 38 38 GND
TRANS_MOT_REM 14 14 37 37 TRANS_MOT_REM
TRANS_MOT_CLK 15 15 36 36 TRANS_MOT_CLK
TRANS_MOT_RDY 16 16 35 35 TRANS_MOT_RDY
TRANS_MOT_DIR 17 17 34 34 TRANS_MOT_DIR
TRANS_MOT_BRK 18 18 33 33 TRANS_MOT_BRK
GND 19 19 32 32 GND
DRM_MOT_BK_REM 20 20 31 31 DRM_MOT_BK_REM
DRM_MOT_BK_RDY 21 21 30 30 DRM_MOT_BK_RDY
DRM_MOT_BK_DIR 22 22 29 29 DRM_MOT_BK_DIR
DRM_MOT_BK_BRK 23 23 28 28 DRM_MOT_BK_BRK
GND 24 24 27 27 GND
GND 25 25 26 26 GND
GND 26 26 25 25 GND
GND 27 27 24 24 GND
GND 28 28 23 23 GND
GND 29 29 22 22 GND
DRM MOT_CLR_REM
_ 30 30 21 21 DRM MOT_CLR_REM
_
DRM_MOT_BK_CLR_CLK 31 31 20 20 DRM_MOT_BK_CLR_CLK
DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY 32 32 19 19 DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY
DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR 33 33 18 18 DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR
GND 34 34 17 17 GND
DLP_MOT_CLR_REM 35 35 16 16 DLP_MOT_CLR_REM
DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK 36 36 15 15 DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK
DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY 37 37 14 14 DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY
DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR 38 38 13 13 DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR
GND 39 39 12 12 GND
REG_MOT_PD 40 40 11 11 REG_MOT_PD
REG_MOT_CLK 41 41 10 10 REG_MOT_CLK
REG_MOT_REM(CL) 42 42 9 9 REG_MOT_REM(CL)
GND 43 43 8 8 GND
IH_PWB_FAN_L 44 44 7 7 IH_PWB_FAN_L
IH_PWB_FAN_H 45 45 6 6 IH_PWB_FAN_H
IH PWB_FAN_ALM
_ 46 46 5 5 IH PWB_FAN_ALM
_
POWER_OFF_24V1 47 47 4 4 POWER_OFF_24V1 FPWB1
DRM_HEAT_REM 48 48 3 3 DRM_HEAT_REM
POWER_OFF_5V 49 49 2 2 POWER_OFF_5V
GND 50 50 1 1 GND
EPWB
2-4-40
2N3/2N2
No.7
YC16
DU1_B/ 1 1 4 4 B/
DU1_A/ 2 2 3 3 A/
DU1_B 3 3 2 2 B DUM1
FPWB1 DU1_A 4 4 1 1 A
EDGE_FAN_REM 5 5
24V2 6 6
EDGE_FAN_REM 7 7
24V2 8 8
YC23 YC13
3.3V 12 12 1 C31 C31 12 1 1 3.3V
LOOP_SENS 11 11 2 C32 C32 11 2 2 LOOP_SENS
EDGE_FAN_REM 10 10 3 C33 C33 10 3 3 EDGE_FAN_REM
DU1_A 9 9 4 C34 C34 9 4 4 DU1_A YC11
DU1_B 8 8 5 C35 C35 8 5 5 DU1_B GND 1 1 3 3 GND
DU1_A/
DU1_B/
7
6
7
6
6
7
C36
C37
C36
C37
7
6
6
7
6
7
DU1_A/
DU1_B/
DU_ENTER_SENS
5V
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
Vout
5V
DUS1
GND 5 5 8 C38 C38 5 8 8 GND
DU_CL_UPPER_REM 4 4 9 C39 C39 4 9 9 DU_CL_UPPER_REM EXIT_FAN_REM 4 4 2 1 -
24V2 3 3 10 C40 C40 3 10 10 24V2 24V2 5 5 1
Relay
2 + EFM1
EXIT_FAN 2 2 11 C41 C41 2 11 11 EXIT_FAN
DU_ENTER_SENS 1 1 12 C42 C42 1 12 12 DU_ENTER_SENS EXIT_FAN_REM 6 6 2 1 -
24V2 7 7 1
Relay
2 + EFM2
24V2 8 8
YC17 YC12
GND 20 20 1 B11 B11 20 1 1 GND MP tray DU_CL_UPPER_REM 9 9
GND 19 19 2 B12 B12 19 2 2 GND
MPF_TABLE 18 18 3 B13 B13 18 3 3 MPF_TABLE
MPF_WID1 17 17 4 B14 B14 17 4 4 MPF_WID1 YC3 YC10
MPF_WID2 16 16 5 B15 B15 16 5 5 MPF_WID2 MPF_LIFT_DR_B 16 16 1 16 1 2 LOOP_SENS 1 1 1 1 OUT
MPF_WID3 15 15 6 B16 B16 15 6 6 MPF_WID3 MPF_LIFT_DR_A 15 15 2 15 2
Relay
1 MPLM GND 2 2 2 2 GND LPS
MPF_LNG 14 14 7 B17 B17 14 7 7 MPF_LNG 5V 3 3 3 3 5V
LED_3.3V3 13 13 8 B18 B18 13 8 8 LED_3.3V3 24V2 14 14 3 14 1 1
MPF_PPR_SET 12 12 9 B19 B19 12 9 9 MPF_PPR_SET 2 2 MPPFCL 3.3V 4 4
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS 11 11 10 B20 B20 11 10 10 MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPF_CL_REM 13 13 4 13 3 3 REG_BK_LED 5 5
MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS 10 10 11 B21 B21 10 11 11 MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS GND 6 6
MPF_JAM_SENS 9 9 12 B22 B22 9 12 12 MPF_JAM_SENS 5V 12 12 5 12 1 1 5V REG_BK_SENS1_P 7 7
MPF_CL_REM 8 8 13 B23 B23 8 13 13 MPF_CL_REM MPF_JAM_SENS 11 11 6 11 2 2 Vout MPFS REG_BK_SENS1_S 8 8
24V2 7 7 14 B24 B24 7 14 14 24V2 GND 10 10 7 10 3 3 GND
MPF_LIFT_MOT_A 6 6 15 B25 B25 6 15 15 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A Relay GND 9 9
MPF_LIFT_MOT_B 5 5 16 B26 B26 5 16 16 MPF_LIFT_MOT_B 5V 9 9 8 9 1 1 5V BELT_JAM_SENS 10 10
24V2 4 4 17 B27 B27 4 17 17 24V2 MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS 8 8 9 8 2 2 Vout MPLS2 5V 11 11
CLN_SOL_REM 3 3 18 B28 B28 3 18 18 CLN_SOL_REM GND 7 7 10 7 3 3 GND
GND 2 2 19 B29 B29 2 19 19 GND
GND 1 1 20 B30 B30 1 20 20 GND 5V 6 6 11 6 1 1 5V YC14
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS 5 5 12 5 2 2 Vout MPLS1 GND
PRESS_RLS_SENS
1 1 3 3 GND
GND 4 4 13 4 3 3 GND 2 2 2 2 Vout TRRS
Drawer
Drawer
5V 3 3 1 1 5V
MPF_PPR_SET 3 3 14 3 1 1 Vout
GND 2 2 15 2 2 2 GND MPPS PRESS_RLS_REM1 4 4 2 1
LED_3.3V3 1 1 16 1 3 3 3.3V PRESS_RLS_REM2 5 5 1
Relay
2 TRRM
YC14 YC1 NC 6 6
GND 18 18 1 D43 D43 18 1 1 GND
DU2_A 17 17 2 D44 D44 17 2 2 DU2_A
DU2_B 16 16 3 D45 D45 16 3 3 DU2_B YC4
DU2_A/ 15 15 4 D46 D46 15 4 4 DU2_A/
YC2 24V2 1
DU2_B/ 14 14 5 D47 D47 14 5 5 DU2_B/ MPF_TABLE 9 9 1 9 1 1 Vout ID_SOL_REM 2
DU_OPEN_SW 13 13 6 D48 D48 13 6 6 DU_OPEN_SW GND 8 8 2 8 2 2 GND MPTSW
DU_CL_LOWER_REM 12 12 7 D49 D49 12 7 7 DU_CL_LOWER_REM
DU_FAN 11 11 8 D50 D50 11 8 8 DU_FAN MPF_WID1 7 7 3 7 1 1 WID1
24V2 10 10 9 D51 D51 10 9 9 24V2 GND 6 6 4 6 2 2 GND
PRESS_MOT_REM2 9 9 10 D52 D52 9 10 10 PRESS_MOT_REM2 MPF_WID2 5 5 5 Relay 5 3 3 WID2 MPPWSW
PRESS_MOT_REM1 8 8 11 D53 D53 8 11 11 PRESS_MOT_REM1 MPF_WID3 4 4 6 4 4 WID3
5V 7 7 12 D54 D54 7 12 12 5V
PRESS_RLS_SENS 6 6 13 D55 D55 6 13 13 PRESS_RLS_SENS 5V 3 3 7 3 1 3 1 1 5V
DU_SENS 5 5 14 D56 D56 5 14 14 DU_SENS MPF_LNG 2 2 8 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 Vout MPPLSW
BELT_JAM_SENS 4 4 15 D57 D57 4 15 15 BELT_JAM_SENS GND 1 1 9 1 3 1 3 3 GND
REG_BK_SENS1_S 3 3 16 D58 D58 3 16 16 REG_BK_SENS1_S
REG_BK_SENS1_P 2 2 17 D59 D59 2 17 17 REG_BK_SENS1_P
REG_BK_LED 1 1 18 D60 D60 1 18 18 REG_BK_LED YC9
GND 1 1 3 3 GND
DU_SENS 2 2 2 2 Vout DUS2
YC5 5V 3 3 1 1 5V
A1 A1 1 TANK_SET
YC6
A2 A2 2 +24V2 24V2 7
A3 A3 3 GND GND 6 YC7
A4 A4 4 +24V2 TRANS_MOT_REM 5 24V2 1 1
A5 A5 5 GND TRANS_MOT_CLK 4
A6 A6 6 TRANS_MOT_REM TRANS_MOT_RDY 3 DU_CL2_REM 2 2
A7 A7 7 TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_DIR 2
A8 A8 8 TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_BRK 1 DU_OPEN 3 3 2 2
A9 A9 9 TRANS_MOT_DIR GND 4 4 1 1 DUCSW
A10 A10 10 TRANS_MOT_BRK
DU2_B/ 5 5 4 4 B/
DU2_A/ 6 6 3 3 A/
DU2_B 7 7 2 2 B DUM2
DU2_A 8 8 1 1 A
RYPWB
2-4-41
2N3/2N2
No.8
Middle guide unit
YC7
YC12 YC11 MID_B/ 1 1 13 1 4 1 B/
+24V2 1 1 6 6 +24V2 MID_A/ 2 2 12 2 3 2 A/
+24V2 2 2 5 5 +24V2 MID_B 3 3 11 3 2
Relay
3 B MM
+5V 3 3 4 4 +5V MID_A 4 4 10 4 1 4 A
GND 4 4 3 3 GND
GND 5 5 2 2 GND
GND 6 6 1 1 GND BEND_SENS 5 5 9 5 YC13
GND 6 6 8 6 5V1 3 3 1
5V 7 7 7 7 GND 2 2 2 From CRPWB
Relay
CURRENT_SIG 1 1 3
GND 8 8 6 8 3 3 GND
FEED1_SENS
5V
9
10
9
10
5
4
9
10
2
1
2
1
Vout
5V
MS
GND 11 11 3 11 3 3 GND
REG_SENS 12 12 2 12 2 2 Vout RS Paper feed drive unit
5V 13 13 1 13 1 1 5V
FPWB1 MID_CL_REM 14 14
24V2 15 15 YC2
FEED_MOT_GAIN 1 1
FEED_MOT_DIR 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW
FEED_MOT_RDY 3 3 5 5 LD
FEED_MOT_CLK 4 4 4 4 CLOCK PFM
YC5 FEED_MOT_REM 5 5 3 3 START/STOP
V-FEED_CL_REM 3 1 3 3 GND 6 6 2 2 GND
24V2 2 2
2
1
2
1
PCCL 24V2 7 7 1 1 +24V
NC 1 3
YC10
ASIST_CL1 1 1 3 3
Primary paper feed unit 24V2 2 2
2
1
2
1
ASCL1
YC8
24V2 1 1 12 1
YC4 YC1 PICK_SOL1_REM 2 2 11 2 YC12
GND 1 1 1 1 GND PICK_SOL1_RET 3 3 10 3 ASIST_CL2 1 1 3 3
FEED_MOT_REM 2 2 2 2 FEED_MOT_REM 2 2 ASCL2
FEED_MOT_CLK 3 3 3 3 FEED_MOT_CLK 24V2 2 2 1 1
FEED MOT_RDY
_ 4 4 4 4 FEED MOT_RDY
_ LED_5V 4 4 9 4 3 3 5V
FEED_MOT_DIR 5 5 5 5 FEED_MOT_DIR GND 5 5 8 5 2 2 GND PS1
FEED_CL1_REM 6 6 6 6 FEED_CL1_REM CAS1_EMPTY_SENS 6 6 7 6 1 1 Vout
YC4
Relay
FEED_CL2_REM 7 7 7 7 FEED_CL2_REM
ASIST_CL2 8 8 8 8 ASIST_CL2 FEED_CL1_REM 1 1 3 3
LIFT_MOT2_REM 9 9 9 9 LIFT_MOT2_REM LED_5V 7 7 6 7 3 3 5V 2 2 PFCL1
GND 10 10 10 10 GND GND
CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS
8 8 5 8 2 2 GND LS1 24V2 2 2 1 1
LIFT_MOT1_REM1 11 11 11 11 LIFT_MOT1_REM1 9 9 4 9 1 1 Vout
CAS2_WID 12 12 12 12 CAS2_WID FEED_CL2_REM 3 3 3 3
CAS2_LNG3 13 13 13 13 CAS2_LNG3 2 2 PFCL2
CAS2_LNG2 14 14 14 14 CAS2_LNG2 5V 10 10 3 10 3 3 5V 24V2 4 4 1 1
CAS2_LNG1 15 15 15 15 CAS2_LNG1 CAS1_P0_SENS 11 11 2 11 2 2 Vout FS1
CAS1_WID CAS1_WID
Connector holder
16 16 16 16 GND 12 12 1 12 1 1 GND
CAS1_LNG3 17 17 17 17 CAS1_LNG3
CAS1_LNG2 18 18 18 18 CAS1_LNG2
CAS1_LNG1 19 19 19 19 CAS1_LNG1 24V2 13 1 12 1
GND 20 20 20 20 GND PICK_SOL2_REM 14 2 11 2
CAS2_QUANT2 21 21 21 21 CAS2_QUANT2 PICK_SOL2_RET 15 3 10 3
CAS2_QUANT1 22 22 22 22 CAS2_QUANT1
CAS1_QUANT2 23 23 23 23 CAS1_QUANT2
CAS1_QUANT1 24 24 24 24 CAS1_QUANT1 LED_5V 16 4 9 4 3 3 5V
LIFT_MOT1_LOCK LIFT_MOT1_LOCK YC3
LIFT_MOT2_LOCK
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26 LIFT_MOT2_LOCK
GND
CAS2_EMPTY_SENS
17
18
5
6
8
7
Relay 5
6
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PS2 CAS1_LNG1 1 1 6 1 4 4 SW1
CURRENT_SIG 27 27 27 27 CURRENT_SIG CAS1_LNG2 2 2 5 2 3 3 SW2
V-FEED_CL 28 28 28 28 V-FEED_CL GND 3 3 4 3 2 2 COM PLSW1
COVER_OPEN 29 29 29 29 COVER_OPEN LED_5V 19 7 6 7 3 3 5V CAS1_LNG3 4 4 3 Relay 4 1 1 SW3
FEED2_SENS 30 30 30 30 FEED2_SENS GND 20 8 5 8 2 2 GND LS2
CAS1_P0 31 31 31 31 CAS1_P0 CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS 21 9 4 9 1 1 Vout CAS1_WID 5 5 2 5 2 2
CAS1_LIFT_UP 32 32 32 32 CAS1_LIFT_UP GND 6 6 1 6 1 1 PWSW1
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
CAS1_EMPTY 34 34 34 34 CAS1_EMPTY 5V 22 10 3 10 3 3 5V
PICK_SOL1_RET 35 35 35 35 PICK_SOL1_RET CAS2_P0_SENS 23 11 2 11 2 2 Vout FS2 CAS2_LNG1 7 7 6 1 4 4 SW1
PICK_SOL1_REM 36 36 36 36 PICK_SOL1_REM GND 24 12 1 12 1 1 GND CAS2_LNG2 8 8 5 2 3 3 SW2
CAS2_P0 37 37 37 37 CAS2_P0 GND 9 9 4 3 2 2 COM PLSW2
CAS2_LIFT_UP 38 38 38 38 CAS2_LIFT_UP CAS2_LNG3 10 10 3 Relay 4 1 1 SW3
CAS2_EMPTY 39 39 39 39 CAS2_EMPTY
PICK_SOL2_RET 40 40 40 40 PICK_SOL2_RET CAS2_WID 11 11 2 5 2 2
PICK_SOL2_REM 41 41 41 41 PICK_SOL2_REM GND 12 12 1 6 1 1 PWSW2
GND 42 42 42 42 GND
REG_SENS 43 43 43 43 REG_SENS
FEED1_SENS 44 44 44 44 FEED1_SENS LIFT_MOT1_- 13 13 2 2
BEND_SENS 45 45 45 45 BEND_SENS Lower guide unit LIFT_MOT1_+ 14 14 1 1 LM1
Connector holder
MID_MOT_PH 46 46 46 46 MID_MOT_PH
MID_MOT_REM(ROL) 47 47 47 47 MID_MOT_REM(ROL)
YC6
MID_MOT_CLK 48 48 48 48 MID_MOT_CLK LED_5V 1 1 5 1 3 3 5V
MID_MOT_PD 49 49 49 49 MID_MOT_PD GND 2 2 4 2 2 2 GND PCS LIFT_MOT2_- 15 1 2 2
ASIST_CL1 50 50 50 50 ASIST_CL1 FEED2_SENS LIFT_MOT2_+ LM2
Relay
3 3 3 3 1 1 Vout 16 2 1 1
COVER_OPEN 4 4 2 4 2 2
GND 5 5 1 5 1 1 PCCSW LED_5V 17 3 6 1 3 3 5V
GND
CAS1_QUANT1
18
19
4
5
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PGS1(U)
Relay
LED_5V 20 6 3 4 3 3 5V
GND
CAS1_QUANT2
21
22
7
8
2
1
5
6
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PGS1(L)
LED_ 5V 23 9 6 1 3 3 5V
GND
CAS2_QUANT1
24
25
10
11
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PGS2(U)
EPWB LED_5V 26 12 3
Relay
4 3 3 5V
GND 27 13 2 5 2 2 GND PGS2(L)
FPWB2 CAS2_QUANT2 28 14 1 6 1 1 Vout
2-4-42
2N3/2N2
No.9
DRM-C
YC4 CN1 CN2 YC1
SIG2_C 1 1 11 11 SIG2_C +5V 1 1 3 3 +5V
Transfer belt unit SIG1_C 3 3 10 10 SIG1_C S.GND 2 2 2 2 SGND
SGND 5 5 9 9 SGND SIG_1 3 3 1 1 OUT_A
+5V 7 7 8 8 +5V +5V 4 4
YC3 DRM_C_BRAKE 9 9 7 7 DRM_C_BRAKE S.GND 5 5
+24V 1 6 A1 A16 A1 A1 +24V1 NC 11 11 SIG_2 6 6 ECPWB-C
GND 2 5 A2 A15 A2 A2 GND DRM_C_CW/CCW 13 13 6 6 DRM_C_CW/CCW YC1
START/STOP 3 4 A3 A14 A3 A3 ICL_MO _ T_REM DRM_C_FG 15 15 5 5 DRM_C_FG
TRCM CLOCK 4 3 A4 A13 A4 A4 ICL MOT_CLK
_ DRM C_VM
_ 17 17 4 4 DRM_C_VM 3 3 +5V
LD 5 2 A5 A12 A5 A5 ICL_MOT_RDY DRM_C_S/S 19 19 3 3 DRM_C_S/S 2 2 SGND
CW/CCW 6 1 A6 A11 A6 A6 ICL_MOT_DIR PGND 21 21 2 2 PGND 1 1 OUT_A
+24V1 23 23 1 1 +24V1
YC9 YC3
MOT_CLK 1 1 11 11 ENG _CLK
MOT_SDO 2 2 10 10 ENG _SDI
2 1 1 5 A7 A10 A7 A7 RLS_MOT_DR MOT_SEL 3 3 9 9 ENG _SEL
CRM 1
Relay
2 2 4 A8 A9 A8 A8 +24V1 MOT_SDI 4 4 8 8 ENG _SDO DRM-Y
MOT_RDY 5 5 7 7 ENG _RDY CN1 CN2 YC1
Relay EMERGENCY 6 6 6 6 EMERGENCY SIG2_Y 2 2 11 11 SIG2_Y +5V 1 1 3 3 +5V
GND 3 3 3 3 A9 A8 A9 A9 GND BLT_SPEED 7 7 5 5 BLT_SPEED SIG1_Y 4 4 10 10 SIG1_Y S.GND 2 2 2 2 SGND
CRS SIG 2 2 4 2 A10 A7 A10 A10 RLS_SENS BLT_INDEX 8 8 4 4 BLT_INDEX SGND 6 6 9 9 SGND SIG_1 3 3 1 1 OUT_A
5V 1 1 5 1 A11 A6 A11 A11 +5V DRM_INDEX_BK 9 9 3 3 DRM_INDEX_BK +5V 8 8 8 8 +5V +5V 4 4
DRM_INDEX_M 10 10 2 2 DRM_INDEX_M DRM_Y_BRAKE 10 10 7 7 DRM_Y_BRAKE S.GND 5 5
ECPWB-Y
Connector holder
Connector holder
DRM_INDEX_C 11 11 1 1 DRM_INDEX_C NC 12 12 SIG_2 6 6
DRM_Y_CW/CCW 14 14 6 6 DRM_Y_CW/CCW YC1
1 2 A12 A5 A12 A12 ZIG_MOT_DR_CCW DRM_Y_FG 16 16 5 5 DRM_Y_FG
TRSM 2
Relay
A13 A4 A13 A13 ZIG_MOT_DR_CW DRM_Y_VM 18 18 4 4 DRM_Y_VM 3 3 +5V
Connector holder
Connector holder
Connector holder
1
A14 A3 A14 A14 GND DRM_INDEX_Y 12 1 11 22 DRM_INDEX_Y DRM_Y_S/S 20 20 3 3 DRM_Y_S/S 2 2 SGND
A15 A2 A15 A15 BLT_INDEX GND 13 2 10 21 GND PGND 22 22 2 2 PGND 1 1 OUT_A
Relay
A16 A1 A16 A16 +5V GND 14 3 9 20 GND +24V1 24 24 1 1 +24V1
+5V 15 4 8 19 +5V
+5V 16 5 7 18 +5V
GND 3 3 B1 B16 B1 B1 GND BLT_BRAKE 17 6 6 17 BLT_BRAKE
TRSS SIG 2 2 B2 B15 B2 B2 ZIG_SENS BLT_VM 18 7 5 16 BLT_VM
DRM-K
5V 1 1 B3 B14 B3 B3 +5V BLT_REM 19 8 4 15 BLT_REM
MOT_DATA_SET 20 9 3 14 MOT_DATA_SET
YC5 CN1 CN2 YC1
DRM_ON 21 10 2 13 DRM_ON SIG2_BK 1 1 11 11 SIG2_BK +5V 1 1 3 3 +5V
GND 3 3 1 11 B4 B13 B4 B4 GND BLT_FG 22 11 1 12 BLT_FG SIG1_BK 3 3 10 10 SIG1_BK S.GND 2 2 2 2 SGND
TRBLS SIG 2 2 2 10 B5 B12 B5 B5 BLT_SPEED SGND 5 5 9 9 SGND SIG_1 3 3 1 1 OUT_A
5V 1 1 3 9 B6 B11 B6 B6 +5V +5V 7 7 8 8 +5V +5V 4 4
DRM_BK_BRAKE 9 9 7 7 DRM_BK_BRAKE S.GND 5 5
NC 11 11 SIG_2 6 6
ECPWB-K
TH 4 4 4 8 B7 B10 B7 B7 ZIG_TEMP DRM_BK_CW/CCW 13 13 6 6 DRM_BK_CW/CCW YC1
OUT 3 3 5 7 B8 B9 B8 B8 ZIG_REV_SENS DRM_BK_FG 15 15 5 5 DRM_BK_FG
TRES GND 2 2 6 Relay 6 B9 B8 B9 B9 GND DRM BK_VM
_ 17 17 4 4 DRM_BK_VM 3 3 +5V
5V 1 1 7 5 B10 B7 B10 B10 +5V DRM_BK_S/S 19 19 3 3 DRM_BK_S/S 2 2 SGND
PGND 21 21 2 2 PGND 1 1 OUT_A
+24V1 23 23 1 1 +24V1
8 4 B11 B6 B11 B11 +3.3V2
9 3 B12 B5 B12 B12 EEP_SCL2
10 2 B13 B4 B13 B13 EEP_SDA2
11 1 B14 B3 B14 B14 GND
B15 B2 B15 B15 A0 EPWB MCPWB DRM-M YC1
B16 B1 B16 B16 A1 CN1 CN2
SIG2_M 2 2 11 11 SIG2_M +5V 1 1 3 3 +5V
SIG1_M 4 4 10 10 SIG1_M S.GND 2 2 2 2 SGND
SGND 6 6 9 9 SGND SIG_1 3 3 1 1 OUT_A
+5V 8 8 8 8 +5V +5V 4 4
DRM_M_BRAKE 10 10 7 7 DRM M_BRAKE
_ S.GND 5 5
NC 12 12 SIG_2 6 6 ECPWB-M
RFPWB DRM_M_CW/CCW 14 14 6 6 DRM_M_CW/CCW YC1
DRM_M_FG 16 16 5 5 DRM_M_FG
YC1 YC27 DRM_M_VM 18 18 4 4 DRM_M_VM 3 3 +5V
GND 4 4 1 12 1 1 GND DRM_M_S/S 20 20 3 3 DRM_M_S/S 2 2 SGND
SDA 3 3 2 11 2 2 SDA PGND 22 22 2 2 PGND 1 1 OUT_A
SCL 2 2 3 10 3 3 SCL +24V1 24 24 1 1 +24V1
+3.3V 1 1 4 9 4 4 3.3V2
2 2 5 8 5 5 +24V1
YC6
TM-Y 1 1 6 7 6 6 TMOT_Y_DR DLP_Y_GAIN 1 1
DLP_Y_CW/CCW 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW
Relay
DLP_Y_LD 3 3 5 5 LD
2 2 7 6 7 7 +24V1 DLP_Y_CLK 4 4 4 4 CLOCK
TM-C 1 1 8 5 8 8 TMOT_C_DR DLP_Y_S/S 5 5 3 3 START/STOP DEVM-Y
PGND 6 6 2 2 GND
+24V1 7 7 1 1 +24V
2 2 9 4 9 9 +24V1
TM-M 1 1 10 3 10 10 TMOT_M_DR
Connector holder
2 2 11 2 11 11 +24V1 DLP_C_GAIN 8 8
TM-K 1 1 12 1 12 12 TMOT_Bk_DR DLP_C_CW/CCW 9 9 6 6 CW/CCW
DLP_C_LD 10 10 5 5 LD
DLP_C_CLK 11 11 4 4 CLOCK
DLP_C_S/S 12 12 3 3 START/STOP DEVM-C
PGND 13 13 2 2 GND
1 13 GND +24V1 14 14 1 1 +24V
2 14 ENCODE_Y
3 15 +5V
YC7
4 16 GND DLP_M_GAIN 1 1
5 17 ENCODE_C DLP_M_CW/CCW 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW
6 18 +5V DLP_M_LD 3 3 5 5 LD
DLP_M_CLK 4 4 4 4 CLOCK
YC22 DLP_M_S/S 5 5 3 3 START/STOP DEVM-M
7 19 GND LVU_FAN 1 1 6 1 2 1 - PGND 6 6 2 2 GND
8 20 ENCODE_M +24V1 2 2 5 2 1
Relay
2 + PSFM +24V1 7 7 1 1 +24V
9 21 +5V
10 22 GND Relay
11 23 ENCODE_K DLP_BK_GAIN 8 8
12 24 +5V DLP_BK_CW/CCW 9 9 6 6 CW/CCW
3 3 4 3 DLP_BK_LD 10 10 5 5 LD
4 4 DLP_BK_CLK 11 11 4 4 CLOCK
5 5
3
2
4
5 DLP_BK_S/S 12 12 3 3 START/STOP DEVM-K
6 6 1 6 PGND 13 13 2 2 GND
+24V1 14 14 1 1 +24V
2-4-43
2N3/2N2
No.10 (120V model)
YC15
+24V1 1 1
TB1
YC1 LIVE IN 1 1 1
N.C
+24V2
2
3
2
3
PCUSW 3 1 5V From Inlet1
To FPWB2 2 2 GND TB2
1 3 CURRENT_MONI LIVE OUT 1 1 2
HVPWB2
YC2 YC16 CRPWB
+24V2 1 1 1 1 +24V2
TR
GND 2 2 2 2 GND
YC5 YC17
POWER_OFF_24V1 3 3 1 1 POWER_OFF_24V1
DRM_HEAT_REM 2 2 2 2 DRM_HEAT_REM
GND 1 1 3 3 GND YC13
+24V1 1
+24V1 2
+24V1 3
+24V1 4
YC1 YC8 YC1 YC3 YC4 YC12 +24V1 5
T1_CLR_OFF_REM 1 1 12 12 T1_CLR_OFF_REM GND 1 1 8 8 GND +24V1 1 1 1 1 +24V1 +24V1 6
T1_CNT1 2 2 11 11 T1_CNT1 +5V 2 2 7 7 +5V +24V1 2 2 2 2 +24V1 +24V1 7
T1_CNT2 3 3 10 10 T1_CNT2 GND 3 3 6 6 GND +24V1 3 3 3 3 +24V1 +24V1 8
T1_CNT3 4 4 9 9 T1_CNT3 5V0 4 4 5 5 5V0 5V0 4 4 4 4 5V1 GND 9
T1_CNT4 5 5 8 8 T1_CNT4 GND 5 5 4 4 GND GND 5 5 5 5 GND GND 10
FB_CNT 6 6 7 7 FB_CNT GND 6 6 3 3 GND GND 6 6 6 6 GND GND 11
T2_REM 7 7 6 6 T2_REM +24V1 7 7 2 2 +24V1 GND 7 7 7 7 GND GND 12
SP_REM 8 8 5 5 SP_REM +24V1 8 8 1 1 +24V1 GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 13
T2_CNT 9 9 4 4 T2_CNT GND 14
SP_CNT 10 10 3 3 SP_CNT GND 15
SGND 11 11 2 2 SGND YC13 YC26 GND 16
SGND 12 12 1 1 SGND GND 1 1 4 4 GND
GND 2 2 3 3 GND
3.3V3 3 3 2 2 3.3V3
3.3V2 4 4 1 1 3.3V2
YC3
LIVE 1
NEUTRAL 2
YC16 2
YC1 To FIHPWB
DC_REC_CNT 1 1 14 14 DC_REC_CNT 1
AC_MAG_CLK_Y 2 2 13 13 AC_MAG_CLK_Y
AC_MAG_CNT_Y 3 3 12 12 AC_MAG_CNT_Y FPWB1
DISCHARGE_Y 4 4 11 11 DISCHARGE_Y 1 1 AC_LIVE
AC_MAIN_CNT_Y 5 5 10 10 AC_MAIN_CNT_Y
AC_SLV_CNT_Y 6 6 9 9 AC_SLV_CNT_Y Inlet2
DC_MAG_CNT_Y 7 7 8 8 DC_MAG_CNT_Y 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
DC_SLV_CNT_Y 8 8 7 7 DC_SLV_CNT_Y
AC_SLV_CLK_Y 9 9 6 6 AC_SLV_CLK_Y
MAIN_IDC_Y 10 10 5 5 MAIN_IDC_Y
DC_MAIN_CNT_Y 11 11 4 4 DC_MAIN_CNT_Y
DC_MAIN_REM 12 12 3 3 DC_MAIN_REM
AC_MAIN_CLK 13 13 2 2 AC_MAIN_CLK
Connector holder
SGND 14 14 1 1 SGND
TB5 #110
DH_LIVE 1 1 1 DH_LIVE
2 LIVE_OUT
YC2 3 LIVE_IN
SGND 1 1 14 28 SGND YC1 5 NEUTRAL_OUT MSW
DC_MAIN_CNT_C 2 2 13 27 DC_MAIN_CNT_C LIVE_IN 1 1 6 NEUTRAL_IN
MAIN_IDC_C 3 3 12 26 MAIN_IDC_C LIVE_OUT 2 2 #250
DC_MAG_REM 4 4 11 25 DC_MAG_REM NEUTRAL_OUT 3 3
AC_SLV_CLK_C 5 5 10 24 AC_SLV_CLK_C NEUTRAL_IN 4 4
DC_SLV_CNT_C 6 6 9 23 DC_SLV_CNT_C
DC_MAG_CNT_C 7 7 8 22 DC_MAG_CNT_C 2
AC_SLV_CNT_C 8 8 7 21 AC_SLV_CNT_C To CRPWB
AC_MAIN_CNT_C 9 9 6 20 AC_MAIN_CNT_C 1
DISCHARGE_C 10 10 5 19 DISCHARGE_C
AC_MAG_CNT_C 11 11 4 18 AC_MAG_CNT_C
TB1 #250
AC_MAG_CLK_C 12 12 3 17 AC_MAG_CLK_C LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
DC_REC_REM 13 13 2 16 DC_REC_REM PSPWB
1 15 NC
TB2 #250 Inlet1
NEUTRAL 1 1 AC_NEUTRAL
EPWB
YC3 YC17
AC_MAG_CLK_M 1 1 11 11 AC_MAG_CLK_M YC8
AC_MAG_CNT_M 2 2 10 10 AC_MAG_CNT_M YC2 YC11 DH_LIVE 1 1
DISCHARGE_M 3 3 9 9 DISCHARGE_M +24V1 6 6 1 1 +24V1 DH_LIVE 2 2 1 1
AC_MAIN_CNT_M 4 4 8 8 AC_MAIN_CNT_M +24V1 5 5 2 2 +24V1 NC 3 3 2 2 CH
AC_SLV_CNT_M 5 5 7 7 AC_SLV_CNT_M +24V1 4 4 3 3 +24V1 NC 4 4
DC_MAG_CNT_M 6 6 6 6 DC_MAG_CNT_M GND 3 3 4 4 GND DH_NEUTRAL 5 5
DC_SLV_CNT_M 7 7 5 5 DC_SLV_CNT_M GND 2 2 5 5 GND DH_NEUTRAL 6 6
AC_SLV_CLK_M 8 8 4 4 AC_SLV_CLK_M GND 1 1 6 6 GND
MAIN_IDC_M 9 9 3 3 MAIN_IDC_M
DC_MAIN_CNT_M 10 10 2 2 DC_MAIN_CNT_M
YC4
Connector holder
SGND 11 11 1 1 SGND
NC 12 12 LIVE 1 1 1
MCPWB NC
NEUTRAL
2
3
2
3 3
To Paper feeder (1)
YC4
SGND 1 1 11 22 SGND
DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk 2 2 10 21 DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk
MAIN_IDC_Bk 3 3 9 20 MAIN_IDC_Bk YC9
AC MAIN_CNT_Bk
_ 4 4 8 19 AC MAIN_CNT_Bk
_ DH_LIVE 1 1 1
AC_SLV_CLK_Bk 5 5 7 18 AC_SLV_CLK_Bk 2 To Paper feeder (2)
DC_SLV_CNT_Bk 6 6 6 17 DC_SLV_CNT_Bk DH_NEUTRAL 2 3 2
DC_MAG_CNT_Bk 7 7 5 16 DC_MAG_CNT_Bk YC16
AC_SLV_CNT_Bk 8 8 4 15 AC_SLV_CNT_Bk 1 1 +24V1
DISCHARGE_Bk 9 9 3 14 DISCHARGE_Bk 2 2 +24V1
AC_MAG_CNT_Bk 10 10 2 13 AC_MAG_CNT_Bk 3 3 +24V1
AC_MAG_CLK_Bk 11 11 1 12 AC_MAG_CLK_Bk 4 4 PGND
5 5 PGND
6 6 PGND
YC5
+24V1 1 1
DV +24V1 2 2
PGND 3 3
PGND 4 4
YC6
+24V1 1 1
MC
PGND 2 2
HVPWB1
2-4-44
2N3/2N2-1
No.10 (230V model)
YC15
+24V1 1 1
N.C
+24V2
2
3
2
3
PCUSW
TB1 #250
YC1 LIVE IN 1 1 1
HVPWB2 3 1 5V From Inlet
To FPWB2 2 2 GND TB2 #250
1 3 CURRENT_MONI LIVE OUT 1 1 2
YC2 YC16
+24V2 1 1 1 1 +24V2
TR
GND 2 2 2 2 GND
YC5 YC17 CRPWB
POWER_OFF_24V1 3 3 1 1 POWER_OFF_24V1
DRM_HEAT_REM 2 2 2 2 DRM_HEAT_REM
GND 1 1 3 3 GND YC13
+24V1 1
+24V1 2
+24V1 3
+24V1 4
YC1 YC8 YC1 YC3 YC4 YC12 +24V1 5
T1_CLR_OFF_REM 1 1 12 12 T1_CLR_OFF_REM GND 1 1 8 8 GND +24V1 1 1 1 1 +24V1 +24V1 6
T1_CNT1 2 2 11 11 T1_CNT1 +5V 2 2 7 7 +5V +24V1 2 2 2 2 +24V1 +24V1 7
T1_CNT2 3 3 10 10 T1_CNT2 GND 3 3 6 6 GND +24V1 3 3 3 3 +24V1 +24V1 8
T1_CNT3 4 4 9 9 T1_CNT3 5V0 4 4 5 5 5V0 5V0 4 4 4 4 5V1 GND 9
T1_CNT4 5 5 8 8 T1_CNT4 GND 5 5 4 4 GND GND 5 5 5 5 GND GND 10
FB_CNT 6 6 7 7 FB_CNT GND 6 6 3 3 GND GND 6 6 6 6 GND GND 11
T2_REM 7 7 6 6 T2_REM +24V1 7 7 2 2 +24V1 GND 7 7 7 7 GND GND 12
SP_REM 8 8 5 5 SP_REM +24V1 8 8 1 1 +24V1 GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 13
T2_CNT 9 9 4 4 T2_CNT GND 14
SP_CNT 10 10 3 3 SP_CNT GND 15
SGND 11 11 2 2 SGND YC13 YC26 GND 16
SGND 12 12 1 1 SGND GND 1 1 4 4 GND
GND 2 2 3 3 GND
3.3V3 3 3 2 2 3.3V3
3.3V2 4 4 1 1 3.3V2
YC3
LIVE 1 1
To FIHPWB
NEUTRAL 2 2
YC1 YC16
DC_REC_CNT 1 1 14 14 DC_REC_CNT
AC_MAG_CLK_Y 2 2 13 13 AC_MAG_CLK_Y
AC_MAG_CNT_Y 3 3 12 12 AC_MAG_CNT_Y FPWB1
DISCHARGE_Y 4 4 11 11 DISCHARGE_Y
AC_MAIN_CNT_Y 5 5 10 10 AC_MAIN_CNT_Y
AC_SLV_CNT_Y 6 6 9 9 AC_SLV_CNT_Y
DC_MAG_CNT_Y 7 7 8 8 DC_MAG_CNT_Y
DC_SLV_CNT_Y 8 8 7 7 DC_SLV_CNT_Y
AC_SLV_CLK_Y 9 9 6 6 AC_SLV_CLK_Y
MAIN_IDC_Y 10 10 5 5 MAIN_IDC_Y
DC_MAIN_CNT_Y 11 11 4 4 DC_MAIN_CNT_Y
DC_MAIN_REM 12 12 3 3 DC_MAIN_REM
AC_MAIN_CLK 13 13 2 2 AC_MAIN_CLK
Connector holder
SGND 14 14 1 1 SGND
TB5 #110
DH_LIVE 1 1 1 DH_LIVE
2 LIVE_OUT
YC2 3 LIVE_IN
SGND 1 1 14 28 SGND YC1 5 NEUTRAL_OUT MSW
DC_MAIN_CNT_C 2 2 13 27 DC_MAIN_CNT_C LIVE_IN 1 1 6 NEUTRAL_IN
MAIN_IDC_C 3 3 12 26 MAIN_IDC_C LIVE_OUT 2 2 #250
DC_MAG_REM 4 4 11 25 DC_MAG_REM NEUTRAL_OUT 3 3
AC_SLV_CLK_C 5 5 10 24 AC_SLV_CLK_C NEUTRAL_IN 4 4
DC_SLV_CNT_C 6 6 9 23 DC_SLV_CNT_C 2
DC_MAG_CNT_C 7 7 8 22 DC_MAG_CNT_C To CRPWB
AC_SLV_CNT_C 8 8 7 21 AC_SLV_CNT_C 1
AC_MAIN_CNT_C 9 9 6 20 AC_MAIN_CNT_C
DISCHARGE_C 10 10 5 19 DISCHARGE_C TB1 #250
AC_MAG_CNT_C 11 11 4 18 AC_MAG_CNT_C LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
AC_MAG_CLK_C 12 12 3 17 AC_MAG_CLK_C
DC_REC_REM 13 13 2 16 DC_REC_REM PSPWB TB2 Inlet1
#250
1 15 NC NEUTRAL 1 1 AC_NEUTRAL
EPWB
YC3 YC17
AC_MAG_CLK_M 1 1 11 11 AC_MAG_CLK_M YC8
AC_MAG_CNT_M 2 2 10 10 AC_MAG_CNT_M YC2 YC11 DH_LIVE 1 1
DISCHARGE_M 3 3 9 9 DISCHARGE_M +24V1 6 6 1 1 +24V1 DH_LIVE 2 2 1 1
AC_MAIN_CNT_M 4 4 8 8 AC_MAIN_CNT_M +24V1 5 5 2 2 +24V1 NC 3 3 2 2 CH
AC_SLV_CNT_M 5 5 7 7 AC_SLV_CNT_M +24V1 4 4 3 3 +24V1 NC 4 4
DC_MAG_CNT_M 6 6 6 6 DC_MAG_CNT_M GND 3 3 4 4 GND DH_NEUTRAL 5 5
DC_SLV_CNT_M 7 7 5 5 DC_SLV_CNT_M GND 2 2 5 5 GND DH_NEUTRAL 6 6
AC_SLV_CLK_M 8 8 4 4 AC_SLV_CLK_M GND 1 1 6 6 GND
MAIN_IDC_M 9 9 3 3 MAIN_IDC_M
DC_MAIN_CNT_M 10 10 2 2 DC_MAIN_CNT_M
YC4
Connector holder
SGND 11 11 1 1 SGND
NC 12 12 LIVE 1 1 1
MCPWB NC
NEUTRAL
2
3
2
3 3
To Paper feeder
YC4
SGND 1 1 11 22 SGND
DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk 2 2 10 21 DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk
MAIN_IDC_Bk 3 3 9 20 MAIN_IDC_Bk YC9
AC MAIN_CNT_Bk
_ 4 4 8 19 AC MAIN_CNT_Bk
_ DH_LIVE 1 1 1
AC_SLV_CLK_Bk 5 5 7 18 AC_SLV_CLK_Bk 2 To Paper feeder
DC_SLV_CNT_Bk 6 6 6 17 DC_SLV_CNT_Bk DH_NEUTRAL 3 3 2
DC_MAG_CNT_Bk 7 7 5 16 DC_MAG_CNT_Bk YC16
AC_SLV_CNT_Bk 8 8 4 15 AC_SLV_CNT_Bk 1 1 +24V1
DISCHARGE_Bk 9 9 3 14 DISCHARGE_Bk 2 2 +24V1
AC_MAG_CNT_Bk 10 10 2 13 AC_MAG_CNT_Bk 3 3 +24V1
AC_MAG_CLK_Bk 11 11 1 12 AC_MAG_CLK_Bk 4 4 PGND
5 5 PGND
6 6 PGND
YC5
+24V1 1 1
DV +24V1 2 2
PGND 3 3
PGND 4 4
YC6
+24V1 1 1
MC
PGND 2 2
HVPWB1
2-4-45
2N3/2N2-1
No.11
YC2 YC9
GND(AFE_SHP) 1 1 40 40 GND(AFE_SHP) MPWB
CLPIN 2 2 39 39 CLPIN
GND(AFE_SHD) 3 3 38 38 GND(AFE_SHD) YC4 YC25
MCLK 4 4 37 37 AFE_MCLK GND 1 1 1 1 GND
GND 5 5 36 36 GND HTPDN 2 2 2 2 HTPDN
CCDSEL 6 6 35 35 CCDSEL LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN YC2
GND 7 7 34 34 GND GND 4 4 4 4 GND GND 1 1 1 1 GND
TXCLK1P 8 8 33 33 DIS_CISCKP TX0N 5 5 5 5 RX0N A+ 2 2 2 2 TXP
TXCLK1N 9 9 32 32 DIS_CISCKN TX0P 6 6 6 6 RX0P
YC10 YC4 A- 3 3 3 3 TXN
GND 10 10 31 31 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND DP_CONECTN 1 1 DP_CONECTN GND 4 4 4 4 GND
TXOUTC1P 11 11 30 30 DIS_CIS_5P DP_SYSCLKOUT 2 2 DP_SYSCLKOUT B- 5 5 5 5 RXN
TXOUTC1N 12 12 29 29 DIS_CIS_5N PCIEN3_DP2A 3 3 PCIEN3_DP2A B+ 6 6 6 6 RXP
GND 13 13 28 28 GND GND 4 4 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND
TXOUTB1P 14 14 27 27 DIS_CIS_4P PCIEP3_DP2A 5 5 PCIEP3_DP2A
TXOUTB1N 15 15 26 26 DIS_CIS_4N GND 6 6 GND
GND 16 16 25 25 GND GND 7 7 GND
TXOUTC2P 17 17 24 24 DIS_CIS_3P PCIEN_REFCLK_D 8 8 PCIEN_REFCLK_D
TXOUTC2N 18 18 23 23 DIS_CIS_3N GND 9 9 GND 3.3V 1 1
GND 19 19 22 22 GND PCIEP_REFCLK_D 10 10 PCIEP_REFCLK_D 3.3V 2 2
TXOUTB2P 20 20 21 21 DIS_CIS_2P PCIEN3_A2DP 11 11 PCIEN3_A2DP 3.3V 3 3
TXOUTB2N 21 21 20 20 DIS_CIS_2N YC3 YC11 GND 12 12 GND GND 4 4
GND 22 22 19 19 GND SC_CLK 1 1 8 8 SC_CLK PCIEP3_A2DP 13 13 PCIEP3_A2DP GND 5 5
CCDPWB TXOUTA2P 23 23 18 18 DIS_CIS_1P SC_SO 2 2 7 7 SC_SO GND 14 14 GND GND 6 6 YC32
TXOUTA2N 24 24 17 17 DIS_CIS_1N SC_SI 3 3 6 6 SC_SI GND 15 15 GND 5V 7 7 3 3 GND
GND 25 25 16 16 GND SC_BSY 4 4 5 5 SC_BSY URAN_RSTN 16 16 URAN_RSTN 5V 8 8 2 2 +5V_HDD
SCLK 26 26 15 15 AFECLK SC_HLDN 5 5 4 4 SC_HLDN PCIEN2_DP2A 17 17 PCIEN2_DP2A 5V 9 9 1 1 GND
SDI 27 27 14 14 AFE_SO SC_DIR 6 6 3 3 SC_DIR +3.3V3 18 18 +3.3V3 GND 10 10
SENB 28 28 13 13 AFE_EN SC_IRN 7 7 2 2 SC_IRN PCIEP2_DP2A 19 19 PCIEP2_DP2A ACT 11 11
SDO 29 29 12 12 AFE_SI GND(SPARE) 8 8 1 1 GND +3.3V3 20 20 +3.3V3 GND 12 12
SH 30 30 11 11 SH GND 21 21 GND 12V 13 13
TG 31 31 10 10 TG +3.3V3 22 22 +3.3V3 12V 14 14
VSG 32 32 9 9 VSG PCIEN2_A2DP 23 23 PCIEN2_A2DP 12V 15 15
RS 33 33 8 8 RS +3.3V3 24 24 +3.3V3
GND 34 34 7 7 GND PCIEP2_A2DP 25 25 PCIEP2_A2DP
CP 35 35 6 6 CP +3.3V3 26 26 +3.3V3 HDD2
GND 36 36 5 5 GND GND 27 27 GND
CCDCLK2 37 37 4 4 CCDCLK2 +3.3V3 28 28 +3.3V3
GND 38 38 3 3 GND PCIEN1_DP2A 29 29 PCIEN1_DP2A
CCDCLK1 39 39 2 2 CCDCLK1 +3.3V3 30 30 +3.3V3
GND 40 40 1 1 GND PCIEP1_DP2A 31 31 PCIEP1_DP2A
+3.3V3 32 32 +3.3V3
GND 33 33 GND
YC1 YC11 +3.3V3 34 34 +3.3V3
+5.1V 6 6 1 1 +5.1V PCIEN1_A2DP 35 35 PCIEN1_A2DP
GND 5 5 2 2 GND GND 36 36 GND DPRPWB
+10V 4 4 3 3 +10V PCIEP1_A2DP 37 37 PCIEP1_A2DP
GND 3 3 4 4 GND GND 38 38 GND 3.3V 1 1
+3.3V 2 2 5 5 +3.3V GND 39 39 GND 3.3V 2 2
GND 1 1 6 6 GND GND 40 40 GND 3.3V 3 3
PCIEN0_DP2A 41 41 PCIEN0_DP2A GND 4 4
GND 42 42 GND GND 5 5
PCIEP0_DP2A 43 43 PCIEP0_DP2A GND 6 6 YC27
GND 44 44 GND 5V 7 7 3 3 GND
GND 45 45 GND 5V 8 8 2 2 +5V_HDD
PCIEN0_A2DP 46 46 PCIEN0_A2DP 5V 9 9 1 1 GND
GND 47 47 GND GND 10 10
YC13 PCIEP0_A2DP 48 48 PCIEP0_A2DP ACT 11 11
GND 3 3 1 1 GND PCIE3_SWRST_A2 49 49 PCIE3_SWRST_A2 GND 12 12
OSS ORGSW 2 2 2 2 ORG_SW GND 50 50 GND 12V 13 13
5V 1 1 3 3 +5.1V 12V 14 14
12V 15 15
YC1
YC6 GND 1 1 1 1 GND
11 11 11 11 +24V1 A+ 2 2 2 2 TXP
10 10 10 10 +24V1 A- 3 3 3 3 TXN
9 9 9 9 POW GND 4 4 4 4 GND
8 8 8 8 PWM B- 5 5 5 5 RXN
7 7 7 7 PGND B+ 6 6 6 6 RXP
6 6 6 6 7
LLPWB 5 5 5 5
SGND
VSET
GND 7 7 7 GND
4 4 4 4 SCL
ISCPWB
3 3 3 3 SDA HDD1
2 2 2 2 FAIL
1 1 1 1 +5V1
YC14 YC2
3.3V 3 3 1 1 +3.3V GND 1 1
ODSW GND
COSW
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
CO_SW
HTPDN
LOCKN
2
3
2
3
GND 4 4 To DPDPWB
RX0N 5 5
YC8 RX0P 6 6
3.3V 3 3 1 1 +3.3V GND 7 7
HPS GND 2 2 2 2 GND
HPSW 1 1 3 3 HP_SW
YC5
A 4 1 SMOT AP
B 3 2 SMOT BP
SM A/ 2 3 SMOT AN
B/ 1 4 SMOT BN
YC7
+24V1
GND
1
2
1
2
1
2
PSPWB
YC12 GND 3 3 3 From PSPWB YC14 YC42
16 16 24V2 GND 4 4 4 5V1 1 1 1 1 5V1
15 15 24V2 +24V2 5 5 5 GND 2 2 2 2 GND
14 14 24V2 +24V2 6 6 6 5V1 3 3 3 3 5V1
13 13 Reserve GND 4 4 4 4 GND
12 12 GND 5V1 5 5 5 5 5V1
11 11 GND GND 6 6 6 6 GND
10 10 GND 5V1 7 7 7 7 5V1
9 9 Reserve GND 8 8 8 8 GND
8 8 DP_OPEN 5V1 9 9 9 9 5V1
7 7 DP_SI GND 10 10 10 10 GND
6 6 DP_SO
DPMPWB 5 5 DP_CLK
4 4 DP_SEL
(option) 3 3 DP_RDY
2 2 DP_TMG
1 1 GND(SPARE)
1
2
3
4 From DPRPWB
5
6
7
2-4-46
2N3/2N2
No.12
YC18
1 1 POL YC7 CN1 CN2
2 2 STVD KMDET 1 1 1 12 KMDET FG 1 1 1 1 FG
3 3 OE NC 2 2 2 11 NC PHS TXD 2 2 3 3 TXD
4 4 CKG KMDREQ 3 3 3 10 KMDREQ SGND 3 3 13 13 SGND
5 5 STVU KMACK 4 4 4 9 KMACK PHS DTR 4 4 16 16 DTR
6 6 GND KMRXD 5 5 5 8 KMRXD 5V OUT 5 5 18 18 5V
7 7 EDGSL SGND 6 6 6 7 SGND PHS RTS 6 6 7 7 RTS
8 8 +3.3V2 KMTXD 7 7 7 6 KMTXD N.C. 7 7
9 9 V9 SGND 8 8 8 5 SGND PHS DCD 8 8 15 15 DCD
10 10 VM SGND 9 9 9 4 SGND N.C. 9 9
11 11 V2 SGND 10 10 10 3 SGND PHS RXD 10 10 5 5 RXD
12 12 VH +5V 11 11 11 2 +5V SGND 11 11 19 19 SGND
13 13 V6 +5V 12 12 12 1 +5V PHS DSR 12 12 11 11 DSR KMAS
14 14 UD PHS RI 13 13 14 14 RI
15 15 VCOM PHS CTS 14 14 9 9 CTS
16 16 GND 2 2 NC
17 17 VLS 4 4 NC
CN3
KMASPWB
18 18 V14 1 6 6 NC
19 19 V11 2 Relay GND 1 8 8 NC
20 20 V8 2 3 TXD 2 10 10 NC
21 21 V5 1 DTR 3 12 12 NC
22 22 V3 RTS 4 17 17 NC
23 23 GND DCD 5 20 20 NC
24 24 RO5 RXD 6
25 25 RO4 DSR 7
26 26 RO3 CTS 8
27 27 RO2 YC3 RI 9 KMAS
28 28 RO1 VO2 1 1 + YC5 NC 10
29 29 RO0 VO1 2 2 - Speaker TD1+ 1 (option for JAPAN only)
LCD 30 30 GND TD1- 2
TD2+ 3
TD2- 4
CT1 5
YC19 CT2 6
1 1 GND TD3+ 7
2 2 GO5 YC15 YC30 TD3- 8
3 3 GO4 +5V 1 6 6 1 6 1 +5V TD4+ 9 Ethernet
4 4 GO3 +5V 2 5 5 2 5 2 +5V TD4- 10
5 5 GO2 +5V 3 4 4 3 4 3 +5V GRLED_A1 11
Relay
6 6 GO1 GND 4 3 3 4 3 4 GND GRLED_K1 12
7 7 GO0 GND 5 2 2 5 2 5 GND YWLED_A2 13
8 8 DIO2 GND 6 1 1 6 1 6 GND YWLED_K2 14
9 9 REV LockPin1 LP1
10 10 GND LockPin2 LP2
11 11 CKS
12 12 +3.3V2
13 13 DIO1
14 14 LD
15 15 BO5 YC10 YC12
16 16 BO4 HUMAN_SENS_FAR B10 B10 B1 B10 1 1 HUMAN_SENS_FAR
17 17 BO3 JOB_LED B9 B9 B2 B9 2 2 JOB_LED
18 18 BO2 HUMAN_SENS_NEAR B8 B8 B3 B8 3 3 HUMAN_SENS_NEAR YC23
19 19 BO1 GND B7 B7 B4 B7 4 4 GND SPEED CONTROL 1 3 1 1
20 20 BO0 ANY_KEY B6 B6 B5 B6 5 5 ANY_KEY GND 2 2 2 Relay 2 CONFM
21 21 SHL C2P_SCK B5 B5 B6 B5 6 6 C2P_SCK 5V 3 1 3 3
22 22 V1 _
P2C SBSY B4 B4 B7 B4 7 7 P2C_SBSY
23 23 V4 P2C_SDIR B3 B3 B8 B3 8 8 P2C_SDIR
24 24 V7 C2P_SDAT B2 B2 B9 B2 9 9 C2P_SDAT
25 25 V10 P2C_SDAT B1 B1 B10
Relay
B1 10 10 P2C_SDAT
26 26 V12 GND A10 A10 A1 A10 11 11 GND
27 27 V13 PANEL RESET A9 A9 A2 A9 12 12 PANEL RESET
28 28 VLS _
DEEP POWERON A8 A8 A3 A8 13 13 DEEP_POWERON
29 29 GND LED_MEMORY A7 A7 A4 A7 14 14 LED_MEMORY YC20
30 30 VCOM LED_ATTENTION A6 A6 A5 A6 15 15 LED_ATTENTION VBUS_A A1
LED_PROCESSING A5 A5 A6 A5 16 16 LED_PROCESSING D-_A A2
AUDIO A4 A4 A7 A4 17 17 AUDIO D+_A A3
INT_POWERKEY A3 A3 A8 A3 18 18 INT_POWERKEY GND_A A4
YC6 GND A2 A2 A9 A2 19 19 GND VBUS_B B1
1 1 LED_A LIGHTOFF_POWERON A1 A1 A10 A1 20 20 LIGHTOFF_POWERON D-_B B2 Type A+B
2 2 LED_C D+_B B3
GND_B B4
LockPin1 LP1
LockPin2 LP2
LockPin3 LP3 YC26
LockPin4 LP4 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
YC8 Card DATA- 2 2 2 DATA-
TOP 1 1 YC22 YC6 DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA+
LEFT 2 2
BOT Y-
LEFT X+ GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
reader GND 4 4 4 ID
Touch panel BOTTOM 3 3 TOP Y+ LCD_OFF 2 2 2 2 2 2 LCD_OFF 5 5 GND
RIGHT 4 4 RIGHT X- LOCKN 3 3 3 3 3 3 LOCKN
GND 4 4 4 4 4 4 GND
RX0N 5 5 5 5 5 5 TX0N
RX0P 6 6 6 6 6 6 TX0P YC31 YC22
GND 7 7 7 7 7 7 GND CD/DAT3 1 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
CMD 2 Key DATA- 2 2 2 DATA-
3 DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA+
VSS
VDD 4
boade GND 4 4 4 ID
OPWB2 CLK 5 5 5 GND
YC1 YC1 VSS 6
5V0 1 1 1 1 5V0 YC21 DAT0 7
NC 2 2 2 2 NC VBUS 1 1 1 1 1 VBUS DAT1 8
INT_POWERKEY_N 3 3 3 3 INT_POWERKEY_N DATA - 2 2 2 2 2 DATA- DAT2 9
GND 4 4 4 4 GND USB host DATA + 3 3 3 3 3 DATA+ CD 10
SD card
KEY6 5 5 5 5 KEY6 4 4 4 4 NC COMMON 11
NC 6 6 6 6 NC GND 4 5 5 5 5 GND WP 12
LED3 7 7 7 7 LED3 LP1 LockPin1 LockPin(1) 13
NC 8 8 8 8 NC LP2 LockPin2 LockPin(2) 14
KEY5 9 9 9 9 KEY5 LP3 LockPin3 LockPin(3) 15
KEY4 10 10 10 10 KEY4 LockPin(4) 16
SCAN4 11 11 11 11 SCAN4
SCAN2 12 12 12 12 SCAN2
GND 13 13 13 13 GND OPWB3
SCAN3 14 14 14 14 SCAN3
SCAN1 15 15 15 15 SCAN1
NC 16 16 16 16 NC YC11 YC1 MPWB
LED0 17 17 17 17 LED0 PROCESSING_LED 4 4 1 1 PROCESSING_LED
LED1 18 18 18 18 LED1 MEMORY_LED 3 3 2 2 MEMORY_LED
LED2 19 19 19 19 LED2 ATTENTION_LED 2 2 3 3 ATTENTION_LED
NC 20 20 20 20 NC 5V6 1 1 4 4 5V6
KEY0 21 21 21 21 KEY0
KEY1 22 22 22 22 KEY1
KEY2 23 23 23 23 KEY2
SCAN0 24 24 24 24 SCAN0
KEY3 25 25 25 25 KEY3
GND 26 26 26 26 GND
ATTENTION 27 27 27 27 ATTENTION
MEMORY 28 28 28 28 MEMORY
PROCESSING 29 29 29 29 PROCESSING
JOB_LED 30 30 30 30 JOB_LED
OPWB1
2-4-47
2N3/2N2-1
No.13
YC2 FCPWB
VBUS 20 20 VBUS
YC8 YC3 USB_DN 19 19 USB_DN
VBUS1 1 1 1 1 VBUS1 USB_DP 18 18 USB_DP
USB_DN1 2 2 2 2 USB_DN1 GND 17 17 GND
USB_DP1 3 3 3 3 USB_DP1 RESERVE 16 16 NC
GND 4 4 4 4 GND RESERVE 15 15 NC
AUDIO1 5 5 5 5 AUDIO1 GND 14 14 GND
WAKEUP1 6 6 6 6 WAKEUP1 RESERVE 13 13 NC
RESET1 7 7 7 7 RESET1 RESERVE 12 12 NC
GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 11 11 GND
VBUS0 9 9 9 9 VBUS0 RESERVE 10 10 NC
USB_DN0 10 10 10 10 USB_DN0 RESERVE 9 9 NC
USB_DP0 11 11 11 11 USB_DP0 RESERVE 8 8 NC
GND 12 12 12 12 GND AUDIO 7 7 AUDIO
AUDIO0 13 13 13 13 AUDIO0 WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
WAKEUP0 14 14 14 14 WAKEUP0 GND 5 5 GND
RESET0 15 15 15 15 RESET0 VDD5_CUT 4 4 VDD5_CUT
LockPin1 LP1 LP1 LockPin RESETN 3 3 RESETN
LockPin2 LP2 LP2 LockPin GND 2 2 GND
LP3 LockPin VDD5 1 1 VDD5
LP4 LockPin LockPin2 LP2
LockPin1 LP1
YC1 FCPWB
YC9 YC4 20 20 VBUS
VBUS
5V_CUT1 6 1 6 1 5V_CUT1 USB_DN 19 19 USB_DN
GND 5 2 5 2 GND USB_DP 18 18 USB_DP
5V 4 3 4 3 5V GND 17 17 GND
GND 3 4 3 4 GND RESERVE 16 16 NC
5V_CUT0 2 5 2 5 5V_CUT0 RESERVE 15 15 NC
GND 1 6 1 6 GND GND 14 14 GND
RESERVE 13 13 NC
RESERVE 12 12 NC
GND 11 11 GND
RESERVE 10 10 NC
RESERVE 9 9 NC
IFPWB RESERVE 8 8 NC
AUDIO 7 7 AUDIO
WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
GND 5 5 GND
MPWB VDD5_CUT 4 4 VDD5_CUT
RESETN 3 3 RESETN
GND 2 2 GND
VDD5 1 1 VDD5
YC33 YC2
12V 10 10 1 1 12V
12V 9 9 2 2 12V
SGND 8 8 3 3 GND
SGND 7 7 4 4 GND
SDI 6 6 5 5 SRS_SI FIERY RELAY PWB
SDICLK 5 5 6 6 SRS_SICLK
SGND 4 4 7 7 GND
SDO 3 3 8 8 SRS_SO
SDOCLK 2 2 9 9 SRS_SOCLK
SGND 1 1 10 10 GND
11 11 N.C.
YC43 YC50 YC47 YC4 YC3
GND 41 41 41 41 GND HSYNC_AN 41 41 41 41 HSYNC_AN CH1_RX0N 1 1
GND 40 40 40 40 GND VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N 40 40 40 40 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N CH1_RX0P 2 2 FIERY CONTROLLER
TAN 39 39 39 39 RAn VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P 39 39 39 39 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P GND 3 3
TAP 38 38 38 38 RAp VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N 38 38 38 38 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N NC 4 4
GND 37 37 37 37 GND VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P 37 37 37 37 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P NC 5 5
TBN 36 36 36 36 RBn VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N 36 36 36 36 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N MFP_READYN 6 6
TBP 35 35 35 35 RBp VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P 35 35 35 35 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P FIERY_READYN 7 7
GND 34 34 34 34 GND VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N 34 34 34 34 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N NC 8 8
TCN 33 33 33 33 RCn VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P 33 33 33 33 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P POWER_CONTROLLN 9 9
TCP 32 32 32 32 RCp VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N 32 32 32 32 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N NC 10 10
GND 31 31 31 31 GND VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P 31 31 31 31 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P GND 11 11
TCLKN 30 30 30 30 RCLKn VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N 30 30 30 30 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N NC 12 12
TCLKP 29 29 29 29 RCLKp VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P 29 29 29 29 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P NC 13 13
GND 28 28 28 28 GND VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N 28 28 28 28 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N CH1_LOCKN 14 14
VSYNCA_N 27 27 27 27 VSYNCA_N VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P 27 27 27 27 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P GND 15 15
VSYNCA_P 26 26 26 26 VSYNCA_P VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N 26 26 26 26 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N CH1_HTPDN 16 16
VSYNCB_N 25 25 25 25 VSYNCB_N VRIF_SART_1_VSYNC_D_P 25 25 25 25 VRIF_SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P RESERVE_INN 17 17
VSYNCB_P 24 24 24 24 VSYNCB_P GND 24 24 24 24 GND RESERVE_OUTN 18 18
VSYNCC_N 23 23 23 23 VSYNCC_N VRIF_SAR_1_VCLK_P 23 23 23 23 VRIF_SAR_1_VCLK_P GND 19 19
VSYNCC_P 22 22 22 22 VSYNCC_P VRIF_SAR_1_VCLK_N 22 22 22 22 VRIF_SAR_1_VCLK_N NC 20 20
VSYNCD_N 21 21 21 21 VSYNCD_N GND 21 21 21 21 GND NC 21 21
VSYNCD_P 20 20 20 20 VSYNCD_P VRIF_SAR_1_CH3_P 20 20 20 20 VRIF_SAR_1_CH3_P GND 22 22
HSYNCA_N 19 19 19 19 HSYNCA_N VRIF_SAR_1_CH3_N 19 19 19 19 VRIF_SAR_1_CH3_N UART_TXD_EFI 23 23
HSYNCA_P 18 18 18 18 HSYNCA_P GND 18 18 18 18 GND UART_RXD_EFI 24 24
HSYNCB_N 17 17 17 17 HSYNCB_N VRIF_SAR_1_CH2_P 17 17 17 17 VRIF_SAR_1_CH2_P NC C1
HSYNCB_P 16 16 16 16 HSYNCB_P VRIF_SAR_1_CH2_N 16 16 16 16 VRIF_SAR_1_CH2_N NC C2
HSYNCC_N 15 15 15 15 HSYNCC_N GND 15 15 15 15 GND NC C3
HSYNCC_P 14 14 14 14 HSYNCC_P VRIF_SAR_1_CH1_P 14 14 14 14 VRIF_SAR_1_CH1_P NC C4
HSYNCD_N 13 13 13 13 HSYNCD_N VRIF_SAR_1_CH1_N 13 13 13 13 VRIF_SAR_1_CH1_N SHIELD_1 SH1
HSYNCD_P 12 12 12 12 HSYNCD_P GND 12 12 12 12 GND SHIELD_1 SH2
SLEEP 11 11 11 11 SLEEP_ENG NC 11 11 11 11 NC
HOLD_ENG 10 10 10 10 HOLD_ENG NC 10 10 10 10 NC
ENG_OFF 9 9 9 9 ENG_OFF NC 9 9 9 9 NC
JS_LED 8 8 8 8 JS_LED NC 8 8 8 8 NC
EGSIRN 7 7 7 7 G6_EG_IRN NC 7 7 7 7 NC
EGSO 6 6 6 6 G6_EG_SO NC 6 6 6 6 NC
EGSBSY 5 5 5 5 G6_EG_SBSY NC 5 5 5 5 NC
EGSDIR 4 4 4 4 G6_EG_SDIR NC 4 4 4 4 NC
EGSI 3 3 3 3 G6_EG_SI NC 3 3 3 3 NC
EGSCLK 2 2 2 2 G6_EG_SCLK NC 2 2 2 2 NC
SLEEP_INT 1 1 1 1 SLEEP_INT NC 1 1 1 1 NC
EPWB
YC3
TD1+ 1 1
TD1- 2 2
TD2+ 3 3
TD2- 4 4
CT1 5 5
CT2 6 6
TD3+ 7 7
TD3- 8 8
TD4+ 9
TD4- 10
GRLED_A1 11
GRLED_K1 12
YWLED_A2 13
YWLED_K2 14
LockPin(1) LP1
LockPin(2) LP2
2-4-48
No.14
YC13
ENG_SDO 1 1 A4 A4 PF_SDI
2 2 ENG_SDI 2 2 A2 A2 PF_SDO
PFLM2 1 1 ENG_CLK 3 3 A1 A1 PF_CLK
YC7 ENG_SEL 4 4 A3 A3 PF_SEL
1 1 OUT2B ENG_RDY 5 5 A5 A5 PF_RDY
2 2 OUT2A ENG_PAU 6 6 A6 A6 PF_PAUSE
2 2 3 3 OUT1B ENG_OPN1 7 7 A7 A7 PF_CAS_SW1
PFLM1 1 1 4 4 OUT1A ENG_OPN2 8 8 A8 A8 PF_CAS_SW2
+3.3V2 9 9 A9 A9 +3.3V2
GND 10 10 A10 A10 GND
A11 A11 GND
E A12 A12 GND(SLEEP)
YC6 A13 A13 24[V]
3 3 1 6 1 1 3.3V1 A14 A14 24[V]
PFPGS2(U) 2 2 2 5 2 2 GND SD_1 B1 B1 SIDE_CLK
1 1 3 4 3 3 PAP_L_SW1 YC11 SD_2 B2 B2 SIDE_SDO(PF)
4 3 4 4 3.3V1 24V2 4 4 SD_3 B3 B3 SIDE_SEL
3 3 5 2 5 5 GND 24V2 3 3 SD_4 B4 B4 SIDE_SDI(PF)
PFPGS2(L) 2 2 6 1 6 6 PAP_L_SW2 GND 2 2 SD_5 B5 B5 SIDE_RDY
1 1 7 7 NC GND 1 1 SD_6 B6 B6 SIDE_PAUSE
8 8 GND SD_7 B7 B7 TANDEM_CAS1_OPEN
3 3 9 9 NC SD_8 B8 B8 TANDEM_CAS2_OPEN
PFSDSW2 2 2 10 10 NC SD_9 B9 B9 SIDE_MULTI_OPEN
1 1 11 11 GND SD_10 B10 B10 +3.3V4
12 12 NC SD_11 B11 B11 GND
3 3 13 13 3.3V1 F B12 B12 SLEEP
PFCDSW2 2 2 14 14 GND B13 B13 GND
1 1 15 15 SIZE_L_SW B14 B14 GND
16 16 3.3V2
17 17 GND
18 18 Deck_L_SW
19 19 NC 1 1 1 1 LIVE
PFCH 2 2 2 2 COM
HET-1
HET-2
YC3
3 3 1 6 1 1 3.3V1
PFPGS1(U) 2 2 2 5 2 2 GND Machine
1 1 3 4 3 3 PAP_R_SW1
4 3 4 4 3.3V1
3 3 5 2 5 5 GND
PFPGS1(L) 2 2 6 1 6 6 PAP_R_SW2
1 1 7 7 NC
8 8 GND
3 3 9 9 NC
PFSDSW1 2 2 10 10 NC
1 1 11 11 GND
12 12 NC
3 3 13 13 3.3V1
PFCDSW1 2 2 14 14 GND
1 1 15 15 SIZE_R_SW
16 16 3.3V2
17 17 GND
18 18 Deck_R_SW
2 2 1 7
PFPCCSW 1 1 2 6
3 3 1 5 3 5
PFPCS1 2 2 2 4 4 4
1 1 3 3 5 3
3 3 4 2 6 2
PFPCCL1 1 1 5 1 7 1
YC5
1 1 GND
2 2 R_COVER_SW
1 12 3 3 VFDCL
2 11 4 4 24V1
3 10 5 5 3.3V1
6 6 GND
2-4-49
7 7 VFDSW
3 3 4 9 8 8 24[V]
PFPS1 2 2 5 8 9 9 PF_R_SOL_ACT
1 1 6 7 10 10 PF_R_SOL_KEP
11 11 3.3V1
3 3 7 6 12 12 GND
PFLS1 2 2 8 5 13 13 EMPTY_R_SW
1 1 9 4 14 14 3.3V1
15 15 GND
16 16 LIMT_R_SW
3 3 10 3 17 17 3.3V1
PFFS1 2 2 11 2 18 18 FD_R_SW
1 1 12 1 19 19 GND
2 2 PFMPWB
PFPCUSW 1 1
1 A10 10
2 A9 9 YC14
3 A8 8 1 1 HCUSW
4 A7 7 2 2 GND HET-1 1 1 1 1 HT_LIVE
5 A6 6 3 3 24V3 HET-2 2 2 2 2 HT_COM
6 A5 5 4 4 RESOL_ACT 3 3 GND
7 A4 4 5 5 RESOL_KEP
1 12 8 A3 3 6 6 24V3 Side feeder
2 11 9 A2 2 7 7 PF_L_SOL_ACT
3 10 10 A1 1 8 8 PF_L_SOL_KEP SD_1 1 11 1 1 SID_CLK1
SD_2 2 10 2 2 SID_SDO1
SD_3 3 9 3 3 SID_SEL1
3 3 4 9 SD_4 4 8 4 4 SID_SDI1
PFPS2 2 2 5 8 SD_5 5 7 5 5 SID_RDY1
1 1 6 7 SD_6 6 6 6 6 SID_PAU1
SD_7 7 5 7 7 TANDEM_CAS1_OPEN
3 3 7 6 SD_8 8 4 8 8 TANDEM_CAS2_OPEN
PFLS2 2 2 8 5 YC4 SD_9 9 3 9 9 SIDE_MULTI_OPEN
1 1 9 4 1 B1 12 1 1 3.3V3 SD_10 10 2 10 10 +3.3V4
2 B2 11 2 2 GND SD_11 11 1 11 11 GND
3 B3 10 3 3 EMPTY_L_SW 12 12
3 3 10 3 4 B4 9 4 4 3.3V3 13 13
PFFS2 2 2 11 2 5 B5 8 5 5 GND 14 14
1 1 12 1 6 B6 7 6 6 LIMIT_L_SW 15 15
7 B7 6 7 7 3.3V3 16 16
8 B8 5 8 8 FD_L_SW YC12
9 B9 4 9 9 GND 24V 3 3 1 1 24V
3 3 10 B10 3 10 10 3.3V3 GND 2 2 2 2 GND
PFPCS2 2 2 11 B11 2 11 11 GND GND 1 1 3 3 GND
1 1 12 B12 1 12 12 HFDSW 4 4
YC15
PF_R_CL 1 1 3 3
YC16 24V1 2 2 1 1 PFPFCL1
6 6 1 1 CW/CCW HFDCL1 3 3
5 5 2 2 Ready 24V1 4 4 3 3
4 4 3 3 Clock HFDCL2 5 5 1 1 PFPCCL2
PFPFM 3 3 4 4 Remote 24V1 6 6
2 2 5 5 GND PF_L_CL 7 7 3 3
1 1 6 6 24[V] 24V1 8 8 1 1 PFPCCL3
3 3
1 1 PFPFCL2
2N3/2N2-1
2N3/2N2-2
No.13
YC10 YC1 DPSPWB
DPMPWB CIS_TMG_SW 1 1 14 14 CIS_TMG_SW CISPWB
ISCPWB SHD_CLK 2 2 13 13 CPU_SCLK
SHD_SO 3 3 12 12 CPU_SI
YC12 YC1 SHD_SEL 4 4 11 11 CPU_SEL YC2
GND 1 1 1 1 FG SHD_PAGEST 5 5 10 10 CPU_PAGEST GND A1 1 1 A1 GND
DP_PAGEST 2 2 2 2 ENG_PAGEST RESETN 6 6 9 9 RESETN CK1 A2 2 2 A2 CK
DP_RDY 3 3 3 3 ENG_RDY SHD_OVMON 7 7 8 8 CPU_OVM GND A3 3 3 A3 GND
DP_SEL 4 4 4 4 ENG_SEL SHD_SI 8 8 7 7 CPU_SO ST1 A4 4 4 A4 SP
DP_CLK 5 5 5 5 ENG_CLK SHD_RDY 9 9 6 6 CPU_SRDY GND A5 5 5 A5 GND
DP_SO 6 6 6 6 ENG_SI NC 10 10 5 5 NC MODE A6 6 6 A6 MODE
DP_SI 7 7 7 7 ENG_SO 24V 11 11 4 4 24V GND A7 7 7 A7 GND
DP_OPEN 8 8 8 8 DP_OPEN 24V 12 12 3 3 24V VREF A8 8 8 A8 VREF
RESERVE 9 9 9 9 NC(GND) GND 13 13 2 2 GND GND A9 9 9 A9 GND
GND 10 10 10 10 GND GND 14 14 1 1 GND GND A10 10 10 A10 GND
GND 11 11 11 11 GND GND A11 11 11 A11 GND
GND 12 12 12 12 GND LED4R_C A12 12 12 A12 LED4_R
RESERVE 13 13 13 13 NC(GND) LED4G_C A13 13 13 A13 LED4_G
24V 14 14 14 14 24V YC2 YC3 LED4B_C A14 14 14 A14 LED4_B
24V 15 15 15 15 24V GND 1 1 1 1 GND LED4_A A15 15 15 A15 VLED4
24V 16 16 16 16 24V HTPDN 2 2 2 2 HTPDN LED1_A A16 16 16 A16 VLED1
LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN LED1R_C A17 17 17 A17 LED1_R
DPRPWB GND 4 4 4 4 GND LED1G_C A18 18 18 A18 LED1_G
Rx0N 5 5 5 5 Tx0N LED1B_C A19 19 19 A19 LED1_B
Rx0P 6 6 6 6 Tx0P LED2R_C A20 20 20 A20 LED2_R
GND 7 7 7 7 GND LED2G_C A21 21 21 A21 LED2_G
LED2B_C A22 22 22 A22 LED2_B
LED2_A A23 23 23 A23 VLED2
YC4_A LED3_A A24 24 24 A24 VLED3
ANODE 3 3 A1 A1 ANODE YC4 LED3R_C A25 25 25 A25 LED3_R
DPLS1 GND
LF_UPSW
2
1
2
1
A2
A3
A2
A3
GND
LF_UPSW
3.3V 1 1 3 3 3.3V LED3G_C A26 26 26 A26 LED3_G
A4 A4 GND DPCS CIS_TMG_SW
GND
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
CIS_TMG_SW
GND
LED3B_C
GND
A27
A28
27
28
27
28
A27
A28
LED3_B
GND
A5 A5 FD_SW GND A29 29 29 A29 GND
A6 A6 3.3V GND A30 30 30 A30 GND
GND 3 3 A7 A7 NC
YC2 GND A31 31 31 A31 GND
DPFS FD_SW
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A8
A9
A8
A9
NC
NC
3.3V 1 1 4 4 3.3V GND A32 32 32 A32 GND
GND 2 2 3 3 GND GND A33 33 33 A33 GND
A10
A11
A10
A11
ANODE
GND
LNG_SW 3 3 2 2 LNG_SW DPOLSW GND A34 34 34 A34 GND
LNG_CLK 4 4 1 1 LNG_CLK GND A35 35 35 A35 GND
A12 A12 EXIT_SW GND A36 36 36 A36 GND
GND 5 5
A13 A13 NC 3.3V_CIS A37 37 37 A37 3.3V
SET_SW 6 6
3.3V 7 7 3.3V_CIS A38 38 38 A38 3.3V
ANODE 8 8 3 3 GND 3.3V_CIS A39 39 39 A39 3.3V
ANODE 3 3 1 9
GND
LF_DNSW
9
10
9
10
2
1
2
1
SET_SW
3.3V
DPOS GND
GND
A40
B1
40
41
40
41
A40
B1
GND
GND
DPES GND
EXIT_SW
2
1
2
1
2
3
Relay 8
7
WIDE3 11 11 GND B2 42 42 B2 GND
WIDE2 12 12 OS_1 B3 43 43 B3 OS1
GND 13 13 GND B4 44 44 B4 GND
WIDE1 14 14 3 3 ANODE OS2 B5 45 45 B5 OS2
YC4_B
B1 B1 NC
2
1
2
1
GND
LF_DNSW
DPLS2 GND
OS3
B6
B7
46
47
46
47
B6
B7
GND
OS3
LED_PW 2 2 1 2 B2 B2 LED_PW
DPLPWB LED_REM 1 1 2
Relay
1 B3 B3 LED_REM
GND
OS4
B8
B9
48
49
48
49
B8
B9
GND
OS4
B4 B4 GND GND B10 50 50 B10 GND
B5 B5 GND OS5 B11 51 51 B11 OS5
4 4 WIDE3
B6 B6 CCD_TMG_SW GND B12 52 52 B12 GND
3 3 WIDE2
GND 3 3 4 6
B7
B8
B7
B8
3.3V
ANODE
2 2 GND DPOWSW OS6 B13 53 53 B13 OS6
1 1 WIDE1 GND B14 54 54 B14 GND
DPTS CCD_TMG_SW
3.3V
2
1
2
1
5
6
Relay 5
4
B9
B10
B9
B10
GND
DP_OPEN
OS7 B15 55 55 B15 OS7
GND B16 56 56 B16 GND
B11 B11 ANODE OS8 B17 57 57 B17 OS8
B12 B12 GND YC5 2 2 NC GND B18 58 58 B18 GND
B13 B13 SKEW_SW FEED3_OUT2B 1 1 6 6 B/ OS9 B19 59 59 B19 OS9
ANODE 3 3 7 3 FEED1_OUT2A 2 2 4 4 B
DPOCSW GND 2 2 8 Relay 2 FEED2_OUT1A 3 3 1 1 A DPOFM GND
OS10
B20
B21
60
61
60
61
B20
B21
GND
OS10
DP_OPEN 1 1 9 1 FEED4_OUT1B 4 4 3 3 A/ GND B22 62 62 B22 GND
RGST3_OUT2B 5 5 5 5 NC OS11 B23 63 63 B23 OS11
RGST1_OUT2A 6 6 GND B24 64 64 B24 GND
RGST2_OUT1A 7 7 OS12 B25 65 65 B25 OS12
RGST4_OUT1B 8 8 6 6 NC GND B26 66 66 B26 GND
LIFT3_OUT2B 9 9 3 3 B/ OS13 B27 67 67 B27 OS13
LIFT1_OUT2A 10 10 5 5 B
LIFT2_OUT1A 11 11 4 4 A DPRM GND
OS14
B28
B29
68
69
68
69
B28
B29
GND
OS14
LIFT4_OUT1B 12 12 2 2 A/ GND B30 70 70 B30 GND
1 1 NC OS15 B31 71 71 B31 OS15
GND B32 72 72 B32 GND
OS16 B33 73 73 B33 OS16
4 4 B3 GND B34 74 74 B34 GND
YC6 2 2 B1
COM 1 1 1 24V 1 1 A1 DPLM OS17 B35 75 75 B35 OS17
DPILSW NO 2 2 2 NC 3 3 A3
GND
OS18
B36
B37
76
77
76 B36 GND
77 B37 OS18
3 3 R24V GND B38 78 78 B38 GND
GND B39 79 79 B39 GND
YC7 YC14 2 2 NC GND B40 80 80 B40 GND
CNVY4_OUT2B 1 1 6 6 B/
2 1 1 1 R24V
DPFM1 1
Relay
2 2 2 FAN_REM1
CNVY3_OUT2A
CNVY2_OUT1B
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
3
B
A/ DPOCM
CNVY1_OUT1A 4 4 1 1 A
RVRS4_OUT1B 5 5 5 5 NC
YC8 RVRS2_OUT1A 6 6
2 1 1 1 R24V
DPFM2 1
Relay
2 2 2 FAN_REM2
RVRS1_OUT2A
RVRS3_OUT2B
7
8
7
8 1 1 NC
2 2 A/
4 4 A
5 5 B/ DPEM
3 3 B
6 6 NC
YC11
SCLK 1
SDA 2
1Piece_SIG 3
2Piece_SIG 4
GND 5
3.3V 6
GND 7
24V 8
2-4-50
1-1 INSTALLATION GUIDE
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR
SIDE DECK
English
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines, and 35, 45 and 55 ppm monochrome
machines.
References to high-speed MFPs in this document denote 65/65 and 75/70 ppm color machines, and 65 and 80 ppm monochrome machines.
Français
Dans le présent document, les références aux MFP à vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 et 55/50 ppm et aux
machines monochromes 35, 45 et 55 ppm.
Dans le présent document, les références aux MFP à grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines mono-
chromes 65 et 80 ppm.
Español
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm y a las
máquinas monocromáticas de 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las máquinas mono-
cromáticas de 65 y 80 ppm.
Deutsch
Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 35,
45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen.
Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm Mono-
chrommaschinen.
Italiano
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 e 55/50 ppm, e le macchine
monocromatiche 35, 45 e 55 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocromatiche 65
e 80 ppm.
简体中文
本文中的中速 MFP 代表彩色 30/30 页机型、35/35 页机型、45/45 页机型、55/50 页机型、黑白 35 页机型、45 页机型、55 页机型。
本文中的高速 MFP 代表彩色 65/65 页机型、75/70 页机型、黑白 65 页机型、80 页机型。
한국어
본문 중 중속 MFP 는 컬러 30/30 매기 , 35/35 매기 , 45/45 매기 , 55/50 매기 , 흑백 35 매기 , 45 매기 , 55 매기를 나타냅니다 .
본문 중 고속 MFP 는 컬러 65/65 매기 , 75/70 매기 , 흑백 65 매기 , 80 매기를 나타냅니다 .
日本語
本文中の中速 MFP はカラー機の 30/30 枚機、35/35 枚機、45/45 枚機、55/50 枚機、モノクロ機の 35 枚機、45 枚機、55 枚機を表す。
本文中の高速 MFP はカラー機の 65/65 枚機、75/70 枚機、モノクロ機の 65 枚機、 80 枚機を表す。
B E G (2) I
A D (2) F (M4x8)(8) H (6) J (M4x10) K
C *H (3)
**H (1)
Supplied parts G. Paper size plate ......................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
A. Side feeder ................................................ 1 H. Media type plate(except for 120V model) .. 6 material from supplied parts.
B. Large base slider ....................................... 1 *H.Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 3
C. Small base slider ....................................... 1 I. Cover plate ................................................ 1
D. Lock pin ..................................................... 2 J. M4 × 10 tapping screw............................... 1
E. Switch press plate ..................................... 1 K. Film ............................................................ 1
F. M4 × 8 screw ............................................. 8
Pièces fournies G. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 2 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
A. Plateau d'alimentation latéral..................... 1 H. Plaquette du type de support..................... 6 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
B. Grande règle de base................................ 1 I. Capot ......................................................... 1 pièces fournies.
C. Petite règle de base................................... 1 J. Vis de connexion M4 × 10 ......................... 1
D. Broche de verrouillage............................... 2 K. Film ..................................................................... 1
E. Plaque de pression de l'interrupteur .......... 1
F. Vis M4 × 8.................................................. 8
Partes suministradas G. Placa de tamaño de papel ......................... 2 Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
A. Alimentador lateral..................................... 1 H. Placa de tipo de medio .............................. 6 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
B. Deslizador de base grande........................ 1 I. Tapa ........................................................... 1 das.
C. Deslizador de base pequeño..................... 1 J. Tornillo de roscado M4 × 10 ...................... 1
D. Clavija de bloqueo ..................................... 2 K. Película .......................................................... 1
E. Placa de presión del interruptor................. 1
F. Tornillo M4 × 8 ........................................... 8
Gelieferte Teile G. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 2 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dämpfungs-
A. Seitlicher Einzug........................................ 1 H. Medientypkarte .......................................... 6 material vollständig von den mitgelieferten
B. Großer Basis-Schieber .............................. 1 I. Abdeckplatte .............................................. 1 Teilen.
C. Kleiner Basis-Schieber .............................. 1 J. M4 × 10 Schneidschraube......................... 1
D. Arretierstift ................................................. 2 K. Film ..................................................................1
E. Schalterdruckplatte.................................... 1
F. M4 × 8 Schraube ....................................... 8
Parti di fornitura G. Piastra formato carta ................................. 2 Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il
A. Unità di alimentazione laterale................... 1 H. Piastra tipo carta........................................ 6 materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite.
B. Scivolo di base grande .............................. 1 I. Coperchio .................................................. 1
C. Scivolo di base piccolo .............................. 1 J. Vite autofilettante M4 × 10 ......................... 1
D. Perno di bloccaggio ................................... 2 K. Pellicola ..................................................... 1
E. Piastra spingi interruttore........................... 1
F. Vite M4 × 8 ................................................ 8
附属品 F. M4×8 螺丝 ............................8 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
A. 侧供纸盒............................. 1 G. 纸张尺寸标示 .........................2 下。
B. 底座滑板（大）........................ 1 **H.纸张种类标示 ........................1
C. 底座滑板（小）........................ 1 I. 盖板 .................................1
D. 锁定插销............................. 2 J. M4×10 自攻螺丝 .......................1
E. 开关挡板............................. 1 K. 胶片 .................................1
동봉품 F. 나사 M4×8......................................... 8 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
A. 사이드피더......................................... 1 G. 용지크기 플레이트............................... 2 우에는 반드시 제거할 것 .
B. 베이스 슬라이더 대.............................. 1 **H.용지종류 플레이트 ............................. 1
C. 베이스 슬라이더 소.............................. 1 I. 커버 플레이트..................................... 1
D. 잠금 핀.............................................. 2 J. 탑핑 나사 M4×10 ................................ 1
E. 스위치 판........................................... 1 K. 필름.................................................. 1
同梱品 G. 用紙サイズプレート ...................2 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合
A. サイドフィーダー..................... 1 **H.用紙種類プレート ....................1 は、
必ず取り外すこと。
B. ベーススライダー大................... 1 I. カバープレート .......................1
C. ベーススライダー小................... 1 J. タッピングビス M4×10 .................1
D. ロックピン........................... 2 K. フィルム .............................1
E. スイッチ当たり板..................... 1
F. ビス M4×8 ........................... 8
1
3
2
Procedure Installation on medium-speed MFPs
Be sure to turn the MFP main power switch off If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 10.
and disconnect the MFP power plug from the 1.Open the lower right cover (1) on the MFP.
wall outlet before starting to install the side Remove the strap (2) from the shaft (3) and remove lower right cover (1).
feeder.
Procédure Montage sur des MFP à vitesse moyenne
Veiller à bien mettre l’interrupteur principal du Si le montage est fait sur un MFP à grande vitesse, passer à l'étape 10.
MFP hors tension et à débrancher la fiche d’ali- 1.Ouvrir le couvercle inférieur droit (1) du MFP.
mentation du MFP de la prise murale avant de Déposer la courroie (2) de l'arbre (3) et déposer le couvercle inférieur droit (1).
commencer l’installation du plateau d'alimenta-
tion latéral.
Procedimiento Instalación en las MFP de velocidad media
Asegúrese de apagar el interruptor principal del Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al paso 10.
MFP y de desconectar el enchufe del MFP del 1.Abra la cubierta frontal inferior (1) del MFP.
receptáculo de pared antes de empezar a insta- Quite la correa (2) del eje (3) y quite la cubierta frontal inferior (1).
lar el alimentador lateral.
Verfahren Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse
Schalten Sie unbedingt den Hauptschalter des Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 10.
MFP aus, und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des 1.Die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) am MFP öffnen.
MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab, bevor Sie mit Den Riemen (2) von der Welle (3) abnehmen und dann die untere rechte Abdeckung (1)
der Installation des seitlichen Einzugs beginnen. abnehmen.
Procedura Installazione sulle MFP a velocità media
Prima di iniziare la procedura di installazione Se si installa su una MFP a velocità alta, procedere al passo 10.
dell’unità di alimentazione laterale, assicurarsi di 1.Aprire il coperchio destro inferiore (1) sull'MFP.
spegnere l’interruttore principale di alimentazi- Rimuovere la cinghietta (2) dall'asta (3) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio destro inferiore (1).
one dell’MFP, e di scollegare la spina del cavo di
alimentazione dalla presa elettrica a muro.
安装步骤 安装于中速 MFP 上时
安装侧供纸盒时，必须先关闭 MFP 主机上的主电 安装于高速 MFP 上时，进至步骤 10。
源开关，并拔出电源插头后方可进行工作。 1.打开 MFP 主机的右下部盖板 (1)。
将带子 (2) 从轴 (3) 上拆除，拆下右下部盖板 (1)。
설치순서 중속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우
사이드피더를 설치할 때에는 반드시 MFP 본체 고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우에는 순서 10 로 진행합니다 .
의 주전원 스위치를 OFF 로 하고 전원 프러그를 1.MFP 본체의 오른쪽 아래 커버 (1) 를 엽니다 .
뺀 후 작업을 할 것 . 스트라프 (2) 를 축 (3) 에서 떼어내 오른쪽 아래 커버 (1) 를 제거합니다 .
取付手順 中速 MFP に設置の場合
サイドフィーダーを設置するときは、 必ず MFP 高速 MFP に設置の場合は手順 10 に進む。
本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、電源プラグ 1.MFP 本体の右下カバー(1) を開く。
を抜いてから作業すること。 ストラップ (2) を軸 (3) から外し、右下カバー(1) を取り外す。
2
7
10
4
5 7
5 6 10 11
2.Open the MFP paper conveying cover (4). 4.Remove 3 screws (7) and remove the front 5.Remove 3 screws (10). Remove the lower
3.Open the panel (6) on the MFP front right right cover (5). right rear cover (11).
cover (5).
2.Ouvrir le capot du transport du papier du 4.Déposer les 3 vis (7) et déposer le capot 5.Déposer les 3 vis (10). Déposer le capot arri-
MFP (4). avant droit (5). ère droit inférieur (11).
3.Ouvrir le panneau (6) sur le capot avant droit
du MFP (5).
2.Abra la cubierta de transporte del papel del 4.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y quite la cubierta 5.Quite los 3 tornillos (10). Quite la cubierta
MFP (4). delantera derecha (5). trasera inferior derecha (11).
3.Abra el panel (6) en la cubierta delantera
derecha (5).
2.Öffnen Sie die Papierförderabdeckung (4) 4.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (7) und nehmen 5.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (10). Nehmen
des MFP. Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (5) ab. Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (11)
3.Öffnen Sie die Platte (6) der vorderen ab.
rechten Abdeckung (5) des MFP.
2.Aprire il coperchio (4) dell'unità di trasporto 4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7), e quindi rimuovere il 5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (10). Rimuovere il coper-
carta dell'MFP. coperchio destro posteriore (5). chio posteriore inferiore destro (11).
3.Aprire il pannello (6) sul coperchio destro
anteriore (5) dell'MFP.
2.打开 MFP 主机的供纸盖板 (4)。 4.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (7)，拆下右前部盖板 (5)。 5.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (10)。 拆下右下后部盖板
3.打开 MFP 主机的右前部盖板 (5) 的盖子 (6)。 (11)。
2.MFP 본체의 반송커버 (4) 를 엽니다 . 4.나사 (7) 3 개를 제거하고 우측 전면커버 (5) 5.나사 (10) 3 개를 제거합니다 . 우측 하단 뒷
3.MFP 본체의 우측 전면커버 (5) 의 뚜껑 (6) 를 떼어 냅니다 . 커버 (11) 를 제거합니다 .
을 엽니다 .
2.MFP 本体の搬送カバー(4) を開く。 4.ビス (7)3 本を外し、右前カバー(5) を取り 5.ビス (10)3 本を外す。右下後カバー(11) を
3.MFP 本体の右前カバー(5) のふた (6) を開 外す。 取り外す。
く。
3
52
21 22
53
5 11
6.Remove the breakaway cover (52) from the paper feeder lower right cover (53). 7.Remove the breakaway cover (21) from the
front right cover (5) and the breakaway cover
(22) from the lower right rear cover (11).
6.Retirez le capot détachable (52) du capot inférieur droit du chargeur de papier (53). 7.Déposer le couvercle amovible (21) du capot
avant droit (5) et le couvercle amovible (22)
du capot arrière inférieur droit (11).
6.Quite la cubierta de separación (52) de la cubierta inferior derecha del depósito de papel (53). 7.Quite la cubierta divisoria (21) de la cubierta
delantera derecha (5) y la cubierta divisoria
(22) de la cubierta trasera inferior derecha
(11).
6.Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (52) von der untere rechte Abdeckung (53) des Papiere- 7.Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (21)
inzugs ab. von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung (5) ab
und die Ablösungsabdeckung (22) von der
unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung (11).
6.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (52) dal coperchio destro inferiore (53) dell'unità di alimentazi- 7.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (21) dal
one carta. coperchio destro anteriore (5), e il coperchio
di distacco (22) dal coperchio posteriore
inferiore destro (11).
6.去除供纸盒的右下部盖板（53）上的可去除部（52）。 7.切除右前部盖板 (5) 的切割盖板 (21) 和右下
后部盖板 (11) 的切割盖板 (22)。
6.용지 급지대의 우측 하단커버 (53) 의 분할커버부 (52) 를 떼어 냅니다 . 7.우측 전면커버 (5) 의 분할커버 (21) 와 오른
쪽 하단 뒷커버 (11) 의 분할커버 (22) 를 떼
어 냅니다 .
6.ペーパーフィーダーの右下カバー (53) の割りカバー部 (52) を切り取る。 7.右前カバー(5) の割りカバー(21) と右下後
カバー(11) の割りカバー(22) を切り取る。
4
24
1mm
1
1mm
0mm
1mm
23
K
8.Remove the panel (23) from the MFP lower 9.After using alcohol to clean place adhering the film, adhere the film (K) in the position (24) indi-
right cover (1) with a flat blade screwdriver. cated in the illustration.
Proceed to step 21
8.Déposer le panneau (23) du capot inférieur 9.Coller le film (K) sur l'emplacement (24) indiqué dans l'illustration, après avoir soigneusement
droit du MFP (1) en procédant à l'aide d'un nettoyé cet emplacement à l'alcool.
tournevis à lame. Passer à l'étape 21.
8.Extraiga el panel (23) de la cubierta derecha 9.Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la película, pegue la
inferior del MFP (1) con un destornillador de película (K) en el lugar (24) que se indica en la ilustración.
pala plana. Vaya al paso 21.
8.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben- 9.Zum Anbringen des Films (K) die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film (K) dann in der in
dreher die Platte (23) von der unteren rech- der Abbildung angegebenen Position (24) anbringen.
ten Abdeckung (1) des MFP ab. Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 21.
8.Rimuovere il pannello (23) dal coperchio 9.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola, far aderire la pellicola
destro inferiore (1) dell'MFP con un caccia- (K) nella posizione (24) indicata nell'illustrazione.
vite a testa piana. Procedere al passo 21.
8.使用一字螺丝刀将 MFP 主机的右下部盖板 9.使用酒精对薄膜粘贴位置进行清洁后，按插图位置 (24) 粘贴薄膜（K）。
(1) 的盖子 (23) 拆下。 进至步骤 21。
8.MFP 본체의 우측 뒷커버 (1) 의 뚜껑 (23) 을 9.필름 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 , 일러스트의 위치 (24) 에 맞춰 필름（K）을 부착합니다 .
마이너스 드라이버로 제거합니다 . 순서 21 로 진행합니다 .
8.MFP 本体の右下カバー(1) のふた (23) をマ 9.フィルム貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後、
イラストの位置 (24) にあわせて、フィルム（K）
を貼
イナスドライバーで取り外す。 り付ける。
手順 21 に進む。
5
30
27
29
26
25
28
Installation on high-speed MFPs 11.Open the right cover 2 (28) on the MFP.
10.Open the right cover 1 (25) on the MFP. Remove the strap (29) from the right cover shaft (30) and remove the
Remove the strap (26) from the shaft (27) and remove right cover 1 right cover 2 (28).
(25).
Montage sur des MFP à grande vitesse 11.Ouvrir le capot droit 2 (28) du MFP.
10.Ouvrir le capot droit 1 (25) du MFP. Déposer la courroie (29) de l'axe du capot droit (30) et déposer le
Déposer la courroie (26) de l'arbre (27) et déposer le capot droit 1 (25). capot droit 2 (28).
Instalación en las MFP de alta velocidad 11.Abra la cubierta derecha 2 (28) del MFP.
10.Abra la cubierta derecha 1 (25) del MFP. Quite la correa (29) del eje de la cubierta derecha (30) y quite la cubi-
Quite la correa (26) del eje (27) y quite la cubierta derecha 1 (25). erta derecha 2 (28).
Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 11.Die rechte Abdeckung 2 (28) am MFP öffnen.
10.Die rechte Abdeckung 1 (25) am MFP öffnen. Nehmen Sie den Riemen (29) von der Welle (30) der rechten Abdeck-
Den Riemen (26) von der Welle (27) abnehmen und dann die rechte ung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 2 (28) ab.
Abdeckung 1 (25) abnehmen.
Installazione sulle MFP a velocità alta 11.Aprire il coperchio destro 2 (28) sull'MFP.
10.Aprire il coperchio destro 1 (25) sull'MFP. Rimuovere la cinghietta (29) dall'asta (30) del coperchio destro e quindi
Rimuovere la cinghietta (26) dall'asta (27) e quindi rimuovere il coper- rimuovere il coperchio destro 2 (28).
chio destro 1 (25).
安装于高速 MFP 上时 11.打开 MFP 主机的右部盖板 2(28)。
10.打开 MFP 主机的右部盖板 1(25)。 从右盖板的轴 (30) 上拆除挂绳 (29)，拆下右盖板 2(28)。
将带子 (26) 从轴 (27) 上拆除，拆下右部盖板 1(25)。
고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우 11.MFP 본체의 우측커버 2 (28) 를 엽니다 .
10.MFP 본체의 우측커버 1 (25) 를 엽니다 . 스트랩 (29) 을 우측커버의 축 (30) 에서 떼어내고 우측커버 2 (28) 를
스트라프 (26) 를 축 (27) 에서 떼어내 우측커버 1 (25) 를 제거합니다 . 제거합니다 .
高速 MFP に設置の場合 11.MFP 本体の右カバー2(28) を開く。
10.MFP 本体の右カバー1(25) を開く。 ストラップ (29) を右カバーの軸 (30) から外し、右カバー2(28) を取
ストラップ (26) を軸 (27) から外し、右カバー1(25) を取り外す。 り外す。
6
32
33 59
34
37
59
34
31 34
59 38
32 32
12.Open the MFP paper conveying cover (31). 14.Remove the 4 screws (34) and release the 4 15.Remove the panel (38) from the lower right
13.Open the panel (33) on the MFP front right hooks (59). Then remove the front right rear cover (37) with a flat blade screwdriver.
cover (32). cover (32).
12.Ouvrir le capot du transport du papier du 14.Retirer les 4 vis (34) et libérer les 4 crochets 15.Déposer le panneau (38) du capot arrière
MFP (31). (59). Retirer ensuite le capot avant droit (32). inférieur droit (37) en procédant à l'aide d'un
13.Ouvrir le panneau (33) sur le capot avant tournevis à lame.
droit du MFP (32).
12.Abra la cubierta de transporte del papel del 14.Quite los 4 tornillos (34) y libere los 4 gan- 15.Extraiga el panel (38) de la cubierta trasera
MFP (31). chos (59). Después, quite la cubierta frontal inferior derecha (37) con un destornillador
13.Abra el panel (33) en la cubierta delantera derecha (32). de pala plana.
derecha (32).
12.Öffnen Sie die Papierförderabdeckung (31) 14.Entfernen Sie die 4 Schrauben (34) und 15.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben-
des MFP. lösen Sie die 4 Haken (59). Danach nehmen dreher die Platte (38) von der unteren rech-
13.Öffnen Sie die Platte (33) der vorderen Sie die rechte vordere Abdeckung (32) ab. ten hinteren Abdeckung (37) ab.
rechten Abdeckung (32) des MFP.
12.Aprire il coperchio (31) dell'unità di trasporto 14.Rimuovere le 4 viti (34) e rilasciare i 4 ganci 15.Rimuovere il pannello (38) dal coperchio
carta dell'MFP. (59). Rimuovere quindi il coperchio anteriore posteriore inferiore destro (37) con un cac-
13.Aprire il pannello (33) sul coperchio destro destro (32). ciavite a testa piana.
anteriore (32) dell'MFP.
12.打开 MFP 主机的供纸盖板 (31)。 14.卸下 4 颗螺丝（34）并松开 4 个卡扣（59）。 15.用一字螺丝刀等取下右下盖板（37）的盖子
13.打开 MFP 主机的右前部盖板 (32) 的盖子 然后卸下右前盖板（32）。 （38）。
(33)。
12.MFP 본체의 반송커버 (31) 를 엽니다 . 14.나사 (34) 4 개를 제거하고 후크 (59) 4 개를 15.우측 아래뒷면 커버 (37) 의 뚜껑 (38) 을 마
13.MFP 본체의 우측 전면커버 (32) 의 뚜껑 풉니다 . 그런 다음 우측 전면 커버 (32) 를 이너스 드라이버 등으로 풉니다 .
(33) 을 엽니다 . 제거합니다 .
12.MFP 本体の搬送カバー(31) を開く。 14.ビス (34)4 本およびフック (59)4 箇所を外 15.右下後カバー(37) のふた (38) をマイナス
13.MFP 本体の右前カバー(32) のふた (33) を開 し、右前カバー(32) を取り外す。 ドライバーなどで取る。
く。
7
42 43
37
39
39
55
39 54 32 37
39
16.Remove 5 screws (39).Remove the lower 17.Remove the breakaway cover (54) from the 18.Remove the breakaway cover (42) from the
right rear cover (37). lower right cover (55) . front right cover (32) and the breakaway
cover (43) from the lower right rear cover
(37).
16.Déposer les 5 vis (39). Déposer le capot arri- 17.Retirez le capot détachable (54) du capot 18.Déposer le couvercle amovible (42) du capot
ère inférieur droit (37). inférieur droit (55). avant droit (32) et le couvercle amovible (43)
du capot arrière inférieur droit (37).
16.Quite los 5 tornillos (39). Quite la cubierta 17.Quite la cubierta de separación (54) de la 18.Quite la cubierta divisoria (42) de la cubierta
trasera inferior derecha (37). cubierta inferior derecha (55). delantera derecha (32) y la cubierta divisoria
(43) de la cubierta trasera inferior derecha
(37).
16.Entfernen Sie 5 Schrauben (39). Nehmen 17.Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (54) 18.Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (42)
Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung von untere rechte Abdeckung (55) ab. von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung (32)
(37) ab. ab und die Ablösungsabdeckung (43) von
der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung
(37).
16.Rimuovere le 5 viti (39). Rimuovere il coper- 17.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (54) dal 18.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (42) dal
chio posteriore inferiore destro (37). coperchio destro inferiore (55) . coperchio destro anteriore (32), e il coper-
chio di distacco (43) dal coperchio posteriore
inferiore destro (37).
16.拆除 5 颗螺丝 (39)。拆下右下后部盖板 17.去除右下部盖板 (55) 上的可去除部（54）。 18.切除右前部盖板 (32) 的切割盖板 (42) 和右
(37)。 下后部盖板 (37) 的切割盖板 (43)。
16.나사 (39) 5 개를 제거합니다 . 우측 하단 뒷 17.우측 하단커버 (55) 의 분할커버부 (54) 를 18.우측 전면커버 (32) 의 분할커버 (42) 와 오른
커버 (37) 를 제거합니다 . 떼어 냅니다 . 쪽 하단 뒷커버 (37) 의 분할커버 (43) 를 떼
어 냅니다 .
16.ビス (39)5 本を外す。 右下後カバー(37) 17.右下カバー(55) の割りカバー部 (54) を切 18.右前カバー(32) の割りカバー(42) と右下後
を取り外す。 り取る。 カバー(37) の割りカバー(43) を切り取る。
8
25
44
19.Remove the panel (44) from the MFP right cover 1 (25) with a flat blade screwdriver.
19.Déposer le panneau (44) du capot droit 1 du MFP (25) en procédant à l'aide d'un tournevis à
lame.
19.Extraiga el panel (44) de la cubierta derecha 1 del MFP (25) con un destornillador de pala plana.
19.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (44) von der rechten Abdeckung 1
(25) des MFP ab.
19.Rimuovere il pannello (44) dal coperchio destro 1 (25) dell'MFP con un cacciavite a testa piana.
19.使用一字螺丝刀将 MFP 主机的右部盖板 1(25) 的盖子 (44) 拆下。
19.MFP 본체의 우측커버 1 (25) 의 뚜껑 (44) 을마이너스 드라이버로 제거합니다 .
19.MFP 本体の右カバー1(25) のふた (44) をマイナスドライバーで取り外す。
9
51
1mm
1mm
0mm
F (M4x8)
1mm
D
K
20.After using alcohol to clean place adhering the film, adhere the film (K) in the position (51) indi- 21.Install a lock pin (D) on the front right of the
cated in the illustration. MFP using an M4 × 8 screw (F).
20.Coller le film (K) sur l'emplacement (51) indiqué dans l'illustration, après avoir soigneusement 21.Monter une broche de verrouillage (D) à
nettoyé cet emplacement à l'alcool. droite et à l'avant du MFP en procédant à
l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (F).
20.Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la película, pegue la 21.Instale una clavija de bloqueo (D) en la parte
película (K) en el lugar (51) que se indica en la ilustración. derecha frontal del MFP usando un tornillo
M4 × 8 (F).
20.Zum Anbringen des Films (K) die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film (K) dann in der in 21.Bringen Sie mit einer M4 × 8 Schraube (F)
der Abbildung angegebenen Position (51) anbringen. den Arretierungsstift (D) vorne rechts am
MFP an.
20.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola, far aderire la pellicola 21.Installare un perno di bloccaggio (D) sulla
(K) nella posizione (51) indicata nell'illustrazione. parte anteriore destra dell'MFP utilizzando
una vite M4 × 8 (F).
20.使用酒精对薄膜粘贴位置进行清洁后，按插图位置 (51) 粘贴薄膜（K）。 21.使用 1 颗 M4×8 螺丝 (F) 将锁定插销 (D) 安
装到 MFP 主机的右前侧。
20.필름 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 , 일러스트의 위치 (51) 에 맞춰 필름（K）을 부착합니다 . 21.나사 M4×8(F) １개로 잠금 핀 (D) 을 MFP
본체 우측 전면쪽에 설치합니다 .
20.フィルム貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後、
イラストの位置（51）
にあわせて、フィルム
（K）を貼り 21.ビス M4×8(F)1 本で、
ロックピン (D) を MFP
付ける。 本体右前側に取り付ける。
10
46 C
B
D
45
F (M4x8)
22.Install a lock pin (D) on the rear right of the 23.Place the small base slider (C) on the large base slider (B). Place so that the bend (46) on the
MFP using an M4 × 8 screw (F) in the same small base slider (C) abuts inside the rest (45) at the end of the large base slider (B).
way.
22.Monter une broche de verrouillage (D) à 23.Placer la petite règle de base (C) sur la grande règle de base (B). Disposer la petite règle de
droite et à l'arrière du MFP en procédant de base (C) de sorte que son extrémité repliée (46) s'encastre dans la butée (45) à l'extrémité de la
la même manière à l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 grande règle de base (B).
(F).
22.Instale una clavija de bloqueo (D) en la parte 23.Coloque el deslizador de base pequeño (C) sobre el deslizador de base grande (B). Haga que la
derecha frontal del MFP usando un tornillo dobladura (46) del deslizador de base pequeño (C) quede en el interior del apoyo (45) del
M4 × 8 (F). extremo del deslizador de base grande (B).
22.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise mit einer M4 23.Setzen Sie den kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) auf den großen Basis-Schieber (B). Setzen Sie ihn so
× 8 Schraube (F) den Arretierungsstift (D) auf, dass die Biegung (46) am kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) innerhalb der Auflage (45) am Ende
hinten rechts am MFP an. des großen Basis-Schiebers (B) anliegt.
22.Installare un perno di bloccaggio (D) sulla 23.Posizionare lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) sullo scivolo di base grande (B). Posizionare in modo
parte posteriore destra dell'MFP utilizzando che la piegatura (46) sullo scivolo di base piccolo (C) si attesti all'interno del sostegno (45)
una vite M4 × 8 (F) alla stessa maniera. all'estremità dello scivolo di base grande (B).
22.按相同方法，使用 1 颗 M4×8 螺丝 (F) 将锁 23.将底座滑板（小）(C) 放在底座滑板（大）(B)。此时底座滑板（小）(C) 的弯曲部 (46) 应处于底座
定插销 (D) 安装到 MFP 主机的右后侧。 滑板（大）(B) 的前端折弯部 (45) 的内侧。
22.같은 방식으로 나사 M4×8(F) １개로 잠금 핀 23.베이스 슬라이더 대 (B) 의 위에 베이스 슬라이더 소 (C) 를 얹습니다 . 그 때 , 베이스 슬라이더 소
(D) 을 MFP 본체 우측 뒤쪽에 설치합니다 . (C) 의 곡선부 (46) 가 베이스 슬라이더 대 (B) 의 맨 앞쪽의 꺾이고 구부러진 부분 (45) 의 안쪽으
로 오도록 세트합니다 .
22.同様にビス M4×8(F) １本で、ロックピン 23.ベーススライダー大 (B) の上にベーススライダー小 (C) を乗せる。 その際、ベーススライダー小
(D) を MFP 本体右後側に取り付ける。 (C) の曲げ (46) がベーススライダー大 (B) の先端折り曲げ部 (45) の内側にくるようにセット
する。
11
C
6 ± 2 mm
56 C
F(M4x8)
B
24.Insert the small base slider (C) under the paper feeder. Install to the base (56) using 2 M4 × 8 screws (F) so that the gap between the small base slider
(C) and the large base slider (B) is 6 ± 2 mm.
* For PF-730, install to the screw holes marked “R”.
24.Insérer la petite règle de base (C) sous le bureau papier. Fixer à la base (56) à l'aide de 2 vis M4 × 8 (F) de sorte que le battement entre la petite règle
de base (C) et la grande règle de base (B) soit de 6 ± 2 mm.
* Pour le PF-730, fixer aux trous de vis marqués "R".
24.Inserte el deslizador de base pequeño (C) debajo del alimentador de papel. Instálelo en la base (56) usando 2 tornillos M4 × 8 (F) de manera tal que
el huelgo entre el deslizador de base pequeño (C) y el deslizador de base grande (B) sea de 6 ± 2 mm.
* En el caso de PF-730, instale en los orificios para tornillo “R”.
24.Stecken Sie den kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) unter den Papiereinzug. Befestigen Sie ihn mit 2 M4 × 8 Schrauben (F) so an der Basis (56), dass der
Abstand zwischen dem kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) und dem großen Basis-Schieber (B) 6 ± 2 mm beträgt.
* Bei Modell PF-730 an den mit "R" markierten Schraublöchern befestigen.
24.Inserire lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) sotto l'unità di alimentazione carta. Installare alla base (56) utilizzando 2 viti M4 × 8 (F) in modo che lo spazio tra
lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) e lo scivolo di base grande (B) sia di 6 ± 2 mm.
* Per PF-730, installare ai fori per viti segnalati con “R”.
24.将底座滑板（小）(C) 装入供纸盒的下方。使用 2 颗 M4×8(F) 螺丝将底座滑板（小）(C) 安装到底板 (56) 上，确保底座滑板（小）(C) 与底座滑板（大）
(B) 之间的间隙为 6±2mm。
※PF-730 时，安装到带有 R 刻印的螺纹孔上。
24.베이스 슬라이더 소 (C) 를 용지 급지대 밑에 넣습니다 . 베이스 슬라이더 소 (C) 와 베이스 슬라이더 대 (B) 의 틈이 6±2mm 가 되도록 나사 M4×8(F)
2 개로 바닥판 (56) 에 장착합니다 .
※PF-730 은 R 의 각인이 있는 나사구멍에 장착합니다 .
24.ベーススライダー小 (C) をペーパーフィーダーの下に入れる。ベーススライダー小 (C) とベーススライダー大 (B) の隙間が、
6±2mm になるようにビ
ス M4×8(F)2 本で底板 (56) に取り付ける。
※PF-730 は R の刻印のあるビス穴に取り付ける。
12
Installation on medium-speed MFPs Installation on high-speed MFPs
If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 28. 28.Reinstall the lower right rear cover (37).
25.Reinstall the lower right rear cover (11). 29.Reinstall the front right cover (32).
26.Reinstall the front right cover (5). 30.Reinstall the right cover 2 (28).
27.Reinstall the lower right cover (1). 31.Reinstall the right cover 1 (25).
Proceed to step 32.
Montage sur des MFP à vitesse moyenne Montage sur des MFP à grande vitesse
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP à grande vitesse, passer à l'étape 28. 28.Reposer le capot arrière inférieur droit (37).
25.Reposer le capot arrière inférieur droit (11). 29.Reposer le capot avant droit (32).
26.Reposer le capot avant droit (5). 30.Reposer le capot droit 2 (28).
27.Reposer le capot inférieur droit (1). 31.Reposer le capot droit 1 (25).
Passer à l'étape 32.
Instalación en las MFP de velocidad media Instalación en las MFP de alta velocidad
Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al paso 28. 28.Reinstale la cubierta trasera inferior derecha (37).
25.Reinstale la cubierta trasera inferior derecha (11). 29.IReinstale la cubierta delantera derecha (32).
26.Reinstale la cubierta delantera derecha (5). 30.Reinstale la cubierta derecha 2 (28).
27.Reinstale la cubierta derecha inferior (1). 31.Reinstale la cubierta derecha 1 (25).
Vaya al paso 32.
Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter 28.Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (37) wieder an.
zu Schritt 28. 29.Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (32) wieder an.
25.Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (11) wieder an. 30.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 2 (28) wieder an.
26.Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (5) wieder an. 31.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 1 (25) wieder an.
27.Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) wieder an.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 32.
Installazione sulle MFP a velocità media Installazione sulle MFP a velocità alta
Se si installa su una MFP a velocità alta, procedere al passo 28. 28.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (37).
25.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (11). 29.Reinstallare il coperchio destro anteriore (32).
26.Reinstallare il coperchio destro anteriore (5). 30.Reinstallare il coperchio destro 2 (28).
27.Reinstallare il coperchio destro inferiore (1). 31.Reinstallare il coperchio destro 1 (25).
Procedere al passo 32.
安装于中速 MFP 上时 安装于高速 MFP 上时
安装于高速 MFP 上时，进至步骤 28。 28.按原样安装右下后部盖板 (37)。
29.按原样安装右前部盖板 (32)。
25.按原样安装右下后部盖板 (11)。 30.按原样安装右部盖板 2(28)。
26.按原样安装右前部盖板 (5)。 31.按原样安装右部盖板 1(25)。
27.按原样安装右下部盖板 (1)。
进至步骤 32。
중속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우 고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우
고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우에는 순서 28 로 진행합니다 . 28.우측하단 뒷커버 (37) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
25.우측하단 뒷커버 (11) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 . 29.우측 전면커버 (32) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
26.우측 전면커버 (5) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 . 30.우측커버 2 (28) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
27.우측 하단커버 (1) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 . 31.우측커버 1 (25) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
순서 32 로 진행합니다 .
中速 MFP に設置の場合 高速 MFP に設置の場合
高速 MFP に設置の場合は手順 28 に進む。 28.右下後カバー(37) を元通り取り付ける。
25.右下後カバー(11) を元通り取り付ける。 29.右前カバー(32) を元通り取り付ける。
26.右前カバー(5) を元通り取り付ける。 30.右カバー2 (28) を元通り取り付ける。
27.右下カバー(1) を元通り取り付ける。 31.右カバー1 (25) を元通り取り付ける。
手順 32 に進む。
13
F (M4x8) F (M4x8)
E
48
J (M4x10)
A
F (M4x8) B
32.Install the switch press plate (E) using the 33.Install the side feeder (A) to the large base slider (B) using 2 M4 × 8 screws (F). Install so that the
M4 × 10 tapping screw (J). center of the M4 × 8 screws (F) comes over the horizontal line (48) of the mounting plate on the
large base slider (B).
32.Fixer la plaque de pression du contacteur 33.Fixer le dispositif du plateau d'alimentation latéral (A) à la grande règle de base (B) à l'aide de 2
(E) à l'aide d'une vis de connexion M4 × 10 vis M4 × 8 (F). Procéder de sorte que l'axe des vis M4 × 8 (F) recouvre la ligne horizontale (48)
(J). du plateau de montage sur la grande règle de base (B).
32.Instale la placa de presión del interruptor (E) 33.Instale el alimentador lateral (A) en el deslizador de base grande (B) usando 2 tornillos M4 × 8
usando el tornillo de roscado M4 × 10 (J). (F). Instale de manera que el centro de los tornillos M4 × 8 (F) queden sobre la línea horizontal
(48) de la placa de montaje del deslizador de base (B) grande.
32.Befestigen Sie mit der M4 × 10 Sch- 33.Befestigen Sie den seitlichen Einzug (A) mit 2 M4 × 8 Schrauben (F) am großen Basis-Schieber
neidschraube (J) die Schalterdruckplatte (E). (B). Befestigen Sie ihn so, dass die Mitte der M4 × 8 Schrauben (F) über der Waagrechtlinie (48)
der Montageplatte am großen Basis-Schieber (B) liegt.
32.Installare la piastra spingi interruttore (E) uti- 33.Installare l'unità di alimentazione laterale (A) allo scivolo di base grande (B) utilizzando 2 viti M4 ×
lizzando la vite autofilettante M4 × 10 (J). 8 (F). Installare in modo che il centro delle viti M4 × 8 (F) sia sulla linea orizzontale (48) della pias-
tra di montaggio sullo scivolo di base grande (B).
32.使用 1 颗 M4×10 自攻螺丝 (J) 安装开关挡板 33.使用 2 颗 M4×8 螺丝 (F) 将侧供纸盒 (A) 安装到底座滑板（大）(B) 上。此时，应确保 M4×8 螺丝
(E)。 (F) 的中心处于底座滑板（大）(B) 的安装板的平行线 (48) 上。
32.탑핑나사 M4×10(J) 1 개로 스위치 판 (E) 을 33.나사 M4×8(F) 2 개로 베이스 슬라이더 대 (B) 에 사이드 피더 (A) 를 장착합니다 . 그 때 , 베이스
장착합니다 . 슬라이더 대 (B) 의 설치판의 평행선 (48) 에 나사 M4×8(F) 의 센터가 오도록 장착합니다 .
32.タッピングビス M4×10(J)1 本でスイッチ当 33.ビス M4×8(F)2 本でベーススライダー大 (B) にサイドフィーダー(A) を取り付ける。その際、
たり板 (E) を取り付ける。 ベーススライダー大 (B) の取付板の平行線 (48) にビス M4×8(F) のセンターがくるように取り
付ける。
14
H
G
50
F
(M4x8) I
49
34.Install the cover plate (I) using 2 M4 × 8 35.Plug the signal cable (49) for the side feeder Setting the paper size plate and media type
screws (F). into the paper feeder connector (50). plate
36.Push the side feeder to connect it to the Insert the paper size plate (G) and media type
MFP. plate (H) into the each slots respectively
34.Fixer le capot (I) à l'aide de 2 vis M4 × 8 (F). 35.Enficher le câble de signal (49) du dispositif Disposition des plaquettes du format de
du plateau d'alimentation latéral dans le con- papier et du type de support
necteur (50) du bureau papier. Introduire la plaquette du format de papier (G) et
36.Pousser le dispositif du plateau d'alimenta- la plaquette du type de support (H) dans leur
tion latéral pour le raccorder au MFP. logement respectif.
34.Instale la tapa (I) usando los 2 tornillos M4 × 35.Conecte el cable de señal (49) del alimenta- Ajuste de la placa de tamaño de papel y la
8 (F). dor lateral en el conector del alimentador de placa de tipo de medio
papel (50). Inserte la placa de tamaño de papel (G) y la
36.Empuje el alimentador lateral para conec- placa de tipo de medio (H) en cada uno de las
tarlo al MFP. ranuras, respectivamente.
34.Bringen Sie die Abdeckungsplatte (I) mit 2 35.Schließen Sie das Signalkabel (49) für den Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte und der
M4 × 8 Schrauben (F) an. seitlichen Einzug am Papiereinzug-Steck- Medientypkarte
verbinder (50) an. Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (G) und die
36.Drücken Sie auf den seitlichen Einzug, um Medientypkarte (H) in die jeweiligen Führungen.
ihn mit dem MFP zu verbinden.
34.Installare il coperchio (I) utilizzando 2 viti M4 35.Collegare il cavo del segnale (49) per l'unità Impostazione della piastra di formato carta e
× 8 (F). di alimentazione laterale nel connettore della piastra del tipo di supporto
dell'unità di alimentazione carta (50). Inserire la piastra del formato carta (G) e la pias-
36.Spingere l'unità di alimentazione laterale per tra del tipo di supporto (H) nei rispettivi alloggia-
collegarla all'MFP. menti.
34.使用 2 颗 M4×8 螺丝 (F) 安装盖板 (I)。 35.将侧供纸盒的信号线 (49) 连接到供纸盒的接 纸张尺寸标示和纸张种类标示的安装
口 (50) 上。 将纸张尺寸标示（G) 和纸张种类标示 (H) 分别插
36.按住侧供纸盒，将其与 MFP 主机连接。 入到图示的插槽中。
34.나사 M4×8(F) 2 개로 커버 플레이트 (I) 를 35.사이드 피더의 신호선 (49) 을 용지 급지대의 용지크기 플레이트와 용지종류 플레이트의 세트
장착합니다 . 커넥터 (50) 에 접속합니다 . 용지크기 플레이트 (G) 와 용지종류 플레이트
36.사이드 피더를 밀어 MFP 본체에 접속합니다 (H) 를 각표시 슬롯에 각각 삽입한다 .
.
34.ビス M4×8(F)2 本でカバープレート (I) を 35.サイドフィーダーの信号線 (49) をペーパー 用紙サイズプレートと用紙種類プレートのセット
取り付ける。 フィーダーのコネクター(50) に接続する。 用紙サイズプレート (G) と用紙種類プレート
36.サイドフィーダーを押し、MFP 本体に接続す (H) を各表示スロットにそれぞれ挿入する。
る。
15
2
1
Changing paper size (metric specifications only) 1.Pull out the side feeder cassette.
At shipment, Letter is set for inch models and A4 is set for metric models. Use the procedure below 2.Remove a screw (1) and remove the stopper
to change the size to B5. (2).
Modification du format du papier (pour spécifications métriques seulement) 1.Sortir le tiroir du dispositif du plateau d'ali-
À expédition, les modèles à mesure en pouces sont réglés sur le format Letter et les modèles à mentation latéral.
mesure métrique sur le format A4. Pour passer au format B5, procéder de la manière suivante. 2.Déposer la vis (1) et la butée (2).
Cómo cambiar el tamaño de papel (sólo para las especificaciones métricas) 1.Extraiga el cajón del alimentador lateral.
En el momento de salida de fábrica, se configura Carta para los modelos en pulgadas y A4 para los 2.Quite el tornillo (1) y quite el tope (2).
modelos en sistema métrico. Siga este procedimiento para cambiar el tamaño a B5.
Ändern des Papierformats (nur metrische Spezifikationen) 1.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade des seitlichen
Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollmaß das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen mit Einzugs heraus.
metrischem Maß das Format A4. 2.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (1) und
Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umgeschaltet werden. nehmen Sie den Anschlag (2) heraus.
Cambio del formato della carta (solo per le specifiche metriche) 1.Estrarre il cassetto dell'unità di alimentazi-
Al momento della spedizione, Letter è impostato per le specifiche in pollici e A4 è impostato per le one laterale.
specifiche metriche. Usare la procedura riportata sotto per cambiare il formato a B5. 2.Rimuovere la vite (1) e quindi rimuovere il
fermo (2).
纸张尺寸更改（仅限公制规格） 1.拉出侧供纸盒的纸盒。
产品出厂时，英制规格设定为 Letter、公制规格设定为 A4。要将尺寸更改为 B5 时，请按以下步骤进行 2.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (1)，拆下挡块 (2)。
操作。
용지크기 변경（센치 사양만） 1.사이드 피더의 카세트를 빼 냅니다 .
출하시 , 인치사양은 Letter, 센치사양은 A4 로 설정되어 있습니다 . 크기를 B5 로 변경하는 경우에는 2.나사 (1) 1 개를 제거하고 스토퍼 (2) 를 떼어
다음 순서를 진행해 주십시오 . 냅니다 .
［用紙サイズ変更（センチ仕様のみ）］ 1.サイドフィーダーのカセットを引き出す。
出荷時、インチ仕様は Letter、センチ仕様は A4 に設定されています。
サイズを B5 に変更する場合は 2.ビス (1)1 本を外し、ストッパー(2) を取り
次の手順をおこなってください。 外す。
16
3
4 6
5 3
B5
4
A4
3.Remove a screw (3) and remove the front 4.Move the front deck cursor (4) to match the size marking (5) (the outermost is A4, the innermost
deck cursor (4). is B5) at the bottom of the cassette.
5.Fix the front deck cursor (4) using the screw (3).
6.Move the rear deck cursor (6) in the same way.
3.Déposer la vis (3) et le curseur de platine 4.Déplacer le curseur de platine avant (4) en fonction du repère de format papier (5) (le repère le
avant (4). plus à l'extérieur est celui du format A4, celui le plus à l'intérieur, celui du format B5) se trouvant
au fond de le tiroir.
5.Fixer le curseur de platine avant (4) à l'aide de la vis (3).
6.Déplacer le curseur de platine arrière (6) en procédant de la même manière.
3.Quite el tornillo (3) y quite el cursor frontal de 4.Mueva el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) para que corresponda con la marca de tamaño (5) (la
la plataforma (4). más externa es A4, la más interna es B5) en la parte inferior del cajón.
5.Fije el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) usando el tornillo (3).
6.Mueva el cursor trasero de la plataforma (6) de la misma forma.
3.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (3) und 4.Versetzen Sie den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4), um die Formatmarkierung (5) am Boden der
nehmen Sie den vorderen Konsole-Cursor Papierlade anzupassen (die äußerste ist A4, die innerste ist B5).
(4) heraus. 5.Befestigen Sie den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) mit der Schraube (3).
6.Versetzen Sie den hinteren Konsole-Cursor (6) auf gleiche Weise.
3.Rimuovere la vite (3) e quindi rimuovere il 4.Spostare il cursore frontale del deck (4) per farlo corrispondere al segno del formato (5) (il più
cursore frontale del deck (4). esterno è A4, il più interno è B5) alla parte inferiore del cassetto.
5.Fissare il cursore frontale del deck (4) utilizzando la vite (3).
6.Spostare il cursore posteriore del deck (6) alla stessa maniera.
3.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (3)，拆下前部纸张长度调节片 4.根据纸盒下部的刻印 (5) ( 最外侧为 A4、最内侧为 B5) 移动前部纸张长度调节片 (4)。
(4)。 5.使用 1 颗螺丝 (3) 固定前部纸张长度调节片 (4)。
6.按相同方法移动后部纸张长度调节片 (6)。
3.나사 (3) 1 개를 제거하고 데크커서앞 (4) 을 4.카세트 아래의 사이즈각인 (5) ( 가장 바깥쪽이 A4, 가장 안쪽이 B5) 에 맞춰 데크커서앞 (4) 을
제거합니다 . 이동시킵니다 .
5.나사 (3) 1 개로 데크커서앞 (4) 을 고정합니다 .
6.같은 방식으로 데크커서뒤 (6) 를 이동시킵니다 .
3.ビス (3)1 本を外し、デッキカーソル前 (4) 4.カセット下のサイズ刻印 (5) ( 一番外側が A4、一番内側が B5) に合わせてデッキカーソル前 (4)
を取り外す。 を移動させる。
5.ビス (3)1 本で、
デッキカーソル前 (4) を固定する。
6.同様にデッキカーソル後 (6) を移動させる。
17
7
9
8 8
2
B5 A4
1
7.Remove a screw (7) and remove the deck 8.Move the deck trailing edge cursor (8) to 10.Reinstall the stopper (2) using the screw (1).
trailing edge cursor (8). match the size marking (9) at the bottom of 11.Run maintenance mode U208 and set the
the cassette. paper size.
9.Fix the deck trailing edge cursor (8) with the
screw (7).
7.Déposer la vis (7) et déposer le curseur du 8.Déplacer le curseur du bord arrière de la 10.Reposer la butée (2) à l'aide de la vis (1).
bord arrière de la platine (8). platine (8) en fonction du repère de format 11.Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et
papier (9) se trouvant au fond de le tiroir. définir le format du papier.
9.Fixer le curseur du bord arrière de la platine
(8) à l'aide de la vis (7).
7.Quite el tornillo (7) y quite el cursor del borde 8.Mueva el cursor del borde inferior de la plat- 10.Reinstale el tope (2) usando el tornillo (1).
inferior de la plataforma (8). aforma (8) para que corresponda con la 11.Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y
marca de tamaño (9) en la parte inferior del ajuste el tamaño de papel.
cajón.
9.Fije el cursor del borde inferior de la plata-
forma (8) con el tornillo (7).
7.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (7) und 8.Versetzen Sie den Hinterkante-Cursor (8), 10.Bringen Sie den Anschlag (2) wieder mit der
nehmen Sie den Hinterkante-Cursor (8) her- um die Formatmarkierung (9) am Boden der Schraube (1) an.
aus. Papierlade anzupassen. 11.Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus
9.Befestigen Sie den Hinterkante-Cursor (8) und stellen Sie das Papierformat ein.
mit der Schraube (7).
7.Rimuovere la vite (7) e quindi rimuovere il 8.Spostare il cursore del bordo finale del deck 10.Reinstallare il fermo (2) utilizzando la vite
cursore del bordo finale del deck (8). (8) per farlo corrispondere al segno di for- (1).
mato (9) alla parte inferiore del cassetto. 11.Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e
9.Fissare il cursore del bordo finale del deck impostare il formato carta.
(8) con la vite (7).
7.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (7)，拆下后端纸张长度调节片 8.根据纸盒下部的刻印 (9) 移动后端纸张长度 10.使用 1 颗螺丝 (1)，按原样安装挡块 (2)。
(8)。 调节片 (8)。 11.执行维修模式 U208，进行纸张尺寸的设定。
9.使用 1 颗螺丝 (7) 固定后端纸张长度调节片
(8)。
7.나사 (7) 1 개를 제거하고 데크뒤커서 (8) 를 8.카세트 아래의 사이즈각인 (9) 에 맞춰서 데 10.나사 (1) 1 개로 스토퍼 (2) 를 원래대로 장착
제거합니다 . 크뒤커서 (8) 를 이동시킵니다 . 합니다 .
9.나사 (7) 1 개로 데크뒤커서 (8) 를 고정합니 11.메인터넌스 모드 U208 을 실행해 용지크기
다. 설정을 합니다 .
7.ビス (7)1 本を外し、デッキ後端カーソル 8.カセット下のサイズ刻印 (9) に合わせて、 10.ビス (1)1 本で、
ストッパー(2) を元通り取
(8) を取り外す。 デッキ後端カーソル (8) を移動させる。 り付ける。
9.ビス (7)1 本で、
デッキ後端カーソル (8) を 11.メンテナンスモード U208 を実行し、 用紙サ
固定する。 イズの設定をおこなう。
18
6 10
0.5~1.0mm
Adjusting the cursor width
1.Load paper in the cassettes.
2. If the gap between the front deck cursor (4) and the paper (10) is outside the 0.5 to 1.0 mm range when the paper (10) is touching up against the rear deck cur-
sor (6), perform the following adjustment.
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding, while a cursor width that is too large can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
Réglage de la largeur du curseur
1.Charger les tiroirs en papier.
2.Si l'écartement entre le curseur de platine avant (4) et le papier (10) est hors des limites de 0,5 à 1,0 mm quand le papier (10) touche le curseur de
platine arrière (6), procéder au réglage suivant.
* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empêcher l'entraînement du papier et une largeur trop grande risque d'entraîner des problèmes du type
entraînement du papier de biais.
Cómo ajustar la anchura del cursor
1.Cargue papel en los cajones.
2.Si la separación entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) y el papel (10) está fuera del rango de 0,5 a 1,0 mm cuando el papel (10) toca el cursor trasero
de la plataforma (6), haga el siguiente ajuste.
* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequeña puede impedir la alimentación de papel; una anchura del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar prob-
lemas con la alimentación torcida de papel.
Einstellen der Cursor-Breite
1.Papier in die Papierladen einlegen.
2.Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) und dem Papier (10) außerhalb des Bereichs 0,5 bis 1,0 mm liegt, wenn das Papier
(10) am hinteren Konsole-Cursor (6) anliegt, ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern, wogegen eine zu große Cursor-Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und ähnliche Prob-
leme verursachen kann.
Regolazione della larghezza del cursore
1. Caricare carta nei cassetti.
2.Se lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (4) e la carta (10) è fuori della gamma da 0,5 a 1,0 mm quando la carta (10) tocca il cursore postertiore del
deck (6), eseguire la regolazione seguente.
* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola può ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta, mentre unalarghezza dei cursori troppo grande può essere
causa di problemi, come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbliqua della carta.
游标宽度的调节
1.在供纸盒中装入纸张。
2.在堆纸板后部游标 (6) 与纸张 (10) 接触的状态下，如果堆纸板前部游标 (4) 与纸张 (10) 的间隙超出了 0.5 ～ 1.0mm 的范围，须进行以下调节。
※ 如果游标宽度过小，可能造成不供纸，游标宽度过大，则可能发生歪斜进纸等情况。
커서 폭 조정
1. 카세트에 용지를 장착합니다 .
2. 데크커서 뒤 (6) 에 용지 (10) 가 접하고 있는 상태에서 데크커서 앞 (4) 과 용지 (10) 의 틈이 0.5 ～ 1.0mm 의 범위외의 경우에는 이하의 조정을 합니다 .
※ 커서 폭이 작으면 무급지 , 커서 폭이 크면 경사급지 등이 발생할 가능성이 있습니다 .
［カーソル幅の調整］
1.カセットに用紙をセットする。
2.デッキカーソル後 (6) に用紙 (10) が接している状態で、
デッキカーソル前 (4) と用紙 (10) の隙間が 0.5 ～ 1.0mm の範囲外の場合は、
以下の調整を
おこなう。
※ カーソル幅が小さいと無給紙、カーソル幅が大きいと斜め給紙などが発生する可能性がある。
19
4
11 11 12
3.Loosen 2 adjusting screws (11) on the front deck cursor (4) and move the cursor (4) while check-
ing with the scale (12).
4.Retighten the 2 adjusting screws (11).
5.Check that the gap between the front deck cursor (4) and the paper is between 0.5 and 1.0 mm.
3.Desserrer les 2 vis de réglage (11) sur le curseur de platine avant (4) et déposer le curseur (4)
tout en vérifiant à l'aide de l'échelle (12).
4.Resserrer les 2 vis de réglage (11).
5.Vérifier que l'écartement entre le curseur de platine avant (4) et le papier est entre 0,5 et 1,0 mm.
3.Afloje 2 tornillos de ajuste (11) en el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) y mueva el cursor (4)
mientras verifica con la escala (12).
4.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos de ajuste (11).
5.Verifique que la separación entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) y el papel sea de entre 0,5
y 1,0 mm.
3.Lösen Sie 2 Einstellschrauben (11) am vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) und versetzen Sie den Cur-
sor (4) unter Beobachtung der Skale (12).
4.Die 2 Einstellschrauben (11) wieder anziehen.
5.Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) und dem
Papier im Bereich 0,5 bis 1,0 mm liegt.
3.Allentare le 2 viti di regolazione (11) sul cursore frontale del deck (4), e quindi rimuovere il cursore
(4) controllando la scala (12).
4.Ristringere le 2 viti di regolazione (11).
5.Controllare che lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (4) e la carta sia compreso nella gamma
tra 0,5 e 1,0 mm.
3.拧松前部纸张长度调节片 (4) 的 2 颗调节螺丝 (11)，边确认刻度 (12) 边移动前部纸张长度调节片
(4)。
4.拧紧 2 颗调节螺丝 (11)。
5.确认堆纸板前部游标 (4) 与纸张的间隙在 0.5 ～ 1.0mm 的范围内。
3.데크커서앞 (4) 의 조정나사 (11) 2 개를 풀어 눈금 (12) 을 확인하면서 데크커서앞 (4) 을 이동시
킵니다 .
4.조정나사 (11) 2 개를 조입니다 .
5.데크커서 앞 (4) 과 용지의 틈이 0.5 ～ 1.0 mm 범위내가 되어 있는 것을 확인합니다 .
3.デッキカーソル前 (4) の調整ビス (11)2 本を緩め、目盛り (12) を確認しながらデッキカーソル
前 (4) を移動させる。
4.調整ビス (11)2 本を締め付ける。
5.デッキカーソル前 (4) と用紙の隙間が 0.5 ～ 1.0mm の範囲内になっていることを確認する。
20
2
1
2
a b c
Adjusting the center line 2.Adjust the values.
Check the deviation between the center (1) of a correct image (a) and the Test pattern (b): Increase the setting value.
center (2) of a test pattern. Test pattern (c): Decrease the setting value.
<Reference value> Wthin ± 2.0 mm 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Set the maintenance mode U034. Select LSU Out Left and Cassette5.
Réglage de l'axe 2.Régler les valeurs.
Vérifier la déviation entre l'axe (1) d'une image correcte (a) et l'axe (2) Mire d' essai (b): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
d'une forme d'essai. Mire d' essai (c): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1.Passer au mode maintenance U034. Sélectionner LSU Out Left et
Cassette5.
Ajuste de la línea central 2.Ajuste los valores.
Compruebe la desviación entre el centro (1) de una imagen correcta (a) y Patrón de prueba (b): Aumente el valor de configuración.
el centro (2) de un patrón de prueba. Patrón de prueba (c): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ± 2,0 mm 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U034. Seleccione LSU Out Left y
Cassette5.
Einstellen der Mittenlinie 2.Die Werte einstellen.
Überprüfen Sie die Abweichung zwischen der Mitte (1) eines korrekten Testmuster (b): Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
Bilds (a) und der Mitte (2) eines Prüfmusters. Testmuster (c): Den Einstellwert verringern.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ± 2,0 mm 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
1.Stellen Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 ein. Wählen Sie LSU Out Left
und Cassette5.
Regolazione della linea centrale 2.Regolare i valori.
Controllare la deviazione tra il centro (1) di un'immagine corretta (a) e il Modello di prova (b): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
centro (2) di un modello di prova. Modello di prova (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ± 2,0 mm 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034. Selezionare LSU Out Left
e Cassette5.
中心线调节 2.调整设定值。
确认标准图像 (a) 的中心位置 (1) 与测试图案的中心位置 (2) 的偏移。 测试图案 (b) ：调高设定值。
< 标准值 >±2.0mm 以内 测试图案 (c) ：调低设定值。
1.设置维修模式 U034，选择 LSU Out Left、Cassette5。 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
센터라인 조정 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
적정화상 (a) 의 센터 (1) 와 테스트패턴의 센터 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 테트스 패턴 (b) ：설정치를 높입니다 .
＜기준치＞ ±2.0mm 이내 테스트 패턴 (c) ：설정치를 내립니다 .
1.메인터넌스 모드 U034 을 세트하고 LSU Out Left, Cassette5 를 선택 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
합니다 .
センターライン調整 2.設定値を調整する。
適正画像 (a) のセンター(1) とテストパターンのセンター(2) のずれを確 テストパターン (b) ：設定値を上げる。
認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。 テストパターン (c) ：設定値を下げる。
＜基準値＞ ±2.0mm 以内。 3.スタートキーを押し、 設定値を確定する。
1.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、LSU Out Left、
Cassette5 を選択
する。
21
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR
SIDE MULTI TRAY
English
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines.
References to high-speed MFPs in this document denote 65/65 and 75/70 ppm color machines, and 65 and 80 ppm monochrome machines.
Français
Dans le présent document, les références aux MFP à vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 45/45 et 55/50 ppm.
Dans le présent document, les références aux MFP à grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines mono-
chromes 65 et 80 ppm.
Español
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 45/45 y 55/50 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las máquinas mono-
cromáticas de 65 y 80 ppm.
Deutsch
Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer.
Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm Mono-
chrommaschinen.
Italiano
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 45/45 e 55/50 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocromatiche 65
e 80 ppm.
简体中文
本文中的中速 MFP 代表彩色 45/45 页机型、55/50 页机型。
本文中的高速 MFP 代表彩色 65/65 页机型、75/70 页机型、黑白 65 页机型、80 页机型。
한국어
본문 중 중속 MFP 는 컬러 45/45 매기 , 55/50 매기 .
본문 중 고속 MFP 는 컬러 65/65 매기 , 75/70 매기 , 흑백 65 매기 , 80 매기를 나타냅니다 .
日本語
本文中の中速 MFP はカラー機の 45/45 枚機、55/50 枚機を表す。
本文中の高速 MFP はカラー機の 65/65 枚機、75/70 枚機、モノクロ機の 65 枚機、
80 枚機を表す。
B
D (2) E F (M4x8)(10)
C
A
G (2) H (7) J (M4x10) K (2)
I
*G (3) *H (4) L M N (2) O
**H (2)
Supplied parts G. Paper size plate ......................................... 2 M. Cassette Number Label 7 .......................... 1
A. Side multi-tray............................................ 1 H. Media type plate(except for 120V model) .. 7 N. Clamp ........................................................ 2
B. Large base slider ....................................... 1 *H.Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 4 O. Film ............................................................ 1
C. Small base slider ....................................... 1 I. Cover plate ................................................ 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
D. Lock pin ..................................................... 2 J. M4 × 10 tapping screw............................... 1 materials from the parts supplied.
E. Switch press plate ..................................... 1 K. Stopper ...................................................... 2
F. M4 × 8 screw ........................................... 10 L. Cassette Number Label 6 .......................... 1
Pièces fournies G. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 2 N. Collier......................................................... 2
A. Bac multiples usages latéral...................... 1 H. Plaquette du type de support..................... 7 O. Film ............................................................ 1
B. Grande règle de base................................ 1 I. Capot ......................................................... 1 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
C. Petite règle de base................................... 1 J. Vis de connexion M4 × 10 ......................... 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
D. Broche de verrouillage............................... 2 K. Butée ......................................................... 2 pièces fournies.
E. Plaque de pression de l'interrupteur .......... 1 L. Étiquette de numéro de cassette 6 ............ 1
F. Vis M4 × 8................................................ 10 M. Étiquette de numéro de cassette 7 ............ 1
Partes suministradas G. Placa de tamaño de papel ......................... 2 N. Abrazadera ................................................ 2
A. Bypass lateral ............................................ 1 H. Placa de tipo de medio .............................. 7 O. Película ...................................................... 1
B. Deslizador de base grande........................ 1 I. Tapa ........................................................... 1 Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
C. Deslizador de base pequeño..................... 1 J. Tornillo de roscado M4 × 10 ...................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
D. Clavija de bloqueo ..................................... 2 K. Tope ........................................................... 2 das.
E. Placa de presión del interruptor................. 1 L. Etiqueta de casete con el número 6 .......... 1
F. Tornillo M4 × 8 ......................................... 10 M. Etiqueta de casete con el número 7 .......... 1
Enthaltene Teile G. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 2 N. Schelle ....................................................... 2
A. Seitliches Mehrzweck-Papierfach.............. 1 H. Medientypkarte .......................................... 7 O. Film ............................................................ 1
B. Großer Basis-Schieber .............................. 1 I. Abdeckplatte .............................................. 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
C. Kleiner Basis-Schieber .............................. 1 J. M4 × 10 Schneidschraube......................... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
D. Arretierstift ................................................. 2 K. Anschlag .................................................... 2 Teilen entfernt wurden.
E. Schalterdruckplatte.................................... 1 L. Aufkleber Kassettennummer 6 .................. 1
F. M4 × 8 Schraube ..................................... 10 M. Aufkleber Kassettennummer 7 .................. 1
Parti fornite G. Piastra formato carta ................................. 2 N. Fascetta ..................................................... 2
A. Vassoio multiplo laterale ............................ 1 H. Piastra tipo carta........................................ 7 O. Pellicola ..................................................... 1
B. Scivolo di base grande .............................. 1 I. Coperchio .................................................. 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
C. Scivolo di base piccolo .............................. 1 J. Vite autofilettante M4 × 10 ......................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
D. Perno di bloccaggio ................................... 2 K. Fermo ........................................................ 2
E. Piastra spingi interruttore........................... 1 L. Etichetta numero cassetta 6 ...................... 1
F. Vite M4 × 8 .............................................. 10 M. Etichetta numero cassetta 7 ...................... 1
附属品 *G.纸张尺寸标示 .........................3 N. 束线夹 ...............................2
A. 侧手送纸盘........................... 1 **H.纸张种类标示 ........................2 O. 胶片 .................................1
B. 底座滑板（大）........................ 1 I. 盖板 .................................1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
C. 底座滑板（小）........................ 1 J. M4×10 自攻螺丝 .......................1 下。
D. 锁定插销............................. 2 K. 挡块 .................................2
E. 开关挡板............................. 1 L. 纸盒编号标签 6 ........................1
F. M4×8 螺丝 .......................... 10 M. 纸盒编号标签 7 ........................1
동봉품 G. 용지크기 플레이트............................... 2 N. 클램프............................................... 2
A. 사이드 멀티 트레이.............................. 1 **H.용지종류 플레이트 ............................. 2 O. 필름.................................................. 1
B. 베이스 슬라이더 대.............................. 1 I. 커버 플레이트..................................... 1 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
C. 베이스 슬라이더 소.............................. 1 J. 탑핑 나사 M4×10 ................................ 1 우에는 반드시 제거할 것 .
D. 잠금 핀.............................................. 2 K. 스토퍼............................................... 2
E. 스위치 판........................................... 1 L. 카세트 넘버 라벨 6 .............................. 1
F. 나사 M4×8....................................... 10 M. 카세트 넘버 라벨 7 .............................. 1
PF-780 同梱品 G. 用紙サイズプレート ...................2 N. クランプ .............................2
A. サイドマルチトレイ................... 1 **H.用紙種類プレート ....................2 O. フィルム .............................1
B. ベーススライダー大................... 1 I. カバープレート .......................1
C. ベーススライダー小................... 1 J. タッピングビス M4×10 .................1 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合
D. ロックピン........................... 2 K. ストッパー ...........................2 は、
必ず取り外すこと。
E. スイッチ当たり板..................... 1 L. カセットナンバーラベル 6 ..............1
F. ビス M4×8 .......................... 10 M. カセットナンバーラベル 7 ..............1
1
(PF-730)
P Q (2) R S T
U
(PF-740)
V (4) W (M4x8)(3)
X (6) Y (2) Z (M4x20)(4)
*V (6)
P *X (2)
**X (12)
PF-730/740 Supplied parts V. Paper size plate ......................................... 4 Y. Stopper ...................................................... 2
P. Paper feeder.............................................. 1 W. S Tite screw M4 × 8 ................................... 3 Z. S Tite screws M4 × 20 .............................. 4
Q. Pin ............................................................. 2 X. Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 6 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
R. Retainer ..................................................... 1 *X.Media type plate materials from the parts supplied.
S. Intermediate paper conveying unit............. 1 (PF-730:110V model only)......................... 2
T. Clamp ........................................................ 1 **X.Media type plate Do not use the following parts when installing
U. Wire cover ................................................. 1 (except for above models).........................12 PF-780: (R), (Y), (Z) and one (W).
PF-730/740 Pièces fournies V. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 4 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
P. Chargeur de papier.................................... 1 W. Vis S Tite M4 × 8 ....................................... 3 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Q. Broche ....................................................... 2 **X.Plaquette du type de support.................. 12 pièces fournies
R. Élément de retenue ................................... 1 Y. Butée ......................................................... 2
S. Unité de transport du papier intermédiaire 1 Z. Vis S Tite M4 × 20 ..................................... 4 Ne pas utiliser les pièces suivantes pour l'instal-
T. Collier ........................................................ 1 lation de la PF-780 : (R), (Y), (Z) et un (W).
U. Couvercle de câble.................................... 1
PF-730/740 Enthaltene Teile V. Placa de tamaño de papel ......................... 4 Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
P. Depósito de papel...................................... 1 W. Tornillo S Tite M4 × 8 ................................. 3 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
Q. Clavija........................................................ 2 **X.Placa de tipo de medio ........................... 12 das.
R. Retén ......................................................... 1 Y. Tope ........................................................... 2
S. Unidad de transporte de papel intermedia. 1 Z. Tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 ............................. 4 No utilice las piezas siguientes cuando instale la
T. Sujetador ................................................... 1 PF-780: (R), (Y), (Z) y una (W).
U. Cubierta para el cable................................ 1
PF-730/740 Gelieferte Teile V. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 4 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
P. Papiereinzug.............................................. 1 W. S-Tite-Schraube M4 × 8............................. 3 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Q. Stift............................................................. 2 **X.Medientypkarte ....................................... 12 Teilen entfernt wurden.
R. Halterung ................................................... 1 Y. Anschlag .................................................... 2
S. Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit ................ 1 Z. S-Tite-Schrauben M4 × 20......................... 4 Die folgenden Teile bei der Installation von PF-
T. Klemme ..................................................... 1 780 nicht verwenden: (R), (Y), (Z) und ein (W).
U. Kabelabdeckung........................................ 1
PF-730/740 Parti fornite V. Piastra formato carta ................................. 4 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
P. Unità di alimentazione della carta ............. 1 W. Vite S Tite M4 × 8 ...................................... 3 protezione dalle parti fornite.
Q. Perno ........................................................ 2 **X.Piastra tipo carta..................................... 12
R. Fermo ....................................................... 1 Y. Fermo ........................................................ 2 Non utilizzare le seguenti parti quando si installa
S. Unità intermediale di trasporto carta.......... 1 Z. Vite S Tite M4 × 20 .................................... 4 PF-780: (R), (Y), (Z) e uno (W).
T. Morsetto..................................................... 1
U. Coperchio cavi........................................... 1
PF-730/740 附属品 U. 电线盖板 .............................1 Z. 紧固型 S 螺丝 M4×20 .................4
P. 供纸工作台........................... 1 *V.纸张尺寸标示 (PF-730) .................6 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
Q. 固定插销............................. 2 V. 纸张尺寸标示 (PF-740) .................4 下。
R. 安装板............................... 1 W. 紧固型 S 螺丝 M4×8 ...................3 设置 PF-780 时，不使用以下部件： （R）（Y）(Z)
S. 中间搬运单元......................... 1 *X.纸张种类标示 .........................2 和 1 颗（W）
T. 夹钳................................. 1 Y. 限位器 ...............................2
PF-730/740 동봉품 U. 전선커버............................................ 1 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
P. 급지대............................................... 1 V. 용지크기 플레이트............................... 4 우에는 반드시 제거할 것 .
Q. 핀..................................................... 2 W. 나사 M4×8 S 타이트 ........................... 3
R. 부착판............................................... 1 *X.용지종류 플레이트 .............................. 2 PF-780 을 설치할 경우에는 하기 부품은 사용
S. 중간반송유니트................................... 1 Y. 전도방지쇠......................................... 2 하지 않음 ：（R） （Y）(Z) 과 （W）1 개
T. 크램프............................................... 1 Z. 나사 M4×20 S 타이트.......................... 4
PF-730/740 同梱品 V. 用紙サイズプレート ...................4 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
P. ペーパーフィーダー................... 1 W. ビス M4×8 S タイト ...................3 は必ず取り外すこと。
Q. ピン................................. 2 *X.用紙種類プレート .....................2
R. 取付板............................... 1 Y. 転倒防止金具 .........................2 PF-780 を設置する場合は、下記のパーツは使用
S. 中間搬送ユニット..................... 1 Z. ビス M4×20 S タイト ..................4 しない： （R）
（Y）(Z) と（W）
1本
T. クランプ............................. 1
U. 電線カバー........................... 1
2
2
1
P
Procedure [Side feeder assembly] 2.Cut the ribs with a nipper, and then remove
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the 1.Remove the cover (1) of the paper feeder the breakaway cover (2).
main power switch of the machine off, and (P).
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet. (Do not use cover (1).)
Procédure [Ensemble plateau d'alimentation latéral] 2.Couper les nervures avec une pince, puis
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de 1.Déposer le capot (1) du chargeur de papier déposer le couvercle amovible (2)
mettre la machine hors tension et de (P).
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise (Ne pas utiliser le capot (1).)
murale.
Procedimiento [Ensamblaje del alimentador lateral] 2.Recorte las nervaduras con unos alicates de
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de 1.Quite la cubierta (1) del depósito de papel corte y, a continuación, retire la cubierta divi-
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la (P). soria (2).
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación (No utilice la cubierta (1).)
de la toma de pared.
Verfahren [Seitlicher Einzug] 2.Die Rippen mit einer Zange schneiden und
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu- 1.Die Abdeckung (1) des Papiereinzugs (P) dann die Ablösungsabdeckung (2) ent-
gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts abnehmen. fernen.
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der (Die Abdeckung (1) nicht verwenden.)
Steckdose gezogen ist.
Procedura [Assemblaggio unità di alimentazione later- 2.Tagliare le pieghe con una pinzetta e poi
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la ale] rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (2).
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di 1.Rimuovere il coperchio (1) dall'unità di ali-
corrente. mentazione della carta (P).
(Non usare il coperchio (1).)
安装步骤 [ 侧供纸盒的装配 ] 2.使用剪钳切断肋板，切除切割盖板（2）。
安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插 1.拆下供纸工作台（P）的盖板（1）。
座拔下电源插头。 ( 不使用盖板（1）。)
설치순서 [ 사이드 피더 조립 ] 2.니퍼로 리브를 자르고 분할커버（2）를 떼어
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 1.용지 급지대（P）의 커버 （1）을 제거합니다 . 냅니다 .
위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리 ( 커버 （1）은 사용하지 않습니다 .)
하십시오 .
取付手順 [ サイドフィーダーの組み立て ] 2.ニッパーでリブを切り、割りカバー（2）を切
必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機 1.ペーパーフィーダー（P）のカバー(1) を取り り取る。
械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ 外す。
と。 （カバー（1）は使用しません。）
3
7
6
3.Remove the panel (3) from the lower right 4.Open the paper feeder right cover (5).
cover (4) on the paper feeder using a flat Remove the strap (6) from the right cover shaft (7) and remove the right cover (5).
blade screwdriver.
3.Déposer le panneau (3) du capot inférieur 4.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du chargeur de papier (5).
droit (4) du chargeur de papier en procédant Déposer la courroie (6) de l'axe du capot droit (7) et déposer le capot droit (5).
à l'aide d'un tournevis à lame.
3.Quite el panel (3) de la cubierta derecha 4.Abra la cubierta derecha del depósito de papel (5).
inferior (4) del depósito de papel con un Quite la correa (6) del eje de la cubierta derecha (7) y quite la cubierta derecha (5).
destornillador de pala plana.
3.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben- 4.Die rechte Abdeckung (5) des Papiereinzugs öffnen.
dreher die Platte (3) von der unteren rechten Nehmen Sie den Riemen (6) von der Welle (7) der rechten Abdeckung und dann die rechte
Abdeckung (4) des Papiereinzugs ab. Abdeckung (5) ab.
3.Rimuovere il pannello (3) dal coperchio 4.Aprire il coperchio destro (5) dell'unità di alimentazione della carta.
destro inferiore (4) sull'unità di alimentazione Rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dall'asta (7) del coperchio destro e quindi rimuovere il coperchio
carta utilizzando un cacciavite a testa piana. destro (5).
3.使用一字螺丝刀等将供纸盒的右下部盖板 4.打开供纸盒的右部盖板 (5)。
(4) 的盖子 (3) 拆下。 从右盖板的轴 (7) 上拆除挂绳 (6)，拆下右盖板 (5)。
3.용지 급지대의 우측 하단커버 (4) 의 뚜껑 (3) 4.급지대 우측커버 (5) 를 엽니다 .
을 마이너스 드라이버 등으로 떼어 냅니다 . 스트랩 (6) 을 우측커버의 축 (7) 에서 떼어내고 우측커버 (5) 를 제거합니다 .
3.ペーパーフィーダーの右下カバー(4) のふ 4.ペーパーフィーダーの右カバー(5) を開く。
た (3) をマイナスドライバーなどで取り外 ストラップ (6) を右カバーの軸 (7) から外し、
右カバー(5) を取り外す。
す。
4
9 8
11
K
10
F(M4x8)
8
11
8
4
For PF-730 6.Align the 2 paper feeder casters (11) in the direction shown in the illus-
5.Remove 3 screws (8) and a screw (9) and remove the paper feeder tration, and fasten each of them to stopper (K) using an M4 × 8 screw
lower right cover (4). (F).
For PF-740 7.Reinstall the paper feeder lower right cover (4).
5.Remove 3 screws (8) and a screw (10) and remove the paper feeder 8.Reinstall the paper feeder right cover (5).
lower right cover (4).
Pour PF-730 6.Aligner les 2 roulettes (11) du chargeur de papier selon la direction
5.Déposer les 3 vis (8) et la vis (9) puis déposer le capot inférieur droit du indiquée sur l'illustration, et les fixer sur la butée (K) à l'aide d'une vis
chargeur de papier (4). M4 × 8 (F).
Pour PF-740 7.Reposer le capot inférieur droit du chargeur de papier (4).
5.Déposer les 3 vis (8) et la vis (10) puis déposer le capot inférieur droit 8.Reposer le capot droit du chargeur de papier (5).
du chargeur de papier (4).
Para PF-730 6.Alinee las 2 ruedas del depósito de papel (11) en el sentido que se
5.Quite los 3 tornillos (8) y el tornillo (9) y quite la cubierta derecha infe- indica en la ilustración, y apriételas hasta llegar al tope (K) con un tor-
rior del depósito de papel (4). nillo M4 × 8 (F).
Para PF-740 7.Reinstale la cubierta derecha inferior del depósito de papel (4).
5.Quite los 3 tornillos (8) y el tornillo (10) y quite la cubierta derecha infe- 8.Reinstale la cubierta derecha del depósito de papel (5).
rior del depósito de papel (4).
Für PF-730 6.Die 2 Laufrollen des Papiereinzugs (11) in der in der Abbildung
5.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (8) und eine Schraube (9) und nehmen Sie angezeigten Richtung ausrichten und jede von ihnen mithilfe einer M4
die untere rechte Abdeckung (4) des Papiereinzugs ab. × 8 Schraube (F) am Anschlag (K) befestigen.
Für PF-740 7.Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (4) des Papiereinzugs wieder
5.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (8) und eine Schraube (10) und nehmen an.
Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (4) des Papiereinzugs ab. 8.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (5) des Papiereinzugs wieder an.
Per PF-730 6.Allineare le ruote orientabili dell'unità di alimentazione della carta (11)
5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (8) e una vite (9), e quindi rimuovere il coperchio nella direzione mostrata nell'illustrazione e stringere ognuno al fermo
destro inferiore (4) dell'unità di alimentazione carta. (K) con una vite M4 × 8 (F).
Per PF-740 7.Reinstallare il coperchio destro inferiore dell'unità di alimentazione
5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (8) e una vite (10), e quindi rimuovere il coperchio carta (4).
destro inferiore (4) dell'unità di alimentazione carta. 8.Reinstallare il coperchio destro (5) dell'unità di alimentazione carta.
PF-730 时 6.将供纸工作台的 2 个脚轮（11）与图示方向对齐，各使用 1 颗 M4×8 螺
5.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (8) 和 1 颗螺丝 (9)，拆下供纸盒的右下部盖板 (4)。 丝（F）来安装挡块（K）。
PF-740 时 7.按原样安装供纸盒的右下部盖板 (4)。
5.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (8) 和 1 颗螺丝 (10)，拆下供纸盒的右下部盖板 (4)。 8.按原样安装供纸盒的右盖板 (5)。
PF-730 의 경우 6.용지 급지대의 캐스터（11）2 개를 일러스트의 방향에 맞춰 각각 스토
5.나사 (8) 3 개와 나사 (9) 1 개를 제거하고 , 용지 급지대의 우측 하단커 퍼（K）를 나사 M4×8（F）1 개로 장착합니다 .
버 (4) 를 제거합니다 . 7.용지 급지대의 우측 하단커버 (4) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
PF-740 의 경우 8.용지 급지대의 우측커버 (5) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
5.나사 (8) 3 개와 나사 (10) 1 개를 제거하고 , 용지 급지대의 우측 하단
커버 (4) 를 제거합니다 .
PF-730 の場合 6.ペーパーフィーダーのキャスター（11） 2 個をイラストの方向に合わ
5.ビス (8)3 本とビス (9)1 本を外して、ペーパーフィーダーの右下カ せ、それぞれストッパー（K）をビス M4×8（F）1 本で取り付ける。
バー(4) を取り外す。 7.ペーパーフィーダーの右下カバー(4) を元通り取り付ける。
PF-740 の場合 8.ペーパーフィーダーの右カバー(5) を元通り取り付ける。
5.ビス (8)3 本とビス (10)1 本を外して、ペーパーフィーダーの右下カ
バー(4) を取り外す。
5
13 14-1
16
A
16
12 15
14
15
P
9.Pull out the cassette (14) of the side multi- 10.Remove the cassette (14-1) of the side 11.Place the side multi-tray on the paper feeder
tray (A), remove a lift plate stopper (12) and multi-tray (A). (P) so that each pin (15) on the right and left
attach it in the storage location (13). sides of the front of the paper feeder (P)
matches with the holes(16) in the base of the
side multi-tray (A).
9.Tirer la cassette (14) du bac multiples 10.Retirez le magasin (14-1) du bac multiples 11.Placer le bac multiples usages latéral sur le
usages latéral (A) vers l'extérieur, retirer la usages latéral (A). chargeur de papier (P) de sorte à aligner
butée de plaque d’élévation (12) et la fixer à chacune des broches (15) situées sur les
l'emplacement de rangement (13). côtés droit et gauche du devant du chargeur
de papier (P) avec les orifices(16) de la base
du bac multiples usages latéral (A).
9.Saque el casete (14) del bypass lateral (A), 10.Quite el depósito (14-1) del bypass lateral 11.Coloque el bypass lateral sobre el depósito
quite el tope de placa de elevación (12) y (A). de papel (P) de tal manera que los pasa-
póngalo en el espacio reservado para dores (15) que se encuentran a izquierda y
guardarlo (13). derecha en la parte delantera del depósito
de papel (P) coincidan con los agujeros(16)
que hay en la base del bypass lateral (A).
9.Die Kassette (14) aus dem seitlichen Mehrz- 10.Entfernen Sie die Kassette (14-1) des seitli- 11.Das seitliche Mehrzweck-Papierfach auf
weck-Papierfach herausziehen (A), den chen Mehrfacheinzugs (A). dem Papiereinzug (P) so platzieren, dass
Hebeplattenanschlag (12) entfernen und an jeder Stift (15) auf der linken und rechten
der Speicherposition (13) anbringen. Vorderseite des Papiereinzugs (P) mit den
Öffnungen(16) am Boden des seitlichen
Mehrzweck-Papierfachs (A) übereinstimmt.
9.Estrarre il cassetto (14) del vassoio multiplo 10.Rimuovere il cassetto (14-1) del vassoio 11.Porre il vassoio multiplo laterale sull'unità di
laterale (A), rimuovere il fermo della piastra multiplo laterale (A). alimentazione della carta (P) in modo che
di sollevamento (12) e collegarlo nella ogni punta (15) a destra e sinistra davanti
posizione di stoccaggio (13). all'unità di alimentazione della carta (P) cor-
risponda i fori(16) nella base del vassoio
multiplo laterale (A).
9.拉出侧手送纸盘 (A) 的纸盒 (14)，拆除 1 个 10.取出侧手送纸盘 (A) 的纸盒 (14-1) 上。 11.将供纸工作台 (P) 左右前方的各插销 (15) 与
升降板挡块 (12) 并将其安装到保存场所 侧手送纸盘 (A) 的底座的孔 (16) 对齐，将侧
(13)。 手送纸盘 (A) 放在供纸工作台 (P) 上。
9.사이드 멀티 트레이 (A) 의 카세트 (14) 를 빼 10.사이드 멀티 트레이 (A) 의 카세트 (14-1) 를 11.용지 급지대 (P) 의 좌우전방의 각 핀 (15) 과
내고 리프트판 스토퍼 (12) 1 개를 빼 내어 제거합니다 . 사이드 멀티 트레이 (A) 의 베이스 구멍 (16)
보관장소 (13) 에 장착합니다 . 이 맞도록 용지 급지대 (P) 에 사이드 멀티 트
레이 (A) 를 얹습니다 .
9.サイドマルチトレイ (A) のカセット (14) を 10.サイドマルチトレイ (A) のカセット (14-1) 11.ペーパーフィーダー(P) の左右前方の各ピ
引き出し、リフト板ストッパー(12)1 個を外 を取り外す。 ン (15) とサイドマルチトレイ (A) のベース
して保管場所 (13) に取り付ける。 の穴 (16) が合うように、ペーパーフィー
ダー(P) にサイドマルチトレイ (A) を載せ
る。
6
A 21
14-1 20
Q
17
14-2
A
18
19
14
P
12.Attach side multi-tray (A) to paper feeder (P) 13.Align the holes (17) of the cassette (14-1) for 15.Open the right cover (19) of the side multi-
using 2 pins (Q). the side multi-tray (A) with the pins (18) in tray (A).
the cassette slider (14-2). Put the paper cas- 16.Remove the strap (20) from the right cover
sette (14-1). shaft (21) and remove the right cover (19).
14.Push the cassette (14) in fully.
12.Fixer le bac multiples usages latéral (A) au 13.Alignez les trous (17) du magasin (14-1) 15.Ouvrir le capot de droite (19) du bac multi-
chargeur de papier (P) à l'aide de 2 broches pour le bac multiples usages latéral (A) avec ples usages latéral (A).
(Q). les ergots (18) dans le tiroir du magasin (14- 16.Déposer la courroie (20) de l'axe du capot
2).Placez le magasin de papier (14-1). droit (21) et déposer le capot droit (19).
14. Enfoncez à fond le magasin de papier (14).
12.Sujete el bypass lateral (A) al depósito de 13.Alinee los orificios (18) del depósito (14-1) 15.Abra la cubierta derecha (19) del bypass lat-
papel (P) utilizando 2 pasadores (Q). del bypass lateral (A) con los pasadores (19) eral (A).
del deslizador del depósito (14-2). 16.Quite la correa (20) del eje de la cubierta
14.Ejerza presión sobre el depósito de papel derecha (21) y quite la cubierta derecha(19).
(14) hasta introducirlo por completo.
12.Das seitliche Mehrzweck-Papierfach (A) 13.Richten Sie die Löcher (17) der Kassette 15.Die rechte Abdeckung (19) des seitlichen
mithilfe der 2 Stifte (Q) am Papiereinzug (P) (14-1) des seitlichen Mehrzweck-Papier- Mehrzweck-Papierfachs (A) öffnen.
befestigen. fachs (A) mit den Stiften (18) im Kas- 16.Nehmen Sie den Riemen (20) von der Welle
settenanschlag (14-2) aus. Setzen Sie die (21) der rechten Abdeckung und dann die
Papierkassette (14-1) wieder ein. rechte Abdeckung (19) ab.
14.Schieben Sie die Papierkassette (14) bis
zum Anschlag ein.
12.Collegare il vassoio multiplo laterale (A) 13.Allineare i fori (17) del cassetto (14-1) per il 15.Aprire il pannello destro (19) del vassoio
all'unità di alimentazione della carta (P) uti- vassoio multiplo laterale (A) con i perni (18) multiplo laterale (A).
lizzando 2 puntine (Q). della guida cassetto (14-2). Inserire il cas- 16.Rimuovere la cinghietta (20) dall'asta (21)
setto carta (14-1). del coperchio destro e quindi rimuovere il
14.Spingere il cassetto (14) fino in fondo. coperchio destro (19).
12.使用 2 枚插销 (Q) 将侧手送纸盘 (A) 固定在 13.将侧手送纸盘 (A) 的供纸盒 (14-1) 的孔 15.打开侧手送纸盘 (A) 的右部盖板（19）。
供纸工作台 (P) 上。 (17) 和供纸盒导轨 (14-2) 的插销 (18) 对 16.从右盖板的轴 (21) 上拆除挂绳 (20)，拆下右
齐。 放置纸盒 (14-1)。 盖板 (19)
14.完全推入纸盒 (14)。
12.핀 (Q) 2 개로 사이드 멀티 트레이 (A) 를 용 13.사이드 멀티 트레이 (A) 의 카세트 (14-1) 의 15.사이드 멀티 트레이 (A) 의 우측커버（19）를
지 급지대 (P) 에 고정합니다 . 구멍 (17) 과 카세트 슬라이더 (14-2) 의 핀 엽니다 .
(18) 을 맞춥니다 . 용지 카세트 (14-1) 를 배 16.스트랩 (20) 을 우측커버의 축 (21) 에서 떼어
치합니다 . 내고 우측커버 (19) 를 제거합니다 .
14.카세트 (14) 를 완전히 밀어 넣습니다 .
12.ピン (Q)2 本でサイドマルチトレイ (A) を 13.サイドマルチトレイ (A) のカセット (14-1) 15.サイドマルチトレイ (A) の右カバー（19）を
ペーパーフィーダー(P) に固定する。 の穴 (17) とカセットスライダー(14-2) の 開く。
ピン (18) を合わせる。
カセット (14-1) を置 16.ストラップ (20) を右カバーの軸 (21) から
く。 外し、
右カバー(19) を取り外す。
14.カセット (14) を奥まで押し込む。
7
S
1
S
5
W(M4x8)
17.Open the paper feeder right cover (5). 18.Insert the intermediate paper conveying unit 19.Secure the intermediate paper conveying
(S) in order of 1 to 2 on the illustration. unit (S) with the 2 S Tite screw M4 × 8 (W).
17.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du chargeur de 18.Insérer l'unité de transport du papier inter- 19.Fixer l'unite de transport du papier intermedi-
papier (5). médiaire (S) en suivant l'ordre 1 à 2 indiqué aire (S) a l'aide des 2 Vis S Tite M4 × 8 (W).
sur l'illustration.
17.Abra la cubierta derecha del depósito de 18.Inserte la unidad de transporte de papel 19.Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel
papel (5). intermedia (S) siguiendo el orden de 1 a 2 intermedia (S) con los 2 Tornillo S Tite M4 ×
de la ilustración. 8 (W).
17.Die rechte Abdeckung (5) des Papiereinzugs 18.Die eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit (S) in 19.Die eingesetzte Papierfordereinheit (S) mit
öffnen. der in der Abbildung gezeigten Reihenfolge den 2 S-Tite-Schraube M4 × 8 (W) sichern.
1 bis 2 einbauen.
17.Aprire il pannello destro (5) dell'unità di ali- 18.Inserire l'unità intermediale di trasporto carta 19.Fissare l'unita intermediale di trasporto carta
mentazione della carta. (S) da 1 a 2 sull'illustrazione. (S) con le 2 Vite S Tite M4 × 8 (W).
17.打开供纸盒的右部盖板 (5)。 18.将中间搬运单元（S）按如图所示先插入①， 19.使用 2 颗紧固型 S 螺丝 M4×8(W) 来固定中
再插到②。 间搬运单元 (S)。
17.급지대 우측커버 (5) 를 엽니다 . 18.중간반송 유니트（S）를 일러스트 와 같 19.나사 M4×8 S 타이트 (W) 2 개로 중간반송
이 ① , ②의 순으로 삽입합니다 . 유니트 (S) 를 고정합니다 .
17.ペーパーフィーダーの右カバー（5）を開く。 18.中間搬送ユニット（S）をイラストのように 19.ビス M4×8 S タイト (W)2 本で中間搬送ユ
①から②の順で挿入する。 ニット (S) を固定する。
8
22
25 26
U
23
24
20.Connect the intermediate paper conveying 22. Insert the projection (23) of the wire cover (U) 25.Remove the screw (25) in the rear of the
unit(S) connector (22). into the hole (24) in the intermediate paper paper feeder and remove the cover (26).
21.Attach the clamp (T) and secure the connec- conveying unit, and attach the wire cover (U).
tor wire. 23. Replace the right cover (19) of the side multi-
tray (A).
24. Close the right cover of the paper feeder (5).
20.Raccorder le connecteur (22) de l'unité de 22. Insérer la saillie (23) du couvercle de câble (U) 25.Déposer la vis (25) à l'arrière du chargeur de
transport du papier intermédiaire(S). dans l'orifice (24) de l'unité de transport du papier et déposer le couvercle (26).
21.Monter le collier (T) et fixer le câble du con- papier intermédiaire, et fixer le couvercle de
câble (U).
necteur.
23. Remettre le capot de droite (19) du bac multi-
ples usages latéral (A) en place.
24. Fermer le capot de droite du chargeur de papier
(5).
20.Conecte el conector(22) de la unidad de 22. Introduzca el resalto (23) de la cubierta para el 25.Quite el tornillo (25) del lado trasero del
transporte de papel intermedia (S). cable (U) por el agujero (24) de la unidad de depósito de papel y quite la cubierta (26).
21.Fije el sujetador (T) y asegure el cable del transporte de papel intermedia y sujete la cubi-
erta para el cable (U).
conector.
23. Sustituya la cubierta derecha (19) del bypass
lateral (A).
24. Cierre la cubierta derecha del depósito de papel
(5).
20.Den Steckverbinder (22) der eingesetzten 22. Die Nase (23) der Kabelabdeckung (U) in die 25.Die Schraube (25) an der Rückseite des
Papierfördereinheit anschließen(S). Öffnung (24) in der eingesetzten Papierfördere- Papiereinzugs entfernen und die Abdeckung
21.Die Klemme (T) anbringen und das Kabel inheit einsetzen und die Kabelabdeckung (U) (26) abnehmen.
befestigen.
des Steckverbinders sichern.
23. Die rechte Abdeckung (19) des seitlichen Meh-
rzweck-Papierfachs (A) wieder anbringen.
24. Die rechte Abdeckung des Papiereinzugs (5)
schließen.
20.Collegare il connettore (22) dell'unità inter- 22.Inserire la proiezione (23) del coperchio cavi 25.Rimuovere la vite (25) nel retro dell'unità di
mediale di trasporto carta(S). (U) nel foro (24) dell'unità intermediale di tra- alimentazione della carta e quindi rimuovere
21.Applicare il morsetto (T) e fissare il cavo del sporto carta e collegare il coperchio cavi (U). il coperchio (26).
connettore. 23.Sostituire il pannello destro (19) del vassoio
multiplo laterale (A).
24.Chiudere il pannello destro dell'unità di ali-
mentazione della carta (5).
20.连接中间搬运单元 (S) 的接插件 (22)。 22.将电线盖板 (U) 的突起 (23) 插入中间搬运单 25.拆除供纸盒后部的 1 颗螺丝 (25)，拆下盖板
21.安装夹钳 (T)，以固定接插件电线。 元的孔 (24) 中，安装电线盖板 (U)。 (26) 。
23.按原样安装侧手送纸盘 (A) 的右部盖板
（19）。
24.关闭供纸工作台的右部盖板（5）。
20.중간반송유니트 (S) 의 커넥터 (22) 를 접속 22.전선커버 (U) 의 돌기 (23) 를 중간반송 유니 25.급지대 후면의 뒤쪽 나사 (25) 1 개를 제거하
합니다 . 트의 구멍 (24) 에 넣고 전선커버 (U) 를 장착 고 커버 (26) 를 떼어 냅니다 .
21.클램프 (T) 를 부착 , 커넥터 전선을 고정합니 합니다 .
다. 23.사이드 멀티 트레이 (A) 의 우측커버（19）를
원래대로 장착합니다 .
24.용지 급지대의 우측커버（5）를 닫습니다 .
20.中間搬送ユニット (S) のコネクター(22) を 22.電線カバー(U) の突起 (23) を中間搬送ユ 25.ペーパーフィーダー後側のビス (25)1 本を
接続する。 ニットの穴 (24) に入れて、電線カバー(U) 外し、
カバー(26) を取り外す。
21.クランプ (T) を取り付け、
コネクター電線を を取り付ける。
固定する。 23.サイドマルチトレイ (A) の右カバー（19）を
元通りに取り付ける。
24.ペーパーフィーダーの右カバー（5）を閉じ
る。
9
30 3
2
29 28
27
26.Connect the power cord (27) and the signal 27. Replace the cover (26) using the screw (25) [Connecting the side feeder to the machine]
cable (28) to connectors (29) (30) respec- removed in step 25. Installation with medium-speed MFPs and
tively on the Side multi-tray. printers
If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to
step 12.
1.Open the lower right cover (1) on the
machine.Remove the strap (2) from the shaft
(3) and remove lower right cover (1).
26.Raccorder respectivement le cordon d'ali- 27. Reposer le couvercle (26) à l'aide de la vis [Connexion du chargeur latéral à la machine]
mentation (27) et le câble à signal (28) aux (25) déposée à l'étape 25. Installation avec les imprimantes multifonctions
connecteurs (29) (30) du Bac multiples et les imprimantes à vitesse moyenne
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP à grande vitesse,
usages latéral. passer à l'étape 12.
1. Ouvrir le capot inférieur droit (1) de la machine.
Déposer la courroie (2) de l'arbre (3) et déposer
le couvercle inférieur droit (1).
26.Conecte el cable de alimentación (27) y el 27.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (26) usando el [Conexión del depósito lateral a la máquina]
Instalación con unidades MFP e impresoras de
cable de señales (28) a los conectores (29) tornillo (25) quitado en el paso 25.
velocidad media
(30) del bypass lateral, respectivamente.
Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al
paso 12.
1. Abra la cubierta derecha inferior (1) de la máquina.
Quite la correa (2) del eje (3) y quite la cubierta
frontal inferior (1).
26.Das Netzkabel (27) und das Signalkabel 27.Die Abdeckung (26) mittels der in Schritt 25 [Anschluss des seitlichen Einzugs am Gerät.]
(28) an den entsprechenden Steckverbind- entfernten Schraube (25) wieder anbringen. Installation an mittelschnellen MFPs und Druckern
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleis-
ern (29) (30) des Seitliches Mehrzweck-
tungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 12.
Papierfach anschließen.
1. Öffnen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) des
Geräts.
Den Riemen (2) von der Welle (3) abnehmen und
dann die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) abnehmen.
[Collegare l'alimentatore laterale alla macchina.]
26.Collegare il cavo di alimentazione (27) e il 27.Ricollocare il coperchio (26) utilizzando la Installazione con MFP e stampanti di media
cavo del segnale (28) rispettivamente ai vite (25) rimossa nel passo 25. velocità
connettori (29) e (30) sull'vassoio multiplo Se si installa su una MFP a velocità alta, procedere
laterale. al passo 12.
1. Aprire il coperchio destro inferiore (1) sulla mac-
china.
Rimuovere la cinghietta (2) dall'asta (3) e quindi
rimuovere il coperchio destro inferiore (1).
26.将 AC 电线 (27) 以及信号线 (28) 分别与侧手 27.使用在步骤 25 中拆除的 1 颗螺丝 (25) 按原 [ 侧供纸盒与机器主机的连接 ]
送纸盘的接插件 (29)、(30) 连接。 样安装盖板 (26)。 当安装到中速 MFP 和打印机上时
安装于高速 MFP 上时，进至步骤 12。
1.打开机器主机的右下部盖板 (1)。
将带子 (2) 从轴 (3) 上拆除，拆下右下部盖
板 (1)。
26.AC 전선 (27) 및 신호선 (28) 을 사이드 멀티 27.순서 25 에서 제거한 나사 (25) 1 개로 커버 [ 사이드 피더와 본체 연결 ]
트레이체 커넥터 (29), (30) 에 각각 접속합 (26) 를 원래대로 부착합니다 . 중속 MFP 또는 프린터에 설치하는 경우
니다 . 고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우에는 순서 12 로 진
행합니다 .
1.본체의 우측 하단커버 (1) 를 엽니다 .
스트라프 (2) 를 축 (3) 에서 떼어내 오른쪽
아래 커버 (1) 를 제거합니다 .
26.AC 電線 (27) および信号線 (28) をサイドマ 27.手順 25 で取り外したビス (25)1 本でカバー [ サイドフィーダーと機械本体の接続 ]
ルチトレイのコネクター(29)、(30) にそれ (26) を元通りに取り付ける。 中速 MFP またはプリンターに設置の場合
ぞれ接続する。 高速 MFP に設置の場合は手順 12 に進む。
1.機械本体の右下カバー(1) を開く。
ストラップ (2) を軸 (3) から外し、右下カ
バー(1) を取り外す。
10
7
8
4
5 7
5 6 8 9
2.Open the machine paper conveying cover 4.Remove 3 screws (7) and remove the front 5.Remove 3 screws (8). Remove the lower
(4). right cover (5). right rear cover (9).
3.Open the panel (6) on the machine front
right cover (5).
2.Ouvrir le capot du transport du papier de la 4.Déposer les 3 vis (7) et déposer le capot 5.Déposer les 3 vis (8). Déposer le capot arri-
machine (4). avant droit (5). ère droit inférieur (9).
3.Ouvrir le panneau (6) sur le capot avant droit
de la machine (5).
2.Abra la cubierta de transporte del papel de la 4.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y quite la cubierta 5.Quite los 3 tornillos (8). Quite la cubierta
máquina (4). delantera derecha (5). trasera inferior derecha (9).
3.Abra el panel (6) en la cubierta delantera
derecha (5) de la máquina.
2.Öffnen Sie die Papiertransportabdeckung (4) 4.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (7) und nehmen 5.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (8). Nehmen Sie
des Geräts. Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (5) ab. die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (9) ab.
3.Öffnen Sie die Platte (6) der vorderen
rechten Abdeckung (5) des Geräts.
2.Aprire il coperchio (4) dell'unità di trasporto 4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7), e quindi rimuovere il 5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (8). Rimuovere il coper-
carta della macchina. coperchio destro posteriore (5). chio posteriore inferiore destro (9).
3.Aprire il pannello (6) sul coperchio destro
anteriore (5) della macchina.
2.打开机器主机的传输盖板 (4)。 4.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (7)，拆下右前部盖板 (5)。 5.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (8)。 拆下右下后部盖板 (9)。
3.打开机器主机的右前部盖板 (5) 的盖子 (6)。
2.본체의 반송 커버 (4) 를 엽니다 . 4.나사 (7) 3 개를 제거하고 우측 전면커버 (5) 5.나사 (8) 3 개를 제거합니다 . 우측 하단 뒷커
3.본체 우측 하단커버 (5) 의 뚜껑 (6) 을 엽니 를 떼어 냅니다 . 버 (9) 를 제거합니다 .
다.
2.機械本体の搬送カバー(4) を開く。 4.ビス (7)3 本を外し、右前カバー(5) を取り 5.ビス (8)3 本を外す。右下後カバー(9) を取
3.機械本体の右前カバー(5) のふた (6) を開 外す。 り外す。
く。
11
13
10
14
15
16
11 12
6.Remove the panel (11) from the lower right 7.Open the paper feeder right cover (12). 8.Remove the breakaway cover (15) from the
cover (10) on the paper feeder using a flat Remove the strap (13) from the right cover paper feeder lower right cover (16).
blade screwdriver. shaft (14) and remove the right cover (12).
6.Déposer le panneau (11) du capot inférieur 7.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du chargeur de 8.Retirez le capot détachable (15) du capot
droit (10) du chargeur de papier en procé- papier (12). inférieur droit du chargeur de papier (16).
dant à l'aide d'un tournevis à lame. Déposer la courroie (13) de l'axe du capot
droit (14) et déposer le capot droit (12).
6.Quite el panel (11) de la cubierta derecha 7.Abra la cubierta derecha del depósito de 8.Quite la cubierta de separación (15) de la
inferior (10) del depósito de papel con un papel (12). cubierta inferior derecha del depósito de
destornillador de pala plana. Quite la correa (13) del eje de la cubierta papel (16).
derecha (14) y quite la cubierta derecha
(12).
6.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben- 7.Die rechte Abdeckung (12) des Papiere- 8.Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (15)
dreher die Platte (11) von der unteren rech- inzugs öffnen. von der untere rechte Abdeckung (16) des
ten Abdeckung (10) des Papiereinzugs ab. Nehmen Sie den Riemen (13) von der Welle Papiereinzugs ab.
(14) der rechten Abdeckung und dann die
rechte Abdeckung (12) ab.
6.Rimuovere il pannello (11) dal coperchio 7.Aprire il coperchio destro (12) dell'unità di 8.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (15) dal
destro inferiore (10) sull'unità di alimentazi- alimentazione della carta. coperchio destro inferiore (16) dell'unità di
one carta utilizzando un cacciavite a testa Rimuovere la cinghietta (13) dall'asta (14) alimentazione carta.
piana. del coperchio destro e quindi rimuovere il
coperchio destro (12).
6.使用一字螺丝刀等将供纸盒的右下部盖板 7.打开供纸盒的右部盖板 (12)。 8.去除供纸盒的右下部盖板（16）上的可去除部
(10) 的盖子 (11) 拆下。 从右盖板的轴 (14) 上拆除挂绳 (13)，拆下右 （15）。
盖板 (12)。
6.용지 급지대의 우측 하단커버 (10) 의 뚜껑 7.급지대 우측커버 (12) 를 엽니다 . 8.용지 급지대의 우측 하단커버 (16) 의 분할커
(11) 을 마이너스 드라이버 등으로 떼어 냅니 스트랩 (13) 을 우측커버의 축 (14) 에서 떼어 버부 (15) 를 떼어 냅니다 .
다. 내고 우측커버 (12) 를 제거합니다 .
6.ペーパーフィーダーの右下カバー(10) のふ 7.ペーパーフィーダーの右カバー(12) を開 8.ペーパーフィーダーの右下カバー (16) の
た (11) をマイナスドライバーなどで取り外 く。 割りカバー部 (15) を切り取る。
す。 ストラップ (13) を右カバーの軸 (14) から
外し、右カバー(12) を取り外す。
12
1
17 18 19
5 9
9.Remove the breakaway cover (17) from the front right cover (5) and 10.Remove the panel (19) from the machine lower right cover (1) with a
the breakaway cover (18) from the lower right rear cover (9). flat blade screwdriver.
9.Déposer le couvercle amovible (17) du capot avant droit (5) et le cou- 10.Retirer le panneau (19) du capot inférieur droit de la machine (1) à
vercle amovible (18) du capot arrière inférieur droit (9). l'aide d'un tournevis à lame plate.
9.Quite la cubierta divisoria (17) de la cubierta delantera derecha (5) y la 10.Extraiga el panel (19) de la cubierta derecha inferior de la máquina (1)
cubierta divisoria (18) de la cubierta trasera inferior derecha (9). con un destornillador de pala plana.
9.Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (17) von der vorderen rechten 10.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (19) von
Abdeckung (5) ab und die Ablösungsabdeckung (18) von der unteren der unteren rechten Abdeckung (1) des Geräts ab.
rechten hinteren Abdeckung (9).
9.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (17) dal coperchio destro anteriore 10.Rimuovere il pannello (19) dal coperchio destro inferiore (1) della mac-
(5), e il coperchio di distacco (18) dal coperchio posteriore inferiore china con un cacciavite a testa piatta.
destro (9).
9.切除右前部盖板 (5) 的切割盖板 (17) 和右下后部盖板 (9) 的切割盖板 10.使用一字螺丝刀将机器主机的右下部盖板 (1) 的盖子 (19) 拆下。
(18)。
9.우측 전면커버 (5) 의 분할커버 (17) 와 우측 하단 뒷커버 (9) 의 분할커 10.마이너스 드라이버를 사용하여 본체 우측 하단커버 (1) 에서 뚜껑 (19)
버 (18) 를 떼어 냅니다 . 을 제거합니다 .
9.右前カバー(5) の割りカバー(17) と右下後カバー(9) の割りカバー 10.機械本体の右下カバー(1) のふた (19) をマイナスドライバーで取り
(18) を切り取る。 外す。
13
20
1mm
1mm
0mm
1mm
11.After using alcohol to clean place adhering the film, adhere the film (O) in the position (20) indicated in the illustration.
Proceed to step 23.
11.Coller le film (O) sur l'emplacement (20) indiqué dans l'illustration, après avoir soigneusement nettoyé cet emplacement à l'alcool.
Passer à l'étape 23.
11.Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la película, pegue la película (O) en el lugar (20) que se indica en la ilustración.
Vaya al paso 23.
11.Zum Anbringen des Films (O) die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film (O) dann in der in der Abbildung angegebenen Position (20) anbrin-
gen.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 23.
11.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola, far aderire la pellicola (O) nella posizione (20) indicata nell'illustrazione.
Procedere al passo 23.
11.使用酒精对薄膜粘贴位置进行清洁后，按插图位置 (20) 粘贴薄膜（O）。
进至步骤 23。
11.필름 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 , 일러스트의 위치 (20) 에 맞춰 필름（O）을 부착합니다 .
순서 23 로 진행합니다 .
11.フィルム貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後、イラストの位置 (20) にあわせて、フィルム（O）
を貼り付ける。
手順 23 進む。
14
23 26
22 25
21
24
Installation on high-speed MFPs 13.Open the right cover 2 (24) on the machine.
12.Open the right cover 1 (21) on the machine. Remove the strap (25) from the right cover shaft (26) and remove the
Remove the strap (22) from the shaft (23) and remove right cover 1 right cover 2 (24).
(21).
Montage sur des MFP à grande vitesse 13.Ouvrir le capot droit 2 (24) de la machine.
12.Ouvrir le capot droit 1 (21) de la machine. Déposer la courroie (25) de l'axe du capot droit (26) et déposer le
Déposer la courroie (22) de l'arbre (23) et déposer le capot droit 1 (21). capot droit 2 (24).
Instalación en las MFP de alta velocidad 13.Abra la cubierta derecha 2 (24) de la máquina.
12.Abra la cubierta derecha 1 (21) de la máquina. Quite la correa (25) del eje de la cubierta derecha (26) y quite la cubi-
Quite la correa (22) del eje (23) y quite la cubierta derecha 1 (21). erta derecha 2 (24).
Installation an MFP der Hochleistungs1lasse 13.Öffnen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 2 (24) des Geräts.
12.Öffnen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 1 (21) des Geräts. Nehmen Sie den Riemen (25) von der Welle (26) der rechten Abdeck-
Den Riemen (22) von der Welle (23) abnehmen und dann die rechte ung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 2 (24) ab.
Abdeckung 1 (21) abnehmen.
Installazione sulle MFP a velocità alta 13.Aprire il coperchio destro 2 (24) sulla macchina.
12.Aprire il coperchio destro 1 (21) sulla macchina. Rimuovere la cinghietta (25) dall'asta (26) del coperchio destro e quindi
Rimuovere la cinghietta (22) dall'asta (23) e quindi rimuovere il coper- rimuovere il coperchio destro 2 (24).
chio destro 1 (21).
安装于高速 MFP 上时 13.打开机器主机的右部盖板 2(24)。
12.打开机器主机的右部盖板 1(21)。 从右盖板的轴 (26) 上拆除挂绳 (25)，拆下右盖板 2(24)。
将带子 (22) 从轴 (23) 上拆除，拆下右部盖板 1(21)。
고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우 13.본체의 우측 커버 2(24) 을 엽니다 .
12.본체의 우측 커버 1(21) 을 엽니다 . 스트랩 (25) 을 우측커버의 축 (26) 에서 떼어내고 우측커버 2 (24) 를 5
스트라프 (22) 를 축 (23) 에서 떼어내 우측커버 1 (21) 를 제거합니다 . 제거합니다 .
高速 MFP に設置の場合 13.機械本体の右カバー2(24) を開く。
12.機械本体の右カバー1(21) を開く。 ストラップ (25) を右カバーの軸 (26) から外し、右カバー2(24) を取
ストラップ (22) を軸 (23) から外し、右カバー1(21) を取り外す。 り外す。
15
28
29 31
30
32
31
30
27 30
31 33
28 28
14.Open the machine paper conveying cover 16.Remove the 4 screws (30) and release the 4 17.Remove the panel (33) from the lower right
(27). hooks (31). Then remove the front right rear cover (32) with a flat blade screwdriver.
15.Open the panel (29) on the machine front cover (28).
right cover (28).
14.Ouvrir le capot du transport du papier de la 16.Retirer les 4 vis (30) et libérer les 4 crochets 17.Déposer le panneau (33) du capot arrière
machine (27). (31). Retirer ensuite le capot avant droit (28). inférieur droit (32) en procédant à l'aide d'un
15.Ouvrir le panneau (29) sur le capot avant tournevis à lame.
droit de la machine (28).
14.Abra la cubierta de transporte del papel de la 16.Quite los 4 tornillos (30) y libere los 4 gan- 17.Extraiga el panel (33) de la cubierta trasera
máquina (27). chos (31). Después, quite la cubierta frontal inferior derecha (32) con un destornillador
15.Abra el panel (29) en la cubierta delantera derecha (28). de pala plana.
derecha (28) de la máquina.
14.Öffnen Sie die Abdeckung des Papier- 16.Entfernen Sie die 4 Schrauben (30) und 17.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben-
transports (27) des Geräts. lösen Sie die 4 Haken (31). Danach nehmen dreher die Platte (33) von der unteren rech-
15.Öffnen Sie die Platte (29) der vorderen Sie die rechte vordere Abdeckung (28) ab. ten hinteren Abdeckung (32) ab.
rechten Abdeckung (28) des Geräts.
14.Aprire il coperchio (27) dell'unità di trasporto 16.Rimuovere le 4 viti (30) e rilasciare i 4 ganci 17.Rimuovere il pannello (33) dal coperchio
carta della macchina. (31). Rimuovere quindi il coperchio anteriore posteriore inferiore destro (32) con un cac-
15.Aprire il pannello (29) sul coperchio destro destro (28). ciavite a testa piana.
anteriore (28) della macchina.
14.打开机器主机的传输盖板 (27)。 16.卸下 4 颗螺丝（30）并松开 4 个卡扣（31）。 17.用一字螺丝刀等取下右下盖板（32）的盖子
15.打开机器主机的右前部盖板 (28) 的盖子 然后卸下右前盖板（28）。 （33）。
(29)。
14.본체의 반송 커버 (27) 를 엽니다 . 16.나사 (30) 4 개를 제거하고 후크 (31) 4 개를 17.우측 아래뒷면 커버 (32) 의 뚜껑 (33) 을 마
15.본체 우측 하단커버 (28) 의 뚜껑 (29) 을 엽 풉니다 . 그런 다음 우측 전면 커버 (28) 를 이너스 드라이버 등으로 풉니다 .
니다 . 제거합니다 .
14.機械本体の搬送カバー(27) を開く。 16.ビス (30)4 本およびフック (31)4 箇所を外 17.右下後カバー(32) のふた (33) をマイナス
15.機械本体の右前カバー(28) のふた (29) を し、右前カバー(28) を取り外す。 ドライバーなどで取り外す。
開く。
16
37 38
32
34
34
36
34 35 28 32
34
18.Remove 5 screws (34).Remove the lower 19.Remove the breakaway cover (35) from the 20.Remove the breakaway cover (37) from the
right rear cover (32). lower right cover (36) . front right cover (28) and the breakaway
cover (38) from the lower right rear cover
(32).
18.Déposer les 5 vis (34) . Déposer le capot 19.Retirez le capot détachable (35) du capot 20.Déposer le couvercle amovible (37) du capot
arrière inférieur droit (32). inférieur droit (36). avant droit (28) et le couvercle amovible (38)
du capot arrière inférieur droit (32).
18.Quite los 5 tornillos (34). Quite la cubierta 19.Quite la cubierta de separación (35) de la 20.Quite la cubierta divisoria (37) de la cubierta
trasera inferior derecha (32). cubierta inferior derecha (36). delantera derecha (28) y la cubierta divisoria
(38) de la cubierta trasera inferior derecha
(32).
18.Entfernen Sie 5 Schrauben (34). Nehmen 19.Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (35) 20.Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (37)
Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung von untere rechte Abdeckung (36) ab. von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung (28)
(32) ab. ab und die Ablösungsabdeckung (38) von
der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung
(32).
18.Rimuovere le 5 viti (34). Rimuovere il coper- 19.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (35) dal 20.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (37) dal
chio posteriore inferiore destro (32). coperchio destro inferiore (36) . coperchio destro anteriore (28), e il coper-
chio di distacco (38) dal coperchio posteriore
inferiore destro (32).
18.拆除 5 颗螺丝 (34)。拆下右下后部盖板 19.去除右下部盖板 (36) 上的可去除部（35）。 20.切除右前部盖板 (28) 的切割盖板 (37) 和右
(32)。 下后部盖板 (32) 的切割盖板 (38)。
18.나사 (34) 5 개를 제거합니다 . 우측 하단 뒷 19.우측 하단커버 (36) 의 분할커버부 (35) 를 20.우측 전면커버 (28) 의 분할커버 (37) 와 우측
커버 (32) 를 제거합니다 . 떼어 냅니다 . 하단 뒷커버 (32) 의 분할커버 (38) 를 떼어
냅니다 .
18.ビス (34)5 本を外す。 右下後カバー(32) 19.右下カバー(36) の割りカバー部 (35) を切 20.右前カバー(28) の割りカバー(37) と右下後
を取り外す。 り取る。 カバー(32) の割りカバー(38) を切り取る。
17
40
1mm
21
1mm
0mm
1mm
39
O
21.Remove the panel (39) from the machine 22. After using alcohol to clean place adhering the film, adhere the film (O) in the position (40) indi-
right cover 1 (21) with a flat blade screw- cated in the illustration.
driver.
21.Retirer le panneau (39) du capot droit 1 de la 22.Coller le film (O) sur l'emplacement (40) indiqué dans l'illustration, après avoir soigneusement
machine (21) à l'aide d'un tournevis à lame nettoyé cet emplacement à l'alcool.
plate.
21.Extraiga el panel (39) de la cubierta derecha 22.Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la película, pegue la
1 de la máquina (21) con un destornillador película (O) en el lugar (40) que se indica en la ilustración.
de pala plana.
21.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben- 22.Zum Anbringen des Films (O) die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film (O) dann in der
dreher die Platte (39) von der rechten in der Abbildung angegebenen Position (40) anbringen.
Abdeckung 1 (21) des Geräts ab.
21.Rimuovere il pannello (39) dal coperchio 22.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola, far aderire la pellicola
destro 1 (21) della macchina con un caccia- (O) nella posizione (40) indicata nell'illustrazione.
vite a testa piatta.
21.使用一字螺丝刀将机器主机的右部盖板 1 22.使用酒精对薄膜粘贴位置进行清洁后，按插图位置 (40) 粘贴薄膜（O）。
(21) 的盖子 (39) 拆下。
21.마이너스 드라이버를 사용하여 본체 우측 커 22.필름 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 , 일러스트의 위치 (40) 에 맞춰 필름（O）을 부착합니다 .
버 1(21) 에서 뚜껑 (39) 을 제거합니다 .
21.機械本体の右カバー1(21) のふた (39) をマ 22.フィルム貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後、
イラストの位置（40）にあわせて、フィルム
（O）を貼り
イナスドライバーで取り外す。 付ける。
18
D
F(M4x8)
D F(M4x8)
23.Install a lock pin (D) on the front right of the machine using an M4 × 8 24.Install a lock pin (D) on the rear right of the machine using an M4 × 8
screw (F). screw (F) in the same way.
23.Monter une broche de verrouillage (D) sur l'avant droit de la machine à 24.Monter une broche de verrouillage (D) sur l'arrière droit de la machine
l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (F). de la même manière à l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (F).
23.Instale una clavija de bloqueo (D) en la parte derecha frontal de la 24.Instale una clavija de bloqueo (D) en la parte derecha posterior de la
máquina usando un tornillo M4 × 8 (F). máquina usando un tornillo M4 × 8 (F).
23.Bringen Sie mit einer M4 × 8 Schraube (F) den Arretierungsstift (D) 24.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise mit einer M4 × 8 Schraube (F) den Arre-
vorne rechts am Gerät an. tierungsstift (D) hinten rechts am Gerät an.
23.Installare un perno di blocco (D) sul lato destro anteriore della mac- 24.Analogamente, installare un perno di blocco (D) sul lato destro posteri-
china utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (F). ore della macchina utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (F).
23.使用 1 颗 M4×8 螺丝 (F) 将锁定插销 (D) 安装到机器主机的右前侧。 24.按相同方法，使用 1 颗 M4×8 螺丝 (F) 将锁定插销 (D) 安装到机器主机
的右后侧。
23.나사 M4 × 8(F) 를 사용하여 잠금 핀 (D) 을 본체의 오른쪽 전면에 설 24.나사같은 방식으로 M4 × 8(F) 를 사용하여 잠금 핀 (D) 을 본체의 오른
치합니다 . 쪽 뒷면에 설치합니다 .
23.ビス M4×8(F)1 本で、
ロックピン (D) を機械本体右前側に取り付ける。 24.同様にビス M4×8(F) １本で、ロックピン (D) を機械本体右後側に取り
付ける。
19
42 C
41
25.Place the small base slider (C) on the large base slider (B). Place so that the bend (42) on the small base slider (C) abuts inside the rest (41) at the
end of the large base slider (B).
25.Placer la petite règle de base (C) sur la grande règle de base (B). Disposer la petite règle de base (C) de sorte que son extrémité repliée (42) s'encas-
tre dans la butée (41) à l'extrémité de la grande règle de base (B).
25.Coloque el deslizador de base pequeño (C) sobre el deslizador de base grande (B). Haga que la dobladura (42) del deslizador de base pequeño (C)
quede en el interior del apoyo (41) del extremo del deslizador de base grande (B).
25.Setzen Sie den kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) auf den großen Basis-Schieber (B). Setzen Sie ihn so auf, dass die Biegung (42) am kleinen Basis-
Schieber (C) innerhalb der Auflage (41) am Ende des großen Basis-Schiebers (B) anliegt.
25.Posizionare lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) sullo scivolo di base grande (B). Posizionare in modo che la piegatura (42) sullo scivolo di base piccolo (C)
si attesti all'interno del sostegno (41) all'estremità dello scivolo di base grande (B).
25.将底座滑板（小）(C) 放在底座滑板（大）(B)。此时底座滑板（小）(C) 的弯曲部 (42) 应处于底座滑板（大）(B) 的前端折弯部 (41) 的内侧。
25.베이스 슬라이더 대 (B) 의 위에 베이스 슬라이더 소 (C) 를 얹습니다 . 그 때 , 베이스 슬라이더 소 (C) 의 곡선부 (42) 가 베이스 슬라이더 대 (B) 의 맨
앞쪽의 꺾이고 구부러진 부분 (41) 의 안쪽으로 오도록 세트합니다 .
25.ベーススライダー大 (B) の上にベーススライダー小 (C) を乗せる。
その際、ベーススライダー小 (C) の曲げ (42) がベーススライダー大 (B) の先端折
り曲げ部 (41) の内側にくるようにセットする。
20
C
6 ± 2 mm
43 C
F(M4x8)
B
26.Insert the small base slider (C) under the machine. Install to the base (43) using 2 M4 × 8 screws (F) so that the gap between the small base slider (C)
and the large base slider (B) is 6 ± 2 mm.
* For PF-730, install to the screw holes marked “R”.
26.Insérer la petite règle de base (C) sous l'appareil. Fixer à la base (43) à l'aide de 2 vis M4 × 8 (F) de sorte que l'interstice entre la petite règle de base
(C) et la grande règle de base (B) soit de 6 ± 2 mm.
* Pour le PF-730, fixer aux trous de vis marqués "R".
26.Introduzca el deslizador de base pequeño (C) por debajo de la máquina. Instálelo en la base (43) usando 2 tornillos M4 × 8 (F) de modo que el espa-
cio entre el deslizador de base pequeño (C) y el deslizador de base grande (B) sea de 6 ± 2 mm.
* En el caso de PF-730, instale en los orificios para tornillo “R”.
26.Setzen Sie die Führungsschiene (C) unter das Gerät. Befestigen Sie sie mit zwei M4 × 8 Schrauben (F) so an der Basis (43), dass der Abstand
zwischen der kleinen Führungsschiene (C) und der großen Führungsschiene (B) 6 ± 2 mm beträgt.
* Bei Modell PF-730 an den mit "R" markierten Schraublöchern befestigen.
26.Inserire lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) sotto la macchina. Installare sulla base (43) utilizzando 2 viti M4 × 8 (F) in modo che lo spazio tra lo scivolo di
base piccolo (C) e lo scivolo di base grande (B) sia di 6 ± 2 mm.
* Per PF-730, installare ai fori per viti segnalati con “R”.
26.将底座滑板 ( 小 )(C) 插入机器主机侧的供纸工作台的下方。使用 2 颗 M4×8(F) 螺丝将底座滑板（小）(C) 安装到底板 (43) 上，确保底座滑板（小）(C)
与底座滑板（大）(B) 之间的间隙为 6±2mm。
※PF-730 时，安装到带有 R 刻印的螺纹孔上。
26.소형 베이스 슬라이더 (C) 를 본체 하단에 삽입합니다 . 소형 베이스 슬라이더 (C) 와 대형 베이스 슬라이더 (B) 사이의 틈이 6 ± 2 mm 가 되도록 M4
× 8 나사 (F) 2 개를 사용하여 바닥판 (43) 에 장착합니다 .
※PF-730 은 R 의 각인이 있는 나사구멍에 장착합니다 .
26.ベーススライダー小 (C) を機械本体側のペーパーフィーダーの下に入れる。ベーススライダー小 (C) とベーススライダー大 (B) の隙間が、
6±2mm に
なるようにビス M4×8(F)2 本で底板 (43) に取り付ける。
※PF-730 は R の刻印のあるビス穴に取り付ける。
21
Installation with medium-speed MFPs and printers 28.Reinstall the lower right rear cover (9).
If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 31. 29.Reinstall the front right cover (5).
27.Reinstall the paper feeder right cover (12). 30.Reinstall the lower right cover (1).
Proceed to step 35.
Installation avec les imprimantes multifonctions et les imprimantes à 28.Reposer le capot arrière inférieur droit (9).
vitesse moyenne 29.Reposer le capot avant droit (5).
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP à grande vitesse, passer à l'étape 31. 30.Reposer le capot inférieur droit (1).
27.Reposer le capot droit du chargeur de papier (12). Passer à l'étape 35.
Instalación con unidades MFP e impresoras de velocidad media 28.Reinstale la cubierta trasera inferior derecha (9).
Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al paso 31. 29.Reinstale la cubierta delantera derecha (5).
27.Reinstale la cubierta derecha del depósito de papel (12). 30.Reinstale la cubierta derecha inferior (1).
Vaya al paso 35.
Installation an mittelschnellen MFPs und Druckern 28.Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (9) wieder an.
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter 29.Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (5) wieder an.
zu Schritt 31. 30.Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) wieder an.
27.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (12) des Papiereinzugs wieder an. Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 35.
Installazione con MFP e stampanti di media velocità 28.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (9).
Se si installa su una MFP a velocità alta, procedere al passo 31. 29.Reinstallare il coperchio destro anteriore (5).
27.Reinstallare il coperchio destro (12) dell'unità di alimentazione carta. 30.Reinstallare il coperchio destro inferiore (1).
Procedere al passo 35.
当安装到中速 MFP 和打印机上时 28.按原样安装右下后部盖板 (9)。
安装于高速 MFP 上时，进至步骤 31。 29.按原样安装右前部盖板 (5)。
27.按原样安装供纸盒的右盖板 (12)。 30.按原样安装右下部盖板 (1)。
进至步骤 35。
중속 MFP 또는 프린터에 설치하는 경우 28.우측하단 뒷커버 (9) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우에는 순서 31 로 진행합니다 . 29.우측 전면커버 (5) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
27.용지 급지대의 우측커버 (12) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 . 30.우측 하단커버 (1) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
순서 35 로 진행합니다 .
中速 MFP またはプリンターに設置の場合 28.右下後カバー(9) を元通り取り付ける。
高速 MFP に設置の場合は手順 31 に進む。 29.右前カバー(5) を元通り取り付ける。
27.ペーパーフィーダーの右カバー(12) を元通り取り付ける。 30.右下カバー(1) を元通り取り付ける。
手順 35 に進む。
22
E
J(M4x10)
Installation on high-speed MFPs 32.Reinstall the front right cover (28). 35.Install the switch press plate (E) using the
31.Reinstall the lower right rear cover (32). 33.Reinstall the right cover 2 (24). M4 × 10 tapping screw (J).
34.Reinstall the right cover 1 (21).
Montage sur des MFP à grande vitesse 32.Reposer le capot avant droit (28). 35.Fixer la plaque de pression du contacteur
31.Reposer le capot arrière inférieur droit (32). 33.Reposer le capot droit 2 (24). (E) à l'aide d'une vis de connexion M4 × 10
34.Reposer le capot droit 1 (21). (J).
Instalación en las MFP de alta velocidad 32.Reinstale la cubierta delantera derecha (28). 35.Instale la placa de presión del interruptor (E)
31.Reinstale la cubierta trasera inferior derecha 33.Reinstale la cubierta derecha 2 (24). usando el tornillo de roscado M4 × 10 (J).
(32). 34.Reinstale la cubierta derecha 1 (21).
Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 32.Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 35.Befestigen Sie mit der M4 × 10 Sch-
31.Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere (28) wieder an. neidschraube (J) die Schalterdruckplatte (E).
Abdeckung (32) wieder an. 33.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 2 (24)
wieder an.
34.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 1 (21)
wieder an.
Installazione sulle MFP a velocità alta 32.Reinstallare il coperchio destro anteriore 35.Installare la piastra spingi interruttore (E) uti-
31.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore inferiore (28). lizzando la vite autofilettante M4 × 10 (J).
destro (32). 33.Reinstallare il coperchio destro 2 (24).
34.Reinstallare il coperchio destro 1 (21).
安装于高速 MFP 上时 32.按原样安装右前部盖板 (28)。 35.使用 1 颗 M4×10 自攻螺丝 (J) 安装开关挡板
31.按原样安装右下后部盖板 (32)。 33.按原样安装右部盖板 2(24)。 (E)。
34.按原样安装右部盖板 1(21)。
고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우 32.우측 전면커버 (28) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 . 35.탑핑나사 M4×10(J) 1 개로 스위치 판 (E) 을
31.우측하단 뒷커버 (32) 를 원래대로 장착합니 33.우측커버 2 (24) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 . 장착합니다 .
다. 34.우측커버 1 (21) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
高速 MFP に設置の場合 32.右前カバー(28) を元通り取り付ける。 35.タッピングビス M4×10(J)1 本でスイッチ当
31.右下後カバー(32) を元通り取り付ける。 33.右カバー2 (24) を元通り取り付ける。 たり板 (E) を取り付ける。
34.右カバー1 (21) を元通り取り付ける。
23
F(M4x8)
44
F(M4x8) I
F(M4x8) B
36.Attach the side feeder to the large base slider (B) using 2 M4 × 8 screws (F).Install so that the 37.Install the cover plate (I) using 2 M4 × 8
center of the M4 × 8 screws (F) comes over the horizontal line (44) of the mounting plate on the screws (F).
large base slider (B).
36.Fixer le plateau d'alimentation latéral à la grande règle de base (B) à l'aide de 2 vis M4 × 8 (F). 37.Fixer le capot (I) à l'aide de 2 vis M4 × 8 (F).
Procéder de sorte que l'axe des vis M4 × 8 (F) recouvre la ligne horizontale (44) du plateau de
montage sur la grande règle de base (B).
36.Sujete el alimentador lateral al deslizador de base grande (B) con 2 tornillos M4 × 8 (F). Instale 37.Instale la tapa (I) usando los 2 tornillos M4 ×
de manera que el centro de los tornillos M4 × 8 (F) queden sobre la línea horizontal (44) de la 8 (F).
placa de montaje del deslizador de base (B) grande.
36.Den seitlichen Einzug am großen Basis-Schieber (B) mithilfe der 2 Schrauben 2 M4 × 8 (F) bef- 37.Bringen Sie die Abdeckungsplatte (I) mit 2
estigen. Befestigen Sie ihn so, dass die Mitte der M4 × 8 Schrauben (F) über der Waagrechtlinie M4 × 8 Schrauben (F) an.
(44) der Montageplatte am großen Basis-Schieber (B) liegt.
36.Collegare l'unità di alimentazione laterale allo scivolo di base grande (B) usando 2 viti M4 × 8 (F). 37.Installare il coperchio (I) utilizzando 2 viti M4
Installare in modo che il centro delle viti M4 × 8 (F) sia sulla linea orizzontale (44) della piastra di × 8 (F).
montaggio sullo scivolo di base grande (B).
36.使用 2 颗 M4×8 螺丝 (F) 将侧供纸盒安装到底座滑板 ( 大 )(B) 上。此时，应确保 M4×8 螺丝 (F) 37.使用 2 颗 M4×8 螺丝 (F) 安装盖板 (I)。
的中心处于底座滑板（大）(B) 的安装板的平行线 (44) 上。
36.나사 M4×8(F) 2 개로 베이스 슬라이더 대 (B) 에 사이드 피더를 장착합니다 . 그 때 , 베이스 슬라 37.나사 M4×8(F) 2 개로 커버 플레이트 (I) 를
이더 대 (B) 의 설치판의 평행선 (44) 에 나사 M4×8(F) 의 센터가 오도록 장착합니다 . 장착합니다 .
36.ビス M4×8(F)2 本でベーススライダー大 (B) にサイドフィーダーを取り付ける。 その際、ベース 37.ビス M4×8(F)2 本でカバープレート (I) を
スライダー大 (B) の取付板の平行線 (44) にビス M4×8(F) のセンターがくるように取り付ける。 取り付ける。
24
(PF-730) (PF-740)
45
M
L
46
38.Connect the signal cable (46) of the side 40.After using alcohol to clean place adhering the cassette number label 6 (L) and the cassette num-
feeder to the connector (45) of the machine. ber label 7 (M), adhere them in the positions indicated in the illustration.
39.Push the side feeder to connect it to the
machine.
38.Connecter le câble de signal (46) du 40.Coller l'étiquette de numéro de cassette 6 (L) et l'étiquette de numéro de cassette 7 (M) sur les
chargeur latéral au connecteur (45) de la emplacements indiqués dans l'illustration, après avoir soigneusement nettoyé ces derniers à
machine. l'alcool.
39.Pousser le chargeur latéral pour le raccorder
à la machine.
38.Conecte el cable de señal (46) del depósito 40.Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la etiqueta de casete con el
lateral al conector (45) de la máquina. número 6 (L) y la etiqueta de casete con el número 7 (M), péguelas en los lugares que se indican
39.Empuje el depósito lateral para conectarlo a en la ilustración.
la máquina.
38.Das Signalkabel (46) des seitlichen Einzugs 40.Zum Anbringen der Aufkleber Kassettennummer 6 (L) und Kassettennummer 7 (M) die Stellen
an den Stecker (45) des Geräts anschließen. zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und die Aufkleber dann an den in der Abbildung angegebenen Posi-
39.Schieben Sie den seitlichen Einzug, um ihn tionen anbringen.
mit dem Gerät zu verbinden.
38.Collegare il cavo del segnale (46) dell'ali- 40.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce all'etichetta numero cassetta 6 (L) e
mentatore laterale al connettore (45) della l'etichetta numero cassetta 7 (M), farli aderire nelle posizioni indicate nell'illustrazione.
macchina.
39.Spingere l'alimentatore laterale per colle-
garlo alla macchina.
38.将侧供纸盒的信号线 (46) 与机器主机的接插 40.使用酒精清洁要粘贴纸盒编号标签 6（L）、纸盒编号标签 7（M）的位置后，按图示位置粘贴。
件 (45) 相连。
39.按住侧供纸盒，将其与机器主机连接。
38.사이드 피더의 신호 케이블 (46) 을 본체 커 40.카세트 넘버라벨 6（L）, 카세트 넘버라벨 7（M）의 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 , 일러스트의 위치
넥터 (45) 에 연결합니다 . 에 부착합니다 .
39.사이드 피더가 본체에 연결되도록 사이드 피
더를 밀어 넣습니다 .
38.サイドフィーダーの信号線 (46) を機械本体 40.カセットナンバーラベル 6（L）、
カセットナンバーラベル 7（M）をアルコール清掃後、イラストの位
のコネクター(45) に接続する。 置に貼り付ける。
39.サイドフィーダーを押し、 機械本体に接続す
る。
25
(PF-730) (PF-740)
51
48
49
47
50
For PF-730 42.Gently close each cassette.
41.Pull each cassette out and then remove the lift plate stopper (47) from each cassette and attach it
to the storage location (48).
For PF-740
41.Pull out the right cassette (49) and the left cassette (50), remove each of the lift plate stoppers
(51) and attach them in the storage location.
Pour PF-730 42.Refermer progressivement chaque tiroir.
41.Sortez chaque magasin puis retirer la butée de plaque d’élévation (47) de chaque tiroir et la fixer
à l’emplacement de rangement (48).
Pour PF-740
41.Sortez le magasin droit (49) et le magasin gauche (50), déposer toutes les butées du plateau de
levage (51) et les ranger soigneusement.
Para PF-730 42.Cierre suavemente cada bandeja.
41.Saque cada uno de los depósitos y quite el tope de la placa de elevación (47) de cada bandeja y
colóquela en su lugar de depósito (48).
Para PF-740
41.Extraiga el depósito derecho (49) y el depósito izquierdo (50) , quite cada uno de los topes de
placa de elevación (51) y fíjelos en el lugar de almacenamiento.
Für PF-730 42.Alle Kassetten sachte schließen.
41.Ziehen Sie jede Kassette aus, dann den Hebeplattenanschlag (47) von jeder Kassette entfernen
und an der Speicherposition (48) anbringen.
Für PF-740
41.Ziehen Sie die rechte Kassette (49) und die linke Kassette (50) aus, jeden der Hebeplattenan-
schläge (51) entfernen und in der vorgesehenen Position verstauen.
Per PF-730 42.Chiudere delicatamente ciascun cassetto.
41.Estrarre ciascun cassetto e poi rimuovere il fermo della piastra di sollevamento (47) da ciascun
cassetto e fissarlo nella posizione di immagazzinaggio (48).
Per PF-740
41.Estrarre il cassetto destro (49) e il cassetto sinistro (50), rimuovere ciascuno dei fermi (51) della
piastra di sollevamento ed applicarli nella posizione di conservazione.
PF-730 时 42.轻轻地推入各供纸盒。
41.拉出各供纸盒，拆下各 1 个升降板挡块 (47)，并安装在保管场所 (48) 上。
PF-740 时
41.拉出右侧供纸盒 (49) 以及左侧供纸盒 (50)，拆下各 1 个升降板挡块 (51)，并安装在保管场所上。
PF-730 의 경우 42.각 카세트를 조용히 밀어 넣습니다 .
41.각 카세트를 빼고 리프트판 스토퍼 (47) 각 1 개를 빼내 보관장소 (48) 에 부착합니다 .
PF-740 의 경우
41.카세트 오른쪽 (49) 및 카세트 왼쪽 (50) 을 꺼내어 리프트판 스토퍼 (51) 각 1 개를 제거하고 보
관장소에 부착합니다
PF-730 の場合 42.各カセットを静かに押し込む。
41.各カセットを引き出し、リフト板ストッパー(47) 各 1 個を外して保管場所 (48) に取り付ける。
PF-740 の場合
41.カセット右 (49) およびカセット左 (50) を引き出し、
リフト板ストッパー(51) 各 1 個を取り外
し、保管場所に取り付ける。
26
52 53 N
52 53
When there is 1 power cable When there is 1 power cable
43.Remove a screw (53). 44.Pass the power cable through the clamp (N) and fasten it using a
When there are 2 power cables screw (53) removed in step 43.
43.Remove 2 screws (52) and (53). When there are 2 power cables
44.Pass the power cable through clamp (N) and fasten it using 2 screws
(52) (53) removed in step 43.
En cas d'utilisation de 1 seul cordon d'alimentation En cas d'utilisation de 1 seul cordon d'alimentation
43.Retirer la vis (53). 44.Faire passer le cordon d'alimentation au travers de collier (N) et le fixer
En cas d'utilisation de 2 cordons d'alimentation à l'aide de la vis (53) déposée à l'étape 43.
43.Retirer les 2 vis (52) et (53). En cas d'utilisation de 2 cordons d'alimentation
44.Faire passer les cordons d'alimentation au travers des colliers (N) et
les fixer à l'aide des 2 vis (52) et (53) déposées à l'étape 43.
Si hay 1 cable eléctrico Si hay 1 cable eléctrico
43.Quite un tornillo (53). 44.Pase el cable eléctrico por el sujetador (N) y apriételo con el tornillo
Si hay 2 cables eléctricos (53) que quitó en el paso 43.
43.Quite 2 tornillos (52) y (53). Si hay 2 cables eléctricos
44.Pase el cable eléctrico por el sujetador (N) y apriételo con los 2 tornil-
los (52) y (53) que quitó en el paso 43.
Wenn 1 Netzkabel vorhanden ist Wenn 1 Netzkabel vorhanden ist
43.Die Schraube (53) entfernen. 44.Das Netzkabel durch die Klemme (N) führen und es mit der in Schritt
Wenn 2 Netzkabel vorhanden sind 43 entfernten Schraube (53) befestigen.
43.Die 2 Schrauben (52) und (53) entfernen. Wenn 2 Netzkabel vorhanden sind
44.Das Netzkabel durch die Klemme (N) führen und es mit den in Schritt
43 entfernten 2 Schrauben (52) (53) befestigen.
Quando esiste 1 cavo di alimentazione Quando esiste 1 cavo di alimentazione
43.Rimuovere una vite (53). 44.Passare il cavo di alimentazione attraverso il morsetto (N) e stringerlo
Quando esistono 2 cavi di alimentazione usando una vite (53) rimossa nel passo 43.
43.Rimuovere 2 viti (52) e (53). Quando esistono 2 cavi di alimentazione
44.Passare il cavo di alimentazione attraverso il morsetto (N) e stringerlo
usando 2 viti (52) (53) rimosse nel passo 43.
1 根电源线时 1 根电源线时
43.拆除 1 颗螺丝（53）。 44.将电源线穿过束线夹（N），使用在步骤 43 中拆除的 1 颗螺丝（53）固定
2 根电源线时 电源线。
43.拆除 2 颗螺丝（52）（53）。 2 根电源线时
44.将电源线穿过束线夹（N），使用在步骤 43 中拆除的 2 颗螺丝（52）(53)
固定电源线。
전선 코드가 1 개인 경우 전선 코드가 1 개인 경우
43.나사（53）1 개를 제거합니다 . 44.전선 코드를 클램프（N）에 통과시키고 순서 43 에서 제거한 나사
전선 코드가 2 개인 경우 （53）1 개로 고정합니다 .
43.나사（52）（53）2 개를 제거합니다 . 전선 코드가 2 개인 경우
44.전선 코드를 클램프（N）에 통과시키고 순서 43 에서 제거한 나사
（52）(53) 2 개로 고정합니다 .
電源コードが 1 本の場合 電源コードが 1 本の場合
43.ビス（53）
1 本を外す。 44.電源コードをクランプ （N）に通し、手順 43 で外したビス（53）
1 本で固
電源コードが 2 本の場合 定する。
43.ビス（52）
（53）2 本を外す。 電源コードが 2 本の場合
44.電源コードをクランプ (53)2 本
（N）に通し、手順 43 で外したビス（52）
で固定する。
27
H,X
G,V
Setting the paper size plate and media type Skewed paper feed adjustment (PF-730 only)
plate 1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
Insert the paper size plate (G,V) and media type 2.Load paper into the cassette and make a test copy to check the image.
plate (H,X) into the each slots respectively. 3.If the image is skewed (skewed paper feed), make the adjustments described below.
<Reference value> Left-right difference of 1.5 mm or less
Disposition des plaquettes du format de Réglage de l'entraînement du papier en biais (PF-730 uniquement)
papier et du type de support 1. Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
Introduire la plaquette du format de papier (G,V) 2. Mettre du papier dans le tiroir et effectuer une copie d'essai pour vérifier l'image.
et la plaquette du type de support (H,X) dans 3. Si l'image est en biais (entraînement du papier en biais), régler en procédant comme décrit ci-dessous.
leur logement respectif. <Valeur de référence> Différence de droite à gauche de 1,5 mm ou moins.
Ajuste de la placa de tamaño de papel y la Ajuste de alimentación de papel torcida (PF-730 solamente)
placa de tipo de medio 1. Conecte el enchufe de la máquina en el receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal de la
Inserte la placa de tamaño de papel (G,V) y la máquina.
placa de tipo de medio (H,X) en cada uno de las 2. Introduzca papel en el cajón y haga una copia de prueba para verificar la imagen.
ranuras, respectivamente. 3. Si la imagen está torcida (alimentación del papel torcida) haga los ajustes que se describen a continu-
ación.
<Valor de referencia> diferencia izquierda-derecha de 1,5 mm o menor.
Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte und der Einstellung bei verkantetem Papiereinzug (nur PF-730)
Medientypkarte 1. Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gerät am
Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (G,V) und die Hauptschalter ein.
Medientypkarte (H,X) in die jeweiligen Führun- 2. Legen Sie Papier in die Papierlade ein und machen Sie eine Testkopie, um das Bild zu prüfen.
gen. 3. Nehmen Sie nachstehende Einstellungen vor, falls das Bild verkantet ist (verkanteter Papiereinzug).
<Bezugswert> Links-rechts-Differenz maximal 1,5 mm.
Impostazione della piastra di formato carta e Regolazione alimentazione obliqua carta (solo PF-730)
della piastra del tipo di supporto 1. Collegare la spina della macchina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere l’interruttore di alimentazi-
Inserire la piastra del formato carta (G,V) e la one della macchina.
piastra del tipo di supporto (H,X) nei rispettivi 2. Caricare carta nel cassetto ed eseguire una copia di prova per controllare l'immagine.
alloggiamenti. 3. Se l'immagine risulta obliqua (alimentazione obliqua della carta), eseguire le regolazioni descritte sotto.
<Valore di riferimento> Differenza tra destra e sinistra di 1,5 mm o inferiore
纸张尺寸标示和纸张种类标示的安装 歪斜进纸调节 ( 仅限 PF-730)
将纸张尺寸标示 (G,V) 和纸张种类标示 (H,X) 分 1.将机器主机上的电源插头插入电源插座中，打开主电源开关。
别插入到图示的插槽中。 2.在纸盒中放入纸张。进行测试复印以确认图像。
3.图像倾斜（歪斜进纸）时进行以下调节。
＜基准值＞左右差 1.5mm 以下
용지크기 플레이트와 용지종류 플레이트의 세트 경사급지 조정 (PF-730 만 )
용지크기 플레이트 (G,V) 와 용지종류 플레이트 1.본체 전원 플러그를 벽 콘센트에 연결하고 본체의 주 전원 스위치를 켭니다 .
(H,X) 를 각표시 슬롯에 각각 삽입한다 . 2.카세트에 용지를 장착합니다 . 시험복사를 하고 화상을 확인합니다 .
3.화상이 기울어져 있는 （경사급지）경우에는 다음 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ 좌우차 1.5mm 이하
用紙サイズプレートと用紙種類プレートのセット 斜め給紙調整 (PF-730 のみ )
用紙サイズプレート (G,V) と用紙種類プレート 1.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
(H,X) を各表示スロットにそれぞれ挿入する。 2.カセットに用紙をセットする。テストコピーをおこない、画像を確認する。
3.画像が傾いている（斜め給紙） 場合は次の調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞左右差 1.5mm 以下
28
2
1 3
4.Pull out the cassette (1) in the paper feeder and loosen the 4 screws (2).
5.Turn the adjusting screw (3) to adjust the cursor skew.
6.Retighten the 4 screws (2).
7.Make another test copy to check the image.
4.Sortir le tiroir (1) du bureau papier et desserrer les 4 vis (2).
5.Faire tourner la vis de réglage (3) pour régler la déviation du curseur.
6.Resserrer les 4 vis (2).
7.Faire une autre copie d'essai pour vérifier l'image.
4.Extraiga el cajón (1) del alimentador de papel y afloje los 4 tornillos (2).
5.Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) para ajustar la desviación del cursor.
6.Vuelva a apretar los 4 tornillos (2).
7.Haga otra copia de prueba para verificar la imagen.
4.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade (1) aus dem Papiereinzug und lösen Sie die 4 Schrauben (2).
5.Drehen Sie die Einstellschraube (3), um die Cursor-Verkantung zu korrigieren.
6.Ziehen Sie die 4 Schrauben (2) wieder an
7.Erstellen Sie zur Überprüfung des Bilds noch einmal eine Testkopie.
4.Estrarre il cassetto (1) dell'unità di alimentazione della carta e quindi allentare le 4 viti (2).
5.Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) per regolare l'inclinazione del cursore.
6.Ristringere le 4 viti (2).
7.Eseguire un'altra copia di prova per controllare l'immagine.
4.拉出供纸盒 (1) ，拧松 4 颗螺丝 (2)。
5.旋转调节螺丝 (3) ，以调节游标的倾斜。
6.拧紧 4 颗螺丝 (2)。
7.再次进行测试复印，确认图像。
4.급지 카세트 (1) 를 빼 내어 나사 (2) 4 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
5.조정나사 (3) 을 돌려 커서 경사조정을 합니다 .
6.나사 (2) 4 개를 조입니다 .
7.다시 시험복사를 하고 화상을 확인합니다 .
4.ペーパーフィーダーのカセット (1) を引出し、ビス (2)4 本を緩める。
5.調整ネジ (3) を回し、カーソルの傾き調整をおこなう。
6.ビス (2)4 本を締め付ける。
7.再度、テストコピーをおこない、画像を確認する。
29
5
Changing paper size (PF-740, metric specifi- 1.Pull out the cassette of the paper feeder.
cations only) 2.Turn the front lock lever (4) 90° and remove the front deck cursor (5).
At shipment, Letter is set for inch models and A4
is set for metric models. Use the procedure
below to change the size to B5.
Modification du format du papier (PF-740, 1.Tirer le magasin du bureau papier vers soi.
pour spécifications métriques seulement) 2.Faire tourner le levier de verrouillage avant (4) de 90º et déposer le curseur de platine avant (5).
À expédition, les modèles à mesure en pouces
sont réglés sur le format Letter et les modèles à
mesure métrique sur le format A4. Pour passer
au format B5, procéder de la manière suivante.
Cómo cambiar el tamaño de papel (PF-740, 1.Abra el casete del alimentador de papel.
sólo para las especificaciones métricas) 2.Gire la palanca de bloqueo frontal (4) 90º y quite el cursor frontal de la plataforma (5).
En el momento de salida de fábrica, se config-
ura Carta para los modelos en pulgadas y A4
para los modelos en sistema métrico. Siga este
procedimiento para cambiar el tamaño a B5.
Ändern des Papierformats (PF-740, nur metri- 1.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade aus dem Papiereinzug.
sche Spezifikationen) 2.Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel (4) um 90° drehen und den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (5)
Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollmaß abnehmen.
das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen
mit metrischem Maß das Format A4.
Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umge-
schaltet werden.
Cambio del formato della carta (PF-740, solo 1.Estrarre il cassetto dell’unità di alimentatore della carta.
per le specifiche metriche) 2.Ruotare la leva frontale di blocco (4) di 90° e rimuovere il cursore frontale del deck (5).
Al momento della spedizione, Letter è impostato
per le specifiche in pollici e A4 è impostato per
le specifiche metriche. Usare la procedura
riportata sotto per cambiare il formato a B5.
纸张尺寸更改（PF-740, 仅限公制规格） 1.拉出供纸工作台的供纸盒。
产品出厂时，英制规格设定为 Letter、公制规格 2.将前部锁定杆 (4) 旋转 90°，拆下堆纸板前部游标（5）。
设定为 A4。要将尺寸更改为 B5 时，请按以下步骤
进行操作。
용지크기 변경（PF-740, 센치 사양만） 1.급지대 카세트를 빼 냅니다 .
출하시 , 인치사양은 Letter, 센치사양은 A4 로 2.잠금레버 앞 (4) 을 90° 회전시켜 데크커서 앞（5）을 제거합니다 .
설정되어 있습니다 . 크기를 B5 로 변경하는 경
우에는 다음 순서를 진행해 주십시오 .
用紙サイズ変更（PF-740, センチ仕様のみ） 1.ペーパーフィーダーのカセットを引き出す。
出荷時、インチ仕様は Letter、センチ仕様は A4 2.ロックレバー前 (4) を 90° 回転させ、デッキカーソル前（5）
を取り外す。
に設定されています。サイズを B5 に変更する場
合は次の手順をおこなってください。
30
8 9
7 10
4 9
3.Move the front deck cursor (5) so that it is aligned with the size indicators on the top (7) and bot- 6.Release the hook (9) and remove the deck
tom (6) of the cassette. trailing edge cursor (10).
4.Turn the front lock lever (4) 90° to lock it.
5.Move the rear deck cursor (8) in the same way.
3.Déplacer le curseur de platine avant (5) de sorte qu'il soit aligné avec les indicateurs de format en 6.Libérer le crochet (9) et déposer le curseur
haut (7) et en bas (6) du tiroir. du bord arrière de la platine (10).
4.Faire tourner le levier de verrouillage avant (4) de 90º pour le verrouiller.
5.Déplacer le curseur de platine arrière (8) en procédant de la même manière.
3.Mueva el cursor frontal de la plataforma (5) para que quede alineado con las indicadores de 6.Libere el gancho (9) y quite el cursor del
tamaño de la parte superior (7) e inferior (6) del cajón. borde inferior de la plataforma (10).
4.Gire la palanca de bloqueo frontal (4) 90º para bloquearla.
5.Mueva el cursor trasero de la plataforma (8) de la misma forma.
3.Den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (5) so verschieben, dass er mit den Formatanzeigen oben (7) und 6.Den Haken (9) lösen und den Hinterkante-
unten (6) an der Kassette fluchtet. Cursor (10) der Konsole abnehmen.
4.Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel (4) zum Verriegeln um 90° drehen.
5.Den hinteren Konsole-Cursor (8) auf gleiche Weise verschieben.
3.Spostare il cursore frontale del deck (5) in modo che esso risulti allineato con gli indicatori di for- 6.Rilasciare il gancio (9) e rimuovere il cursore
mato sulla parte superiore (7) e inferiore (6) del cassetto. del bordo di uscita del deck (10).
4.Ruotare la leva frontale di blocco (4) di 90°, per bloccarla.
5.Spostare il cursore posteriore del deck (8) allo stesso modo.
3.移动堆纸板前部游标 (5)，使供纸盒下部的尺寸标记 (6) 与供纸盒上部的尺寸标记 (7) 对齐。 6.解除卡扣（9），拆下堆纸板后部游标 (10)。
4.将前部锁定杆 (4) 旋转 90° 以固定。
5.按同样方式移动后部堆纸板后部游标 (8)。
3.카세트 밑의 크기표시 (6) 와 카세트 위의 크기 표시 (7) 에 맞춰 데크커서 앞 (5) 을 이동시킵니다 6.후크（9）를 해제하고 데크 뒷단커서 (10) 를
. 제거합니다 .
4.잠금레버 앞 (4) 을 90° 회전시켜 고정합니다 .
5.똑같이 데크커서 뒤 (8) 를 이동시킵니다 .
3.カセット下のサイズ表示 (6) とカセット上のサイズ表示 (7) に合わせてデッキカーソル前 (5) 6.フック （9）を解除し、デッキ後端カーソル
を移動させる。 (10) を取り外す。
4.ロックレバー前 (4) を 90° 回転させ固定する。
5.同様にデッキカーソル後 (8) を移動させる。
31
13 11
8
14
0.5∼1.5mm
10
12 5
7.Lift up the sub-cursor (11). Adjusting the cursor width (PF-740 only)
8.Align with the size indicator (12), engage the 1.Load paper in the cassettes.
hook (13) and install the deck trailing edge 2.If the gap between the front deck cursor (5) and the paper (14) is outside the 0.5 to 1.5 mm range
cursor (10). when the paper (14) is touching up against the rear deck cursor (8), perform the following adjust-
ment.
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding, while a cursor width that is too large
can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
7.Lever le curseur secondaire (11). Réglage de la largeur du curseur (PF-740 uniquement)
8.Aligner avec l'indicateur de format (12), 1.Charger les tiroirs en papier.
engager le crochet (13) et reposer le curseur 2.Si l'écartement entre le curseur de platine avant (5) et le papier (14) est hors des limites de 0,5 à
du bord arrière de la platine (10). 1,5 mm quand le papier (14) touche le curseur de platine arrière (8), procéder au réglage suivant.
* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empêcher l'entraînement du papier et une largeur
trop grande risque d'entraîner des problèmes du type entraînement du papier de biais.
7.Levante el cursor secundario (11). Cómo ajustar la anchura del cursor (PF-740 solamente)
8.Alinee con el indicador de tamaño (12), 1.Cargue papel en los cajones.
enganche el gancho (13) e instale el cursor 2.Si la separación entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (5) y el papel (14) está fuera del rango de 0,5
del borde inferior de la plataforma. (10). a 1,5 mm cuando el papel (14) toca el cursor trasero de la plataforma (8), haga el siguiente ajuste.
* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequeña puede impedir la alimentación de papel; una anchura
del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel.
7.Den Unter-Cursor (11) anheben. Einstellen der Cursor-Breite (nur PF-740)
8.Auf die Formatanzeige (12) ausrichten, den 1.Papier in die Papierladen einlegen.
Haken (13) einsetzen und den Hinterkante- 2.Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (5) und dem Papier (14) außerhalb
Cursor (10) der Konsole anbringen. des Bereichs 0,5 bis 1,5 mm liegt, wenn das Papier (14) am hinteren Konsole-Cursor (8) anliegt,
ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern, wogegen eine zu große Cursor-
Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und ähnliche Probleme verursachen kann.
7.Sollevare il cursore secondario (11). Regolazione della larghezza del cursore (solo PF-740)
8.Allineare con l'indicatore formato (12), fis- 1. Caricare carta nei cassetti.
sare il gancio (13) e installare il cursore del 2. Se lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (5) e la carta (14) è fuori della gamma da 0,5 a 1,5 mm
bordo di uscita del deck (10). quando la carta (14) tocca il cursore postertiore del deck (8), eseguire la regolazione seguente.
* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola può ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta, mentre unalar-
ghezza dei cursori troppo grande può essere causa di problemi, come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbli-
qua della carta.
7.抬起副游标 (11)。 游标宽度的调节 （仅限 PF-740）
8.对齐尺寸标记 (12)，将卡扣（13）嵌入以安装 1.在供纸盒中装入纸张。
堆纸板后部游标 (10)。 2.在堆纸板后部游标 (8) 与纸张 (14) 接触的状态下，如果堆纸板前部游标 (5) 与纸张 (14) 的间隙
超出了 0.5 ～ 1.5mm 的范围，须进行以下调节。
※ 如果游标宽度过小，可能造成不供纸，游标宽度过大，则可能发生歪斜进纸等情况。
7.서브커서 (11) 를 세웁니다 . 커서 폭 조정 （PF-740 만）
8.크기표시 (12) 에 맞춰 후크（13）를 판벽데 1.카세트에 용지를 장착합니다 .
크 후단커서 (10) 를 부착합니다 . 2.데크커서 뒤 (8) 에 용지 (14) 가 접하고 있는 상태에서 데크커서 앞 (5) 과 용지 (14) 의 틈이
0.5 ～ 1.5mm 의 범위외의 경우에는 이하의 조정을 합니다 .
※ 커서 폭이 작으면 무급지 , 커서 폭이 크면 경사급지 등이 발생할 가능성이 있습니다 .
7.サブカーソル (11) を起こす。 カーソル幅の調整 (PF-740 のみ )
8.サイズ表示 (12) に合わせて、
フック（13）を 1.カセットに用紙をセットする。
はめデッキ後端カーソル (10) を取り付け 2.デッキカーソル後 (8) に用紙 (14) が接している状態で、デッキカーソル前 (5) と用紙 (14) の隙
る。 間が 0.5 ～ 1.5mm の範囲外の場合は、以下の調整をおこなう。
※ カーソル幅が小さいと無給紙、カーソル幅が大きいと斜め給紙などが発生する可能性がある。
32
16
15
3.Insert a Philips-head screwdriver into the 2 long slots (15) in the front deck cursor (5) and loosen 4.Retighten the 2 adjusting screws (16).
the 2 adjusting screws (16). Then move the front deck cursor (5). 5.Check that the gap between the front deck
cursor (5) and the paper is between 0.5 and
1.5 mm.
3.Insérer un tournevis cruciforme dans les 2 longues fentes (15) du curseur de platine avant (5) et 4.Resserrer les 2 vis de réglage (16).
desserrer les 2 vis de réglage (16). Déplacer ensuite le curseur de platine avant (5). 5.Vérifier que l'écartement entre le curseur de
platine avant (5) et le papier est entre 0,5 et
1,5 mm.
3.Inserte un destornillador de cabeza Philips en las dos ranuras largas (15) en el cursor frontal de 4.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos de ajuste
la plataforma (5) y afloje los 2 tornillos de ajuste (16). Después, mueva el cursor frontal de la plat- (16).
aforma (5). 5.Verifique que la separación entre el cursor
frontal de la plataforma (5) y el papel sea de
entre 0,5 y 1,5 mm.
3.Einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher in die 2 langen Öffnungen (15) im vorderen Konsole-Cursor 4.Die 2 Einstellschrauben (16) wieder anzie-
(5) stecken und die 2 Einstellschrauben (16) lösen. Danach den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (5) hen.
verschieben. 5.Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Abstand
zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (5)
und dem Papier im Bereich 0,5 bis 1,5 mm
liegt.
3.Inserire un cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips nelle 2 fessure lunghe (15) nel cursore fron- 4.Ristringere le 2 viti di regolazione (16).
tale del deck (5) e allentare le 2 viti di regolazione (16). Quindi spostare il cursore frontale del 5.Controllare che lo spazio tra il cursore fron-
deck (5). tale del deck (5) e la carta sia compreso
nella gamma tra 0,5 e 1,5 mm.
3.将十字螺丝刀从堆纸板前部游标 (5) 的 2 处长孔 (15) 处插入，拧松 2 颗调节螺丝 (16)，移动堆纸 4.拧紧 2 颗调节螺丝 (16)。
板前部游标 (5)。 5.确认堆纸板前部游标 (5) 与纸张的间隙在
0.5 ～ 1.5mm 的范围内。
3.데크커서 앞 (5) 2 곳의 긴 구멍 (15) 에서 플러스 드라이버를 넣어 조정나사 (16) 2 개를 느슨하 4.조정나사 (16) 2 개를 조입니다 .
게 하고 데크커서 앞 (5) 을 이동시킵니다 . 5.데크커서 앞 (5) 과 용지의 틈이 0.5 ～ 1.5
mm 범위내가 되어 있는 것을 확인합니다 .
3.デッキカーソル前 (5) の 2 箇所の長穴 (15) からプラスドライバー挿入し、
調整ビス (16)2 本を 4.調整ビス (16)2 本を締め付ける。
緩め、
デッキカーソル前 (5) を移動させる。 5.デッキカーソル前 (5) と用紙の隙間が 0.5
～ 1.5mm の範囲内になっていることを確認
する。
33
f
㧙 㧗
e g h
Adjusting the center line
The reference value for the center line is ±0.5 mm or less at position (f) in the correct image (e). If the center line position is outside this range, perform the
following adjustment.
1.Set maintenance mode U034, select LSU Out Left and Cassette 5, Cassette 6 or Cassette 7.
2.Adjust the values.
Test pattern (g): Increase the setting value. Test pattern (h): Decrease the setting value.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
Réglage de l'axe
La valeur de référence pour l'axe est de ±0,5 mm ou moins à la position (f) d'une image correcte (e). Si la position de l'axe est hors de cette plage,
effectuez le réglage suivant.
1.Passer au mode maintenance U034, sélectionner LSU Out Left et Cassette 5, Cassette 6 ou Cassette 7.
2.Régler les valeurs.
Mire d' essai (g): Augmentez la valeur de réglage. Mire d' essai (h): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
Ajuste de la línea central
El valor de referencia de la línea central es de ±0,5 mm o menor, en la posición (f) de la imagen correcta (e). Si la posición de la línea central estuviera
fuera de este rango, haga el siguiente ajuste.
1.Entre al modo mantenimiento U034, seleccione LSU Out Left y Cassette 5, Cassette 6 o Cassette 7.
2.Ajuste los valores.
Patrón de prueba (g): Aumente el valor de configuración. Patrón de prueba (h): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
Einstellen der Mittenlinie
Der Bezugswert für die Mittenlinie ist ±0,5 mm oder weniger an Position (f) des korrekten Bilds (e). Falls die Mittenlinie außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt,
ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
1.In den Wartungsmodus U034 schalten und LSU Out Left und Cassette 5, Cassette 6 oder Cassette 7 wählen.
2.Die Werte einstellen.
Testmuster (g): Den Einstellwert erhöhen. Testmuster (h): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
Regolazione della linea centrale
Il valore di riferimento per la linea centrale è ±0,5 mm o inferiore alla posizione (f) nell'immagine corretta (e). Se la posizione della linea centrale è all'infu-
ori di questa gamma, effettuare la regolazione seguente.
1.Impostare la modalità di manutenzione U034, selezionare LSU Out Left e Cassette 5, Cassette 6 o Cassette 7.
2.Regolare i valori.
Modello di prova (g): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. Modello di prova (h): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
中心线调节
中心线的基准值在矫正图像 (e) 的 (f) 位置为 ±0.5mm 以内。超出该范围时，须进行以下调节。
1.设置维护模式 U034，选择 LSU Out Left、Cassette5、Cassette6 或 Cassette7。
2.调整设定值。
测试图案 (g) ：调高设定值。 测试图案 (h) ：调低设定值。
3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
센터라인 조정
센터라인은 적정화상 (e) 의 (f) 위치에서 기준치는 ±0.5mm 이내 . 여기에서 벗어나는 것은 이하의 조정을 합니다 .
1.메인터넌스 모드 U034 을 세트하고 LSU Out Left, Cassette5, Cassette6 또는 Cassette7 을 선택합니다 .
2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
테트스 패턴 (g) ：설정치를 높입니다 . 테스트 패턴 (h) ：설정치를 내립니다 .
3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
センターライン調整
センターラインは、適正画像 (e) の (f) の位置で基準値は ±0.5mm 以内。これから外れるときは以下の調整をおこなう。
1.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、LSU Out Left、Cassette5、
Cassette6 または Cassette7 を選択する。
2.設定値を調整する。
テストパターン (g) ：設定値を上げる。 テストパターン (h) ：設定値を下げる。
3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
34
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR
4000-SHEETS FINISHER
English A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
For installation with a MFP, see Page 1 to Page 7.
For installation with a Printer, see Page 8 to Page 14.
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines, and 35, 45 and 55 ppm
monochrome machines.
References to high-speed MFPs in this document denote 65/65 and 75/70 ppm color machines, and 65 and 80 ppm monochrome machines.
Français Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui est installé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction, voir Page 1 à Page 7.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante, voir Page 8 à Page 14.
Dans le présent document, les références aux MFP à vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 et 55/50 ppm et
aux machines monochromes 35, 45 et 55 ppm.
Dans le présent document, les références aux MFP à grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines
monochromes 65 et 80 ppm.
Español El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes páginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalación con un MFP, consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 7.
Para la instalación con una impresora, consulte las páginas de la 8 a la 14
.
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm
y a las máquinas monocromáticas de 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las máquinas
Deutsch Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation an einem Dokumentenfinisher siehe Seiten 1 bis 7.
Bei Installation an einem Drucker siehe Seiten 8 bis 14.
Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die
35, 45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen.
Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm
Monochrommaschinen.
Italiano Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione con un MFP, vedere le pagine da 1 a 7.
Per l'installazione con una stampante, vedere le pagine da 8 a 14.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 e 55/50 ppm, e le
macchine monocromatiche 35, 45 e 55 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocro-
matiche 65 e 80 ppm.
简体中文 根据安装对象，安装步骤略有不同。各个步骤记载在下面的页面。
安装到 MFP 上时，请参见 P1-P7。
安装到打印机上时，请参见 P8-P14。
本文中的中速 MFP 代表彩色 30/30 页机型、35/35 页机型、45/45 页机型、55/50 页机型、黑白 35 页机型、45 页机型、55 页机型。
本文中的高速 MFP 代表彩色 65/65 页机型、75/70 页机型、黑白 65 页机型、80 页机型。
한국어 이 장치에 설치되는 제품에 따라 절차가 다릅니다 . 다음 페이지에서 각 절차를 설명합니다 .
MFP 에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~7 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
프린터에 설치하는 경우 8 페이지 ~14 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
본문 중 중속 MFP 는 컬러 30/30 매기 , 35/35 매기 , 45/45 매기 , 55/50 매기 , 흑백 35 매기 , 45 매기 , 55 매기를 나타냅니다 .
본문 중 고속 MFP 는 컬러 65/65 매기 , 75/70 매기 , 흑백 65 매기 , 80 매기를 나타냅니다 .
日本語 装着する対象によって、 取付手順は異なります。 それぞれ、 以下のページに記載しています。
MFP に設置する場合；1 ページ～ 7 ページ
プリンターに設置する場合；8 ページ～ 14 ページ
本文中の中速 MFP はカラー機の 30/30 枚機、35/35 枚機、45/45 枚機、55/50 枚機、モノクロ機の 35 枚機、45 枚機、55 枚機を表す。
本文中の高速 MFP はカラー機の 65/65 枚機、75/70 枚機、モノクロ機の 65 枚機、 80 枚機を表す。
A
I(M4x8)
B
D
F J(M4x20)
C
E H
G
Supplied parts G. Eject guide ................................................. 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
A. Document finisher...................................... 1 H. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1 materials from the parts supplied.
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1 I. M4 × 8 screw ............................................. 2
C. Earth connection plate............................... 1 J. M4 × 20 screw ........................................... 2
D. Earth spring ............................................... 1
E. Connecting plate........................................ 1
F. Connector cover ........................................ 1
Pièces fournies G. Guide d'éjection ......................................... 1 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1 H. Cartouche d’agrafes .................................. 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
B. Bac d'éjection ............................................ 1 I. Vis M4 × 8.................................................. 2 pièces fournies.
C. Plaque de raccordement de mise à la terre1 J. Vis M4 × 20................................................ 2
D. Ressort de mise à la terre ......................... 1
E. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1
F. Cache de connecteur ................................ 1
Partes suministradas G. Guía de salida............................................ 1 Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1 H. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 I. Tornillo M4 × 8 ........................................... 2 das.
C. Placa de conexión a tierra ......................... 1 J. Tornillo M4 × 20 ......................................... 2
D. Resorte de conexión a tierra ..................... 1
E. Placa de conexión ..................................... 1
F. Cubierta del conector................................. 1
Enthaltene Teile G. Ausgabeführung ........................................ 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
A. Finisher...................................................... 1 H. Heftklammermagazin................................. 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1 I. M4 × 8 Schraube ....................................... 2 Teilen entfernt wurden.
C. Grundanschlussplatte................................ 1 J. M4 × 20 Schraube ..................................... 2
D. Grundfeder ................................................ 1
E. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1
F. Stecker-Abdeckung ................................... 1
Parti fornite G. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1 H. Contenitore punti ...................................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
B. Vassoio di espulsione ................................ 1 I. Vite M4 × 8................................................. 2
C. Piastra di connessione per messa a terra . 1 J. Vite M4 × 20............................................... 2
D. Molla di messa a terra ............................... 1
E. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1
F. Copri connettore ........................................ 1
附属品 F. 接插件盖板 ...........................1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
A. 装订器............................... 1 G. 排纸导向板 ..........................1 下。
B. 排纸托盘............................. 1 H. 装订针盒 .............................1
C. 接地安装板........................... 1 I. M4×8 螺丝 ............................2
D. 接地弹簧............................. 1 J. M4×20 螺丝 ...........................2
E. 连接板............................... 1
동봉품 F. 커넥터 커버........................................ 1 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
A. 문서 피니셔........................................ 1 G. 배출 가이드 ....................................... 1 우에는 반드시 제거할 것 .
B. 배출 트레이........................................ 1 H. 스테이플 카트리지............................... 1
C. 접지 부착판........................................ 1 I. 나사 M4×8......................................... 2
D. 접지 스프링........................................ 1 J. 나사 M4×20 ....................................... 2
E. 연결판 .............................................. 1
同梱品 G. 排出ガイド ..........................1 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合
A. ドキュメントフィニッシャー........... 1 H. ステープルカートリッジ ...............1 は、
必ず取り外すこと。
B. 排出トレイ........................... 1 I. ビス M4×8 ............................2
C. アース取付板......................... 1 J. ビス M4×20 ...........................2
D. アースバネ........................... 1
E. 連結板............................... 1
F. コネクターカバー..................... 1
1
B A
NOTICE Procedure 1.Install by inserting the 2 hooks (1) on the
When installing on a medium-speed MFP, the Before starting installation, be sure to turn the back of the eject tray (B) into the holes (2) in
Attachment Kit (AK-730 or AK-731) must be main power switch of the machine off, and the document finisher (A) lift.
installed before the document finisher is unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
installed.
REMARQUE Procédure 1.Procéder en insérant les 2 crochets (1) au
Lors de l'installation sur une imprimante multi- Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de dos du bac d'éjection (B) dans les trous (2)
fonction à vitesse moyenne, le kit de fixation mettre la machine hors tension et de du dispositif de levage du finisseur de docu-
(AK-730 ou AK-731) doit être installé avant débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise ment (A).
d'installer le finisseur de document. murale.
AVISO Procedimiento 1.Instale insertando los 2 ganchos (1) de la
Si se instala en un MFP de velocidad media, el Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de parte posterior de la bandeja de salida (B)
Kit de conexión (AK-730 o AK-731) se debe apagar el interruptor de encendido de la en los orificios (2) del elevador del finaliza-
instalar antes de instalarse el finalizador de doc- máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación dor de documentos (A).
umentos. de la toma de pared.
ANMERKUNG Verfahren 1.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (1) zur Befestigung
Bei der Installation an einem mittelschnellen Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu- an der Rückseite des Auswerffachs (B) in
MFP muss das Attachment-Kit (AK-730 oder gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts die Öffnungen (2) an der Hebeplatte des Fin-
AK-731) vor dem Finisher installiert werden. ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der ishers (A) ein.
Steckdose gezogen ist.
AVVISO Procedura 1.Installare inserendo i 2 ganci (1) sul retro del
Quando si installa un MFP di fascia media, Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la vassoio di espulsione (B) nei fori (2) sul soll-
prima di installare il finisher documenti occorre macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di evatore della finisher documenti (A).
installare l'unità Attachment Kit (AK-730 o AK- corrente.
731).
注意 安装步骤 1.将排纸托盘 (B) 内侧的 2 个挂钩 (1) 装入装
安装到中速 MFP 上时，在安装装订器前，请先安 安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插 订器 (A) 的升降板的孔 (2) 中。
装连接组件（AK-730 或 AK-731)。 座拔下电源插头。
주의 장착순서 1.배출 트레이 (B) 의 후면 후크 (1) 2 개를 문
중속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우 문서 피니셔를 장착 설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 서 피니셔 (A) 의 승강판 구멍 (2) 에 넣고 장
하기 전에 부착 키트 (AK-730 또는 AK-731) 를 위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리 착합니다 .
설치해야 합니다 . 하십시오 .
注意 取付手順 1.排出トレイ (B) の裏側のフック (1)2 個をド
中速 MFP に設置する場合、 ドキュメントフィ 必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機 キュメントフィニッシャー(A) の昇降板の
ニッシャーを取り付ける前に、 アタッチメント 械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ 穴 (2) に入れて、取り付ける。
キット（AK-730 または AK-731) の取り付けをお と。
こなうこと。
2
I(M4x8) I(M4x8)
C
C
D
I(M4x8)
I(M4x8)
Installation on medium-speed MFPs Installation on high-speed MFPs
2.Using an M4 × 8 screw (I), secure the earth spring (D) in the location 2.Using an M4 × 8 screw (I), secure the earth spring (D) in the location
indicated by the "55↓" marking on the earth connection plate (C). indicated by the "65↑" marking on the earth connection plate (C).
3.Attach the earth connection plate (C) to the center of the bottom of the 3.Attach the earth connection plate (C) to the front side of the bottom of
document finisher using an M4 × 8 screw (I). the document finisher using an M4 × 8 screw (I).
Proceed to step 6.The procedure for installing the kit on a high-speed
MFP is described on the following steps.
Montage sur des MFP à vitesse moyenne Montage sur des MFP à grande vitesse
2. En procédant à l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (I), fixez le ressort de mise à la terre (D) à 2.En procédant à l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (I), fixez le ressort de mise à la
l'endroit indiqué par la marque "55↓" sur la plaque de raccordement de mise à la terre (D) à l'endroit indiqué par la marque "65↑" sur la plaque de rac-
terre (C).
cordement de mise à la terre (C).
3. Fixez la plaque de raccordement de mise à la terre (C) au milieu de la partie
inférieure du finisseur de document avec une vis M4 × 8 (I). 3.Fixez la plaque de raccordement de mise à la terre (C) à l'avant de la
Passer à l'étape 6. La procédure d'installation du kit sur l'imprimante multifonc- partie inférieure du finisseur de document avec une vis M4 × 8 (I).
tion à grande vitesse est décrite dans les étapes suivantes.
Instalación en las MFP de velocidad media Instalación en las MFP de alta velocidad
2. Con un tornillo M4 × 8 (I), asegure el resorte de conexión a tierra (D) en el 2.Con un tornillo M4 × 8 (I), asegure el resorte de conexión a tierra (D)
lugar indicado por la marca "55↓" de la placa de conexión a tierra (C). en el lugar indicado por la marca "65↑" de la placa de conexión a tierra
3. Fije la placa de conexión a tierra (C) en el centro de la parte inferior del (C).
finalizador de documentos usando un tornillo M4 × 8 (I). 3.Fije la placa de conexión a tierra (C) en el lado frontal de la parte infe-
Vaya al paso 6.En los siguientes pasos se describe el procedimiento rior del finalizador de documentos usando un tornillo M4 × 8 (I).
de instalación del kit en un MFP de velocidad alta.
Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse
2. Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder (D) mit einer M4 × 8 Schraube (I) an der mit 2.Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder (D) mit einer M4 × 8 Schraube (I) an der
"55↓" bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte (C). mit "65↑" bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte (C).
3. Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte (C) mit einer M4 × 8 Schraube (I) mit- 3.Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte (C) mit einer M4 × 8 Schraube
tig an der Unterseite des Finishers an. (I) vorne an der Unterseite des Finishers an.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 6.Die Vorgehensweise zur Installation des Kits
an einem schnellen MFP wird in den folgenden Schritten beschrieben.
Installazione sulle MFP a velocità media Installazione sulle MFP a velocità alta
2. Utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (I), fissare la molla di messa a terra (D) nella 2.Utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (I), fissare la molla di messa a terra (D)
posizione indicata dal segno "55↓" sulla piastra di connessione per messa a terra nella posizione indicata dal segno "65↑" sulla piastra di connessione
(C).
per messa a terra (C).
3. Applicare la piastra di connessione per messa a terra (C) al centro in basso della
finisher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (I). 3.Applicare la piastra di connessione per messa a terra (C) al lato ante-
Procedere al passo 6. La procedura di installazione del Kit su un MFP di fascia riore in basso della finisher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (I).
alta è descritta nelle pagine successive.
安装于中速 MFP 上时 安装于高速 MFP 上时
2.在接地安装板 (C) 上刻有 55 ↓的位置使用 1 颗 M4×8(I) 螺丝来固定接 2.在接地安装板 (C) 上刻有 65 ↑的位置使用 1 颗 M4×8(I) 螺丝来固定接
地弹簧 (D)。 地弹簧 (D)。
3.使用 M4×8(I) 螺丝将接地安装板 (C) 安装到装订器下部中心位置。 3.使用 M4×8(I) 螺丝将接地安装板 (C) 安装到装订器下部前侧位置。
进至步骤 6。安装到高速 MFP 时，请参照下面的内容。
중속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우 고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우
2. 접지 부착판 (C) 의 각인 55 ↓ 의 위치에 나사 M4×8(I) 1 개로 접지스프링 2.접지 부착판 (C) 의 각인 65 ↑ 의 위치에 나사 M4×8(I) 1 개로 접지스
(D) 을 고정합니다 . 프링 (D) 을 고정합니다 .
3. 나사 M4×8(I) 로 접지 부착판 (C) 을 문서 피니셔 하부중앙에 부착합니다 . 3.나사 M4×8(I) 로 접지 부착판 (C) 을 문서 피니셔 하부앞측에 부착합니
순서 6 로 진행합니다 .고속 MFP 에 키트를 설치하는 절차는 다음 단계 다.
에 설명되어 있습니다 .
中速 MFP に設置の場合 高速 MFP に設置の場合
2.アース取付板 (C) の刻印 55 ↓の位置にビス M4×8(I) でアースバネ 2.アース取付板 (C) の刻印 65 ↑の位置にビス M4×8(I) でアースバネ
(D) を固定する。 (D) を固定する。
3.ビス M4×8(I) でアース取付板 (C) をドキュメントフィニッシャー下 3.ビス M4×8(I) でアース取付板 (C) をドキュメントフィニッシャー下
部センターに取り付ける。 部前側に取り付ける。
手順 6 に進む。高速 MFP に設置の場合は次に記載しています。
3
6
G 6
5
4
Only for installation on high-speed MFPs 6.Install the eject guide (G) by fitting the 2
If installing on a medium-speed MFP, proceed to step 6. eject guide pins (6) into the holes in the
4.Remove the machine interface cover (3). machine.
5.Remove the screw (4) and remove the controller cover (5).
Pour montage sur des MFP à grande vitesse uniquement 6.Installer le guide d'éjection (G) en insérant
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP à vitesse moyenne, passer à l'étape 6. les 2 ergots du guide d'éjection (6) dans les
4.Déposer le couvercle d'interface (3) de la machine. trous de la machine.
5.Déposer la vis (4) puis le couvercle du contrôleur (5).
Solo para la instalación en las MFP de alta velocidad 6.Instale la guía de salida (G) encajando los 2
Si se instala en una MFP de velocidad media, vaya al paso 6. pasadores de la guía de salida (6) en los ori-
4.Quite la cubierta de la interfaz (3) de la máquina. ficios de la máquina.
5.Quite el tornillo (4) y quite la cubierta del controlador (5).
Nur bei Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 6.Installieren Sie die Ausgabeführung (G),
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 6. indem Sie die beiden Stifte (6) der Aus-
4.Nehmen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung (3) des Geräts ab. werfführung in die Aufnahmen des Geräts
5.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (4) und nehmen Sie die Controller-Abdeckung (5) ab. einsetzen.
Solo per l'installazione sulle MFP a velocità alta 6.Installare la guida di espulsione (G) inser-
Se si installa su una MFP a velocità media, procedere al passo 6. endo i 2 perni (6) della guida di espulsione
4.Rimuovere la copertura di interfaccia (3) della macchina. nei fori della macchina.
5.Rimuovere la vite (4) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio del controller (5).
仅限安装于高速 MFP 上时 6.将排纸导向板 (G) 的 2 根销钉 (6) 插入机器
安装于中速 MFP 上时，进至步骤 6。 的孔中。
4.拆下机器的接口盖板 (3)。
5.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (4)，拆下控制器盖板 (5)。
고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우만 6.배출 가이드 (G) 핀 (6) 2 개를 본체의 구멍에
중속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우에는 순서 6 로 진행합니다 . 맞추어 끼워서 부착합니다 .
4.본체의 인터페이스 커버 (3) 를 제거합니다 .
5.나사 (4) 1 개를 빼고 컨트롤러덮개 (5) 를 제거합니다 .
高速 MFP に設置の場合のみ 6.排出ガイド (G) のピン (6)2 本を機械本体の
中速 MFP に設置の場合は手順 6 に進む。 穴に差し込み取り付ける。
4.機械本体のインターフェイスカバー(3) を取り外す。
5.ビス (4) を外し、コントローラーフタ (5) を取り外す。
4
J(M4x20) 10 11
J(M4x20)
F F
7
E
E E
8 9
7.Attach the connecting plate (E) to the 9.Connect the signal line connector (8) to the 10.Fit the connector cover (F) in the connecting
machine using 2 M4 × 20 screws (J). Attach connector (9) on the machine. Hook the sig- plate (E). Take care not to get the cable
them at the point as shown above. nal line wire (10) onto the hook (11). pinched by objects. Attach it at the point as
Only if installing to a medium-speed MFP shown above. Check that the signal line con-
If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 9. nector is covered by the connector cover (F).
8.Remove the breakaway cover (7) from the
left cover.
7. Fixez la plaque de connexion (E) à la machine à l'aide de 9.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal 10.Placer le cache de connecteur (F) dans la
2 vis M4 × 20 (J).Raccordez-les au point indiqué ci-des- (8) sur le connecteur (9) de la machine. plaque de connexion (E).Prendre soin à ne
sus.
Uniquement en cas d'installation sur un MFP à vitesse Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (10) sur le pas pincer le câble. Raccordez-les au point
moyenne crochet (11). indiqué ci-dessus. Vérifier que le connecteur
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP à grande vitesse, passer à de ligne de signal est couvert par le cache
l'étape 9.
8. Déposer le couvercle amovible (7) du couvercle gauche. de connecteur (F).
7. Fije la placa de conexión (E) a la máquina medi- 9.Conecte el conector de línea de señales (8) 10.Acople la cubierta del conector (F) en la
ante 2 tornillos M4 × 20 (J).Conéctelas en el punto al conector (9) de la máquina. Enganche el placa de conexión (E).Tenga cuidado de que
que se muestra arriba.
cable de la línea de señales (10) en el el cable no quede atrapado por objetos.
Solo si instala en una MFP de velocidad media
Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al enganche (11). Conéctelas en el punto que se muestra
paso 9. arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
8. Quite la cubierta divisoria (7) de la cubierta izqui- línea de señales quede cubierto por la cubi-
erda. erta del conector (F).
7. Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (E) mit 2 M4 × 20 9.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 10.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (F) in die
Schrauben (J) am Gerät an.Bringen Sie diese an der in der (8) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gerät (9). Verbindungsplatte (E) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
Abbildung gezeigten Stelle an.
Nur bei Installation eines MFP der mittleren Leistungsk- Hängen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (10) dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird.
lasse in den Befestigungshaken (11) ein. Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsk-
lasse weiter zu Schritt 9. gezeigten Stelle an. Überprüfen Sie, ob der
8. Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (7) von der linken Stecker der Signalleitung von der Stecker-
Abdeckung ab. Abdeckung (F) abgedeckt ist.
7. Applicare la piastra di connessione (E) alla mac- 9.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale 10.Inserire il copri connettore (F) nella piastra di
china utilizzando le 2 viti M4 × 20 (J).Fissare nella (8) al connettore (9) sulla periferica. Aggan- connessione (E).Fare attenzione a non impi-
posizione sopra indicata.
ciare il cavo di linea del segnale (10) al gan- gliare il cavo.Fissare nella posizione sopra
Solo se si installa ad un'MFP a velocità media
Se si installa su una MFP a velocità alta, procedere al cio (11). indicata.Controllare che il connettore della
passo 9. linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri con-
8. Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (7) dal coper- nettore (F).
chio sinistro.
7.使用 2 颗 M4×20(J) 螺丝将连接板 (E) 安装 9.把信号线的接插件（8）和机器本体的接插件 10.将接插件盖板 (F) 嵌入到连接板 (E)。请注意
到机器上。按图示位置来安装。 （9）相连接。 把信号线（10）挂到挂钩（11） 不要夹住电线。按图示位置来安装。请确认信
仅限安装于中速机上时 上。 号线的接插件是否完全隐藏在接插件盖板中
安装于高速 MFP 上时，进至步骤 9。 (F)。
8.去除左侧盖板上的可去除部（7）。
7. 나사 M4 × 20(J) 2 개를 사용하여 연결판 (E) 을 본 9.신호선 커넥터 (8) 를 본체의 커넥터 (9) 에 10.커넥터 커버 (F) 를 연결판 (E) 에 맞추어 끼
체에 부착합니다 . 위에 표시된 위치에 연결합니다 . 신호선 와이어 (10) 를 후크 웁니다 . 전선이 커넥터 커버 (F) 에 끼이지
부착합니다 . 위에 표시된 위치에 부착합니다 .
(11) 에 겁니다 . 않도록 주의합니다 . 위에 표시된 위치에 부
중속 MFP 에 설치할 경우만
고속 MFP 에 설치하는 경우에는 순서 9 로 착합니다 . 신호선 커넥터가 커넥터 커버 (F)
진행합니다 . 에 덮여있는지 확인합니다 .
8. 좌측커버의 분할커버부 (7) 를 떼어 냅니다 .
7.連結板 (E) をビス M4×20(J)2 本で、機械本 9.信号線のコネクター(8) を機械本体のコネ 10.コネクターカバー(F) を連結板 (E) にはめ
体に取り付ける。図の位置で取り付けるこ クター(9) に接続する。信号線 (10) は、フッ 込む。
電線を挟み込まない様注意すること。
と。 ク (11) に掛けること。 図の位置で取り付けること。信号線のコネク
ターがコネクターカバー(F) で隠れている
中速 MFP に設置の場合のみ
ことを確認する。
高速 MFP に設置の場合は手順 9 に進む。
8.左カバーの割りカバー部 (7) を切り取る。
5
14
3 12 13
14
11.Attach the interface cover (3)* on the machine. 12.Open the document finisher upper front
* Installing with a high-speed MFP : the cover which was removed in step 4. cover (12). Remove the screw (13). Pull the
Installing with a medium-speed MFP : the cover which was removed while installing the AK-730 lock frame (14) frontwards.
or AK-731.
11.Raccordez le couvercle d'interface (3)* à la machine. 12.Ouvrir le couvercle avant supérieur du finis-
* Installation avec une imprimante multifonction à grande vitesse : le cache qui a été retiré à seur de document (12). Retirez la vis (13).
l'étape 4. Tirer le cadre de verrouillage (14) vers le
Installation avec une imprimante multifonction à moyenne vitesse : le cache qui a été retiré lors bas.
de l'installation de l'AK-730 ou AK-731.
11.Conecte la cubierta de interfaz (3)* de la máquina. 12.Abra la cubierta frontal superior del finaliza-
* Instalación con un MFP de velocidad alta : la cubierta que se quitó en el paso 4. dor de documentos (12). Quite el tornillo
Instalación con un MFP de velocidad media : la cubierta que se quitó al instalar el kit AK-730 o (13). Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia
AK-731. delante.
11.Bringen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung (3)* am Gerät an. 12.Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
*Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse : die Abdeckung, die in Schritt 4 entfernt des Finishers (12). Entfernen Sie die
wurde Schraube (13). Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung
Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse : die Abdeckung, die zur Installation (14) nach vorne.
des AK-730 oder AK-731 entfernt wurde
11.Fissare la copertura di interfaccia (3)* sulla macchina. 12.Aprire il coperchio frontale superiore del fin-
* Installazione su un MFP di fascia alta : il coperchio che è stato rimosso al punto 4 isher documenti (12). Togliere la vite (13).
Installazione su un MFP di fascia media : il coperchio che è stato rimosso per installare il kit AK- Tirare in avanti la frame di blocco (14).
730 o AK-731
11.将接口盖板 (3)* 安装到机器主机。 12.打开装订器的前上盖板（12）。取下螺丝
* 安装到高速 MFP 时 : 在步骤 4 中取下的盖板 （13）。 向身体前侧拉出固定架（14）。
安装到中速 MFP 时 : 在安装 AK-730 或 AK-731 时取下的盖板
11.인터페이스 커버 (3)* 를 본체에 부착합니다 . 12.문서 피니셔의 전면 상커버 (12) 를 엽니다 .
* 고속 MFP 설치의 경우 : 순서 4 에서 제거한 커버 나사 (13) 를 제거합니다 . 잠금 프레임 (14)
중속 MFP 설치의 경우 : AK-730 또는 AK-731 설치 시 분리한 커버 을 앞으로 뺍니다 .
11.機械本体にインターフェイスカバー(3)* を取り付ける。 12.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの前上カバー
* 高速 MFP に設置の場合 : 手順 4 で外したカバー (12) を開く。ビス (13) を外す。
ロックフ
中速 MFP に設置の場合 : AK-730 または AK-731 設置時に取り外したカバー レーム (14) を手前に引く。
6
13
15 E
16 14
H
12
13.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate 14.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the 16.Install the staple cartridge (H).
(E) into the hole (16) on the document fin- machine so that the connectors at the far 17.Close the upper front cover (12).
isher. Connect the document finisher to the end are connected.
machine. 15.Secure the lock frame (14) using the screw Proceed to adjusting the stapling position on
* If you cannot connect the document fin- (13) removed in step 12. page 20.
isher, adjust the height as described on page
15.
13.Introduire la broche (15) sur la plaque de 14.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage 16.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (H).
connexion (E) dans le trou (16) sur le finis- (14) à fond dans la machine de sorte que les 17.Refermer le couvercle avant supérieur (12).
seur de document. Connecter le finisseur de connecteurs à l'extrémité soient raccordés.
document sur la machine. 15.Fixez le bâti de verrouillage (14) à l'aide de Passez à l'ajustement de la position d'agraf-
* S'il s'avère impossible de connecter le la vis (13) déposée à l'étape 12. age page 20.
finisseur de document, en régler la hauteur
comme décrit en page 15.
13.Inserte el pasador (15) de la placa de conex- 14.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el 16.Instale el cartucho de grapas (H).
ión (E) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de marco del cierre (14) hacia la máquina de 17.Cierre la cubierta frontal superior (12).
documentos. Conecte el finalizador de docu- modo que se conecten los conectores en el
mentos a la máquina. extremo más lejano. Proceda al ajuste de la posición de grapado
* Si no puede conectar el finalizador de doc- 15.Asegure la carcasa de bloqueo (14) por en la página 20.
umentos, ajuste la altura como se describe medio del tornillo (13) quitado en el paso 12.
en la página 15.
13.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindung- 14.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder 16.Installieren Sie das Heftklammer-Magazin
splatte (E) in die Öffnung (16) des Finishers. langsam ins Gerät, so dass die Verbindun- (H).
Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gerät. gen am anderen Ende des Geräts geschlos- 17.Schließen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
* Falls Sie den Finisher nicht anschließen sen werden. (12).
können, sollten Sie die Höhe wie auf Seite 15.Befestigen Sie den Fixierrahmen (14) mit
15 beschrieben einstellen. der in Schritt 12 entfernten Schraube (13). Fahren Sie mit der Justage der Heftposition
auf Seite 20 fort.
13.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connes- 14.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14) 16.Installare il contenitore punti (H).
sione (E) nel foro (16) del finisher docu- nella macchina in modo che i connettori 17.Chiudere il coperchio superiore anteriore
menti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla all'estremità risultino collegati. (12).
macchina. 15.Fissare il telaio di bloccaggio (14) utilizzando
* Se non è possibile collegare la finisher la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 12. Proseguire con la regolazione della
documenti, regolare l’altezza come descritto posizione di pinzatura a pagina 20.
a pagina 15.
13.将连接板 (E) 的销钉（15）插入装订器的孔 14.慢慢的把固定架（14）完全推入机器，这样机 16.安装装订针盒 (H)。
（16）中。 把装订器连接到机器本体。 器里侧的接插件就可以顺利连接。 17.关闭前部上盖板 (12)。
※ 如果无法连接，请进行 P15 的 15.使用在步骤 12 中取下的 1 颗螺丝 (13) 来固
“ 高度调节 ”。 定锁框 (14)。 跳至 P20「调节装订位置」。
13.연결판 (E) 의 핀 (15) 을 문서 피니셔의 구 14.본체 뒷쪽의 커넥터가 연결되도록 잠금 프레 16.스테이플 카트리지 (H) 를 설치합니다 .
멍 (16) 에 삽입합니다 . 문서 피니셔를 본체 임 (14) 을 본체 안으로 천천히 밀어 넣습니 17.앞 상커버 (12) 를 닫습니다 .
에 연결합니다 . 다.
※ 연결할 수 없는 경우에는 P15 의 「높이조 15.순서 12 에서 뺀 나사（13）1 개로 잠금 프레 20 페이지의 스테이플 위치 조정으로 진행합
정」을 할 것 . 임（14）을 고정합니다 . 니다 .
13.連結板 (E) のピン (15) をドキュメントフィ 14.機械奥側のコネクタが接続されるように、 16.ステープルカートリッジ (H) を取り付ける。
ニッシャーの穴 (16) に挿入する。ドキュメ ロックフレーム (14) をゆっくり奧に押す。 17.前上カバー(12) を閉じる。
ントフィニッシャーを機械本体に接続する。 15.手順 12 で外したビス（13）
で、ロックフレー
※ 連結できない場合は、 P15 の
「高さ調整」を ム（14）を固定する。 P20「ステープル位置の調整」に進む。
行う。
7
A
AK-735
I(M4x8)
J(M4x20)
B
D
F
C Y
G H
E
Z
Supplied parts G. Eject guide ................................................. 1 C ,D and Z are not used.
A. Document finisher...................................... 1 H. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1 I. M4 × 8 screw ............................................. 3 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
C. Earth connection plate............................... 1 J. M4 × 20 screw ........................................... 2 materials from the parts supplied.
D. Earth spring ............................................... 1 K. Earth Plate ................................................. 1
E. Connecting plate........................................ 1 L. Cover ......................................................... 1
F. Connector cover ........................................ 1
Pièces fournies G. Guide d'éjection ......................................... 1
A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1 H. Cartouche d’agrafes .................................. 1 C, D et Z ne sont pas utilisés.
B. Bac d'éjection ............................................ 1 I. Vis M4 × 8.................................................. 2
C. Plaque de raccordement de mise à la terre1 J. Vis M4 × 20................................................ 2 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
D. Ressort de mise à la terre ......................... 1 Y. Plaque de terre .......................................... 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
E. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1 Z. Couvercle................................................... 1 pièces fournies.
F. Cache de connecteur ................................ 1
Partes suministradas G. Guía de salida............................................ 1
A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1 H. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1 C, D y Z no se utilizan.
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 I. Tornillo M4 × 8 ........................................... 2
C. Placa de conexión a tierra ......................... 1 J. Tornillo M4 × 20 ......................................... 2 Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
D. Resorte de conexión a tierra ..................... 1 Y. Placa de conexión a tierra ......................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
E. Placa de conexión ..................................... 1 Z. Cubierta ..................................................... 1 das.
F. Cubierta del conector................................. 1
Enthaltene Teile G. Ausgabeführung ........................................ 1
A. Finisher...................................................... 1 H. Heftklammermagazin................................. 1 C, D und Z werden nicht benötigt.
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1 I. M4 × 8 Schraube ....................................... 2
C. Grundanschlussplatte................................ 1 J. M4 × 20 Schraube ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
D. Grundfeder ................................................ 1 Y. Grundplatte ................................................ 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
E. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1 Z. Abdeckung................................................. 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
F. Stecker-Abdeckung ................................... 1
Parti fornite G. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1
A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1 H. Contenitore punti ...................................... 1 C, D e Z non sono utilizzati.
B. Vassoio di espulsione ................................ 1 I. Vite M4 × 8................................................. 2
C. Piastra di connessione per messa a terra . 1 J. Vite M4 × 20............................................... 2
D. Molla di messa a terra ............................... 1 Y. Piastra di messa a terra............................. 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
E. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1 Z. Coperchio .................................................. 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
F. Copri connettore ........................................ 1
附属品 G. 排纸导向板 ............................... 1
A. 装订器 .................................... 1 H. 装订针盒 .................................. 1 不使用 C、D 和 Z。
B. 排纸托盘 .................................. 1 I. M4×8 螺丝 ................................. 2
C. 接地安装板 ................................ 1 J. M4×20 螺丝 ................................ 2 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
D. 接地弹簧 .................................. 1 Y. 接地板 .................................... 1
下。
E. 连接板 .................................... 1 Z. 盖板 ...................................... 1
F. 接插件盖板 ................................ 1
동봉품 G. 배출 가이드 ................................................1
A. 문서 피니셔.................................................1 H. 스테이플 카트리지........................................1 C, D 와 Z 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
B. 배출 트레이.................................................1 I. 나사 M4×8 .................................................2
C. 접지 부착판.................................................1 J. 나사 M4×20................................................2 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
D. 접지 스프링.................................................1 Y. 접지판........................................................1 우에는 반드시 제거할 것 .
E. 연결판 .......................................................1 Z. 커버...........................................................1
F. 커넥터 커버.................................................1
同梱品 G. 排出ガイド ..........................1
A. ドキュメントフィニッシャー........... 1 H. ステープルカートリッジ ...............1 C,D,Z は使用しない。
B. 排出トレイ........................... 1 I. ビス M4×8 ............................2
C. アース取付板......................... 1 J. ビス M4×20 ...........................2 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合
D. アースバネ........................... 1 Y. アース板 .............................1 は、
必ず取り外すこと。
E. 連結板............................... 1 Z. カバー ...............................1
F. コネクターカバー..................... 1
8
B A
NOTICE Procedure 1.Install by inserting the 2 hooks (1) on the
The Attachment Kit (AK-735) must be installed Before starting installation, be sure to turn the back of the eject tray (B) into the holes (2) in
before the document finisher is installed. main power switch of the machine off, and the document finisher (A) lift.
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
REMARQUE Procédure 1.Procéder en insérant les 2 crochets (1) au
Le gabarit de fixation (AK-735) doit être en Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de dos du bac d'éjection (B) dans les trous (2)
place avant de procéder à l'installation du finis- mettre la machine hors tension et de du dispositif de levage du finisseur docu-
seur de document. débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise ment (A).
murale.
AVISO Procedimiento 1.Instale insertando los 2 ganchos (1) de la
El Kit de instalación (AK-735) debe instalarse Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de parte posterior de la bandeja de salida (B)
antes de instalar el finalizador de documentos. apagar el interruptor de encendido de la en los orificios (2) del elevador del finaliza-
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación dor de documentos (A).
de la toma de pared.
ANMERKUNG Verfahren 1.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (1) zur Befestigung
Das Gerätezusatz (AK-735) muss installiert Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu- an der Rückseite des Auswerffachs (B) in
werden, bevor man den Finisher installiert. gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts die Öffnungen (2) an der Hebeplatte des Fin-
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der ishers (A) ein.
Steckdose gezogen ist.
AVVISO Procedura 1.Installare inserendo i 2 ganci (1) sul retro del
Il kit accessorio (AK-735) deve essere installato Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la vassoio di espulsione (B) nei fori (2) sul soll-
prima che sia installata la finisher documenti. macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di evatore della finisher documenti (A).
corrente.
注意 安装步骤 1.将排纸托盘 (B) 内侧的 2 个挂钩 (1) 装入装
安装装订器之前，必须先安装连接组件（AK- 安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插 订器 (A) 的升降板的孔 (2) 中。
735)。 座拔下电源插头。
주의 장착순서 1.배출 트레이 (B) 의 후면 후크 (1) 2 개를 문
문서 피니셔를 장착하기 전에 연결킷（AK-735) 설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 서 피니셔 (A) 의 승강판 구멍 (2) 에 넣고 장
의 장착을 선행할 것 . 위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리 착합니다 .
하십시오 .
注意 取付手順 1.排出トレイ (B) の裏側のフック (1)2 個をド
ドキュメントフィニッシャーを取り付ける前 必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機 キュメントフィニッシャー(A) の昇降板の
に、
アタッチメントキット（AK-735) の取り付け 械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ 穴 (2) に入れて、取り付ける。
をおこなうこと。 と。
9
Y
3
G
I(M4x8)
4
2.Attach the earth plate (Y)* to the center of 3.Remove the cover (3) from the machine. 4.Install the eject guide (G) by fitting the 2
the bottom of the document finisher using an eject guide pins (4) into the holes in the
M4 × 8 screw (I). machine.
*The part was supplied with AK-735
2.Raccordez la plaque de terre (Y)* en bas au 3.Retirer le couvercle (3) de la machine. 4.Installer le guide d'éjection (G) en insérant
centre du finisseur de document en utilisant les 2 ergots du guide d'éjection (4) dans les
une vis M4 × 8 (I). trous de la machine.
*La pièce a été fournie avec l'AK-735
2.Conecte la placa de conexión a tierra (Y)* al 3.Quite la cubierta (3) de la máquina. 4.Instale la guía de salida (G) encajando los 2
centro de la parte inferior del finalizador de pasadores de la guía de salida (4) en los ori-
documentos con un tornillo M4 × 8 (I). ficios de la máquina.
*La pieza se proporcionó con AK-735
2.Bringen Sie die Grundplatte (Y)* in der Mitte 3.Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung (3) vom Gerät. 4.Installieren Sie die Ausgabeführung (G),
des Bodens des Finishers mit den M4 x 8 indem Sie die beiden Stifte (4) der Aus-
Schrauben (I) an. werfführung in die Aufnahmen des Geräts
*Dieses Teil ist im AK-735 enthalten. einsetzen.
2.Applicare la piastra di messa a terra (Y)* al 3.Rimuovere il coperchio (3) dalla macchina. 4.Installare la guida di espulsione (G) inser-
centro dell'area inferiore della finisher docu- endo i 2 perni (4) della guida di espulsione
menti utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (I). nei fori della macchina.
*Parte fornita con AK-735
2.使用 M4×8(I) 螺丝将接地板 (Y)* 安装到装 3.从机器上拆下盖板（3）。 4.将排纸导向板 (G) 的 2 根销钉 (4) 插入机器
订器下部中央。 的孔中。
*AK-735 的附属品
2.나사 M4 × 8(I) 를 사용하여 접지판 (Y)* 을 3.본체에서 커버 (3) 를 분리합니다 . 4.배출 가이드 (G) 의 핀 (4) 2 개를 본체의 구
문서 피니셔의 하단 중앙에 부착합니다 . 멍에 맞추어 끼워서 부착합니다 .
*AK-735 동봉 부품
2.ビス M4×8(I) でアース板 (Y)* をドキュメ 3.機械本体からカバー(3) を取り外す。 4.排出ガイド (G) のピン (4)2 本を機械本体の
ントフィニッシャー下部センターに取り付 穴に差し込み取り付ける。
ける。
*AK-735 の同梱品
10
8 9
J(M4x20)
J(M4x20)
F F
5 E
E E
6 7
5.Attach the connecting plate (E) to the 7.Connect the signal line connector (6) to the 8.Fit the connector cover (F) in the connecting
machine using 2 M4 × 20 screws (J).Attach connector (7) on the machine. Hook the sig- plate (E).Take care not to get the cable
them at the point as shown above. nal line wire (8) onto the hook (9). pinched by objects.Attach it at the point as
6.Remove the breakaway cover (5) from the shown above.Check that the signal line con-
left cover. nector is covered by the connector cover (F).
5.Fixez la plaque de connexion (E) à la 7.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal 8.Placer le cache de connecteur (F) dans la
machine à l'aide de 2 vis M4 × 20 (J). Rac- (6) sur le connecteur (7) de la machine. plaque de connexion (E). Prendre soin à ne
cordez-les au point indiqué ci-dessus. Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (8) sur le pas pincer le câble. Raccordez-les au point
6.Déposer le couvercle amovible (5) du cou- crochet (9). indiqué ci-dessus. Vérifier que le connecteur
vercle gauche. de ligne de signal est couvert par le cache
de connecteur (F).
5.Fije la placa de conexión (E) a la máquina 7.Conecte el conector de línea de señales (6) 8.Acople la cubierta del conector (F) en la
mediante 2 tornillos M4 × 20 (J). Conéctelas al conector (7) de la máquina. Enganche el placa de conexión (E). Tenga cuidado de
en el punto que se muestra arriba. cable de la línea de señales (8) en el que el cable no quede atrapado por objetos.
6.Quite la cubierta divisoria (5) de la cubierta enganche (9). Conéctelas en el punto que se muestra
izquierda. arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
línea de señales quede cubierto por la cubi-
erta del conector (F).
5.Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (E) mit 2 7.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 8.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (F) in die
M4 × 20 Schrauben (J) am Gerät an. Brin- (6) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gerät (7). Verbindungsplatte (E) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
gen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung Hängen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (8) dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird.
gezeigten Stelle an. in den Befestigungshaken (9) ein. Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
6.Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung (5) gezeigten Stelle an. Überprüfen Sie, ob der
von der linken Abdeckung ab. Stecker der Signalleitung von der Stecker-
Abdeckung (F) abgedeckt ist.
5.Applicare la piastra di connessione (E) alla 7.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale 8.Inserire il copri connettore (F) nella piastra di
macchina utilizzando le 2 viti M4 × 20 (J). (6) al connettore (7) sulla periferica. Aggan- connessione (E). Fare attenzione a non
Fissare nella posizione sopra indicata. ciare il cavo di linea del segnale (8) al gancio impigliare il cavo. Fissare nella posizione
6.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (5) dal (9). sopra indicata. Controllare che il connettore
coperchio sinistro. della linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri
connettore (F).
5.使用 2 颗 M4×20(J) 螺丝将连接板 (E) 安装 7.把信号线的接插件 (6) 和机器本体的接插件 8.将接插件盖板 (F) 嵌入到连接板 (E)。 请注
到机器上。 按图示位置来安装。 (7) 相连接。 把信号线 (8) 挂到挂钩 (9) 上。 意不要夹住电线。 按图示位置来安装。请确
6.去除左侧盖板上的可去除部（5）。 认信号线的接插件是否完全隐藏在接插件盖
板中 (F)。
5.나사 M4 × 20(J) 2 개를 사용하여 연결판 7.신호선 커넥터 (6) 를 본체의 커넥터 (7) 에 8.커넥터 커버 (F) 를 연결판 (E) 에 맞추어 끼
(E) 을 본체에 부착합니다 . 위에 표시된 위 연결합니다 . 신호선 와이어 (8) 를 후크 (9) 웁니다 . 전선이 커넥터 커버 (F) 에 끼이지
치에 부착합니다 . 에 겁니다 . 않도록 주의합니다 . 위에 표시된 위치에 부
6.좌측커버의 분할커버부 (5) 를 떼어 냅니다 . 착합니다 . 신호선 커넥터가 커넥터 커버 (F)
에 덮여있는지 확인합니다 .
5.連結板 (E) をビス M4×20(J)2 本で、機械本 7.信号線のコネクター(6) を機械本体のコネ 8.コネクターカバー(F) を連結板 (E) にはめ
体に取り付ける。図の位置で取り付けるこ クター(7) に接続する。信号線 (8) は、
フッ 込む。
電線を挟み込まない様注意すること。
と。 ク (9) に掛けること。 図の位置で取り付けること。信号線のコネク
6.左カバーの割りカバー部 (5) を切り取る。 ターがコネクターカバー(F) で隠れている
ことを確認する。
11
10
11
11-2 10
11-1
11-1
11
9.Remove the screw (10).Remove the rear 10.Separate the rear cover (11) into the two 11.Install the cover (11-1) using the screw (10).
cover (11) . covers(11-1,11-2).
The cover(11-2) isnot used.
9.Retirez la vis (10). Retire le capot arrière 10.Séparez le couvercle arrière (11) en deux 11.Installez le couvercle (11-1) à l'aide de la vis
(11). couvercles (11-1, 11-2). (10).
Le couvercle (11-2) n'est pas utilisé.
9.Quite el tornillo (10). Quite la cubierta poste- 10.Separe la cubierta posterior (11) en las dos 11.Instale la cubierta (11-1) con un tornillo (10).
rior (11). cubiertas (11-1, 11-2).
La cubierta (11-2) no se utiliza.
9.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (10). Entfernen 10.Teilen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11) in zwei 11.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (11-1) mit den
Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11). Abdeckungen (11-1, 11-2) auf. Schrauben (10).
Die Abdeckung (11-2) wird nicht benötigt.
9.Togliere la vite (10). Rimuovere il coperchio 10.Separare il coperchio posteriore (11) in due 11.Installare il coperchio (11-1) utilizzando la
posteriore (11). coperchi (11-1,11-2). vite (10).
Il coperchio (11-2) non viene utilizzato.
9.取下螺丝（10）。 取下后盖板（11）。 10.将后盖板 (11) 分成 2 个盖板 (11-1,11-2)。 11.使用螺丝 (10) 来安装盖板 (11-1)。
不需要盖板 (11-2)。
9.나사 (10) 를 제거합니다 . 후면 커버 (11) 를 10.후면 커버 (11) 를 2개의 커버 (11-1, 11-2) 11.나사 (10) 를 사용하여 커버 (11-1) 를 장착
제거합니다 . 로 분리합니다 . 합니다 .
커버 (11-2) 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
9.ビス (10) を外す。後カバー(11) を取り外 10.後カバー(11) を 2 つのカバー(11-1,11-2) 11.ビス (10) でカバー（11-1）を取り付ける。
す。 に分ける。
カバー(11-2) は不要。
12
13
14
12 13 14
16
E
14 15
12.Open the document finisher upper front 13.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate 14.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the
cover (12). Remove the screw (13).Pull the (E) into the hole (16) on the document fin- machine so that the connectors at the far
lock frame (14) frontwards. isher.Connect the document finisher to the end are connected.
machine. 15.Secure the lock frame (14) using the screw
* If you cannot connect the document fin- (13) removed in step 12.
isher, adjust the height as described on page
15.
12.Ouvrir le couvercle avant supérieur du finis- 13.Introduire la broche (15) sur la plaque de 14.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage
seur de document (12). Retirez la vis (13). connexion (E) dans le trou (16) sur le finis- (14) à fond dans la machine de sorte que les
Tirer le cadre de verrouillage (14) vers le seur de document.Connecter le finisseur de connecteurs à l'extrémité soient raccordés.
bas. document sur la machine. 15.Fixez le bâti de verrouillage (14) à l'aide de
* S'il s'avère impossible de connecter le la vis (13) déposée à l'étape 12.
finisseur de document, en régler la hauteur
comme décrit en page 15.
12.Abra la cubierta frontal superior del finaliza- 13.Inserte el pasador (15) de la placa de conex- 14.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el
dor de documentos (12). Quite el tornillo ión (E) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de marco del cierre (14) hacia la máquina de
(13). Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia documentos.Conecte el finalizador de docu- modo que se conecten los conectores en el
delante. mentos a la máquina. extremo más lejano.
* Si no puede conectar el finalizador de doc- 15.Asegure la carcasa de bloqueo (14) por
umentos, ajuste la altura como se describe medio del tornillo (13) quitado en el paso 12.
en la página 15.
12.Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 13.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindung- 14.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder
des Finishers (12). Entfernen Sie die splatte (E) in die Öffnung (16) des Finishers. langsam ins Gerät, so dass die Verbindun-
Schraube (13). Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gerät. gen am anderen Ende des Geräts geschlos-
(14) nach vorne. * Falls Sie den Finisher nicht anschließen sen werden.
können, sollten Sie die Höhe wie auf Seite 15.Befestigen Sie den Fixierrahmen (14) mit
15 beschrieben einstellen. der in Schritt 12 entfernten Schraube (13).
12.Aprire il coperchio frontale superiore del fin- 13.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connes- 14.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14)
isher documenti (12). Togliere la vite (13). sione (E) nel foro (16) del finisher docu- nella macchina in modo che i connettori
Tirare in avanti la frame di blocco (14). menti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla all'estremità risultino collegati.
macchina. 15.Fissare il telaio di bloccaggio (14) utilizzando
* Se non è possibile collegare la finisher la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 12.
documenti, regolare l’altezza come descritto
a pagina 15.
12.打开装订器的前上盖板（12）。 取下螺丝 13.将连接板 (E) 的销钉（15）插入装订器的孔 14.慢慢的把固定架（14）完全推入机器，这样机
（13）。 向身体前侧拉出固定架（14）。 （16）中。把装订器连接到机器本体。 器里侧的接插件就可以顺利连接。
※ 如果无法连接，请进行 P15 的 15.使用在步骤 12 中取下的 1 颗螺丝 (13) 来固
“ 高度调节 ”。 定锁框 (14)。
12.문서 피니셔의 전면 상커버 (12) 를 엽니다 . 13.연결판 (E) 의 핀 (15) 을 문서 피니셔의 구 14.본체 뒷쪽의 커넥터가 연결되도록 잠금 프레
나사 (13) 를 제거합니다 . 잠금 프레임 (14) 멍 (16) 에 삽입합니다 . 문서 피니셔를 본체 임 (14) 을 본체 안으로 천천히 밀어 넣습니
을 앞으로 뺍니다 . 에 연결합니다 . 다.
※ 연결할 수 없는 경우에는 P15 의 「높이조 15.순서 12 에서 뺀 나사（13）1 개로 잠금 프레
정」을 할 것 . 임（14）을 고정합니다 .
12.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの前上カバー 13.連結板 (E) のピン (15) をドキュメントフィ 14.機械奥側のコネクタが接続されるように、
(12) を開く。ビス (13) を外す。
ロックフ ニッシャーの穴 (16) に挿入する。ドキュメ ロックフレーム (14) をゆっくり奧に押す。
レーム (14) を手前に引く。 ントフィニッシャーを機械本体に接続する。 15.手順 12 で外したビス（13）
で、ロックフレー
※ 連結できない場合は、 P15 の
「高さ調整」を ム（14）を固定する。
行う。
13
H
12
16.Install the staple cartridge (H).
17.Close the upper front cover (12).
Proceed to adjusting the stapling position on
page 20.
16.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (H).
17.Refermer le couvercle avant supérieur (12).
Passez à l'ajustement de la position d'agraf-
age page 20.
16.Instale el cartucho de grapas (H).
17.Cierre la cubierta frontal superior (12).
Proceda al ajuste de la posición de grapado
en la página 20.
16.Installieren Sie das Heftklammer-Magazin
(H).
17.Schließen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
(12).
Fahren Sie mit der Justage der Heftposition
auf Seite 20 fort.
16.Installare il contenitore punti (H).
17.Chiudere il coperchio superiore anteriore
(12).
Proseguire con la regolazione della
posizione di pinzatura a pagina 20.
16.安装装订针盒 (H)。
17.关闭前部上盖板 (12)。
跳至 P20「调节装订位置」。
16.스테이플 카트리지 (H) 를 설치합니다 .
17.앞 상커버 (12) 를 닫습니다 .
20 페이지의 스테이플 위치 조정으로 진행합
니다 .
16.ステープルカートリッジ (H) を取り付ける。
17.前上カバー(12) を閉じる。
P20「ステープル位置の調整」に進む。
14
15
b
b a a a
b
16 15
21
Adjusting the height Compliant: The diameter (a) of the pin (15) is within the height range (b) of the curved section (21).
1.Check that the respective heights of the pins Non-compliant: The diameter (a) of the pin (15) is extends beyond the height range (b) of the curved
(15) on the connecting plate installed on the section (21).
machine and the connecting holes (16) on If the heights are non-compliant, use the procedure below to adjust the height.
the document finisher comply with the refer-
ences below.
Réglage de la hauteur Bon : Le diamètre (a) de l'ergot (15) est dans les limites de hauteur (b) de la partie courbée (21).
1.Vérifiez que les hauteurs respectives des Mauvais : Le diamètre (a) de l'ergot (15) dépasse les limites de hauteur (b) de la partie courbée (21).
ergots (15) sur la plaque de connexion Si la hauteur n'est pas conforme, l'ajuster en procédant comme indiqué ci-dessous.
installée sur la machine et les trous de con-
nexion (16) sur le finisseur de document
sont conformes aux références ci-dessous.
Ajuste de la altura Cumple: el diámetro (a) del pasador (15) está dentro del rango de altura (b) de la sección curvada
1.Compruebe que las alturas correspondien- (21).
tes de los pasadores (15) de la placa de No cumple: el diámetro (a) del pasador (15) sobrepasa el rango de altura (b) de la sección curvada
fijación instalados en la máquina y los orifi- (21).
cios de conexión (16) del finalizador de doc- Si las alturas no cumplen con las especificaciones, utilice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
umentos cumplen las referencias de abajo. altura.
Einstellen der Höhe Korrekt: Der Durchmesser (a) des Stifts (15) befindet sich im Höhenbereich (b) des Kurvenabschnitts
1.Überprüfen Sie, dass die jeweilige Höhe der (21).
Stifte (15) der am Gerät installierten Verbind- Nicht korrekt: Der Durchmesser (a) des Stifts (15) ragt über den Höhenbereich (b) des Kurvenab-
ungsplatte und Verbindungsöffnungen (16) schnitts (21) hinaus.
des Finishers mit den unten angegebenen Falls die Höhen nicht korrekt sind, müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
Werten übereinstimmen.
Regolazione dell'altezza Conformità: Il diametro (a) del perno (15) è compreso nella gamma di altezza (b) della sezione cur-
1.Controllare che le rispettive altezze dei perni vata (21).
(15) sulla piastra di connessione installata Non conformità: Il diametro (a) del perno (15) si estende oltre la gamma di altezza (b) della sezione
sulla macchina e i fori di connessione (16) curvata (21).
sulla finisher documenti corrispondano ai Se le altezze sono non corrispondenti, utilizzare la procedura riportata sotto per regolare l'altezza.
riferimenti mostrati sotto.
高度调节 符 合：销钉 (15) 的直径 (a) 在弯曲部 (21) 的高度 (b) 的范围内。
1.确认机器主机上安装的连接板的销钉 (15) 和 不符合：销钉 (15) 的直径 (a) 超出了弯曲部 (21) 的高度 (b) 的范围。
装订器的连接用的孔 (16) 的高度是否符合以 不符合时，通过以下步骤进行调节。
下标准。
높이조정 적 합 ：핀 (15) 의 직경 (a) 가 곡선부 (21) 의 높이 (b) 의 범위에 들어간다 .
1.본체에 설치된 연결판의 핀 (15) 과 문서 피 부적합：핀 (15) 의 직경 (a) 가 곡선부 (21) 의 높이 (b) 의 범위를 넘는다 .
니셔의 연결용 구멍 (16) 의 각 높이가 아래 부적합의 경우에는 이하의 순서대로 조정합니다 .
의 기준에 부합하는지 확인합니다 .
高さ調整 適 合：ピン (15) の直径 (a) が曲げ部 (21) の高さ (b) の範囲に収まっている。
1.機械本体に取り付けた連結板のピン (15) と 不適合：ピン (15) の直径 (a) が曲げ部 (21) の高さ (b) の範囲からはみだしている。
ドキュメントフィニッシャーの連結用の穴 不適合の場合は、 以下の手順で調整する。
(16) の高さが以下の基準に適合するか確認
する。
15
25
24
26
12
22
26
23 27 26
24 25
24
2.Open the upper front cover (12) of the docu- 4.Remove the 2 screws (24) and remove the 5.Remove the 3 screws (26) and remove the
ment finisher. foot cover (25). lower rear cover (27).
3.Remove the screw (22) and open the lower
front cover (23).
2.Ouvrir le couvercle avant supérieur (12) du 4.Déposer les 2 vis (24) puis le couvercle du 5.Déposer les 3 vis (26) puis le couvercle arri-
finisseur de document. pied (25). ère inférieur (27).
3.Déposer la vis (22) et ouvrir le couvercle
avant inférieur (23).
2.Abra la cubierta frontal superior (12) del 4.Quite los 2 tornillos (24) y quite la cubierta 5.Quite los 3 tornillos (26) y quite la cubierta
finalizador de documentos. de la pata (25). posterior inferior (27).
3.Quite el tornillo (22) y abra la cubierta frontal
inferior (23).
2.Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 4.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (24) und 5.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (26) und
(12) des Finishers. nehmen Sie die Fußabdeckung (25) ab. nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung
3.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (22) und öffnen (27) ab.
Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung (23).
2.Aprire il coperchio superiore anteriore (12) 4.Rimuovere le 2 viti (24) e quindi rimuovere la 5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (26) e quindi rimuovere il
della finisher documenti. copertura del piede (25). coperchio inferiore posteriore (27).
3.Rimuovere la vite (22) ed aprire il coperchio
inferiore anteriore (23).
2.打开装订器的前部上盖板 (12)。 4.拆除 2 颗螺丝 (24)，拆下脚座盖板 (25)。 5.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (26)，拆下后部下盖板 (27)。
3.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (22)，打开前部下盖板 (23)。
2.문서 피니셔 앞 상커버 (12) 를 엽니다 . 4.나사 (24) 2 개를 제거하고 , 풋커버 (25) 를 5.나사 (26) 3 개를 제거하고 , 뒤 하커버 (27)
3.나사 (22) 1 개를 제거하고 앞 하커버 (23) 를 제거합니다 . 를 제거합니다 .
엽니다 .
2.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの前上カバー 4.ビス (24)2 本を外し、フットカバー(25) を 5.ビス (26)3 本を外し、後下カバー(27) を取
(12) を開く。 取り外す。 り外す。
3.ビス (22)1 本を外し、前下カバー(23) を開
く。
16
31
28 30
29
29
6.Remove the screw (28) to remove the span- 8.Turn the adjustment bolts (31) with the spanner (29) to adjust the height of the document finisher.
ner (29). Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts the document finisher, and turning it counterclockwise
7.Loosen the 2 screws (30) on the front right lowers the document finisher.
and on the rear right of the document fin- 9.Retighten each of the 2 screws (30) and replace the spanner (29).
isher.
6.Déposer la vis (28) pour libérer la clé (29). 8.Faire tourner les boulons de réglage (31) avec la clé (29) pour ajuster la hauteur du finisseur de
7.Desserrer les 2 vis (30) du côté avant droit et document.
arrière droit du finisseur de document. Tourner le boulon de réglage dans le sens horloger pour lever le finisseur de document, et dans
le sens contraire au sens horloger pour le descendre.
9.Resserrer les 2 vis (30) et repositionner la clé (29) au même endroit.
6.Quite el tornillo (28) para extraer la llave 8.Gire los pernos de ajuste (31) con la llave inglesa (29) para ajustar la altura del finalizador de
inglesa (29). documentos.
7.Afloje los 2 tornillos (30) en los lados dere- Al girar el perno de ajuste en la dirección de las manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
cho frontal y derecho posterior del finaliza- documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de docu-
dor de documentos. mentos.
9.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos (30) y coloque la llave inglesa en su lugar (29).
6.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (28), um den 8.Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben (31) mit dem Schlüssel (29), um die Höhe des Finishers
Schlüssel (29) abzunehmen einzustellen.
7.Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben (30) vorne rechts Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, während er
und hinten rechts am Finisher. durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird.
9.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben (30) wieder an und verstauen Sie den Schlüssel (29) wieder.
6.Rimuovere la vite (28) per rimuovere la chi- 8.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (31) con la chiave (29) per regolare l'altezza della finisher docu-
ave (29). menti.
7.Allentare le 2 viti (30) sulla parte anteriore Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso orario si solleva la finisher documenti, mentre ruotan-
destra e posteriore destra della finisher doc- dolo in senso antiorario si abbassa la finisher documenti.
umenti. 9.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (30) e riporre la chiave (29).
6.取下螺丝 (28) 以便拆下扳手 (29)。 8.使用扳手 (29) 旋转调节螺栓 (31)，以调节装订器的高度。
7.拧松装订器右前侧与右后侧的各 2 颗螺丝 将调节螺栓向顺时针方向旋转，装订器的高度升高，逆时针方向旋转则装订器的高度降低。
(30)。 9.拧紧各 2 颗螺丝 (30)，按原样安装扳手 (29)。
6.나사 (28) 1 개를 빼고 , 스패너 (29) 를 떼어 8.스패너 (29) 로 조정 볼트 (31) 를 돌려 문서 피니셔의 높이를 조정한다 .
냅니다 . 조정 볼트를 시계방향으로 돌리면 문서 피니셔의 높이가 높아지고 , 반 시계방향으로 돌리면 낮
7.문서 피니셔 우측 앞과 뒤의 나사 (30) 각 2 아 집니다 .
개를 느슨하게 합니다 . 9.나사 (30) 각 2 개를 조이고 스패너 (29) 를 원래 자리에 장착합니다 .
6.ビス (28)1 本を外し、スパナー(29) を取り 8.スパナー(29) で調整ボルト (31) を回し、
ドキュメントフィニッシャーの高さを調整する。
外す。 調整ボルトを時計方向に回すとドキュメントフィニッシャーの高さが高くなり、反時計方向に回
7.ドキュメントフィニッシャー右前と右後の すと低くなる。
ビス (30) 各 2 本を緩める。 9.ビス (30) 各 2 本を締め付け、
スパナー(29) を元通り取り付ける。
17
32
33 35
34
10.If the distances between the document fin- 11.Loosen the 2 screws (34) on the front left 12.Turn the adjustment bolts (35) with a Philips-
isher and the machine (32, 33) are unequal, and on the rear left of the document finisher. head screwdriver to adjust the height of the
use the procedure below to adjust the spac- document finisher.
ing. Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts
the document finisher, and turning it counter-
clockwise lowers the document finisher.
10.Si les distances entre le finisseur de docu- 11.Desserrer les 2 vis (34) du côté avant 12.Faire tourner les boulons de réglage (35) à
ment et la machine (32, 33) sont inégales, gauche et arrière gauche du finisseur de l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme pour ajuster
régler l'espacement en procédant de la document. la hauteur du finisseur de document.
manière suivante. Tourner le boulon de réglage dans le sens
horloger pour lever le finisseur de document,
et dans le sens contraire au sens horloger
pour le descendre.
10.Si las distancias entre el finalizador de docu- 11.Afloje los 2 tornillos (34) en los lados izqui- 12. Gire los pernos de ajuste (35) con un destornillador
mentos y la máquina (32, 33) no son erdo frontal e izquierdo posterior del finaliza- de cabeza Philips para ajustar la altura del finaliza-
dor de documentos.
iguales, utilice el siguiente procedimiento dor de documentos.
Al girar el perno de ajuste en la dirección de las
para ajustar la separación. manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las
manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de documen-
tos.
10.Falls die Abstände zwischen dem Finisher 11.Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben (34) vorne links 12. Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben (35) mit einem
und dem Gerät (32, 33) ungleich sind, führen und hinten links am Finisher. Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein, um die Höhe
Sie die unten angegebenen Schritte aus, um des Finishers zu korrigieren.
den Abstand zu korrigieren. Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzei-
gersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, während
er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn
abgesenkt wird.
10.Se le distanze tra la finisher documenti e la 11.Allentare le 2 viti (34) sulla parte anteriore 12.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (35) con un
macchina (32, 33) sono diverse, attenersi sinistra e posteriore sinistra della finisher cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips per
alla sottostante procedura per regolare la documenti. regolare l'altezza della finisher documenti.
spaziatura. Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso
orario si solleva la finisher documenti, men-
tre ruotandolo in senso antiorario si abbassa
la finisher documenti.
10.装订器与机器的间隙 (32、33) 不等时，按以 11.拧松装订器左前侧与左后侧的各 2 颗螺丝 12.使用十字螺丝刀旋转调节螺栓 (35)，以调节
下步骤进行调节。 (34)。 装订器的高度。
将调节螺栓向顺时针方向旋转，装订器的高
度升高，逆时针方向旋转则装订器的高度降
低。
10.문서 피니셔와 본체의 거리 (32, 33) 가 동일 11.문서 피니셔 좌측 앞과 뒤의 나사 (34) 각 2 12.플러스 드라이버로 조정 볼트 (35) 를 돌려
하지 않는 경우 아래의 절차에 따라 간격을 개를 느슨하게 합니다 . 문서 피니셔 높이를 조정합니다 .
조정합니다 . 조정 볼트를 시계방향으로 돌리면 문서 피니
셔의 높이가 높아지고 , 반 시계방향으로 돌
리면 낮아 집니다 .
10.ドキュメントフィニッシャーと機械本体の 11.ドキュメントフィニッシャー左前と左後の 12.プラスドライバーで調整ボルト (35) を回
間隔（32、33）
が等しくない場合は、以下の手 ビス (34) 各 2 本を緩める。 し、ドキュメントフィニッシャーの高さを調
順で調整を行う。 整する。
調整ボルトを時計方向に回すとドキュメン
トフィニッシャーの高さが高くなり、反時計
方向に回すと低くなる。
18
13.Retighten each of the 2 screws (34).
14.Reinstall the foot cover (25) and lower rear
cover (27).
13.Resserrer les 2 vis (34).
14.Reposer le couvercle du pied (25) et le cou-
vercle arrière inférieur (27).
13.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos (34).
14.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta de la pata (25) y
la cubierta posterior inferior (27).
13.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben (34) nach.
14.Setzen Sie die Fußabdeckung (25) und die
untere hintere Abdeckung (27) wieder ein.
13.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (34).
14.Reinstallare la copertura del piede (25) e il
coperchio inferiore posteriore (27).
13.拧紧各 2 颗螺丝 (34)。
14.按原样安装脚座盖板 (25)、后部下盖板
(27)。
13.나사 (34) 각 2 개를 조입니다 .
14.풋커버 (25), 뒤 하커버 (27) 를 원래대로 제
거합니다 .
13.ビス (34) 各 2 本を締め付ける。
14.フットカバー(25)、 後下カバー(27) を元通
りに取り付ける。
19
78.5mm±2.5
158mm±2.5
Adjusting the stapling position
1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
2.Make a test copy using staple mode (double stapled).
3.Check whether the stapling position is off-center. If the staple position is off-center, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value> 78.5 mm ±2.5 mm from the center of the paper
Ajustement de la position d'agrafage
1.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
2.Procéder à une copie d'essai en mode agrafage (double agrafage).
3.Vérifier que la position d'agrafage n'est pas en décalage.Si la position d'agrafage est décalée, la régler en procédant de la manière suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 78,5 mm ±2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille de papier.
Ajuste de la posición de grapado
1.Conecte el enchufe de la máquina al receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal de la máquina.
2.Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de grapado (grapado doble).
3.Compruebe si la posición de grapado está descentrada.Si la posición de grapado está descentrada, realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
posición.
<Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Justage der Heftposition
1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gerät am Hauptschalter ein.
2.Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus (doppelt geheftet).
3.Prüfen Sie, ob die Heftposition außermittig ist.Falls die Heftposition außermittig ist, müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
<Bezugswert> 78,5 mm ±2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
Regolazione della posizione di pinzatura
1.Collegare la spina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere l’interruttore di alimentazione della macchina.
2.Eseguire una copia di prova utilizzando la modalità di spillatura con punti metallici (spillatura doppia).
3.Verificare che la posizione di spillatura non sia fuori centro.Se la posizione di spillatura è fuori centro, seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare
la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm dal centro del foglio
调节装订位置
1.将机器上的电源插头插入电源插座中，打开主电源开关。
2.在装订模式（2 点固定）下进行测试复印。
3.确认装订位置的中心偏差。装订位置偏离中心时，按以下步骤进行调节。
＜基准值＞ 距离纸张中心 78.5mm± 2.5mm
스테이플 위치 조정
1.본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
2.스테이플 모드（2 곳）에서 시험복사를 합니다 .
3.스테이플 위치의 센터 어긋남을 확인합니다 . 스테이플 위치가 중심에서 벗어난 경우다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 78.5mm± 2.5mm
ステープル位置の調整
1.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
2.ステープルモード（2 箇所止め）
でテストコピーを行う。
3.ステープル位置のセンターずれを確認する。 ステープル位置が中心からずれていた場合、
次の手順で調整を行う。
＜基準値＞ 用紙センターより 78.5mm± 2.5mm
20
(a) (b)
4.Set maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Staple HP. 6.Perform a test copy.
5.Adjust the values. 7.Repeat steps 4 to 6 until the staple position is within the reference
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): Increase value.
the setting value. <Reference value> 78.5 mm ±2.5 mm from the center of the paper
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b):
Decrease the setting value.
4.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Staple 6.Effectuer une copie de test.
HP. 7.Recommencer les étapes 4 à 6 jusqu'à ce que la position d'agrafe soit
5.Régler les valeurs. conforme à la valeur de référence
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'avant de la machine (a): aug- <Valeur de référence> 78,5 mm ±2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
menter la valeur de réglage. de papier.
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'arrière de la machine (b): réduire
la valeur de réglage.
4.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Staple 6.Haga una copia de prueba.
HP. 7.Repita los pasos 4 a 6 hasta que la posición de grapado se encuentre
5.Ajuste los valores. dentro del valor de referencia.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la <Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm del centro del papel
máquina (a): aumente el valor de configuración.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte pos-
terior de la máquina (b): disminuya el valor de configuración.
4.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und 6.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
Staple HP. 7.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 6, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
5.Die Werte einstellen. des Bezugswerts liegt.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts (a) abgesta- <Bezugswert> 78,5 mm ±2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
pelt wird: Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts (b) abgestapelt
wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.
4.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Sta- 6.Eseguire una copia di prova.
ple HP. 7.Ripetere i passi 4 to 6 finché la posizione di spillatura risulta all'interno
5.Regolare i valori. del valore di riferimento.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte anteriore della mac- <Valore di riferimento> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm dal centro del foglio
china (a): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte posteriore della mac-
china (b): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.
4.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Staple HP。 6.进行测试复印。
5.调整设定值。 7.重复步骤 4 ～ 6，直到装订位置在基准范围内为止。
装订位置向机器前部偏移时 (a)：调高设定值。 ＜基准值＞ 距离纸张中心 78.5mm± 2.5mm
装订位置向机器后部偏移时 (b)：调低设定值。
4.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 세트하고 Finisher, Staple HP 를 선택합니 6.시험복사를 합니다 .
다. 7.스테이플 위치가 기준치내가 될 때까지 순서 4 ～ 6 을 반복합니다 .
5.설정치를 조정합니다 . ＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 78.5mm± 2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기앞측으로 벗어난 경우 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 .
스테이플 위치가 기기뒷측으로 벗어난 경우 (b)：설정치를 내입니다 .
4.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Staple HP を選択す 6.テストコピーを行う。
る。 7.ステープル位置が基準値内になるまで、手順 4 ～ 6 を繰り返す。
5.設定値を調整する。 ＜基準値＞ 用紙センターより 78.5mm± 2.5mm
ステープル位置が機械前側にずれている場合 (a)：設定値を上げる。
ステープル位置が機械後側にずれている場合 (b)：設定値を下げる。
21
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR
CENTER-FOLDING UNIT
G
C I P
B H
E
R
A O
D F K L M N
J Q
E. Front side cover ......................................... 1 L. M4 × 10 screw (black)................................ 2
English
F. Rear side cover.......................................... 1 M. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 4
Supplied parts G. Output stock tray........................................ 1 N. Lock plate .................................................. 2
A. Center-Folding unit .................................... 1 H. Output tray ................................................. 1 O. Binding band.............................................. 1
B. Front rail .................................................... 1 I. Relay paper conveying unit ....................... 1 P. Guide ......................................................... 1
C. Rear rail ..................................................... 1 J. Pin.............................................................. 1 Q. D7 label...................................................... 1
D. Output stopper........................................... 1 K. M4 × 8 screw ............................................11 R. Operation label .......................................... 1
E. Capot latéral avant..................................... 1 L. Vis M4 × 10 (noire) .................................... 2
Français
F. Capot latéral arrière ................................... 1 M. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 4
Pièces fournies G. Plateau de sortie du papier........................ 1 N. Plaque de verrouillage ............................... 2
A. Plieuse....................................................... 1 H. Plateau de sortie........................................ 1 O. Collier de fixation ....................................... 1
B. Glissière avant........................................... 1 I. Unité de transport du papier de relais........ 1 P. Guide ......................................................... 1
C. Glissière arrière ......................................... 1 J. Goupille...................................................... 1 Q. Étiquette D7 ............................................... 1
D. Butée de sortie .......................................... 1 K. Vis M4 × 8.................................................11 R. Étiquette de fonctionnement ...................... 1
E. Cubierta lateral frontal ............................... 1 L. Tornillo M4 × 10 (negro)............................. 2
Español
F. Cubierta lateral posterior ........................... 1 M. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 4
Partes suministradas G. Bandeja de recolección de papel de salida... 1 N. Placa de cierre........................................... 2
A. Unidad de plegado .................................... 1 H. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 O. Correa de sujeción..................................... 1
B. Carril frontal ............................................... 1 I. Unidad de transporte de papel por relevador ... 1 P. Guía ........................................................... 1
C. Carril posterior ........................................... 1 J. Pasador ..................................................... 1 Q. Etiqueta D7 ................................................ 1
D. Tope de salida ........................................... 1 K. Tornillo M4 × 8 ..........................................11 R. Etiqueta de funcionamiento ....................... 1
E. Vordere Seitenabdeckung ......................... 1 L. M4 × 10 Schraube (schwarz)..................... 2
Deutsch
F. Hintere Seitenabdeckung .......................... 1 M. M4 × 12 Schraube ..................................... 4
Gelieferte Teile G. Ausgabestapelfach .................................... 1 N. Sperrplatte ................................................. 2
A. Mittenfalteinheit ......................................... 1 H. Ausgabefach.............................................. 1 O. Schellenband ............................................. 1
B. Vordere Schiene ........................................ 1 I. Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit................. 1 P. Führung ..................................................... 1
C. Hintere Schiene ......................................... 1 J. Stift............................................................. 1 Q. D7 Aufkleber .............................................. 1
D. Ausgabeanschlag ...................................... 1 K. M4 × 8 Schraube ......................................11 R. Bedienungsaufkleber ................................. 1
E. Coperchio laterale anteriore ...................... 1 L. Vite M4 × 10 (nera) .................................... 2
Italiano
F. Coperchio laterale posteriore..................... 1 M. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 4
Parti di fornitura G. Vassoio di uscita stoccaggio ...................... 1 N. Piastra di bloccaggio.................................. 2
A. Unità di piegatura centrale......................... 1 H. Vassoio di uscita ........................................ 1 O. Fascetta di legatura ................................... 1
B. Rotaia anteriore ......................................... 1 I. Unità relay di trasporto carta...................... 1 P. Guida ......................................................... 1
C. Rotaia posteriore ....................................... 1 J. Perno ......................................................... 1 Q. Etichetta D7 ............................................... 1
D. Fermo di uscita .......................................... 1 K. Vite M4 × 8................................................11 R. Etichetta di operazione .............................. 1
简体中文 E. 前部侧盖板 ...........................1 L. M4×10 螺丝（黒）......................2
F. 后部侧盖板 ...........................1 M. M4×12 螺丝 ...........................4
附属品 G. 堆纸托盘 .............................1 N. 锁定板 ...............................2
A. 中缝装订－折页单元................... 1 H. 排纸托盘 .............................1 O. 束线带 ...............................1
B. 前部导轨............................. 1 I. 中间搬运单元 .........................1 P. 导板 .................................1
C. 后部导轨............................. 1 J. 销钉 .................................1 Q. D7 标签 ...............................1
D. 排纸挡板............................. 1 K. M4×8 螺丝 ...........................11 R. 操作标签 .............................1
한국어 E. 사이드 커버 앞.................................... 1 L. 나사 M4×10（흑）............................... 2
F. 사이드 커버 뒤.................................... 1 M. 나사 M4×12 ....................................... 4
동봉품 G. 배지 저장트레이.................................. 1 N. 잠금 플레이트..................................... 2
A. 접기 유니트........................................ 1 H. 배지 트레이........................................ 1 O. 결속 밴드........................................... 1
B. 레일 앞.............................................. 1 I. 중계 반송유니트.................................. 1 P. 가이드............................................... 1
C. 레일 뒤.............................................. 1 J. 핀..................................................... 1 Q. D7 라벨 ............................................. 1
D. 배지 스토퍼........................................ 1 K. 나사 M4×8....................................... 11 R. 조작라벨............................................ 1
日本語 E. サイドカバー前 .......................1 L. ビス M4×10（黒）.......................2
F. サイドカバー後 .......................1 M. ビス M4×12 ...........................4
同梱品 G. 排紙ストックトレイ ...................1 N. ロックプレート .......................2
A. 中折りユニット....................... 1 H. 排紙トレイ ...........................1 O. 結束バンド ...........................1
B. レール前............................. 1 I. 中継搬送ユニット .....................1 P. ガイド ...............................1
C. レール後............................. 1 J. ピン .................................1 Q. D7 ラベル .............................1
D. 排紙ストッパー....................... 1 K. ビス M4×8 ...........................11 R. 操作ラベル ...........................1
1
1
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning Procedure 1.Open the upper front cover (1) of the docu-
material from supplied parts. Before installing the center-folding unit, turn the ment finisher.
MFP’s main power switch off and unplug the 2.Remove the screw (2) and open the lower
power cable from the power supply. front cover (3).
Install the document finisher, and then install the (NOTICE)
center-folding unit. Discard the screw (2) and do not fasten the
lower front cover (3).
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé- Procédure 1.Ouvrir le couvercle avant supérieur (1) du
sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des Avant d’installer la plieuse mettre l’interrupteur retoucheur de document.
pièces fournies. d’alimentation principal du MFP hors tension et 2.Déposer la vis (2) et ouvrir le couvercle
débrancher le câble d’alimentation de la prise avant inférieur (3).
de courant. (AVIS)
Installer le finisseur de document, puis installer Jeter la vis (2) et ne pas fixer le capot inféri-
la plieuse. eur avant (3).
Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o Procedimiento 1.Abra la cubierta frontal superior (1) del final-
material amortiguador de las partes suministra- Antes de instalar la unidad de plegado, desco- izador de documentos.
das. necte el interruptor de alimentación principal de 2.Quite el tornillo (2) y abra la cubierta frontal
la MFP y desenchufe el cable de alimentación inferior (3).
de la toma de corriente. (AVISO)
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y Descarte el tornillo (2) y no ajuste la cubierta
luego instale la unidad de plegado. frontal inferior (3).
Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dämpfungs- Verfahren 1.Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung (1)
material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Mittenfalteinheit des Dokument-Finishers.
Teilen. beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der 2.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (2) und öffnen Sie
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und die untere vordere Abdeckung (3).
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist. (HINWEIS)
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und Entsorgen Sie die Schraube (2) und befestigen
dann erst die Mittenfalteinheit an. Sie nicht die untere vordere Abdeckung (3).
Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il Procedura 1.Aprire il coperchio superiore anteriore (1)
materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite. Prima di installare l’unità di piegatura centrale, della finitrice di documenti.
assicurarsi che l’interruttore principale della 2.Rimuovere la vite (2) ed aprire il coperchio
fotocopiatrice sia spento e che il cavo di alimen- inferiore anteriore (3).
tazione non sia inserito nella presa. (NOTIFICA)
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere Eliminare le viti (2) e non fissare il coperchio
all’installazione dell’unità di piegatura centrale. inferiore anteriore (3).
如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭 安装步骤 1.打开装订器的前部上盖板（1）。
下。 安装中缝装订 — 折页单元前，请关闭 MFP 的主电 2.拆除 1 颗螺丝（2），打开前部下盖板（3）。
源开关并从电源拔下电源线。 ( 注意 )
安装装订器，然后安装中缝装订 — 折页单元。 废除螺丝（2），前部下盖板（3）不需固定。
동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경 장착순서 1.문서 피니셔 앞 상커버 (1) 를 엽니다 .
우에는 반드시 제거할 것 . 중철 유니트를 설치할 때에는 반드시 MFP 본체 2.나사 (2) 1 개를 제거하고 앞 하커버 (3) 를
의 주전원 스위치를 OFF 로 하고 전원플러그를 엽니다 .
뺀 후 작업을 할 것 . ( 주의 )
문서 피니셔를 설치 후 , 중철 유니트를 설치 할 나사 (2) 는 폐기하고 전면 아래커버 (3) 는
것. 고정하지 않습니다 .
同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合 取付手順 1.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの前上カバー
は、
必ず取り外すこと。 中折りユニットを設置するときは、必ず MFP 本 (1) を開く。
体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
電源プラグを 2.ビス (2)1 本を外し、前下カバー(3) を開く。
抜いてから作業すること。 （注意）
ドキュメントフィニッシャーを設置後、中折り ビス (2) は廃棄とし、前下カバー(3) は固定
ユニットを設置すること。 しない。
2
6
5
9
4
6
7 8
6
4 5 4 8
3.Remove the 2 screws (4) and remove the 4.Remove the 3 screws (6) and remove the 5.Remove 2 screws (8) and remove the lower
foot cover (5). lower rear cover (7). middle cover (9).
3.Déposer les 2 vis (4) puis le couvercle du 4.Déposer les 3 vis (6) puis le couvercle arri- 5.Déposer les 2 vis (8) et le couvercle intermé-
pied (5). ère inférieur (7). diaire inférieur (9).
3.Quite los 2 tornillos (4) y quite la cubierta de 4.Quite los 3 tornillos (6) y quite la cubierta 5.Quite los 2 tornillos (8) y quite la cubierta
la pata (5). posterior inferior (7). intermedia inferior (9).
3.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (4) und 4.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (6) und 5.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (8) und
nehmen Sie die Fußabdeckung (5) ab. nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung nehmen Sie die untere mittlere Abdeckung
(7) ab. (9) ab.
3.Rimuovere le 2 viti (4) e quindi rimuovere la 4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (6) e quindi rimuovere il 5.Rimuovere le 2 viti (8) e quindi rimuovere il
copertura del piede (5). coperchio inferiore posteriore (7). pannello centrale inferiore (9).
3.拆除 2 颗螺丝（4），拆下脚座盖板（5）。 4.拆除 3 颗螺丝（6），拆下后部下盖板（7）。 5.拆除 2 颗螺钉 (8)，拆下中部下盖板 (9)。
3.나사 (4) 2 개를 제거하고 , 풋커버 (5) 를 제 4.나사 (6) 3 개를 제거하고 , 뒤 하커버 (7) 를 5.나사 (8) 2 개를 제거하고 중하 커버 (9) 를
거합니다 . 제거합니다 . 떼어 냅니다 .
3.ビス (4)2 本を外し、フットカバー(5) を取 4.ビス (6)3 本を外し、後下カバー(7) を取り 5.ビス (8)2 本を外し、中下カバー(9) を取り
り外す。 外す。 外す。
3
12
M
10 M
C
13
K
N
B M
11 M
6.Install the lock plates (N) on the front and 7.Place the hook (11) of the front rail (B) on the 9.Install the rear rail (C) at the rear of the doc-
rear supports using an M4 × 8 screw (K) notch (10) at the front of the document fin- ument finisher using 2 M4 × 12 screws (M) in
each. isher, at the same time inserting the projec- the same way.
tion (13) on the front rail (B) in the hole (12)
in the document finisher.
8.Fix the front rail (B) using 2 M4 × 12 screws
(M).
6.Monter les plaques de verrouillage (N) sur 7.Placer le crochet (11) de la glissière avant 9.Monter la glissière arrière (C) au dos du
les supports avant et arrière en procédant à (B) dans l'encoche (10) à l'avant du retou- retoucheur de document en procédant de la
l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (K) dans les deux cheur de document tout en insérant la saillie même façon et à l'aide de 2 vis M4 × 12 (M).
cas. (13) de la glisière avant (B) dans le trou (12)
du retoucheur de document.
8.Fixer la glissière avant (B) à l'aide de 2 vis
M4 × 12 (M).
6.Instale las placas de cierre (N) en los 7.Coloque el gancho (11) del carril frontal (B) 9.Instale el carril posterior (C) en la parte pos-
soportes frontal y posterior usando un tor- en la muesca (10) de la parte frontal del final- terior del finalizador de documentos usando
nillo M4 × 8 (K) en cada uno. izador de documentos al mismo tiempo que 2 tornillos M4 × 12 (M) de la misma forma.
inserta el resalto (13) del carril frontal (B) en
el orificio (12) del finalizador de documentos.
8.Fije el carril frontal (B) usando 2 tornillos M4
× 12 (M).
6.Montieren Sie die Sperrplatten (N) an den 7. Setzen Sie den Haken (11) der vorderen Schiene 9.Montieren Sie die hintere Schiene (C) auf
vorderen und hinteren Stützen mit jeweils (B) in die Aussparung (10) vorne am Dokument- gleiche Weise mit 2 M4 × 12 Schrauben (M)
einer M4 × 8 Schraube (K). Finisher ein, und setzen Sie dabei auch den Vor- an der Rückseite des Dokument-Finishers.
sprung (13) an der vorderen Schiene (B) in die Öff-
nung (12) des Dokument-Finishers ein.
8. Befestigen Sie die vordere Schiene (B) mit den 2
M4 × 12 Schrauben (M).
6.Installare le piastre di bloccaggio (N) sui 7.Posizionare il gancio (11) della rotaia anteriore 9.Installare la rotaia posteriore (C) alla parte
supporti anteriore e posteriore utilizzando (B) sull'incavo (10) alla parte anteriore della fini- posteriore della finitrice di documenti utiliz-
una vite M4 × 8 (K) ciascuna. trice di documenti, contemporaneamente zando 2 viti M4 × 12 (M) alla stessa maniera.
inserire la la sporgenza (13) sulla rotaia ante-
riore (B) nel foro (12) nella finitrice di documenti.
8.Fissare la rotaia anteriore (B) utilizzando 2
viti M4 × 12 (M).
6.使用各 1 颗 M4×8(K) 螺钉将锁定板 (N) 安装 7.将前部导轨 (B) 的挂钩 (11) 嵌入装订器前部 9.按相同方法，使用 2 颗 M4×12(M) 螺钉将后
在前后的支柱上。 的缺口 (10)，同时将前部导轨 (B) 的卡销 部导轨 (C) 安装在装订器后部。
(13) 插入到装订器的孔 (12) 中。
8.使用 2 颗 M4×12(M) 螺钉来固定前部导轨
(B)。
6.잠금 플레이트 (N) 를 앞뒤 지주에 나사 7.문서 피니셔 앞의 이음부분 (10) 에 레일 앞 9.같은 방식으로 나사 M4×12(M) 2 개로 문서
M4×8(K) 각 1 개로 장착합니다 . (B) 의 후크 (11) 를 걸고 동시에 문서 피니셔 피니셔 뒤에 레일 뒤 (C) 를 장착합니다 .
구멍 (12) 에 레일 앞 (B) 의 보스 (13) 를 넣
습니다 .
8.나사 M4×12(M) 2 개로 레일 앞 (B) 을 고정
합니다 .
6.ロックプレート (N) を前後の支柱にビス 7.ドキュメントフィニッシャー前の切り欠き 9.同様に、ビス M4×12(M)2 本で、ドキュメント
M4×8(K) 各 1 本で取り付ける。 (10) にレール前 (B) のフック (11) を引っ フィニッシャー後にレール後 (C) を取り付
かけ、 同時にドキュメントフィニッシャーの ける。
穴 (12) にレール前 (B) のボス (13) を入れ
る。
8.ビス M4×12(M)2 本でレール前 (B) を固定す
る。
4
17
14
A
18
15
16
10.Place the left rollers (14) at the front and rear of the center-folding unit (A) on the tracks (15) on the inner sides of the rails, and roll in the direction
shown. The middle rollers (16) will roll onto the rails.
11.Insert the center-folding unit (A) into the document finisher along the rails.
(NOTICE)
Insert without removing the fixing tape (18) for the wire guide (17). (The fixing tape (18) is removed at step 15)
10.Disposer les rouleaux gauche (14) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la plieuse (A) sur les voies (15) de côté interne des glissières et faire rouler dans la direc-
tion indiquée. Les rouleaux intermédiaires (16) vont se placer d'eux-mêmes sur les glissières.
11.Insérer la plieuse (A) dans le retoucheur de document le long des glissières.
(AVIS)
Insérer sans enlever la bande adhésive de fixation (18) pour le guide câble (17). (La bande adhésive de fixation (18) est enlevée à l'étape 15).
10.Coloque los rodillos izquierdos (14) en las partes frontal y posterior de la unidad de plegado (A) en las pistas (15) de los lados internos de los carriles
y hágalos rodar en la dirección de la ilustración. Los rodillos intermedios (16) rodarán sobre los carriles.
11.Inserte la unidad de plegado (A) en el finalizador de documentos a lo largo de los carriles.
(AVISO)
Inserte sin quitar la cinta de fijación (18) de la guía para el cable (17). (La cinta de fijación (18) se quita en el paso 15.)
10.Setzen Sie die linken Rollen (14) an der Vorderseite und Rückseite der Mittenfalteinheit (A) auf die Bahnen (15) an den Innenseiten der Schienen, und
rollen Sie sie in der dargestellten Richtung. Die mittleren Rollen (16) rollen nun auf die Schienen.
11.Schieben Sie die Mittenfalteinheit (A) entlang den Schienen in den Dokument-Finisher ein.
(HINWEIS)
Schieben Sie sie ein, ohne das Klebeband (18) für die Kabelführung (17) zu entfernen. (Das Klebeband (18) wird bei Schritt 15 entfernt.)
10.Posizionare i rulli di sinistra (14) alla parte anteriore e posteriore dell'unità di piegatura centrale (A) sulle piste (15) sui lati interni delle rotaie, e farli
scorrere nella direzione mostrata. I rulli intermedi (16) scorreranno sulle rotaie.
11.Inserire l'unità di piegatura centrale (A) nella finitrice di documenti lungo le rotaie.
(NOTIFICA)
Inserire senza rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio (18) per la guida cavi (17). (Il nastro di fissaggio (18) viene rimosso al punto 15)
10.将中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 前后的左侧滑轮 (14) 放在导轨内侧的转动部 (15) 上，并按箭头方向转动。将中间滑轮 (16) 插入到导轨上。
11.将中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 沿着导轨插入到装订器中。
( 注意 )
插入时不需剥除电线导板（17）的固定胶带（18）。（在步骤 15 时剥除固定胶带（18））
10.접기 유니트 (A) 의 앞뒤에 있는 좌측 코로 (14) 를 레일 내측에 있는 굴림부 (15) 에 얹고 화살표 방향으로 굴립니다 . 중간코로 (16) 가 레일에 삽입됩
니다 .
11.접기 유니트 (A) 를 레일에 붙여 문서 피니셔에 삽입합니다 .
( 주의 )
전선 가이드 (17) 의 고정 테이프 (18) 를 떼어 내지 않고 삽입할 것 . （고정 테이프 (18) 는 순서 15 에서 떼어 냅니다 .）
10.中折りユニット (A) の前後にある左コロ (14) を、レールより内側にある転がし部 (15) に乗せ、矢印方向に転がす。
中間コロ (16) がレールに挿入さ
れる。
11.中折りユニット (A) をレールに沿ってドキュメントフィニッシャーに挿入する。
（注意）
電線ガイド (17) の固定テープ (18) を剥がさずに挿入すること。
（固定テープ (18) は手順 15 で剥がす）
5
20
20
22
23 K
K
21 21
19 I
A
12.Release the lock lever (19) and pull out the 13.Align the holes (21) in the relay paper conveying unit (I) with the 2 projections (20) on the docu-
center-folding unit (A) to the left of the docu- ment finisher. Install so that the lip (22) on the top frame of the relay paper conveying unit rests on
ment finisher. the document finisher’s frame (23).
14.Install the relay paper conveying unit (I) using 4 M4 × 8 screws (K).
12.Libérer le levier de verrouillage (19) et sortir 13.Aligner les trous (21) de l'unité de transport de relais (I) avec les 2 saillies (20) du retoucheur de
la plieuse (A) par la gauche du retoucheur document. Procéder de sorte que la lèvre (22) du châssis supérieur de l'unité de transport de
de document. relais repose sur le châssis du retoucheur de document (23).
14.Installer l'unité de transport de relais (I) à l'aide de 4 vis M4 × 8 (K).
12.Libere la palanca de bloqueo (19) y extraiga 13.Alinee los orificios (21) de la unidad de transporte de papel (I) con los dos resaltos (20) del final-
la unidad de plegado (A) hacia la izquierda izador de documentos. Instale de forma tal que el reborde (22) del marco superior de la unidad
del finalizador de documentos. de transporte de papel apoye en el marco del finalizador de documentos (23).
14.Instale la unidad de transporte de papel por relevador (I) usando 4 tornillos M4 × 8 (K).
12.Lösen Sie den Verriegelungshebel (19) und 13.Richten Sie die Öffnungen (21) der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit (I) auf die 2 Vorsprünge (20)
ziehen Sie die Mittenfalteinheit (A) zur linken des Dokument-Finishers aus. Montieren Sie so, dass die Lippe (22) am oberen Rahmen der
Seite des Dokument-Finishers heraus. eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit auf dem Rahmen des Dokument-Finishers (23) ruht.
14.Montieren Sie die eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit (I) mit 4 M4 × 8 Schrauben (K).
12.Rilasciare la leva di blocco (19) e quindi 13.Allineare i fori (21) nell'unità relay di trasporto carta (I) con le 2 sporgenze (20) sulla finitrice di
estrarre l'unità di piegatura centrale (A) alla documenti. Installare in modo che il bordo (22) sulla struttura superiore dell'unità relay di tra-
sinistra della finitrice di documenti. sporto carta rimanga sulla struttura (23) della finitrice di documenti.
14.Installare l'unità relay di trasporto carta (I) utilizzando 4 viti M4 × 8 (K).
12.解除锁定杆（19），将中缝装订 - 折页单元 13.将装订器的 2 处突出部 (20) 与中间搬运单元 (I) 的孔 (21) 对齐。将中间搬运单元上部框架的弯
（A）从文档整理器的左侧拉出。 曲部 (22) 放在装订器的框架上 (23) 以进行安装。
14.使用 4 颗 M4×8(K) 螺钉来安装后中间搬运单元 (I)。
12.잠금레버 (19) 를 해제하고 중철 유니트 (A) 13.문서 피니셔의 돌기 (20) 2 개로 중계반송 유니트 (I) 의 구멍 (21) 을 맞춥니다 . 중계반송 유니트
를 문서 피니셔 좌측으로 이동시킵니다 . 상부 플레임의 구부러진 부분 (22) 이 문서 피니셔의 플레임 (23) 에 얹히게 장착합니다 .
14.나사 M4×8(K) 4 개로 중계반송 유니트 (I) 를 장착합니다 .
12.ロックレバー(19) を解除し、中折りユニッ 13.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (20)2 個に中継搬送ユニット (I) の穴 (21) を合わせる。中
ト (A) をドキュメントフィニッシャー左側 継搬送ユニット上部フレームの折曲がり部 (22) がドキュメントフィニッシャーのフレーム
へ引き出す。 (23) に乗るように取り付ける。
14.ビス M4×8(K)4 本で、
中継搬送ユニット (I) を取り付ける。
6
J
25
17
17
24
15.Remove the fixing tape (18) for the wire guide (17) and insert the pin (J) into the wire guide (17), with the 2 projections (24) on either side of the frame
(25).
(NOTICE)
Insert the pin (J) to keep wires in the wire guide (17).
16.Screw the pin (J) into the document finisher to anchor the wire guide (17).
15.Enlever la bande adhésive de fixation (18) du guide câble (17) et insérer la goupille (J) dans le guide câble (17) avec les 2 saillies (24) de chaque côté
du bâti (25).
(AVIS)
Insérer la goupille (J) pour que les câbles demeurent dans le guide câble (17).
16.Visser la goupille (J) dans le retoucheur de document pour fixer le guide câble (17) en place.
15.Quite la cinta de fijación (18) de la guía para el cable (17) e inserte el pasador (J) en la guía para el cable (17) con los 2 resaltos (24) a cada lado del
marco (25).
(AVISO)
Inserte el pasador (J) para mantener los cables en la guía para el cable (17).
16.Atornille el pasador (J) en el finalizador de documentos para anclar la guía para el cable (17).
15.Entfernen Sie das Klebeband (18) für die Kabelführung (17) und stecken Sie die Rändelschraube (J) in die Kabelführung (17), wobei der Rahmen (25)
zwischen den 2 Vorsprüngen (24) liegen muss.
(HINWEIS)
Stecken Sie die Rändelschraube (J) ein, um die Kabel in der Kabelführung (17) zu halten.
16.Schrauben Sie die Rändelschraube (J) in den Dokument-Finisher, um die Kabelführung (17) zu verankern.
15.Rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio (18) per la guida cavi (17) e quindi inserire il perno (J) nella guida cavi (17), con le 2 sporgenze (24) su ciascun lato
della struttura (25).
(NOTIFICA)
Inserire il perno (J) per mantenere i cavi nella guida cavi (17).
16.Avvitare il perno (J) nella finitrice di documenti per ancorare la guida cavi (17).
15.剥除电线导板（17）的固定胶带（18），使框架（25）处于 2 个卡销（24）之间，将 1 个销子（J）从电线导板（17）上穿过。
( 注意 )
将销钉 (J) 穿过电线导板 (17) 时，注意避免电线露出电线导板 (17) 外。
16.将销钉 (J) 的螺纹部分安装到装订器上，以固定电线导板 (17)。
15.전선 가이드 (17) 의 고정 테이프 (18) 를 떼어 내고 보스 (24) 2 개의 사이에 프레임 (25) 이 들어 있는 상태에서 핀 (J) 1 개를 전선 가이드 (17) 에 통
과시킵니다 .
( 주의 )
핀 (J) 은 전선이 전선 가이드 (17) 에서 나오지 않도록 통하게 합니다 .
16.핀 (J) 의 나사부분을 문서 피니셔에 장착하고 전선 가이드 (17) 를 고정합니다 .
15.電線ガイド (17) の固定テープ (18) を剥がし、
ボス (24)2 本の間にフレーム (25) が入っている状態で、
ピン (J)1 本を電線ガイド (17) に通す。
（注意）
ピン (J) は電線が電線ガイド (17) から出ないように通す。
16.ピン (J) のネジ部分をドキュメントフィニッシャーに取り付け、電線ガイド (17) を固定する。
7
28 31
O 30
27
29
26 32
K
31
P
K
32 K
17.Install the ground wire (26) to the frame 19.Plug the 2 connectors (27) into the connec- 21.Align holes (32) at 2 locations in the guide
using an M4 × 8 screw (K). tors (28) on the document finisher. (P) with projections (31) on the document
18.Install the binding band (O) to the wires and 20.Plug the connector (29) into the connector finisher.
fit the band into the frame. (30) on the relay paper conveying unit (I). 22.Install the guide (P) on the document finisher
using 4 M4 × 8 screws (K).
17.Fixer le câble de terre (26) au châssis en 19.Enficher les 2 connecteurs (27) dans les 21.Aligner les trous (32) en 2 endroits du guide
procédant à l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (K). connecteurs (28) du retoucheur de docu- (P) avec les saillies (31) du retoucheur de
18.Monter le collier de fixation (O) sur les ment. document.
câbles et assujettir le collier au châssis. 20.Enficher le connecteur (29) dans le con- 22.Monter le guide (P) sur le retoucheur de doc-
necteur (30) de l'unité de transport de relais ument à l'aide de 4 vis M4 × 8 (K).
(I).
17.Instale el cable de conexión a tierra (26) en 19.Enchufe los 2 conectores (27) en los conec- 21.Alinee los orificios (32) de los 2 lugares de la
el marco usando un tornillo M4 × 8 (K). tores (28) del finalizador de documentos. guía (P) con los resaltos (31) del finalizador
18.Instale la correa de sujeción (O) en los 20.Enchufe el conector (29) en el conector (30) de documentos.
cables y coloque la correa en el marco. de la unidad de transporte de papel por rele- 22.Instale la guía (P) en el finalizador de docu-
vador (I). mentos usando 4 tornillos M4 × 8 (K).
17.Montieren Sie das Massekabel (26) mit einer 19.Verbinden Sie die 2 Steckverbinder (27) mit 21.Richten Sie die Öffnungen (32) an 2 Stellen
M4 × 8 Schraube (K) an den Rahmen. den Steckverbindern (28) des Dokument- in der Führung (P) auf die Vorsprünge (31)
18.Bringen Sie das Schellenband (O) an den Finishers. des Dokument-Finishers aus.
Kabeln an und setzen Sie das Band in den 20.Verbinden Sie den Steckverbinder (29) mit 22.Montieren Sie die Führung (P) mit 4 M4 × 8
Rahmen ein. dem Steckverbinder (30) der eingesetzten Schrauben (K) am Dokument-Finisher.
Papierfördereinheit (I).
17.Installare il cavo di terra (26) alla struttura 19.Inserire i 2 connettori (27) nei connettori (28) 21.Allineare i fori (32) alle 2 posizioni nella
utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (K). sulla finitrice di documenti. guida (P) con le sporgenze (31) sulla finitrice
18.Installare la fascetta di legatura (O) ai cavi e 20.Inserire il connettore (29) nel connettore (30) di documenti.
quindi fissare la fascetta nella struttura. sull'unità relay di trasporto carta (I). 22.Installare la guida (P) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti utilizzando 4 viti M4 × 8 (K).
17.使用 M4×8(K) 螺钉将装接地线 (26) 安装到 19.将 2 个连接器 (27) 与装订器的连接器 (28) 21.将装订器的 2 处突出部 (31) 与导板 (P) 的孔
框架上。 相连接。 (32) 对齐。
18.在电线上安装束线带 (O)，将束线带 (O) 嵌入 20.将连接器 (29) 与中间搬运单元 (H) 的连接器 22.使用 4 颗螺钉 M4×8(K) 将导板 (P) 安装到装
到框架上。 (30) 相连接。 订器上。
17.나사 M4×8(K) 로 접지선 (26) 을 플레임에 19.커넥터 (27) 2 개를 문서 피니셔의 커넥터 21.문서 피니셔의 돌기 (31) 2 곳을 가이드 (P)
장착합니다 . (28) 에 접속합니다 . 의 구멍 (32) 에 맞춥니다 .
18.전선에 결속 밴드 (O) 를 장착하고 플레임에 20.커넥터 (29) 를 중계 유니트 (I) 의 커넥터 22.나사 M4×8(K) 4 개로 문서 피니셔에 가이드
결속 밴드 (O) 를 꽂습니다 . (30) 에 접속합니다 . (P) 를 장착합니다 .
17.ビス M4×8(K) でアース線 (26) をフレーム 19.コネクター(27)2 個をドキュメントフィ 21.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (31)2
に取り付ける。 ニッシャーのコネクター(28) に接続する。 箇所にガイド (P) の穴 (32) に合わせる。
18.電線に結束バンド (O) を取り付け、フレーム 20.コネクター(29) を中継搬送ユニット (I) の 22.ビス M4×8(K)4 本でドキュメントフィニッ
に結束バンド (O) をはめ込む。 コネクター(30) に接続する。 シャーにガイド (P) を取り付ける。
8
33
F
A 37
L
35
L 36
A
34
23.Open the eject cover (33). 25.Engage the projection (36) and hook (37) on the rear side cover (F)
24.Engage the projection (34) and hook (35) on the front side cover (E) with the center-folding unit (A). Complete installation of the rear side
with the center-folding unit (A). Complete installation of the front side cover (F) using an M4 × 10 screw (black) (L).
cover (E) using an M4 × 10 screw (black) (L).
23.Ouvrir le capot d'éjection (33). 25.Engager la saillie (36) et le crochet (37) du capot latéral arrière (F)
24.Engager la saillie (34) et le crochet (35) du capot latéral avant (E) dans dans la plieuse (A). Finaliser l'installation du capot latéral arrière (F) à
la plieuse (A). Finaliser l'installation du capot latéral avant (E) à l'aide l'aide d'une vis M4 × 10 (noire) (L).
d'une vis M4 × 10 (noire) (L).
23.Abra la cubierta de expulsión (33). 25.Enganche el resalto (36) y el gancho (37) de la cubierta lateral poste-
24.Enganche el resalto (34) y el gancho (35) de la cubierta lateral frontal rior (F) con la unidad de plegado (A). Complete la instalación de la
(E) con la unidad de plegado (A). Complete la instalación de la cubierta cubierta lateral posterior (F) usando un tornillo M4 × 10 (negro) (L).
lateral frontal (E) usando un tornillo M4 × 10 (negro) (L).
23.Öffnen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung (33). 25.Hängen Sie den Vorsprung (36) und den Haken (37) der hinteren
24.Hängen Sie den Vorsprung (34) und den Haken (35) der vorderen Seitenabdeckung (F) in die Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. Befestigen Sie die
Seitenabdeckung (E) in die Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. Befestigen Sie die hintere Seitenabdeckung (F) mit einer M4 × 10 Schraube (schwarz)
vordere Seitenabdeckung (E) mit einer M4 × 10 Schraube (schwarz) (L).
(L).
23.Aprire il coperchio di espulsione carta (33). 25.Innestare la sporgenza (36) e il gancio (37) sul coperchio laterale pos-
24.Innestare la sporgenza (34) e il gancio (35) sul coperchio laterale ante- teriore (F) con l'unità di piegatura centrale (A). Completare l'installazi-
riore (E) con l'unità di piegatura centrale (A). Completare l'installazione one del coperchio laterale posteriore (F) utilizzando una vite M4 × 10
del coperchio laterale anteriore (E) utilizzando una vite M4 × 10 (nera) (nera) (L).
(L).
23.打开排纸盖板 (33)。 25.将后部侧盖板 (F) 的突出部 (36) 以及挂钩 (37) 嵌入到中缝装订－折页
24.将前部侧盖板 (E) 的突出部 (34) 以及挂钩 (35) 嵌入到中缝装订－折页 单元 (A) 中，使用 1 颗 M4×10（黒）(L) 螺钉来安装后部侧盖板 (F)。
单元 (A) 中，使用 1 颗 M4×10（黒）(L) 螺钉来安装前部侧盖板 (E)。
23.배출 커버 (33) 를 엽니다 . 25.사이드 커버 뒤 (F) 의 돌기 (36) 및 후크 (37) 를 접기 유니트 (A) 에 곶
24.사이드 커버 앞 (E) 의 돌기 (34) 및 후크 (35) 를 접기 유니트 (A) 에 꽂 습니다 . 나사 M4×10（흑）(L) 1 개로 사이드 커버 뒤 (F) 를 장착합니
습니다 . 나사 M4×10（흑）(L) 1 개로 사이드 커버 앞 (E) 을 장착합니 다.
다.
23.排出カバー(33) を開く。 25.サイドカバー後 (F) の突起 (36) およびフック (37) を、中折りユニッ
24.サイドカバー前 (E) の突起 (34) およびフック (35) を、
中折りユニッ ト (A) にはめ込む。
ト (A) にはめ込む。 ビス M4×10（黒）(L)1 本で、
サイドカバー後 (F) を取り付ける。
ビス M4×10（黒）(L)1 本で、サイドカバー前 (E) を取り付ける。
9
33
38
38
26.Insert the 2 pins (38) on the output tray (H) in the holes in the center-folding unit (A) to install the
tray.
27.Install the output stock tray (G) on the output tray (H).
28.Close the eject cover (33).
26.Insérer les 2 goupilles (38) du plateau de sortie (H) dans les trous de la plieuse (A) pour installer
le plateau.
27.Installer la butée de sortie du papier (G) sur le plateau de sortie (H).
28.Fermer le capot d'éjection (33).
26.Inserte los 2 pasadores (38) de la bandeja de salida (H) en los orificios de la unidad de plegado
(A) para instalar la bandeja.
27.Instale la bandeja de recolección de papel de salida (G) en la bandeja de salida (H).
28.Cierre la cubierta de expulsión (33).
26.Stecken Sie die 2 Rändelschrauben (38) des Ausgabefachs (H) in die Öffnungen der Mittenfal-
teinheit (A) ein, um das Fach zu installieren.
27.Bringen Sie das Ausgabestapelfach (G) am Ausgabefach (H) an.
28.Schließen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung (33).
26.Inserire i 2 perni (38) sul vassoio di uscita (H) nei fori sull'unità di piegatura centrale (A) per instal-
lare il vassoio.
27.Installare il vassoio di uscita stoccaggio (G) sul vassoio di uscita (H).
28.Chiudere il coperchio di esplusione carta (33).
26.将排纸托盘 (H) 的 2 根销钉 (38) 插入中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 的孔中，以安装排纸托盘 (H)。
27.将堆纸托盘 (G) 安装到排纸托盘 (H) 上。
28.关闭排纸盖板 (33)。
26.배지트레이 (H) 의 핀 (38) 2 개를 접기 유니트 (A) 의 구멍에 넣고 배지 트레이 (H) 를 장착합니다
.
27.배지 저장 트레이 (G) 를 배지 트레이 (H) 에 장착합니다 .
28.배출커버 (33) 를 닫습니다 .
26.排紙トレイ (H) のピン (38)2 本を中折りユニット (A) の穴に入れ、
排紙トレイ (H) を取り付け
る。
27.排紙ストックトレイ (G) を排紙トレイ (H) に取り付ける。
28.排出カバー(33) を閉じる。
10
40 41
A
40
39
39 D
Q
29.Insert the 2 projections (39) on the back of the output stopper (D) in the portions circled on the 30.Adhere the D7 label (Q) at the location
center-folding unit (A). shown in the figure.
Fit the 3 hooks (40) on the output stopper (D) in the holes (41) in the center-folding unit (A).
29.Insérer les 2 saillies (39) au dos de la butée de sortie (D) dans les parties encerclées de la 30.Apposer l'étiquette D7 (Q) à l'endroit repéré
plieuse (A). sur la figure.
Assujettir les 3 crochets (40) de la butée de sortie (D) dans les trous (41) de la plieuse (A).
29.Inserte los 2 resaltos (39) de la parte posterior del tope de salida (D) en las porciones marcadas 30.Adhiera la etiqueta D7 (Q) en el lugar que se
con un círculo de la unidad de plegado (A). muestra en la ilustración.
Coloque los 3 ganchos (40) del tope de salida (D) en los orificios (41) de la unidad de plegado
(A).
29.Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge (39) auf der Rückseite des Ausgabeanschlags (D) in die mit Kreis 30.Kleben Sie den D7 Aufkleber (Q) an der
bezeichneten Positionen der Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. abgebildeten Stelle an.
Setzen Sie die 3 Haken (40) des Ausgabeanschlags (D) in die Öffnungen (41) der Mittenfaltein-
heit (A) ein.
29.Inserire le 2 sporgenze (39) sulla parte posteriore del fermo di uscita (D) nelle porzioni cerchiate 30.Far aderire l'etichetta D7 (Q) alla posizione
sull'unità di piegatura centrale (A). mostrata nella figura.
Fissare i 3 ganci (40) sul fermo di uscita (D) nei fori (41) nell'unità di piegatura centrale (A).
29.将排纸挡板 (D) 内侧的 2 处突出部 (39) 插入到中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 的圆框部。 30.在图示位置黏贴 D7 标签 (Q)。
将排纸挡板 (D) 的 3 个挂钩 (40) 嵌入到中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 的孔 (41) 中。
29. 배지 스토퍼 (D) 의 안쪽에 있는 돌기 (39) 2 곳을 접기 유니트 (A) 의에 삽입합니다 . 30.D7 라벨 (Q) 을 그림의 위치에 붙입니다 .
배지 스토퍼 (D) 의 후크 (40) 3 곳을 접기 유니트 (A) 의 구멍 (41) 에 끼웁니다 .
29.排紙ストッパー(D) の裏側にある突起 (39)2 箇所を中折ユニット (A) の丸枠部に挿入する。 30.D7 ラベル (Q) を図の位置に貼り付ける。
排紙ストッパー(D) のフック (40)3 箇所を中折りユニット (A) の穴 (41) にはめ込む。
11
R
31. Adhere the Operation label (R) at the location shown in the figure.
32.Reinstall the foot cover (5) and lower rear cover (7).
33.Close the lower front cover (3) and the upper front cover (1).
31.Apposer l'étiquette de fonctionnement (R) à l'endroit repéré sur la figure.
32.Reposer le couvercle du pied (5) et le couvercle arrière inférieur (7).
33.Fermer le capot inférieur avant (3) et le couvercle avant supérieur (1).
31.Adhiera la etiqueta de funcionamiento (R) en el lugar que se muestra en la ilustración.
32.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta de la pata (5) y la cubierta posterior inferior (7).
33.Cierre la cubierta frontal inferior (3) y la cubierta frontal superior (1).
31.Kleben Sie den Bedienungsaufkleber (R) an der abgebildeten Stelle an.
32.Bringen Sie die Fußabdeckung (5) und die untere hintere Abdeckung (7) wieder an.
33.Schließen Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung (3) und die obere vordere Abdeckung (1).
31.Far aderire l'etichetta di operazione (R) alla posizione mostrata nella figura.
32.Reinstallare la copertura del piede (5) e il coperchio inferiore posteriore (7).
33.Chiudere il coperchio inferiore anteriore (3) e il coperchio superiore anteriore (1).
31.在图示位置黏贴操作标签 (R)。
32.按原样安装脚座盖板 (5) 和后部下盖板 (7)。
33.关闭前部下盖板（3）和前部上盖板（1）。
31.조작 라벨 (R) 을 그림의 위치에 붙입니다 .
32.풋커버 (5) 및 뒤하 커버 (7) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
33.전면 아래커버 (3) 및 전면 윗커버 (1) 를 닫습니다 .
31.操作ラベル (R) を図の位置に貼り付ける。
32.フットカバー(5) および後下カバー(7) を元通りに取り付ける。
33.前下カバー(3) および前上カバー(1) を閉じる。
12
a a
Adjustment of centerfold-stapling position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Staple Pos.
Check the distance (a) from the stapling position to the center of the paper. 2.Adjust the values.
If the distance (a) is over the reference value, follow the procedure below 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
to adjust the position.
<Reference value (a)> ±2 mm
Réglage de la position d'agrafage des pages centrales dépliables 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Booklet et Staple
Vérifier la distance (a) entre la position d'agrafage et le milieu de la feuille Pos.
de papier. Si cette distance (a) est supérieure à la valeur de référence, 2.Régler les valeurs.
régler la position en procédant de la manière suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence (a)> ±2 mm
Ajuste de la posición de grapado de la unidad de plegado 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Staple
Compruebe la distancia (a) desde la posición de grapado con respecto al Pos.
centro del papel. Si dicha distancia (a) supera el valor de referencia, 2.Ajuste los valores.
realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posición. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
<Valor de referencia (a)> ±2 mm
Einstellung der Mittenfalt-Heftposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Booklet und
Überprüfen Sie den Abstand (a) zwischen der Heftposition und der Papier- Staple Pos.
mitte. Falls der Abstand (a) größer als der Bezugswert ist, ist die Position 2.Die Werte einstellen.
gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
<Bezugswert (a)> ±2 mm
Regolazione della posizione di cucitura dell’unità di piegatura cen- 1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e Sta-
trale ple Pos.
Controllare la distanza (a) dalla posizione di spillatura al centro del foglio. 2.Regolare i valori.
Se la distanza (a) è superiore al valore di riferimento, seguire la procedura 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
riportata sotto per regolare la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento (a)> ±2 mm
中缝装订位置调整 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Booklet、Staple Pos。
检查从装订位置到纸张中心的距离 (a)。如果距离 (a) 超出标准值范围，按 2.调整设定值。
照下列步骤调节装订位置。 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
＜标准值 (a) ＞ ±2mm
접기 스테이플 위치조정 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 세트하고 Booklet, Staple Pos 를 선택합니
스테이플 위치에서 용지 중앙까지의 거리離 (a) 를 확인합니다 . 거리 (a) 다.
가 기준치 외의 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
＜기준치 (a) ＞ ±2mm 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
中とじステープル位置調整 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、
Booklet、
Staple Pos を選択す
ステープル位置から用紙センターまでの距離 (a) を確認する。距離 (a) が る。
基準値外の場合、 次の手順で調整を行う。 2.設定値を調整する。
＜基準値 (a) ＞ ±2mm 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
13
b
Adjustment of center folding position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Booklet Pos.
Check the distance (b) from the edge of the paper to the center folding 2.Adjust the values.
position. If the distance (b) is over the reference value, follow the proce- 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
dure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value (b)>
A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ±3 mm
Réglage de la position de pliage central 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Booklet et Booklet
Vérifier la distance (b) entre le bord de la feuille de papier et la position de Pos.
pliage central. Si cette distance (b) est supérieure à la valeur de référence, 2.Régler les valeurs.
régler la position en procédant de la manière suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence (b)>
A4, Letter : Longueur de la feuille × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Longueur de la feuille × 1/2 ±3 mm
Ajuste de la posición de plegado 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Book-
Compruebe la distancia (b) desde el borde del papel a la posición de ple- let Pos.
gado. Si dicha distancia (b) supera el valor de referencia, realice el 2.Ajuste los valores.
siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posición. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
<Valor de referencia (b)>
A4, Letter: Longitud del papel × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Longitud del papel × 1/2 ±3 mm
Einstellung der Mittenfaltposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Booklet und
Überprüfen Sie den Abstand (b) zwischen der Papierkante und der Mit- Booklet Pos.
tenfaltposition. Falls der Abstand (b) größer als der Bezugswert ist, ist die 2.Die Werte einstellen.
Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
<Bezugswert (b)>
A4, Letter: Papierlänge × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Papierlänge × 1/2 ±3 mm
Regolazione della posizione centrale di piegatura 1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e
Controllare la distanza (b) dal bordo della carta alla posizione centrale di Booklet Pos.
piegatura. Se la distanza (b) è superiore al valore di riferimento, seguire la 2.Regolare i valori.
procedura riportata sotto per regolare la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
<Valore di riferimento (b)>
A4, Letter: Lunghezza carta × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Lunghezza carta × 1/2 ±3 mm
中缝折叠位置调整 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Booklet、Booklet Pos。
检查从纸张头部到折叠位置的距离 (b)。如果距离 (b) 超出标准值范围，按 2.调整设定值。
照下列步骤调节折叠位置。 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
＜标准值 (b) ＞
A4,Letter: 纸张长度 ×1/2 ± 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 纸张长度 ×1/2 ± 3mm
접기 위치조정 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 세트하고 Booklet, Booklet Pos 를 선택합니
용지 끝에서 접기 위치까지의 거리 (b) 를 확인합니다 . 거리 (b) 가 기준치 다.
외의 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
＜기준치 (b) ＞ 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
A4,Letter: 용지길이 ×1/2 ± 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 용지길이 ×1/2 ± 3mm
中折り位置調整 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、
Booklet、Booklet Pos を選択す
用紙端から中折り位置までの距離 (b) を確認する。 距離 (b) が基準値外の る。
場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 2.設定値を調整する。
＜基準値 (b) ＞ 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
A4,Letter: 用紙長 ×1/2 ± 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 用紙長 ×1/2 ± 3mm
14
c
Adjustment of tri-folding position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Three Fold.
Check the distance (c) from the edge of the paper to the second folding 2.Adjust the values.
position. If the distance (c) is over the reference value, follow the proce- 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
dure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value (c)> 7.0 ±2 mm
Réglage de la position de triple pliage 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Booklet et Three
Vérifier la distance (c) entre le bord de la feuille de papier et la position du Fold.
deuxième pliage. Si cette distance (c) est supérieure à la valeur de 2.Régler les valeurs.
référence, régler la position en procédant de la manière suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
Ajuste de la posición de plegado tríptico 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Three
Compruebe la distancia (c) desde el borde del papel a la segunda posición Fold.
de plegado. Si dicha distancia (c) supera el valor de referencia, realice el 2.Ajuste los valores.
siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posición. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
<Valor de referencia (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
Einstellung der Dreilagenfaltposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Booklet und
Überprüfen Sie den Abstand (c) zwischen der Papierkante und der Three Fold.
zweiten Faltposition. Falls der Abstand (c) größer als der Bezugswert ist, 2.Die Werte einstellen.
ist die Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
<Bezugswert (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
Regolazione della posizione di piegatura tripla 1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e
Controllare la distanza (c) dal bordo della carta alla posizione della sec- Three Fold.
onda piegatura. Se la distanza (c) è superiore al valore di riferimento, 2.Regolare i valori.
seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
<Valore di riferimento (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
三折位置调整 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Booklet、Three Fold。
检查从纸张头部到第 2 个折叠位置的距离 (c)。如果距离 (c) 超出标准值范 2.调整设定值。
围，按照下列步骤调节折叠位置。 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
＜标准 (c) ＞ 7.0±2mm
두번 접기 위치 조정 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 세트하고 Booklet, Three Fold 를 선택합니
용지끝과 두번째 접히는 위치까지의 거리 (c) 를 확인합니다 . 거리 (c) 가 다.
기준치 외의 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
＜기준치 (c) ＞ 7.0±2mm 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
三折り位置調整 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、
Booklet、Three Fold を選択す
用紙端と二つ目の折り位置までの距離 (c) を確認する。距離 (c) が基準値 る。
外の場合、 次の手順で調整を行う。 2.設定値を調整する。
＜基準値 (c) ＞ 7.0±2mm 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
15
NOTICE
This accessory is for use only with the following Applicant's Listed Machine.
Refer to the supplied guide to install the accessory in the field.
Machine: DF-790
AVIS
Cet accessoire est utilisable uniquement avec le copieur figurant dans la liste du demandeur suivant.
Se reporter au guide fourni pour installer l'accessoire dans le champ.
Modèle: DF-790
AVISO
Este accesorio es sólo para usar en las siguientes fotocopiadoras de la lista de solicitantes.
Consulte las instrucciones para la instalación de accesorios en el lugar del cliente.
Modelo: DF-790
HINWEIS
Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten-Kopiermaschine vorgesehen.
Installieren Sie das Zubehör gemäß der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld.
Modell: DF-790
NOTIFICA
Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell’applicante.
Consultare la guida fornita in dotazione per il montaggio in campo dell’accessorio.
Modello: DF-790
注意
本产品适用于以下选购件。
安装时，请参照附带的说明书。
式样 :DF-790
주의
본 제품은 이하의 기종에 적용됩니다 .
설치할 때에는 동봉된 안내문을 참조해 주십시오 .
기종：DF-790
注意
本製品は、 以下の機種に適用します。
設置する際は、同梱の手順書を参照してください。
機種：DF-790
16
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR
MAILBOX
English
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
When installing to a document finisher, see Page 1 to Page 6.
When installing to a Printer, see Page 7 to Page 12.
Français
Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui est installé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Lors de l'installation sur un module finition de documents, voir Page 1 à Page 6.
Lors de l'installation sur une imprimante, voir Page 7 à Page 12.
Español
El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes páginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalación con un finalizador de documentos, consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 6.
Para la instalación con una impresora, consulte las páginas de la 7 a la 12.
Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation an einem Dokumentenfinisher siehe Seiten 1 bis 6.
Bei Installation an einem Drucker siehe Seiten 7 bis 12.
.
Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Quando si installa un finisher documenti, vedere le pagine da 1 a 6.
Quando si installa una stampante, vedere le pagine da 7 a 12.
简体中文
根据安装对象，安装步骤略有不同。各个步骤记载在下面的页面。
安装到装订器时，请参见第 1 ～ 6 页。
安装到打印机时，请参见第 7 ～ 12 页。
한국어
이 장치에 설치되는 제품에 따라 절차가 다릅니다 . 다음 페이지에서 각 절차를 설명합니다 .
문서 피니셔에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~6 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
프린터에 설치하는 경우 7 페이지 ~12 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
日本語
装着する対象によって、
取付手順は異なります。 それぞれ、
以下のページに記載しています。
ドキュメントフィニッシャーに設置する場合；1 ページ～ 6 ページ
プリンターに設置する場合；7 ページ～ 12 ページ
B
E (M4x12)
F
C
A D
E. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
English
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
E. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 2 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
Français
F. Étiquette de nom de plateau sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies (pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1 pièces fournies.
A. Boîte à lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrière ... 1
D. Case d’éjection de copies.......................... 7
E. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 2 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-
Español
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas (para usuarios)........................................... 1
A. Buzón de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1
D. Bandejas de expulsión de copias .............. 7
E. Schraube M4 × 12 ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
Deutsch
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (für Benutzer) .......... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ..... 1
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefächer................................ 7
E. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 2 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
Italiano
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite (per utenti) ................................................. 1
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7
简体中文 E. M4×12 螺丝 .......................... 2 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
F. 托盘名称标贴 ( 用户用 ) ............... 1 下。
附属品
A. 邮箱................................ 1
B. 支撑板前盖板........................ 1
C. 支撑板后盖板........................ 1
D. 接纸盘.............................. 7
한국어 E. 나사 M4 × 12..................................... 2 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는
F. 트레이 명칭 씰 ( 사용자용 ) .................. 1 경우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품
A. 메일박스............................................ 1
B. 부착판커버 앞..................................... 1
C. 부착판커버 뒤..................................... 1
D. 배출핀............................................... 7
日本語 E. ビス M4×12 ...........................2 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
F. トレイ名称シール （ユーザー用）.........1 は必ず取り外すこと。
同梱品
A. メールボックス....................... 1
B. 取付板カバー前....................... 1
C. 取付板カバー後....................... 1
D. 排出ビン............................. 7
1
3
1
Procedure 1.Remove the front top cover (2) and rear top cover (3) at the top of the finisher (1) using a flat-
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the blade screwdriver or the like.
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
Procédure 1.Retirer le couvercle supérieur avant (2) et le couvercle supérieur arrière (3) situés en haut du
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de retoucheur (1) à l’aide d’un tournevis à tête plate ou d’un outil équivalent.
mettre la machine hors tension et de
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.
Procedimiento 1.Remueva la cubierta superior delantera (2) y la cubierta superior trasera (3) en la parte superior
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de del finalizador (1) utilizando un destornillador de punta plana o similar.
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación
de la toma de pared.
Verfahren 1.Entfernen Sie die vordere obere Abdeckung (2) und die hintere obere Abdeckung (3) an der
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu- Oberseite des Finishers (1) mit einem Klingenschraubendreher oder dergleichen.
gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.
Procedura 1.Rimuovere il coperchio superiore anteriore (2) e il coperchio superiore posteriore (3) dalla parte
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la superiore del finitore (1) utilizzando un cacciavite a punta piatta, o un attrezzo simile.
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.
安装步骤 1.用一字形螺丝刀拆下装订器 (1) 上部的顶罩前盖板 (2) 和顶罩后盖板 (3)。
安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插
座拔下电源插头。
설치순서 1.피니셔 (1) 상부의 윗커버 앞 덮개 (2), 윗커버 뒤 덮개 (3) 를 마이너스 드라이버 등으로 제거합니
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 다.
위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리
하십시오 .
取付手順 1.フィニッシャー (1) 上部の天カバー前フタ (2) 、天カバー後フタ (3) をマイナスドライバーな
必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、機 どで取り外す。
械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ
と。
2
A
2.Fit the hooks (4) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches (5) located at the front and rear of the top of the finisher
(1) as shown in the illustration and attach the mailbox (A) to the finisher (1).
Note:
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between the mailbox (A) and the machine.
2.Insérer les crochets (4) se trouvant à l'avant et à l'arrière au fond de la boîte à lettres (A) dans les encoches (5) situées à l'avant et à l'arrière en haut
du retoucheur (1) comme illustré ici, puis fixer la boîte à lettres (A) au retoucheur (1).
Remarque:
Lever légèrement l'avant et l'arrière de la boîte à lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice entre la boîte à lettres (A) et la machine.
2.Coloque los ganchos (4) ubicados en la parte inferior frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) en las muescas (5) ubicadas en la parte superior frontal
y trasera del finalizador (1), como se muestra en la ilustración, y coloque el buzón de correo (A) en el finalizador (1).
Nota:
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no queda espacio entre el buzón de correo (A) y la
máquina.
2.Setzen Sie die Haken (4) an der Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) in die Öffnungen (5) vorne und hinten an der Oberseite des Finishers (1) ein,
wie in der Abbildung dargestellt, und bringen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Finisher (1) an.
Hinweis:
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gerät bildet.
2.Inserire i ganci (4) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della parte di fondo della mailbox (A), negli incavi (5) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della
parte superiore del finitore (1) come mostrato nell’illustrazione, e fissare la mailbox (A) al finitore (1).
Nota:
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso l’alto per accertarsi che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la
macchina.
2.如图所示，将位于邮箱 (A) 底部前后侧的卡扣 (4) 嵌入位于装订器 (1) 顶部前后侧的凹口 (5)，并将邮箱 (A) 安装至装订器 (1)。
注：
轻轻向上提升邮箱 (A) 的前后侧，确保邮箱 (A) 未处于悬浮状态。
2.메일박스 (A) 하부의 앞뒤에 있는 후크 (4) 를 피니셔 (1) 상부의 앞뒤에 있는 파인 홈에 (5) 에 일러스트와 같이 삽입하고 메일박스 (A) 를 피니셔측에
장착합니다 .
주
메일박스 (A) 의 앞뒤를 각각 상방향으로 가볍게 들어 메일박스 (A) 가 떠 있지 않은 것을 확인합니다 .
2.メールボックス (A) 下部の前後にあるフック (4) をフィニッシャー(1) 上部の前後にある切り欠き部 (5) にイラストのように挿入し、メールボック
ス (A) をフィニッシャー(1) に取り付ける。
注意
メールボックス (A) の前後をそれぞれ上方向に軽く持ち上げ、メールボックス (A) が浮かないことを確認する。
3
A
A
E(M4x12)
A
6
8
3.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws 4.Remove the rear cover (6) of the mailbox 5.Plug the connector (7) of the mailbox (A) into
M4x12 (E). (A). the connector (8) of the machine body.
6.Reinstall the rear cover (6) of the mailbox
(A).
3.Fixer la boîte à lettres (A) à l'aide de deux vis 4.Retirer le couvercle arrière (6) de la boîte à 5.Brancher le connecteur (7) de la boîte à
M4x12 (E). lettres (A). lettres (A) dans le connecteur (8) du corps
de la machine.
6.Remonter le couvercle arrière (6) de la boîte
à lettres (A).
3.Fije el buzón de correo (A) con dos tornillos 4.Quite la cubierta posterior (6) del buzón de 5.Enchufe el conector (7) del buzón de correo
M4x12 (E). correo (A). (A) al conector (8) del cuerpo de la máquina.
6.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (6) del
buzón de correo (A).
3.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei 4.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der 5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (7) der Mailbox (A)
Schrauben M4x12 (E). Mailbox (A). in die Steckbuchse (8) des Gerätegehäuses.
6.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der
Mailbox (A) wieder an.
3.Fissare la mailbox (A) utilizzando le due viti 4.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (6) della 5.Collegare il connettore (7) della mailbox (A)
M4x12 (E). mailbox (A). al connettore (8) del corpo macchina.
6.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (6) della
mailbox (A).
3.使用两个螺丝 M4x12（E）固定邮箱（A）。 4.拆下邮箱 (A) 的后部盖板 (6)。 5.将邮箱（A）的接插件（7）插入机器的接插件
（8）。
6.重新安装邮箱（A）的后盖板（6）。
3.M4x12 나사 (E) 두 개를 사용하여 메일박스 4.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (6) 를 떼어냅니다 . 5.메일박스 (A) 의 커넥터 (7) 를 본체의 커넥터
(A) 를 고정합니다 . (8) 에 연결합니다
6.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (6) 를 다시 장착합니
다.
3.ビス M4×12(E)2 本で、
メールボックス (A) 4.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(6) を取り 5.メールボックス (A) のコネクター(7) を機
を固定する。 外す。 械本体のコネクター (8) に接続する。
6.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(6) を元通
りに取り付ける。
4
B
9 C
7.Insert the 2 hooks (9) on the front mounting 8.Install the rear mounting plate cover (C) on
plate cover (B) for the mailbox into the fin- the finisher in the same way.
isher to install the cover (B).
7.Insérer les 2 crochets (9) du couvercle de la 8.Installer le couvercle de la plaque de mon-
plaque de montage avant (B) de la boîte à tage arrière (C) sur le retoucheur en procé-
lettres dans le retourcheur pour installer ce dant de la même manière.
couvercle (B).
7.Para instalar la cubierta (B), inserte los 2 8.Instale de la misma manera la cubierta de la
ganchos (9) de la cubierta de la placa de placa de montaje trasera (C) en el finaliza-
montaje frontal (B) para el buzón de correo dor.
en el finalizador.
7.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (9) an der vorderen 8.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise die hintere
Abdeckung der Montageplatte (B) für die Abdeckung der Montageplatte (C) am Fin-
Mailbox in den Finisher ein, um die Abdeck- isher an.
ung (B) zu installieren.
7.Inserire nel finitore i 2 ganci (9) posizionati 8.Installare il coperchio della piastra di mon-
sul coperchio della piastra di montaggio taggio posteriore (C) sul finitore nella stessa
anteriore (B) per la mailbox, per installare il maniera.
coperchio (B).
7.将邮箱的安装板前部盖板 (B) 的 2 个卡扣 8.按相同方法将安装板后部盖板 (C) 安装到装
(9) 插入到装订器中，以安装安装板前部盖板 订器上。
(B)。
7.메일박스의 부착판 커버 앞 (B) 의 후크 (9) 2 8.같은 방식으로 부착판 커버 뒤 (C) 를 피니셔
곳을 피니셔에 삽입하고 부착판 커버 앞 (B) 에 장착합니다 .
을 장착합니다 .
7.メールボックスの取付板カバー前 (B) の 8.同様に取付板カバー後 (C) をフィニッ
フック (9)2 箇所をフィニッシャーに挿入 シャーに取り付ける。
し、取付板カバー前 (B) を取り付ける。
5
10 11
9.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to 10.Insert the power plug from the machine into
the highest. the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front and verify the machine operates normally.
and rear pins (10) into the round holes (11) at the front and rear of the mailbox.
9.Fixer les sept cases d’éjection de copies (D) sur la section d’éjection de la boîte à lettres (A), en 10.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine
procédant de la case située tout en bas à celle située tout en haut. dans la prise et mettre la machine sous ten-
Appuyer sur les deux extrémités de chaque case d'éjection des copies (D) pour cintrer légère- sion, puis vérifier qu'elle fonctionne correcte-
ment cette pièce, puis monter la case en insérant les broches avant et arrière (10) dans les trous ment.
ronds (11) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la boîte à lettres.
9.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsión de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco; 10.Enchufe el cable de alimentación de la
después, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (10) en los orificios máquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
redondos (11) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzón de correo. el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la máquina funciona correctamente.
9.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefächer (D) in die Ausgabeöffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein, 10.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum höchsten. eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Drücken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen. Hauptschalter des Geräts ein, um den
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (10) in die Rundlöcher (11) Betrieb zu prüfen.
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen.
9.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox 10.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto più in basso fino a quello più in alto. accendere la macchina e controllare che
Premere le due estremità di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da pie- funzioni correttamente.
garlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (10) nei
fori rotondi (11) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.
9.从邮箱 (A) 的排出部下面起按顺序安装 7 个接纸盘 (D)。 10.将机器的电源插头插入插座，然后打开主电
按住接纸盘 (D) 的左右两侧并使其稍稍下垂，通过将前后的销钉 (10) 插入邮箱前后的圆孔 (11) 源开关并确认机器能否正常操作。
中来安装接纸盘。
9.배출핀 (D) 7 개를 메일박스 (A) 의 배출부에 밑에서부터 순서대로 장착합니다 . 10.기기본체의 전원 플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주
배출핀 (D) 의 좌우를 밀어 조금 휘게해 앞뒤의 핀 (10) 을 메일박스의 앞뒤의 둥근 구멍 (11) 에 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 해서 동작을 확인 합
삽입합니다 . 니다 .
9. 排出ビン (D)7 枚をメールボックス (A) の排出部に下から順番に取り付ける。 10.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し
排出ビン (D) の左右を押し少したわませ、前後のピン (10) をメールボックスの前後の丸穴 (11) 込み、
主電源スイッチを ON にして動作を確
に挿入する。 認する。
6
B
E (M4x12)
F
C
A D
E. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
English
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1 B and C are not used.
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
E. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 2 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
Français
F. Étiquette de nom de plateau sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies (pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1 pièces fournies.
A. Boîte à lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrière ... 1 B et C ne sont pas utilisés.
D. Case d’éjection de copies.......................... 7
E. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 2 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-
Español
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas (para usuarios)........................................... 1
A. Buzón de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1 B y C no se utilizan.
D. Bandejas de expulsión de copias .............. 7
E. Schraube M4 × 12 ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
Deutsch
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (für Benutzer) .......... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte..... 1 B und C werden nicht benötigt.
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefächer................................ 7
E. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 2 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
Italiano
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite (per utenti) ................................................. 1
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1 B e C non sono utilizzati.
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7
简体中文 E. M4×12 螺丝 .......................... 2 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
F. 托盘名称标贴 ( 用户用 ) ............... 1 下。
附属品
A. 邮箱................................ 1
B. 支撑板前盖板........................ 1 不使用 B 和 C。
C. 支撑板后盖板........................ 1
D. 接纸盘.............................. 7
한국어 E. 나사 M4 × 12..................................... 2 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는
F. 트레이 명칭 씰 ( 사용자용 ) .................. 1 경우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품
A. 메일박스............................................ 1
B. 부착판커버 앞..................................... 1 B 와 C 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
C. 부착판커버 뒤..................................... 1
D. 배출핀............................................... 7
日本語 E. ビス M4×12 ...........................2 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合
F. トレイ名称シール （ユーザー用）.........1 は、
必ず取り外すこと。
同梱品
A. メールボックス....................... 1
B. 取付板カバー前....................... 1 B,C は使用しない。
C. 取付板カバー後....................... 1
D. 排出ビン............................. 7
7
Note Procedure
The Attachment Kit(AK-736) must be installed Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off, and unplug the
before the mailbox is installed. power plug from the wall outlet.
Remarque Procédure
L'Attachment Kit (AK-736) doit être installé Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de débrancher la
avant d'installer la boîte à lettres. fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.
Nota Procedimiento
El Attachment Kit (AK-736) se debe instalar Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la máquina y des-
antes de la instalación del buzón de correo. enchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared.
Hinweis Vorgehensweise
Das Attachment Kit (AK-736) muss vor der Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts aus-
Installation der Mailbox installiert werden. geschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
Nota Procedura
Installare l'Attachment Kit (AK-736) prima di Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.
installare il vassoio mailbox.
注 安装步骤
在安装邮箱前，请先安装连接组件（AK-736)。 安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插座拔下电源插头。
주 설치순서
메일박스를 설치하기 전에 부착 키트 (AK-736) 설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리하십
를 설치해야 합니다 . 시오 .
注意 取付手順
メールボックスを取付ける前にアタッチメント 必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業すること。
キット (AK-736) の取付けをおこなうこと。
8
A 1 A
E(M4x12)
1
2
E(M4x12)
1.Insert the hooks (1) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches 2.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws
(2) of the machine and attach the mailbox (A) to the machine. M4x12 (E).
Note
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between
the mailbox (A) and the machine.
1.Insérer les crochets (1) situés à l'avant et à l'arrière du fond de la boîte à lettres (A) dans les enc- 2.Fixer la boîte à lettres (A) à l'aide de deux vis
oches (2) de la machine et fixer la boîte aux lettres (A) à la machine. M4x12 (E).
Remarque
Lever légèrement l'avant et l'arrière de la boîte à lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice
entre la boîte à lettres (A) et la machine.
1.Inserte los enganches (1) que se encuentran en la parte frontal y trasera de la parte inferior del 2.Fije el buzón de correo (A) con dos tornillos
buzón de correo (A) en las hendiduras (2) de la máquina y acople el buzón de correo (A) a la M4x12 (E).
máquina.
Nota
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no
queda espacio entre el buzón de correo (A) y la máquina.
1.Führen Sie die Haken (1), die sich hinten und vorne an der Unterseite der Mailbox (A) befinden, 2.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei
in die Aufnahmen (2) des Geräts ein und befestigen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Gerät. Schrauben M4x12 (E).
Hinweis
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt
zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gerät bildet.
1.Inserire i ganci (1) posti sul fronte e sul retro della sezione inferiore della mailbox (A) negli incavi 2.Fissare la mailbox(A) utilizzando le due viti
(2) presenti sulla macchina e fissare la mailbox (A) sulla macchina. M4x12 (E).
Nota
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso l’alto per accertarsi
che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la macchina.
1.将位于邮箱（A）底部前、后侧的挂钩（1）插入机器的凹槽（2），然后将邮箱（A）安装至机器。 2.使用两个螺丝 M4x12（E）固定邮箱（A）。
注
轻轻向上提升邮箱 (A) 的前后侧，确保邮箱 (A) 未处于悬浮状态。
1.메일박스 (A) 의 전후면 하단에 있는 후크 (1) 를 본체의 노치 (2) 에 삽입하여 메일박스 (A) 를 본 2.M4x12 나사 (E) 두 개를 사용하여 메일박스
체에 부착합니다 . (A) 를 고정합니다 .
주
메일박스 (A) 의 앞뒤를 각각 상방향으로 가볍게 들어 메일박스 (A) 가 떠 있지 않은 것을 확인합
니다 .
1.メールボックス (A) 下部の前後にあるフック (1) を機械本体の切り欠き (2) に挿入し、メール 2.ビス M4×12(E)2 本で、
メールボックス (A)
ボックス (A) を機械本体に取り付ける。 を固定する。
注意
メールボックス (A) の前後をそれぞれ上方向に軽く持ち上げ、メールボックス (A) が浮かない
ことを確認する。
9
A
5 4
3.Remove the rear cover (3) of the mailbox 4.Remove the wire saddle (4).
(A). 5.Plug the connector (5) of the mailbox (A) into the connector (6) of the machine body.
6.Install the wire saddle (4) in the position as shown in the figure.
7.Reinstall the rear cover (3) of the mailbox (A).
3.Retirer le couvercle arrière (3) de la boîte à 4.Retirer le serre-câble (4).
lettres (A). 5.Brancher le connecteur (5) de la boîte à lettres (A) dans le connecteur (6) du corps de la
machine.
6.Installer le serre-câble (4) dans la position illustrée sur la figure.
7.Remonter le couvercle arrière (3) de la boîte à lettres (A).
3.Quite la cubierta posterior (3) del buzón de 4.Retire la abrazadera del cable (4).
correo (A). 5.Enchufe el conector (5) del buzón de correo (A) al conector (6) del cuerpo de la máquina.
6.Instale la abrazadera del cable (4) en la posición que se muestra en la imagen.
7.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (3) del buzón de correo (A).
3.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der 4.Entfernen Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4).
Mailbox (A). 5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (5) der Mailbox (A) in die Steckbuchse (6) des Gerätegehäuses.
6.Installieren Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4) an der im Bild gezeigten Position.
7.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der Mailbox (A) wieder an.
3.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (3) della 4.Rimuovere l'unità sella (4).
mailbox (A). 5.Collegare il connettore (5) della mailbox (A) al connettore (6) del corpo macchina.
6.Installare l'unità sella (4) nella posizione indicata in figura.
7.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (3) della mailbox (A).
3.拆下邮箱（A）的后部盖板 (3)。 4.取下束线夹（4）。
5.将邮箱（A）的接插件（5）插入机器的接插件 (6)。
6.把束线夹 (4) 安装到图示位置。
7.重新安装邮箱（A）的后盖板（3）。
3.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (3) 를 떼어냅니다 . 4.와이어 새들 (4) 을 분리합니다 .
5.메일박스 (A) 의 커넥터 (5) 를 본체의 커넥터 (6) 에 연결합니다 .
6.와이어 새들 (4) 을 그림에 표시된 위치에 설치합니다 .
7.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (3) 를 다시 장착합니다 .
3.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(3) を取り 4.ワイヤーサドル (4) を外す。
外す。 5.メールボックス (A) のコネクター(5) を機械本体のコネクター (6) に接続する。
6.ワイヤーサドル (4) を図の位置に取り付ける。
7.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(3) を元通りに取り付ける。
10
Z
Y
102
102
8.Install the left cover (Y) in place. 9.Using the two screws (102) removed in step 2 in the installation guide
for the AK-736, install the right cover (Z).
*While pressing the right cover(Z) downwards, fix the right cover(J).
8.Monter le couvercle gauche (Y) en position. 9.À l’aide des deux vis (102) retirées à l’étape 2 du guide d’installation
pour l’AK-736, installer le capot droit (Z).
*Fixer le capot droit (Z) en le maintenant enfoncé vers le bas.
8.Instale la cubierta izquierda (Y) en la ubicación prevista. 9.Con los dos tornillos (102) que quitó en el paso 2 de la guía de insta-
lación para AK-736, instale la cubierta derecha (Z).
*A la vez que ejerce presión sobre la cubierta derecha (Z), fije la cubi-
erta derecha (Z).
8.Installieren Sie die linke Abdeckung (Y). 9.Mit den zwei Schrauben (102), die Sie in Schritt 2 der Installationsan-
leitung für das AK-736 entfernt haben, bringen Sie die rechte Abdeck-
ung (Z) wieder an.
*Drücken Sie die rechte Abdeckung (Z) leicht nach unten, während Sie
diese befestigen.
8.Installare il coperchio di sinistra (Y) in posizione. 9.Utilizzando le due viti (102) rimosse al punto 2 della procedura
descritta nella guida di installazione del kit AK-736, installare il coper-
chio destro (Z).
*Premere verso il basso il coperchio destro (Z) per fissarlo in
posizione.
8.将左盖板（Y）安装到位。 9.请用 AK-736 安装手册步骤 2 中取下的 2 颗螺丝（102）来安装右盖板
（Z)。
* 把右盖板（Z) 边向下按，边固定。
8.좌측 커버 (Y) 를 제자리에 장착합니다 . 9.AK-736 설치 설명서의 2 단계에서 분리한 나사 (102) 두 개를 사용하
여 우측 커버 (Z) 를 장착합니다 .
* 우측 커버 (Z) 를 아래쪽으로 누르는 동시에 우측 커버 (Z) 를 고정하
십시오 .
8.左カバー(Y) を取り付ける。 9.AK-736 設置手順書の手順 2 で外したビス (102)2 本で、右カバー(Z) を
取付ける。
* 右カバー(Z) を下方向に押さえながら、固定する。
11
8 7
101
10.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to 11.Close the paper conveying unit(101).
the highest. 12.Insert the power plug from the machine into
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
and rear pins (7) into the round holes (8) at the front and rear of the mailbox. and verify the machine operates normally.
10.Fixer les sept cases d’éjection de copies (D) sur la section d’éjection de la boîte à lettres (A), en 11.Fermer l'unité de transport du papier (101).
procédant de la case située tout en bas à celle située tout en haut. 12.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine
Appuyer sur les deux extrémités de chaque case d'éjection des copies (D) pour cintrer légère- dans la prise et mettre la machine sous ten-
ment cette pièce, puis monter la case en insérant les broches avant et arrière (7) dans les trous sion, puis vérifier qu'elle fonctionne correcte-
ronds (8) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la boîte à lettres. ment.
10.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsión de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco; 11.Cierre la unidad de transporte de
después, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (7) en los orificios papel(101).
redondos (8) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzón de correo. 12.Enchufe el cable de alimentación de la
máquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la máquina funciona correctamente.
10.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefächer (D) in die Ausgabeöffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein, 11.Schließen Sie die Papierführung (101).
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum höchsten. 12.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in
Drücken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen. eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (7) in die Rundlöcher (8) Hauptschalter des Geräts ein, um den
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen. Betrieb zu prüfen.
10.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox 11.Chiudere l'unità trasporto carta (101).
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto più in basso fino a quello più in alto. 12.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
Premere le due estremità di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da pie- accendere la macchina e controllare che
garlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (7) nei funzioni correttamente.
fori rotondi (8) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.
10.从邮箱 (A) 的排出部下面起按顺序安装 7 个接纸盘 (D)。 11.关闭纸张传输单元（101）。
按住接纸盘 (D) 的左右两侧并使其稍稍下垂，通过将前后的销钉 (7) 插入邮箱前后的圆孔 (8) 中 12.将机器的电源插头插入插座，然后打开主电
来安装接纸盘。 源开关并确认机器能否正常操作。
10.배출핀 (D) 7 개를 메일박스 (A) 의 배출부에 밑에서부터 순서대로 장착합니다 . 11.반송 유니트 (101) 를 닫습니다 .
배출핀 (D) 의 좌우를 밀어 조금 휘게해 앞뒤의 핀 (7) 을 메일박스의 앞뒤의 둥근 구멍 (8) 에 삽 12.기기본체의 전원 플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주
입합니다 . 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 해서 동작을 확인 합
니다 .
10.排出ビン (D)7 枚をメールボックス (A) の排出部に下から順番に取り付ける。 11.搬送ユニット (101) を閉じる。
排出ビン (D) の左右を押し少したわませ、前後のピン (7) をメールボックスの前後の丸穴 (8) 12.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し
に挿入する。 込み、
主電源スイッチを ON にして動作を確
認する。
12
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR
PUNCH UNIT
B
C D E F
A
I J K L M
H
E. Spring......................................................... 1 L. Large clamp (for DF-790) .......................... 1
English M. Ferrite core ................................................ 1
F. Punch PWB ............................................... 1
Supplied parts G. Waste hole punch box ............................... 1
A. Punch guide............................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
H. M3 × 8 tap Tight S screw ........................... 3
B. Hole punch unit.......................................... 1 I. Label sheet ................................................ 1 material from supplied parts.
C. Motor unit................................................... 1 J. Film ............................................................ 1
D. Stop ring .................................................... 1 K. Small clamp (for DF-770)........................... 1
E. Ressort ...................................................... 1 L. Grand collier (pour DF-790) ....................... 1
Français
F. PWB de la perforatrice............................... 1 M. Noyau de ferrite ......................................... 1
Pièces fournies G. Bac de récupération de la perforatrice....... 1
A. Guide de perforatrice................................. 1 H. Vis S taraudée M3 × 8 ............................... 3 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
B. Perforatrice ................................................ 1 I. Feuillet d’étiquettes.................................... 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
C. Moteur ....................................................... 1 J. Film ............................................................ 1 pièces fournies.
D. Bague d'arrêt ............................................. 1 K. Petit collier (pour DF-770).......................... 1
E. Resorte ...................................................... 1 L. Sujetador grande (para DF-790)................ 1
Español
F. PWB de perforación................................... 1 M. Núcleo de ferrita......................................... 1
Partes suministradas G. Caja para desechos de la perforación ....... 1
A. Guía de perforación................................... 1 H. Tornillo de ajuste M3 × 8........................... 3 Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
B. Perforadora................................................ 1 I. Hoja con etiqueta ...................................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
C. Unidad motriz ............................................ 1 J. Película ...................................................... 1 das.
D. Anillo de tope............................................. 1 K. Sujetador pequeño (para DF-770) ............. 1
E. Feder ......................................................... 1 L. Große Klemme (für DF-790) ...................... 1
Deutsch
F. Locher-PWB .............................................. 1 M. Ferritkern ................................................... 1
Gelieferte Teile G. Lochungsabfallbehälter.............................. 1
A. Locherführung ........................................... 1 H. M3 × 8 Passstift-Verbundschrauben.......... 3 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dämpfungs-
B. Lochereinheit ............................................. 1 I. Aufkleberbogen.......................................... 1 material vollständig von den mitgelieferten
C. Motoreinheit............................................... 1 J. Film ............................................................ 1 Teilen.
D. Anschlagring.............................................. 1 K. Kleine Klemme (für DF-770) ..................... 1
E. Molla .......................................................... 1 L. Morsetto grande (per DF-790) ................... 1
Italiano
F. Scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione .... 1 M. Nucleo di ferrite.......................................... 1
Parti di fornitura G. Scarto perforazione ................................... 1
A. Guida perforazione .................................... 1 H. Viti con testa a croce S M3 × 8 .................. 3 Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il
B. Unità di perforazione ................................. 1 I. Foglio di etichette....................................... 1 materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite.
C. Unità motore .............................................. 1 J. Pellicola ..................................................... 1
D. Anello di bloccaggio................................... 1 K. Morsetto piccolo (per DF-770) ................... 1
简体中文 E. 弹簧 .................................1 K. 固定夹 小（DF-770 用 ) ................1
F. 打孔单元电路板 .......................1 L. 固定夹 大（DF-790 用） ................1
附属品 G. 打孔纸屑盒 ...........................1 M. 磁环 .................................1
A. 打孔导向板........................... 1 H. M3 X 8 攻丝紧固型 S 螺丝 ..............3
B. 打孔单元............................. 1 I. 标签纸 ...............................1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
C. 电机单元............................. 1 J. 胶片 .................................1 下。
D. 止动环............................... 1
한국어 E. 스프링............................................... 1 K. 클램프 소（DF-770 용）....................... 1
F. 펀치기판............................................ 1 L. 클램프 대（DF-790 용）....................... 1
동봉품 G. 펀치폐기박스...................................... 1 M. 페라이트 코어..................................... 1
A. 펀치가이드......................................... 1 H. 나사 M3×8 탭타이트 S......................... 3
B. 펀치유니트......................................... 1 I. 라벨 시트........................................... 1 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
C. 모터유니트......................................... 1 J. 필름.................................................. 1 우에는 반드시 제거할 것 .
D. 스톱링............................................... 1
日本語 E. バネ .................................1 L. クランプ大
（DF-790 用）.................1
F. パンチ基板 ...........................1 M. フェライトコア .......................1
同梱品 G. パンチくずボックス ...................1
A. パンチガイド......................... 1 H. ビス M3×8 タップタイト S .............3 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
B. パンチユニット....................... 1 I. ラベルシート .........................1 は必ず取り外すこと。
C. モーターユニット..................... 1 J. フィルム .............................1
D. ストップリング....................... 1 K. クランプ小 （DF-770 用）.................1
1
2 4
1
3
Procedure Removing the cover (DF-770) 2.Remove the 2 screws (3) and remove the
Before installing the hole punch unit, make sure If installing on the DF-790, proceed to step 1 on upper rear cover (4).
the MFP's main power switch is turned off and page 3.
that its power cord is unplugged from the power 1.Remove the screw (1) and remove the small
outlet. rear cover (2).
Install the document finisher first and then install
the hole punch unit.
Procédure Dépose du couvercle (DF-770) 2.Déposer les 2 vis (3) et déposer le couvercle
Avant d’installer la perforatrice, s’assurer que Pour l'installation sur le modèle DF-790, passer supérieur arrière (4).
l’interrupteur d’alimentation principal du MFP est à l'étape 1 de la page 3.
hors tension et que le câble d’alimentation est 1.Déposer la vis (1) et déposer le petit couver-
débranché de la prise secteur. cle arrière (2).
Installer d’abord le finisseur de document, puis
installer la perforatrice.
Procedimiento Extracción de la cubierta (DF-770) 2.Quite los 2 tornillos (3) y, después, quite la
Antes de instalar la perforadora, asegúrese de que Si realiza la instalación en el DF-790, vaya al cubierta trasera superior (4).
el interruptor principal de la alimentación paso 1 de la página 3.
del MFP esté desconectado y de que el cable de ali-
1.Quite el tornillo (1) y, después, quite la cubi-
mentación esté desenchufado de la toma de corri-
ente de la pared. erta trasera pequeña (2).
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y luego
instale la perforadora.
Verfahren Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-770) 2.Die 2 Schrauben (3) entfernen und die obere
Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Lochereinheit Zur Installation des DF-790 weitergehen zu hintere Abdeckung (4) abnehmen.
beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der Schritt 1 auf Seite 3.
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und 1.Die Schraube (1) entfernen und die kleine
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist. hintere Abdeckung (2) abnehmen.
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und
dann erst die Lochereinheit an.
Procedura Rimozione del coperchio (DF-770) 2.Rimuovere le 2 viti (3) e quindi rimuovere il
Prima di installate l'unità di perforazione, assicu- Se si installa sull'unità DF-790, procedere al pannello superiore posteriore (4).
rarsi che l'interruttore principale dell'MFP sia passo 1 a pagina 3.
spento e che il cavo di alimentazione sia scolle- 1.Rimuovere la vite (1) e quindi rimuovere il
gato dalla presa di corrente. pannello posteriore piccolo (2).
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere
all’installazione dell’unità di perforazione.
安装步骤 拆下盖板（DF-770 时） 2.拆除 2 颗螺丝 (3)，拆下后上部盖板 (4)。
安装打孔单元时，必须事先关闭 MFP 主机的主电 安装到 DF-790 上时，跳至 P3 的步骤 1。
源开关，并拔下电源插头后再进行作业。 1.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (1)，拆下后部小盖板 (2)。
首先安装装订器，然后安装打孔单元。
설치순서 커버제거（DF-770 의 경우） 2.나사 (3) 2 개를 제거하고 뒷 상커버 (4) 를
펀치유니트를 부착할 때에는 반드시 MFP 본체 DF-790 에 장착하는 경우에는 P3 의 순서 1 로 제거합니다 .
의 주 전원 스위치를 OFF 로 하고 전원플러그를 진행합니다 .
뺀 다음 작업을 할 것 . 1.나사 (1) 1 개를 제거하고 뒷 소커버 (2) 를
문서 피니셔를 설치 후 , 펀치유니트를 설치 할 제거합니다 .
것.
取付手順 カバーの取り外し （DF-770 の場合） 2.ビス (3)2 本を外し、後上カバー(4) を取り
パンチユニットを設置するときは、必ず MFP 本 DF-790 に装着の場合は、 P3 の手順 1 へ進む。 外す。
体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、電源プラグを 1.ビス (1)1 本を外し、後小カバー(2) を取り
抜いてから作業すること。 外す。
ドキュメントフィニッシャーを設置後、パンチ
ユニットを設置すること。
2
6
10
7
5 7
7 9
Removing the cover (DF-790) 2.Remove the 3 screws (7) and remove the Installing the hole punch unit
1.Remove the screw (5) and remove the small upper rear cover (8). 3.Remove the screw (9) and pull the guide
rear cover (6). (10) outwards.
Dépose du couvercle (DF-790) 2.Déposer les 3 vis (7) et déposer le couvercle Installation de la perforatrice
1.Déposer la vis (5) et déposer le petit couver- supérieur arrière (8). 3.Déposer la vis (9) et tirer le guide (10) vers
cle arrière (6). l'extérieur.
Extracción de la cubierta (DF-790) 2.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y, después, quite la Instalación de la perforadora
1.Quite el tornillo (5) y, después, quite la cubi- cubierta trasera superior (8). 3.Quite el tornillo (9) y tire de la guía (10)
erta trasera pequeña (6). hacia fuera.
Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-790) 2.Die 3 Schrauben (7) entfernen und die obere Anbringen der Lochereinheit
1.Die Schraube (5) entfernen und die kleine hintere Abdeckung (8) abnehmen. 3.Die Schraube (9) entfernen und die Führung
hintere Abdeckung (6) abnehmen. (10) nach außen ziehen.
Rimozione del coperchio (DF-790) 2.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7) e quindi rimuovere il Installare l’unità di perforazione
1.Rimuovere la vite (5) e quindi rimuovere il pannello superiore posteriore (8). 3.Rimuovere la vite (9) ed estrarre la guida
pannello posteriore piccolo (6). (10) verso l'esterno.
拆下盖板（DF-790 时） 2.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (7)，拆下后上部盖板 (8)。 安装打孔单元
1.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (5)，拆下后部小盖板 (6)。 3.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (9)，将导向板 (10) 向外拉
出。
커버제거（DF-790 의 경우） 2.나사 (7) 3 개를 제거하고 뒷 상커버 (8) 를 펀치유니트 부착
1.나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고 뒷 소커버 (6) 를 제거합니다 . 3.나사 (9) 1 개를 제거하고 가이드 (10) 을 앞
제거합니다 . 으로 끌어 당깁니다 .
カバーの取り外し （DF-790 の場合） 2.ビス (7)3 本を外し、後上カバー(8) を取り パンチユニットの取り付け
1.ビス (5)1 本を外し、後小カバー(6) を取り 外す。 3.ビス (9)1 本を外し、ガイド (10) を手前に引
外す。 き出す。
3
38
J
4.After using alcohol to clean the shaded portion (38) of the motor shown for adhering the film (J), adhere the film.
4.Après avoir utilisé de l'alcool pour nettoyer la partie du moteur hachurée (38) sur laquelle le film (J) est apposé, coller ce film.
4.Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la parte sombreada (38) del motor mostrada en la ilustración para pegar la película (J), pegue la película.
4.Den in der Abbildung grau dargestellten Teil (38) des Motors zum Anbringen des Films (J) mit Alkohol reinigen und dann den Film anbringen.
4.Dopo aver usato l’alcool per pulire la parte ombreggiata (38) del motore, illustrata per l’adesione della pellicola (J), far aderire la pellicola.
4.用酒精清洁电机斜侧处（38）的粘贴位置后，粘贴胶片（J）。
4.모터 사선부（38）의 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 , 필름（J）을 부착합니다 .
4.モーター斜線部（38）の貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後、フィルム（J）
を貼り付ける。
4
12
B
11
5.Install the punch guide (A) so that the leading edge of the guide (11) is below the document fin- 6.Insert the hole punch unit (B) into the docu-
isher frame (12). ment finisher.
5.Monter le guide de la perforatrice (A) de sorte que le bord d'attaque du guide (11) se trouve sous 6.Insérer la perforatrice (B) dans le retoucheur
le bâti du retoucheur de document (12). de document.
5.Instale la guía de perforación (A) de forma tal que el borde delantero de la guía (11) quede 6.Inserte la perforadora (B) en el finalizador de
debajo de la carcasa del finalizador de documentos (12). documentos.
5.Die Locherführung (A) so einsetzen, dass die Vorderkante der Führung (11) unter dem Rahmen 6.Die Lochereinheit (B) in den Dokument-Fin-
(12) des Dokument-Finishers liegt. isher einsetzen.
5.Installare la guida perforazione (A) in modo che il bordo principale della guida (11) sia sotto il 6.Inserire l'unità di perforazione (B) nella fini-
telaio (12) della finitrice di documenti. trice di documenti.
5.将打孔导向板 (A) 的前端 (11) 安装在装订器的框架 (12) 的下部。 6.将打孔单元 (B) 插入到装订器中。
5.펀치가이드 (A) 의 끝 (11) 이 문서 피니셔의 프레임 (12) 밑으로 되도록 장착합니다 . 6.펀치유니트 (B) 를 문서 피니셔에 삽입합니
다.
5.パンチガイド (A) の先端 (11) がドキュメントフィニッシャーのフレーム (12) の下になるよう 6.パンチユニット (B) をドキュメントフィ
に取り付ける。 ニッシャーに挿入する。
5
B
C
13 16
B
15
14
C
C
7.Raise the hole punch unit (B) slightly and fit the hook (13) on the motor unit (C) into the groove 8.Secure the motor unit (C) with the 2 screws
(14) in the document finisher. At the same time, insert the rod (15) on the motor unit (C) into the (H).
hole (16) in the hole punch unit (B).
7.Lever légèrement la perforatrice (B) et insérer le crochet (13) du moteur (C) dans la rainure (14) 8.Fixer le moteur (C) à l'aide de 2 vis (H).
du retoucheur de document. Insérer en même temps la tige (15) du moteur (C) dans le trou (16)
de la perforatrice (B).
7.Levante ligeramente la perforadora (B) y encaje el gancho (13) de la unidad motriz (C) en la 8.Asegure la unidad motriz (C) con los 2 tornil-
ranura (14) del finalizador de documentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte la varilla (15) de la unidad los (H).
motriz (C) en el orificio (16) de la perforadora (B).
7.Die Lochereinheit (B) leicht anheben und den Haken (13) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die Nut (14) 8.Die Motoreinheit (C) mit den 2 Schrauben
des Dokument-Finishers einsetzen. Dabei auch die Stange (15) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die (H) sichern.
Öffnung (16) der Lochereinheit (B) einstecken.
7.Sollevare leggermente l'unità di perforazione (B) ed inserire il gancio (13) sull'unità motore (C) 8.Fissare l'unità motore (C) con le 2 viti (H).
nella scanalatura (14) della finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire l'asta (15)
sull'unità motore (C) nel foro (16) dell'unità di perforazione (B).
7.稍稍抬起打孔单元 (B)，将电机单元 (C) 的卡扣 (13) 嵌入装订器的沟槽 (14) 内。与此同时，将电 8.使用 2 颗螺丝 (H) 来固定电机单元 (C)。
机单元 (C) 的轴 (15) 插入打孔单元 (B) 的孔 (16) 中。
7.펀치유니트 (B) 를 조금 들면서 모터유니트 (C) 후크 (13) 를 문서 피니셔의 구 (14) 에 꽂습니다 . 8.나사 (H) 2 개로 모터유니트 (C) 를 고정합니
이것과 동시에 모터유니트 (C) 의 축 (15) 을 펀치유니트 (B) 구멍 (16) 에 삽입합니다 . 다.
7.パンチユニット (B) を少し持ち上げながら、モーターユニット (C) のフック (13) をドキュメン 8.ビス (H)2 本で、
モーターユニット (C) を固
トフィニッシャーの溝 (14) にはめ込む。これと同時に、モーターユニット (C) の軸 (15) をパン 定する。
チユニット (B) の穴 (16) に挿入する。
6
17
19
E 15 18
D
9.Fit the stop ring (D) over the motor unit rod 10.Run the hole punch unit wire (17) through
(15) and fit the spring (E) between the hole the motor unit edging (18).
punch unit and motor unit. 11.Plug the wire from the hole punch unit motor
into the connector on the motor unit (19).
9.Monter la bague d'arrêt (D) sur la tige du 10.Faire passer le câble de la perforatrice (17)
moteur (15) et insérer le ressort (E) entre la dans le passage de câbles du moteur (18)
perforatrice et le moteur. 11.Raccorder le câble du moteur de la perfora-
trice au connecteur du moteur (19).
9.Coloque el anillo de tope (D) sobre la varilla 10.Tienda el cable de la perforadora (17) a
de la unidad motriz (15) y coloque el resorte través de la pestaña de la unidad motriz
(E) entre la perforadora y la unidad motriz. (18).
11.Enchufe el cable del motor de la perforadora
al conector de la unidad motriz (19).
9.Den Anschlagring (D) auf die Stange (15) 10.Das Kabel (17) der Lochereinheit durch den
der Motoreinheit setzen und die Feder (E) Kantenschutz (18) der Motoreinheit führen.
zwischen Lochereinheit und Motoreinheit 11.Das Kabel vom Motor der Lochereinheit an
einsetzen. den Steckverbinder der Motoreinheit (19)
anschließen.
9.Inserire l'anello di bloccaggio (D) sull'asta 10.Far passare il cavo dell'unità di perforazione
(15) dell'unità motore ed inserire molla (E) (17) attraverso il bordo (18) dell'unità
tra l'unità di perforazione e l'unità motore. motore.
11.Collegare il cavo dal motore dell'unità di per-
forazione nel connettore sull'unità motore
(19).
9.将止动环 (D) 嵌入到电机单元的轴 (15) 上， 10.将打孔单元的电线 (17) 穿过电机单元的包边
在打孔单元与电机单元之间安装弹簧 (E)。 孔 (18)。
11.将来自打孔单元的电机的电线与电机单元的
接插件 (19) 相连接。
9.모터유니트 축 (15) 에 스톱링 (D) 을 꽂고 펀 10.펀치유니트의 전선 (17) 을 모터유니트의 에
치유니트와 모터유니트 사이에 스프링 (E) 징 (18) 에 지나가게 합니다 .
을설치합니다 . 11.펀치유니트 모터에서의 전선을 모터유니트
커넥터 (19) 에 접속합니다 .
9.モーターユニットの軸 (15) にストップリン 10.パンチユニットの電線 (17) をモーターユ
グ (D) をはめ、パンチユニットとモーターユ ニットのエッジング (18) に通す。
ニットの間にバネ (E) を取り付ける。 11.パンチユニットのモーターからの電線を
モーターユニットのコネクター(19) に接続
する。
7
25
23
21 25
24
F F
20
20
22 H
Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-770) 14.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the con-
If installing on the DF-790, proceed to step 12 on page 12. nectors (25) on the punch PWB (F).
12.Fit the 2 hooks (20) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (21) in the document finisher. At the same
time, insert the projection (23) on the document finisher into the hole (22) in the punch PWB (F).
13.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (24) and the punch PWB (F)
together.
Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de récupération de la perforatrice (DF-770). 14.Raccorder les 6 câbles de la perforatrice aux
Pour une installation sur le modèle DF-790, passer à l'étape 12 en page 12. connecteurs (25) de la PWB de la perfora-
12.Insérer les 2 crochets (20) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la découpe (21) du retoucheur trice (F).
de document. Insérer en même temps la saillie (23) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (22)
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).
13.Fixer le câble de terre de la perforatrice (24) à la PWB de la perforatrice (F) à l'aide d'une vis (H).
Instalación del PWB de perforación y la caja para desechos de la perforación (DF-770) 14.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los
Si realiza la instalación en el DF-790, vaya al paso 12 de la página 12. conectores (25) del PWB de perforación (F).
12.Coloque los 2 ganchos (20) del PWB de perforación (F) en el corte (21) del finalizador de docu-
mentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (23) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (22)
del PWB de perforación (F).
13.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable de conexión a tierra de la perforadora (24) y el PWB
de perforación (F).
Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters (DF-770) 14.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck-
Zur Installation des DF-790 weitergehen zu Schritt 12 auf Seite 12. verbinder (25) der Locher-PWB (F)
12.Die 2 Haken (20) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (21) am Dokument-Finisher einset- anschließen.
zen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (23) am Dokument-Finisher in die Öffnung (22) auf der Locher-
PWB (F) einsetzen.
13.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (24) der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F) festziehen.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-770) 14.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unità di perforazione
Se si installa sull'unità DF-790, procedere al passo 12 a pagina 12. nei connettori (25) sulla scheda a circuiti
12.Inserire i 2 ganci (20) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (21) della stampati di perforazione (F).
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (23) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti nel foro (22) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
13.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (24) dell'unità di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
安装电路板与打孔纸屑盒（DF-770 时） 14.将打孔单元的 6 根电线与打孔电路板 (F) 的
安装到 DF-790 上时，跳至 P12 的步骤 12。 接插件 (25) 相连接。
12.将打孔电路板 (F) 的 2 个卡扣 (20) 挂在装订器的缺口 (21) 上。同时，将打孔电路板 (F) 的孔
(22) 卡入装订器的突出部 (23)。
13.使用 1 颗螺丝 (H) 将打孔单元的接地线 (24) 与打孔电路板 (F) 一起固定。
기판과 펀치폐기박스의 부착（DF-770 의 경우） 14.펀치유니트의 전선 6 선을 펀치기판 (F) 커넥
DF-790 에 장착하는 경우에는 P12 의 순서 12 로 진행합니다 . 터 (25) 에 접속합니다 .
12.펀치기판 (F) 의 후크 (20) 2 곳을 문서 피니셔의 구멍 (21) 에 겁니다 . 동시에 펀치기판 (F) 구멍
(22) 을 문서 피니셔의 돌기 (23) 에 넣습니다 .
13.나사 (H) 1 개로 펀치유니트의 접지선 (24) 과 펀치기판 (F) 을 함게 조입니다 .
基板とパンチくずボックスの取り付け （DF-770 の場合） 14.パンチユニットの電線 6 本を、パンチ基板
DF-790 に装着の場合は、P12 の手順 12 へ進む。 (F) のコネクター(25) に接続する。
12.パンチ基板 (F) のフック (20)2 箇所をドキュメントフィニッシャーの切り欠き (21) に引っ掛け
る。同時に、パンチ基板 (F) の穴 (22) をドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (23) に入れる。
13.ビス (H)1 本で、
パンチユニットのアース線 (24) とパンチ基板 (F) を共締めする。
8
27
M
26
15.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the con- 16.Install the small clamp (K) on the finisher, then pass and fasten the wires from the motor unit and
nectors (27) on the DF main PWB (26). hole punch unit.
17.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.
15.Raccorder les 2 câbles de la PWB de la per- 16.Monter le petit collier (K) sur le retoucheur puis faire passer les câbles du moteur et de la perfora-
foratrice aux connecteurs (27) de la PWB trice dans ce collier pour les fixer en place
principale du DF (26). 17.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au câble.
15.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de per- 16.Instale el sujetador pequeño (K) en el finalizador, después tienda y ajuste los cables de la unidad
foración a los conectores (27) del PWB prin- motriz y la perforadora.
cipal del DF (26). 17.Fije el núcleo de ferrita (M) al cable.
15.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steck- 16.Die kleine Klemme (K) am Finisher anbringen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der
verbinder (27) der DF-Haupt-PWB (26) Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen.
anschließen. 17.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.
15.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti 16.Installare il morsetto piccolo (K) sul finitore, e quindi passare e fissare i cavi dall’unità motore e
stampati di perforazione nei connettori (27) dall’unità di perforazione.
sulla scheda principale PWB (26) della DF. 17.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.
15.将打孔电路板的 2 根电线与 DF 主电路板 16.把小固定夹（K）安装在装订器上，从电机单元和打孔单元出来的导线穿过固定夹来固定。
(26) 的接插件 (27) 连接。 17.用磁环（M）套住导线。
15.펀치기판의 전선 2 선을 DF 주 회로기판 16.클램프 소（K）를 피니셔에 장착 , 모터 유니트와 펀치 유니트에서부터 전선을 통과시키고 고정합
(26) 의 커넥터 (27) 에 접속합니다 . 니다 .
17.페라이트 코어（M）를 전선으로 장착합니다 .
15.パンチ基板の電線 2 本を DF 主回路基板 16.クランプ小（K）をフィニッシャーに取り付け、モーターユニットとパンチユニットからの電線を
(26) のコネクター(27) に接続する。 通し、
固定する。
17.フェライトコア（M）を電線に取り付ける。
9
28
18.Replace the upper rear cover (4) and small 19.Open the upper front cover (28) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).
rear cover (2).
18.Reposer le couvercle supérieur arrière (4) et 19.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur avant (28) et insérer le bac de récupération de la perforatrice (G).
le petit couvercle arrière (2).
18.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 19.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (28) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación (G).
(4) y la cubierta trasera pequeña (2).
18.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (4) und die kle- 19.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28) öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter (G) einsetzen.
ine hintere Abdeckung (2) wieder einsetzen.
18.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 19.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (28) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).
(4) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (2).
18.按原样安装后上部盖板 (4) 与后部小盖板 19.打开前上部盖板 (28)，插入打孔纸屑盒 (G)。
(2)。
18.뒷 상커버 (4) 와 후 소커버 (2) 를 원래대로 19.앞 상커버 (28) 를 열고 펀치폐기박스 (G) 를 삽입합니다 .
부착합니다 .
18.後上カバー(4) と後小カバー(2) を元通り取 19.前上カバー(28) を開き、
パンチくずボックス (G) を挿入する。
り付ける。
10
J( B )
B C J( C )
20.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the 21.Close the upper front cover (28).
locations shown in the illustration: B, C..
20.Après avoir nettoyé chaque zone à l’alcool, apposer les étiquettes suivantes du feuillet 21.Fermer le couvercle supérieur avant (28).
d’étiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqués dans l’illustration : B, C.
20.Después de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las 21.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (28).
etiquetas siguientes, y péguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustración: B, C.
20.Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber 21.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28)
vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen: B, C. schließen.
20.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) 21.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (28).
sui punti mostrati nell’illustrazione: B, C.
20.用酒精清洁各区域后，请在如图所示位置粘贴从标签纸上（J）撕下的下列标签：B、C。 21.关闭前上部盖板 (28)。
20.라벨 시트 ( Ｊ ) 내의 하기 라벨을 일러스트의 위치에 알코올청소 후 붙입니다：Ｂ，Ｃ . 21.앞 상커버 (28) 를 닫습니다 .
20.ラベルシート (J) 内の B、
C をイラストの位置にアルコール清掃後貼り付ける。 21.前上カバー(28) を閉じる。
11
32
33 34
31 34
30
29
F
F
Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-790) 14.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the con-
12.Fit the 2 hooks (29) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (30) in the document finisher. At the same nectors (34) on the punch PWB (F).
time, insert the projection (32) on the document finisher into the hole (31) in the punch PWB (F).
13.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (33) and the punch PWB (F)
together.
Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de récupération de la perforatrice (DF-790). 14.Raccorder les 6 câbles de la perforatrice aux
12.Insérer les 2 crochets (29) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la découpe (30) du retoucheur connecteurs (34) de la PWB de la perfora-
de document. Insérer en même temps la saillie (32) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (31) trice (F).
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).
13.Fixer le câble de terre de la perforatrice (33) à la PWB de la perforatrice (F) à l'aide d'une vis (H).
Instalación del PWB de perforación y la caja para desechos de la perforación (DF-790) 14.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los
12.Coloque los 2 ganchos (29) del PWB de perforación (F) en el corte (30) del finalizador de docu- conectores (34) del PWB de perforación (F).
mentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (32) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (31)
del PWB de perforación (F).
13.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable de conexión a tierra de la perforadora (33) y el PWB
de perforación (F).
Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters (DF-790) 14.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck-
12.Die 2 Haken (29) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (30) am Dokument-Finisher einset- verbinder (34) der Locher-PWB (F)
zen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (32) am Dokument-Finisher in die Öffnung (31) auf der Locher- anschließen.
PWB (F) einsetzen.
13.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (33) der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F) festziehen.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-790) 14.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unità di perforazione
12.Inserire i 2 ganci (29) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (30) della nei connettori (34) sulla scheda a circuiti
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (32) sulla finitrice di docu- stampati di perforazione (F).
menti nel foro (31) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
13.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (33) dell'unità di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
安装电路板与打孔纸屑盒（DF-790 时） 14.将打孔单元的 6 根电线与打孔电路板 (F) 的
12.将打孔电路板 (F) 的 2 个卡扣 (29) 挂在装订器的缺口 (30) 上。同时，将打孔电路板 (F) 的孔 接插件 (34) 相连接。
(31) 卡入装订器的突出部 (32)。
13.使用 1 颗螺丝 (H) 将打孔单元的接地线 (33) 与打孔电路板 (F) 一起固定。
기판과 펀치폐기박스의 부착（DF-790 의 경우） 14.펀치유니트의 전선 6 선을 펀치기판 (F) 커넥
12.펀치기판 (F) 의 후크 (29) 2 곳을 문서 피니셔의 구멍 (30) 에 겁니다 . 동시에 펀치기판 (F) 구멍 터 (34) 에 접속합니다 .
(31) 을 문서 피니셔의 돌기 (32) 에 넣습니다 .
13.나사 (H) 1 개로 펀치유니트의 접지선 (33) 과 펀치기판 (F) 을 함게 조입니다 .
基板とパンチくずボックスの取り付け （DF-790 の場合） 14.パンチユニットの電線 6 本を、パンチ基板
12.パンチ基板 (F) のフック (29)2 箇所をドキュメントフィニッシャーの切り欠き (30) に引っ掛け (F) のコネクター(34) に接続する。
る。同時に、パンチ基板 (F) の穴 (31) をドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (32) に入れる。
13.ビス (H)1 本で、
パンチユニットのアース線 (33) とパンチ基板 (F) を共締めする。
12
L
36
35
15.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the con- 16.Install the small clamp (L) on the finisher, then pass and fasten the wires from the motor unit and
nectors (36) on the DF main PWB (35). hole punch unit.
17.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.
15.Raccorder les 2 câbles de la PWB de la per- 16.Installer le grand collier (L) sur le retoucheur puis faire passer les câbles du moteur et de la perfo-
foratrice aux connecteurs (36) de la PWB ratrice dans ce collier pour les fixer en place.
principale du DF (35). 17.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au câble.
15.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de per- 16.Instale el sujetador grande (L) en el finalizador, después tienda y ajuste los cables de la unidad
foración a los conectores (36) del PWB prin- motriz y la perforadora.
cipal del DF (35). 17.Fije el núcleo de ferrita (M) al cable.
15.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steck- 16.Die große Klemme (L) am Finisher anbringen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der
verbinder (36) der DF-Haupt-PWB (35) Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen.
anschließen. 17.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.
15.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti 16.Installare il morsetto grante (L) sul finitore, e quindi passare e fissare i cavi dall’unità motore e
stampati di perforazione nei connettori (36) dall’unità di perforazione.
sulla scheda principale PWB (35) della DF. 17.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.
15.将打孔电路板的 2 根电线与 DF 主电路板 16.把大固定夹（L）安装在装订器上，从电机单元和打孔单元出来的导线穿过固定夹来固定。
(35) 的接插件 (36) 连接。 17.用磁环（M）套住导线。
15.펀치기판의 전선 2 선을 DF 주 회로기판 16.클램프 대（L）를 피니셔에 장착 , 모터 유니트와 펀치 유니트에서부터 전선을 통과시키고 고정합
(35) 의 커넥터 (36) 에 접속합니다 . 니다 .
17.페라이트 코어（M）를 전선으로 장착합니다 .
15.パンチ基板の電線 2 本を DF 主回路基板 16.クランプ大（L）をフィニッシャーに取り付け、モーターユニットとパンチユニットからの電線を
(35) のコネクター(36) に接続する。 通し、
固定する。
17.フェライトコア（M）を電線に取り付ける。
13
37
18.Replace the upper rear cover (8) and small 19.Open the upper front cover (37) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).
rear cover (6).
18.Reposer le couvercle supérieur arrière (8) et 19.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur avant (37) et insérer le bac de récupération de la perforatrice (G).
le petit couvercle arrière (6).
18.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 19.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (37) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación (G).
(8) y la cubierta trasera pequeña (6).
18.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (8) und die kle- 19.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter (G) einsetzen.
ine hintere Abdeckung (6) wieder einsetzen.
18.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 19.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (37) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).
(8) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (6).
18.按原样安装后上部盖板 (8) 与后部小盖板 19.打开前上部盖板 (37)，插入打孔纸屑盒 (G)。
(6)。
18.뒷 상커버 (8) 와 후 소커버 (6) 를 원래대로 19.앞 상커버 (37) 를 열고 펀치폐기박스 (G) 를 삽입합니다 .
부착합니다 .
18.後上カバー(8) と後小カバー(6) を元通り取 19.前上カバー(37) を開き、
パンチくずボックス (G) を挿入する。
り付ける。
14
A
C
J( A )
J( C )
20.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the locations shown in the illustration: A, C.
21.Close the upper front cover (37).
20.Après avoir nettoyé chaque zone à l’alcool, apposer les étiquettes suivantes du feuillet d’étiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqués dans l’illustration :
A, C.
21.Fermer le couvercle supérieur avant (37).
20.Después de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las etiquetas siguientes, y péguelas en los sitios que se indican
en la ilustración: A, C.
21.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (37).
20.Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung
angegebenen Stellen: A, C.
21.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) schließen.
20.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) sui punti mostrati nell’illustrazione: A, C.
21.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (37).
20.用酒精清洁各区域后，请在如图所示位置粘贴从标签纸上（J）撕下的下列标签：A、C。
21.关闭前上部盖板 (37)。
20.라벨 시트 ( Ｊ ) 내의 하기 라벨을 일러스트의 위치에 알코올청소 후 붙입니다：A，Ｃ .
21.앞 상커버 (37) 를 닫습니다 .
20.ラベルシート (J) 内の A、
C をイラストの位置にアルコール清掃後貼り付ける。
21.前上カバー(37) を閉じる。
15
a b
[Adjusting the hole punch position] Adjusting the hole punch entry registration
1.Connect the MFP power plug to the wall out- 1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Regist.
let and turn the MFP main power switch on. 2.Adjust the values.
2.Make a test copy in punch mode. When the paper fed in skewed copy example (a): Increase the setting value.
3.If any off-centering is observed, follow the When the paper crimped copy example (b): Decrease the setting value.
procedure below to adjust the hole position. 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
[Réglage de la position des perforations] Réglage de l'enregistrement de l'entrée des perforations
1. Insérer la fiche d’alimentation du MFP dans la prise 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Regist.
murale et mettre l’interrupteur principal du MFP 2.Régler les valeurs.
sous tension.
2. Effectuer une copie d'essai en mode perforation. Si le papier est alimenté de travers exemple de copie (a): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
3. Si les perforations sont décentrées, suivre la Si le papier est froissé exemple de copie (b): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
procédure ci-dessous pour ajuster la position de 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
perforation.
[Ajuste de la posición de perforación] Ajuste del registro de entrada de perforación
1. Conecte el enchufe del MFP en el receptáculo de 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Regist.
pared y encienda el interruptor principal del MFP. 2.Ajuste los valores.
2. Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de per- Cuando el papel alimentado está torcido copia de muestra (a): Aumente el valor de configuración.
foración. Cuando el papel se dobló copia de muestra (b): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
3. Si observa descentrado, siga el procedimiento de 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
abajo para ajustar la posición del agujero.
[Einstellen der Lochungsposition] Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung
1. Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Regist.
Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am 2.Die Werte einstellen.
Hauptschalter ein. Wenn Papier verkantet eingezogen wird Kopiebeispiel (a): Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
2. Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen. Wenn Papier verknittert wird Kopiebeispiel (b): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3. Falls eine außermittige Lochung erfolgte, ist die 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen.
[Regolazione di posizione dei fori di perforazione] Regolazione del registro del foro di perforazione
1. Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione 1.Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Regist.
dell’MFP alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e 2.Regolare i valori.
accendere l’interruttore principale di alimentazione.
Quando l'alimentazione della carta risulta obliqua esempio di copia (a): Aumentare il valore
2. Eseguire una copia di prova in modalità di perfora-
zione. dell'impostazione.
3. Nel caso in cui non lo siano, eseguire la procedura Quando la carta risulta increspata esempio di copia (b): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
indicata qui di seguito per regolarne la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
［打孔位置的调节］ 打孔装入定位调节
1.将 MFP 主机上的电源插头插入电源插座中， 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Regist。
打开主电源开关。 2.调整设定值。
2.在打孔模式下进行测试复印。 纸张斜向搬运时的复印样本 (a)：调高设定值。
3.打孔位置有偏差时，按以下步骤进行调节。 纸张作 Z 字折时的复印样本 (b)：调低设定值。
3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
［펀치위치의 조정］ 펀치반입 레지스트 조정
1.MFP 본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Regist 를 선택합니다 .
전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
2.펀치모드에서 시험복사를 합니다 . 용지가 경사로 반송되는 경우의 복사샘플 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 .
3.펀치위치가 벗어난 경우에는 다음 순서로 조 용지가 Z 꺾임이 있는 경의 복사샘플 (b)：설정치를 내립니다 .
정합니다 . 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
［パンチ位置の調整］ パンチ搬入レジスト調整
1.MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Punch Regist を選択する。
込み、 主電源スイッチを ON にする。 2.設定値を調整する。
2.パンチモードでテストコピーを行う。 用紙が斜めに搬送される場合コピーサンプル (a)：設定値を上げる。
3.パンチ位置がずれていた場合、次の手順で調 用紙が Z 折れする場合コピーサンプル (b)：設定値を下げる。
整を行う。 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
16
c
Adjusting the hole punch position feed 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Feed. <Reference value (c)>
2.Adjust the values. Metric specification: 13 mm; Inch specification: 9.5 mm
If the punch hole position is closer to the edge than the reference value
(c): Increase the setting value.
If the punch hole position is further from the edge than the reference
value (c): Decrease the setting value.
Réglage de la position du point de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Feed. <Valeur de référence (c)>
2. Régler les valeurs. Spécifications métriques: 13 mm; Spécifications en pouces: 9,5 mm
Si la perforation est plus proche du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
référence (c): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
Si la perforation est plus loin du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
référence (c): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
Ajuste de la alimentación de la posición de perforación 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Feed. <Valor de referencia (c)>
2. Ajuste los valores. Sistema métrico: 13 mm; en pulgadas: 9,5 mm
Si la posición de perforación está más cerca del borde que el valor de referencia
(c): Aumente el valor de configuración.
Si la posición de perforación está más alejada del borde que el valor de referen-
cia (c): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Feed. <Bezugswert (c)>
2. Die Werte einstellen. Metrischer Abstand: 13 mm; Abstand in Zoll: 9,5 mm
Falls die Lochungsposition näher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert verringern.
Regolazione spostamento di posizione dei fori di perforazione 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1. Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Feed. <Valore di riferimento (c)>
2. Regolare i valori. Specificazione in unità metrica: 13 mm; Specificazione in pollici: 9,5
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più vicina al bordo rispetto al valore di mm
riferimento (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più lontana dal bordo rispetto al valore di
riferimento (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
打孔位置搬运调节 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Feed。 ＜基准值 (c) ＞
2.调整设定值。 公制规格：13mm、英制规格：9.5mm
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 短时：调高设定值。
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 长时：调低设定值。
펀치위치 반송조정 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Feed 를 선택합 ＜기준치 (c) ＞
니다 . 센치사양：13mm, 인치사양：9.5mm
2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 짧은 경우：설정치를 높입니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 긴 경우：설정치를 내립니다 .
パンチ位置搬送調整 3.スタートキーを押し、 設定値を確定する。
1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Punch Feed を選択す ＜基準値 (c) ＞
る。 センチ仕様：13mm、インチ仕様：9.5mm
2.設定値を調整する。
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より短い場合：設定値を上げる。
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より長い場合：設定値を下げる。
17
e f
d
f
Centering the hole punch position 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Width. <Reference value>
2.Adjust the values. Metric specification: d = 80 mm ± 0.5, e = 40 mm ± 2
If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine: Decrease the Inch specification: d = 2.75 inch ± 0.5, e = 1.375 inch ± 2,
setting value. f = 4.25 inch ± 0.5
If the punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine: Increase the
setting value.
Centrage de la position de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Width. <Valeur de référence>
2. Régler les valeurs. Spécifications métriques: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'avant de la machine: Diminuez la valeur de Spécifications en pouces: d = 2,75 pouces ± 0,5, e = 1,375 pouces ± 2,
réglage. f = 4.25 pouces ± 0,5
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'arrière de la machine: Augmentez la valeur
de réglage.
Centrado de la posición de perforación 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Width. <Valor de referencia>
2. Ajuste los valores. Sistema métrico: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la máquina: En pulgadas: d = 2,75 pulgada ± 0,5, e = 1,375 pulgada ± 2,
Reduzca el valor de configuración. f = 4.25 ± 0,5 pulgada
Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte trasera de la
máquina: Aumente el valor de configuración.
Zentrieren der Stanzlochposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch <Bezugswert>
Width. Metrischer Abstand: d = 80 mm ± 0,5; e = 40 mm ± 2
2. Die Werte einstellen. Abstand in Zoll: d = 2,75 Zoll ± 0,5, e = 1,375 Zoll ± 2,
Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gerätefront liegt: Den Einstellwert verringern. f = 4.25 Zoll ± 0,5
Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gerätefront liegt: Den Einstellwert
erhöhen.
Centratura della posizione dei fori di perforazione 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1. Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Width. <Valore di riferimento>
2. Regolare i valori. Specificazione in unità metrica: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte anteriore della Specificazione in pollici: d = 2,75 pollici ± 0.5, e = 1,375 pollici ± 2,
macchina: Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. f = 4.25 pollici ± 0.5
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte posteriore della
macchina: Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
打孔位置中心调节 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Width。 ＜基准值＞
2.调整设定值。 公制规格 ：d=80mm±0.5、e=40mm±2
打孔位置向机器前部偏移时：调低设定值。 英制规格 ：d=2.75inch±0.5、e=1.375inch±2、f=4.25inch±0.5
打孔位置向机器后部偏移时：调高设定值。
펀치위치 센터조정 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Width 를 선택합 ＜기준치＞
니다 . 센치 사양：d=80mm±0.5, e=40mm±2
2.설정치를 조정합니다 . 인치사양：d=2.75inch±0.5, e=1.375inch±2, f=4.25inch±0.5
펀치구멍이 기기 앞측으로 벗어난 경우：설정치를 내립니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기기 뒷측으로 벗어난 경우：설정치를 높입니다 .
パンチ位置センター調整 3.スタートキーを押し、 設定値を確定する。
1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Punch Width を選択す ＜基準値＞
る。 センチ仕様：d=80mm±0.5、e=40mm±2
2.設定値を調整する。 インチ仕様：d=2.75inch±0.5、e=1.375inch±2、f=4.25inch±0.5
パンチ穴の位置が機械前側にずれている場合：設定値を下げる。
パンチ穴の位置が機械後側にずれている場合：設定値を上げる。
18
NOTICE
This accessory is for use only with the following Applicant's Listed Machine.
Refer to the supplied guide to install the accessory in the field.
Machine: DF-770, DF-790
AVIS
Cet accessoire est utilisable uniquement avec le copieur figurant dans la liste du demandeur suivant.
Se reporter au guide fourni pour installer l'accessoire dans le champ.
Modèle: DF-770, DF-790
AVISO
Este accesorio es sólo para usar en las siguientes fotocopiadoras de la lista de solicitantes.
Consulte las instrucciones para la instalación de accesorios en el lugar del cliente.
Modelo: DF-770, DF-790
HINWEIS
Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten-Kopiermaschine vorgesehen.
Installieren Sie das Zubehör gemäß der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld.
Modell: DF-770, DF-790
NOTIFICA
Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell’applicante.
Consultare la guida fornita in dotazione per il montaggio in campo dell’accessorio.
Modello: DF-770, DF-790
注意
本产品适用于以下选购件。
安装时，请参照附带的说明书。
式样 :DF-770,DF-790
주의
본 제품은 이하의 기종에 적용됩니다 .
설치할 때에는 동봉된 안내문을 참조해 주십시오 .
기종：DF-770,DF-790
注意
本製品は、 以下の機種に適用します。
設置する際は、同梱の手順書を参照してください。
機種：DF-770, DF-790
19
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR
FAX SYSTEM
A B
Home Home Accessibility Display Visual. Accessibilità
Accueil Џ⬠䴶 Affich. accessibilité ᠽᰒ⼎
Inicio 䝼 Pantalla acceso 㡔⏼ⶸ㊐
Startseite ࣮࣒࣍ Zugriffsanzeige ࣘࢽࣂ࣮ࢧࣝ
1.
English
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following
pages.
When installing the Fax system on a machine (A) which has the 'Home' key in the operation panel, see Page 1 to Page 13.
When installing the multiport on a machine (A) which has the 'Home' key in the operation panel, see Page 14 to Page 21.
When installing the Fax system on a machine (B) which has the 'Accessibility Display' key in the operation panel, see Page 22 to Page 34.
When installing the multiport on a machine (B) which has the 'Accessibility Display' key in the operation panel, see Page 35 to Page 41.
Français
1.
Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui est installé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Lors de l'installation du fax sur une machine (A) disposant de la touche 'Accueil' sur le panneau de commande, voir de Page 1 à Page 13.
Lors de l'installation du port multiple sur une machine (A) disposant de la touche 'Accueil' sur le panneau de commande, voir Page 14 à Page 21.
Lors de l'installation du fax sur une machine (B) disposant de la touche 'Affich. accessibilité' sur le panneau de commande, voir de Page 22 à Page 34.
Lors de l'installation du port multiple sur une machine (B) disposant de la touche 'Affich. accessibilité' sur le panneau de commande, voir Page 35 à
Page 41.
1.
Español
El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes páginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Al instalar el sistema de fax en una máquina (A) que dispone de la tecla 'Inicio' en el panel de controles, consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 13.
Al instalar un puerto múltiple en una máquina (A) que dispone de la tecla 'Inicio' en el panel de controles, consulte las páginas de la 14 a la 21.
Al instalar el sistema de fax en una máquina (B) que dispone de la tecla 'Pantalla acceso' en el panel de controles, consulte las páginas de la 22 a la
34.
Al instalar un puerto múltiple en una máquina (B) que dispone de la tecla 'Pantalla acceso' en el panel de controles, consulte las páginas de la 35 a la
41.
1.Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehens-
weisen werden auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation des FAX-Systems in einem Gerät (A), das über die Taste 'Startseite' im Bedienfeld verfügt, siehe Seite 1 bis 13.
Bei Installation einer zweiten Leitung in einem Gerät (A), das über die Taste 'Startseite' im Bedienfeld verfügt, siehe Seite 14 bis 21.
Bei Installation des FAX-Systems in einem Gerät (B), das über die Taste 'Zugriffsanzeige' im Bedienfeld verfügt, siehe Seite 22 bis 34.
Bei Installation einer zweiten Leitung in einem Gerät (B), das über die Taste 'Zugriffsanzeige' im Bedienfeld verfügt, siehe Seite 35 bis 41.
1.Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione del modulo FAX su una macchina (A) dotata di tasto 'Home' sul pannello comandi, vedere le istruzioni da Pagina 1 a Pagina 13.
Per l'installazione di una porta multipla su una macchina (A) dotata di tasto 'Home' sul pannello comandi, vedere le istruzioni da Pagina 14 a Pagina 21.
Per l'installazione del modulo FAX su una macchina (B) dotata di tasto 'Visual. Accessibilità' sul pannello comandi, vedere le istruzioni da Pagina 22 a Pagina 34.
Per l'installazione di una porta multipla su una macchina (B) dotata di tasto ‘Visual. Accessibilità’ sul pannello comandi, vedere le istruzioni da Pagina 35 a Pagina 41.
简体中文
1.
根据安装对象，安装步骤略有不同。各个步骤记载在下面的页面。
当安装传真系统到那些操作面板上有 ' 主界面 ' 按键的机器 (A) 时，请参见 P1-P13。
当安装双路传真系统到那些操作面板上有 ' 主界面 ' 按键的机器 (A) 时，请参见 P14-P21。
当安装传真系统到那些操作面板上有 ' 扩大显示 ' 按键的机器 (B) 时，请参见 P22-P34。
当安装双路传真系统到那些操作面板上有 ' 扩大显示 ' 按键的机器 (B) 时，请参见 P35-P41。
1.한국어
이 장치를 설치하는 제품에 따라 절차가 다릅니다 . 다음 페이지에서 각 절차를 설명합니다 .
조작판넬에 ' 홈 ' 키가 있는 본체 (A) 에 팩스 시스템을 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~ 13 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
조작판넬에 ' 홈 ' 키가 있는 본체 (A) 에 멀티 포트를 설치하는 경우 14 페이지 ~ 21 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
조작판넬에 ' 유니버셜 ' 키가 있는 본체 (B) 에 팩스 시스템을 설치하는 경우 22 페이지 ~ 34 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
조작판넬에 ' 유니버셜 ' 키가 있는 본체 (B) 에 멀티 포트를 설치하는 경우 35 페이지 ~ 41 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
1.日本語
装着する対象によって、取付手順は異なります。それぞれ、以下のページに記載しています。
操作パネルに ‘ ホーム ’ キーがある機械 (A) にファクスシステムを設置する場合；1 ページ～ 13 ページ
操作パネルに ‘ ホーム ’ キーがある機械 (A) にマルチポートを設置する場合；14 ページ～ 21 ページ
操作パネルに ‘ ユニバーサル ’ キーがある機械 (B) にファクスシステムを設置する場合；22 ページ～ 34 ページ
操作パネルに ‘ ユニバーサル ’ キーがある機械 (B) にマルチポートを設置する場合；35 ページ～ 41 ページ
H A
A E
I
C
B
D
J
G
When installing the Fax system on a machine (A) which has the 'Home' key in the operation panel
Supplied parts C. Terminal seal.............................................. 1 Option
A. FAX circuit board ....................................... 1 D. Alphabet label ............................................ 1 J. Memory DIMM (128 MB) ........................... 1
B. Modular connector cable E. Memory DIMM (16 MB) ............................. 1 (H) and (I) are not supplied.
(120 V/Australian model only) F. PTT label (110V model only) ..................... 1
PJJWC0016Z (UL Listed.HUAN HSIN G. Approval label Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
Type TL:120 V only) .................................. 1 (Australian/New Zealand models only) ...... 2 materials from the parts supplied.
Lors de l'installation du fax sur une machine (A) disposant de la touche 'Accueil' sur le panneau de commande
Pièces fournies E. Mémoire DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
A. Carte à circuits FAX ................................... 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
B. Câble du connecteur modulaire (modèles Option pièces fournies.
pour l’Australie/120 V seulement).............. 1 J. Mémoire DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
C. Joint de borne............................................ 1
D. Etiquette de l’alphabet ............................... 1 (F),(G),(H) et (I) ne sont pas fournis.
Al instalar el sistema de fax en una máquina (A) que dispone de la tecla 'Inicio' en el panel de controles
Partes suministradas E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-
A. Tarjeta de circuitos de fax .......................... 1 rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
B. Cable conector modular (sólo para Opción
modelos de 120 V/Australianos)................ 1 J. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
C. Sello del terminal ....................................... 1
D. Etiqueta de alfabeto................................... 1 (F) ,(G) ,(H) y (I) no se suministran.
Bei Installation des FAX-Systems in einem Gerät (A), das über die Taste 'Startseite' im Bedienfeld verfügt
Enthaltene Teile Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
A. FAX-Leiterplatte......................................... 1 Option und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
C. Verschlusskappe ....................................... 1 J. Speicher-DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
D. Alphabetaufkleber...................................... 1
E. Speicher-DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1
(B), (F), (G) , (H) und (I) liegen nicht bei.
Per l'installazione del modulo FAX su una macchina (A) dotata di tasto 'Home' sul pannello comandi
Parti fornite Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
A. Scheda a circuiti FAX ................................ 1 Opzioni protezione dalle parti fornite.
C. Guarnizione terminale ............................... 1 J. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
D. Etichetta alfabetica .................................... 1
E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1
(B),(F), (G), (H) e (I) non sono in dotazione.
当安装传真系统到那些操作面板上有 ' 主界面 ' 按键的机器 (A) 时
附属品 F. 规格标签 .............................1
A. 传真电路板........................... 1 H. 贴片 .................................1 (G) 并非附属品。
B. 电话线............................... 1 I. 名称标签 .............................1
C. 端子密封............................. 1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
D. 英文字母标签......................... 1 选购件 下。
E. 内存模组 DIMM (16MB) ................. 1 J. 内存模组 DIMM (128MB) .................1
조작판넬에 ' 홈 ' 키가 있는 본체 (A) 에 팩스 시스템을 설치하는 경우
동봉품 옵션 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
A. FAX 기판 ........................................... 1 J. 메모리 DIMM（128MB）........................ 1 우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
C. 단자씰............................................... 1
D. 알파벳 라벨........................................ 1
E. 메모리 DIMM（16MB）......................... 1 （B）,（F）,(G),（H）,(I) 는 동봉되어 있지 않습
니다 .
操作パネルに ‘ ホーム ’ キーがある機械 (A) にファクスシステムを設置する場合
同梱品 オプション 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
A. FAX 基板 ............................. 1 J. メモリーDIMM（128MB）..................1 は必ず取り外すこと。
B. モジュラーコード..................... 1
C. 端子シール........................... 1
E. メモリーDIMM（16MB）................... 1
(D),(F),(G),(H),(I) は、同梱されていない。
1
A
NOTICE
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines, and 30, 35, 45 and 55 ppm
monochrome machines.
References to high-speed MFPs in this document denote 65/65 and 75/70 ppm color machines, and 65 and 80 ppm monochrome machines.
(The generic procedure figures in this document show medium-speed MFPs.)
If the finisher is already installed, remove the finisher before installing FAX System(W).
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
REMARQUE
Dans le présent document, les références aux MFP à vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 et 55/50 ppm et aux
machines monochromes 30, 35, 45 et 55 ppm.
Dans le présent document, les références aux MFP à grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines mono-
chromes 65 et 80 ppm. (Dans ce document, les chiffres des processus génériques renvoient aux MPF à vitesse moyenne.)
Si le retoucheur est déjà en place, le déposer avant de monter le FAX System(W).
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.
AVISO
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm y a las máquinas mono-
cromáticas de 30, 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las máquinas monocromáticas de 65 y 80 ppm.
(Las ilustraciones de procedimientos genéricos de este documento muestran las MFP de velocidad media.)
Si el finalizador ya se encuentra instalado, desmóntelo antes de instalar el FAX System(W).
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de
pared.
ANMERKUNG
Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 30, 35, 45 und 55
ppm Monochrommaschinen.
Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm Monochrommaschinen. (Die
Abbildungen der allgemeinen Prozeduren zeigen MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse.)
Falls der Finisher schon installiert ist, müssen Sie ihn ausbauen, bevor Sie das FAX System(W) installieren.
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose
gezogen ist.
AVVISO
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 e 55/50 ppm, e le mac-
chine monocromatiche 30, 35, 45 e 55 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocromatiche 65
e 80 ppm. (Le figure della procedura generica riportate in questo documento mostrano le MFP a velocitò media.)
Se la finitrice è già installata, rimuovere la finitrice prima di installare il FAX System(W).
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.
注意
本文中的中速 MFP 代表彩色 25/25 页机型、30/30 页机型、35/35 页机型、45/45 页机型、55/50 页机型、黑白 30 页机型、35 页机型、45 页机型、55 页机型。
本文中的高速 MFP 代表彩色 65/65 页机型、75/70 页机型、黑白 65 页机型、80 页机型。（本文中的通用步骤的插图为中速 MFP。）
已安装装订器时，必须先拆下装订器再安装 FAX System(W)。
安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插座拔下电源插头。
주의
본문 중 중속 MFP 는 컬러 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45, 55/50 ppm 기종 , 흑백 30, 35, 45, 55 ppm 기종을 나타냅니다 .
본문 내 고속 MFP 는 컬러 65/65, 75/70 ppm 기종 , 흑백 65, 80 ppm 기종을 나타냅니다 .（본문에있는 일반적인 순서 일러스트는 중속 MFP 가 보여
집니다 .）
피니셔가 이미 장착되어 있는 경우에는 피니셔를 제거하고 FAX System(W) 를 설치할 것 .
설치 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리하십시오 .
注意
本文中の中速 MFP はカラー機の 25/25 枚機、30/30 枚機、35/35 枚機、45/45 枚機、55/50 枚機、
モノクロ機の 30 枚機、35 枚機、45 枚機、55 枚機を表す。
本文中の高速 MFP はカラー機の 65/65 枚機、75/70 枚機、モノクロ機の 65 枚機、 80 枚機を表す。 （本文中の共通手順イラストは中速 MFP とする。）
フィニッシャーがすでに装着されている場合は、フィニッシャーを取り外してから、FAX System(W) を取り付けること。
必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、 機械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業すること。
2
A
2
3
1
E J
2
1
Procedure 2.Install the memory DIMM (E) or the optional 3.Reinstall the cover (2) using the 1 or 2
Installing the memory DIMM memory DIMM (J) into the memory slot (3). screws (1).
1.Remove 1 or 2 screws (1), and then remove Install it with the IC side facing up.
the cover (2). Insert it in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks.
Procédure 2.Installer la mémoire DIMM (E) ou la mémoire 3. Reposez le couvercle (2) en position à l'aide
Installation de la mémoire DIMM DIMM en option (J) dans la fente mémoire de 1 ou 2 vis (1).
1.Déposer 1 ou 2 vis (1), puis retirez le couver- (3).
cle (2). L'installer avec le côté IC vers le haut.
L'insérer dans la direction de la flèche
jusqu'au clic.
Procedimiento 2.Instale la memoria DIMM (E) o la memoria 3.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (2) con 1 o 2
Instalación de la memoria DIMM DIMM opcional (J) en la ranura para memo- tornillos (1).
1.Quite 1 o 2 tornillos (1) y después retire la ria (3).
cubierta (2). Instálela con la cara IC hacia arriba.
Insértela en la dirección que indica la flecha
hasta que escuche un clic.
Vorgehensweise 2. Setzen Sie den DIMM-Speicher (E) oder den 3.Setzen Sie die Abdeckung (2) mit 1 oder 2
Installation der DIMM-Speichermodule optionalen DIMM-Speicher (J) in der Speicher- Schrauben (1) wieder ein.
1.Entfernen Sie 1 oder 2 Schrauben (1) und steckplatz (3).
entfernen dann die Abdeckung (2). Installieren Sie die Platine mit den
Speicherbausteinen nach oben.
Schieben Sie das Modul in Pfeilrichtung, bis
es hörbar einrastet.
Procedura 2.Installare la memoria DIMM (E) oppure la 3.Reinstallare il coperchio (2) utilizzando 1 o 2
Installazione della memoria DIMM memoria opzionale DIMM (J) nello slot viti (1).
1.Rimuovere 1 o 2 viti (1) per rimuovere il memoria (3).
coperchio (2). Installarla con il lato IC rivolto verso l'alto.
Inserirla nella direzione della freccia finché
non scatta in posizione.
安装步骤 2.将内存模块 (E) 或选购件内存模块（J）安装 3.使用 1 颗或 2 颗螺丝（1）重新安装盖板
安装内存模组 DIMM 到内存插槽（3）。 （2）。
1.取下 1 颗或 2 颗螺丝（1），然后取下盖板 将 IC 侧正面向上来安装。
（2）。 沿箭头方向将其插入到底直至发出喀嗒声。
설치순서 2.메모리 DIMM(E) 또는 옵션 메모리 DIMM(J) 3.나사 (1) 1 또는 2 개로 커버 (2) 를 원래대로
메모리 DIMM 설치 을 메모리 슬롯 (3) 에 장착합니다 . 장착합니다 .
1.나사 (1) 1 또는 2 개를 제거하고 커버 (2) 를 IC 면을 위로 향하게 하여 설치합니다 .
제거합니다 . 딸칵하고 소리가 날 때까지 화살표 방향으로
삽입합니다 .
取付手順 2.メモリーDIMM（E）または、オプションのメモ 3.ビス (1)1 本または 2 本で、カバー(2) を元
メモリーDIMM の取り付け リーDIMM(J) をメモリースロット (3) に取 通り取り付ける。
1.ビス (1)1 本または 2 本を外し、カバー(2) り付ける。
を取り外す。 IC 面を上向きに取り付けること。
カチッと音がするまで矢印方向に挿入する。
3
A
OPT1
Removing the slot cover 5.Remove 2 screws (6) and then remove the
4.Remove the cover (4). OPT1 slot cover (5).
* For high-speed MFPs with/without the fin- * Do not use OPT2.
isher and for medium-speed MFPs with the
finisher installed.
Dépose du couvercle de la fente 5.Déposer les 2 vis (6) puis le couvercle de la
4.Déposer le couvercle (4). fente OPT1 (5).
* Pour les imprimantes multifonction à * Ne pas utiliser OPT2.
grande vitesse avec/sans module de finition
et pour les imprimantes multifonction à
vitesse moyenne avec le module de finition
installé.
Desmontaje de la cubierta de la ranura 5.Quite 2 tornillos (6) y, después, quite la cubi-
4.Quite la cubierta (4). erta de la ranura OPT1 (5).
*Para los MFP de velocidad alta con/sin * No utilice OPT2.
finalizador y para los MFP de velocidad
media con el finalizador instalado.
Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung 5.2 Schrauben (6) entfernen und dann die
4.Die Abdeckung (4) entfernen. Abdeckung (5) des Einschubs OPT1 ent-
* Bei schnellen MFPs mit/ohne Finisher oder fernen.
mittelschnellen MFPs mit installiertem Fin- * OPT2 nicht verrwenden.
isher.
Rimozione del coperchio vano 5.Rimuovere le 2 viti (6) e quinidi rimuovere il
4.Rimuovere il coperchio (4). coperchio (5) del vano OPT1.
* Per dispositivi MFP di fascia alta con/senza * Non utilizzare OPT2.
finisher e per dispositivi di fascia media con
finisher installato.
拆下插槽盖板 5.拆除 2 颗螺丝 (6)，拆下 OPT1 的插槽盖板
4.拆下盖板 (4)。 (5)。
※ 对于高速机来说装订器可装可不装，对于 ※ 不使用 OPT2。
中速机来说要安装。
슬롯커버 제거 5.나사 (6) 2 개를 제거하고 OPT1 의 슬롯커버
4.커버 (4) 를 제거합니다 . (5) 를 제거합니다 .
※ 피니셔 장착 및 비장착 고속 MFP 및 피니 ※OPT2 는 사용하지 말 것 .
셔 장착 중속 MFP.
スロットカバーの取り外し 5.ビス (6)2 本を外し、OPT1 のスロットカバー
4.カバー(4) を取り外す。 (5) を取り外す。
※ 高速 MFP の場合および中速 MFP にフィ ※OPT2 は使用しないこと。
ニッシャー装着時の場合。
4
A
OPT1
7
6
A
6
Install the FAX circuit board.
6.Insert the FAX circuit board (A) along the groove in OPT1 and secure the board with two screws
(6) that have been removed in step 5.
Do not directly touch the FAX circuit board (A) terminal. Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit
board, or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board (A).
Direct the label (7) on to the FAX circuit board (A) as indicated in the illustration and insert the
board along the groove.
Installer la carte à circuits FAX.
6.Insérer la carte à circuits FAX (A) le long de la rainure dans l’OPT1 et la fixer à l’aide des deux vis
(6) retirées à l’étape 5.
Ne pas toucher directement la borne de la carte à circuits FAX (A). Tenir les parties inférieure et
supérieure de la carte à circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour insérer la carte à circuits FAX
(A).Orienter l'étiquette (7) de la carte à circuits FAX (A) comme illustré et insérer la plaquette le
long de la rainure.
Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de fax.
6. Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax (A) a lo largo de la ranura de OPT1 y asegúrela con los dos tornillos
(6) que ha quitado en el paso 5.
No toque directamente el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos del fax (A). Sujete las partes superior e infe-
rior de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de fax
(A).Oriente la etiqueta (7) en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A) como se indica en la ilustración e inserte
la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura.
Installieren der FAX-Leiterplatte.
6.FAX-Leiterplatte (A) in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in
Schritt 5 ausgebauten Schrauben (6) befestigen.
Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX-Platine (A) nicht mit den Fingern. Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A)
bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) so in die Nut einsetzen, dass der Aufkleber (7) wie abgebildet zur
Leiterplatte zeigt.
Installare la scheda a circuiti FAX.
6.Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX (A) lungo l’incavo nell’OPT1 e fissare la scheda con le due viti (6)
rimosse nell’operazione 5.
Non toccare direttamente il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX (A). Per inserire il circuito FAX
(A), tenere l’estremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX, o la sporgenza della scheda
a circuiti FAX. Orientare l'etichetta (7) sulla scheda a circuiti FAX (A) come indicato nell'illustra-
zione e inserire la scheda lungo l'incavo.
安装传真电路板
6.沿着 OPT1 的沟槽插入传真电路板 (A) 并用在步骤 5 中拆下的两颗螺钉 (6) 固定电路板。
请勿直接触摸传真电路板 (A) 端子。
按住传真电路板的顶部和底部，或者按住电路板的突出部将传真电路板 (A) 插入。
将传真电路板 (A) 上的标签 (7) 保持图示中的方向，将电路板沿着沟槽方向插入。
FAX 회로기판 장착
6.OPT1 의 홈을 따라 FAX 회로기판 (A) 를 삽입하고 앞 순서 5 에서 제거한 나사 (6) 2 개로 고정합
니다 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 의 단자에 직접 닿지 않도록 할 것 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 삽입 시 , 회로기판의 상하 또는 돌출부를 잡을 것 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 를 부착된 라벨 (7) 그림 표기 방향으로 삽입할 것 .
FAX 基板の取り付け
6.OPT1 の溝に沿って FAX 基板 (A) を挿入し、手順 5 で外したビス (6)2 本で固定する。
FAX 基板 (A) の端子に直接触れないこと。
FAX 基板 (A) の挿入時は基板の上下か突起を持つこと。
FAX 基板 (A) は、貼り付けられているラベル (7) が図に示す方向になるように、 挿入すること。
5
A
Connect the MFP to the telephone line. Connect the MFP to the separate phone (except for New Zealand
7.Plug the modular connector cable (8) into the line terminal, and then model).
connect the other end to the telephone line. 8.Plug the modular connector cable (9) into the telephone terminal, and
then connect the other end to the separate phone.
For 100 V/120 V/Australian or Chinese models, use the supplied modular
connector cable (B).
Connecter le MFP à la ligne de téléphone. Connecter le MFP au téléphone séparé.
7.Brancher le câble du connecteur modulaire (8) à la borne de la ligne, 8.Brancher le câble du connecteur modulaire (9) à la borne du télé-
puis connecter l'autre extrémité à la ligne de téléphone. phone, puis connecter l'autre extrémité au téléphone séparé.
Pour les modèles 100 V/120 V/Australie ou Chine, utilisez le câble à
connecteur modulaire (B) fourni.
Conecte el MFP a la línea telefónica. Conecte el MFP al teléfono separado.
7.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (8) en el terminal de línea y, a 8.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (9) en el terminal del teléfono y,
continuación, conecte el otro extremo a la línea telefónica. a continuación, conecte el otro extremo al teléfono separado.
Para los modelos de 100 V/120 V/Australiano o Chino, utilice el cable
conector modular (B) suministrado.
Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung. Anschließen des MFP an das separate Telefon.
7.Telefonmodulkabel (8) in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel 8.Das Telefonmodulkabel (9) in die Telefonbuchse einstecken und das
an der Telefondose anschließen. andere Ende an das separate Telefon anschließen.
Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel (B) für die 100-V/120-V/Australien-
oder China-Modelle verwenden.
Collegamento dell’MFP alla linea del telefono. Collegamento dell’MFP al telefono separato.
7.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (8) nel terminale della linea, e 8.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (9) nel terminale del telefono, e
quindi collegare l'altro terminale alla linea del telefono. quindi collegare l'altro terminale al telefono separato.
Per modelli da 100 V/120 V/Australia o Cina, utilizzare il cavo connettore
modulare (B) in dotazione.
将 MFP 连接到电话线 将 MFP 连接到其它电话
7.将模块接插件电缆 (8) 插入电话线端子，然后将另一端与电话线连接。 8.将模块接插件电缆 (9) 插入电话端子，然后将另一端与其他电话连接。
对于 100V/120V/ 澳大利亚或中国机型，请使用随附的模块接插件电缆 (B)。
전화회선 연결 외부 전화에 연결
7.모듈 코드 (8) 을 선 단자에 꽂는다 . 다른 쪽 플러그는 전화선에 연결한 8.모듈 코드 (9) 를 TEL 단자에 꽂습니다 . 다른 한 쪽의 플러그는 외부
다. 전화에 연결합니다 .
100V/120V/ 오스트레일리아 / 중국 스펙은 부속 모듈 코드 (B) 를 사용할
것.
電話回線との接続 外付け電話との接続
7.モジュラーコード (8) をライン端子に差し込む。もう片方のプラグは、 8.モジュラーコード (9) を TEL 端子に差し込む。もう片方のプラグは、外
電話回線へ接続する。 付け電話と接続する。
100V/120V/ オーストラリア / 中国仕様は付属のモジュラーコード (B) を
使用すること。
6
A
10
C C
C C
If you don't connect the MFP to the separate phone, wipe the surface of Seal the terminal (for New Zealand model).
the telephone terminal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal (C) upon 9.Wipe the surface of the telephone terminal with alcohol and adhere the
the customer's request. terminal seal (C).
On 120 V models, be sure that it is not attached over the top of the Perform this procedure for New Zealand model only.
approval label (10).
Si le MFP n’est pas connecté au téléphone séparé à la demande du client, Fermer hermétiquement la borne
nettoyer la surface de la borne de téléphone avec de l’alcool et apposer le (modèle pour la Nouvelle-Zélande).
joint de borne (C). 9.Cette étape est superflue.
Sur les modèles 120 V, attention à ne pas installer en recouvrant le haut
de l'étiquette d'approbation (10).
Si no conecta el MFP a un teléfono separado, limpie la superficie del ter- Selle el terminal
minal del teléfono con alcohol y pegue el sello del terminal (C), a solicitud (para el modelo Nuevo Zelandés).
del cliente. 9.Este paso no es necesario.
En los modelos de 120 V, asegúrese de que no se fije sobre la etiqueta de
aprobación (10).
Wenn der MFP nicht an das separate Telefon angeschlossen wird, die Ober- Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse
fläche der Telefonbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe (C) ein- (für Neuseeland-Modell).
setzen, falls vom Kunden gewünscht. 9.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich.
Bei 120-V-Modellen darauf achten, dass der Aufkleber nicht den Genehmigung-
saufkleber (10) verdeckt.
Nel caso in cui non si colleghi l'MFP al telefono separato, pulire la superfi- Sigillare il terminale
cie del terminale del telefono con dell'alcol e applicare la guarnizione ter- (per il modello Nuova Zelanda).
minale (C) a richiesta del cliente. 9.Questo passo non è richiesto.
Sui modelli da 120 V, assicurarsi che essa non venga applicata sopra
l’etichetta di approvazione (10).
如果您没有将 MFP 连接至其他电话，请用酒精擦拭电话端子表面，并按照客 安装端子密封 ( 仅适用于新西兰型号 )
户要求粘上端子密封 (C)。 9.不需要本步骤。
120V 规格在粘贴时注意不要与认可标签 (10) 重叠。
외부 전화에 연결하지 않는 경우 , 고객의 요청에 따라 TEL 단자 주위를 알 단자씰의 부착 ( 뉴질랜드 사양만 )
코올 청소하고 단자씰 (C) 을 붙입니다 . 9.작업 불필요 .
120V 사양은 허가 라벨 (10) 에 겹치지 않도록 붙일 것 .
外付け電話と接続しない場合、 お客様の要望により、TEL 端子周囲をアル 端子シールの貼り付け ( ニュージーランド仕様のみ )
コール清掃し、端子シール (C) を貼り付ける。 9.この作業は不要。
120V 仕様は認可ラベル (10) に重ならないように、貼りつけること。
7
A
11
1
Wiring the modular connector cable 12.Install the cover (4) which was removed in step 4.
(High-speed MFPs only) * For high-speed MFPs with/without the finisher and for medium-speed
10.Remove the covers (11) and run the modular connector cable as MFPs with the finisher installed.
shown in the figure. * This work is not required if a multiport is installed along with the fax
11.Reinstall the covers (11). system (OPT1).
Câblage du câble à connecteur modulaire 12.Installer le cache (4) qui a été retiré à l'étape 4.
(MFP à grande vitesse uniquement) * Pour les imprimantes multifonction à grande vitesse avec/sans mod-
10.Déposer les couvercles (11) et implanter le câble à connecteur modu- ule de finition et pour les imprimantes multifonction à vitesse moyenne
laire comme illustré par la figure. avec le module de finition installé.
11.Reposer les couvercles (11). * Cette opération n'est pas nécessaire si un port multiple est installé
avec le fax (OPT1).
Tendido del cable conector modular 12.Instale la cubierta (4) que se quitó en el paso 4.
(Solo para las MFP de alta velocidad) * Para los MFP de velocidad alta con/sin finalizador y para los MFP de
10.Quite las cubiertas (11) y tienda el cable conector modular como se velocidad media con el finalizador instalado.
muestra en la ilustración. * Esto no es necesario realizarlo si hay instalado un puerto múltiple
11.Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas (11). con el sistema de fax (OPT1).
Verlegung des Modularsteckerkabels 12.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (4), die in Schritt 4 entfernt wurde.
(Nur MFP der Hochleistungsklasse) * Bei schnellen MFPs mit/ohne Finisher oder mittelschnellen MFPs
10.Die Abdeckungen (11) entfernen und das Modularsteckerkabel gemäß mit installiertem Finisher.
der Abbildung verlegen. *Dies ist nicht nötig, wenn eine zweite Leitung zusammen mit dem
11.Die Abdeckungen (11) wieder anbringen. FAX-System (OPT1) installiert ist.
Cablaggio del cavo connettore modulare 12.Installare il coperchio (4) rimosso al punto 4.
(Solo per MFP a velocità alta) * Per dispositivi MFP di fascia alta con/senza finisher e per dispositivi
10.Rimuovere i coperchi (11) e far passare il cavo connettore modulare di fascia media con finisher installato.
come indicato nella figura. * Questa operazione non è richiesta quando con il modulo fax (OPT1)
11.Reinstallare i coperchi (11). viene installata una porta multipla.
电话线的配线（仅限高速 MFP 时） 12.安装在步骤 4 中取下的盖板（4）。
10.拆下盖板（11），将电话线如图所示穿过。 ※ 对于高速机来说装订器可装可不装，对于中速机来说要安装。
11.安装盖板（11）。 ※ 双路传真系统和传真系统（OPT1) 同时安装时，不需要此步骤。
모듈러 코드의 배선（고속 MFP 의 경우만） 12.4 단계에서 분리한 커버 (4) 를 설치합니다 .
10.커버（11）를 떼어 내고 모듈러 코드를 그림과 같이 지나가게 합니다 . ※ 피니셔 장착 및 비장착의 고속 MFP 및 피니셔 장착 중속 MFP.
11.커버（11）을 장착합니다 . ※ 이 작업은 멀티 포트가 팩스 시스템 (OPT1) 과 함께 설치되어 있는
경우에는 필요하지 않습니다 .
モジュラーコードの配線 （高速 MFP の場合のみ） 12.手順 4 で取り外したカバー（4）を取り付ける。
10.カバー
（11）を取り外し、モジュラーコードを図のように通す。 ※ 高速 MFP の場合および中速 MFP にフィニッシャー装着時の場合。
11.カバー
（11）を取り付ける。 ※ ファクスシステム (OPT1) と同時にマルチポートを設置する場合こ
の作業は不要。
8
15
A
13
12
12
14
Attach the alphabet labels (excluding 100 V models). 14.Remove the clear panel (15).
13.Insert a flat-head screwdriver at the tip indicated by the arrows (12) as shown on the left, and
slide the operation panel covers (13) (14) to remove them.
Apposer les étiquettes de l’alphabet (Sauf sur les modèles 100 V). 14.Déposer le panneau transparent (15).
13.Insérer un tournevis à lame à l'endroit repéré par les flèches (12) comme illustré ci-contre à
gauche et faire glisser les couvercles du panneau de commande (13) (14) pour les déposer.
Fije las etiquetas de alfabeto (a excepción de los modelos de 100 V). 14.Quite el panel transparente (15).
13.Inserte un destornillador de pala plana en la punta que indican las flechas (12) como se muestra
a la izquierda y deslice las cubiertas del panel de trabajo (13) (14) para quitarlas.
Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber (ausgenommen 100-V-Modelle). 14.Die durchsichtige Platte (15) entfernen.
13.Einen flachen Schraubendreher an der links mit Pfeilen (12) bezeichneten Spitze einschieben
und die Bedienfeldabdeckungen (13) (14) verschieben, um sie dann abzunehmen.
Applicare le etichette alfabetiche (esclusi i modelli da 100 V). 14.Rimuovere il pannello trasparente (15).
13.Inserire un cacciavite a testa piana nel punto indicato dalla freccia (12) come mostrato sulla sinis-
tra, e slittare i coperchi (13) (14) del pannello operativo per rimuoverli.
粘贴英文字母标签 (100V 规格以外 ) 14.拆下透明面板（15）。
13.如图所示，在▲箭头（12）前方插入一字螺丝刀，滑动并取下操作面板的盖板（13）（14）。
알파벳 라벨의 부착 (100V 사양 이외 ) 14.클리어 판넬（15）을 제거합니다 .
13.그림과 같이 ▲ 표시（12） 앞에 마이너스 드라이버를 삽입해 조작 판넬의 커버（13）（14）를 미
끄러트리면서 떼어 냅니다 .
アルファベットラベルの貼り付け (100V 仕様以外 ) 14.この作業は不要。
13.この作業は不要。
9
A
16 D
16
15.Remove the operation panel sheet (16). 16.Wipe the area above the numeric keys on the operation panel sheet (16) with alcohol and attach
the alphabet labels (D).
In Asia and Oceania, use PQRS TUV WXYZ label, and do not use PRS TUV WXY and OPER
labels.
15.Déposer la tôle du panneau de commande 16.Nettoyer à l'alcool la surface au-dessus des touches numériques sur la tôle du panneau de com-
(16). mande (16) et apposer les étiquettes alphabétiques (D).
En Asie et Océanie, utiliser l’étiquette PQRS TUV WXYZ et pas les étiquettes PRS TUV WXY et
OPER.
15.Quite la hoja del panel de trabajo (16). 16.Limpie el área sobre las teclas numéricas de la hoja del panel de trabajo (16) con alcohol y fije
las etiquetas de alfabeto (D).
En Asia y Oceanía, utilice la etiqueta PQRS TUV WXYZ y no use las PRS TUV WXY ni las
OPER.
15.Die Bedienfeldfolie (16) entfernen. 16.Den Bereich über den Zifferntasten an der Bedienfeldfolie (16) mit Alkohol abwischen und die
Alphabetaufkleber (D) hier anbringen.
In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PQRS TUV WXYZ verwenden; nicht die Aufkleber PRS
TUV WXY und OPER verwenden.
15.Rimuovere il foglio (16) del pannello opera- 16.Pulire l’area sopra i tasti numerici sul foglio del pannello operativo (16) con alcool ed applicare le
tivo. etichette alfabetiche (D).
In Asia ed Oceania, utilizzare l’etichetta PQRS TUV WXYZ e non utilizzare le etichette PRS TUV
WXY e OPER.
15.拆下操作面板页（16）。 16.使用酒精清洁操作面板页（16）的数字键上部，粘贴英文字母标签 (D)。
在亚洲和大洋州，请使用 PQRS TUV WXYZ 标签，而不要使用 PRS TUV WXY 和 OPER 标签。
15.조작판넬시트（16）를 제거합니다 . 16.조작판넬시트（16）상에 숫자키 윗측을 알코올 청소하고 알파벳 라벨 (D) 을 붙입니다 . 아시아 /
오세아니아에서는 「PRS TUV WXY」 및 「OPER」 라벨을 사용하지 말고 「PQRS TUV WXYZ」
의 라벨을 사용할 것 .
15.この作業は不要。 16.この作業は不要。
10
A
16 15 13
14
17.Attach the operation panel sheet (16). 18.Reinstall the clear panel (15). 19.Reinstall the operation panel covers (13)
(14).
17.Fixer la tôle du panneau de commande (16). 18.Reposer le panneau transparent (15). 19.Reposer les couvercles du panneau de com-
mande (13) (14).
17.Fije la hoja del panel de trabajo (16). 18.Vuelva a instalar el panel transparente (15). 19.Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas del panel de
trabajo (13) (14).
17.Die Bedienfeldfolie (16) anbringen. 18.Die durchsichtige Platte (15) wieder anbrin- 19.Die Bedienfeldabdeckungen (13) (14) wie-
gen. der anbringen.
17.Applicare il foglio del pannello operativo 18.Reinstallare il pannello trasparente (15). 19.Reinstallare i coperchi (13) (14) del pannello
(16). operativo.
17.安装操作面板页（16）。 18.安装透明面板（15）。 19.安装操作面板的盖板（13）（14）。
17.조작판넬시트（16）를 붙입니다 . 18.클리어판넬（15）를 부착합니다 . 19.조작판넬 커버（13）（14）을 부착합니다 .
17.この作業は不要。 18.この作業は不要。 19.この作業は不要。
11
A F*
H**
I** For Australian model
(a)
G (c)
For New Zealand model
17
F* 17
H**
I**
(b) G (d)
* For China and 110v model ** For China model
Attach the PTT label (for 110 V models only). Attach the approval label (for Australian/New Zealand model only).
20.Wiping with alcohol in the position as shown above. Attach the PTT 21.Wiping with alcohol in the position as shown above. Attach the
label (F) at the point as shown above. approval label (G) at the point as shown above.
If there isn’t a connector(17),see the figure(a). If there isn’t a connector(17),see the figure(c).
If there is a connector(17),see the figure(b). If there is a connector(17),see the figure(d).
Perform this procedure for Australian/New Zealand model only.
Fixer l’étiquette d’approbation (pour la Chine, modèles 110 V seule- Fixer l’étiquette d’approbation (modèle pour l’Australie/Nouvelle-
ment). Zélande seulement).
20.Cette étape est superflue. 21.Cette étape est superflue.
Coloque la etiqueta de aprobación (para China, solo para los mode- Coloque la etiqueta de aprobación (sólo para los modelos Austra-
los de 110 V). liano/Nuevo Zelandés)
20.Este paso no es necesario. 21.Este paso no es necesario
Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen (für China nur 110-V-Mod- Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen (nur für Australien/Neusee-
elle). land-Modell).
20.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich. 21.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich.
Applicare l’etichetta di approvazione (per Cina, solo per i modelli da Applicare l’etichetta di approvazione (solo per il modello Australia/
110 V). Nuova Zelanda).
20.Questo passo non è richiesto. 21.Questo passo non è richiesto.
粘贴规格标签 ( 仅限中国规格 ) 粘贴规格标签 ( 仅适用于澳大利亚 / 新西兰型号 )
20.在粘贴标签或贴片前，请用酒精清洁粘贴位置。按照图示位置来粘贴贴 21.不需要本步骤。
片（H)。把规格标签（F) 粘贴在贴片（H) 上面。按照图示位置来粘贴名
称标签（I)。
如没有连接端子（17），请参照图（a）
如有连接端子（17），请参照图（b）
규격라벨의 부착 ( 중국 , 110V 사양만 ) 규격라벨의 부착 ( 오스트레일리아 / 뉴질랜드 사양만 )
20.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 . 21.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
規格ラベルの貼り付け ( 中国、
110V 仕様のみ ) 規格ラベルの貼り付け ( オーストラリア / ニュージーランド仕様のみ )
20.この作業は不要。 21.この作業は不要。
12
A
Initialize the FAX circuit board.
1.Plug the MFP into a power outlet, and turn on the main power.
2.Perform the maintenance mode U600 to initialize the FAX PWBs
Initialiser la carte à circuits FAX.
1.Brancher le MFP sur une prise d’alimentation et le mettre sous tension.
2.Exécuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser les cartes de cir-
cuit imprimé du fax .
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX.
1.Conecte el MFP a un receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor
principal.
2.Ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 para inicializar los FAX PWB.
Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte.
1.Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter
einschalten.
2.Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus, um die FAX-Karte zu ini-
tialisieren.
Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX.
1.Collegare l’MFP ad una presa di corrente e portare l’interruttore princi-
pale su On.
2.Eseguire il modo manutenzione U600 per inizializzare le schede PWB
FAX.
传真电话板的初始化
1.将 MFP 的电源插头插入电源插座，打开主电源。
2.执行维修保养模式 U600，初始化传真电路板。
FAX 회로기판 초기화
1.MFP 본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 한
다.
2.메인터넌스 모드 U600 을 실행하여 FAX 회로기판을 초기화합니다 .
FAX 基板の初期化
1.MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、 主電源スイッチを ON
にする。
2.メンテナンスモード U600 を実行し、
FAX 基板を初期化する。
13
A H
A E
I
C
B
D
J
G
When installing the multiport on a machine (A) which has the 'Home' key in the operation panel
Supplied parts C. Terminal seal.............................................. 1 Option
A. FAX circuit board ....................................... 1 D. Alphabet label ............................................ 1 J. Memory DIMM (128 MB) ........................... 1
B. Modular connector cable E. Memory DIMM (16 MB) ............................. 1 (H) and (I) are not supplied.
(120 V/Australian model only) F. PTT label (110V model only) ..................... 1 (D), (E), (F), (G) and (J) are not used.
PJJWC0016Z (UL Listed.HUAN HSIN G. Approval label Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
Type TL:120 V only) .................................. 1 (Australian/New Zealand models only) ...... 2 materials from the parts supplied.
Lors de l'installation du port multiple sur une machine (A) disposant de la touche 'Accueil' sur le panneau de commande
Pièces fournies E. Mémoire DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
A. Carte à circuits FAX ................................... 1 Option sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
B. Câble du connecteur modulaire (modèles J. Mémoire DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 pièces fournies.
pour l’Australie/120 V seulement).............. 1
C. Joint de borne............................................ 1 (F), (G), (H) et (I) ne sont pas fournis.
D. Etiquette de l’alphabet ............................... 1 (D), (E) et (J) ne sont pas utilisés.
Al instalar un puerto múltiple en una máquina (A) que dispone de la tecla 'Inicio' en el panel de controles
Partes suministradas E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-
A. Tarjeta de circuitos de fax .......................... 1 Opción rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
B. Cable conector modular (sólo para J. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
modelos de 120 V/Australianos)................ 1
C. Sello del terminal ....................................... 1 (F), (G), (H) y (I) no se suministran.
D. Etiqueta de alfabeto................................... 1 (D), (E) y (J) no se utilizan.
Bei Installation einer zweiten Leitung in einem Gerät (A), das über die Taste 'Startseite' im Bedienfeld verfügt
Enthaltene Teile Option Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
A. FAX-Leiterplatte......................................... 1 J. Speicher-DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
C. Verschlusskappe ....................................... 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
D. Alphabetaufkleber...................................... 1
E. Speicher-DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (B), (F), (G), (H) und (I) liegen nicht bei.
(D), (E) und (J) werden nicht benötigt.
Per l'installazione di una porta multipla su una macchina (A) dotata di tasto 'Home' sul pannello comandi
Parti fornite Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
A. Scheda a circuiti FAX ................................ 1 Opzioni protezione dalle parti fornite.
C. Guarnizione terminale ............................... 1 J. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
D. Etichetta alfabetica .................................... 1
E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (B), (F), (G), (H) e (I) non sono in dotazione.
(D), (E) e (J) non sono utilizzati.
当安装双路传真系统到那些操作面板上有 ' 主界面 ' 按键的机器 (A) 时
附属品 F. 规格标签 .............................1
A. 传真电路板........................... 1 H. 贴片 .................................1 (G) 并非附属品。
B. 电话线............................... 1 I. 名称标签 .............................1 不使用 (D),(E),(F),(H),(I) 和 (J)。
C. 端子密封............................. 1
D. 英文字母标签......................... 1 选购件 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
E. 内存模组 DIMM (16MB) ................. 1 J. 内存模组 DIMM (128MB) .................1 下。
조작판넬에 ' 홈 ' 키가 있는 본체 (A) 에 멀티 포트를 설치하는 경우
동봉품 옵션 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
A. FAX 기판 ........................................... 1 J. 메모리 DIMM（128MB）........................ 1 우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
C. 단자씰............................................... 1
D. 알파벳 라벨........................................ 1 （B）,（F）,（G）,（H）,（I）는 동봉되어 있지 않
E. 메모리 DIMM（16MB）......................... 1 습니다 .
（D）,（E）,(J) 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
操作パネルに ‘ ホーム ’ キーがある機械 (A) にマルチポートを設置する場合
同梱品 オプション 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
A. FAX 基板 ............................. 1 J. メモリーDIMM（128MB）..................1 は必ず取り外すこと。
B. モジュラーコード..................... 1
C. 端子シール........................... 1
E. メモリーDIMM（16MB）................... 1 (D),(F),(G),(H),(I) は、同梱されていない。
(E),(J) は、使用しない。
14
A
NOTICE
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines, and 30, 35, 45 and 55 ppm
monochrome machines.
References to high-speed MFPs in this document denote 65/65 and 75/70 ppm color machines, and 65 and 80 ppm monochrome machines.
(The generic procedure figures in this document show medium-speed MFPs.)
If the finisher is already installed, remove the finisher before installing FAX System(W).Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch
of the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
REMARQUE
Dans le présent document, les références aux MFP à vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 et 55/50 ppm et aux
machines monochromes 30, 35, 45 et 55 ppm.
Dans le présent document, les références aux MFP à grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines mono-
chromes 65 et 80 ppm. (Dans ce document, les chiffres des processus génériques renvoient aux MPF à vitesse moyenne.)
Si le retoucheur est déjà en place, le déposer avant de monter le FAX System(W).
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.
AVISO
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm y a las máqui-
nas monocromáticas de 30, 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las máquinas monocromáticas de
65 y 80 ppm. (Las ilustraciones de procedimientos genéricos de este documento muestran las MFP de velocidad media.)
Si el finalizador ya se encuentra instalado, desmóntelo antes de instalar el FAX System(W).
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared.
ANMERKUNG
Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 30, 35,
45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen.
Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm Monochrommas-
chinen. (Die Abbildungen der allgemeinen Prozeduren zeigen MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse.)
Falls der Finisher schon installiert ist, müssen Sie ihn ausbauen, bevor Sie das FAX System(W) installieren.
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
AVVISO
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 e 55/50 ppm, e le mac-
chine monocromatiche 30, 35, 45 e 55 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocromatiche 65
e 80 ppm. (Le figure della procedura generica riportate in questo documento mostrano le MFP a velocitò media.)
Se la finitrice è già installata, rimuovere la finitrice prima di installare il FAX System(W).
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.
注意
本文中的中速 MFP 代表彩色 25/25 页机型、30/30 页机型、35/35 页机型、45/45 页机型、55/50 页机型、黑白 30 页机型、35 页机型、45 页机型、55 页机型。
本文中的高速 MFP 代表彩色 65/65 页机型、75/70 页机型、黑白 65 页机型、80 页机型。（本文中的通用步骤的插图为中速 MFP。）
已安装装订器时，必须先拆下装订器再安装 FAX System(W)。
安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插座拔下电源插头。
주의
본문 중 중속 MFP 는 컬러 25/25, 30/30, 35/35, 45/45, 55/50 ppm 기종 , 흑백 30, 35, 45, 55 ppm 기종을 나타냅니다 .
본문 내 고속 MFP 는 컬러 65/65, 75/70 ppm 기종 , 흑백 65, 80 ppm 기종을 나타냅니다 .（본문에있는 일반적인 순서 일러스트는 중속 MFP 가 보여
집니다 .）
피니셔가 이미 장착되어 있는 경우에는 피니셔를 제거하고 FAX System(W) 를 설치할 것 .
설치 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리하십시오 .
注意
本文中の中速 MFP はカラー機の 25/25 枚機、30/30 枚機、35/35 枚機、45/45 枚機、55/50 枚機、
モノクロ機の 30 枚機、35 枚機、45 枚機、55 枚機を表す。
本文中の高速 MFP はカラー機の 65/65 枚機、75/70 枚機、モノクロ機の 65 枚機、 80 枚機を表す。 （本文中の共通手順イラストは中速 MFP とする。）
フィニッシャーがすでに装着されている場合は、フィニッシャーを取り外してから、FAX System(W) を取り付けること。
必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、 機械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業すること。
15
A
4 6
OPT2
Procedure 2.Remove 2 screws (6) and then remove the
Removing the slot cover OPT2 slot cover (5).
1.Remove the cover (4).
* For high-speed MFPs with/without the finisher and for medium-speed MFPs with the finisher
installed.
* This work is not required if a multiport is installed along with the fax system (OPT1).
Procédure 2.Déposer les 2 vis (6) puis le couvercle de la
Dépose du couvercle de la fente fente OPT2 (5).
1.Déposer le couvercle (4).
* Pour les imprimantes multifonction à grande vitesse avec/sans module de finition et pour les
imprimantes multifonction à vitesse moyenne avec le module de finition installé.
* Cette opération n'est pas nécessaire si un port multiple est installé avec le fax (OPT1).
Procedimiento 2.Quite 2 tornillos (6) y, después, quite la cubi-
Desmontaje de la cubierta de la ranura erta de la ranura OPT2 (5).
1.Quite la cubierta (4).
* Para los MFP de velocidad alta con/sin finalizador y para los MFP de velocidad media con el
finalizador instalado.
* Esto no es necesario realizarlo si hay instalado un puerto múltiple con el sistema de fax (OPT1).
Vorgehensweise 2.2 Schrauben (6) entfernen und dann die
Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung Abdeckung (5) des Einschubs OPT2 ent-
1.Die Abdeckung (4) entfernen. fernen.
* Bei schnellen MFPs mit/ohne Finisher oder mittelschnellen MFPs mit installiertem Finisher.
*Dies ist nicht nötig, wenn eine zweite Leitung zusammen mit dem FAX-System (OPT1) installiert
ist.
Procedura 2.Rimuovere le 2 viti (6) e quinidi rimuovere il
Rimozione del coperchio vano coperchio (5) del vano OPT2.
1.Rimuovere il coperchio (4).
* Per dispositivi MFP di fascia alta con/senza finisher e per dispositivi di fascia media con finisher
installato.
* Questa operazione non è richiesta quando con il modulo fax (OPT1) viene installata una porta
multipla.
安装步骤 2.拆除 2 颗螺丝 (6)，拆下 OPT2 的插槽盖板
拆下插槽盖板 (5)。
1.拆下盖板 (4)。
※ 对于高速机来说装订器可装可不装，对于中速机来说要安装。
※ 双路传真系统和传真系统（OPT1) 同时安装时，不需要此步骤。
설치순서 2.나사 (6) 2 개를 제거하고 OPT2 의 슬롯커버
슬롯커버 제거 (5) 를 제거합니다 .
1.커버 (4) 를 제거합니다 .
※ 피니셔 장착 또는 비장착의 고속 MFP 및 피니셔 장착 중속 MFP.
※ 이 작업은 멀티 포트가 팩스 시스템 (OPT1) 과 함께 설치되어 있는 경우에는 필요하지 않습니
다.
取付手順 2.ビス (6)2 本を外し、OPT2 のスロットカバー
スロットカバーの取り外し (5) を取り外す。
1.カバー(4) を取り外す。
※ 高速 MFP の場合および中速 MFP にフィニッシャー装着時の場合
※ ファクスシステム (OPT1) と同時にマルチポートを設置する場合この作業は不要。
16
A
OPT2
6
7
A
6
Install the FAX circuit board.
3.Insert the FAX circuit board (A) along the groove in OPT2 and secure the board with two screws (6) that have been removed in step 2.
Do not directly touch the FAX circuit board (A) terminal.
Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit board, or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board (A).
Direct the label (7) on to the FAX circuit board (A) toward left side and insert the board along the groove.
Installer la carte à circuits FAX.
3.Insérer la carte à circuits FAX (A) le long de la rainure dans l’OPT2 et la fixer à l’aide des deux vis (6) retirées à l’étape 2.
Ne pas toucher directement la borne de la carte à circuits FAX (A).
Tenir les parties inférieure et supérieure de la carte à circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour insérer la carte à circuits FAX (A).
Orienter l'étiquette (7) de la carte à circuits FAX (A) comme illustré et insérer la plaquette le long de la rainure.
Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX.
3.Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax (A) a lo largo de la ranura de OPT2 y asegúrela con los dos tornillos (6) que ha quitado en el paso 2.
No toque directamente el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A).
Sujete las partes superior e inferior de la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX (A).
Oriente la etiqueta (7) en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A) como se indica en la ilustración e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura.
Installieren der FAX-Leiterplatte.
3.FAX-Leiterplatte (A) in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT2 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 2 ausgebauten Schrauben (6) befestigen.
Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX-Platine (A) nicht mit den Fingern.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) so in die Nut einsetzen, dass der Aufkleber (7) wie abgebildet zur Leiterplatte zeigt.
Installare la scheda a circuiti FAX.
3.Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX (A) lungo l’incavo nell’OPT2 e fissare la scheda con le due viti (6) rimosse nell’operazione 2.
Non toccare direttamente il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX (A),
Per inserire il circuito FAX (A), tenere l’estremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX, o la sporgenza della scheda a circuiti FAX.
Orientare l'etichetta (7) sulla scheda a circuiti FAX (A) come indicato nell'illustrazione e inserire la scheda lungo l'incavo.
安装传真电路板
3.沿着 OPT2 的沟槽插入传真电路板 (A) 并用在步骤 2 中拆下的两颗螺钉 (6) 固定电路板。
请勿直接触摸传真电路板 (A) 端子。
按住传真电路板的顶部和底部，或者按住电路板的突出部将传真电路板 (A) 插入。
将传真电路板 (A) 上的标签 (7) 保持图示中的方向，将电路板沿着沟槽方向插入。
FAX 회로기판 장착
3.OPT2 의 홈을 따라 FAX 회로기판 (A) 를 삽입하고 앞 순서 2 에서 제거한 나사 (6) 2 개로 고정합니다 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 의 단자에 직접 닿지 않도록 할 것 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 삽입 시 , 회로기판의 상하 또는 돌출부를 잡을 것 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 를 부착된 라벨 (7) 그림 표기 방향으로 삽입할 것 .
FAX 基板の取り付け
3.OPT2 の溝に沿って FAX 基板 (A) を挿入し、手順 2 で外したビス (6)2 本で固定する。
FAX 基板 (A) の端子に直接触れないこと。
FAX 基板 (A) の挿入時は基板の上下か突起を持つこと。
FAX 基板 (A) は、貼り付けられているラベル (7) が図に示す方向になるように、 挿入すること。
17
A
10
C
C
C C
Seal the terminal. On 120 V models, be sure that it is not attached
4.Wipe the surface of the telephone terminal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal (C). over the top of the approval label (10).
The telephone terminal on the FAX circuit board installed to OPT2 is unavailable (invalid). Seal
the terminal securely to prevent a user from connecting a separate phone.
Fermer hermétiquement la borne. Sur les modèles 120 V, attention à ne pas
4.Nettoyer la surface de la borne de téléphone avec de l’alcool, et apposer le joint de borne (C). installer en recouvrant le haut de l'étiquette
La borne de téléphone de la carte à circuits FAX installée sur l’OPT2 n’est pas utilisable d'approbation (10).
(invalide). Fermer hermétiquement la borne pour empêcher tout utilisateur de connecter un télé-
phone séparé.
Selle el terminal. En los modelos de 120 V, asegúrese de que no
4.Limpie la superficie del terminal de teléfono con alcohol y pegue el sello de terminal (C). se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación (10).
El terminal de teléfono de la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX instalado en el OPT2 no está disponible
(inválido). Selle firmemente el terminal para evitar que un usuario conecte un teléfono por sepa-
rado.
Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse. Bei 120-V-Modellen darauf achten, dass der
4.Die Oberfläche der Telefonanschlussbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und die Verschlusskappe (C) Aufkleber nicht den Genehmigungsaufkleber
anbringen. (10) verdeckt.
Die Telefonanschlussbuchse der in OPT2 installierten FAX-Leiterplatte ist nicht verfügbar (ungül-
tig). Die Anschlussbuchse vollkommen versiegeln, um den Anschluss eines separaten Telefons
zu verhindern.
Sigillare il terminale. Sui modelli da 120 V, assicurarsi che essa non
4.Pulire la superficie del terminale del telefono con alcol e fare aderire la guarnizione terminale (C). venga applicata sopra l’etichetta di approvazi-
Il terminale del telefono sulla scheda a circuiti FAX installata su OPT2 non è disponibile (invalido). one (10).
Sigillare il terminale saldamente per prevenire a un utente di collegare un telefono separato.
安装端子密封 120V 规格在粘贴时注意不要与认可标签 (10) 重
4.用酒精擦拭电话端子表面并粘上端子密封 (C)。 叠。
安装在 OPT2 上的传真电路板的电话端子不可使用 ( 无效 )。为了避免用户错误与其它电话连接，
必须确实粘贴好端子密封。
단자씰의 부착 120V 사양은 허가 라벨 (10) 에 겹치지 않도록
4.TEL 단자주위를 알코올청소하고 단자씰 (C) 을 부착합니다 . 붙일 것 .
OPT2 에 부착한 FAX 회로기판의 TEL 단자는 사용불가（무효）가 됩니다 . 사용자의 실수로 외부
전화에 연결하지 않도록 확실히 부착할 것 .
端子シールの貼り付け 120V 仕様は認可ラベル（10）
に重ならないよう
4.TEL 端子周囲をアルコール清掃し、 端子シール (C) を貼り付ける。 に、 貼り付けること。
OPT2 に取り付けた FAX 基板の TEL 端子は使用不可 （無効）となる。
ユーザーが誤って外付け電話
を接続しないよう確実に貼り付けること。
18
A
B
18
Connect the MFP to the telephone line.
5.Plug the modular connector cable (18) into the line terminal, and then connect the other end to
the telephone line.
For 100 V/120 V/Australian or Chinese models, use the supplied modular connector cable (B).
Connecter le MFP à la ligne de téléphone.
5.Brancher le câble du connecteur modulaire (18) à la borne de la ligne, puis connecter l'autre
extrémité à la ligne de téléphone.
Pour les modèles 100 V/120 V/Australie ou Chine, utilisez le câble à connecteur modulaire (B)
fourni.
Conecte el MFP a la línea telefónica.
5.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (18) en el terminal de línea y, a continuación, conecte el
otro extremo a la línea telefónica.
Para los modelos de 100 V/120 V/Australiano o Chino, utilice el cable conector modular (B)
suministrado.
Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung.
5.Telefonmodulkabel (18) in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose
anschließen.
Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel (B) für die 100-V/120-V/Australien- oder China-Modelle
verwenden.
Collegamento dell’MFP alla linea del telefono.
5.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (18) nel terminale della linea, e quindi collegare l'altro termi-
nale alla linea del telefono.
Per modelli da 100 V/120 V/Australia o Cina, utilizzare il cavo connettore modulare (B) in dota-
zione.
将 MFP 连接到电话线
5.将模块接插件电缆 (18) 插入电话线端子，然后将另一端与电话线连接。
对于 100V/120V/ 澳大利亚或中国机型，请使用随附的模块接插件电缆 (B)。
전화회선과의 연결
5.모듈러 코드 (18) 를 라인단자에 꽂습니다 . 다른 한 쪽의 플러그는 전화회선과 연결합니다 .
100V/120V/ 오스트레일리아 / 중국사양은 부속 모듈코드 (B) 를 사용할 것 .
電話回線との接続
5.モジュラーコード (18) をライン端子に差し込む。 もう片方のプラグは、電話回線へ接続する。
100V/120V/ オーストラリア / 中国仕様は付属のモジュラーコード (B) を使用すること。
19
A
11 2
1
4
Wiring the modular connector cable 7.Reinstall the covers (11). 8.Install the cover (4) which was removed in
(High-speed MFPs only) step 1.
6.Remove the covers (11) and run the modular * For high-speed MFPs with/without the fin-
connector cable as shown in the figure. isher and for medium-speed MFPs with the
*Run it by binding with the modular cords finisher installed.
from the Fax System (OPT1).
Câblage du câble à connecteur modulaire 7.Reposer les couvercles (11). 8. Installer le cache (4) qui a été retiré à l'étape 1.
(MFP à grande vitesse uniquement) * Pour les imprimantes multifonction à grande
6.Déposer les couvercles (11) et implanter le vitesse avec/sans module de finition et pour les
câble à connecteur modulaire comme illustré imprimantes multifonction à vitesse moyenne
par la figure. avec le module de finition installé.
*Le faire passer avec les cordons modulai-
res du fax (OPT1).
Tendido del cable conector modular 7.Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas (11). 8.Instale la cubierta (4) que se quitó en el paso
(Solo para las MFP de alta velocidad) 1.
6.Quite las cubiertas (11) y tienda el cable * Para los MFP de velocidad alta con/sin
conector modular como se muestra en la finalizador y para los MFP de velocidad
ilustración. media con el finalizador instalado.
* Tiéndalo uniéndolo con los cables modula-
res del sistema de fax (OPT1).
Verlegung des Modularsteckerkabels 7.Die Abdeckungen (11) wieder anbringen. 8.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (4), die in
(Nur MFP der Hochleistungsklasse) Schritt 1 entfernt wurde.
6.Die Abdeckungen (11) entfernen und das * Bei schnellen MFPs mit/ohne Finisher oder
Modularsteckerkabel gemäß der Abbildung mittelschnellen MFPs mit installiertem Fin-
verlegen. isher.
*Führen Sie es zusammen mit dem Kabel
des FAX-Systems (OPT1).
Cablaggio del cavo connettore modulare 7.Reinstallare i coperchi (11). 8.Installare il coperchio (4) rimosso al punto 1.
(Solo per MFP a velocità alta) * Per dispositivi MFP di fascia alta con/senza
6.Rimuovere i coperchi (11) e far passare il finisher e per dispositivi di fascia media con
cavo connettore modulare come indicato finisher installato.
nella figura.
*Infilarlo collegandolo ai cavi modulari del
modulo fax (OPT1).
电话线的配线（仅限高速 MFP 时） 7.安装盖板（11）。 8.安装在步骤 1 中取下的盖板（4）。
6.拆下盖板（11），将电话线如图所示穿过。 ※ 对于高速机来说装订器可装可不装，对于
※ 将传真系统（OPT1) 的连接线整理成束。 中速机来说要安装。
모듈러 코드의 배선（고속 MFP 의 경우만） 7.커버（11）을 장착합니다 . 8.1 단계에서 분리한 커버 (4) 를 설치합니다 .
6.커버（11）를 떼어 내고 모듈러 코드를 그림 ※ 피니셔 장착 및 비장착의 고속 MFP 및 피
과 같이 지나가게 합니다 . 니셔 장착 중속 MFP.
※ 팩스 시스템 (OPT1) 의 모듈러 코드와 묶
어서 실행합니다 .
モジュラーコードの配線 （高速 MFP の場合のみ） 7.カバー
（11）を取り付ける。 8.手順 1 で取り外したカバー （4）を取り付け
6.カバー（11）を取り外し、モジュラーコードを る。
図のように通す。 ※ 高速 MFP の場合および中速 MFP にフィ
※ ファクスシステム (OPT1) のモジュラー ニッシャー装着時の場合。
コードと束ねて通す。
20
A
Initialize the FAX circuit board. 3. If the FAX circuit board has been added to OPT2 (to initialize the FAX circuit
1.Plug the MFP into a power outlet, and turn on the main power. board in OPT2)
2.If the FAX PWBs were installed simultaneously to OPT1 and OPT2 (all Initialize OPT2 by pressing [PORT2], and the Start key in this order in the
maintenance mode U698 and executing the maintenance mode U600. If
Fax PWBs are initialized), perform the maintenance mode U600 to ini-
[ALL] is selected in U698, both OPT1 and OPT2 are initialized.
tialize the FAX PWBs. For details, see the service manual.
Initialiser la carte à circuits FAX. 3. Si la carte à circuits FAX a été ajoutée à l’OPT2 (pour initialiser la carte à circuits
1.Brancher le MFP sur une prise d’alimentation et le mettre sous tension. FAX dans l’OPT2)
2.Si les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax ont été installées en même Initialiser l’OPT2 en appuyant sur [PORT2] et la touche Départ dans cet ordre en
temps que OPT1 et OPT2 (toutes les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax mode de maintenance U698, et exécuter le mode de maintenance U600. Si [ALL]
est sélectionné dans U698, l’OPT1 et l’OPT2 sont tous deux initialisés. Pour plus
sont initialisées), exécuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser
de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax.
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX. 3. Si la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX se agregó a OPT2 (para inicializar la tarjeta
1.Conecte el MFP a un receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor de circuitos de FAX en OPT2)
principal. Inicialice el OPT2 presionando [PORT2] y la tecla de Inicio en ese orden en el
modo de mantenimiento U698 y ejecutando el modo de mantenimiento U600.
2.Si se instalaron FAX PWB simultáneamente a OPT1 y OPT2 (se ini- Si se selecciona [ALL] en U698, se inicializan ambos OPT1 y OPT2. Para
cializan todos los FAX PWB), ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
para inicializar los FAX PWB.
Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte. 3. Wenn die FAX-Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugefügt worden ist (um die FAX-Leit-
1.Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter erplatte in OPT2 zu in7itialisieren)
einschalten. OPT2 initialisieren. Dazu [PORT2] und die Start-Taste im
Wartungsmodus U698 in dieser Reihenfolge drücken und den
2.Falls die FAX-Karten gleichzeitig in OPT1 und OPT2 installiert werden Wartungsmodus U600 ausführen. Wenn [ALL] in U698 gewählt wird, werden
(alle FAX-Karten werden initialisiert), führen Sie den Wartungsmodus OPT1 und OPT2 initialisiert. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
U600 aus, um die FAX-Karten zu initialisieren.
Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX. 3. Se la scheda a circuiti è stata aggiunta all’OPT2 (per inzializzare la scheda
1.Collegare l’MFP ad una presa di corrente e portare l’interruttore princi- a circuiti FAX nell’OPT2)
pale su On. Inizializzare OPT2 premendo [PORT2] e il tasto Avvio in questo ordine nel
2.Se sono state installate simultaneamente le schede FAX PWB su modo di manutenzione U698 ed eseguendo il modo di manutenzione U600.
OPT1 e OPT2 (tutte le schede FAX PWB sono inizializzate), eseguire Se viene selezionato [ALL] nel modo U698, entrambi OPT1 e OPT2 sono
il modo manutenzione U600 per inizializzare le schede FAX PWB. inizializzati. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
传真电话板的初始化 3.在 OPT2 上增设时
1.将 MFP 的电源插头插入电源插座，打开主电源。 (OPT2 的传真电路板初始化 )
2.当把传真电路板同时安装到 OPT1 和 OPT2 时（全部的传真电路板初始 只进行 OPT2 初始化时，在维修保养模式 U698 状态下，按顺序按下
化），执行维修保养模式 U600，初始化传真电路板。 “PORT2”、开始键，执行维修保养模式 U600。
在 U698 状态下设定 “ALL” 时，会使 OPT1 和 OPT2 均初始化。
有关详信息，请参见维修手册。
FAX 회로기판의 초기화 3. OPT2 에 증설한 경우 (OPT2 의 FAX 기판을 초기화 )
1.MFP 본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 한 메인터넌스모드 U698 에서 「PORT2」, 시작키 순으로 누릅니다 . 메인터넌
다. 스 모드 U600 을 실행하고 FAX 회로기판을 초기화합니다 .
2.OPT1 과 OPT2 에 FAX 회로기판을 동시에 설치한 경우 ( 모든 FAX 회 U698 에서 「ALL」을 설정하면 OPT1 과 OPT2 양쪽을 초기화하기 때문에
주의할 것 .
로기판이 초기화됨 ), 메인터넌스 모드 U600 을 수행하여 FAX 회로기
상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
판을 초기화합니다 .
FAX 基板の初期化 3.OPT2 に増設した場合 (OPT2 の FAX 基板を初期化 )
1.MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、 主電源スイッチを ON メンテナンスモード U698 で 「PORT2」、 スタートキーの順に押す。メンテ
にする。 ナンスモード U600 を実行し、FAX 基板を初期化する。
2.OPT1 と OPT2 に FAX 基板を同時に設置した場合 ( すべての FAX 基板を初 U698 で「ALL」を設定すると OPT1 と OPT2 両方を初期化するので注意す
期化 ) メンテナンスモード U600 を実行し、FAX 基板を初期化する。 ること。 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
21
H
A E
B
I
C
B
D
J
G
When installing the Fax system on a machine (B) which has the 'Accessibility Display' key in the operation panel
Supplied parts C. Terminal seal.............................................. 1 Option
A. FAX circuit board ....................................... 1 D. Alphabet label ............................................ 1 J. Memory DIMM (128 MB) ........................... 1
B. Modular connector cable E. Memory DIMM (16 MB) ............................. 1 (H) and (I) are not supplied.
(120 V/Australian model only) F. PTT label (110V model only) ..................... 1
PJJWC0016Z (UL Listed.HUAN HSIN G. Approval label Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
Type TL:120 V only) .................................. 1 (Australian/New Zealand models only) ...... 2 materials from the parts supplied.
Lors de l'installation du fax sur une machine (B) disposant de la touche 'Affich. accessibilité' sur le panneau de commande
Pièces fournies E. Mémoire DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande
A. Carte à circuits FAX ................................... 1 adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage
B. Câble du connecteur modulaire (modèles Option des pièces fournies.
pour l’Australie/120 V seulement).............. 1 J. Mémoire DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
C. Joint de borne............................................ 1
D. Etiquette de l’alphabet ............................... 1 (F),(G),(H) et (I) ne sont pas fournis.
Al instalar el sistema de fax en una máquina (B) que dispone de la tecla 'Pantalla acceso' en el panel de controles
Partes suministradas E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-
A. Tarjeta de circuitos de fax .......................... 1 rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
B. Cable conector modular (sólo para Opción
modelos de 120 V/Australianos)................ 1 J. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
C. Sello del terminal ....................................... 1
D. Etiqueta de alfabeto................................... 1 (F) ,(G) ,(H) y (I) no se suministran.
Bei Installation des FAX-Systems in einem Gerät (B), das über die Taste 'Zugriffsanzeige' im Bedienfeld verfügt
Enthaltene Teile Option Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
A. FAX-Leiterplatte......................................... 1 J. Speicher-DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
C. Verschlusskappe ....................................... 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
D. Alphabetaufkleber...................................... 1
E. Speicher-DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1
(B), (F), (G) , (H) und (I) liegen nicht bei.
Per l'installazione del modulo FAX su una macchina (B) dotata di tasto 'Visual. Accessibilità' sul pannello comandi
Parti fornite Opzioni Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
A. Scheda a circuiti FAX ................................ 1 J. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
C. Guarnizione terminale ............................... 1
D. Etichetta alfabetica .................................... 1
E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1
(B), (F), (G), (H) e (I) non sono in dotazione.
当安装传真系统到那些操作面板上有 ' 扩大显示 ' 按键的机器 (B) 时
附属品 F. 规格标签 .............................1
A. 传真电路板........................... 1 H. 贴片 .................................1 (G) 并非附属品。
B. 电话线............................... 1 I. 名称标签 .............................1 不使用 (I)。
C. 端子密封............................. 1
D. 英文字母标签......................... 1 选购件 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
E. 内存模组 DIMM (16MB) ................. 1 J. 内存模组 DIMM (128MB) .................1 下。
조작판넬에 ' 유니버셜 ' 키가 있는 본체 (B) 에 팩스 시스템을 설치하는 경우
동봉품 옵션 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
A. FAX 기판 ........................................... 1 J. 메모리 DIMM（128MB）........................ 1 우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
C. 단자씰............................................... 1
D. 알파벳 라벨........................................ 1
E. 메모리 DIMM（16MB）......................... 1
(B),(F),(G),(H),(I) 는 동봉되어 있지 않습니다 .
操作パネルに ‘ ユニバーサル ’ キーがある機械 (B) にファクスシステムを設置する場合
同梱品 オプション 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合
A. FAX 基板 ............................. 1 J. メモリーDIMM（128MB）..................1 は、
必ず取り外すこと。
B. モジュラーコード..................... 1
C. 端子シール........................... 1
E. メモリーDIMM（16MB）................... 1
(D),(F),(G),(H),(I) は、同梱されていない。
22
B
NOTICE
If the finisher is already installed, remove the finisher before installing FAX System(W).
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
REMARQUE
Si le retoucheur est déjà en place, le déposer avant de monter le FAX System(W).
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.
AVISO
Si el finalizador ya se encuentra instalado, desmóntelo antes de instalar el FAX System(W).
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared.
ANMERKUNG
Falls der Finisher schon installiert ist, müssen Sie ihn ausbauen, bevor Sie das FAX System(W) installieren.
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
AVVISO
Se la finitrice è già installata, rimuovere la finitrice prima di installare il FAX System(W).
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.
注意
已安装装订器时，必须先拆下装订器再安装 FAX System(W)。
安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插座拔下电源插头。
주의
피니셔가 이미 장착되어 있는 경우에는 피니셔를 제거하고 FAX System(W) 를 설치할 것 .
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리하십시오 .
注意
フィニッシャーがすでに装着されている場合は、フィニッシャーを取り外してから、FAX System(W) を取り付けること。
必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業すること。
23
B
2 3
1 E J
Procedure 2.Install the memory DIMM (E) or the optional 3.Reinstall the cover (2) using the 2 screws
Installing the memory DIMM memory DIMM (J) into the memory slot (3) (1).
1.Remove 2 screws (1), and then remove the on the lower level (FLS).
cover (2). Install it with the IC side facing down.
Insert it in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks.
Procédure 2.Installer la mémoire DIMM (E) ou la mémoire 3.Reposez le couvercle (2) à l'aide des 2 vis (1).
Installation de la mémoire DIMM DIMM en option (J) dans la fente mémoire
1.Déposer les 2 vis (1) puis enlevez le couver- (3) se trouvant au niveau inférieur (FLS).
cle (2). L'installer avec le côté IC en bas.
L'insérer dans la direction de la flèche
jusqu'au clic.
Procedimiento 2.Instale la memoria DIMM (E), o la memoria 3. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (2) utilizando los 2
Instalación de la memoria DIMM DIMM opcional (J), en la ranura para memo- tornillos (1).
1.Quite 2 tornillos (1) y, después, desmonte la ria (3) en el nivel inferior (FLS).
cubierta (2). Instálelo con el lado IC hacia abajo.
Insértela en la dirección que indica la flecha
hasta que escuche un clic.
Vorgehensweise 2. Setzen Sie das DIMM-Speichermodul (E) oder 3.Setzen Sie die Abdeckung (2) wieder mit den 2
Installation der DIMM-Speichermodule das optionale DIMM-Speichermodul (J) in die Schrauben (1) an.
1.Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben (1) und nehmen untere Position (FLS) der Speicherbank (3) ein.
Sie dann die Abdeckung (2) ab. Mit der IC-Seite nach unten weisend install-
ieren.
Schieben Sie das Modul in Pfeilrichtung, bis
es hörbar einrastet.
Procedura 2.Installare la memoria DIMM (E) o la memoria 3. Reinstallare il coperchio (2) utilizzando le 2 viti (1).
Installazione della memoria DIMM DIMM opzionale (J) nello slot della memoria
1.Rimuovere 2 viti (1), e quindi rimuovere il (3) al livello inferiore (FLS).
coperchio (2). Installare con il lato IC rivolto verso il basso.
Inserirla nella direzione della freccia finché
non scatta in posizione.
安装步骤 2.将内存模组 DIMM (E) 或选购件内存模组 3.使用 2 个螺丝 (1) 重新安装盖板 (2)。
安装内存模组 DIMM DIMM (J) 安装至下层 (FLS) 的内存插槽 (3)。
1.取下 2 个螺丝 (1)，然后取下盖板 (2)。 安装时，将 IC 侧正面朝下。
沿箭头方向将其插入到底直至发出喀嗒声。
설치순서 2. 메모리 DIMM（E） 또는 옵션 메모리 DIMM(J) 3. 나사 (1) 2 개로 커버 (2) 를 원래대로 장착합니
메모리 DIMM 설치 를 하단 (FLS) 의 메모리 슬롯 (3) 에 장착합니 다.
1.나사 (1) 2 개를 제거하고 커버 (2) 를 제거합 다.
니다 . IC 면을 밑으로 할 것 .
딸칵하고 소리가 날 때까지 화살표 방향으로
삽입합니다 .
取付手順 2.メモリーDIMM（E）または、オプションのメモ 3.ビス (1)2 本で、
カバー(2) を元通り取り付
メモリーDIMM の取り付け リーDIMM(J) を下段 (FLS) のメモリース ける。
1.ビス (1)2 本を外し、カバー(2) を取り外す。 ロット (3) に取り付ける。
IC 面を下向きに取り付けること。
カチッと音がするまで矢印方向に挿入する。
24
B
OPT1
Removing the slot cover
4.Remove 2 screws (5) and then remove the OPT1 slot cover (4).
* Do not use OPT2.
Dépose du couvercle de la fente
4.Déposer les 2 vis (5) puis le couvercle de la fente OPT1 (4).
* Ne pas utiliser OPT2.
Desmontaje de la cubierta de la ranura
4.Quite 2 tornillos (5) y, después, quite la cubierta de la ranura OPT1 (4).
* No utilice OPT2.
Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung
4. 2 Schrauben (5) entfernen und dann die Abdeckung (4) des Einschubs OPT1 entfernen.
* OPT2 nicht verrwenden.
Rimozione del coperchio vano
4.Rimuovere le 2 viti (5) e quinidi rimuovere il coperchio (4) del vano OPT1.
* Non utilizzare OPT2.
拆下插槽盖板
4.拆除 2 颗螺丝 (5)，拆下 OPT1 的插槽盖板 (4)。
※ 不使用 OPT2。
슬롯커버 제거
4.나사 (5) 2 개를 제거하고 OPT1 의 슬롯커버 (4) 를 제거합니다 .
※ OPT2 는 사용하지 말 것 .
スロットカバーの取り外し
4.ビス (5)2 本を外し、OPT1 のスロットカバー(4) を取り外す。
※OPT2 は使用しないこと。
25
B
6
1
OPT1
Install the FAX circuit board.
5.Insert the FAX circuit board (A) along the groove in OPT1 and secure the board with two screws
(5) that have been removed in step 4.
Do not directly touch the FAX circuit board (A) terminal. Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit
board, or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board (A).
Direct the label (6) on to the FAX circuit board (A) as indicated in the illustration and insert the
board along the groove.
Installer la carte à circuits FAX.
5.Insérer la carte à circuits FAX (A) le long de la rainure dans l’OPT1 et la fixer à l’aide des deux vis
(5) retirées à l’étape 4.
Ne pas toucher directement la borne de la carte à circuits FAX (A). Tenir les parties inférieure et
supérieure de la carte à circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour insérer la carte à circuits FAX
(A).Orienter l'étiquette (6) de la carte à circuits FAX (A) comme illustré et insérer la plaquette le
long de la rainure.
Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de fax.
5. Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax (A) a lo largo de la ranura de OPT1 y asegúrela con los dos tornillos
(5) que ha quitado en el paso 4.
No toque directamente el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos del fax (A). Sujete las partes superior e infe-
rior de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de fax
(A).Oriente la etiqueta (6) en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A) como se indica en la ilustración e inserte
la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura.
Installieren der FAX-Leiterplatte.
5.FAX-Leiterplatte (A) in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in
Schritt 4 ausgebauten Schrauben (5) befestigen.
Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX-Platine (A) nicht mit den Fingern. Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A)
bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) so in die Nut einsetzen, dass der Aufkleber (6) wie abgebildet zur
Leiterplatte zeigt.
Installare la scheda a circuiti FAX.
5.Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX (A) lungo l’incavo nell’OPT1 e fissare la scheda con le due viti (5)
rimosse nell’operazione 4.
Non toccare direttamente il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX (A). Per inserire il circuito FAX
(A), tenere l’estremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX, o la sporgenza della scheda
a circuiti FAX. Orientare l'etichetta (6) sulla scheda a circuiti FAX (A) come indicato nell'illustra-
zione e inserire la scheda lungo l'incavo.
安装传真电路板
5.沿着 OPT1 的沟槽插入传真电路板 (A) 并用在步骤 4 中拆下的两颗螺钉 (5) 固定电路板。
请勿直接触摸传真电路板 (A) 端子。
按住传真电路板的顶部和底部，或者按住电路板的突出部将传真电路板 (A) 插入。
将传真电路板 (A) 上的标签 (6) 保持图示中的方向，将电路板沿着沟槽方向插入。
FAX 회로기판 장착
5.OPT1 의 홈을 따라 FAX 회로기판 (A) 를 삽입하고 앞 순서 4 에서 제거한 나사 (5) 2 개로 고정합
니다 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 의 단자에 직접 닿지 않도록 할 것 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 삽입 시 , 회로기판의 상하 또는 돌출부를 잡을 것 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 를 부착된 라벨 (6) 그림 표기 방향으로 삽입할 것 .
FAX 基板の取り付け
5.OPT1 の溝に沿って FAX 基板 (A) を挿入し、手順 4 で外したビス (5)2 本で固定する。
FAX 基板 (A) の端子に直接触れないこと。
FAX 基板 (A) の挿入時は基板の上下か突起を持つこと。
FAX 基板 (A) は、貼り付けられているラベル (6) が図に示す方向になるように、 挿入すること。
26
B
Connect the MFP to the telephone line. For 100 V/120 V/Australian or Chinese models,
6.Plug the modular connector cable (7) into the line terminal, and then connect the other end to the use the supplied modular connector cable (B).
telephone line.
Connecter le MFP à la ligne de téléphone. Pour les modèles 100 V/120 V/Australie ou
6.Brancher le câble du connecteur modulaire (7) à la borne de la ligne, puis connecter l'autre Chine, utilisez le câble à connecteur modulaire
extrémité à la ligne de téléphone. (B) fourni.
Conecte el MFP a la línea telefónica. Para los modelos de 100 V/120 V/Australiano o
6.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (7) en el terminal de línea y, a continuación, Chino, utilice el cable conector modular (B)
conecte el otro extremo a la línea telefónica. suministrado.
Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung. Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel (B) für
6.Telefonmodulkabel (7) in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose die 100-V/120-V/Australien- oder China-Modelle
anschließen. verwenden.
Collegamento dell’MFP alla linea del telefono. Per modelli da 100 V/120 V/Australia o Cina, uti-
6.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (7) nel terminale della linea, e quindi collegare l'altro termi- lizzare il cavo connettore modulare (B) in dota-
nale alla linea del telefono. zione.
将 MFP 连接到电话线 对于 100V/120V/ 澳大利亚或中国机型，请使用随
6.将模块接插件电缆 (7) 插入电话线端子，然后将另一端与电话线连接。 附的模块接插件电缆 (B)。
전화회선 연결 100V/120V/ 오스트레일리아 / 중국사양은 부속
6.모듈 코드 (7) 을 라인단자에 꽂습니다 . 다른 한 쪽의 플러그는 전화회선과 연결합니다 . 모듈러 코드 (B) 를 사용할 것 .
電話回線との接続 100V/120V/ オーストラリア / 中国仕様は付属の
6.モジュラーコード (7) をライン端子に差し込む。もう片方のプラグは、
電話回線へ接続する。 モジュラーコード (B) を使用すること。
27
9
1 C C
8 1
Connect the MFP to the separate phone ). If you don't connect the MFP to the separate
7.Plug the modular connector cable (8) into the telephone terminal, and then connect the other end phone, wipe the surface of the telephone termi-
to the separate phone. nal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal (C)
upon the customer's request.
On 120 V models, be sure that it is not attached
over the top of the approval label (9).
Connecter le MFP au téléphone séparé. Si le MFP n’est pas connecté au téléphone
7.Brancher le câble du connecteur modulaire (8) à la borne du téléphone, puis connecter l'autre séparé à la demande du client, nettoyer la sur-
extrémité au téléphone séparé. face de la borne de téléphone avec de l’alcool et
apposer le joint de borne (C).
Sur les modèles 120 V, attention à ne pas
installer en recouvrant le haut de l'étiquette
d'approbation (9).
Conecte el MFP al teléfono separado. Si no conecta el MFP a un teléfono separado,
7.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (8) en el terminal del teléfono y, a continuación, conecte el limpie la superficie del terminal del teléfono con
otro extremo al teléfono separado. alcohol y pegue el sello del terminal (C), a solic-
itud del cliente.
En los modelos de 120 V, asegúrese de que no
se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación (9).
Anschließen des MFP an das separate Telefon. Wenn der MFP nicht an das separate Telefon ange-
7.Das Telefonmodulkabel (8) in die Telefonbuchse einstecken und das andere Ende an das sepa- schlossen wird, die Oberfläche der Telefonbuchse
rate Telefon anschließen. mit Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe (C)
einsetzen, falls vom Kunden gewünscht.
Bei 120-V-Modellen darauf achten, dass der
Aufkleber nicht den Genehmigungsaufkleber (9)
verdeckt.
Collegamento dell’MFP al telefono separato. Nel caso in cui non si colleghi l'MFP al telefono
7.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (8) nel terminale del telefono, e quindi collegare l'altro termi- separato, pulire la superficie del terminale del
nale al telefono separato. telefono con dell'alcol e applicare la guarnizione
terminale (C) a richiesta del cliente.
Sui modelli da 120 V, assicurarsi che essa non
venga applicata sopra l’etichetta di approvazi-
one (9).
将 MFP 连接到其它电话 如果您没有将 MFP 连接至其他电话，请用酒精擦
7.将模块接插件电缆 (8) 插入电话端子，然后将另一端与其他电话连接。 拭电话端子表面，并按照客户要求粘上端子密封
(C)。
120V 规格在粘贴时注意不要与认可标签 (9) 重
叠。
외부 전화와 연결 외부 전화와 연결하지 않는 경우 고객의 요청에
7.모듈코드 (8) 를 TEL 단자에 꽂습니다 . 다른 한 쪽의 플러그는 외부 전화와 연결합니다 . 따라 TEL 단자 주위를 알코올 청소하고 단자씰
(C) 을 붙입니다 .
120V 사양은 허가 라벨 (9) 에 겹치지 않도록 붙
일 것.
外付け電話との接続 外付け電話と接続しない場合、 お客様の要望に
7.モジュラーコード (8) を TEL 端子に差し込む。
もう片方のプラグは、外付け電話と接続する。 より、TEL 端子周囲をアルコール清掃し、端子
シール (C) を貼り付ける。
120V 仕様は認可ラベル (9) に重ならないよう
に、 貼りつけること。
28
B
C
1 C
Seal the terminal
(for New Zealand model)
8.Wipe the surface of the telephone termi-
nal with alcohol and adhere the terminal
seal (C).
Perform this procedure for New Zealand
model only.
Fermer hermétiquement la borne
(modèle pour la Nouvelle-Zélande)
8.Cette étape est superflue.
Selle el terminal
(para el modelo Nuevo Zelandés)
8.Este paso no es necesario.
Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse
(für Neuseeland-Modell)
8.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich.
Sigillare il terminale
(per il modello Nuova Zelanda)
8.Questo passo non è richiesto.
安装端子密封 ( 仅适用于新西兰型号 )
8.不需要本步骤。
단자씰의 부착 ( 뉴질랜드 사양만 )
8.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
端子シールの貼り付け
( ニュージーランド仕様のみ )
8.この作業は不要。
29
13
11
B
10
10
12
Attach the alphabet labels (excluding 100 V models). 10.Remove the clear panel (13).
9.Insert a flat-head screwdriver at the tip indicated by the arrows (10) as shown on the left, and
slide the operation panel covers (11) (12) to remove them.
Apposer les étiquettes de l’alphabet (Sauf sur les modèles 100 V). 10.Déposer le panneau transparent (13).
9.Insérer un tournevis à lame à l'endroit repéré par les flèches (10) comme illustré ci-contre à
gauche et faire glisser les couvercles du panneau de commande (11) (12) pour les déposer.
Fije las etiquetas de alfabeto (a excepción de los modelos de 100 V). 10.Quite el panel transparente (13).
9.Inserte un destornillador de pala plana en la punta que indican las flechas (10) como se muestra
a la izquierda y deslice las cubiertas del panel de trabajo (11) (12) para quitarlas.
Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber (ausgenommen 100-V-Modelle). 10.Die durchsichtige Platte (13) entfernen.
9.Einen flachen Schraubendreher an der links mit Pfeilen (10) bezeichneten Spitze einschieben
und die Bedienfeldabdeckungen (11) (12) verschieben, um sie dann abzunehmen.
Applicare le etichette alfabetiche (esclusi i modelli da 100 V). 10.Rimuovere il pannello trasparente (13).
9.Inserire un cacciavite a testa piana nel punto indicato dalla freccia (10) come mostrato sulla sinis-
tra, e slittare i coperchi (11) (12) del pannello operativo per rimuoverli.
粘贴英文字母标签 (100V 规格以外 ) 10.拆下透明面板（13）。
9.如图所示，在▲箭头（10）前方插入一字螺丝刀，滑动并取下操作面板的盖板（11）（12）。
알파벳 라벨의 부착 (100V 사양 이외 ) 10.클리어 판넬（13）을 제거합니다 .
9.그림과 같이 ▲ 표시（10） 앞에 일자 드라이버를 삽입해 조작 판넬의 커버（11）（12）를 밀면서
떼어 냅니다 .
アルファベットラベルの貼り付け (100V 仕様以外 ) 10.この作業は不要。
9.この作業は不要。
30
14
D
B
14
11.Remove the operation panel sheet (14). 12.Wipe the area above the numeric keys on the operation panel sheet (14) with alcohol and attach
the alphabet labels (D).
In Asia and Oceania, use PQRS TUV WXYZ label, and do not use PRS TUV WXY and OPER
labels.
11.Déposer la tôle du panneau de commande 12.Nettoyer à l'alcool la surface au-dessus des touches numériques sur la tôle du panneau de com-
(14). mande (14) et apposer les étiquettes alphabétiques (D).
En Asie et Océanie, utiliser l’étiquette PQRS TUV WXYZ et pas les étiquettes PRS TUV WXY et
OPER.
11.Quite la hoja del panel de trabajo (14). 12.Limpie el área sobre las teclas numéricas de la hoja del panel de trabajo (14) con alcohol y fije
las etiquetas de alfabeto (D).
En Asia y Oceanía, utilice la etiqueta PQRS TUV WXYZ y no use las PRS TUV WXY ni las
OPER.
11.Die Bedienfeldfolie (14) entfernen. 12.Den Bereich über den Zifferntasten an der Bedienfeldfolie (14) mit Alkohol abwischen und die
Alphabetaufkleber (D) hier anbringen.
In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PQRS TUV WXYZ verwenden; nicht die Aufkleber PRS
TUV WXY und OPER verwenden.
11.Rimuovere il foglio (14) del pannello opera- 12.Pulire l’area sopra i tasti numerici sul foglio del pannello operativo (14) con alcool ed applicare le
tivo. etichette alfabetiche (D).
In Asia ed Oceania, utilizzare l’etichetta PQRS TUV WXYZ e non utilizzare le etichette PRS TUV
WXY e OPER.
11.拆下操作面板页（14）。 12.使用酒精清洁操作面板页（14）的数字键上部，粘贴英文字母标签 (D)。
在亚洲和大洋州，请使用 PQRS TUV WXYZ 标签，而不要使用 PRS TUV WXY 和 OPER 标签。
11.조작판넬시트（14）를 제거합니다 . 12.조작판넬시트（14）상에 숫자키 윗측을 알코올 청소하고 알파벳 라벨 (D) 을 붙입니다 .
아시아 / 오세아니아에서는 「PRS TUV WXY」 및 「OPER」 라벨을 사용하지 말고 「PQRS TUV
WXYZ」의 라벨을 사용할 것 .
11.この作業は不要。 12.この作業は不要。
31
11
14
13
B
12
13.Attach the operation panel sheet (14). 14.Reinstall the clear panel (13). 15.Reinstall the operation panel covers (11)
(12).
13.Fixer la tôle du panneau de commande (14). 14.Reposer le panneau transparent (13). 15.Reposer les couvercles du panneau de com-
mande (11) (12).
13.Fije la hoja del panel de trabajo (14). 14.Vuelva a instalar el panel transparente (13). 15.Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas del panel de
trabajo (11) (12).
13.Die Bedienfeldfolie (14) anbringen. 14.Die durchsichtige Platte (13) wieder anbrin- 15.Die Bedienfeldabdeckungen (11) (12) wieder
gen. anbringen.
13.Applicare il foglio del pannello operativo 14.Reinstallare il pannello trasparente (13). 15.Reinstallare i coperchi (11) (12) del pannello
(14). operativo.
13.安装操作面板页（14）。 14.安装透明面板（13）。 15.安装操作面板的盖板（11）（12）。
13.조작판넬시트（14）를 붙입니다 . 14.클리어판넬（13）를 부착합니다 . 15.조작판넬 커버（11）（12）을 부착합니다 .
13.この作業は不要。 14.この作業は不要。 15.この作業は不要。
32
For Australian model
B
OPT2
OPT2
A2 B1
A2 B1
F* G
H** For New Zealand model
OPT1
OPT1
*For china and 110v model **For china model
Attach the PTT label (for 110 V model only). Attach the approval label (for Australian/New Zealand model only).
16.Attach the PTT label (F) at the point as shown above after wiping with 17.Attach the approval label (G) at the point as shown above after wiping
alcohol. with alcohol.
Perform this procedure for Australian/New Zealand model only.
Fixer l’étiquette d’approbation (pour la Chine, modèles 110 V seule- Fixer l’étiquette d’approbation (modèle pour l’Australie/Nouvelle-
ment). Zélande seulement).
16.Cette étape est superflue. 17.Cette étape est superflue.
Coloque la etiqueta de aprobación (para China, solo para los mode- Coloque la etiqueta de aprobación (sólo para los modelos Austra-
los de 110 V). liano/Nuevo Zelandés)
16.Este paso no es necesario. 17.Este paso no es necesario.
Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen (für China nur 110-V-Mod- Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen (nur für Australien/Neusee-
elle). land-Modell).
16.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich. 17.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich.
Applicare l’etichetta di approvazione (per Cina, solo per i modelli da Applicare l’etichetta di approvazione (solo per il modello Australia/
110 V). Nuova Zelanda)
16.Questo passo non è richiesto. 17.Questo passo non è richiesto.
粘贴规格标签 ( 仅限中国规格 ) 粘贴规格标签 ( 仅适用于澳大利亚 / 新西兰型号 )
16.在粘贴标签或贴片前，请用酒精清洁粘贴位置。按照图示位置来粘贴贴 17.不需要本步骤。
片（H)。把规格标签（F) 粘贴在贴片（H) 上面。
규격라벨의 부착 ( 중국 , 110V 사양만 ) 규격라벨의 부착 ( 오스트레일리아 / 뉴질랜드 사양만 )
16.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 . 17.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
規格ラベルの貼り付け ( 中国、
110V 仕様のみ ) 規格ラベルの貼り付け ( オーストラリア / ニュージーランド仕様のみ )
16.この作業は不要。 17.この作業は不要。
33
B
Initialize the FAX circuit board.
1.Plug the MFP into a power outlet, and turn on the main power.
2.Perform the maintenance mode U600 to initialize the FAX PWBs
Initialiser la carte à circuits FAX.
1.Brancher le MFP sur une prise d’alimentation et le mettre sous tension.
2.Exécuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser les cartes de cir-
cuit imprimé du fax .
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX.
1.Conecte el MFP a un receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor
principal.
2.Ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 para inicializar los FAX PWB.
Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte.
1.Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter
einschalten.
2.Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus, um die FAX-Karte zu ini-
tialisieren.
Questo passo non è richiesto.Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX.
1.Collegare l’MFP ad una presa di corrente e portare l’interruttore princi-
pale su On.
2.Eseguire il modo manutenzione U600 per inizializzare le schede PWB
FAX.
传真电话板的初始化
1.将 MFP 的电源插头插入电源插座，打开主电源。
2.执行维修保养模式 U600，初始化传真电路板。
FAX 회로기판의 초기화
1.MFP 본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 한
다.
2.메인터넌스 모드 U600 을 수행하여 FAX 회로기판을 초기화합니다 .
FAX 基板の初期化
1.MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、 主電源スイッチを ON
にする。
2.メンテナンスモード U600 を実行し、
FAX 基板を初期化する。
34
H
A E
B
I
C
B
D
J
G
When installing the multiport on a machine (B) which has the 'Accessibility Display' key in the operation panel
Supplied parts C. Terminal seal.............................................. 1 Option
A. FAX circuit board ....................................... 1 D. Alphabet label ............................................ 1 J. Memory DIMM (128 MB) ........................... 1
B. Modular connector cable E. Memory DIMM (16 MB) ............................. 1 (H) and (I) are not supplied.
(120 V/Australian model only) F. PTT label (110V model only) ..................... 1 (D), (E), (F), (G) and (J) are not used.
PJJWC0016Z (UL Listed.HUAN HSIN G. Approval label Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
Type TL:120 V only) .................................. 1 (Australian/New Zealand models only) ...... 2 materials from the parts supplied.
Lors de l'installation du port multiple sur une machine (B) disposant de la touche 'Affich. accessibilité' sur le panneau de commande
Pièces fournies E. Mémoire DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (D), (E) et (J) ne sont pas utilisés.
A. Carte à circuits FAX ................................... 1
B. Câble du connecteur modulaire (modèles Option Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande
pour l’Australie/120 V seulement).............. 1 J. Mémoire DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage
C. Joint de borne............................................ 1 des pièces fournies.
D. Etiquette de l’alphabet ............................... 1 (F), (G), (H) et (I) ne sont pas fournis.
Al instalar un puerto múltiple en una máquina (B) que dispone de la tecla 'Pantalla acceso' en el panel de controles
Partes suministradas E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (D), (E) y (J) no se utilizan.
A. Tarjeta de circuitos de fax .......................... 1
B. Cable conector modular (sólo para Opción Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-
modelos de 120 V/Australianos)................ 1 J. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
C. Sello del terminal ....................................... 1
D. Etiqueta de alfabeto................................... 1 (F), (G), (H) y (I) no se suministran.
Bei Installation einer zweiten Leitung in einem Gerät (B), das über die Taste 'Zugriffsanzeige' im Bedienfeld verfügt
Enthaltene Teile Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
A. FAX-Leiterplatte......................................... 1 Option und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
C. Verschlusskappe ....................................... 1 J. Speicher-DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
D. Alphabetaufkleber...................................... 1
E. Speicher-DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (B), (F), (G), (H) und (I) liegen nicht bei.
(D), (E) und (J) werden nicht benötigt.
Per l'installazione di una porta multipla su una macchina (B) dotata di tasto 'Visual. Accessibilità' sul pannello comandi
Parti fornite Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
A. Scheda a circuiti FAX ................................ 1 Opzioni protezione dalle parti fornite.
C. Guarnizione terminale ............................... 1 J. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
D. Etichetta alfabetica .................................... 1
E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (B), (F), (G), (H) e (I) non sono in dotazione.
(D), (E) e (J) non sono utilizzati.
当安装双路传真系统到那些操作面板上有 ' 扩大显示 ' 按键的机器 (B) 时
附属品 F. 规格标签 .............................1
A. 传真电路板........................... 1 H. 贴片 .................................1 (G) 并非附属品。
B. 电话线............................... 1 I. 名称标签 .............................1 不使用 (D),(E),(F),(H),(I), 和 (J)。
C. 端子密封............................. 1
D. 英文字母标签......................... 1 选购件 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
E. 内存模组 DIMM (16MB) ................. 1 J. 内存模组 DIMM (128MB) .................1 下。
조작판넬에 ' 유니버셜 ' 키가 있는 본체 (B) 에 멀티 포트를 설치하는 경우
동봉품 옵션 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
A. FAX 기판 ........................................... 1 J. 메모리 DIMM（128MB）........................ 1 우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
C. 단자씰............................................... 1
D. 알파벳 라벨........................................ 1 （B）,（F）,(G),（H）,(I) 는 동봉되어 있지 않습
E. 메모리 DIMM（16MB）......................... 1 니다 .
（D）,（E）,(J) 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
操作パネルに ‘ ユニバーサル ’ キーがある機械 (B) にマルチポートを設置する場合
同梱品 オプション 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合
A. FAX 基板 ............................. 1 J. メモリーDIMM（128MB）..................1 は、
必ず取り外すこと。
B. モジュラーコード..................... 1
C. 端子シール........................... 1
E. メモリーDIMM（16MB）................... 1 (D),(F),(G)),(H),(I) は、
同梱されていない。
(E),(J) は、使用しない。
35
B
NOTICE
If the finisher is already installed, remove the finisher before installing FAX System(W).
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
REMARQUE
Si le retoucheur est déjà en place, le déposer avant de monter le FAX System(W).
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.
AVISO
Si el finalizador ya se encuentra instalado, desmóntelo antes de instalar el FAX System(W).
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared.
ANMERKUNG
Falls der Finisher schon installiert ist, müssen Sie ihn ausbauen, bevor Sie das FAX System(W) installieren.
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
AVVISO
Se la finitrice è già installata, rimuovere la finitrice prima di installare il FAX System(W).
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.
注意
已安装装订器时，必须先拆下装订器再安装 FAX System(W)。
安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插座拔下电源插头。
주의
피니셔가 이미 장착되어 있는 경우에는 피니셔를 제거하고 FAX System(W) 를 설치할 것 .
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리하십시오 .
注意
フィニッシャーがすでに装着されている場合は、フィニッシャーを取り外してから、FAX System(W) を取り付けること。
必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業すること。
36
OPT2
B
Procedure
Removing the slot cover
1.Remove 2 screws (5) and then remove the OPT2 slot cover (4).
Procédure
Dépose du couvercle de la fente
1.Déposer les 2 vis (5) puis le couvercle de la fente OPT2 (4).
Procedimiento
Desmontaje de la cubierta de la ranura
1.Quite 2 tornillos (5) y, después, quite la cubierta de la ranura OPT2 (4).
Vorgehensweise
Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung
1.2 Schrauben (5) entfernen und dann die Abdeckung (4) des Einschubs OPT2 entfernen.
Procedura
Rimozione del coperchio vano
1.Rimuovere le 2 viti (2) e quinidi rimuovere il coperchio (1) del vano OPT2.
安装步骤
拆下插槽盖板
1.拆除 2 颗螺丝 (5)，拆下 OPT2 的插槽盖板 (4)。
설치순서
슬롯커버 제거
1.나사 (5) 2 개를 제거하고 OPT2 의 슬롯커버 (4) 를 제거합니다 .
取付手順
スロットカバーの取り外し
1.ビス (5)2 本を外し、OPT2 のスロットカバー(4) を取り外す。
37
6
B
5
OPT2
A
5
Install the FAX circuit board.
2.Insert the FAX circuit board (A) along the groove in OPT2 and secure the board with two screws (5) that have been removed in step 1.
Do not directly touch the FAX circuit board (A) terminal.
Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit board, or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board (A).
Direct the label (6) on to the FAX circuit board (A) toward left side and insert the board along the groove.
Installer la carte à circuits FAX.
2.Insérer la carte à circuits FAX (A) le long de la rainure dans l’OPT2 et la fixer à l’aide des deux vis (5) retirées à l’étape 1.
Ne pas toucher directement la borne de la carte à circuits FAX (A).
Tenir les parties inférieure et supérieure de la carte à circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour insérer la carte à circuits FAX (A).
Orienter l'étiquette (6) de la carte à circuits FAX (A) comme illustré et insérer la plaquette le long de la rainure.
Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX.
2.Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax (A) a lo largo de la ranura de OPT2 y asegúrela con los dos tornillos (5) que ha quitado en el paso 1.
No toque directamente el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A).
Sujete las partes superior e inferior de la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX (A).
Oriente la etiqueta (6) en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A) como se indica en la ilustración e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura.
Installieren der FAX-Leiterplatte.
2.FAX-Leiterplatte (A) in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT2 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt1 ausgebauten Schrauben (5) befestigen.
Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX-Platine (A) nicht mit den Fingern.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) so in die Nut einsetzen, dass der Aufkleber (6) wie abgebildet zur Leiterplatte zeigt.
Installare la scheda a circuiti FAX.
2.Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX (A) lungo l’incavo nell’OPT2 e fissare la scheda con le due viti (5) rimosse nell’operazione 1.
Non toccare direttamente il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX (A),
Per inserire il circuito FAX (A), tenere l’estremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX, o la sporgenza della scheda a circuiti FAX.
Orientare l'etichetta (6) sulla scheda a circuiti FAX (A) come indicato nell'illustrazione e inserire la scheda lungo l'incavo.
安装传真电路板
2.沿着 OPT2 的沟槽插入传真电路板 (A) 并用在步骤 1 中拆下的两颗螺钉 (5) 固定电路板。
请勿直接触摸传真电路板 (A) 端子。
按住传真电路板的顶部和底部，或者按住电路板的突出部将传真电路板 (A) 插入。
将传真电路板 (A) 上的标签 (6) 保持图示中的方向，将电路板沿着沟槽方向插入。
FAX 회로기판 장착
2.OPT2 의 홈을 따라 FAX 회로기판 (A) 를 삽입하고 앞 순서 1 에서 제거한 나사 (5) 2 개로 고정합니다 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 의 단자에 직접 닿지 않도록 할 것 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 삽입 시 , 회로기판의 상하 또는 돌출부를 잡을 것 .
FAX 회로기판 (A) 를 부착된 라벨 (6) 그림 표기 방향으로 삽입할 것 .
FAX 基板の取り付け
2.OPT2 の溝に沿って FAX 基板 (A) を挿入し、手順 1 で外したビス (5)2 本で固定する。
FAX 基板 (A) の端子に直接触れないこと。
FAX 基板 (A) の挿入時は基板の上下か突起を持つこと。
FAX 基板 (A) は、貼り付けられているラベル (6) が図に示す方向になるように、 挿入すること。
38
9
B
C C
Seal the terminal. On 120 V models, be sure that it is not attached
3.Wipe the surface of the telephone terminal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal (C). over the top of the approval label (9).
The telephone terminal on the FAX circuit board installed to OPT2 is unavailable (invalid). Seal
the terminal securely to prevent a user from connecting a separate phone.
Fermer hermétiquement la borne. Sur les modèles 120 V, attention à ne pas
3.Nettoyer la surface de la borne de téléphone avec de l’alcool, et apposer le joint de borne (C). installer en recouvrant le haut de l'étiquette
La borne de téléphone de la carte à circuits FAX installée sur l’OPT2 n’est pas utilisable d'approbation (9).
(invalide). Fermer hermétiquement la borne pour empêcher tout utilisateur de connecter un télé-
phone séparé.
Selle el terminal. En los modelos de 120 V, asegúrese de que no
3.Limpie la superficie del terminal de teléfono con alcohol y pegue el sello de terminal (C). se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación (9).
El terminal de teléfono de la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX instalado en el OPT2 no está disponible
(inválido). Selle firmemente el terminal para evitar que un usuario conecte un teléfono por sepa-
rado.
Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse. Bei 120-V-Modellen darauf achten, dass der
3.Die Oberfläche der Telefonanschlussbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und die Verschlusskappe (C) Aufkleber nicht den Genehmigungsaufkleber (9)
anbringen. verdeckt.
Die Telefonanschlussbuchse der in OPT2 installierten FAX-Leiterplatte ist nicht verfügbar (ungül-
tig). Die Anschlussbuchse vollkommen versiegeln, um den Anschluss eines separaten Telefons
zu verhindern.
Sigillare il terminale. Sui modelli da 120 V, assicurarsi che essa non
3.Pulire la superficie del terminale del telefono con alcol e fare aderire la guarnizione terminale (C). venga applicata sopra l’etichetta di approvazi-
Il terminale del telefono sulla scheda a circuiti FAX installata su OPT2 non è disponibile (invalido). one (9).
Sigillare il terminale saldamente per prevenire a un utente di collegare un telefono separato.
安装端子密封 120V 规格在粘贴时注意不要与认可标签 (9) 重
3.用酒精擦拭电话端子表面并粘上端子密封 (C)。 叠。
安装在 OPT2 上的传真电路板的电话端子不可使用 ( 无效 )。为了避免用户错误与其它电话连接，
必须确实粘贴好端子密封。
단자씰의 부착 120V 사양은 허가 라벨 (9) 에 겹치지 않도록 붙
3.TEL 단자주위를 알코올청소하고 단자씰 (C) 을 부착합니다 . 일 것.
OPT2 에 부착한 FAX 기판의 TEL 단자는 사용불가（무효）가 됩니다 . 사용자가 잘못해 외부 전화
를 연결하지 않도록 확실히 부착할 것 .
端子シールの貼り付け 120V 仕様は認可ラベル（9）に重ならないように、
3.TEL 端子周囲をアルコール清掃し、 端子シール (C) を貼り付ける。 貼り付けること。
OPT2 に取り付けた FAX 基板の TEL 端子は使用不可 （無効）となる。
ユーザーが誤って外付け電話
を接続しないよう確実に貼り付けること。
39
B
15
Connect the MFP to the telephone line.
4.Plug the modular connector cable (15) into the line terminal, and then connect the other end to the telephone line.
For 100 V/120 V/Australian or Chinese models, use the supplied modular connector cable (B).
Connecter le MFP à la ligne de téléphone.
4.Brancher le câble du connecteur modulaire (15) à la borne de la ligne, puis connecter l'autre extrémité à la ligne de téléphone.
Pour les modèles 100 V/120 V/Australie ou Chine, utilisez le câble à connecteur modulaire (B) fourni.
Conecte el MFP a la línea telefónica.
4.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (15) en el terminal de línea y, a continuación, conecte el otro extremo a la línea telefónica.
Para los modelos de 100 V/120 V/Australiano o Chino, utilice el cable conector modular (B) suministrado.
Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung.
4.Telefonmodulkabel (15) in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschließen.
Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel (B) für die 100-V/120-V/Australien- oder China-Modelle verwenden.
Collegamento dell’MFP alla linea del telefono.
4.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (15) nel terminale della linea, e quindi collegare l'altro terminale alla linea del telefono.
Per modelli da 100 V/120 V/Australia o Cina, utilizzare il cavo connettore modulare (B) in dotazione.
将 MFP 连接到电话线
4.将模块接插件电缆 (15) 插入电话线端子，然后将另一端与电话线连接。
对于 100V/120V/ 澳大利亚或中国机型，请使用随附的模块接插件电缆 (B)。
전화회선과의 연결
4.모듈러 코드 (15) 를 라인단자에 꽂습니다 . 다른 한 쪽의 플러그는 전화회선과 연결합니다 .
100V/120V/ 오스트레일리아 / 중국사양은 부속 모듈러 코드 (B) 를 사용할 것 .
電話回線との接続
4.モジュラーコード (15) をライン端子に差し込む。 もう片方のプラグは、電話回線へ接続する。
100V/120V/ オーストラリア / 中国仕様は付属のモジュラーコード (B) を使用すること。
40
B
(Initialize the FAX circuit board. 3.If the FAX circuit board has been added to OPT2 (to initialize the FAX
1.Plug the MFP into a power outlet, and turn on the main power. circuit board in OPT2)
2.If the FAX PWBs were installed simultaneously to OPT1 and OPT2 (all Initialize OPT2 by pressing [PORT2], and the Start key in this order in
Fax PWBs are initialized), perform the maintenance mode U600 to ini- the maintenance mode U698 and executing the maintenance mode
tialize the FAX PWBs. U600. If [ALL] is selected in U698, both OPT1 and OPT2 are initialized.
For details, see the service manual.
Initialiser la carte à circuits FAX. 3. Si la carte à circuits FAX a été ajoutée à l’OPT2 (pour initialiser la carte à circuits
1.Brancher le MFP sur une prise d’alimentation et le mettre sous tension. FAX dans l’OPT2)
2.Si les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax ont été installées en même Initialiser l’OPT2 en appuyant sur [PORT2] et la touche Départ dans cet ordre en
temps que OPT1 et OPT2 (toutes les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax mode de maintenance U698, et exécuter le mode de maintenance U600. Si [ALL]
est sélectionné dans U698, l’OPT1 et l’OPT2 sont tous deux initialisés. Pour plus
sont initialisées), exécuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser
de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax.
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX. 3. Si la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX se agregó a OPT2 (para inicializar la tarjeta de
1.Conecte el MFP a un receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor circuitos de FAX en OPT2)
principal. Inicialice el OPT2 presionando [PORT2] y la tecla de Inicio en ese orden en el
2.Si se instalaron FAX PWB simultáneamente a OPT1 y OPT2 (se ini- modo de mantenimiento U698 y ejecutando el modo de mantenimiento U600. Si
se selecciona [ALL] en U698, se inicializan ambos OPT1 y OPT2. Para más det-
cializan todos los FAX PWB), ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600
alles, lea el manual de servicio.
para inicializar los FAX PWB.
Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte. 3. Wenn die FAX-Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugefügt worden ist (um die FAX-Leiter-
1.Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter platte in OPT2 zu in7itialisieren)
einschalten. OPT2 initialisieren. Dazu [PORT2] und die Start-Taste im
2.Falls die FAX-Karten gleichzeitig in OPT1 und OPT2 installiert werden Wartungsmodus U698 in dieser Reihenfolge drücken und den
Wartungsmodus U600 ausführen. Wenn [ALL] in U698 gewählt wird, werden
(alle FAX-Karten werden initialisiert), führen Sie den Wartungsmodus
OPT1 und OPT2 initialisiert. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
U600 aus, um die FAX-Karten zu initialisieren.
Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX. 3. Se la scheda a circuiti è stata aggiunta all’OPT2 (per inzializzare la scheda a cir-
1.Collegare l’MFP ad una presa di corrente e portare l’interruttore princi- cuiti FAX nell’OPT2)
pale su On. Inizializzare OPT2 premendo [PORT2] e il tasto Avvio in questo ordine nel modo
2.Se sono state installate simultaneamente le schede FAX PWB su di manutenzione U698 ed eseguendo il modo di manutenzione U600. Se viene
selezionato [ALL] nel modo U698, entrambi OPT1 e OPT2 sono inizializzati. Per
OPT1 e OPT2 (tutte le schede FAX PWB sono inizializzate), eseguire
ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
il modo manutenzione U600 per inizializzare le schede FAX PWB.
传真电话板的初始化 3.在 OPT2 上增设时
1.将 MFP 的电源插头插入电源插座，打开主电源。 (OPT2 的传真电路板初始化 )
2.当把传真电路板同时安装到 OPT1 和 OPT2 时（全部的传真电路板初始 只进行 OPT2 初始化时，在维修保养模式 U698 状态下，按顺序按下
化），执行维修保养模式 U600，初始化传真电路板。 “PORT2”、开始键，执行维修保养模式 U600。
在 U698 状态下设定 “ALL” 时，会使 OPT1 和 OPT2 均初始化。
有关详信息，请参见维修手册。
FAX 회로기판의 초기화 3. OPT2 에 증설한 경우 (OPT2 의 FAX 기판을 초기화 )
1.MFP 본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 한 메인터넌스모드 U698 에서 「PORT2」, 시작키 순으로 누릅니다 . 메인터넌
다. 스 모드 U600 을 실행하고 FAX 회로기판을 초기화합니다 .
2.OPT1 과 OPT2 에 FAX 회로기판을 동시에 설치한 경우 ( 모든 FAX 회 U698 에서 「ALL」을 설정하면 OPT1 과 OPT2 양쪽을 초기화하기 때문에
주의할 것 .
로기판이 초기화됨 ), 메인터넌스 모드 U600 을 수행하여 FAX 회로기
상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
판을 초기화합니다 .
FAX 基板の初期化 3.OPT2 に増設した場合 (OPT2 の FAX 基板を初期化 )
1.MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、 主電源スイッチを ON メンテナンスモード U698 で 「PORT2」、 スタートキーの順に押す。メンテ
にする。 ナンスモード U600 を実行し、FAX 基板を初期化する。
2.OPT1 と OPT2 に FAX 基板を同時に設置した場合 ( すべての FAX 基板を初 U698 で「ALL」を設定すると OPT1 と OPT2 両方を初期化するので注意す
期化 ) メンテナンスモード U600 を実行し、FAX 基板を初期化する。 ること。 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
41
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR
BANNER GUIDE
B
A
C
2011.12
302K956720-01
1 2 3
B
C
A
4 1 5
2011.12
302K956720-01
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR
PRINTING SYSTEM
A B
C
G
D
For 120V
F H
For 200V
E I
1 2 A 3
E
4 5
6 7
G
8 9
10 11
12 I 13
G
14
I
G
15 Color MFP 30/30, 35/35, 45/45, 55/50
Color MFP 65/65, 75/70
16
NETWORK
17 18
C
NETWORK
NETWORK D
19 20
NETWORK
Microsoft Windows
Quick Setup
3
2
Configuration rapide Configuration or Installable Options
Installazione rapida Configuration ou options d’installation
Configurazione o Opzioni installabili
Installationsübersicht
Install Fiery user software on the client Seite “Konfiguration” / “Installierbare Optionen”
Configuración rápida Configuración u Opciones instalables
computer and configure the client for printing.
Configuração rápida Configuração ou Opções instaláveis
Installez les logiciels utilisateur Fiery sur l’ordinateur Configuratie of Installeerbare opties
Snelle installatie client et configurez ce dernier pour l’impression.
Installare il software utente Fiery sul computer client
1
e configurare il client per la stampa. 1
Installieren Sie die Fiery Anwendersoftware auf dem
Client und richten Sie ihn zum Drucken ein.
• direct Jobs are printed, but not stored.
Contact your authorized service/support center Instale el software del usuario del Fiery en la • hold Jobs are spooled and stored for
to schedule installation of the Fiery hardware. computadora cliente y configure el cliente para later printing.
la impresión. • print Jobs are printed and stored. 2
Hardware installation to be performed by an
authorized service technician only. Do not attempt Instale o software do usuário do Fiery no computador • direct Les tâches sont imprimées mais pas stockées.
the installation yourself. cliente e configure o cliente para imprimir. • hold Les tâches sont spoulées et stockées pour
The technician will connect the Fiery to the copier/ impression ultérieure.
Installeer Fiery-gebruikerssoftware op de • print Les tâches sont imprimées et stockées.
printer and the network, and power on the Fiery. clientcomputer en configureer de client voor
afdrukken. • direct I lavori vengono stampati, ma non memorizzati.
Contactez le S.A.V. ou le centre de support agréé afin • hold I lavori vengono inviati in spool per essere stampati
de planifier l’installation du matériel Fiery. più tardi.
3
L’installation du matériel doit être effectuée uniquement
par un technicien S.A.V. agréé. N’essayez pas de l’installer A • print I lavori vengono stampati e memorizzati.
• Direkt Aufträge drucken, aber nicht speichern.
vous-même.
• Halten Aufträge für spätere Druckausgabe spoolen. If these settings are unavailable, ask your network
Le technicien connectera le Fiery au copieur/à l’imprimante
et au réseau, puis le mettra sous tension.
1 • Drucken Aufträge drucken und speichern. administrator to update the driver with the
• direct Los trabajos se imprimen pero no se guardan. installed options.
Contattare il centro di supporto/assistenza • hold Los trabajos se almacenan en la cola y se guardan Si ces paramètres ne sont pas disponibles, demandez à
autorizzato per programmare l’installazione para imprimirlos posteriormente. votre administrateur système de mettre à jour le pilote pour
dell’hardware Fiery. • print Los trabajos se imprimen y se guardan. inclure les options installées.
L’installazione dell’hardware verrà eseguita esclusivamente Se queste impostazioni non sono disponibili, chiedere
da un tecnico del centro di assistenza autorizzato. • direct As tarefas são impressas, mas não são all’amministratore della rete di aggiornare il driver con le
armazenadas. opzioni installate.
Non provare ad eseguire l’installazione da soli.
• hold As tarefas são passadas pelo spool e armazenadas
Il tecnico provvederà a collegare Fiery alla fotocopiatrice/ Bitten Sie, falls diese Einstellungen nicht verfügbar sind,
stampante e alla rete e quindi ad accendere Fiery. 2
• print
para impressão posteriormente.
As tarefas são impressas e armazenadas. den Netzwerkadministrator, die installierten Optionen im
Originaldruckertreiber hinzuzufügen.
Vereinbaren Sie einen Termin für die Installation der • direct Taken worden afgedrukt, maar niet opgeslagen. Si estos valores no están disponibles, pida a su
Fiery Hardware. • hold Taken worden in de wachtrij geplaatst en administrador de red que actualice el controlador con las
Die Fiery Hardware muss von einem autorisierten opgeslagen om deze later af te drukken. opciones instaladas.
Servicetechniker installiert werden. Installieren Sie die • print Taken worden afgedrukt en opgeslagen. Se essas configurações não estiverem disponíveis, peça
Hardware nicht selbst! Der Techniker verbindet die Fiery ao administrador de rede para atualizar o driver com as
Hardware mit dem Kopierer/Drucker und dem Netzwerk opções instaladas.
und stellt die Betriebsbereitschaft her. Als deze instellingen niet beschikbaar zijn, vraagt u de
netwerkbeheerder het stuurprogramma bij te werken met
Contacte con su centro autorizado de servicio/ de geïnstalleerde opties.
asistencia para planificar la instalación del hardware
del Fiery.
La instalación del hardware será realizada únicamente por
4
un técnico de servicio autorizado. No intente realizar la
instalación personalmente.
El técnico conectará el Fiery a la copiadora/impresora y la
red, y encenderá el Fiery. 3
Entre em contato com a central de atendimento/ Open and print a sample PDF job.
suporte autorizada para agendar a instalação do
hardware Fiery. Ouvrez et imprimez un document PDF en guise
d’échantillon.
A instalação do hardware deve ser executada apenas por um
técnico de manutenção autorizado. Não tente executá-la.
Aprire un file PDF di prova e stamparlo.
O técnico conectará o Fiery à copiadora/impressora e à rede
e ligará o Fiery. B Öffnen Sie ein PDF-Dokument und drucken Sie es.
Neem contact op met uw erkende service-/ Use Point and Print to install the PostScript Abra e imprima un archivo PDF de ejemplo.
onderhoudsdienst om de installatie van de Fiery- printer driver. Abra e imprima uma tarefa PDF de amostra.
hardware te plannen.
Installatie van hardware mag alleen worden uitgevoerd door Utilisez la méthode Pointer-imprimer pour installer le pilote Open een PDF-voorbeeldtaak en druk deze af.
een bevoegde onderhoudstechnicus. Probeer de installatie d’imprimante PostScript.
niet zelf uit te voeren. Usare Point and Print per installare il driver di stampa
De technicus sluit de Fiery aan op de kopieermachine/printer PostScript. A
en het netwerk, en schakelt de Fiery in.
Installieren Sie den PostScript-Druckertreiber 4
per Point-and-Print.
2
Utilice Apuntar e imprimir para instalar el controlador
de impresora PostScript.
Use Apontar e imprimir para instalar o driver de
impressora PostScript.
To obtain the Fiery server name, print the Fiery Installeer het PostScript-printerstuurprogramma
Configuration page. via point-and-print.
You will need the server name to configure client
computers for printing. See the instructions for printing 1
the Configuration page in the Welcome document.
Pour obtenir le nom du serveur Fiery, imprimez la
Print Imprimir
page de configuration Fiery.
Imprimer Imprimir
Vous aurez besoin du nom du serveur pour configurer les
Stampa Afdrukken
ordinateurs clients pour l’impression. Reportez-vous aux
instructions d’impression de la page de configuration dans le Drucken
document Bienvenue.
C
Stampare la pagina di configurazione per sapere il
nome del server Fiery. “\\” + Fiery server name
B
Update the printer driver to add the installed options.
Il nome del server sarà necessario per configurare i computer “\\” + nom du serveur Fiery
client per la stampa. Vedere le istruzioni per la stampa della pagina Effectuez la mise à jour du pilote d’imprimante pour
“\\” + nome del server Fiery ajouter les options installées.
di configurazione nel documento Attività preliminari.
\\ + Fiery Servername 1
Drucken Sie die Fiery Konfigurationsseite; “\\” + nombre del servidor Fiery Aggiornare il driver di stampa per aggiungere le
auf ihr ist der Fiery Servername vermerkt. opzioni installate.
“\\” + nome do servidor Fiery
Sie benötigen den Servernamen zum Einrichten der Druck- “\\” + naam van Fiery-server Aktualisieren Sie den Druckertreiber, damit die
funktionalität auf dem Client-Computer; (die Druckanleitung installierbaren Optionen hinzugefügt werden.
finden Sie im Dokument Einführung und erste Schritte). 2 Actualice el controlador de impresora para agregar
Para obtener el nombre del servidor Fiery, imprima la Double-click print to add the print connection. las opciones instaladas.
página Configuración del Fiery. You can add additional connection types later.
Atualize o driver da impressora para adicionar as
Necesitará el nombre del servidor para configurar las computadoras
cliente para imprimir. Consulte las instrucciones para imprimir la Double-cliquez sur print pour ajouter la connexion opções instaladas.
página Configuración en el documento Bienvenida. d’impression.
Werk het printerstuurprogramma bij om de geïnstalleerde
Vous pourrez ajouter d’autres types de connexion ultérieurement. opties toe te voegen.
Para obter o nome do servidor Fiery, imprima a página
de configuração do Fiery. Fare doppio clic su print per aggiungere il collegamento
Você precisará do nome do servidor para configurar os di stampa. 1
computadores clientes para impressão. Consulte as instruções Sarà possibile aggiungere altri tipi di collegamenti più avanti.
para imprimir a página de configuração no documento Bem-vindo.
Doppelklicken Sie auf eine Druckverbindung. 2
Druk de Fiery-configuratiepagina af om de naam van Weitere Verbindungen sind später ergänzbar.
de Fiery-server te verkrijgen. Haga doble clic en “print” para agregar la conexión
U hebt de naam van de server nodig om clientcomputers te de impresión.
configureren voor afdrukken. Raadpleeg de instructies voor het
Puede agregar otros tipos de conexión más adelante.
afdrukken van de configuratiepagina in het document Welkom. C
Clique duas vezes em print para adicionar a conexão
de impressão.
É possível incluir tipos de conexão adicionais posteriormente.
Dubbelklik op print om de afdrukverbinding toe te voegen.
U kunt later aanvullende verbindingstypen toevoegen.
Part Number: 45096407
Apple Macintosh
3
Clique duas vezes no instalador do .mpkg para qualquer 3
outro utilitário de software que você desejar instalar. B
Dubbelklik op het installatieprogramma (.mpkg) voor
eventuele andere hulpprogramma’s die u wilt installeren.
Install Fiery user software on the client
computer and configure the client for printing.
Installez les logiciels utilisateur Fiery sur l’ordinateur
client et configurez ce dernier pour l’impression.
Installare il software utente Fiery sul computer client
e configurare il client per la stampa.
Installieren Sie die Fiery Anwendersoftware auf dem
Client und richten Sie ihn zum Drucken ein.
B
Instale el software del usuario del Fiery en la
computadora cliente y configure el cliente para Install the printer driver.
la impresión.
Installez le pilote d’imprimante. 4
Instale o software do usuário do Fiery no computador
Installare il driver di stampa. 1
C
cliente e configure o cliente para imprimir.
Installeer Fiery-gebruikerssoftware op de Installieren Sie den Druckertreiber.
clientcomputer en configureer de client Instale el controlador de impresora.
voor afdrukken. 2
Instale o driver da impressora.
Installeer het printerstuurprogramma.
A
1
1
Quit all open applications.
Fermez toutes les applications ouvertes.
Chiudere tutte le applicazioni aperte.
Beenden Sie alle Anwendungsprogramme.
Fiery Features Características del
3 Fonctions Fiery Fiery
Salga de todas las aplicaciones que estén abiertas. Caratteristiche Fiery Recursos do Fiery
Fiery Funktionen Fiery-functies
Saia de todos os aplicativos abertos.
Sluit alle geopende toepassingen af. 5
2 D
2 1
3
2
E
6
3
4
Double-click CWS5.mpkg to start the Command
WorkStation installer.
Double-cliquez sur CWS5.mpkg pour lancer le programme
d’installation de la Command WorkStation.
4
Fare doppio clic su CWS5.mpkg per avviare il programma
di installazione di Command WorkStation.
Congratulations! You have successfully
Doppelklicken Sie zum Installieren der Command
WorkStation Software auf die Datei “CWS5.mpkg”.
installed and set up your Fiery. You can now
begin using the Fiery for all of your network
Haga doble clic en CWS5.mpkg para iniciar el instalador de Update the printer driver to add the installed printing jobs.
Command WorkStation. options by opening and printing a sample
PDF job. For more assistance with the Fiery, contact your
Clique duas vezes em CWS5.mpkg para iniciar o instalador authorized service/support center. For more
da Command WorkStation.
C Effectuez la mise à jour du pilote d’imprimante pour
ajouter les options installées lors de l’ouverture et de
information about Fiery products, visit www.efi.com.
Dubbelklik op CWS5.mpkg om het installatieprogramma
voor Command WorkStation te starten. l’impression d’un échantillon PDF. Félicitations ! Vous avez correctement installé et
Set up the print connection.
Aggiornare il driver di stampa per aggiungere le configuré votre Fiery. Vous pouvez maintenant
Configurez la connexion d’impression. utiliser le Fiery pour toutes vos tâches
opzioni installate aprendo e stampando un file PDF
Configurare il collegamento di stampa. di prova. d’impression réseau.
Pour obtenir une assistance complémentaire concernant le
Richten Sie die Druckverbindung ein. Drucken Sie ein PDF-Dokument, um im Drucker- Fiery, contactez le S.A.V. ou le centre de support agréé.
Configure la conexión de impresión. treiber die Installationsoptionen hinzuzufügen. Pour plus d’informations sur les produits Fiery, rendez-vous
sur www.efi.com.
Configure a conexão de impressão. Actualice el controlador de impresora para agregar
las opciones instaladas. Para ello, abra e imprima un
Complimenti! L’installazione e la configurazione
5 Stel de afdrukverbinding in. trabajo PDF de ejemplo.
di Fiery sono state completate. Ora è possibile
1 Atualize o driver da impressora para adicionar iniziare a usare Fiery per tutti i lavori di stampa
as opções instaladas abrindo e imprimindo uma in rete.
tarefa PDF de amostra. Per avere assistenza per Fiery, contattare il centro di
supporto/assistenza autorizzato. Per ulteriori informazioni
Werk het printerstuurprogramma bij om de
sui prodotti Fiery, visitare il sito www.efi.com.
geïnstalleerde opties toe te voegen door een
PDF-voorbeeldtaak te openen en af te drukken.
Herzlichen Glückwunsch! Ihre Fiery Lösung wurde
erfolgreich installiert und eingerichtet. Sie können
A nun Ihre Dokumente über das Netzwerk drucken.
Wenden Sie sich bei Fragen zu Ihrer Fiery Lösung an
Ihren autorisierten Support- und Servicepartner. Weitere
Informationen über Fiery Produkte finden Sie auf der
System Preferences Website www.efi.com.
Préférences système
Preferenze di Sistema ¡Enhorabuena! Ha instalado y configurado
Systemeinstellungen correctamente su Fiery. Ahora puede empezar
Preferencias del sistema a utilizar el Fiery para todos sus trabajos de
Preferências do sistema impresión en red.
Systeemvoorkeuren Para obtener más asistencia para el Fiery, póngase en
contacto con su centro autorizado de servicio/asistencia.
6 2 Para obtener más información acerca de los productos Fiery,
visite www.efi.com.
Double-click the .mpkg installer for any other
software utility that you want to install.
Parabéns! Você instalou e configurou o Fiery com
Si vous voulez installer un autre utilitaire, double-cliquez sur êxito. Agora você pode começar a usar o Fiery para
le programme d’installation .mpkg correspondant. todas as tarefas de impressão da rede.
Fare doppio clic sul programma di installazione .mpkg per Para obter mais assistência com o Fiery, entre em contato
ogni altro programma di utilità che si desidera installare. com a central de atendimento/suporte autorizada. Para obter
mais informações sobre os produtos Fiery, visite www.efi.com.
Doppelklicken Sie zum Installieren einer anderen
Komponente auf die jeweilige “.mpkg”-Datei. Print
Imprimer Gefeliciteerd! Uw Fiery is geïnstalleerd en
Haga doble clic en el instalador .mpkg de cualquier otra
Stampa
ingesteld. U kunt de Fiery vanaf nu gebruiken voor
utilidad de software que desee instalar. al uw netwerkafdruktaken.
Drucken
Imprimir Neem contact op met uw erkende service-/onderhoudsdienst
voor meer ondersteuning voor de Fiery.
Imprimir
Raadpleeg www.efi.com voor meer informatie over Fiery-
Afdrukken producten.
Copyright 2010 © Electronics for Imaging, Inc.
You might also like
- d-Copia4000MF-5000MF-6000MF - Service ManualNo ratings yetd-Copia4000MF-5000MF-6000MF - Service Manual1,649 pages
- Manual Kyocera FS-1120D-1320D-PF-100ENSMR2No ratings yetManual Kyocera FS-1120D-1320D-PF-100ENSMR2170 pages
- ECOSYS P2235dw-P2040dw SERVICE MANUAL 1No ratings yetECOSYS P2235dw-P2040dw SERVICE MANUAL 173 pages
- B125 Service Manual: Ricoh Group CompaniesNo ratings yetB125 Service Manual: Ricoh Group Companies431 pages
- Xerox Productivity Plus For The Docucolor 6060 Service Manual100% (1)Xerox Productivity Plus For The Docucolor 6060 Service Manual186 pages
- ECOSYS M2030dn M2530dn M2035dn M2535dn SM UK60% (5)ECOSYS M2030dn M2530dn M2035dn M2535dn SM UK273 pages
- Fs 1030mfp 1035mfp 1130mfp 1135mfp SM Uk (1) Service ManualNo ratings yetFs 1030mfp 1035mfp 1130mfp 1135mfp SM Uk (1) Service Manual258 pages
- imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9200 PRO C7200 Series SM Rev6 101716 PDFNo ratings yetimageRUNNER ADVANCE C9200 PRO C7200 Series SM Rev6 101716 PDF1,864 pages
- Pantum M5000-6000 Series Maintain Manual - EN100% (1)Pantum M5000-6000 Series Maintain Manual - EN114 pages
- Subject: Bulletin Index 09/13/21: Technical Bulletin Taskalfa 4004I/5004I/6004I/7004INo ratings yetSubject: Bulletin Index 09/13/21: Technical Bulletin Taskalfa 4004I/5004I/6004I/7004I43 pages
- 5PB E300 ISG C60 Integrated Fiery Xerox 45155260-10% (1)5PB E300 ISG C60 Integrated Fiery Xerox 45155260-1103 pages
- BizHub C452, C552, C652 and Options Theory of OperationNo ratings yetBizHub C452, C552, C652 and Options Theory of Operation580 pages
- Kyocera TASKalfa 420i 520i Service Manual 6683f45080581No ratings yetKyocera TASKalfa 420i 520i Service Manual 6683f45080581341 pages
- SM P-c3060mfp P-c3065mfp P-C3560imfp P-C3565imfp Eng Rev10No ratings yetSM P-c3060mfp P-c3065mfp P-C3560imfp P-C3565imfp Eng Rev10720 pages
- PL 4056i 5056i 6056i 2506ci 3206ci 4006ci 5006ci 6006ci ENG Rev10D50% (2)PL 4056i 5056i 6056i 2506ci 3206ci 4006ci 5006ci 6006ci ENG Rev10D395 pages
- MobileArtDaRt Evo STD Maintenance Proc - M503-E398CNo ratings yetMobileArtDaRt Evo STD Maintenance Proc - M503-E398C34 pages
- IS 16227 (Part 2) : 2016 IEC 61869-2: 2012No ratings yetIS 16227 (Part 2) : 2016 IEC 61869-2: 20121 page
- Core Install Electrical Protective Devices For Distribution Power Lighting Auxiliary Lightning Protection and Grounding Systems - Compress100% (1)Core Install Electrical Protective Devices For Distribution Power Lighting Auxiliary Lightning Protection and Grounding Systems - Compress43 pages
- Cathodic Protection Systems For Onshore and Shore Approach Pipelines100% (1)Cathodic Protection Systems For Onshore and Shore Approach Pipelines31 pages
- Gearless Xaf: Installation and MaintenanceNo ratings yetGearless Xaf: Installation and Maintenance44 pages
- Aa - Spec - 538011 Medium Voltage Induction MotorsNo ratings yetAa - Spec - 538011 Medium Voltage Induction Motors32 pages
- GF-DGP-PE17009-141-Q-VD-9509 - 0 RTU SCADA SAT Proc Code 1No ratings yetGF-DGP-PE17009-141-Q-VD-9509 - 0 RTU SCADA SAT Proc Code 141 pages
- 2302 Medium Voltage Drive Cables Paper HIGHRESNo ratings yet2302 Medium Voltage Drive Cables Paper HIGHRES4 pages
- VT240S Instruction Manual Reclaim Drive PDF100% (1)VT240S Instruction Manual Reclaim Drive PDF443 pages
- Lecture 12 Electrical Substation & ProtectionNo ratings yetLecture 12 Electrical Substation & Protection12 pages